A Grammar of the Spanish Language: With Practical Exercises ...

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at |http : //books . google . com/

r- V ^ V ♦ '^'^ . Hr (o O

f^arbartj College iilirarg

FROM

the estate of
Professor E. W. GURNEY

(Class of 185a)

Received 3 May, 1899

994^^

>l

INIIil

3 2044 102 869 104

VII V 1^01*

♦ %1

A

GRAMMAR

OF THE

SPANISH LANGUAGE,

PRACTICAL EXERCISES.

Gootainiiicr a List of the Abbreriations which are frequently fiDond fai wrttiiif
and books} A Treatise on Pronunciation and Alterations in Orthography,
founded upon the latest Rules established by the Academy of Madrid j Com-
paratiye Rules of the Spanish and Enelish Language : A general Scheme of
the Terminations of Regular Verbs ; An alphabetical List of the Irregular
Verbs, coi)|ugated in thehr order } A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositionf
in Spanish j Lisu of the Names of diilerent Countries, principal Cities and
Christian Names.

Site eSrtonti IPart

Containing a Collection of Exercises interlined } a Vocabulary ; Familiar
Phrases and Dialogues ; and a Treatise on Spanish Versification.

BY M. K)SSE.

Second American fiom the latett Parit ^ditien.

BETISEO, INPBOTBD, AHD ADAPTID TO TBE SaOLIBH LARODASE,

BY F. SALES,

hutrtteUr of French and Spanish at Harvard Univernty^ CamJhridgt.
PEU DE PREC1PTX8, ET BEAVGOUP D£ PRATK^OE.

FIRST PART.

BosTOir :

MCNROE AND FRANCIS, 128 WASHINGTON-STREET,

OORVER OF WATER-STREET.
1825.

^«K-o-^"T "J. \ V ^ . V5>-T H^ O

W. u-l:_-.

9I8TBICT or XASBACaVSBTTB, TO WIT :

Dittriet CUrVs Office^

BE it remembered, that oa the twenty-seventh day of Januanrf A. D. 1825, axid
in the forty-ninth year of the Indeperdence of the United States of America,
MUNROE AND FRANCIS, of the said District, have deposited in this office the
title of a book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietors, in the words following,
to wit :

'' A GRAMMAR of the SPANISH LANGUAGE,' with Practical EXERCISES.
The First Part containing a list of the Abbreviations which are frequently found in
writing *, A Treatise on pronunciation and alterations in Orthography founded upon
the latest rules established by the Academy of Madrid ; Comparative rules of the
Spanish and EngHsh Languages ; A general scheme of the terminations of Regular
Verbs } An Alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conjugated in their order -, A
Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions In Spanish ; Lists of the names of differ-
ent Countriesymneipal Cities, and Gkvistian Kamei. The Second Part eontaining
a Collection otExercises interlined \ A Vocabulary *, Familiar Phrases and Dia-
logues ; and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. By M. JOSSE. Second Ameri-
can from the latest Paris edition. Revised, Improved, and adapted to the English
Language, by F. SALES, ImtmeUsK of Frenckand Spanish at Harvard University,
Cambridge."

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, " An
act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and
Irooks, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times tilierein men-
tioned :" and also to an act, entitled, *^ An act supplementary to an act, entitled
an act for the encouragement of learning, by secunne the copies of maps, charts,
and books, to the authors and proprietors of such cofnes during the times therein
mentioned} and extending the benefits thereof to the acta of deaigoiiier engmving
and etching, historical and other prints.*^

JO^N W. IM>VIS, CMc •/ «Ae JHttria of MassaehutetU^

I.OV£RS OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE
iir TB«

UNITED STATES OF AMERICA,

THIS SXGOVD SDITIOV,

greatly improved and enlarged^

18

RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED,

BT
THEIB OBKDIENT SEKVANT,

aroncB.

Grateful for the approbation that our labours have met
with in the rapid diffusion of a large edition of this Grammar,
and encouraged by the favourable judgment passed on the
theoretical and practical method observed in this elementary
work, by the most distinguished philologists and eminent
scholars in our country ; we now present to the American
nation a second edition carefully revised, considerably alter-
ed, and improved throughout ; particularly in the arrange-
ment of the Conjugation of the irregularVerbs ; in giving the
English signification of the Table of Prepositions published
by the Royal Academy ; in prefixing an Article to every
word in the Vocabulary to denote its gender ; and in assim-
ilating as far as possible the English phraseology to th%
Spanish, in the Familiar Phrases and Dialogues.

We have enlarged this new edition by the addition of in-
teresting Extracts from some of the best Spanish Writers ;
with specimens of critical, familiar, and. commercial Letters ;
Mercantile Documents ; a Treatise on Spanish Versification,
translated from the latest Paris edition of Jesse's Grammar,
and a copious Table of Contents ; the whole corrected in
conformity to the most recent decisions on orthography of the
Spanish Academy.

Our earnest purpose having been to render this publication
extensively useful and acceptable to all classes and ages
of learners, the public may rest assured that no pains have
been spared to attain so desirable an object.

Bostouy May^ 1825.

ADVERTISEMENT

TO THE

FIRST EDlTIOrV.

From the first appearance in this metropolis of Josse's
Grammar, a desire has been entertained of adapting it to the
English language; but the little encouragement hitherto
promised, in the United States, to an undertaking of this kind,
has delayed its execution.

This system however has been used, and recommended to
such learners of the Spanish Language as were well acquaint-
ed with the French, and we have always had the satisfaction
to find them well pleased with it, comraoply expressing their
regret, that it had not yet been adapted to the English lan-
guage.

The recognition of the North and South American Sov-
ereignties by our Government, has determined us to make
the attempt. This glorious act on the part of our nation
opens such a boundless field for scientific, political and com-
mercial advantages to the rising generation, that we could not
deny ourselves the gratification of aiding the generous pur-
pose by presenting a keyy which will, it is hoped, open an
easy way to the attainment of knowledge, honours, and
wealth.

The English and Spanish Grammars, which we have
hitherto used, are so irregular and incorrect, that it has re-
quired the utmost patience and perseverance of both teach-
er and pupil to wade through them. To this should be add-
ed the enormous price at which they are imported and sold,
tending to prevent many a studious youth from acquiring a
language, not only noble and beautiful, but spoken in so
many regions of the earth, that the benign rays of the star
of day are perennially smiling upon and fertilizing some one
of them.

This work of adaptation and improvement has been com-
menced and finished, at different intervals, in the course of
the last season, as our regular occupations would permit.
We have endeavoured to perform our task faithfully ; should

ADVSRTISEMBNT.

our labour meet with approbation, we shall be rewarded ;
should a contrary fate await it, we shall console ourselves
with the reflection that our motive was good. In the mean
time, it is requested that all defects which shall be discovered
be made known, and any improvements suggested which may
occur ; so that this grammar in future editions may be ren-
dered as perfect as possible.

We have thought proper, in order to render this' work
complete, and save an additional expense, to insert the Vo-
cabulary and Dialogues of Fernandez at the end of the sec^
ond part, altering the orthography according to the latest
rules of the Spanish Academy. The object of collections of
this kind is to teach the most usual words and phrases in
familiar conversations ; a sure method, after passing carefully
through the Grammar and Exercises, of learning to speak a
foreign language with propriety.

TRANSLATION OF THE PREFACE

TO THE
PARIS EDITION OF 1818.

The Spanish Grammars, heretofore published for the
French people, do not seem to have attained the end intended
by their authors. Several of these productions have become
in some manner obsolete, since the Royal Academy has given
dear and precise rules for the CastiUian Language, which are
at present generally adopted. The more modern grammars,
on the contrary, seem to be nothing more than the transla-
tion of the Grammar of the Spanish Academy. In compos-
ing them it has been too much forgotten that they are inten-
ded for the use of Frenchmen.

A grammar published in London in 1799 by Josse, Mas»
ter of Languages, reprinted in the same city in 1804 and
1810, is distant alike from both these extremes, and has ap-
peared to us to unite method with clearness in the exposition
of the principles and rules compared with the. French lan-
guage. The author has enriched his work with a selection of
interlined Exercises accompanied with notes and references
to the principal rules, which may. enable beginners, from the
outset, to join practice to the study of precepts ; a method of
rendering the student familiar with the construction and diffi-
culties of a foreign language whose utility has been fully
demonstrated. This advantage alona must ensure to the
Grammar of Josse a preference over those which have pre-
ceded it.

Such is the Grammar now offered to the public. By ex-
tending the knowledge of it in France, we deserve the grati-
tude of the lovers of the Spanish Language, the copiousness,
elegance and grandeur of which are too generally acknowl-
edged, to make it necessary for us to demonstrate its superior-
ity over the greater part of European Languages.

8

ABBREVIATIONS.

We observe however that, while we have conformed to
the plan o( the author, and have adopted his work, we have
made numerous corrections, suppressed useless repetitions^
and made important additions on the subject of Participles,
Prepositions, the Accent, &c. A few rules which had
been omitted have been supplied, others have been mod-
ified, and several parts have been elucidated. Finally,
the style has been carefully revised, and often rendered
more concise. ^

G. HAMONIERE.

COMMON SPANISH ABBREVIATIONS.

A.C.

Ano Cristiano,

in the year of Christ.

A. a.'

Arroba, or arrobas,

twenty-five pounds.

As.

Anos

years.

A. A.

Autores,

authors.

A. V. E.

A' V.« Fs.«^,

toY.E.

Adni.<w

Administrador,

administrator.

Ag.-

Agosto,

August.

Am.

Amigo,

friend.

An.to

Antonio,

•Anthony.

Ang.o

Angosto,

narrow.

App.coApp.

» Apostolico, ca,

apostoUeah

Art.

Artlculo

article.

Arzbpo.

Arzobbpo,

archbishop.

At.«>
B.

Atento,
Beato,

respectful,
blessed.

b. (in quoting) Vuelta,

turn over.

B.'

Bachiller,

bachelor.

B.L.M.

Beso 6 besa las manos,

I kiss or he kisses the
hands. [feet

B.L.P.

Beso 6 besa los pies,

I kiss or he kisses the

B mo p.e

Beatisimo Padre,

most blessed father.

C. A. R.

Cat.® Ap.«o Rom.o

Cath. Apost. Rom.

C. M. B.

Cuyas manos beso.

whose hands I kiss.

ABBBBVIATIONS

y

C. p. B.

Cuyos pies beso,

whose feet I kiss.

Cam.a

Cdmara,

chrtmber.

Cap.

Capitulo,

chapter.

H:ap-»

Capitan,

captain.

Capp.»

Capellao,

chaplain.

Col.

Columna,

column.

Comia.

Comisario,

commissary.

Comp.*

Compania,

company.

Cons.o

Consejo,

council.

Conv.te

Cooveniente;

convenient.

Corr.*«

Corriente,

current.

C.^o

Cuando,

tohen.

C.to C.ta

Cuanto^ ta,

how much.

D.orD»orD

aDon, Dona,

mister, mistress.

D.D.

Doctores,

doctors.

D.' or D.or

Doctor,

doctor.

D.»

Dios,

God.

• D.bo dha.

Dicho, dicha,

said J ditto.

Dro.

Derecho,

right or duty.

Die* 10."

Dicierabre,

December.

Dom-o

Domingo,

Sunday.

Ecc» Ecc.»

Eclesiistico,

ecclesiastic.

Eiim.-,val€

i Enmeiidauo,

amended, valid.

En.o

Enero,

January. ,

E8.«»o Es."*

Escelentfsimo, ma,

most excellent.

Es.no p.co

Escribano publico,

NotJf Public.

Fho,fha,

Fecho, fecha.

dated.

Feb.o

Febrero,

February.

Fol.

Folio,

folio.

F.'

Fray, Ftey,

brother of certain relig-

Fran.«>

Francisco,

Francis, [ious orders.

Frnz.

Fernandez,

Fernandez.

Goe. or gde

. Guarde,

save.

Gra.

Gracia,

grace.

Gen,» or gral

. General,

general.

Id.

Idem.

ditto.

Igla.

Iglesia,

church.

D.«

llustre.

illustrious.

ii.™* n."**

Ilu»trisimo,ma,

most illustriou^.

Inq.©*"

Inquisidor,

inquisitor.

Intend.^

Intendente,

intendant.

, Jhs.
Jph.

Jesus,

Jesus*

Josef, Jose,

Joseph,

10

ABBREVIATIONS.

Jn.

Lib.

Lib.*

Lin.

Lic.do

M. P. S.

M.«

M.«'

M.» a.»

Mag.d

Man.

May.

Mig.i

Mntro.

Mrd.

Mrn.

Mras.

Mrnz.

Mro.

Mrs.

Ms.

MS.

MSS.

N. C. M.

N.S.

N.S.*

Nro. nra.

Nov.« 9.rc

Obpo.

Oct.™ 8.W

On. onz.

Ord.n ord."

P. D.

P.^

P.«

P.»

P.'

P.-

P.*»

P.te
p.to

Pag.

Pag.to

Juan,

Libro,

Libras,

Linea,

Licenciado,

Muy poderoso Seiior

Madre,

Mayor,

Mucbos anos,

Magestad,

Manuel,

Mayordomo,

Migdel,

Ministro,

Merced,

Martin,

Muestras,

Martinez,

Maestro,

Maravedis,

Muchos,

Manuscrito,

Manuscritos,

Nro. Cat.o Monarca,

Nuestro Senor,

Nuestra Senora,

Nuestro, nuestra,

Novienibre,

Obispo,

Octubre,

Onza, onzas,

Orden, ordenes,

Posdata,

Para,

Padre,

Pedro,

Por,

Pies, pesos,

Plata,

Parte,

Puerto,

Pigina,

Pagamento^

John,
book.

Hne.
licentiate,

most powerful Lord,
mother,
elder y mtifor.
many years.
Majesty.
ManueL
Steward.
Michael,
minister,
favour , worship.
Martin,
patterns.
Martinez,
master^
maravedis,
many,
manuscript,
manuscripts,
our Cath. Mon.
our Lord,
our Lady^
our.

November,
Bishop.
October,

ounce^ doubloons,
order y orders.
Postscript,
for.
father.
Peter.

for, per, by.
feety dollars,
silver or plate,
part,
port,
page,
payment.

ABKBEVIATIONS.

U

PL

Pima,

troweL

Pror.

Procurador,

ationuy.

Publ.o

Publico,

public*

Prov.o'

Provisor,

provuor.

Pral.

PnncipaJ,

principal.

p.mo p.do

Proximo pasado, '

lastpaai.

Q. or q.«

Que,

thai.

Q.-

Quien,

who.

Q. S. M. B.

Quien sos manos besa,

jr.K.Y.H.

R^. RM V.o» .Real, reales velion.

recdj realiy sihtrcoin.

R««

Reverendisimo,

most reverend.

R.do K.da

Reverendo, reverenda,

reverend.

P.M.Fr.

Padre maestro fray,

reverend father and

RM

Recibl,

1 received. [roaster.

Ree.<»

Recibo,

receipt.

Resp.

Respoesta,

answer.

S.

San 6 Santo,

saint.

s.**»s.«*

Santo, Santa,

holy.

S. M.

Su magestad,

his majesty.

S/or S.«r S.«* Senor, Senora,

Sir ^ Madam.

S.S.d

Su Saatidad,

his Holiness.

SS. S.««

Senores,

gefUlemeUf Messrs.

S.S.S.

Su SBgaro servidor,

your faithful servant

Seb.»

Sebastian,

Sebastian.

Sep«orr.*«* Setiembre,

September.

S^ia Secreta Secretaria,

secretary's office.

S o SecreLo

Secretario^

secretary.

Ser.n» or «»

Serenisimo, ma.

most serene.

Serv.o

Servicio,

service.

Serv/

Servidor,

servant.

Sigte

Siguiente,

following.

SS.««>

Santisimo,

most holy. \ment.

SS.mo

Santisimo (el sacramento) the hostj the holy sttcror

SS."- P.«

Santisimo padre,

most holy Father,

SS.««>

Escribano,

notary J scrivener.

S.S p.p.

Santos padres.

holy fathers.

Sup.~

Suplica,

entreaty y request.

Sup.««

Suplicante,

petitioner.

Supcr.te

Superintendente,

superintendant.

Ten.te

Teniente,

lieutenant.

Tesor.o

Tesorero,

treasurer.

Tom.

Tomo,

volume.

Tpo.

Tiempo,

time.

12

ABBREVIATIONS.

Tral.

Tribunal,

tribunal.

V. M.

Vuestra Magestad,

your Majesty.

Ulto

Uitimo,

last.

V. v.«

Venerable,

venerable.

V.A.

Vuestra Alteza,

your highness*

V.B.d

Vuestra Beatitud,

your beatitude.

V.I.

Vuestra U."»,

your grace.

V. E orV. Ex. Vuecelencia,

your excellency.

V.G.

Verbi gracia,

for example.

Vm.Vmd.V. Vucstra merced, or us-

youy your worship,

Vd.*

tedi

your favour.

V.P.

Vuestra Patemidad,

your paternity.

V.R*.

Vuestra Reverencia,

your reverence.

v.s.

V.» Senoria or usia,

your lordship f honour.

V. S. [.

Vuesenoria Dustrisima^

, your most illustrious
reverence.

V.S.d

Vuestra Santidad,

your holiness.

V.OB

Real vellon,

reai ofbuUion, coin.

Vol.

Volumen,

volume.

V. S. G.

Vuelva si gusta,

please turn over.

Vro. vra.

Vuestro, vuestra,

your.

X.°«>

Diezmo,

tenth and tithe.

Xp.to

Cristo,

Christ.

Xpt.no

Cristiano,

Christian.

Xptobal,

Cristobal,

Christopher.

* An « is added to these abbreviatioos when more than one person
i» addressed.

SPANISH GRAMMAR.

INTRODUCTION.

Grammab is the art of speaking and writing correctly.

Speaking correctly is to speak accordioff to establiflfaod
rules, as regards botii the pronunciation of letters, syllables
and words, and the arrangement and combination of tkese
words among themselves.

Writing correctly is to write in conformity to the rules
and usage adopted by the best writers.

We shall first consider words as sounds, show the letters
that form them, and succinctly give the rules most proper to
fix their pronunciation.

Considering them afterwards as signs of our thoughts, we
4hall examine their nature, and their accidental variations,
the order they observe between themselves, and the rules
of their union.

Most grammarians treat separately upon the rules of
syntax. It has appeared to us more methodical, precise
and simple, to place these rules in the chapters relating to
each kind of words. From this it follows, however, that
the examples we give for the understandinff of the rules
sometimes precede the knowledge, which they suppose of
certain parts of speech. But those examples are always
accompanied by the translation ; which greatly diminishes
a slight inconvenience, which a second reading of the
grammar will remove, and which is abundantly compensa-
ted by the advantage of avoiding frequent repetitions and
references, a multiplicity of which fatigues and discourages
beginners.

14 PBONUI^CIATION.

CHAPTER I.

OF WORDS CONSIDERED AS SOUNDS.

Words, considered as sounds, are formed of letters and
syllables. The only syllables that require explanation are
gucy gut ; que J qui ; we shall speak of them at the letter v,
in which all the difficulty lies.

The Spanish lan^age reckons twenty-eight letters. The
following is the order and particular denomination of these
letters :

Alphabet a, b, c, ch, d, e, fi,

Dtnominatum ah, bay, thay,* chay, 4ay, a, i-fay,

Alphabet g,t h, i, j,t * k, 1,

Ihfimninaiion hay,t it-chay, e, h6uh,t kah, i-lay^

Alphabet U^ ™7 ^> "4 ^i

Denomination i-lee-ay, &-inay, i-oay, i-nee-ay, o,

Alphabet p, q, r, s, t, u,

Denomination pay, koo, air-ray, d-say, tay, oo.

Alphabet v, x, y, z,*

Denomination ^oy, i-kist, e-gre«-a-gah, thay-tah.

The letters are all of the feminine gender.

The Spanish language has six vowels, which are a, «,
», o, «, y. They are called vowels, because they have a
perfect sound of themselves, without being joined to other
letters.

The other letters are consonants ^ they are thus called,
because they cannot form a perfect sound without the a^
sistance of vowels.

* Pronouac«d as tha in the Eaglish word tkane.

t g and j are ^ttural, and their pronunciation can be learned
only from a master ; the English combination under them conveys
the nearest sound possible.

X U and A are pronounced as the Hquid / and gn in French ; as,
in treille, ▼ioe-arbour ; rigner, to reign ; ave/tona,filbert ; guadana,
Sithe. The t-ivo last are Spanish examples.

PRONUNCIATION. 1 ^

OF THS PBONUNCIATION OF VOWELS.

A. — This letter is pronounced as ah in English. £y.
jimoTy to love ; albay dawn.

£. — This letter is pronounced as a in the alphabet in
English. Ex. EcUp^e^ eclipse.

Eocceptions. Before r, in the same syllable, e is pro-
nounced as in the English words, ccwe^ snare. - Ex. ver, to
see ; verdaderoy true. On the contrary, in verisimily
probable, it is close, because e, in this last word, forms a
part of the first syllable, and r begins the second.

I. — This vowel is pronounced as c in English, except
when it is marked with the acute accent, when it is long,
and pronounced like ee in English, as in the words, todor
vioy yet ; origeny origin ; 8ilc3my syllable.

O. — ^The o is generally pronounced as m English ; it is^
however, necessary to observe, that it is sometimes open,
sometimes close, and sometimes long. It is open, 1st, in
words of one syllable, when it is not immediately followed
by another voweL Ex. Lo, the, it ; no, no, not ; vo9,
you. 2d. At the end of words whea it is accented $ for
example, iu the third person of the singular of the preterite
definite of regular and several irregular verbs. Ex. JmS,
he loved ; temid, he feared ; sttbid, he went up. And this
o must necessarily be distinguished by the pronunciation
and the accent in the first conjugation, so as not to con-
found the first person of the present of the indicative with
the third of the preterite definite. It is long, whenever it
b immediately followed by another vowel, as in voy, I go ;
Aoy, to-day ; doy, I give. In other cases it is close.

U. — U is pronounced oo. We except from this rule the
syllables que, qui, gue, ffui, in which the u is not sounded.

Sometimes in the diphthong, gue, gui, the u preserves its
sound of oOf as in arguir, to argue ; aguero, omen. Not
to leave any doubt in this respect, the Spanish Academy
writes the u with two dots whenever it must be pronoun-
ced oo, so that it is very easy for any stranger to see, at the
first glance, the difference of the pronunciation between
guerraf war ; and ver^uenza, shame 5 seguir, to follow 5
and arguir, to are:up.

its

PROMUKCUTIOH.

Y. — This letter is sometimes a vowel and sometimes «
consonant. It is a vowel when it is preceded by another
vowel, making with it a diphthong, as in the words ley^
law ; Rey, King. It is also a vowel, when it is a conjunc-
tive particle. Ex. Pan y aguOy bread and water. In al-
most every other case it is a consonant, as in Boya^ petti-
coat ; yerrOf error, &c. The ^ is no longer joined to con-

sonants to b^in a syllable
and not yzguierdo.

we must write izquierdo^ left,

OF DIPHTHONGS.

4 diphthong is the nnion of two vowels expressing a
double sound, and pronounced by a single emission of the
voice ; these are sixteen in number :

Of, or ay

ddhais^ you gave ;

hayj there is, there are.

au

pauMy pause $

cau8aj

cause.

et, or ey

veis, you see ;
linea^ hne ;

feyi

law.

$a

B^reasy

B(Hreas»

to

tirgineOf virginal ;

CMttmeoj

cutaneouSi

eu

deudaj debt ;

deudOf

kinsman.

in
9e

gracia^ grace ;
cielOf heaven ;

hdcia,
cieno^

towards-
mud.

io

predOf price ;

necioj

fool.

iu

ciudad, city ;

viudoy

widower.

06

Mroef hero ;

aloe,

aloes.

oij or f>y

90U9 you are ;

»oy,

I go.

ua

fraguaf forge ;

t^uay

water.

me

duenoj master ;

wenOf

dream.

uiy or uy

nndOf noise ;

muyy

very.

uo

arduoy arduous.

nnUuOj

mutual.

N.B.

When in these combinations the

t and u are ac-

cented, as

in brioj efectda^ each vowel forms a distinct

syllable.

The TRIPRTHONOS are four

;

iai

preciaU^ you

value.

ieis

vadeisy you may empty.

uai

santiguaisj you

bless.

ueij uey

averigueUj you may search ; ftticy, oj^.

mONUNCIATION. ^^

OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS.

B. — JB, in the beginning of a word, is always pronounced
«us in English. (See Obs. page 20.)

C. — C has the sound of tk in English, as in the word
thancy before e and i ; and the sound of A:, before a, o, u.
Formerly the c with the cedilla was used, as in ^apato^
shoe ; ^utanoj such a one ; but it is no longer used ; and
the 2 has been substituted in its place : thus we now write,
zapato, zutano.

Ch. — These two letters are pronounced as in English in
the word cheek ; as, chico^ small ; chocolate^ chocolate.
In words derived from the ancient languages, it sounds like
k ; as, Ch^ribdis, Melchisedech. (See Obs. page 20.)

D. — D is pronounced, in the beginning of a word, as in
English ; but when the d is between two vowels, it is as
soft as the th in the words though y the ; Ex. Dado^ a dye ;
dedoy finger.

F- — F is pronounced as in English.

G. — G is pronounced as in English before a, o, tr. It is
guttural before e, t. Ex. tnuger, woman ; ehgir, to elect
Before » it has the Latin pronunciation. Ex. di^no,
worthy.

H. — The H is but lightly aspirated before ue. Ex. hievo^
egg ; huesoj bone. The Academy suppresses it after the
^, and uses/ instead of ph. Ex. Filosofia, teairOy philoso-
phy, theatre ; Filadelfia, Philadelphia.

The letter h has been retained in- many words, though
not pronounced ; and in several it has taken the place of
the letter/, formerly used. Ex. Jijo, son ; facer, to do ;
fermosura, beauty, are now written, hijo, hacer, hermosura,

J. — J is pronounced guttural bJpfore all the vowels. It is
found before e and t only in the words Jesus, .Jerusalen,
JeremiaSf and in the diminutives and derivatives of the
nouns that terminate in ja or Jo ; as, paja, pajita ; vicjo,
viejecito ; straw, little straw ; old man, little old man.

18 FBONUNCIATION.

K. — The X is admitted only in foreign words, and is pro-
nounced as in English.

L. — This letter is pronounced as in English.

LLf-— Whei^ U occurs in a word, it is Uquid, and pro-
nounced as in the words ieragUo and WiUiamf in English.
Ex. UoffOj wound ; UenOf fdl ; caballoy horse ; Uegcwj to
arrive.

M. — M anil N are pronounced as in English.

N.-^N havii^ this mark (^) which the Spaniards call n
with HldtyhaB the same sound as n in omon, mtntoiiy &c.
Ex. Senor, Sir ; nmez, childhood ; ensenary to teach.

P and Q— are pronounced as in English.

R. — R preserves in Spanish its natural pronunciation.
Ex. razonj reason ; rtco, rich : and when it is double, both
letters must be distinctly heard. Ex. carroj cart ; carrera,
career ; xurra^ flogging.

S. — S is always pronounced hard, like «t, even between
two vowels. Ex. sabioy wise ; sebo^ tallow ; famo90y fa-
mous ; espo90y husband ; aosiego^ tranquillity.

T. — T never loses the sound it has in the alphabet, and
IS always hard.

y. — The Spaniards often confound the sound of this let-
ter with that of b ; but the Academy disapproves of it,
and recommends that it should be pronounced as the Eng-
lish. Ex. raktttiaj valour ; w2t>, veil ; m/, vile.

X. — X is pronounced like « when followed by a conso-
nant, and it is not sounded when foUowed by c. Ex. Ea^
trangerOy excepto, &c. It is pronounced like ks when it is
found between two vowels ; 99, examinar, eocisHr, sexo. In
a few words ending in x, it is somewhat guttural. Ex.
Reloxj* watch ; 6ox, box-tree ; carcaxy quiver. (See Obs.
page 20.)

The X is not now used as a guttural lett^ ; the j is
uied in its place before the vowels a, 0, u, and the g before
e and t.

* J^ow written rtloj^ &c.

vwmmciAttoif. 19

Z. — ^The Z is only used now before a, o^ u, and is pro-
nounced like the c before e and f . £x* zapato, shoe ;
zorray fox ; snrmo, juice.

Observations.

1st The Spanish Academy, conforming to the pronun-
ination, has suppressed double consonants, when one alone
is pronounced. In the Spanish books, printed within a few
years, the douUe letters ssyffj 66, &c. are no longer found,
and cc, nn^ rr, only when both consonants are sounded ;
as in the words ctccessoy ennoblecery harro. Double / is to
be considered only as die sign 6£ the liquid letter ^ and not
as a double consonant.

2d. But as Spanish books less modem have not follow-
ed fixed rules, as respects not only doubling the consonants,
but also the orthogi^pky, when the pronunciation does not
indicate it in an evMJent manner, we inform beginners^ 1st.
that they ought to have recourse to the latest Dictionaries,
because their authors have generally adopted the orthogra-
phy of the Spanish Academy ; 2d. that, in consulting these
Dictionaries, the scholar should remember, that, if he does
not find &e word at tiie first search, it is because its or-
thography has varied, and* because the Spanish writers have
often confounded, and do sometimes stilT confound die let-
ters h and v y s and e ;, c and cA, and sometimes q ; c and
q m the sy^ibles qua^ que qui / c and z ; / and A, in the
begiiHiing of a word ; j and ^, in the syMables je and Ji*
Some writers use the^ entirely for the guttural sound, and
never the g nor x ; but we follow the decisions of the
Academy and not the ^tms of every schemer. X, having
had tUl lately the guttural sound, was confounded with g^
before e, », and with thej, which is always guttural before
all vowels. Instead of looking in the Dictionary for alve»
drioy ftrittoy lexosj ^uanda^ zelo^ cMmiay &c. he should
look for ulksdrio, kerida^ /e/os, euawdo^ ce/b> fuimta, Sic*

20

PBONUNCIATION.

yrtkogrimk
madelftke Royal Acad-
«my of Madrid^ and now
generally adopted hy
Spaniik tm "

ba,* be, bi,
ca,

ce, ci,
chat,che,Ghi, <
da, de, di,
fa, fe, fi,

ha, hej hi^

ka, kr, ki,
la, le, li,
Ila, lie. Hi,

bo, bu.

ma, me, mi.

mo

mu.

CO, CO,

na, ne, ni.

no,

nu,

Aa, ne, ni.

fto.

ftu,

cho,cbu.

pa, pe, pi,

po.

pu,

do, du,

qua.

quo

t

fo, fil.

que, qui

1

&o, gu,

que,qui

r

ra,§re, ri.

ro.

ni.

rra, rre, rn.

rro,

mi.

sa,. «e, si.

so,

sa,

ho, hu.

ta, te, ti.

to.

tu.

JO» J«>

va, ve, VI,

vo,

vu,

ko, ku.

<a,||xe, xi.

xo,

xu,

lo, lu.

x&,"x6, rfl

xd,

xd,

Ho, Uu,

ya» ye, yi,

yo,

yu>

za, se, zi,

so.

xu.

;«, gei gif JO, J",
xa, xe, xi, xo, xu,

za, ce, ci, zo, zu.

IMPORTAHT OBS1RTATI01I9.

* B is alfrajs hard at the beginning: of a trord, whatever letter
may follow it. Ex. b€tralOt cheap ; hendUOf blessed ; bravo, brave ;
bUmco^ white. In the middle of a word, between two vowels, b li
softened into nearly a v ; Ex beber, to drink ; tubir, to go up. Bla,
hie, &c. are always pronounced hard, as in English, whatever place
they occupy in a word. Ex. Hablar, to speak ; ettMecer, to estab-
lish. Bra, bre, &c. preceded by a contonant, are pronounced hard ;
as, hombre, man ; aiambre, wire : but if preceded by a votoel, the
6 is generally softened into almost a v. Ex. Obrar, to act ', abrir,
to open ; pobre, poor.

t Ch&, ehi, kc, with a circumflex, as is stated in page 17, has
heretofore been used with the sound of kah, kai, in words derived
from the ancient languages ; but now we use in the place of it, ca,
qat, qui, eo, cu ; as, Q^imia, chemistry ; querubin, cherubim ;
Caribais, Charibdis.

t Q is changed into e, in all words where it is followed by ua, uo,
ve, ui, and we write euandoy when ; euota, quota ; euettion, ques-
tion.

§ R, in the beginning and middle of words, is pronounced as in
English ; as, rio, river ; erario, treasury ; but rr, in Spanish, is pro-
nounced a little stronger than the r in English at the beginning of
a word ; as, perro, dog ; Pizarro.

II Xa, kc. used to be guttural, and pronounced like the j, when the
vowel, following the x, had not the circumflex accent over it The
Spanish Academy, in the last edition of their Dictionary, printed in

PBONVNCIATfON. 21

or THE ACCENT*

There is but one long syllable in each Spanish word. It
is generally indicated by ihe acute accent placed upon the
vowel. But this acceAt is suppressed, when the long sylla*
ble may be otherwise known ; except in certain cases, where
use requires it should be preserved.

The following are the principal rules established by the
Spanish Academy, for the use or suppression of the accent
upon the vowel of the long syllable.

1st The monosyllable must not be accented, because it
is long from its nature.

Exceptions. We accent, Ist. the conjunctions ^, and' 4y
it, or ; and the preposition <f, to. 2d. The monosyllable
il, he, him ; mi, me, pronouns personal ; «i, yes, one self^
affirmative particle or pronoun ; di and si 'from the verbs
dar and ser, to give and to be) to distinguish these mono-
^Uables from ei, the, article ; mi, my, pronoun pomessire ;
St, if, conditional particle ; dcy of^ prepositioo ) and «^|
himself, See, pronoun.

2d. The accent is suppressed ia words of many sylla^
bles terminated by only one vowel, because their />«li«Afimii
k loag from its nature.

Eaxeptians. 1st In verbs, in the first and third pe/nom
of the singular of the perfect and future of the indieative^
the last syllable is long, and receives the accent. Ex. ami^
I loved ; amdy he loved ; arharij I shall love ; conociy I
knew ; conocerd, he shall know, &c. The accent remainsy

1817» and in their last improved Book on Orthography of 1816, bava
ased, instead^of the guttaral x, the letter jy before the yoweh a, o, ti ;
and the letter g, before e and t ; but some writers ase ?' for 2 before
all the Towels . Ex. jabon, soap ; gefCf chief ; Mlgieo^ Metico ;
p^gOf jaice. The x is preserved only in those words^in which it is pro-
nounced as A». Es. ExageraTi pronounced ektagerat, to exaggerate.
The x has also been changed into an 9 in all the instances in which
it is followed by another consonant Ex. EHrangero, stranger }
uupto, except ; eteUar, to excite. The object of the Academy, iife
all the foregoing alterations, has been to simplify the orthography,
and make it conform to the pronunciation as nearly as possible ;
therefore we have adopted these improvements in the orthography
ind pronunciation throughout this Grammar and Book of Exercises.

22 PBONITNCIATION.

even when we add a pronoun to some one of those words.
Ex. cogitCy I caught thee ; htUUky I found him ; come-
rdnloy they will eat it. 2d. It is the same with the last
syllable of the words aUd^ there ; caft^ coffee ; dej6y he
left ; Perils BercehU,

3d. In ^anish words of more than two syllables, the
two last are often short. We call words of this kind,
esdrOjuloSf dactyles. Some of them, as, cdmaraj chamber ;
espiriiuj spirit ; santisimo, most holy ; take the accent
upon tlie ahtepenultimay which is accented in the same
manner in those verbs which are made esdrkjulos by tlie
annexed pronoun ; as, mirame^ look at me ; dyeme^ hear
me ; which, without the adjunc^on of the pronoun, would
be written without an accent, mtra, look ; oye, hear.
Others, compounded of a verb followed by two pronouns,
and many adverbs, terminated in mentey have the accent
upon the syllable preceding the antepenuitima, Ex. biiS'
cameloy seek it for me ; diJ09eno%y people told as ;
fdriimentey easily. Finally, certsun adverbs in mentty deri«
ved from esdriijulos words, receive the accent upon the
fifth syllable, reckoning from the last. Ex. hdrharamentej
barbarously ; intrtpidamentey intrepidly ; words derived
from bdrbarOf intripido,

3d. The accent is suppressed upon the penuUimay in
words of two syllables, terminated with two vowels ; as,
.naoy ship ; «ea, let him be ; lea, let him read ; mto, mine ;
and in the words terminated in ta, t>, to, ua, ue, no, which,
considering the two vowels as diphthongs, are classed with
dissyllables : for instance, Indioy Julioy July ; aguOy water ;
mutuOy mutual ; &c.

Exceptions. The first and third persons of the singular
of the perfects of the verbs deviate from this rule, since
they always have, as we have said, the last syllable long and
accented. We must then write fef, I read ; Jiiy I trusted ;
temiSy he feared ; pidiSy he asked, &c.

4tfi. Words, terminating in y preceded by a vowel,
which forms a diphthong, have no accent ; their last syl-
lable is always long. Ex. JVfwfcy, convoyy Paraguay.

5th. In words ending with two vowels, and of diree or
more syllables, the position of the long syllable varies. 1st.
The last vowel is long, and takes the accent in the word??

PBONUNCIATIOir« 29

puntapti, a kick ; tirapiSf a strap ; and in the first and
third persons of the singular of the perfect of the indicative
of verbs ; as, acarre6j I carried ; contimtif I continued ;
duiribtdy I distributed ; codicidy he coveted ; etceptud^ he
excepted. 2d. The penultima vowel is long, and receives
the accent in the nouns and verbs terminated in ae, ta, te,
to, «a, ue, uo ; for example, provie^ he provides ; fiknofiuy
philosophy ; desttfioy challenge ; graddoj I graduate.

Exceptions. The accent is suppressed in all the per-
sons ending in ta, of the imperfect of the indicative and
1st conditional tense, because the t b always long. For
the same reason, we do not accent the penultimate vowel
of the terminations ae, oo, au, ea, eo, oa, oe, oo. However,
sometimes these voweb form a diphthong ; then the sylla-
ble that precedes them is long and receives the accent.
Ex. hirofj hero ; linea^ line ; cutdneo^ cutaneous ; puT'
pdreOy purple coloured. If. the final voweb ia, te, to, ua,
«e, ifo, of words of three or more syllables, form diphthongs,
it b abo the preceding syllable which b long ; but the ac-
cent b siqipressed. Ex. Esperiencia^ experience ; disturb
Hoy disturbance ; Nicaragua,

6th. The last syllable of the words ending with a con-
sonant b commonly long, and does not receive an accent.
The acceent b, on the contrary, marked, if the long syllable
b the penultima, as in the words drboiy tree ; virgen, vir-
gin ; mdrtivy martyr ; alfirezj ensign ; or the antepenulti-
ma, as in Mpiter^ rigimen, Aristdteles.

Exceptiom: 1st. The last syllable of any person singu-
lar of a verb, ending with a consonant, takes the accent, if
it be long. Ex. Anuards, thou shalt love ; serds, thou shak
be, &c. 2d. In patronymick names terminated in z ; as^
PereZf Sanchezy Fernandez^ the penultima is always long,
and b not accented.

7th. The plural of verbs and nouns follows the rule of
their singular. The only exception is the plural caractiresy
whose long accented syllable b not the same as in the sin-
gular, which b cardcter on the penultima.

Observation*

See fpages 15, 17» 18,] what we have said of the accent
circumflex and of the diaeresis upon the ti, signs formerly^

24 PIONUNCIATIOR.

introduced by the Spani^ Academy to fix the pronancia^
tioa in a few uncertain cases. The circumfloK is now en-
tirely suppressed, in consequence of depriving the x of its
former guttural sound, and using tiie j and i* in its place ;
and in consequence of using co^ ^ne, qid^ instead of chA^
chS, chij in words derived from the ancient languages* The
diaeresis is only used in ^iie, gviy to denote that die u mnaX
be soujKled separately from the u

OF functuation;

Punctuation is in Spani^ die same as in English. How*
ever, as it often happens in the Spanish language, liiat
punctuation alone indicates the interrogative sense of the
phrase; and that, if the period be long, the reader is in-
formed too late by the note of interrogation which follows
it, the Spanish Acadeo^ then makes use of a particular
mark, causing the phrase to be preceded by the note of
interrogation reversed. Ex. ^No te espanta la cercania
de un precipidOf que enctibierio eon las aparienoiat de vanas
seguridades^ sera para ti tanto masfaUd cuanto menos ima^
ginado ? Art thou not frightened at the vicinity of a
precipice, which, concealed undeir the appearance of false
security, will be the more fatal to thee, as it is less sui^cted ?

Ifj in Spanish, we are not warned by the interrogative
note, this phrase is only afiirmative, ihi^ art not frighten'
edy &c. Its turn and die transposition of a pronoun do not
announce at the outset, as in English, that the sense is
interrogative. The same is true as respects the note of
admiration ; as, / Vdlgame Dios, cuantas provincias y cuantas
Ttaciones conquistS ! Bless me, how many provinces and
nations he conquered !

CHAPTER n.

OF woans considbrbo as siqns of oua thoughts.

WoBDS are divided into different classes, which Gramma-
rians call Parts of Speech ; which are, the Article, Noun,
Pronoun, Verb, Participle, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunc-

WORDS. 25

tioD, and Interjection. Of these parts of speech, the last
four are invariable. The article y noun^ pronoun^ and par-
tidpUy are declined ; they have gendersy numbers^ and
crises. The verb is conjugated ; it has modes, tenses^ num'
bersy andpersonsy as will be seen hereafter.

We ^hsill speak of the genders and numbers in the chap-
ter of nouns to which they belong.

Though, in the Spanish language, nouns do not change
their terminations in changing their relations, as they do in
the Greek and Latin tongues, we shall, however, conform
to the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, which admits
six cases, to wit : the nominative^ genitive^ dative^ accusa-
tive, vocative, and ablative.

The nominative is the case that denotes the noun or
pronoun, which is the subject of a proposition.

The genitive denotes the person to whom belongs the
object of which we speak.

The dative denotes the person or thing towards which
the action of the verb is directed, or for which there results
from it an advantage or disadvantage.

The accusative represents the person or thing which is
the direct regimen of the verb or end of its signification
without preposition, or preceded by one of those which gov-
ern this case : such as, arUe, contra, entre, hdcia, &c.,
before, against, among, between, towards, &c.

The vocative serves to call. We place in this case the
persons to whom we addj:ess our speech.

The ablative serves to express the matter of or manner in
which a thing is made ; the cause from which it proceeds ;
or the instrument with which it is done. This case is al^
ways accompanied by one of the prepositions that govern it ;
such as, con^ de, en,por, &c. with, from, in, by, &c.

CHAPTER m.

OF THE ARTICLE.

The Article b a small word placed before nouns, or fte->
fore any other word taking their place, to determine the
person, the thing, or the action spoken of : therefore it is
called definite or determinate.
3

26 AKTICLKS. «

The ariicle has three genders in Spanbh : the masculiDe,
feminiDe, and neuter. For the masculine it is c/, the ; for
the feminine la, the ; and for the neuter to, the. The two
first have the two numbers, and the last has only the singular.

DECLENSION OF THE ABTICLBS.

Masculine Article*

Singular.

Plural.

Norn.

el, -

the. Nom. los.

the.

Gen.

del,* -

of the. Gen. de los, -

of the.

Dat.

al,* -

- to the. Dai. d los, -

- to the.

Ace.

el, al, •

the. Ace. los, d los.

- the.

Abl

del,* -

from the. Abl. de los, -
Feminine Ariicle.

from the.

Singular.

Plural.

Norn.

la, -

the. Nom. las, -

. the.

Gen.

de la,

- of the. Gen. de las.

- of the.

Dat.

ila, -

to the. Dat. 4 las, -

to the.

Ace.

la, i. la,

the. Ace. las, i las.

- the.

Abl.

de la, -

from the. Aid. delas, -
Neuter Article.

from the.

Norn.

lo, -

ihe.l

Gen.

de lo.

. of the.

Dat.

dlo.

to the.

-This article has

no plural.

Ace.

lo, -

- the.

Abl.

de lo,

from the.

i

We have said in the definition of the article, that it must
only be placed before nouns substantive, or before any other
part of speech that does their office ; from which must be con-
cluded, that there are parts of speech that, without being sub-
stantives arc sometimes employed as such. Really in these
phrases el leer me gusta^ reading pleases me ; preferir lo iitil
a lo agradablej to prefer the useful to the agreeable; ignorarel

* Del and al are abbreviations of dt el and a el, which custom
has introduced, and which the Academy has approved, in order to
distinguish, by this contraction, the genitive, ablative, and dative of
tl, article, from the same cases of el. pronoun. Thus del, o/, signify
of or from the, to the ; and de il, ail, signify of or from him, to him.

ARTICLES. 27

jforquCf to be ignorant of the why ; ker is a verb, (tiil and
agradable are adjectives, and porque is an adverb; but
those* words do the office of substantives, and it is for this
reason that they take the article.

OP THE USB OP THE ARTICLES.

Rule I. — The article never admits of any elision in Span-
ish ; but there are a few feminine nouns that, beginning
with an a, take the masculine article e/, instead of the femi-
nine la, in order to avoid the disagreeable meeting of two a'«.
Therefore we say el agua^ water ; el ala, the wing ; el alma,
the soul ; elama, the mistress ; el ave, the bird ; el dguilaythe
eagle ; el amo, the master ; la agua, la ala, &c., would be too
harsh. But it is necessary to observe, 1st. that thb change
of article is admitted only in the singular, because the clash-
ing of the two vowels does not take place in the plural ;
2d. if these nouns are accompanied by an adjective, this
adjective must be put in the feminine : we then say, el
agua esfria ; el aia derecha ; the water is cold ; the right
wing ; and not el agua frio >• el ala derecho ; 3d. the
nouns above meutioned aie nearly all which usage lias per-
mitted to deviate from the general rule.

Rule II. — The article is placed in Spanish before nouns
taken in a universal sense, even before proper names of
regions, countries, rivers, winds and mountains. £x.
la FranciOj de la Francia, a la Franda, France, of France,
to France ; la Costilla^ de la Costilla, d la CastiUa,
Castillo, of Castillo, to Castillo ; 6/ Ebro, el Tqfo, &c. ;
because the common nouns region, provincia, rio, &c. are
understood.

Exertions, — 1st. Those countries are excepted which
take their names from their capital cities. Ex. ^dpoles
y Corfu son unos paises muy favorecidos de la naturoleza^
Naples and Corfu are countries very much favored by na-
ture ; the names of countries which are under the regimen
of the preposition en ; as, estd en Espafia, he is in Spain ;
mve en Francia, he lives in France ; 3d. those that are
united by the preposition de to b. noun that precedes ; as,
el reyno de IngUUerra, the kingdom of England ; las ciu^
dades de Francia y de Alemaniay the cities of France and
Germany ; and, lastly, the article is omitted before the
names of countries^ from which we speak of returning. Ex.

ARTICLES.

vueho de Pnma^ I return from Prussia ; llega de Polo»
«ia, he arrives from Poland.

Remark 1st Though the name of a country be under
the regimen of the preposition en or dej it must be preceded
by the article when it is personified, or when it is taken in a
definite sense. £x. La urbanidad de la Franda^ el inieres,
de la Inglaterra^ the politeness of France, the interest of
England, &c. 2d. The article is always placed before the
names of certain distant countries ; as, Utgo del Japon^ de
h China^ del Periiy I arrive from Japan, from China, from
Peru. We say : Iv a Indias^ or d las Indias ; venir tie lit'
dias, or de las IndiM^ to go to the Indies, to come from the
Indies.

Rule m. — When the names of kingdoms and provinces
are preceded in English by a verb expressing the idea of
comings returning^ going, coming back^ sending and sending
hackf the preposition d is used in Spanish, corresponding to
die English to, Ex. Ir d Francia^ to go to France ;
vjlceri d InglaterrOy I shall return to England, &c. ; on the
contrary, aty in^ in they &c. are translated in Spanish, by en^
&c. when the preceding verb does not express any motion.
Ex. Estd en Paris, he is at Paris ; naciS en RomOy he was
born in Home ; estari en casriy I shall be in the house, or
^t home. We however say, — to be at the door, estar d la
puerta ; to wait for at the door, esperar d la pueria'^ &c.

Rule IV. — The nouns Senor^ Sefiora, Senores^ Senoras^
Sefiorilo^ Senoritos, Seiioriia, Sefioritas^ Mister or Sir,
Mistress or Madam, Gentlemen or Sirs, Masters, young
Gentlemen, Ladies, Miss, Misses, always take the article,
except, 1st. whqnthey are preceded by one of the pronouns
possessive mz, tUy my, thy, &c. and when they are in the
vocative. We must then say : El eeiiJOT del Campo, la
senora Sancho, la senorita Villegas, mi sefiora Sancho^ el
senorito Quiroga ; mi senorita ViUegas ; como estd vm,
senor don Francisco, or senora dofia Francisca ? Mister del
Campo, Mistress Sancho, Master Quiroga, Miss ViUegas,
my lady Sancho, my young lady ViUegas ; how do you do.
Sir Francis, or Lady Frances ?

N. B. 1st. When we speak of, or to a person in high sta-
tion, or to whom we owe respect, we use in Spanish these
words : senor don, senora or seflorila dofia, which must al-
ways be placed before christian names. Ex. El senor don

OF THK ARTICLE. 29

Ptdro B., My Lord Peter B. ; la senoradonaMariaA*^ My La-
dy Mary A.— It is necessary to remember that tbe word Don
is never employed before a surname or family name. We
shall dien say : El sefior de Matdlana$ ; la seficra de
ViUa Torre ; and not, el aefior don de MataUanas ; la ufiora
dofia de ViUa Torre,

N. B, 2d. Mi sefhra, mi se^ionto, are expressions which
indicate more deference than la senora, la senorUa.

Rule V. — When one of the words, sir or mister, mistress
or madam, my lord, my lady, sefior, eenoraj are accompa-
nied with . a title, the article is placed before that word, and
not before the title. The marshal, el aefior martscal ; the
duchess, la sefiora duquesa ; the bishop, el sefior chUpo.
But if we use mi sefior^ mi senora, the article is placed as in
English. My lord the bishop, mi sefior el obispOf mi
sefiora la duquesa.

Rule VI. — The neuter article is placed only before
adjectives used as substantives, and taken in an absolute
indeterminate case : as, se debe preferir to iitU a lo agrada^
Me, we ought to prefer the useful to the agreeable.

CHAPTER IV.

OF NOUKS.

Nouns are either suhstantive or adjective. The noun
substantive expresses the name of a person dr thing ; the
noun at^e^ive expresses its quality. Ex. Un hombre doctOf
a learned man ; una hermosa misery a handsome woman ;
hombre and muger, man and woman, are substantives ; dbc-
to and hermosa, learned and handsome, are adjectives.

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE.

The substantive is either common, proper, or collective*
The substantive common is that which may be applied to
several persons or several things ; as, general, general ;
ciudad, city ; reino, kingdom. One may say, un general
Ingles, un general Frances, an English general, a French
general ; la ciudad de Londres, la ciudad d*i Paris, the city of
3*

so NOUNS.

London, the city of Paris ; el reino de FtwiciOf el reino de In^
gLUerra;the kingdom of France, the kingdom of £ngland,&c.

The substantive proper expresses a separate idea, a single
person or thing ; as, Nero, Farts, Londres ; Nero, Paris,
London.

The substantive collective is that which, though in the
singular, presents to the mind several persons or things, ei-
ther as making one whole, or as making part of a whole.
The first is called coUtctive general ; as, egtrcUo^ rebano^
floresta, army, flock, forest. The second is called coUedive
partitive ; as, ti-opa^ infinidadj troop, infinity, &c

Rule VII, — The noun substantive coUtctive pariiUvemay
govern the verb that follows it in the plural ; but the noun
substantive collective general never governs it in that num*
ber. We may then say, enlraron en Londres una trOpa^ .
una infinidad de ladrones ; but we cannot say : tl egirciio^
perecieron, el rebano perecieron.

GENDERS.

The gender originally denoted only the distinction of the
sexes as male or female. The masculine designates man or
the male. The feminine denotes woman or the female.
Afterwards, by extension, we have attributed the masculine
or feminine gender to other nouns, though they had no
relation to either sex : the neuter has since been added to
them in several languages.

There are three genders in the Spanish language : the
masculine, feminine^ and neuter This last has only a rela-
tion to vague and indeterminate things : it is applicable only
to adjectives, and has no plural. Ex. Lo bueno, lo ma/o, lo
justo, esio, aquello, &c. ; die good, the bad, the just, this,
that, &c.

OF NUJMTBERS.

Numbers serve to designate one or many ejects. There
are two numbers, the singular and plural. The singular
designates only one person or thing, as hombre, man ;
mug^r^ woman ; librOj book, pluma, pen. The plural de-
signates many persons or things ; as, los hombresy men ^
mugeresy women ; Jibros, books ; plumas, pens.

NOUNS. 31

Of THB FORMATION OF THE PLUBAL OF NOUNS.

The plural of nouns substantive and adjective is formed
in Spanish in two difiereat manners, according to the termi-
nation of the singular.

The nouns are terminated either with a short vowely that
Is, not accented ; or with a long vowel, that is, accented ; or
lastly, with a consonant.

Rule VIII. When the noun is terminated with a short
vowel, the plural is formed by adding an « to the singular,
Ex. Carta, letter ; cartas, letters ; Have, key ; Saves,
keys ; bueno, buena, good ; buenos, buenas, good ; &c.

When the noun terminates with a long vowel or with a
consonant,, the plural is formed by adding es to the singular.
Ex. Aleli, gilly-flower ; aleUes, gilly-flowers ; verdad^
truth ; verdades, truths ; razon, reason ; razones, reasons ;
hdbil, able ; hdbiles, able f feliz, happy ; feUces, happy.
Maravedi forms its plural in three ways. We say marave-
dis^ maravedies, aod maravedises.

^ N. B. The nouns, both substantive and adjective, which
terminate with a z in the singular, change z into c to form
their plural, with the addition of the letters es : Ex. LuZf
light, iuces ; feliz, happy, felices, &c.

DECLENSION OF NOUNS.

Substantives masculine of a person, beginning with a
consonant.

Singular.

N. el padre, the father,

G. del padre, of the father.

D. al padre, -----i, to the father.

A. al padre,* ------ the father.

V. padre, ------ © father.

Ab. del padre, ------ from the father 4

* Though the observation we are about to make belongs to the
rules relative to the regimen of verbs, we have thought fit to give it
here, in order to make koovvn the reason of the difference that ex-
iftts between the accusatire of the noons of persons and that of the
nouns of things. Whenever a rational being or personified thing is
the object of this action of the active verb, the verb governs the noun
in the accusative with the preposition d ; and, as we have already said
in speaVingof the article, oi is a contraction of the preposition & and
of the article el. When on the contrary the object of the action d

32

K0UN8.

Plural

N. los padres, the fatherg.

G. de los padres, of the fathers.

D. 4 los padres, to the fathers.

A. 4 los padres, the fathers.

V. padres, b fathers.

Ab. de los padres, from the fathers.

Substantive feminine of a person, beginning with a con-
sonant :

Singtdar,

N. la muger, the woman.

O. de la muger, of the woman.

D. 41a muger, \ to the woman.

A. 41a muger, the woman.

V. muger, o woman.

Ah. de la muger, from the woman.

Plural.

N. las mugeres, the women.

G. de las mugeres, of the women.

D. 4 las mugeres, to the women.

A. 4 las mugeres, the women.

V. mugeries, o women.

Ah. de las mugeres, - - - - from the women.

Substantives feminine of a person, beginning with an a :
Singular.

K el ama, the mistress.

G. del ama, of the mistress.

D. al ama, ...... /o fAe mistress.

A. al ama, ...... ^Ae mistress.

^ ama? o mistress.

Ah. del ama, - from the mistress.

Plural.

N. las amas, the mistresses.

G. de las amas, of the mistresses.

D. 4 las amas, to the mistresses.

A. 4 las amas, - ... - the mistresses.

V. amas, - .... o mistresses.

Ah. de las amas, from the mistresses.

the actiye verb is a noun that expresses an inanimate thing, the yerb
goyerns it in the accusatiye without any preposition. See rule 66
which refers to this obserration.

Substantive masculine of a thing :

Singular,

A. el libro, ------- the hook,

G. del libro, ------- of the book.

D. al libro, ------- to the hook*

A. cl libro,* ------- tht hook.

V. libro, •.------ o hook»

Ah. del libro, ------- from the book.

Plural

N. los libros, ------ the hooks.

G. de los libros, ------ of the books.

D. 4 los libros, ------ to the book9*

A. los libros, -•---. the hooks.

V. libros, ------ o hooks.

Ah. de los libros, ------ from the hooks%

Substantive feminine of a thing :

Sivgular,

N. la casa, the house.

G. de la casa, ------- of the "house*

D. 4 la casa, .--->..- to the house.

^ A. la casa, ------ the house.

V. casa, ------- o home.

Ah. de la casa. ------- from the house.

Plural.

N. las casas, ------ the houses.

G. de las casas^ .---.. of the houses.

D. 4 las casas, ------ to the houses.

A. las casas, ------ the houses.

r. casas, ------ o houses.

Ah. de las casas, ------ from the houses.

N. B. Neuter nouns never relate to persons, but only to
indeterminate things ; as, lo bueno, lo nudo^ lo iiiil. They
have neither vocative case, nor plural number, and are de>
clined with the neuter article.

DECLKNSION X>F A NEUTER NOUN.

N. lo (itil, - - - ^ - - . the useful.

G. de lo (itil, - - - - - - of the useful.

* See (be preceding note, pa|^e 31.^ #

34. NOUSS.

D. 4 lo (ita, to the useful

A. lo (itil, ih^ mefuL

Ah. de lo (itil, from the weful.

Remark. The neuter article is not placed indifferently
before all adjectives employed as substantives, but only (as
we have said in rule vi) before those that are taken in a
sense absolutely indeterminate. In this phrase : el hombre
sabio prejiere siempre lo iitil a lo agradabky the wise man
prefers always the useful to the agreeable ; the neuter article
is necessary before iitil and agradahle^ because those nouns
do not express any determinate object. But in the follow-
ing phrases : el malo sera castigado, the wicked shall be
punished ; el azid de este paflo es muy subido, the blue of
this cloth is very lively, — one cannot make use of the neuter
article, because the nouns substantive that are implied are
sufficiently determinate ; in truth, it is evident that hombre
is understood before maloy and color before azul, and in
these cases the article takes the gender of the substantive
to which it relates.

OF FROFSK N0U|7S«

The proper names of men and women, of cities, towns^
villages, months, &c. do not take any article, and are de-
clined by aid of .the prepositions de and d. De serves for
the genitive and ablative, and d for the dative and accusa-
tive before proper names of men and women, and for the
dative only before nouns of things,

DECLENSION OF SOME PBOPER NAMES.

N. Pedro, Peter. N. Ana, Amu

G. de Pedro, of Peter. G. de Ana, of Ann.^

D. 4 Pedro, to Peter* D. i Ana, to Ann.

A. i Pedro,* Peter. A. 4 Ana,* Ann.

Ab. de Pedro, from Peter. Ah. de Ana, from Ann,

N. Antonio, Antony. N. Londres, London.

G. de Antonio, of Antony. G. de Londres, of London.

D. i Antonio, to Antony. D. ^ Londres, to London.

A. 4 Antonio,* Antony. A. Londres, London.

Ab. de Antonio^/rom^ntony. Ab.6.e luondresyfromLondon.

• * See note pa^e 31.

NOUNS. 35

OP NOUNS TAKEN IN A PARTITIVE SENSE.

Nouns taken in a partitive sense, often expressed in En-
glish by some J any, are always without an article in Spanish.

Rule IX. Whenever the noun, taken in a partitive sense
expresses an object vaguely and in an indeterminate sense'
it does not take in Spanish a preposition nor an article. £x!
Dame pan^ give me bread ; como camCf I eat meat ; cami
prarS manzanasy I shall purchase apples; Bebovino, I
drink wine.

Rule X. When on the contrary the noun is taken in a
determinate sense ^ it must be preceded by the genitive of
the masculine, or feminine article, singular or plural ac-
cording to the gender and number to which it belong, or
simply, by the preposition de, if it does not admit the article.
Ex. Dame del pan que has compradoy give me of the bread
that thou hast purchased ; dame de tu pan, give me of thy
bread. In the second example, we use only the preposition
de, because the possessive pronoun tu, does not take the ar-
ticle.

Rule XI. If the noun taken in a determinate sense is in
the plural, and it should be wished to express only the idea
of some, afewy this should then be expressed by unos, unas
or a^unosy algynas ; according to the gender of the noun
substantive. Ex. Corner^ taas 6 algunas ciruelaSy I shall
eat plums, that is, some plums ; he comprado algunos lihroSy
I have bought a few books, &c. But if the quantity, instead
of bemg limited by the sense of some, is absolutely undeter-
mined, then some is not expressed. Ex. Tiene muy buenos
Uhrosy he has very good books. Tenemos^amigosy we have
friends:

DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE MW, UTia ; fl, OB CW IN
ENGLISH.

Singtdur masculine,
N.SfA. un amigo, - - - . a friend.

G. if M. de un amigo, . - - . iy or from a friend.
D. 4 un amigo, .... to a friend.

Plural.

N.Srd. amigos, .... friends.

G.9fM. de amigos, - - - - of or from friends.

D. d amigos, - - - - - to friends.

36 KOCJNS.

Singvlar feminine.

N. Sf Ji. una monja, a ii«if.

G. I* .^6. de una moDJa, ...... ofanun^

D. 4 una monja^ .-v... to a nun^

Plural.

N.SfA, monjas, nuns,

G. Sf Ah. de monjas, ...---. of nuns.
D. ^ monjas, to nuns.

General ohservations upon the genders.

The proper and appellative names of men, and male ani-
mals, as also the nouns that express arts, sciences, dignities,
professions, trades, &c. fit for men, are of the masculine
gender ; as, kombre^ man ; cahoUoj horse ; patriarcaj
patriarch ; poeta^ poet, &c.

Names of females, and of professions, trades, &c. fit for
females, are of the feminine gender. Ex. muger^ woman ;
cabroy goat ; costurera, seamstress ; abadesa^ abbess, &c.

The names of kingdoms, cities, towns, and villages, gen-
erally take, says the Madrid Academy, the gender of the
appellative nouns, expressed or understood, to which they
refer. For instance, Toledo and Madrid are of the femi-
nine gender, because the femini.*e appellative nouns, ciudad
and ttVfa, city and town, are understood, the first before
Toledoy and the second before Madrid. Fuencarrml is mas-
culine, because the masculine word lugar, village, is under-
stood. The names Cuba and Morea are of the feminine
gender, because the appellative, ishij island. Is understood
before the first, and the word peninsula^ peninsula, before
the last. However, the Academy adds, some of th^ names
above mentioned, when they are not joined to the commoa
noun belonging to them, follow the rule of their termina-
tion. Thus Espana, Sueda^ and almost all the names of
countries ending in a, are feminine ; Perrol and Fiso are
masculine, though the appellattive noun of the two first be
reinoy kingdom ; that of Ferroly ciudad, city ; and that of
Viso, villa, town. The same b true in regacd to others,^
which practice will niake known^.

NOUNS. 37

OF tBB OENDBB OF NOUNS CONSIDBRBD WITH RBOARD TO
THEIR TERMINATION 8.

All nouns ending in a, are feminine, except atbacea^ execu-
tor; cmagrama^ anagram ; antipodes antipodes ; axioma^ axiom;
clima^ climate ; crismUf chrism ; dia, day ; dMemOf dilemma ; di-
plomoj diploma ; dogma, dogma ; drama, drama ; epigrama^
epigram ; Etna, Etna ; fa, fa, (note of music ;) vdioma,
idiom ; Uma, lemma ; wAndj manna ; mapa, map ; poema^
poem ; problema, problem ; sira^ema, symptom ; sUtemay
' system ; sofismay sophism ; tapabocoy slap given on the mouth ;
tenuif theme ; teorema^ theorem ; and some others.

All those ^at terminate in o, are masculine, except mano,
hand ; and nao^ vessel.

Those that terminate in don or tion, are of the feminine
gender, as, ctieslion, question ; medUaciony meditation ; acdon^
action ; ohjecuniy objection, &c. These words are the same
in both languages, except that in Spanish the i of the termi-
nation tiony of the English word, is changed into a c, when
it has the sound of sA.

The nouns that in Spanish terminate in ^ or dady termi*
nations that correspond to that of the Latin in tes, and to
that of the English in iy^ are of the feminine gender ; as,
humanidadyYmTOBmty y punc^oc^, purity ; adversidady adversity..
As to the nouns that have other terminations, they are sub-
ject to so many exceptions, that it is impossible to establish
in regard to them satisfactory rules.

SUBSTANTIVES THAT ARB OB BOTH GENDERS, according tO the.

decision of the Academy,

Albali, ..... cockety passport.

Anatema, - - - - - - anathema.

Arte, - - art.

Azucar, ...---. sugar.

Canal, canal.

Cisma, - - - - - - - schism.

Cutis, ....--- skin.

Dote, dotes, .... dowry y endowments.

Emblema, ------- emblem.

Hermafrodita, .... - hermaphrodite.

Mar, - sea.

4

38 NOUNS*

Mirgen, margin, bank.

Nema^ ..----- «ea/.

Neuma, ..... significani gesture,

orden, order.

Puente, - - - - - - - bridge,

Reuma, rheum.

Tribu, .------ tribe.

N. B. Tribu, trihe^ though of both genders, generally
takes the masculine.

OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE.

Formation of the feminine of nouns adjective.

In the Spanish language, as in abnost all others, the adjec-
tive agrees in gender and number with the substantive to
which it relates. It is then necessary to know the manner
in which the feminine is formed from the masculine. Of the
formation of the plural, we have given the rules, when
speaking of the numbers.

Nouns adjective, the termination of which b in o, form
their feminine by changing o into a ; as buettOj buena, good ;
aUoy aUay high, &c.

Those that terminate in the masculine, with any other let-
ter, have generally but one termination for both genders.
We say then, un homhre alegrej a merry man ; and una mu-
ger alegrcy a merry woman ; un homhre ftlizj a happy man ;
una muger feliz, a happy woman, &c.

The following nouns, terminating in the singular, with a
consonant, are excepted from the above rule, the feminine
being formed by adding an a to the masculine. Haragan-a^
lazy ; mamantotp-ay a sucking child ; haron^y sluggish ;
Aampon-a, vain ; as also national adjectives, as; Frances^,
French ; Ingles-ay English ; AragoneS'tty Aragonese ; An'
daluz-<iy Andalusian, &c. (See at the end of the Grammar
the table of names of countries.) Among the adjectives of
thislast class, some are found that terminate in a, and do not
undergo any change in the feminine ; as, PersUy Persian ;
Moscovitay Muscovite, &c.

COLLOCATION AND AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH
THE SUBSTANTIVE.

1st. The adjective is generally placed in Spanish after
the substantive.

TIOUNS. S9

2d. T)ie adjective must always agree in gender and nnm-
ber with the substantive that it qualifies.

3d. When an adjective relates to two singular substantives,
it DQust be put in the plural.

4th. When an adjective serves to qualify in the same
phrase several substantives of different genders, it is put in
the plural and in the masculine.

OF NOUNS DIMINITTIVE AND AUOMENTATIVE.

The Spanish language abounds, like the Italian language,
in diminutives and augmentatives.

Rule XII. There are two kinds of diminutive nouns :
1st. those that express tenderness, or the gentleness of any
object whatever, that is small ; and their termination is in
ito or ICO for the masculine, ita or tea for the feminine,
which are added to the nouns, whether adjective, or substan-
tive, without altering any thing in them, when they terminate
with a consonant, but suppressing the last letter, if it be a
vowel. Ex. Fdjaro^ bird ; pqfaritOf small or pretty little
bird ; owa, house ; cetsita, small, or pretty little house ;
8eiior,sir: sefioritOj young gentleman, or master. From
this rule skould be except^ bueno, bueruif the dimunitivc of
which IS honitOj honita, and which most often has only the
meaning of pretty.

2d. Those which denote contempt or pity, or which lessen
the object without adding to it the idea of pretty, are gene-
rally terminated in zueloy iUo or dUoj for the masculine,
zuAij iUa or dUa for the feminine, according to the forego-
ing rule respecting diminutives. Ex. Perro^ dog ; perillo^
ugly little dog ; mt^er, woman; tnugercilla^ mttgerzuela,
v^y little woman ; hombre, homhrecilhy hombrezuehf ugly
little man.

There are some other dimunitives terminating in ete^ in,
efOf but they are very little used.

Rule XIII. The augmentative nouns add to the positive
the signification of the words big or largCj and are formed
by adding arif azoy onazoy or ote for the masculine, and ona^
azOf or onaztty for the feminine, following the same rule as
the dimunitives in regard to the termination. Ex. Hombre,
man ; hombroHj hwnbrazoj hombronazo^ big or large man ;
nutgeTf woman ; mugerona, mugerazay mugeronazay big or
large woman ; perro, dog ; perron^ perrazo, perronazOy big

40 NOUNS.

or large dog ; grande, large ; grandon, grandotey grandazo,
grandcnazoy very big or large and without proportion.

DEGBBES OF COMPARISON IN THE ADJECTIVES.

The adjectives may qualify the objects either absolutely,
that is, without any relation to other objects, or relatively,
that b, with relation to other objects Hence arise three de-
grees of qualification, to wit : ihepasitivey the comparative,
and the superlative.

The positive is the adjective expressed without there be-
ing a comparison } as, bueno good ; tnalo, bad.

The comparative serves to establish between the objects
that ace compared a relation of superiority ^ inferiority , or
equality. Hence three kinds of comparatives.

The adjective is in the superlative when it expresses the
quality either in a very high or in the highest degree ; which
forms two kinds of aupermivesj the one absolute, and the
other relative.

OF THE COMFAJLATIVES.

As a comparison may be made, not only by means of ad-
jectives, but also by the aid of substantives, verbs, and ad-
verbs, we shall consider the comparatives in these four
different cases. The Spanish language participates in this
part of the Grammar, with die latin tongue, and d^culties
would doubtless be found in it, should we content ourselves
with merely treating of comparatives in relation to adjectives.

OF COMPARATIVES CONSIDERED IN RELATION TO ADJECTIVES.

Rule XIV. 1st. The comparative of superiority is al-
ways expressed by mas, more ; and the que foUowing, by
than. Ex. He is more learned than you, 61 es mas sabio
que vm.

2d, The comparative of inferiority is formed by menos,
less, followed by que, than, or by no4anf not so, and the as
following is rendered by como. Ex. He is less learned than
his brother, or he is not so learned as his brother ; 61 es
menos docto que su hermano, or 61 no es tan docto como su
hermano.

3d. The comparative of equality is formed by toit-como,
as-as ; or no-menos que, not less-than. Ex. You are as pru-
dent as your sisters, vm. es tan prudente como sus hermanas,
or, you are not less prudent than, &c. vm. no es menos pru'*
dente que, ^c.

KOUNS.

41

N. B. The following nouns are comparatives from their
nature : may or ^ larger, greater ; menoTj lesser, smaller ;
mejor, better; pcor, worse; wipcnor, superior ; inferior ^
inferior. We also say el mayor, el menor, el mefor, &c. the
largest, the greatest ; the least, the smallest ; the best; but
then these adjectives are superlatives.

COMPARATIVE OF SUPERIORITY.

Of the compar€^V€ in relation to substantives^ verbs and
adverbs.
Role XV. This comparative before the substantive, the
adverb, and after the verb, is rendered by masque more-
than, smd admits no preposition after it. Ex. He has more
prudence than you, Hene masprudenda que vm, ; She has
more science than money, tiene mas ciencia que dinero ;
we have more eneijues than, &c. tenemos mas enemigos que,
^c. I esteem thee more than Mary, te estimo mas que a
Maria; we act more prudently than they, ohramos mus pru'
dentetnenie que elhs,

N. B. The foregoing rule perfectly agrees with the En-
glish construction. More thany less thaUf followed by a
noun of number, one, two, three, &c. are translated by mas
de, and menos de. Ex. She has more than ten guineas,
tiene mas de diez guineas. She has more than seven broth-
ers, tiene mas de siete hermanos. We have less than a
thousand dollars, Tenemos menos de mil pesos. Less than
20 years, menos de 20 anos.

Comparative of Inferiority.

Rule XVI. 1st. This comparative, considered in. relation
to substantives, may be expressed by less or fewer4han,
or by so much or so many-as, preceded by the negative not.

Less4han is rendered by menos que. Ex. Less prudence
than, menos prudenda que ; fewer friends than, menos ami-
gos que, 8fc. Not so much or so many-as, is expressed by
no^antOy'ttyOSf-^iSy-como, according to the gender and num-
ber of the noun to which, so muck, so many relate. Ex.
I have not so much mon^y as you, no tengo tanto dinero
como vm. ; Peter has not so much ambition as John, Pedro
no tiene tanta ambicion como Juan ; Francis has not so

42 Mom^s.

maoy books as his brother, Franci9C0 no tiene tantoe Ubro^
como 9U hermano,

2d. In relation to verbs ; le894han is expressed by menos-
que ; not-^o-much is expressed by no-tanto ; and as, by cu-
anto or como. Ex. I do not love him so much as I esteem
him, no le quiero tanto cuanio or como le etHmo ; you study
less than we, vm, estudia menos que nosotros.

Sd. In relation to adverbs; les94han is rendered by
menos-que, and not-^o or not'So-as by no-'tan<omo, Ex.
They act less prudently than you, obran menoe prudente^
mente que om., or no obran tan prudentemenie como vm.

N. B. Before participles passive so much'4i9 ; a» much^as,
are rendered by tan^omo. Ex. He is not so much esteemed
as he, no es tan estitnado como il. — I am as much loved as
9he is, eoy tarn amado como eUa.

Comparative of equality.

Rule XYU. 1st. The comparative of equality, consid-
ered in relation to nouns substantive, is expressed by as
much-asy as mofiy-asy or by not less-than. As much, as
many^ is translated by tant0f4a'-to»4asy according to the gen-
der and number of the substantive, and the following as by
como. Ex. She has as much meekness as her sister, iiene
tanta dulzura como su hermana ; he acts with as much rig-
our as justice, obra con tanto rigor como justiciar Not less^
than is rendered by no^menoS'-qtte. Ex. I am not less hun-
gry than you, no tengo menos hambre que vm. ; we have not
fewer protectors than friends, no tenemos menos protectores
que amigos.

2d. In regard to verbs ; as much as is expressed by tanto
cuanto or como. Ex. I punish him as much as he deserves,
le castigo tanto cuanto or como merece.

Not4ess than is always translated by no-menos que. Ex.
You do not eat less than his brother, vm.no come menos que
su hermano.

Sd. In relation to adverbs : as-€ts is rendered by tan-como.
Ex. He sings as well as you, canta tan bien como vm.

Not'less-than is translated by no-menos^e. Ex. I do not
write less correctly than he, no escribo menos correctamente
,que4l

NOVNS. 49

Of superlatives*

There are two kinds of superlatives, the one absolute and
the other relative.

Rule XYIII. The first expresses a quality in the su-
preme degree^ but without comparison, and then the adjec-
tive is preceded by niiiy, verif ; and if the adjective can
form its superlative of itself, then, without having recourse
to muy, we add to the positive isimo or isima^ isimos or
isimaSf according to the gender and number of the substan-
tive to which it refers, cutting off the final letter of the ad-
jective, if it ends with a vowel. Ex. Paris is a very beauti-
ful city. Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa or hefTnosisima,

The superlative absolute of the adverbs is likewise forob-
edby muy ^or by changing emente or amende into isimamente. '
Ex. Prucknt-emente, prudently, prudenUfsimamente ; cdn^
didor^nente, candidly, candid-isimamenie.

N. B. 1st. It is proper to observe that there are adjec-
tives and adverbs which do not admit the last form of the
superlative ; consequently when a doubt occurs whether it
may be used with any adjective or adverb, the surest way
will be to make use of muy with the positive.

N. B. 2d. From the general rule of absolute superlatives
must be excepted a few adjectives that cannot be subjected
to it, as ; hueno, good ; honisimoy very good ; fuertey strong;
fortisimo, very strongs AU those that terminate in hie
change thiat syllable into bilisimOy for the superlative. Ex.
AmcMe^ amiable, ama bilisimo ; afahh^ afa-bilisimo. The
following nouns are superlatives in their nature ; Sptimo,
pinmOf maxmoj fitintmo, infimo, supremo^ very good, very
bad, very great, very small, very low, supreme.

Rule XIX. The superlative relative expresses a quality
in the highest degree, by comparison with other objects,
and it is formed in English by one of these articles or pro-
nouns, ehe^ of or from the f to the ; my, thy, his, her, its, our,
your, their, followed by most, least, best, worst; and in
Spanish by one of these ; el, la, los, las, dd, de la, de los or
de las, al, a la, d los or d las \ mi, tu, su, nuestro, vuestro, fol-
lowed by mas, menos, mejor, menor, peor ; and these articles
and pronouns must agree in gender and number with the
noun to which they relate. Ex. The most pure and con-
stant pleasures, hs mas puros y constamtes placer es.

44 NOUNS*

The adverb foims its superlative relative by lo masy the
most ; lo menaSf the least ; both which must always precede
it. Lo is here a neuter article.

Observations upon the Compcaratives and Superlatives.

RuLK XX. The comparatives govern the verb that fol-
lows the que, than, Ex. lie is more learned than he appears,
61 es mas doeto qtf^pareccy or delo que parece.

Rule XXI. Wnen the substantive, to which the adjec-
tive in the superlative relative, refers, is preceded by the
definite article and is immediately followed by the adjective^
then the article is not repeated before mas nor the adjective.
Ex. He was prepared to deal the most terrible marks of his
resentment, quedS en disposicion de usar de las demonstra'
cionss mas terribles de su resentimiento (Feijdo,) But if the
substantive is not immediately followed by mas, most, then
the article must be repeated. Ex. BU hombre que veo es el
mas doctOf ^c.

Rule XXII. The superlative relative governs the verb
that follows the que in the indicative. Ex. The most pow-
erful prince that has been, el principe mas poderoso que ha
Itahido,

If however, the verb, in English, is in the potential, we
put it indifferently in the second or third conditionals. Ex.
The best that I could find, el mejor que haUase or hallara.

And if it is in the fiiture, we put 'it in the future conjunc-
tive, or in the present of the subjunctive. Ex. The least that
I can or shall be able, h menos quepueda or pudiere.

Rule XXIII. Most and least joined to a verb are ren-
dered by mas and menos, Ex. He is the man that I most
love, 61 es el hombre que mas quiero.

This is the woman that I least esteem, esta es la muger
que menos estimo.

Rule XXIV. 1st. The more-the morCy (that is, ^Ae more
repeated in different members of a sentence, the second be-
ing as a consequence of the first,) are expressed by cuanto
maS'tanto mas. The more virtuous man is, the more happy
he is, cuanto mas virtuoso es el hombre, tanto masfeUz es,

2d. The lt8s-4he less; the more-the less ; the lesS'the more
are expressed by cuanto menos-tanto menos ; cuanto mas»
tanto menos ; cuanto menos-tanto -mas.

NOUNS. 45

3d. So much the more than, so mitch the Uis than, are traos-
lated by tanto mas que^ tanto menos que.

OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES AND SUBSTANTIVES OF NUMBER.

Adjectives of number are words that serve for enumera-
tion. We call them adjectives because their office is to mod-
ify, Und because every noun that modifies is an adjective.
They are distinguished into two kinds, the cardinah and or-
dinals.

The cardinals serve to designate absolutely and simply
the various numbers ; the ordinals mark the order of persons
or things in relation to the numbers.

The cardinal numbers are ;

ono, una, ------ one,

dos, ------ two,

tres, - - - - - - three,

cuatro, - four,

dn<io, - - - - . - - five,

seis, - - - . - - - six,

siet*, seven,

ocho, eight,

naeve, ..---- nine,

dies, - - - - - - ten,

once, ..----. eleven,

doce, -.--.- twelve,

trece, -.--.- thirteen,

catorce, - - - - - - fourteen,

quince, -.-.-- fifteen,

diez y seis, ----- sixteen,

diez y siete, . - - - - seventeen^

die2 y ocho, . - - - - eighteen,

diez y nueve, ----- nineteen,

veinte, - twenty,

veinte y uno, ----- twenty-one,

veinte y dos, . - - - - twenty-two,

veinte y tres, ----- twenty-three,

veinte y cuatro, - - - ' - - twenty-four,

veinte y cinco, ----- twenty-five,

veinte y seis, ----- twenty-six,

veinte y siete, ----- twenty-seven,

veinte y ocho, twenty-eight.

46

KOUNS.

veinte y nueve,

treinta,

cuarenta,

cincuenta,

sesenta^

setenta,

ochenta,

noventa,

ciento,

doscientos-asy* -

trescientos-asy -

cuatrocientos-as,

quinientos-as,

seiscientos-as, -

setecientos-as, -

ochocientoa-as, -

novecientos-as, -

mil,

dos mil,

mil y ciento,

mil y doiscientos-as,

cien mil, -

doscientosF-as mil,

niUoo,

twenty-nine,

thirty,

forty,

fifty,

sixty,

seventy,

eighty,

ninety,

a or one hundred,

two hundred,

three hundred,

four hundred,

five hundred,

six hundred,

seven hundred,

eight hundred,

nine hundred

a or one thousand,

two thousand,

eleven hundred,

twelve hundred,

a or one h\indred thousand

two hundred thousand,

million, y,

N. B. This last number is not an adjective, it belongs to
the class of substantives.

primero-a,t

segundo-a,

tercero^,

cuarto-a,

quinto-a,

sesto-a,

septimo-a^

octavo-a,

nono-a,

decimo-a,

undecimo-a,

duodecimo-a

firsty

second,

third,

fourth,

fifth,.

sixth,

seventh,

eighth,

ninth,

tenth,

eleventh,

twelfth,

* The masculine termination ot is chan^^ed into (
t Primero, m. prinerai f. &c.

r for the feminine;

jmtJNS.

47

decimo tercio, decima tarda,
decimo cuarto^ decima cuarta,
decimo quinto^ decima quinta,
decimo sesto, decima sesta,
decimo septimo, decima septima,
decimo octavo, decima octava^
decimo nono^ decima nona^
vig6s]mo-a, - . -

vigesimo primo^-a,
vigesimo segundo-a-a^ -
vige»mo tercio-a-a, - -
trigesimo-a, - - -

<uadragesimo-a, - «

quincuagesimo-a,
sexagesimo-a, ...
septuagesimo-a, . - -
6ctogesimo-a, . . -
nonagesimo-a, - . -
nonagesimo primo, &c.-a-a^ -
centesimo-a^ ...

ducentesimo-a, ...
trecent6simo-a;
cuadragentesimo-a,
quingentesimo-a^
sexentesimo-a,
septeogentesimo-a,
octogentesimo-a,
nonagentesimo-a,
milesimo-a, - - -

antepenultimo-a,
penultimo-a^ - - ♦ -
^timo-a, postrero-a,

thirteenth;

fourteenth;

fifteenth,

sixteenth;

seventeenth;

eighteenth;

nineteenth;

twentieth;

twenty-first;

twenty-second,

twenty-thhrd,

thirtieth;

fortieth;

fiftieth;

sixtieth;

seventieth;

eightieth;

ninetieth;

ninety-first;

a or one hundredtii^

two hundredth,,

three hundredth;

four hundredth;

five hundredth;

six hundredth;

seven hundredth,

eight hundredth;

nine hundredth,

a or one thousandth,

antepenultima,

penuitima,

last.

Besides these two kinds of numhers, there are yet three
others that belong to the class of substantives ; these are the
collective^ distrihtUive and proportional.

The collective numbers serve to denote determinate quan-
tities, as ; a dozen^ una docena ; half a dozen^ una media
docenta; a hundred of, una centena ; a thouaandlhy un mil-
iar ; a miUioriy un mUlon or cuento.

The distributive serve to denote the difierent parts of a
whole ; as, the Ao//, la mitad ; the third j el tercio ; ^ fourth^
una cuarta, &,c.

48 NO0N8.

The profpturiiamd are those that serve to denote the pro*

nive mcrease of the Dumber of things ; as, the douhUy el
^ ) ; the quadruple f el cuadruplo ; the hmdredfUd^ el cen*
tu^o, &c.

N. B. All the cardinal numbers are indeclinable, except
unoy one, and the compounds of ciento ; for, we say unoy
tma^ dosderUosy doscienUUj &c. The ordinals form their fem-
inine by changing o into a.

ADJECTITBS WHICH, JOINED TO A 8UB8TANTITB, LOSE OVB
OR MORE LETTERS.

Rule XX V. Ist uno, one ; primeray first ; terceroy third ;
posireroy last ; algunoy some ; ningunoy none ; btienOf good,
and nudof bad, wicked, when they are followed by a sub-
stantive, lose the last vowel, but only in the masculine. Ex.
Un hombre^ one man ; el primer hambre, the first man, &c.
However, tercero does not always lose it; for, we say; el
tercer dia or el tercero dia ; and both manners of speaking
are admitted by the Academy.

2d. CientOf hundred, loses the last syllable before a sub-
stantive. Ex. Cien hombres, a hundred men ; den mugereSf
a hundred women.

3d. Grande^ great, large, loses the last syllable before a
substantive which begins with a consonant, whenever it sig-
nifies great in merits in quditie» ; but if it only has the sig-
nification of large in exientj in dimensions^ or if the substan-
tive that follows it begins with a vowel or h, it loses none of
its letters. We therefore say, una gran muger, a great wo-
man ; un gran cabaUo^ a noble horse, if to these words
greats noble, we attach the idea of great in merit, in qualities ;
but we must say, una grande easa, a large house ; un gran-
de amigo, a great friend ; U7i grande almirmae, a great ad-
miral ; un grande odio, a great hatred.

4th. SantOf saint, loses also the last syllable before a
proper name. Ex. San Pedro, San Francisco, &c. We ex-
cept however from this rule Santo Domingo, Santo Tomas,
Santo Toribio, and Santo Tome.

N* B. 1st. It is not necessary, in order that this suppres-
sion of letters should take place, that the adjective be imme-
diately followed by the substantive ; for, if we must say.
un hombre^ un libro^ we must also say, un hdbil hombre^ un

NOUNS. 49

huen libroy although in these examples im be separated from
its substantiye by an adjective.

If the substantive is not expressed^ the adjective that re-
lates to it^ does not then lose any letter. £x. uno 6 do$
kombresy one or two men ; uno de esos sefioresj one of those
gentlemen. In the first example, the substantive hombre is
understood after uno^ and in the second the word aefior ;
thus we cannot say un 6 dos hombrea^ un de esos senores.

N. B. 2d. Whenever the word dento takes after it anoth-
er number, it preserves all its letters : we must then say,
cienio y dos, ciento y cinco, dento y nueve hombres^ and not
den y cfos, den y ctfico, den y nueve hombres.

N. B. 3d. In speaking of sovereigns we generally make
use of ordinal numbers as in English, but the article the is
not expressed in Spanish. Ex. Henry the Fourth, Enrique
Cuarto ; Ferdinand the Seventh, Fernando Siptimo^ &c.

N. B. 4th. When in English the cardinal numbers are
followed by o'dock, hora, and one wishes to tell or ask the
hour of the day, then the cardinal number must be preceded
by the article la before t*na, hora is understood, and Icls be-
fore the other numbers, horas being implied, and the expres-
sion 6'dock, is suppressed ; and if the verb to strike^ expres-
sed in English, is translated into Spanish, it is rendered by
dar, Ex. What o'clock is it ? que hora e$ ? one o'clock,
la una; three o'clock, las tres; four o'clock, las cuatro ;
it has struck five o'clock, las dnco dadas ; it has just struck
six o'clock, las sds acaban de dar ; seven o'clock is about
striking, las siete estdn para dar.

Twelve o^dock at noon^ is translated by ha doce^ or las doce
del dia, and midnight by las doce de la noche^ or media noche.
In the following examples and others like them, afternoon
is translated by dela tarde and in the evening by de la noche.
Ex. At five o'clock in the afternoon, a las dnco de la tarde;
at eight o'clock, at ten o'clock in the evening, a las ocho^ d
his diez de la noche ; at six o'clock in the morning, a la sds
de la mafiana ; at four o^clock in the morning, d las cuatro
de la mafUma*

N. B. 5th. The verb it is, taken unpersonally in English
in some of the precedmg examples and the like, is not im-^
personal in Spanish ; it agrees on the contrary in number
5

50 PRONOUNS.

with the noun hour understood, and the pronoun Uy is never
expressed. Ex. It is one o'clock, es la una ; it is two
o'clock, 9on la$ dos ; it is half after three, son las ires y mediaf
It wants a quarter of four, son las cuatro tnenos un cuarto,

N. B. 6th. In speaking of the days of the month, if we
express the word dioy day, it must be preceded by the arti-
cle, and followed by the ordinal or cardinal number, but
most commonly by the cardinal. Ex. The twelfth of Janu-
ary, el diu doce de Enero, If we suppress the word dio, then
we make use of the cardinal number, preceded by the prep-
osition d. Ex. The twelfth of January, d doce de Enero,
We also say el primero^ el segundo^ Sfc, de Enero^ and then
the word dia is understood.

This is the way in which letters are dated.

Madrid^ y Febrero 20 de 1822, Cambridge^ 20 de Julio de
1822, Boston^ d l."" de 7Jbre 1824.

CHAPTER V.

OP PRONOUNS.

Pronouns hold the place of nouns, recall the idea of them,
and prevent their repetition, which would render the speech
languid. They are divided into personal, possessive, demon-
strativey reUitivej interrogative ^ and indefinite.

OF PRONOUNS PERSONAL.

Pronouns personal denote persons, or hold the place of
persons or personified things. Such, for the first person of
the singular, are yo, me, ml, I, me ; and, for that of the plu-
ral, nos, nosotros, nosotras, we, us. For the second person —
Sing, iii, te, ti, thou, thee ; — Plur. vos, vosotros, vosotras, os,
ye or you.

For the third person. — Sing. masc. ily he, him or it. —
Masc. plur. eUos, they, them. — Fem. sing, ella^ she or it ;
fem. plur. eUas^ they or them. — Sing. masc. and fem, /e, to
him, to her, him. (Le is of both genders when it is in the
dative, and of the masculine only, when in the accusative.)
Sing. fem. {a, her ; plur. masc. and fem. les^ to them ; plur.
masc. losy them ; plur. fem. lasy them.

PRONOUNS. 51

There is anojther pronoun of the third person, which is si^
oneself, se, himself, herself, itself; it is of the three genders.
In English oneself cannot relate but to the singular ; si in
Spanish may be employed with both numbers without vary-
ing its termination. It is called reflective, because it denotes
the relation of a person or thing to him, to her, or itself. -
Among personal pronouns some are used only of persons,
and others are used alike of persons and things. Those of
the first person are only applied to persons or personified
things ; diose of the third are indifierently used of persons
and things.

Pronouns may be nominatives^ and of the direct or indirect
regimen.

They are nominatives when they are the subjects of the
proposition. In this phrase ; yo habloy 1 speak ; yo^ I, is a
pronoun nominative, because it is the subject of the propo-
sition.

A pronoun is a direct regymen when it is the object of the
action expressed by the verb ; and it is an izidirect regimen
when it is the end of the action expressed by the verb. In
these phrases ; Dios le castigardy God will punish him ; mi
padre te dard su opinion, my father will give thee his opin-
ion ; le is the direct regimen, because it b the object of the
punishment expressed by the verb castigard ; and te put for
diih the indirect regimen, because^ instead of being the
object of the action expressed by the verb dard, it is the end
of it ; the object is the thing given, that is, Ms opinion, and
the end is the person to whom the opinion is to be given^
that is, to thee.

Declension of personal pronounsm

PRONOUN OP THE FIRST PERSON.

Singuhr of both genders. Pron. as regimen.*

N. yo, - - I.

G. de mi, - - of me.

D, k mi, - - to me. me, - - tome
A. d mi, - - m€. me, - - me.

Ah. de mi, - -from me.

• We give to these pronouns the denomination ofpronouru used as
a regimeUf (objective pronouns,) because it appears to be more intel-
ligible aD4 conformable to true principles.

52 FB0N0UN8.

Plural mascuUne, Pran, as Regimen.
N. DOS,* nosotrosy - ice.
G, de nosotros, - ofue,

D« 4 no80tro89 - to us. nos, - - toiu^
A, 4 nosotros, - vx. nos, - . tcs.

Ah. de nosotros, from us.

Plural femimne.
N. nosotras, - we.

G. de nosotraSy - of us.

D* 4 nosotras, - lo us. nos, - - to us,
A. 4 DosotraSy - us. nos, - - us.

M. de nosotras, - fiom us.

SECOND FSRSON.

Singular of both genders.

N. ta,t - - thou.

G. detl, - - of thee.

D. 4tl9 - - to thee. te, - - to thee.

A. ibtij - - <Acc. te, - - tAee.

^6. deti, - 'fromtliee.

Plural mascuUne.

N. vos^vosotros, ye or you.

G. de vosotrosy - of you,

D. 4 vosotros^ - to you. os, - - to you.

^. 4 vosotrosy - you. os, - - 2^«

^6. de vosotros, from you.

* Jitotj 18 only used by the King, Dipttttinlef, itid Soperior Officers
____A!idJIribairafriirclidrilrMid state.

t We seldom use the prooouns td in Spanish. However, masters
use it in speaking to their domestics, man and wife, parents in speaking*
to their children, brothers to brothers, lovers to loT^rs, and friends to
their friends ', but except in these cases, they are not used in good
company, and we make use for both genders of usted for the singu-
lar, and of xutede8 for the plural, putting the following verb in the
third person. Usled is an abbreviation of tmeifra merctd, which sig-.
nifies your favour, and ustedeSf an abbreviation of vutHrat mercedet,
your favours. If these pronouns are followed by an adjfctive that
relates to them, this adjective must always take the gender of the
person to whom we speak. Ex. Sir, are you well f setior, ul& vm.
bueno 9 Madam, I have been told that you are well, unora, nu han
dicho que vm. est& huena. In conversation, we pronounce usttd and
ustedtSf but we write vm. and vms.

X Vos is used with persons of high rank ; and superiors use it also
instead of t<k with their inferiors.

PRONOUNS.

53

N.
G.
D.
A.
Ah.

vosotrasy
de vosotraSy
4 vosotras,
4 vosotras,
de Yosotrasy

FluroX feminine.

you, '

of you.

to you.

you.

'from you.

Pron. 08 regimen.

08,
OS,

ioyou.
you.

N. 61*

G. de el,t

D. 4 el,

A. 4 el,

Ah. de el, from him^frwn iL

THIRD PERSON.

Singular masculine.

hey it.
of him, of it.
to him, to it. le, se,
Am, it. le, lo.

N. ellos,
G. de ellos,
/)• 4 ellos,
A. 4 ellos,
^6. de ellos.

Plural masculine.

they,
of them.

to them. les, se,
them. los,
• from them.

to Atm.|
Am.|

(0 (A<?m4
(Aem4

* iBStead of the pronouas of the third person singnlar and plural,
masculme and feminine, if we address one or many persons to whom
we owe much respect, we make use of su mercedf and tus mereedes.
£z. Su mereed ettd bueno ; ms mereedes tst6n bvenot.

t Formerly we used to suppress the e of the preposition dc, before
U pronoun ; now this contraction is rejected by the Academy ; it is
suppressed before el, article. (See the note page 26.)

X As it is easy to confound, in the use of these pronouns, those of
the dalive with those of the accusative, and as the Spaniards them-
selves confound them frequerttly, we have thought the following obser-
vations necessary.

A verb may have two regimens, one direct and the other, indirect.
(See the difference of these two regimens, p. 66.) If the pronoun is
the direct regimen, as in these phrases, I see hinif I respect her, J love
them, all these pronouns are in the accusative, and we must say ;
lo veo, la respeeto, los or las quiero. But, if it is the indirect regimen,
as in the following phrases, he wrote to him a letter, I gave them
good advice, the pronouns are in the dative, and we must say in Span-
ish ; le esenbi6 una carta, lesdl buenos const jos, Le^ les, serve in the
dative for both genders.
5*

54

PRONOUNS.

Singuiar feminine,

Proiu as regimen,
•V. ella, - sheyU.

G, deella, • of hereof it.
D. 4 ella, - to her, to it,
A. 4 ella, - hermit.

Ab, deeWsi, from herefrom it.

le, se,
la,

N. ellas,

O, de ellas, -

D, 4 ellas, -

A, i ellas, -

Ab. de eUas, •*

Plurd feminine.

Oey.
ofth^im.

to them, les, Sje,
them, las,
from them.

toher.t
her.}

toihem.t
ihem.\

D. 4 si,
A. 4 si,
M. de sf ,

N. B

se, tohimsdffc.
se, himselff^c.

1st.

PRONOUN REFLECTIVE.

This pronoun has no nominative.

G. de sf, of oneself himself, herself
themselves,
to oneself himself herself,
to oneself Sfc.
from oneself Sfc.

When the word mismo, self is united to this
pronoun, it agrees in gender and number with the noun or
nouns to which the pronoun relates. Ex. Ellos hablan de si
mismos, l^ey speak of themselves ; ellas se condenan d si mis^
mas, they condemn themselves.

N. B. 2d. The pronouns mf, tf, si, me, thee, oneself^
preceded by the preposition con, with, are changed in Span-
ish into mig'o, tigo, sigo, which are united to the preposition.
Ex. conmigOy with me ; contigo, with thee ^ consigo, with
him, with her.

table of PRONOUNS AS REOI«lfiN OR OBJECTIVE.

1st. pers. sing. masc. and fem.
Istpers. plur. masc. and fem.
2d. pers. sing. masc. and fem.
2d. pers. plur. masc. and fem.

to me, me,

DatiTe. AccaiatiTe.

me, me.

to iLs, us,
to thee, thee,
to you, you.

nos, nos.
te, te.

OS, OS.

X See the note on the preceding page.

FBONOUNS. 55

D«tiv«. AficoMdhr*.

3d. pers. sing. masc. & neut. to ^im, to Uj him^ it, le, se, le, lo.
3d. pers. plur. masc. to tkem^ (Aem, les^se, los.

3d. pers. sing. fem. to her, her^ le, se, la.

3d. pers. plur. fem. to themy them^ les,se, las.

'^^W'ma.'f^dtf: \tohimsdfM»cmc.>e, se.

ON THE COKSTRUCTION OF PRONOUNS AS BBOIMBN, OB
OBJECTIVE.

Rule XXVI. The pronouns as regimen, me, no9 ; te,
OS ; le, lo, les, los ; la, las, se, must be placed after the verb,
whenever it is in the mfiniiwe, imperative, or a gerund; and
in these cases they are united close to the verb, so as to
form with it, at least in appearance, a single word. Ex. No
quiero darlol I will not give it; daZo, give it ; ddndoU), in giv-
ing it.

In all other cases, the general rule requires that they be
placed before the verb. Ex. Te digo, I tell thee ; le escri-
Inrdy he will write to him. We however find examples of
pronouns used as regimen placed after verbs in other modes
and tenses than those mentioned in the preceding rule; as,
digoh^ I say it ; har6lo, I shall do it ; sucideme muclm veces,
it oftei happens to me. But as it is practice that must de-
termine the propriety of this construction, it is best for the
scholar to follow the general rule, until well versed in the
language.

Rule XXVU. The pronouns of indirect regimen, to
HIM, TO hBr, to it, and to them, when they are accom-
panied by one of the pronouns of direct regimen,
lo, la, los, las, must be translated by se. Ex. Se lo dart, I
will give it to him, to her, to it, to them.

Rule XXVm. We use also very elegantly the same
pronoun se, when, besides the pronouns of direct regimen
lo, la, &c. the verb has a noun for an indirect regimen, and
then se is merely an expletive. Ex. Seh promtto d vm,,
I. promise it to you ; se and d vm. stand for to your favour
separately, therefore it is a repetition to give clearness and
force to the idea.

Rule XXIX. This pronoun se is also frequently used
in Spanish to express the passive of vei:bs, as in these
phrases; se movid la tierra, the earth was shaken ; la tempes"
tad se apacigud, the tempest was appeased ; se dobla 6 repite

56 rmoKotJirs.

H ckanart the cries are increased or repeated. In these
phrases se denotes that the verbs have a passive signification,
though they retain the active termination. This is like the
latin ; terra movU ; tempestas aedavU ; damor ingemimU.

Rule XXX. — When the pronoun noSy us, is a direet
regimen, and is found immediately after the verb that gov-
erns it in the accusative, this verb, if it is in the first person
of the plural, loses its final «. Ex. Divertinumosj we amuse
ourselves ; amdmonoiy we love one another ; and in the im-
perative mode, if the second person of the plural is followed
by <w, you, it loses the d. Ex. CuMogy cover yourselves.

N. B. To give more force and energy to the phrase, we
frequently place the pronoun, in Spanish, when it is the ob-
ject of the action, both before and after the verb ; and in
this case one of the pronouns is always without the preposi-
tion, and the other is always preceded by the preposition d ;
as in the following phrases ; le esiiman d ily they esteem
him ; me han escrito d miy they have written to me ; 3/0 4
H no te qaierOy I do not love thee. Also, when the verb has
no other regimen but yoti, if this pronoun is rendered by
vuestra mercedy or vuestras mercedesy we often elegantly
place before the verb one of these pronouns le, loj los,, las^ or
lesy according to the gender and number of the person or
persons which the pronoun represents, and according to the
case the verb governs. Ex. JVb le basta a vm. el preten-
der .... it is not sufficient for you to pretend. , . , Ya
lo han dichOf aefiora ; jamas la visitardn d vm. ; they said^
madam, they never will see you.

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.

The pronouns possessive serve to denote the possession
of an object. They follow the rules of adjectives.

In order to render the use of these pronouns more clear
and striking, we distinguish them into two kinds ; those that
are always joined to a noun and do not take an article ; as
mi, tuy suy &c. my, thy, his, &c. Ex. Mi padre, my father ;
tu madre, thy mother ; su hijo, his son ; and those that are
not joined to the noun, and take the article ; as, el mio, el
tuyoy elsuyoy ^c. mine, thine, his, &c.

PRONOUNS. 57

OF PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE THAT ARE ALWAYS ROUSTED TO

NOUNS*

These pronouns denote possession, either as respects one
|)erson or many.

Those which, in Spanish, relate only to one person are,
in the singular, mt, my ; <ti, thy ; and in the plural, mt>,
my ; *m«, thy.

Those which denote that the possession relates to many,
are, nuestroy masculine, nuestra, feminine ; nuestroSy mascu-
line, nuestrasy feminine, our ; vuestrOy masculine, vuestrOy
feminine, your. For the third person in the singular, «u, his,
her, or their ; and in the plural susy his, her or their ; and
these pronouns of the third person may, in Spanish, relate to
one possessor, or to many.

DBCLENSIOII OP PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE.

N. B. The declension of these pronouns presenting no
difficulty, it will be sufficient to decline the first and give the
nominative of the others. They take no article.

SINGULAR AND PLURAL.

Matculine and feminine*

N. mi, sing, mis, plur. - - - - my.

G. demi, demis, ... - of my,

D. 4 mi, 4 mis, - - - - to my.

A. mi, 4 mi, mis, 4 mis, - - - - my.

Ah. de mi, de mis, . . - . from my.

When this pronoun my is used in calling, in addres-
sing a person or in exclamations, instead of mi, mis, we
make use of mioy mia, miosy miasy without an article ; they
are placed after the noun to which they refer, and teike its
gender and number. Ex. Amigo mio, my friend ; hija mia^
my daughter ; amigos miosy my friends, &c.

58 PAONOUNS.

UNOULAR AND PLURAL.

Masculine and feminine.

Ta, tus,» - %.

4ia, susjt .--.-- hisy her^ its.

nuestroy nuestra, os, as^ ... our.f

vuestro, vuestra, oSy aSy - - yoi/r.J

8u, sus, ------ their.

OP PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE NOT JOINED TO NOUNS.

These pronouns admit the masculine, feminine, and neu-
ter termination, and relate, as well as the preceding, to one
or more persons. Those, that relate to a single person, are :
el mio, masc. la miOy fem. sing, los rnios, masc. las nuaa^
fem. plural, mine ; eltuyo masc. la iuya^ fem. sing, hs tuyos^
ku tuyaSy fem. plural^ thine.

* We have said when speaking of personal pronouns, that tti and
wt are not used in good society. It is the same with the possessire
pronoans tu and vueifro, in the place of which we make vae oide rm.
in speaking to one person, and of de vmt. in speaking to several ; and
we place l^fore the noun substantive one of these articles elf loSf la,
hu, according to the gender arid number of the noon. Ex. Your son,
that is, the son of your favour, or of your favonrs, el hijo de vm, or
de vms. (vtn. if we speak only to the father or to the mother ; vnu. if
we speak to both.)

t When we speak of a person for whom we wish to show much
respect, instead of su, we may make use of su Mereedy su Senoria, jw
EscelenciOf according to the rank of the person } and such a phrase
as the following; I have seen the Corregidor, and hope to obtain bis
protection (that is the protection of hisfatour^ is rendered in Spanish,
ke visto tU wnorCorregidor, yetpero mereeer la proteeeiim de #u merted.

t Though the pronouns nuettro and vuettro, seem as though thej
ought to express the idea of more than one person, it happens some-
times that they relate only to one ; for the king says Jfue^lro eonstjoj
our council ; and in speaking to a person distingtiijthed for his rank
and authority, we make use of vvMtrOy vueslra. We say for example,
Vueslra Magesiad, vuestra Beaiitudy vueslra Ilu^risima, vuutraMUza,
he. Your Majesty, your Holiness, your Grace, your Highness &c.
We use the same pronouns vwstro and vuestra, in speaking to God, to
the Holy Virgin and the saints. When your is turned by of your
fa/pour or of your favours, de vti^or de vms., we frequently use the pro*
nouns «u and «tM, instead of th# article before the substantive. Ex.
He recivido su carta (or sus cartas) de vm. or de vms., I have received
your letter or your letters.

nONOUNS.

59

Those that relate to several persons, are ; el nuestro^
masc. la nuestrOy fern. sing, los nuestro8y masc. ku nuestras^
fern, plural, ours ; el vuestrOy masc. la vuestra^ fern. sing. lo9
vuestrosj masc. las vuestrasj fern, plural, yours ; el gulf Oy masc
la sutftty fern, his, hers, theirs ; loe suyosy masc, lot 9uya9^
fem. his, hers, theirs.

N. B. These pronouns are always preceded by the
noun to which they relate, and with which they agree in gen-
der and number ; this noun is that which represents the ob-
ject possessed, and not the possessor.*

The following declension will serve as a rule for those
pronouns that are dechned with the article.

N.
G.
D.
A.
Ah.

DECLENSION OF THB PRONOUN, MIO.

Singular masculiTie and feminine.

el mio,
del mio,
al mio,
el or al mio,
del mio.

la mia,

de la mia,

d la mia,

la mia or 4 la mia,

de la mia.

Plural Tnasctdine and feminine,

las mias,

de las mias,

4 las mias,

las mias, or 4 las mias,

de las mias,

mine.

of mine.

to mine.

mine.

from mine.

N. los mios,

G. de los mios,

D. 4 los mios,

«d. los mios, or 4 los mios,

Ab. de los mios.

The following pronouns are to be declined in the same
manner.

Singidar masculine and feminine.
la tuya,

mine,
of mine,
to mine^

mine,
from mine.

El tuyo,
el suyo,
el nuestro,
el vuestro,
el suyo,

la suya,
la nuestra, -
la vuestra -
la suya.

thine.

hisy hers.

ours.

yours.

theirs.

* This rule requires a particular attention because the En^^lish most
always cause these pronouns to agree with the possessor and not with
the object possessed. Ex. /* that your tisUr's book f J^Oj ii is mine ;
here it hert ; hert, pronoun, refers to tister and not to book ; in Span-
ish, on the contrary, we roust say : es este el libro de ni hermana
de vm.f — JVb, et el mio ; he aqui el tuyo ; tuyo is in the masculine be-
cause it refers to libro and not to hermema.

CO PK0N0UN8.

Phiral nuttcultne and feminine.

Los tayos, - - las tuyas, - - thine*

lossuyos^ - - lassuyas, - - kiSyhers.

lo8 Duestros, - - las nuestras, - •" aurt.

lo8 vuestros, - - las vuestras^ - - yotcrf.

los suyos, - - las suyas, - - thein.

Rule XXXI. These last pronouns, mio^ tuyoj Sfc. some-
times accompany a substantive, principally in exclamations,
or when they are used in addressing a person, but then the
substantive precedes the pronoun, and does not take an arti-
cle. Ex. Father ! padre mio ! mother ! vMdre nUa ! come,
friend, &c. oen, amigo mto, Sfc,

Rule XXXII. When the verb to be is taken in the
sense of to belong^ we use in Spanish as in English the pos-
sessive pronoun, mto, mine, tuyo^ thine, &c. without the ar-
ticle, but this pronoun in Spanish agrees in gender and num-
ber with the tning possessed of which we speak. Ex. This
book is mine^ este lihro es mio ; this house is thine, his,
. theirs^ ours, &c. esta casa es tuya^ guyaj nuestra, ^c.

N. B. 1st When the verb to 6e, taken in the sense
of to belong, is followed or preceded by another pro-
noun or by a noun, this noun or pronoun must be put in the
genitive. Ex. This book is Mr.B's, esU libro es del senor B ;
this horse is my brother's, este caballOf es de mi hermano ;
whose house is this, de quien es esta casa ? (see the pronoun
cuyo, Rule XXXIV.)

N.B. 2d. This same observation must be regarded for the
possessive pronoun ^ours, after the verb to he^when instead of
vuesiro^ we should wish to employ vm. and vms. (vuestra
MERCED and vuESTRAS MERCEDES,) youT favwT and your
favours. Thus, in this phrase ; this book is yoiu^ ; if I ex-
press yours by de trni., I must say, este libro es de vin., sing.
de ustedeSf plural.

Rule XXXIII. To translate of mine, of thine, of his, ike.
the Spaniards use commonly the possessive pronouns mio,
tuyo, suyo, ^c. placed as in English, but without the preposi-
tion of. Ex. A brother of his, un hermano myo ; a friend
of mine, un amigo mio.

PKONOUNS. 61

OP PRGNOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE.

Pronouns demonstrative indicate, and place, as it were,
under the eye, the person or the thing of which they
hold the place. They are divided into three kinds.

The following pronoun designates the object that is near
the person that speaks.

Singular masculine and feminine,
Este, esta, - - - - ^^m«

Plural masculine and feminine.
Estos, estas, ... - these.

Neuter.
Esto, - - - this, this thing, any thing.

If the object is more distant from the person that speaks,
than from the one to whom the speech is addressed, we
make use of the following pronoun ;

Singidar masculine and feminine.
Ese, esa, - . - - thai.

Plural masculine and feminine.
Esos, esas, - - - - those.

Neuter.
Eso, - - that^ thai thing, any thing.

The pronouns that follow, express a distant object, both
from the person who speaks, and from him to whom the
speech is addressed.

Singular masculine and feminine.
Aquel, el, aquella, la, - A« that, she thaJL

Plural masculine and feminine.
Aquello8,lo8, aquellas, las, - they, those.

Neuter.
Aquello, ello, lo, - - thai, U

There are also three other pronouns which are com-
pounded of the preceding and of the adjective otro, 6tra,
other. Viz.
6

62 PRONOUNS.

MaKtdine and Feminine^ Singular and fluraL

Estotro, estotra, estotros, estotras, this other, these others.

Esotro, esotra, esotros, esotras, that other y those others.

Aquelotro,aquel- aqueUcj. otr^a. J ^^ those athxs.

la otra^ quellas otras^ ^ '

Neuter,
Estotro, esotro, aquello otro, • this and that other.

He who, she loho, they who, or that, are translated
by tl que or quien, la que, los or las que, or by aquel que,
aquella que, aqueUos or aquellas que.

fVhal or tkat which are translated by bt que, aquello que.

OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE.

Pronouns relative are those that relate to a noun or pro-
noun which precedes. Some taker the article, others do not.
The following do not take the article.

Singular mascyiine and feminine.
N. que, quien,* - - - - who, that, which.

G, de quien, - - - - of whom, whose, Sfc.
D. i quien, ----.. /o whom,

A. d quien or que, ----- whom.

Ah. de quien, ------ from whom.

Plural masculine and feminine.
N. que, quienes,t - - - who, that, which.

G. de quienes, - - - - of whom, whose, ^c.
D. 4 quienes, ...--- fo whom.
A. 4 quienes, ------ whom.

Ah. de quienes, from whom.

Neuter.
Lo que, . - - . - that which, what.

de que, ------- of what.

4 que, .-.-.--to whaL

* Quten and quienu are applied oolj to persons and personified
things ; que ^tb to persons and things.

t We also use qaien in the plural number, says the Grammar of
the Academy i And it eiTes the following examples. Loiffrimero$ eo»
quiEn topamos errni To* gimnot^stMf the first whom we met were the
gymnosophists. ; Jqueltot nttt tabios h %cisir tmUo vtfMir^ la Gr^fiaf
those seven sages so much venerated by the Greeks.

FBONOUNS. 63

N. B. Whose is translated by the pronoun cuyoy cuyay
cuyos^ cuyas, following the gender and number of the thing
possessed, by which this pronoun cuyo must be immediately
followed, if it is relative^ but from which it is commonly
separated by the verb, when it is interrogative. It always
agrees with the object possessed, and never with the pos-
sessor.

CUYO, CUYA, CUYOS, CUYAS.

Rule XXXIV. The pronoun cuyo is relative and inter-
rogative, and is used for whose, of which; but care should be
taken to observe, as has been already said, that it agrees
with the thing possessed, and not with the possessor, and is
applicable in Spanish to persons as well as to things. Ex.
Whose book is this ? cuyo es este libro ? Whose pens are
those, cuyas son esas pJumas ? She is a lady whose qualities
are known, es una senora cuyas "prendas son conosidas. Lon-
don the streets of which are so wide, Londres cuyas caUes
son tan anchas.

Rule XXXV. When the pronoun that, preceded by ^
noun or pronoun to which it relates, may be rendered by
of whom, in whoni, by whom, for whom, &c. it must be ex-
pressed by de quien, d quieviy en quien, por quien &c. Ex.
It is of oneself that one ought to be afraid, de si mismo es de
quien se ha de tener miedo, that is, of whom &c. It is to
God that we must have recourse, es d Dios d quien espreciso
de acudir, that is, to whom, &c.

ANOTHEB PBONOUN RELATIVE.

This pronoun is declined with the article.

Singular masculine and feminine.

N. el cual, - la cual, - - lohich?

G. del cual, - de la cual, - - of which*

D, al cual, - 4 la cual, - -to which.

A. el cual, al cual, la cual, k la cual, - which.

Ah, del cual, - de la cual, - "from which.

Plural masculine and feminine,
N. los cuales, - las cuales, - - which.

G. de los cuales, - de las cuales, - - of which,
D. k los cuales, - 4 las cuales, - ^ to which.
A. los cuales, i los cuales, las cuales, 4 las cuales which.
Ah, de los cuales, - de las cuales, - from whic^

04 PRONOUNS.

OP PRONOUNS INTERR00AT1\"E.

Pronouns interrogative are those wiiich serve to interro-
gate ; they are declined without the article.

Singular masculine and feminine,

N. quien, who.

G. de quien^ ------ of whom.

jD. 4 quien, - to whom.*

A. quien, i quien, . . . - . whom.

Ab. de quien, ------ from whom^

Plural Tna&cuiine and feminine.
quienes, &c. &c. ------ who.

Neuter.
N. que, ------ what.

G. de que, ------ of what.

D. k que, - to wheU^

A. que. - - - - - - what.

Ab. de que, ------ from what.

Which is translated by cual, cuales^ of both genders. Ex.
You have read these books ; which of the two do you pre-
fer ? Vm. ha leido estos libros ; cual de los dos prefer e ?

What is rendered by que of both genders and numbers.
Ex. What book do you read, que libro lies ? What o'clock
is it ? que hora es ? What fruits will you buy ? que frutas
comprardvm. ?

OP PRONOUNS INDEPINITE.

These pronouns are thus called, because they express an
object vague and indeterminate. All those that are placed
in this class are not always pronouns, strictly so called, but
become adjectives when they are joined with nouns, and
present some particulars which it is essential to make
familiar.

* See Rule XXXIV for the proooun euyOy-af-oa,-as.

PBON0t7NSi

65

Nobody,

None, - - - - -

No, not any, (followed by a noun,)
Not one,

Neither,

Both,

£ach, every,
Each one,
Every body

One another,

naeUeyninguno.
ningunoy ninguna.
ningunoy ninguna,
- ni unoj ni uncu
ni uno ni otroy ni una ni otra ;. plural,
ni uno 8 ni otros^ ni unas ni otras.
ambos^s ; uno y otro,una y otra ; plu-
ral, uno9 y otroSi unas y otras.

coda,

coda uno J cada una.

. . . - - todo9.

otroy una otra^ plural, unos

uno

Of others,

L

otrosy unas otraa.
deotroydeotros. Toothers, a otro^
d otros ; and \i of others is govern-
ed by a substantive, it is then
translated by agenoy agena, agenoSf
agenas, according to the gender
and number of the noun to which
it relates ; as, the property of oth-
ers, el bien ageno, Sfc.

alguieny alguno.
a^uno^j os-as,

unoSf unas, aJgunos, alguna9-

muchos, muchasj varios, varias.

Some .one, somebody.
Some, (relating to a noun,)
Some, (always join- >
ed to a noun,) 5
Many, several.

Whosoever, wh^atsoever, cudtquiera, plural, cualesquiera.
Whoever, whosoever, - - quien quiera.

Whenever, - - - - siempre que.

Whatever, - - cualquiera^ue ; pormitsque.
However, howsoever, cualquiera cosa que ; por mas

que.i

Even, yet,

Such a one.
People say.
People assure.

Jukmo,

zuiano, a.
se dice,
se asegura.

OBSBKVATIOKS UPON THE INDKPINITE PRONOUNS.

Rule XXXVI. Any one and any body in interrogative

phrases, or in phrases implying doubt, must be expressed

in Spanish by uno, alguno. Of all those who know the

motives of my conduct is there any one who ha^ bls^oaed it?

6*

66 VBfRBS.

(le todos lo8 que conocen los moiivos de mis accionesy hay acaso
unoy 6y alguno que las haya condenado 1 I doubt that any one
has blamed it, dudo que alguno las haya condenado. I
doubt that any one be as wise ashe,dudo que alguno sea tan
sabio como6l, 8fc. This office suits him better than any one
else ; este empleo le conviene mejor que a cualquier otro.

Rule XXXVII. Nobody ^ no person whatever is transla-
ted by ningmoy nadie; and m^thing whatever is translated
by nada. Ex. Nobody wluttever has spoken ill of you to
me, NADIE me ha hablado mal de vm. Whatever genius
oae may have, one cannot, without application, excel in
any thing whatever, por nias ingenio que uno tenga en nada
puede sohresalir sin aplicacion.

Rule XXXVIII. In Spjg^nish the following pronouns
nobody f none, not one, neith&ry nothing ; nadie, ninguno, ni
uno, ni uno ni otro, nada, require that the verb be preceded
by the negative wo, when they are placed after it; but -this
negative is suppressed when they precede it. Ex. He can-
not excel in any thing, en nada puede sobresalir, or no puede
sobresalir en nada', the first construction is the most elegant.

N. B. The adverb jamas, never, follows the same rule.

CHAPTER VI.

OF V£RBS.

The verb is that part of speech which is essentially the
bond ot our thoughts, the soul of all our reasonings, and the
only one that has the property of pointing out the relation
that they have with the present, past and future. . Its office
is to express actions, passions and situations.

There are six kinds of verbs, to wit ; the active^ passive j
neuter, reflective, reciprocal and impersonal.

The active verb is that of which the regimen is direct, or
after which one may put alguno, alguna cosa, some one,
some thing. Amar, to love, is an active verb, because we
may say, amar d alguno, to love some one, amar la virtud^
to love virtue, and because in these two phrases the regimen
is direct. Buscar^ to seek, is also an active verb, because we

VERBS. 67

may say, buscar a alguno, huscar alguna cosa, to seek some*'
body, to look for something.

The passive verb is that which is formed from the active,
takes the direct regimen to form its subject, and always is
followed by one of these prepositions, por or de ; as, el horn-'
bre virtuoso es amado de iodoSf the virtuous man is loved
by every body.

The neuter verb is that after which we cannot put some
onej nor some thing, alguno, alguna cosa. Existir, dormir,
to exist, to sleep, are neuter verbs, because we cannot say :
dormir d alguno, dormir alguna casa, to sleep some one, to
sleep something.

The reflective verb is that of which the subject and the
regimen are the same person, or, that which is conjugated
with two pronouns of the same person, expressed or under-
stood ; Arrepentirse, to repent, is a reflective verb, because
in order to conjugate it, we must mak^ use of two pronouns,
and say ; yo me arrepiento, td te arrepientes, ^l se arrepi-
enie, &c. or, me arrepiento, te arrepientes, se arrepiente, Sfc.
(aed then yo, td, tl are understood,) I repent, thou repentest,
he repents, &c.

The reciprocal verb * is that which expresses the action
of several subjects that act one upon the other. Ex. Los
verdaderos amigos deben amarse y servirse unos a otros, true
friends must love and serve one another.

The impersonal verb is that which is us6d, in all its tenses
only in the third person of the singular. Tronar, to thun-
der, is an impersonal verb, because it has in each tense only
the third person. We say ; Truena, tronaba, tronS, tronard,
&c. it thunders, it did thunder, it thundered, it will thunder ;
but we cannot say ; I thunder, thou thunderest, we thunder,
unless it be in a figurative sen^e.

Verbs may be regular, irregular, or defective.

The regular verbs, in the Spanish language, are those of
which the radical letters are always the same, and of which

* In order that the verb should clearly express r- ciprocity, it is
often necessary to add to it the following words, uno d otroy muiua'
tnentey a porfia, one another, mutually, in emulation of one another.
In tliis phrase, Cicero y Antonio no dejaban de alabar$e uno a olro,
Cicero and Anthony did not cease to praise one another ; if v»e should
not |>ut UHi: d otro there would be an equivocation which would leave
a doubt of the reciprocity of the action.

68 V£RBS.

the terminations are, in all the tenses, conformable to those
of the verb that serves as a model for them.

We call those irregalar, which vary in the radical letters,
or which do not agree, in aU the tenses, with the termina-
tions of the verb, that serves as a model.

N.B. We understand by radical letters those which
precede the termination of the infinitive. We reckon only
three conjugations in Spanish, the first has the infinitive ter-
minated in ar^ as amary to love ; the second has it in er, as
tenter, to fear ; the third has it in ir, as subir, to go up. In
these verbs all the letters that precede ar, er, and ir, that is,
am, tern, and sub, are radical, and those that follow them in
all the tenses, as well as in all the persons, form the termina-
tions.

Lastly, we call those verbs defective, that want certain
tenses or certsun persons, which use does not admit.

There are besides auxiliary verbs, so called, because they
serve to conjugate the others. The Spanish language reck-
ons three, to wit ; haber and tener, to have ; and «er, to be.

OP CONJUGATION.

To conjugate a verb, is to collect or recite all its termina-
tions, as ; amo, amas, ama, &c I love, thou lovest, he loves,
&C. ; amaba, amabas, amaba, &c. I did love, thou didst love,
he did love, &c.

These different terminations form modes^ tenses, numher$
and persons,

OF MODES.

Modes are different manners of using the verb. There
are five, infinitive, indicative, conditional, imperative and
subjunctive.

The infinitive expresses indefinitely, and in a general
manner the action or state that the verb designates. The
infinitive is consequently neither susceptible of number or
person ; as, amar, temer, subir, to love, to fear, to go up.

The indicative points out and indicates in a dh-ect and
absolute manner what we affirm of a person or thing ; as,
amo y temo al Dios que me criS, y cuyajusticia recompensard
a los buenos, y castigard d los malos ; 1 love and fear the
God who created me, and whose justice will reward the
good, and punish the wicked.

The conditional is the manner of expressing the affirma-
tion depending upon a condition, as ; yo leeria, si tuviera

VERBS. ft>

libros, I should read if I had books ; yo hubiera escrilo una
carta antes de comer, si no huhiese tenido la visita del junor
Conde de Floridablanca, I should have written a letter before
dinner, if I had not had a visit from Count de Fioridablanca.

The imperative expresses the action of cptnmanding, pray-
ing or exhorting. This mode has but one tense that desig-
nates the present in relation to the action of commanding,
and the future in relation to the thing commanded ; as,
dame este libro, give me this book. Venid manana^ come to-
morrow. Hdgame vm. el favor de, , , do me the favour of. . .
This tense has no first person in the singular, because we do
not conmiand ourselves ; but it has in the plural, because
then it is rather others than ourselves that we address.

The subjunctive is a mode which, in order to make sense,
requires to be preceded by another verb, expressed or un-
derstood, on which it depends. It depends upon it, because
it makes sense with and would not make any without it.
These words ; quisiera que viniese, I should wish that he
came, make sense ; but these, que viniescy that he came,
alone and separate, would not make any.

OF TENSES.

We shall follow, in the division of tenses, tlie method re-
ceived by the most esteemed and approved grammarians ;
and in order to obviate the very serious difficulties, which
the three futures and the three conditionals of the Spanish
verbs present, we have thought it best to deviate from the
plan followed by the Academy of Madrid. This plan may
be excellent for the Spaniards who join, to the study of
grammar, a constant practice ; but it is too obscure for for-
eigners, as it deviates too much from the usage of other lan-
guages, and contains rules which are not sufficiently particu-
lar. Therefore, instead of comprising the two futures con-
junctive, the second and third conditional in the subjunctive,
we shall place the two futures in the indicative, we shall
make a mode of the conditional that will have three termi-
nations, and the subjunctive will have the tenses that it com-
monly has in other languages. This order has appeared to
us the most proper to render obvious the relations that exist
between the Spanish and English languages.

70 VKRBS.

OF TBB TENSSS OF THE INFINITIVE.

The tenses of the infinitive are the preserUj the preterilCf
the gerund and the partidpie.

l^e present of the infinitive always designates the present
time relative to the preceding verb ; as, le veo correr, I see
him run ; le ol caniar^ I heard him sing ; le vert bailor, I
shall see him dance.

The preterite on the contraiy denotes the past time rela-
tive to the preceding verb ; as, creia haberU visto, I thought
I had seen him.

The gerund designates 1st. the state of the subject, the
reason or foundation of the action, as in these phrases :
oanta durmiendo, he sings in his sleep ; el empet^ador de Ale-
manidy temiendo que la paz no durase mucho tiempo, licencid
muy pocas tropasy the emperor of Germany, fearing that the
peace would not last long, disbanded only a few troops. In
the first example, durmifindOf expresses the Mate of the sub-
ject ; and in the second, temiendo^ expresses the reason or
pounds of the action of the emperor.

2d. It denotes a manner or a mean of attsuning an end,
and then it is almost always preceded by the preposition en,
in. Ex. No espere el hombre ser jamas feliz en dejandose ar^
rasirar de ms pasumesy no lo puede ser ^ino en domindndolas.
Let man never expect to be happy in giving himself up txy
his passions, he can only be so by subduing them.

3d. It serves to express a condition. Ex. Siendo esto asi^
volvert a Francia, this being so, I shall return to France.

4th. It is frequently used with the verb estar, to be, to
show in a more positive manner that an action is, was, has
been or will be done at the very time of which we speak.
Ex. Estd escribiendoy he is writing ; estaba escribiendo, he
was writing ; estard escribiendo, he will be writing.

The participle is thus called, because it participates in the
nature of the verb and that of the adjective. It is of the na-
ture of the verb, because it has its signification and regimen.
It is of the nature of an adjective, because it expresses a
quality.

The participles are divided into present and past ; into the
present ; as, awaw^c, obediente^ oyente, into past ; as, amac2o,
obedecido, oido. The participhs of the present have the ter.

V£RBS»

71

mlnation in ante^ as amante, for the fifst conjugation. Those
of the second and third have it in entCy as obedienta, oyenle.

The participles present are in use only in part of the
verbs ; the greater part being rather verbal adjectives than
participles, because lliey have not a regimen as their verbs.
Ex. Oyente, hearing ; leyente^ reading 5 are verbal adjectives,
because we cannot say, oyenle el sermon^ leyente lihrony usage
not permitting us to give a regimen to these participles.

The participles past of regular verbs have their termina*
tions in (ulo, for the first conjugation ; and in idx>y for the
second and thurd. Those that do not follow this rule are
irregular, and are found in their place in the alphabetical list
which is subjoined.

There are some verbs that have two participles past, the
one regular and the other irregular. The first is always
emf^oyed with the auxiliary verb haher, to have ; the second
is never joined to it, but follows the rule of adjectives, ex-
cept ingerio, grafted ; preao^ caught ; prescrilo, prescribed |
jirovistoy provided ; and roto^ broken ; which are used with
the auxiliary haber just as well as the regular participle.

VERBS THAT HAVE TWO PARTICIPLES.

Ahitar,

Bendecir,

Compeler,

Concluir,

Confundir,

Convencer,

Convertir,

Despertar,

Etegir,

Enjugar,

Escluir,

Espeler,

Espresar,

Estinguir,

Fijar,

Hartar,

Incluir,

Incurrir,

Insertar,

Part, regular.

Part, irregular

tosuffeit,

ahitado,

ahito.

to bless,

bendecido,

bendito.

to compel.

compelido.

compulse.

to conclude,

concluido,

concluso.

to confound,

confundido,

confuse.

to convince f

convencido.

convicto.

to convert,

convertido,

converse.

to awake.

despertado.

despierto.

to choose, to elect, elegido,

electo.

to wipe.

enjugado,

enjuto.

to exclude,

escluido.

escluso.

to expel.

espelido.

espulso.

espresado,

espreso.

to ecOinguish,

estinguido,

estinto.

tofix,

fijado.

fijo.

to satiate.

hartado.

harto.

to include,

incluido,

incluso.

to- incur.

incurrido.

incurso.

to insert,

insertado,

inserto.

r2

VERBS.

Invertir,

Ingerir,

Juntar^

Maldecir,

Manifestar,

Marchitar,

Omitir,

Oprimir,

Perfecionar,

Prender,

Prescribir,

Proveer,

Recluir^

Romper,

Soltar,

Suprimir,

to transpose^

to ingrafty

to join,

to curse,

to manifest,

to wither,

to omit,

to oppress,

to perfect,

to seize, to arrest,

to prescribe,

to provide,

to confine,

to break,

to loosen or release,

to suppress.

invertido,

ingerido,

juntado,

maldecido,

manifestado,

marchitado,

omitido,

opriiDido,

perfecionado,

prendido,

prescribido,

proveido,

recluido,

rompido,

soltado,

suprimido,

ivnerso.

ingerto.

junto.

maldito.

manifiesto.

marchito.

omiso.

opreso.

perfect©.

preso.

prescrito.

provisto.

recluso.

roto.

suelto.

supreso.

There are other participles, the termination of which is
passive, and the signification active ; such as the foUowing.

Acostumbrado,

Agradecidoy

Atrevido,

Bien cenado,

Bien comido,

Bien hablado,

Callado,

Cansado,

Comedido,

Deseperado,

Disimulado,

Entendido,

Esforzado,

Fingido,

Leido,

Medido,

Mirado,

Moderado,

Negado, /

Ocasionado,

Osado,

Parado

accustomed*

grateful

bold:

who has supped well.

who has dined weU.

who speaks weQ,

discreet.

tiresome.

prudent.

in despair.

dissembling, hypocritical.

intelligent.

brave, intrepid.

deceitful, artful.

who has read much, toell informed.

cautious, circumspect.

prudent, regardful,

moderate.

destitute of intelligence.

quarrelsome.

daring, undaunted.

slow, heavy.

Parecido; - remnhUng.

Partido, - UberaJy who shares what he has.

Pausado, - deliberate,

Porfiado, - obstinate^ stubborn.

Preciado, - vain^ presuny^tuous.

Precavido, - cautious.

Presumidoy - presumptuous.

Recatado, - considerate^ discreet.

Sabido, - learned.

Sacudido, roughy uniractable.

Sentido, - sensitive, susceptible.

Sufrido, - enduring, patient.

Trascendido, - penetrating, keen minded,

Valido^ - con^dent, favourite.

All the participles have also a passive • signification, and
it is the sense of the phrase that determines Vhich of the
two significations we must adopt. We see^ for example, that
in these expressions, ^m6r6 leido, a well read man ; muger
leida ; libro kido, a book that has been read ; carta leida :
the participles leido, leida, have an active signification, when
they refer to kombre and to muger ; and passive, when they
refer to libro and to carta. Thus, if I say ; Pedro es un
hombre cansado and Pedro efdd cansado de. trabqfar, we see
by the different use of the two verbs, es, estd (See upon
these two verbs the Rule XLIX,) that the first of these
phrases signifies, Peter is a tiresome man, and the second,
Peter is tired of working.

OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.

The Spaniards reckon eight tenses in the indicative,
which are the present, the imperfect, the preterite definite,
the preterite indefinite, the preterite anterior, the pluperfect,
the future absolute, and the future anterior. We shall place
in continuation of these two futures the future conjunctive
simple, and the future conjunctive compound (though it seems
they should belong to the subjunctive or conjunctive mode,)
so as the better to compare them together ; and exhibit the
difference between them. This method will give ten tenses
to the indicative.
7

74 VERBS.

The present denotes that a thing is, or is done at the mo^
ment we speak ; as, soyy I am ; amo, I love ; suboy I go up.

The impelled denotes the past with relation to the pres-
ent, and makes known that a thing was present in a past
time ; as, yo e^crihia^ or estaba escribiendo cuando mi herma"
no ilegSy I did write, or I was writing when my brother
arrived.

The imperfect serves also to denote habitual actions, or
actions often repeated in a past time ; 9s yoiba a la comedia
tl ano pasado dos veces coda semancif I went (used to go) last
year to the play twice a week.

It serves also to express the qualities, either good, or bad,
of men who are no more ; as, ^eron era un hVcino, Nero
was a tyrant ; Enrique cuarto era un rey benifico^ Henry the
fourth was a beneficent king.

The preterite may designate, either in a precise or only
in a vague and indeterminate manner, that a thing has been
done.

Thence arise two preterites ; the preterite definite and the
preterite indefinite. The 'preterite definite denotes a thing
done at a time of which nothing more remains ; as, escribi
ttysr, I wrote yesterday ; comi el lunes Ultimo en casa dtl
senor Pitty I dined on Monday last at the house of Mr. Pitt.

The preterite indefinite denotes a thing done at a time
designated in an indeterminate manner, or at a time past but
of which something yet remains ; as, la muerte de tu herma"
no me ha afligido mucho, the death of thy brother has afflicted
me much ; he recibido esta semana muchisim^is visitasy I have
received this week a great many visits.

These two preterites cannot be indifferently used one for
the other, it is essential to perceive clearly the difference
that exists between them. In order that we may use the
preterite definite, it is at least necessary that the time elapsed
of which we speak should be a whole day ; as, fui ayer a la
comedioy I went yesterday to the play ; vi al rey la semana
pasaday I saw the king last week. We cannot therefore say,
estudiS esta wMfUma ; escribi hoyy esta semanOy este mesy este
anoy <^c. ; I studied this morning, I wrote to day, this ijireek,
this month, this year, &c. because the morning, the day, the
week, the month, the year, are not entirely elapsed. On the
contrary, in order that we may use the preterite indefinitCy
there must yet remain some part of the time past of which

VSBBS. 75

we speak ; as, he visto esta mafiana td primer pinUyr del rey
de Espanoy I have seen this morning the first painter of the
king of Spain ; hemos visto grandes eventos en este siglo^
we have seen great events in this century.

There is still another preterite which is called preterite
anterior^ because it expresses a thing past before another in
a time past ; as, despues que hube visto al rey, salt de Madrid,
after I had seen the king, I went out of Madrid. — This pre^
terile is only used after the adverbs of time, despues que,
luego que, asi que, cuando, after, as soon as, so soon as, when.

The pluperfect is compounded of two past tenses. It de-
notes a thing not only as past in itself, but also as past in re-
gard to another thing which is also past; as, yo hablaya ce-
Tuido cuando enir6y I already had supped when he came in.

N. B. The futures, as well as the conditionals, present-
ing to strangers considerable difficulty, we request them to
pay to the following rules a particular attention.

OP THB FUTURES.

There are in the Spanish language four futures ; the fu-
ture simple or absolute ; the future compound or anterior ;
the future conjunctive simple, and the future conjunctiva
compound.

The future absolute denotes that a thing will be, or wilt
be done at a time which is yet to come ; as, ai> arnar6 sieni'
pre (d Dio9 que me cri6, yes, I shall always love the God
who create^ me.

N. B. This future has often the signification of the impe-
rative, in the second person ; as, amards a Dios de todo tu
corazon, thou shalt love God with all thy heart ; no rohards,
thou shalt not steal.

The future anterior denotes the future with relation to
the past, making known that, at the time a thing will happen,
another shall be past; as, habrS acabado mi carta cuando tal
6tidcosa mceduj I shall have finished my letter when such or
such a thing happens.

These two futures difier in this, that in the future absolute
the time may or may not be determined ; as, iri, 6 iri mana-
na a Bristol, I shall go, or I shall go to-morrow to Bristol*
On the coptrary, in the future anterior, tb^ period is nece&>

76 VERBS.

sarily determined ; as, habr6 comido cuando vrnjlegue^ I
shall have dined when you arrive.

The future conjunctive^ which is so called, because it is
always joined either to a conjunction or an adverb, or to a
pronoun that governs it, serves to denote a future action al-
ways expressed in English by the present of the indicative
when the verb is preceded by the conjunction st, if; some-
times by the present of the subjunctive when the verb is pre«
ceded by a conjunction that governs it in this mode, and of-
ten by the future absolute or anteiior.

Rules for using the future conjunctive.

Rule XXXIX. We use the future conjunctive when the
verb is governed by the conjunction si, if ; and when the
phrase expresses a future action ; as, no te digo que vivas,
ni que mueras ; vive^ si pudieres, y muere^ si no pudieres
tnas, I do not tell thee to live or to die ; live, if thou canst ;
die, if thou canst not do better.

Rule XL. We make use of the future conjunctive
whenever the verb is preceded by one of the pronouns
ilque,los queylaque, las que^ lo que ; ik'que, la-que^ los-que^
Sfc. or by the adjective cuanto, a, osy as, used in the sense of
todolo quCf toda la que^ todos los que, todas las que; de quien
(a pronoun relative) when it is used in the sense of one of
the above pronouns il que, los que, Sfc, and finally, when the
verb is governed by the adverb cuando, if these pronouns,
and this adjective and adverb are themselves preceded by
another verb expressing an action, which the remainder of
the phrase causes to depend on choice or chance ; as, elige^
pues^ de eslos dos partidos 61 que mas te agradare, choose
then of these two measures that which will please thee
most. — Teneinos ya dttemiinado hacer en obsequio suyo todo
LO QUE ALCANZAREN nuestros fuerzas, we have resolved to
do in his behalf all that shall be in our power. — Solo po^
drdn ser delincuenles, los que de vosotros nos juzgaren
ddincuentes, those only can be guilty, who, among you, shall
judge us guilty. Manda, lo que GusTARE3...reni£et7a, a nues--
tro buen amigo mifino afecto, y a cuantos se acordaren
de mi, dirds de mi parte todo lo que quisieres, command
what you please — renew to our good friend my sincere at-
tachment, and say from me all that you please to all those

VERBS. 77

who shall remember me. (Padre de isla.) VmAeerd
esU libroy cwmdo quisierej you will read this book when you
please.

The compound tense of the future conjunctive follows
the same rules.

N. B. 1st. The present of the subjunctive may be used
in almost every one of the above mentioned cases, instead
of the future conjunctive.

2d. After the conjunction st, if, the verb expressing a fu-
ture action is most frequently put in the future conjunctive.

OP THE CONDITIONAL.

This mode has in the Spanish language three simple and
three compound tenses, the terminations of which are in rfa,
ra and se. We shall call the three first conditionals presentj
and the three others conditionals past.

The conditional preseiU denotes that a thing would be, or
would be done in the present time under certain conditions ;
as, yo leeriay si tuviera or tuviese lihrosy I would read if I had
books.

The conditional past denotes that a thing would have been
in a time past under certain conditions ; as, hubiera ido
ayer a la comedian si huhiese eslado bueno. I should have
^one yesterday to the play, if I had been well.

Rules for the use of the conditional tenses.

Rule XLI. The first conditional, the termination of
which is riuj may be used whenever the verb is not governed
by any conjunction; which is the case with one of the mem-
bers in all conditional propositions ; as, leeria iodo el dia^ si
mi existencia no dependiera or dependiese de mi trabajo, I
should read the whole day, if my support did not depend
upon my labour. Elniimero de lospobres no seria tan gramle^
si fuera or fuese menor il de los avaros, the number of poor
would not be so great, if that of misers were less considera-
ble.

RrjLB XLII. The second conditional, the termination of
which is ra, and the third which is terminated in se, are used
7*

78 ^ VERBS.

whenever the verb is governed by a conditional conjunction ;
as, Sly if; smo, unless; aunqucy though ; bien quij although ;
dado que, granting that, &c. or by an interjection expressing
a desire : Ex. Auntjue hubiera or hubiese pojz, though peace
should take place. ; 0/al4 fuera or fuese cierto L Would
to God it were certain ! If there be in the second member
of these sentences, another conditional, we should make use
of the first; as, Si hubiera, or hubiese 6ue7ia /<^, seria
inayor la solidez de los contratos. If there should be good
faitn, the solidity of contracts would be greater.

Rule XLIII. The second conditional is used with ele*
gance after the interrogative pronouns, when we use it with
an exclamation, or to express surprise. Ex. Quien lo crete-
RA? quien lo imaoinara? who would believe it? who would
imagine it ? iSin el auxilio de laescritura, drgano de todas
las cienciaSf que hubiera en el mundo aino ignorancia ? with-
out the aid of writing, the organ of all the sciences, what
would there be in the world, but ignorance ?

Rule XLIV. We use the second or third conditional
after cuando, though, and after the pronouns il que^ los qtu^
la que^ Sfc. and after cuanto, a, osy as^ (mentioned in Rule XL.
when speaking of the future conjunctive,) when they them-
selves are preceded by a verb expressing an action, which
the remainder of the phrase causes to depend on choice or
chance ; as, le dige que iomase, en mi huerta todo lo que,
or cuANTo QuisiERA, I told him to take in my garden all
that or whatever he should wish. Prometid darme el dine-
ro QUE yo NECESiTARA or necesitase, he promised to give
iqe the money that I might want.

Rule XLV. When a conditional phrase does not begin
with a conjunction ; such as, si, aunquey luego que, &c., we
may make use of the first and second conditional, and say ;
fortuna seria or fuera que Uoviese ; bueno seria or puera
que lo mandasen. (Grammar of the Academy.) But in such
a case if there should be another conditional in the second
member of the phrase, this last must take the third termina-
tion, as in the preceding examples. It is even necessary to
observe that in general, when a phrase begins with the sec-
ond conditional and the first cannot be applied to the second

V8BB9. ' 79

member,* we must have recourse to the third, and not re-
peat the second ; if, on tlie contrary, it begins with the
third, we must, instead of repeating it in the second member,
make use of the second ; as, obligado me viera yo sin duda
d enmudecer^ 6 me content aba con ser el d6hU eco de sus
devadas cMusulas^ si losnuevosprogresosdelaAcademiano
ABRiESBN nuevo campo de asuntoB al ingemo^ no ofreciesen
d la elocuencia niuvas mieses, Sfc. I should, without doubt,
find myself obliged to keep silence, or content myself with
being the feeble echo of his eloquent speeches, if the new
progress of the Academy did not open to genius new sub-
jects, and offer to eloquence new harvests, &c.

N. B. 1st. Whenever the conditional is expressed by
means of the conjunction si, the verb that it governs is in
English in the imperfect of the subjunctive, and this imper-
fect is always tianslated in Spanish by one of the two con-
ditionals, according to the rules stated above, when the con-
junction expresses a future condition ; if on the contrary it
expresses on^ already past, the verb is put in Spanish in the
same tense as in English. Ex. Si yo fuera Hco^ socorreria
d log pobresy if I were rich I would assist the poor %sitl era

* Thoug'h Rule XLV. be extracted and faithfully translated from
the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, we think it might lead to er-
ror, if we should not give it a little more clearness. We therefore
observe, Ist. that a conditional phrase must contain two propositions';
the one principal, and the other subordinate. We call a principal
proposition that after which we place the conjunction, and a subor-
dinate proposition that which is placed after the conjunction.
Each of those propositions may contain several members. In this
phrase ; seriarecompensadOfSi fuera diligentej he would be rewarded,
if he were diligent ; he would be rewarded is the principal proposi-
tion. In the following, seria reeompensado y todoi le estimarian, si
ettudiara con mas atencion y fuera mas amante de la verdady he would
be rewarded and every body would esteem liim, if he should study
with more attention and were more fond of truth ; each of these prop-
ositions contains two members. 2d. that the Academy, in speaking
of the second member, understands the whole subordinate proposition;
for, if it contains several members, the same conditional roust be
used in each one of them ; it is the same with the principal proposi-
tion, as is seen in the example stated in Rule XLV. obligado me viera^
4^., the first proposition of which terminates with these words, a sus
elevadas cldusulaSf and the second b«^gins at si los nuevos progresos.
Id the two members of the principal proposition, the verbs are in the
second conditional, and in the subordinate proposition they are in the
third.

80 VKRB8.

nobre d (dio puado^ no era culpa mioy if he was poor last year^
It was not my fault.

N. B. 2d. It most be seen by the preceding rules and ex-
amplesjthatthe second conditional is frequently used to hold
the place of the first and third ; for we may say indifferently,
Htiempo fudibra or podrIa ser mefor; Met que vini^ra or
viNiESE* But it is vot thb same with the first and
THIRD ; they are so opposed that one cannot be used for
^e other. Therefore, to translate this phrase ; I should
wish to go to Seville, we may say ; yo querrIa or quisiera
ir d Semllay but not yo quisiese ir d SeviBa.

The conditionals past follow the same rules as the condi-
tionals present, and though the verb governed by the con-
junction n should in English be in the pluperfect of the in-
dicative, it must in Spanish be put in the second or third
conditionals past. Ex. Si lo hubiera or hubiese 'sabidoj if
I had known it, or had I known it.

use of the imperative.

Rule XL VI. The use of this mode in Spanish ifi not
entirely the same as in English. In the latter language, it
serves not only to command, pray, and exhort, but also to
forbid ; the Spaniards, on the contrary, express the prohibi-
tion by means of the present of the subjunctive, and some-
times by the future. Ex. No hables, do not speak ; no me
respondas, do not answer me ; no mates ; no matards ; do
not kill, thou shalt not kill.

N. B. The^rs^ person plural of the imperative is always
like the first of the plural of the subjunctive present.

USE OF the subjunctive.

This mode has four tenses, the present, the imperfect, the
preterite and the pluperfect ; it expresses, as the indicative,
the present, past, and future.

Rules for using the tenses of the suhjunctive.

As it is impossible to establish well defined rules to make
known in a sure manner the use of the tenses of the subjunc-
tive, we cannot pretend to determine every case in which
we must make use of them ; but we will endeavour to es-

VERBS. 81

tablish rules^ which will obviate the greatest part of the diffi-
culties.

RuLB XLVn. The verb that follows the conjunctioii qiUy
that ; must be put in the indicative, when the verb preceding
it expresses affirmation in a direct, positive and independent
manner ; but it must be put in the subjunctive when the
preceding verb expresses doubt, surprise, fear, admiration,
uncertainty, desire, hope, will, permission, prohibition and
command. Thus we say ; $i que b8t4 maJb, I know that he
is sick ; los aUistas dicen que no hat Diosj the atheists say
that there is no God; because the verb s^ and dicen express
a direct and positive affirmation. But we must say ; no creo
or tkido que bste malo, I do not believe or I doubt that he
is sick. Los ateistas quieren que no haya Dios^ the atheists
wish that there may not be a God. Deaeo que venga, I de-
sire that he may come. Jde admiro que no hat A Uegadoy I
am surprised that he is not arrived ; because in these phrar
ses the verbs preceding the conjunction express a doubt^
desire or surprise.

N. B. After Ojaldy God grant, an adverb always expres-
sing a desire, the verb is put in liie subjunctive.

Rule XLVIII. The relatives que^ quien^ cuyo^ a,-09,-aff»
govern the subjunctive, when the phrase is interrogative or
negative, or when it expresses a doubt, desire or condition.
Ex. No conozco una sola muger, cuya alma sea mas semnble
que lade la senora iV., I do not know a woman whose soul is
more sensible than that of Madam N.

Remark. See, Ist. the N. B. in continuation of the rules
relative to the use of the tenses of the future conjunctive and
the rules that relate to it, (page 77th ;) the rules relative to
the use of the tenses of the conditional ; and 3d. under the
head of conjunctions, those that govern the subjunctive.

OP the persons and numbers of verbs.

Verbs have three persons. The pronouns personal are
their characteristics. The first person is that which speaks ;
as, yo amOf nosotros or nosotras amamos^ I love, we love.
The second [>erson is that to whom we speak ; as, tit amasy
vosotros or vosotras amaisy thou lovest, you love. The third
person is that of whom we speak ; as, il or ella ama, eJhs or
eUas anumj he or she loves, they love.

In ancient authors, the termination of the second person

82 TBBBS.

of the plural is in des^ instead of is. Thus, they said and
wrote amades, amaredes, S(c, instead of amais, amariis^ Sfc.

The verbs have both numbers ; the singular is used when
the verb has only a single person or thing for its nominadve;
as, yoj lit, il, eUa ; and the plural, when it has many ; as,
nosolros or nosotras, vosotros or vosotras, eUos or ellas.

N. B. It is not the same with the Spanish language as
with the English and French, in which the verb must always
be preceded by the pronoun that governs it. In Spanish, as
in Latin, the terminations generally distinguish the persons,
consequently the pronouns are generally suppressed. We
use them with advantage to add energy to the expression, as
in these examples; ti lo has hecht^-"! It is thou who hast
done it — f yo lo mando, it is I who order it ; td ties i yo
Uoro, thou laughest and I weep ; td no quieres hacerio ;
pues lo har6 yOy thou wilt not do it ; well, I shall do it.

CONJUGATIONS.

The Spanish language, as we have already said, has but
three conjugations, which are known by the termination of
the infinitive. The first has the infinitive terminated in or;
as, am-avy to love ; the second in er; as, temper , to fear ;
the third in ir ; as, suh^ir^ to go up. It has besides three
auxiliary verbs, which are so called because they serve to
conjugate the o^er verbs in their compound tenses. These
auxiliary verbs are haber and terter, to have ; and ser^ to be.
In conjugating the latter, we add to it estor, an irregular
verb, translated by the same English verb, to be, being of
such great use, that it is proper to study it, as soon as the
auxiliary verbs are learnt.

Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Habers to haroe,*

INFINITIVE.

Present. r Haber, - - to have.

Preterite. - Haber habido, - to have had.

Gerund. - Habiendo, - - having,

participle. - Habido, - - had,

* This verb was used formerly as active, to express possession ;
and in this last acceptation it had the following imperative ; habe tu,
(now oat of use) haya il, hdyamos nosotros, habtd voaotrotjk&yan ellos.
Now the verb haber is seldom used but as an auxiliary or as an ini-
personal- 3ee its conjugation for this last acceptation.

VtllBS.

»3

INDICATITB*

PreserU,
To he, ---_./ have,

Tu has, thou host.

El ha, ..... /^ ^Qg^

Nosotroshemos, or habemos, - - tte hace.

Vosotros habeis,* - . . . yeukave.

EUos han, they hone.

IvKperfedt.

Yohabia,+ Ihcud.

Tiihabias, - - - . .1 thouhadet.

Elhabfa, he had.

Nosotros habiamos, - - - toe had,

Vosotros habiais, .... you had.

Ellos habian, - ... they had.

Preterite definite.

To hube, I had.

T6 hubiste, thou hadst.

Elhubo, - - - ■ - - he had.

Nosotros hubimos, - - - ire had.

Vofiotros hublsteis, . . - you had.

Ellos hubieroD, .... they had.

Preterite indefinite.

Yo be habido, - ... J have had.

Tu has habido, ... - thou hast had.

El ha habido, . . . . j^e has had.

Nosotros hemos habido, - - - ure have had.

Vosotros habeis habido, - . . you have had.

Ellos ban habido, .... they have had.

Preterite anterior.

Yo hube habido, ... I had had.

Tu hubiste habido, ... thou hadst had.

* See page 81> what we have said on the terminatioo of the second
person plural in ancient authors.

t The observation in regard to ta, (page 2dy) will do for natives
who are babttually speaking their language ; but to save to the teach-
er and learner a gread deal of trouble, we shall use the acute accent^
upon the t throughout the conjugations, when id do not form a diph-
f hong.

94 VERBS.

El hubo habido, - - - - he had had.

Nosotroshubimoshabido, - - we had had.

Vosotros hubisteb habido, - - you had had^

Ellos hubieron babido, ... ^Aey had had.

PluperfetA.

Yo habia habido, - - - 1 had had.

Til hablas habido, ... thou hadst had.

El habia habido, .... he had had.

Nosotros habiamos habido, - - we had had.

Vosotros habiais habido, - - you had had.

Ellos habian habido, ^ . . they had had.

Future absokUe.

Yohabre, - - - - - lahaUhaoe.

Til habr^, ----- thou wiU have.

Elhabri, he will have.

Nosotros habremos, - - - we shall have.

Vosotros habr6is, - - - you will have.

Ellos habr&n, - . - - they wiU have.

Future anterior.

Yohabr6 habido, - - - - 1 ahaU have had.

Tu habris habido, - - - thou wiU have had.

El habri habido, ... hewiUhavehad.

Nosotros habremos habido, - - trc shall have had.

Vosotros habreis habido, - - you wiU have had.

Ellos habrdn habido, - - - they wiU have had.

Future conjuncttve simple.

Si or cuando, - - - - If or when,

Yo hubiere, ... - IhaveorshaHhave.

Til hubieres, - - - - thou wiU have.

El hubiere, ----- Ac unll have.

Nosotros hubieremos, - - - t^e sheUl htxve.

Vosotros hubi6reis, - . - you mU have*

Ellos hubieren, - - - . they wiU have.

Future conjunctive compound.

Si or cuando, - - - - . If or when,

Yo hubiere habido, - - - J Jiane had.

Til hubieres habido, ... thou wiU have had.

El hubiere habido, - - - he will have had.

VKJKBS.

85

Nosotros hubieremos habido,
Vosotros hubiereis habido,
EUos hubieren habido, -

we shall have had.
you win have had,
they win have had.

Yo habrla, -
Tu habrias, -
£1 habrla, -
Nosotros habriamoS}
Vosotros habrfais,
EUos habrfan.

CONDITIONALS.

First conditional 'present.

I should have,
thou wouldsi have,
he would have,
we would have,
you would have,
they would have.

Second and third conditionals present.
Si, or cuando, - - - If or though^

Yo hubiera or hublese, - - J had or should have.
Til hubieras or hubieses, - thou wouldst have.
£1 hubiera or hubiese, - - Ae would have.
Nosotros hubieramos,or hubiesemos, we had or should have.
Vosotros hubierais or hubieseis, you had or would have.
Ellos hubieran or hubiesen, - they would have. ^

First conditional past.

Yo habria habido,

Tu babrlas habido,

£1 habria habido,

Nosotros habrlamos habido, -

Vosotros habrlais habido,

£llos.babrlan habido,

I should have had.
thou wouldst have had.
he would have had,
we should have had,
you would have had.
they would have had.

Second and third conditionals past.

Si, or cuando, -

If or though^

Yo hubiera, or hubiese, ) \

I had or should have ')

Tu hubieras, or hubieses,

thou wouldst have

El hubiera, or hubiese.

^

he would have

Nosotros hubieramos, or

o

3

^

hubiesemos, -

'-§ '

we had or should have

*•>§

Vosotros hubierais, or

M

hubieseis,

you would have

Ellos hubieran, or hubi-

esen.

1

they would have

/

86 VXBB9.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PrennL

Yo haya, - . - J niaif have.

Td hayas, ... tkou mayst have.

£1 haya, - - - Ae may have,

Nosotros h^yamos^ - - wc may have.

Vosotros b^yais, - - you may have.

Ellos hayan, ... they may hatfe.

Imperfect.

Yo hubiese, - - - I might have.

Tu hubieses, ... fhou mightest have.

£1 hubiese, - - - Ae might have.

Nosotros hubiesemos, - toe might have.

Vosotros hubies^is, - - you might have.

£llos hubiesen, . ^ . tkey might have.^

Preterite.

Yo haya habido, - - I may have had.

Tu hayas habido, - - thou maygt have had.

El haya habido, - - Ae may have had.

Nosotros hiyamos habido, - we may have had.

Vosotros hdyais habido, - you may have had.

Ellos hayan habido, - they may have had.

Pluperfect.

Yo hubiese habido, - I might have had.

Tu hubieses habido, - thou mightest have had.

El hubiese habido, - - he might have had.

Nosotros hubiesemos habido, - we might have had.

Vosotros hubieseis habido^ - you might have had.

Ellos hubiesen habido, they might have had.

Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Tener, to have,
to holdf to possess.*

INFINITIVE.

Present. - Tener, - 'to havcy to possess.

Preterite. - Haber tenido, - to have had.

Gerund. - Teniendo, - - having.

Participle. - Tenido, - - had.

* This verb is auxiliary and active. As auxiliary it is seldom
used. As active it denotes possession, and must always be used to

VBRBS. 87

INDICATIVE.

Present.

Yotengo, - - - - I havCy or possess,

Tu tienes, - - . . thou hast.

£1 tiene, - - - 'he has.

Nosotros tenemos, - - «7e have.

Yosotros tenuis, ... ^ou have.

EUos tienen^ ... theif have.

Imperfect.

Yo tenia, - ... J hadf or did possess.

Td tenlas, .... thou hadst^

El tenia, - - - - Ae had.

Nosotros teniamos, - - - ve had.

Yosotros teniab, ... yon had.

EUos tenian, - - ... thejf had.

Preterite definite.

Yo tuve, J hady or possessed.

Tu tuviste, .... thou hadst.

£1 tuvo, ..... Ae had.

Nosotros tuvimos, - . - - tpe had.

Yosotros tuvisteis, - - - * j/ou had.

EUos tuvieron, - - - . tj^^had.

Preterite indefinite.

Yo he tenido, . - - . Have hadyor possessed

Td has tenido, - ... thou hast had.

El ha tenido, - - - - he has had.

Nosotros hemes tenido, - - toe have had.

Yosotros habels tenido, - • pou have had.

EUos han tenido, ... they have had.

Preterite anterior.
Yo hube tenido, ... I had kadyor possessed.
Td hubiste tenido, ... thou hadst had.
£1 hubo tenido, . . . ^^ had had.

trantlate the verb to have when this verb is not «uxiliary. We say,
he leido el Hbro ; I have rend the book : bat we must say, tengo un
libro, I have a book ; becauve in the first example the verb to have
is auxiliary to the verb to read, and in .the second it U active and
denotes possessioo.

88

VKRBS.

T^osotroshubimostenido, -
VosotroshubisteistenidOy - - '
£llo6 hubieron tenido,

PfuperfecL
Yo habia tenido, ...
Td habias tenido^ . . *.
£1 habia tenido^ ...
Nosotros habiamos tenido, -
Vosotros hablais tenido,
Ellos habian tenido, . . -

Yo tendre,
Tu tenbr^ -
£1 tendriy
Nosotros tendFemos,
Vosotros tendinis;
£llos tendrin^

Yo habre tenido^

FiUure abaoluU.

Future anterior.

we had had,
you had had.
they had had,

1 had had, or possegaed,
thou hadst had,
he had had.
we had had.
you had had,
they had had,

l8haUhave^Tpo98€99,
thou wiU have,
he will have,
we shall have,
you win have,
they wiU have.

Til habris tenido, -
Elhabrdtenidoy
Nosotros habremos tenido,
Vosotros habreis tenido, -
£llos habrin tenido,

1 shqB have had, or

poisegsed,
thou wilt have had,
he win have had,
we ehaU have had.
you wiUhave had,
they win have had.

Future conjunctive simple.
Si, or cuando, ... Ifyor when,

Yo tuviere, .... Ihav€,or possess.
T6 tuvieres, - - - . thou shaU have,
£1 tuviere, . . . . Ae shaU have,
Nosotros tuvieremos, - • we shall have,
Vosotros tuviereb, - - you mil have.

Ellos tuvieren, ... they wiU have.

Future conjunctive compound.

Si, or cuando,
Yo hubiere tenido,
Tu hubieres tenido,
£1 hubiere tenido, -
Nosotros hubiereiDOS tenido,
Vosotros bubi^reis tenido,
Ellos hubieren tenido,

If, or when^
I have had.
thou wilt have hat.
he will have had,
we shall have had,
you will have had.
they win have had.

VBBBS.

«9

CONDITIONALS.

First conditional present.

Yd tendrla,
Tu tendrfas.
El tendria,
Nosotros tendriamos,
Vosotros tendriais,
EUos tendrian,

I should havcy or possess,
thou wouldst have,
he would have,
we should have,
you would have,
they would have.

Second and third conditionals present.

Si, or cuando,
Yd tuviera, or tuviese,
Tu tuvierasy or tuvieses.
El tuviera, or tuviese,
Nosotros tuvieramosy or tuvi-

Yosotros tuvierais^ tuvieseis,
Ellos tuvieran, or tuviesen^

If, or though,
I should have,
thou shouldst have,
he should have.

we should have,
you should have,
they should have.

First conditional past.

Yo habrla tenido,
Tu habrias tenido,
£1 habria tenido^
Nosotros habrlamos tenido,
Vosotros habriais tenido,
Ellos habrlan tenido,

I should have had.
thou wouldst have had.
he would have had.
we should have had.
you would have had.
they would have had.

Second and third conditioTials past.

Si, or cuando, -
Yo hubiera, or hubiese, "^
Til hubieras^or hubieses,
El hubiera, or hubiese,
Nosotros hubieramos, or

hubiesemos,
Vosotros hubierais, or

hubieseisy
Ellos hubieran, or hubi-

esen, - - ^

8*

o
1

If J or though,
\ ' I had, or should have
thou wouldst have
he would have

we should have

you would have

they would have

00 VBBBS.

IMPERATIVE.

Present or future.
Tentu,* ... have thou, or pofsew,

TeDga el, ... let him have,

TeDgamos Bosotros, - -. let ue have.
Tened vosotros,* - - have youy ot ye.

Tengan ellos^ . . Ie< t^em have*

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Preurd.

Yo tenga, ... 1 may have, or poisen*

Td tengas, ... thou mayst have.

£1 tenga, . . . ;^ may have.

Nosotros tengamosy . . tre may have.

Vosotros teogais, - - you may have.

Ellos tengan, ... they may have.

Invperfect.

Yo tuviese, ... I might have, or posseet:

Tu tuvieses, ... thou mightest have.

£1 tuviese, . . « 1^ mighi have.

Nosotros tuviesemos, - we might have.

Vosotros tuvi6seis, - - you might have.

Ellos tuviesen, - - <Aey might have.

Preterite.

Yo haya tenido, - - I may have had.

Tu hayas tenido, - - thou mayst have had,

£1 haya tenido, - - Ae may have had.

Nosotros h^yamos tenido, - vje may have had.

Vosotros h^yais tenido, - you may have had.

Ellos hayan tenido, - Oiey may have had.

Pluperfect.
Yo hubiese tenido, . - J might have had.
Tu hubieses tenido, - thou mightest have had.

El hubiese tenido, - . he might have had

* In all the verbs, the 2d person, singular and plural, of the imper-
atlve, takes the termination of the 2d person, sing, and plur. of the
present subjunctive, when used wtth a negation. Ex. Have thou not,
no tengas. Hflfve ^e iwi, no tengais.

VJBKBS.

91

Nosotros hubi6semos tenido,
Vosotros hubieseis tenido, <
Ellos hubiesen tenido,

we might have had,
y9u might have had,
they might have had* ^^.

Conjugation of tlie auxiliary verb Ser» and EsTAHf
meaning also to be.

INFINITIVE.

FreaenU Sei,

S estar.

to he.

FreUrite. Habersido, habe'r estado.

to have been*

Gerund. Siendo, estando^

being.

Participle. Sido, estado,

been.

INDICATIVE.

PresenL

•

Yo soy, or

estoy.

lam.

Tueres,

est^,

thou art.

£1 es;

est^,

he is.

Nosotros somos,

estamos,

we are.

Vosotros soiSy

estais,

you are.

Ellos son,

estio,

Imperfect.

they are.

Yoera, or

estaba.

J was.

T6 eras,

estabas.

thou wast.

El era.

estaba.

he was.

Nosotros 6ranios.

f estdbamos, - .

we were.

Vosotros erais,

estdbais,

you were.

Ellos eran,

Preterite definite.

they werei

Yo fui, or

estuve.

I was.

Tu fuiste,

estuviste,

thou wast.

El fu6.

estuvo.

he was.

Nosotros fuimos.

estuvimos,

we were.

Vosotros fuisteis,

, estuvfsteis.

you were.

Ellos fueron,

estuvieron.

Preterite indefinite.

they were*

Yo he sido,

or estado.

I have been.

Tu has sido,

estado.

thou hast been>,

SI ha sido,

estado,

he has been.

92

VSIBS.

Nosotrot hemos tidO) estado,
Vosotrot hmbeis sido, estado,
EUof iian sido, estado,

Preieriie anterior.
To liube sido, or estado,
Til hubiste sido, estado,

£1 bubo sidoy estado,

Ii^osotros hubimos sido, estado,
Vosotros hubisteis sido, estado,
Ellos hubieron ando.

or

Ptuperfict.
estadoy

Yo habia sido,

Tu habias sido,

£1 habla sido, estado,

Nosotros habiamos sido^stado,

Vosotros hablais sido, estado^

£llos babian sido, estado,

Yo ser6, or
Til seris,
£1 serd,

Nosotros ser6mos^
Vosotros ser6i8,
EUos serdn,

Future absduie.
estare,
estards,
estari,

estarenios^ -
estareis,
estar^D,
Future caUerwr.

Yo habr6 sido, or estado,
Til habris sido, estado,

£1 habr^sido, estado,

Nosotros habremos sido^estado,
Vosotros habreis sido, estado^
£llos habrdn sido^ estado^

wekaoe been,
you haoe been,
they have been.

I had been,
thou hadet been,
he had been,
we had been,
you had been,
they had been.

I had been,
thou hadst been,
he had been,
we had been,
you had been,
they had been.

I shall be.
thou wit be.
he will be.
we shall be.
you win be.
they wiU be.

I ehaU ahve been,
thou wilt have been
he win have been,
we shall have been. -
you will have been,
they will have been.

Si, or cuando,
Yo fuere, or
Til fueres,
£1 fuere,

Nostros fuereinos,estuvieremo8,
Vosotros fiiereis^ estuviereis,
EUos fuereo, eetuvieren,

Future conjunctive simple.

If, or when,
I be, or shall be.
thou wilt be.
he will be.
we shall be.
you win be.
they wis be.

estuviere,

estuvieret,

estuviere.

VEBBS. 9^

Future conjunctive compound.
Si, or cuandoy Jf, or when^

Yo hubiere sido, or estado, - J have been.

Tu hubieres sido, estado, - ikou wiU have been.

£1 hubiere sido, estado, - he will have been,

Nosotroshubieremossido^estado, - we shaU have been.

Yosotros hubf ereb sido, estado, - you wiU have been.

Ellos hubieren sido, estado, - they will have been.

CONDITIONALS.

First conditional present.
Yo seria, or estarla, - J should be,

Tu serias, estarf as, - thou wouldst be.

£1 seria, estarla, - he would be.

Nosotros serlamos, estariamos, - we should be.

Yosotros serials, estariais, you would be.

Ellos serian, estarian, they would be.

Second and third conditionals present.

Si, or cuando,
Yo fuera or fuese, estuviera or estuviese,

T6 fueras or fueses, estuvieras or estuvieses,

£1 fuera or fuese, estuviera or estuviese,

Nosotros fiieramos or fu^ estuvi^ramos or estuvi6se-

esemos, mos,

Yosotros fuerais or fu6seis, estuvi6rais or estuvieseis,
Ellos fueran or fuesen, estuvieran or estuviesen,

First conditional past.
Yo habria sido, or estado, - I should have been.
Tu habrlas sido, estado, - thou wouldst have been.

El babrla sido, estado, - he would have been.

Nosotros habriamos sido, estado, - we should have been.
Yosotros habriais sido, estado, - you would have been.
Ellos habrian sido, estado, - they would have been.

Second and third conditionals past.
Si, or cuando,

Yo hubiera, or hubiese sido, or estado,

Td hobieras, or hubieses sido, estado,

£1 hubiera, or hubiese sido, estado,

Nosotros hubi^ramos, or hubiesemos sido, estado,

Yosotros hubierais, or hubieseis sido, estado,

Ellos bubieran, or hubiesen sido, estado,

94

▼BRB8.

Se tu, or
Sea el,*

Seamos nosotros^
Sed vosotros,
Sean ellos,*

Yo sea, or
Til seas,
El sea,

Nosotros seamos,
Vcsotros seais,
EUos sean,

Yo fuese,
Tu fueses,
£1 fiiese,

or

Vosotroa fue»«»,
EUoa fuesen,

Yo baya sido. or
Tu hayas sido,
£1 haya sido,
Nosotros h^yamos sido,
Yosotros h^yais sido,
Ellos bayan sidg^

Yo hubiese sido, or

Tu hubieses. sido,

El bubiese sido, c^oi^auu,

Nosotros bubiesemos sido, estado,

Yosotros bubi^seis sido, estado,

Ellos bubiesensido, estado,

IMPBRAflVE.

Present or future.
esti tu, - he thou.

este el,* - ht him he.

estemos nosotros, let us he.
estad yosotros, he you.
eaten ellos,* let them he.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present.

este, - - J may he.

estes, - - thou mayst he.

este, . - 'he may be.

estemos, - -we may he.

esteb, - - you may he.

est^n, - - they may he.

Impeijict.

estuviese, - 1 mig^ he*

estuvieses, - thou mightest be.

estuviese, - he miglU be.

estuviesemQS, - we might be.

estuvieaeia, - you might be*

estuyiese.n, - they might he.

Preterite.

estado, I may have been,

estado, thou mayst have been.

estado, he may have been.

estado, u>e may have been.

estado, you may have been.

estado, they may have been.

Pluperfect.
estado, I might have been.

thou mightest have been*
he might have been.
t»e might have been,
you might have been,
they might have been.

estado,

" Sea vm.f be you, sing.— 5ean vmt , he you, plural.^- and so on
486 the tijkird person in polite style in all this tenses of all the rerbs.

VSKB8. 95

Rnles on the verbs S£r and Estak.

Rule XLIX. The verb to be cannot be translated in
Spanish indifierenliy by aer or by estar. Ser^ joined to an
adjective, gives it sometimes an entirely different meaning^
from that which estar would give it. It is consequently
necessary to understand wdl the use of these two verbs.
We observe then, that we must use the verb ser whenever
we speak of qualities essential to the subject ; of qualities
relating to the mind or to ^e heart ; whenever we speak of
an art, a dignity, an employment, a trade, &c. or of the di-
mensioils of an object ; and finally for the conjugation of
the passive verbs. £x. Soy hombrej I am a man ; sonum
mortaksj we are mortal ; son buenas gentes, they are good
people ; son instruidosy they are learned ; sots prudentes,
you are prudent ; eran caritativoSy they were charitable ;
ser aUoy vhico^ gordoy Jlaco, to be tall, short, fat, lean ; ser
rey, primer ministro, general^ juez^ sastre^ zapateroy &c, to
be a king, prime minister, a general, a judge, a tailor, a
shoe-maker, &c. ; ser amado, aborrecidoy &c. to be loved,
hated, &c.

We make use, on the contrary, of estar whenever we
speak of the state of health, of being in any place, of an
emotion or of a sudden and transient sensation. Ex. Estar
bueno 6 mahy to be well or ill ; estar en casOy en eljardiny en
el campoy to be at home, in the garden, in the country ; estar
enfadad^y to be offended.

Nevertheless, in the following examples and other simUar
ones, we can make use of ser or of estar indifferently 5 ser
or estar del mismo parecer, to be of the same opinion ; ser
corregidor or estar de corregidor en Madrid, to be corregi-
dor at Madrid. We must however observe in the second
example, if we make use of estar, this verb must be follow-
ed by tho particle de, for, estar corregidor y alcalde, would
not be Spanish.

N. B. Ser bueno^ ser maloy signifies to be good, to be
bad ; estar buenoy estar mnloy signifies to be well or ill ;
estar mejor, to be better, to bd better in health ; estar peor^
to be more sick, to be worse.

Rule L. — The verb estar is often used as in English
to be, before another verb to signify in a more positive man-
ner that an action is doing, has been done, or will be done,
at the very moment in which we speak or of which we

96 VBKBS.

speak ) and then the verb which follows is put in the ger-
und. Ex. Estd escribiendoy he writes, that is, he is writing ;
eitaba escrilnendo, he wrote, that is, he was writing;
entSncea estardn escribiendo^ they will write then, that is,
they will then be writing.

A OBNERAL SCHEME OF THE TERMINATIONS OP REG17LAB
VERBS IN THEIR SIMPLE TENSES.

The figures 1, 2, 3, signify the Jirtt^ second^ and tJdrd
conjugations.

All the regular verbs of each conjugation, are easily con-
jugated by changing the terminations atj er, tr, of the infin-
itive into those expressed as follows.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

xVSMUti

Chnmd. PmtieipU. Iftktre

it tm tuHve Peart.

1. ar,

ando, ado, ante,

2. er,>

3. ir. 5

iendo, ido, iente or yente

♦

INDICATIVE.

Present.

Singular,

Plural.

'C

td.

el.' nosotros,

vosotros,

ellos.

as,

a. amos.

ais.

an.

»:|-

es.

S emos,
®- ^imos,

Impeffect.

eis,
is.

en.
en.

1. aba,

abas.

aba. ibamos.

ibais

aban.

ih

ias.

ia. iamos.

lais,

ian.

Preterite definite.

1. e,

aste.

6. amos.

isteis,

aron.

?1<'

Iste,

io. imos.

Isteis,

ieron.

Future absolute.

1. are,

ards.

ari. aremos,

areis.

arin.

2. ere.

eris,

eri. eremos,

ereis.

erdn.

3. ire,

iris,

iri. iremos,

ireis,

ir4n.

• See 6th and 6th observations preceding^ the Conjugation of the
Irregular Verbs.

VXBMI.

n

1.

2.
3.

are.
iere,

arla^
erla,
irfa,

1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.

1.
2.

3.

ara,

>iera,

ase^

a?

2.]
3.<

1.
3,\

2e,

iese.

Future ctmjimctive simple^
ares, are» dremos^ dreis^

ieres, iere. iereinos, iereis^

CONDITIONALS.

First conditional preserU.

arias, aria. ariamos, ariais,

erias, eria. eriamos, eriais,

iras, iria. iriamos, iriais,

Second and third contitionak present.
aras, ara. dramos,

iera.

leras,

leses,

e.
a.

ase.
iese.

leramos,
isemos,
iesemos.

irais,

ierais,.

dseis,

ieseis,

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

emos.

amos

ad,

aren.
ieren.

arian.
erian.
irian.

aran.
ieraD.
asen.
iesen,

en.
an.
an.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Present,
lingular. PhraL

tu, el. Bosotros^ vosotros, ellos.

as.

ases,
ieses^

ase.
iese.

emos,
amos,

Imperfect,

^emos,

iesemos,

dseis,
i6seis.

en.
an.

asen.
iesen.

PARADIGMS OF THE TUR££ CONJUGATIONS.

First conjugation in ar.

' '^ ' -^ INFINITIVE.

Present. Am-ar, ... to love.

Preterite. Haber amado, • . ^ have loved*
9

08

VSKBS.

Gerund. Amando,
FarticipU. Amado,

Umng.
loved.

INDICATIVE,

FretenU

Yo amoy
Til amasy
£1 amay

Nosotros amamosy
Vosotros amais,
EUos amaii; -

Imperfect,

Yo amaba, -
Tu amabas,
£1 amaba, -
Nosotros am^bamoS;
Vosotros amibais,
EUos amaban^

Preterite definite.

Yoam^y . - -
Til amaste, • - *
£1 amo, - - -
Nosotros amamos,
Vosotros aradsteis,
£llos amaroD,

Preterite indefinite.
Yo he amadoy ....
Tu has amado, ....
El ha amadoy ....
Nosotros hemos amado,
Vosotros habeis amado,
EUos han amado^ ...

Preterite ant^ior.
Yo hube aiBadoy -
Til hublste amado^
£1 hubo amado, -
Nosotros bubimos amado,
Vosotros hubisteis amado,
EUos bubieron amddo, -

I love, or do love,
thou hveeU
he loves,
we love,
you love,
they love.

Ididhve. ^
thou didst love,
he did love,
we did hve.
you did love,
they did love.

I loved,
thou lovedst.
he loved.
* we loved,
you loved,
they loved.

Ihave loved,
thou hast loved,
he has hved.
we have loved,
you have loved,
they have loved,

I had loved,
thou hadst loved,
he had loved,
we had loved,
you had loved,
they had loved.

VERBS.

99

Pluperfect,

Yo habla amado,
Tu hablas amado^
£1 habia amado, -
Nosotros habiaraos amado^
Vosotros hablais ainado,
Ellos habian amado,

I had loved,
thou hadsi loved,
he had loved,
we had loved,
you had loved,
they had loved.

FiOMre absolute.

Yo amare, -
Tu amaris, -
£1 amari,
Nosotros amaremos,
Vosotros amareis, -
EUos amar^O;

I ehaU love,
thou wiU love,
he vnU love.
weehaUlove.
you will love,
they wiU love.

FvJture anterior.

Yo habr6 amado, -
Til habris amado,
El habr4 amado, - •
Nosotros habremos amado^
Vosotros babreis amado,
EUos habr^ amado, "

I shall have loved,
thou wilt have loved.
he wiU have loved.
we shall have loved,
you unit have loved,
they win have loved.

Future conjunctive simple.

Si, or cuando;
Yo amare, -
Tij amares, -
£1 amare,

Nosotros am^remos,
Vosotros amireis, -
Ellos amaren^

Ify or whsHy
I love, or shall love,
thou wilt love,
lie unit love,
we shall love,
you will love,
they mil Uyve.

FiUure conjunctive compound.

Si, or cuando,
Yo hubiere amado,
Tu hubiere^ amado.
El hubiere aniado,
Nosotros hubieremos amado,
Vosotros hubiereis amado,
Ellos liubieren amado, ,

If, or when,
I have loved,
thou wiit have loved,
he wiU have loved,
we shall have loved,
you will have loved,
they will heme loved.-

xoo

V£KB8.

CONDITIONALS.

First conditional present,

Yoamaria, .... I should love.

Tu amarias, .... tkou wouldat love.

Elamaria^ .... he would love.

Nosotros amarlamosy ^ » we should love.

Vosotros amariaisy - - tfou would love.

Ellos amariao, ... they would love.
Second and third conditionals present.

Si, or caando, - If, or though^
Yo amara or amase,
Tu amaras amases, -
£1 amara amase, -
Nosotros amdramos aniisemos,
Vosotros am&rais amisela^ -
Elios amaran amasen. -

I should love,
tkou wouldst love,
he would hve.
we should love,
you would love,
they would love.

Yo habria amado,
Tu habrias aiuado,
El habria amado,
Nosotros habriamos amado,
Vosotros habrlais amado,
Ellos habrian amado, -

First conditional past.

I should have loved,
thou v>ouldst have loved,
he would have loved,
we should have loved,
you would have loved,
they would have loved.

Si, or cuando,
Yo hubiera, or

Tu hubieras,
£1 hubiera,
Nosotros hubi^ramos,
Vosotros hubierais,
Ellos hubieran,

Second and third conditionals past.

hubiese

hubieses

hubiese

hubi^semos

hubieseis

hubiesen

6

Ama tu,*
Ame el.

IMPERATIVE.

Present or future.

hve thou,
' ' let him love.

* Verbs in the imperative require the pronouns governed after
them, when used affirmatively and before them, as usual, when used
negatively ; Ex. Love me, amacr^ ; do not love me, no me ames ;
Heceive us, recibid qos ; do not receive us, no nos recibais.

VERBS.

101

Amemos nosotros,- -

-

let U8 love.

Amad vosotros.

-

love ye.

Amen ellos,

-

lei tkem love.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present

Yo ame,

•

I may love.

Til amesy

•

thou mayat hoe.

El ame,

-

he may love.

Nosotros amemos,

-

toe may love.

Vosotros ameis,

-

you may love.

Ellos amen,

-

they may love.

Imperfect.

Yo amase,

-

I might love.

Til amases,

-

thou mighteat love.

El amase, . -

•

he mi^ht love.

Nosotros amisemos,

-

we might love.

Vosotros amiseis,

m »

you might love.

Ellos amasen,

-

they might love.

Preterile.

Yo haya amado,

.

I may have loved.

Td hayas amado,

.

thou mayat have loved.

El haya amado,

•

he may have loved.

toe may^ have loved.

Vosotros h^yais amado,

you may have loved.

Ellos hayan amado,

-

they may have loved.

'Pluperfect.
Yo hubiese amado,
Til hubieses amado.
El hubiese amado,
Nosotros hubiesemos amado, -
Vosotros hubieseis amado,
EUos hubiesen amado, - . -

I might have loved,
ihou mighiest have loveS^
he might have loved,
we might have loved,
you might have loved,
they might have loved.

Secotid conjugation in jeb.

INFINITIVE.

Preaeni.
PreUriU.
Gerund.
Participle.
9*

Tem-er,
Haber temido,
Temiendo,
Temido, -

to fear,
to have feared,
fearing,
feared.

102

VSRBS.

INDICATIVE.

PresenL

Yotemo, J fear.

Tu temes, thou feare9t.

Elteme, he fears.

JNosotros tememos, - - . we fear.

Vosotros temeis, - - - . you fear.

Ellostemen, they fear.

ImperfecU

Yo temia, I did fear.

Tutemias, thou didst fear.

^1 temia, he did fear.

Nosotros temlamos, - - - k^c did fear.

Vosotrostemiais, - . . . you did fear.

WJostemfan, - - - - they did fear.

Preterite definite.

^^tenai. I feared.

lutemjste, thoufearedst.

' ^Itemio, he feared.

iVosotros temimos, , - - - we feared.

Vosotros temfsteis, - - - you feared.

Ellos temieron, - - - . they feared.

Preterite indefinite.

Yohetemido, .... Ihave feared.

luhastemido, ... - thou hast feared.

^Ibatemido, .... he has feared.

Nosotros hemos temido, - . - we have feared.

Vosotros habeis temido, . - . you have feared.

Ellos haD temido, - . - - they have feared.

Preterite anterior.

Yo hube temido, . - - . J had feared.

T(i hubiste temido, ... thou hadst feared.

El bubo temido, - - - . Ac had feared.

Nosotros hubimos temido, . . we haa feared.

Vosotros hubisteis temido, - - you had feared.

Ellos hubieron temido, ... they had feared.

VB1»8.

108

Pluperfect

To habia temido, ...
Tu hablas temido,
£1 habia temido, - - -
Nosotrbs habiamos temido,
Vosotros hablais temido^
Ellos hablan temido.

1 had feared,
thou hadst feared,
he had feared,
toe had feared,
you had feared,
they had feared.

Yo temere, -
Til temeris, -
£1 temer&y -
Nosotros temeremos,
Vosotros temereisy -
£llos temerdn^

Future iAsoUUe,

I Shan fear,
thou unit fear,
he mil fear,
we shall fear,
you will fear,
they unit fear.

Future anterior.

Yo habre temido, -
Tu habris temido,
El habri temidoy - <-
Nosotros habremos temido,
Vosotros habreis temido,
Ellos habr^D temido.

1 shall have feared,
thou wilt have feared^
he will have feared,
we shall have feared,
you wiU have feared
they wiU have feared.

Sly or quando, -
Yo temiere^ -
Til temieres,
£1 temiere, -
Nosotros temieremosy
Vosotros temiereis,
Ellos temieren.

Future conjunctive simple.

- - Jf or when,

I shall fear,
thou wilt fear,
he will fear.

we shall fear,
you wiUfear.
they mil fear.

Future canjunctioe compound.

Si, or cuando, -
Yo hubiere temido,
Tu hubieres temido,
£1 hubiere temido,
Nosotros huMeremos temido, •
Vosotros hubiereis temido,
Ellos hubieren temido, -

If or when^
I have feared,
thou wilt have feared,
he will have feared,
we shall have feared,
you wiU have feared,
they wiU have feared.

104

V»B8.

CONDITIONALS.

Fint condUunud present.

To temerf a,
T(i temerlM,
El temeria,
/^(Motros temeriamos,
YosotroB temeriais,
EUos lemerlaD,

IshouUfear.
ikou toouldst fear,
he would fear,
we ehoulafear^
you would fear,
they would fear*

Second and third conditionalB present.
Siy or ciiando, - Ifj or though^

To temiera or temieae, - I /eared*

Til temieras or temieses^ - thou ahouldst fear.
£1 temiera or temiese, - he should fear.

Noaotros temieramoa or temi^mos^ should fear.
Voaotroatemi^rais or temi^seis, you should fear.
£Uo8 temieran or temiesen, they should fear.

First conditional pasL

To habria temido,
Tfi habrias temido^
£1 habria temidoy
Nosotros habriamos temido,
Yosotros habrlais temido^
Ellos habrian temido^

I should habe feared,
thou wouldst have feared,
he would have feared,
we should have feared,
you would have feared,
they would have feared.

Second and third conditionals past

To hubiera^ or hubiese

Tu hubieras, or hubieses

£1 hubiera, or hubiese

Nosotros hubi6ramoSy or hubi^semoo

Yosotros hubierais, or hubieseis

£Uo« hubieran, or hubiesen

o

IMPfiRATIVE.

Teme tfi,
Tema el,
Temamos nosotros,
Temed vosotros,
Teman ellos,

PreserU or future.

fear thou,
let himfeaij^
- let us/ear.
fear ye.
let themfe^.

VBBBS.

105

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PreaerU,

Yo tema^
Tu temaSy -
£1 tema,

Nosotros temamos,
Vosotros temais^
Ellos temao,

Yo temiese,
Tu temieses,
£1 temiese,
Nosotros temiesemos,
Vosotros temi^seis^
EUos temiesen, -

J may fear,
thou may st fear,
he may fear,
we may fear,
you may fear,
they may fear.

Imperfect.

I might fear,
thou mighteet fear,
he might fear,
we might fear,
you might fear,
they might fear.

Preterite.

Yo haya temido, - -
Tu hajras temido,
£1 haya temido, -
Nosotros hdyamps temido,
Vosotros hiyais temido,
Ellos hayan temido,

I may have feared,
thou mayst havefeufred»
he may navefeared*
we may have feared,
you may have feared,
they may have feared.

Yo hubiese temido,
Tu hubieses temido^ -
El hubiese temido,
Nosotros hubiesemos temido^
Vosotros hubieseis temido, -
EUos hubiesen temido^

Fbiperfect.

I might have feared,
thou ntighlest home feared,
he might have f tared,
we mi^ have feared,
you might have feared.
Ihey might have feared.

Third conjugation in ib.

N

INFINITIVE.

Present.
Preterite.
Gerund.
Participle.

Sufr-ir,

Haber sufrido^
Sufriendo,
Sufridoy

to suffer.

to have suffered.

suffering.

suffered.

106

VKftBS.

INDICATIVS.

BretenL

Yo sufroy
Til sufresy -
£1 sufre, -
Nosotros sufrimosy
Vosetros sufris, -
EUoB sufreo,

Yo sufrf a,
Tu sufrlas,
£1 sufria,

Nosotros sufrlamos,
Vosotros sufriais,
£Do8 sufrkui, ^

Imperfect

I suffer,
thou aufferest,
he Kufferz.
we suffer,
you suffer,
they suffer.

I did suffer,
thou didst suffer,
he did suffer,
we did suffer,
you did suffer.
they did suffer.

Preterite definite.

Yorofrf. .
Til sufrute^
£1 sufrio, -
Nosotros suftimosy
Vosotros sufrfsteis,
EUos sufrieron, -

Preterite indefinite.
Yo he sufrido,
Tu has sufrido^ -
Elhasufrido^
Nosotros hemos safrido,
Vosotros habeis sufrido,
Ellos han sufrido, -

Isuffered.
thou sufferedsi.
he suffered,
we suffered,
you suffered,
they suffered.

I have suffered,
thou hast suffered
he has suffered.
we have suffered,
you have suffered,
they have suffered.

Preterite anterior.

Yo hube sufrido,
Tu hubiste sufrido,
£1 hubo sufridoy
Nosotros faubimos sufrido,
Vosotros hubisteis sufrido,
EUos hubieroa sufirido^

I had suffered,
thou hadst suffered,
he had suffered,
we had suffered,
you had suffered,
they had suffered.

ynois.

m

Pluperfect,

Yo habfa sufrido,
Til habias sufrido,
£1 habla sufrido,
Nosotros habiamos sufirido,
Vosotros hablais sufrido,
EUos hablan sufrido, -

I had guffered.
thou hadst tufered*
he had suffered,
we had suffered,
you had suffered,
they hadsuffered.

Future ahsoluU.

To 8ofrir6,
Til sufrir^y
£1 sufrir^, -
Nosotros sufriremosy
Vosotros sufrireisy
EUos sufririn.

I shaU suffer,
thou win suffer,
he wiU suffer,
we shaU suffer,
you win suffer,
they win suffer.

Future anterior.

Yo habre sufrido,
Tu habris sufrido, »
£1 habri sufrido,
Nosotros habremos sufr^o,
Vosotros faabreb sufrido,
Ellos habr^D sufrido^ -

I shall have suffered,
thou wih have suffered,
he win have suffered,
we shall have suffered,
you wiU have suffered*
they will have suffered.

Future conjvmctive simple.

Si, or cuandoy If^ or when^

Yosufriere, ... I suffer.

Tu sufrieresy ... f Aou wilt si^er.

El sufriere, - - - ^ wiU suffer.

Nosotros sufrieremosy - •> we shaU suffer.

Vosotros sufriereisy - - you wiU suffer.

Ellos sufrieren, ... they wiU suffer.

Future coi^unctive compound.

Sly or cuando,
Yo bobiere sufrido,
Til hubieres sufrido.
El bubiere sufrido,
Nosotros faubieremos sufridoy -
Vosotros habi^reis sufrido, -
EUos hubierensufrido, -

if, or when,
I smU have suffered,
thou wih have suffered,
he wiU have suffered,
we shaU have suffered,
you witt have suffered,
they witt have suffered.

108

VKEB8.

CONDITIONALS.

Firtt conditional present*

Yo sufrirla^

T6 sufririas,

£1 sufrirla,

Nosotros safriiiamoSy -

Yosotros sufririaiSy

Ellos sufirirlan^ -

I should staffer,
thou wouldst suffer,
he would suffer,
we should suffer,
you would suffer,
they would suffer.

Second and third condUion4d8 present.
Si, or cuando, - - - If 9 or though,

Yo sufriera or sufriese, - - I suffered,
Tu sufrieras or sufrieses, - thou shouldst suffer.
El sufriera or sufriese, - he should suffer,

Nosotros sufrieramos or sufnesemos, we should suffer,
YosQtros sufrierais or sufrieseis, you should suffer,
Ellos sufrieran or sufriesen, they should suffer.

First conditional past.

Yo habria sufrido,
Tu habrias sufrido,
El habria sufrido,
Nosotros habriamos sufrido,
Yosotros habriais sufrido,
Ellos habrian sufrido, -

I should have suffered,
thou wouldst have suffered,
he would have sitffered,
we should have suffered,
you would have suffered,
they would have suffered.

Second and third conditionals past.

Si, or cuando,
Yo hubiera, or hubiese
Til hubieras, or hubieses
El hubiera, or hubiese
Nosotros hubi^ramos, or hubiesemos
Yosotros hubi6rais, or hubieseis
Ellos hubierao, or hubiesen

o

IS

g

lJ^I

IMPERATIVE.

Sufre tu,
Sufra el,

Suframos nosotros,
Sufrid yosotros, -
Sufran ellos,

Present or future,

suffer thou,
let him suffer,
let us suffer,
suffer you,
let them sujffer.

VERBS. 109

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present.

Yosufra, - - . - Imay wffisr.

Tu sufras, - - - - thou mayst suffer,

Elsufra, - - . - hemayguffer.

Nosotros suframos, - - tre may suffer.

Vosotros sufrais, - - - you may suffer.

EUossufran, - - - they may suffer.

Imperfect,

Yo sufriese, - - - I might suffer.

Tu sufrieses, - - - thou mightest suffer,

£1 sufriese, - - - Ae might suffer,

Nosotros sufriesemosy - - we might suffer.

Vosotros sufrieseiSy - - you might suffer.

£llos sufriesen^ ... they might suffer.

Preterite.

Yo haya sufrido, - - i may have suffered.

Til hayas sufrido, - - thou mayst have suffered.

El haya sufrido, - - Ae may have suffered.

Nosotros hiyamos sufrido, - we may have suffered.

Vosotros h^ais sufrido, - you may have suffered.

Ellos hayan sufrido^ - - they may have suffered.

Pluperfect.

Yo habiese sufrido, - - T might have suffered,

Tu hubieses sufijdo, - - thoumightest have suffered

£1 hubiese sufrido, - - Ae might have suffered.

Nosotros hubiesemos sufrido, - we might have suffered.

Vosotros hubieseis sufrido; - you might have suffered.

Elloshubiesensufridoy - - they might have suffered.

J

V

PARADIGM OF THE PASSIVE VERBS.

Observ€aion. The passive verbs are conjugated always
and in all their tenses, with the auxiliary sery to be ; and with
the participle past of the active verb, which takes the gender
and number of the subject.
10

110 YERB8.

INFINITIVE.

Present
Ser amad-o or a, os or as^ - - to be hved.

Preterite,
Haber sido amad-o or H, os or as, - to have been hved.

Pariicijde presenL
Siendo amad-o or a, os or as, - - beifig loved.

Participle past
Habiendo sido amad-o or a, os.or as. having been hved.

INDICATIVE.

Present
Yo soy, tu eres, €1 or ella es I am^ thou art, he or she is

amado or araada, loved,

Nosotr-os or as somos, voso- We are, you are, they are

tros or as sois, ellos or .el- hoed,

las son amad-os or as.

ImpeffecL
Yo era, tu eras, 61 or ella era I utae, thou waet, he or-ehe

amado or amada, was kwed.

Nosotr-os or as eramos, voso- We were, you were^ they

tr-os or as erais, ellos or el- were hved.

las eraii amados or amadas.

Preterite. definite.
Yo fal,tu fiuste,61 or ella fue J.tBm^iAsuwMtyhe .w,jd^

amado or amada. iwas^kmsd.

NosotT'OS or.as fiiimos, voso- We «»i«, iymuaeKCf they

tr-os or as fuisteis, ellos or el- were laved.

las fueron amados or amadas.

Preterite indefinite.

Yo he, til has, el or ella ha I have,, thou hasty he or she

.Mo amado or amada, has been hved,

Nesotr-os or as hemos, iroso- We have, you -hiave, they

'4IKMS oras-faabeis, dlos ord- hasoeieenlovwd.
las ban sido amados or amia-
4as,

VBftBSi 111

PreieriU anUrior.

Yo hube, t6 hubiste^ el or ella I hadj thou hadst, he or she

bubo sido amado or amada, had been> loved,

Nosotr-os or as bubimos, voso- We had, you hadf they

tr-os or as hublsteis, ellos or had been hoed,

ellas bubieron sido amados

or amadas.

FkiperfecL

Yo babia^tlibabias, el or ella Ihadj thou hadst, he or

habia sido amad-o or a, she had been loved.

Nosotr-osorasbabiamos^voso- We had, you hadj they

tr-os or as babiais, ellos or had been loved.

ellas habfan sido amados or

amadas.

Future absolute.

¥o sere, tii seris, 61 or ella IshaU he, thou unU be, he
seri amad-o or a, or she wiU be loved.

Nosotros seremosy vosotros se- We shaR be, you witt be,
)teia, ellos or ellas serin they wiU be loved.

amad-os or as.

Future anterior.

To habre, tfi babrds, el or ella I shall have, thou wilt have,

habrd sido amad-o or &, he or she will have been

loved.

Nosotr-os or as babremos, vo- We shall have, you wiU

sotr-os or as babreis, ellos or have, they wiU have been

ellas habrin sido amad-os hved.

or as.

Future conjunotroe simplis.

Si, or cuando, 7 **1 ^ §

Yo fuere, tii fberes, el or ella ' «" "**

fuere amad-o or a,
Nosotr-os or as ilieremos,vo8o-

tr-os or as fuereis, ellos or

ellos fueren amad-os or as.

112

VBRBS.

FiUure conjunciive compound.

^iy or cuando, 7

Yo hubiere, tu hubieres, el or

ella hubiere sido amad-o or a,
Nosotr-os or as hubieremos,

vosotr-os or as hubiereis, el-

Uos or ellas hubieren sido

amados or as.

CONDITIONALS.

First condUioTud present.

Yo seria, tu serias, el or ella
seria amad-o or a,

Nosotr*os or as seriamos, voso-
tr-os or as serials, ellos or
ellas lerlan amad-os or as.

I should bCy thou wouMsibe,
he or she would be loved.

We should be^ you wtmld
be, they would be loved.

Second and third conditionals present.

Si, or cuando,

Yo fucra or fuo«p^ tn fiifiraJi or

fueses, el or- ella fuera or
fuese amad-o or a,
Nosotr-os or as fueramos or
fuesemos, vosotr-os or as fu-
erais or fueseis, ellos or ellas
fueran or fuesen amad-os

First conditional past.

Yo habria, tu habrias, el or
ella habria sido amad-o
or a,

Nosotr-os or as habriamos,
vosotr-os or as habrlais^ el-
los or ellas babrlan sido
amad-os or as.

I should have, thou wouldst

have, he or she would

have been loved.
We should have, you would

have, they would have

been loved.

VSRBSS lis

Second and third condUionali poBt.
Si, or cuandoy
Yo hubiera or hubiese. tii hu-

bieras or hubiesl^, el or ella

hubiera or hubiese sido

amad-o or a,
Nosotr-os or as hubieramos or

hubiesemos, vosotr-os or as

hubierais or hubieseis, ellos

or ellas hubierau or hubie-

aen sido amad-os or as.

iHrSBATIVK.

Se amad-o o^ a, Be thou hwed^

Sea araad-o or a, Let kim belovetL

Seamos amad-os or as, Letus be kved.

Sed amad-os or as, Be ye loved.

Sean amad-os or as. Let them be loved,

SUBJUNCTIYK*

Present.
Yo sea, tu seas, 61 or ella sea I may 6e, f Aoti may«/ 6^,
amad-o or a, Ae or the may be loved.

' Nosotr-os or as seamos, voso- We may 6tf, you may 6e,
tr-os or as seais, ellos or el- they may be loved.

las sean amad-os or as.

Imperfed.
Yo fuese, tii fueses, 61 or ella J»i^^&0,/Aotfifit^A^f«<6e,

fuese amad-o or a, A^ or she might be loved.

Nosotr-os or as fuesemos, vo- We might be, you might

sotr-os or as fu^seis, ellos or be, they might be loved.

dlas fueseo amad-os or as.

Preteriie.
Yo ba3ra, tii hayas, 61 or ella I may have, thou mayst
haya sido amad-o or a, have, he or she may have

been hvei
Nofotnw or as hiyamos, voso* We may have^ you may
tr-08 or as hiyais, ellos Orel- have, they may have

las hayan sido amad-os or as. 6«eti *

10»

ii4 VEBBS.

Pluperfect.

Yo liubjese, tu liubicses, el or I might kave^ thou mighttBt

elia hubiese 3ido amad-o have^ he or she might

or a, have been loved.

Nosotr-os or as hubiesemos, We might have^ you might

vosotr-os or as hubieseis, have, they might have

ellos or ellas hubiesen sido been loved,
amad-os or as.

PARADIGM OF NEUTER VERBS.

Observation, These verbs take in Spanish as an auxiliary
in their compound tenses, the verb habevy to have, and the
participle is indeclinable. In their simple tenses they are
conjugated like the verbs of the conjugation to which they
belong.

INFINITIVE.

Present. Llegar,* To arrive.

Preterite. Haber Uegado, To have arrived.

-Gerund. Llegando, Arriving.

Participle. Llegado. Arrived.

INDICATIVE.

Present.
tLleg-o, as, a, amos, ais, an. I arrive ^ Sfc.

Imperfect.

Lleg-aba, abas, aba, dbamos, I did arrive^ 8[C»
4bais, abaib

Preterite definite.

Lleg-ue, aste, 6, amos, isteis, I arrived, ^c.
aron.

* This verb without being irregular, takes an u after the g in all
the persons in which it is immediately followed by an e. This rule
applies to all the verbs that end in gar : it serves to preserve in all
the tenses and in all the persons the pronunciation of the g such as it
is in the infinitive present.

t We suppress the pronouns, of the use of which the preceding
doDJugatioog give examples enough.

VERBS. 115

Preterite indefinite.

He Uegado, - - - J have arrived.

Has Uegado, - - - thou hast arrived.

Ha llegado; - - - he has arrived.

Hemos llegado^ - - we have arrived.

Habeis Uegado, - - you have arrived.

Han llegado. - . - they have arrived.

Preterite anterior.
Hube, hubiste, hubo, hubi- I had, thou hadst, he or she
mosy hubisteis; hubieron had, we had, you had,

llegado. ' they had arrived.

Pluperfect.
Habia, hablas, habia, habia- I had, thou hadst, he or she
mos, habiais, habian lie- had, we had, you had,

gado. they had arrived.

Future absolute.
Lleg-are^ or ards, or ard, are IsJuiU arrive, Sfc.
ID08, areis, arin.

Future anterior.
Habre, babr^s^ habri, babre- I shcdlhave, thouwiUhave,
mosj babreis, habrdn lie- he or she will have, we

gado. shall have, you will have,

they will have arrived.

Future conjunctive simple.
Si- or cuando^ ^ If, or when, I arrive or

Ll^-are^ ares, are, iremos, > shall arrive, 8^c.
ixeis, aren. 3

Future conjunctive compound.
Si, or cuando, If, or when, I have or shall

Hubiere, hubieres, hubiere, have arrived, 8fc» if or

hubieremos, bubiereis, bu- when we have or shaU

bierea llegado. Aaz;« arrived, Sfc.

CONDITIONALS.

First conditional present.
Lleg-arla, arias, aria, ariamos, I should arrive, ^c.
ariais, ariaD.

116

VBABS.

Scctmd and third condilioTuds preteJiL

Sly or cuandoy If^ or thomghy 1 tarioed or

Lleg-ara or ase, aras or ases, should arrive^ 8fc.

ara, or ase,

Lleg-iramos or 4semo6, irais
or 4seis, aran or asoD.

Iff or thoughj we arrived or
should arrive, ^c

First condUiondl past,

Habria, habrfas, habria, ha- i shotdd have^ thou wovldst
briamos, babriaiS| habrian
llegado.

have, he or she would
have^ we shmdd have^ you
would have^ they wmUd
have arrioed.

Second mnd third eonditionah past.

Si, or cuando,
Hubiera or hubiese, hubieras

or hubieses, hubiera or hu-

biese,
Hubieramos or hubi^semos,

hubierais or hubieseis, ho-

bieran or habieseQ U^ado. *

Ify or thoughf I hadj or
should have arrived.

If, or though, we had or
shndd have arrived.

Llega t6y
Llegu e el,
Lleguemos,
Llegad vosotros,
Lleguen ellos.

IMPERATIVE.

Present or future,

arrive thou,
let him arrive,
let uB arrive,
arrive ye.
kl tiem arrive.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present,
Lleg-ue, ues, ne," uemos, I may arrive^ fc.

ueis, uen.

Imperfect,

Lleg-ase, ases, ase, &semos, I might arripe^ S[c.

^eis, asen.

VERBS. 117

Preterite,
Haya, hayas, haya, hdyamos, I may have arrived, 8fc, we

h^yais, hayan, Uegado. nwy have arrived, <^c.

Pluperfect,
Hubiese^ hubieses, hiibiese, I might have arrived, 6fc, we
hubiesemos, hubieseis^hu- might have arrived, S^e,

biesen llegado.

PARADIGM OP REFLECTIVE AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.

Observation, Reflective and reciprocal verbs have no
conjugation peculiar to them. In the simple tenses they are
conjugated like the verbs of the conjugation to* which they
belong ; and in the compound tenses, like the verb llegar^
to arrive ; that is to say, they take haher and not ser as an
auxiliary and the participle is indeclinable. Nevertheless, as
the double pronoun, which is found in all the tenses and in
each person, might present some difficulties, we shall con-
jugate some tenses of the verb congratularse, to congratu*
late oneself, which will suffice both for reflective and recip-
rocal verbs ; observing however, that the reciprocal
verbs can be such only in the three persons plural, be-
cause reciprocity cannot exist but between two persons at
least. In these plurals, yo me congratuloy tit te cons^ratuhs^
il se congrcUuIa, I congratulate myself, thou congratulatest
thyself, he congratulates himself, the verb is reflective ; and
in nosotros nos congratulamos, voaotros 08 congratulais, elhs
se congratutariy the verb can be either reflective or recipro-
cal : it is reciprocal if these words unos d otros, each other,
miituamente, mutually, can be joined to the verb : it is reflec-
tive if these words are neither expressed nor understood. *

INFINITIVE.

Present,
Congratularse,* to congratulate on^elf.

Preterite.
Haberse congratulado, to have congratulated oneself.

' * All verbs require the objective pronoung to be placed after them
in the prettnt, and after the auxiliary in the pretenU of the InfiniUfie
mode whether used afBrmatiYely or negatively.

lis

VBBB8.

CoDgratuldndose,

Gerund*

congrattikuing ontm^.

Compound Gerund.
Habi6ndose coDgratuladO; having congratulaled oneself ,

Participle.
CoDgratulado. congraiulated,

INDICATIVE.

Yo me congratuloy

Tu te congratulas,

£1 se congratda,

Nosotros nos congratulamos,

VosotFOS OS congratulaisy

Ellos se congratukm. .

Present.

I congratulate myself,
thowtongratulatest thyself,
he congratulates himself,
we congratulate onurstlves.
you congratulate yoursehes^
they congratulaie themsdves.

The other simple tenses follow the same order.
Preterite indefinite.

J have congratulated myst^.
thou hast congratulatei iky'

self,
he has congratulated himsdf.,
we hoBe congratulated oicr-

sdves.
you have congratulated your*

selves,
they have congratulated theny'

selves.
All the compound tenses follow the same order.

IMPEBATIVE.

congratulate thyself.

let him congratulate himself.

let us congratulate ourselves.

congratulate yourselves,

let them congratulate thsm^

selves.

Yo me he congratulado,
Tu te has congratuladO|

£1 se ha congratulado,
Nosotros' DOS hemes congra-

tulado,
Vosotros OS habeis coi^ra-

tulado,
£llos se han congratulado.

Congratulate,

Congratules^,

^Congratulemonosy

♦Congratulaos,

Congratulense.

* The s of the first person plural and the d of the secopd are al-
w«j8 suppressed in the imperative in reflected and reciprocal verbs.

VERBS.

119

PAEADIGM OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS.
INFINITIVE.

Present Granizar, to haiL

Preterite. Haber granizado^ to have hailed.

Gerund. GranizaDdo, hailing.

Participle. Granizado. hailed.

INDICATIVE.

Present. Graniza,

Impelled. Granizaba,

PreL def. Granizo,

Pret. ifidef. Ha granizado.

Pluperfect. Habia granizado,

Future Granizari, or Granizsurey

Future onL Habrd granizado,

CONDITIONALS.

vGranizarf a or granizara, it would haiL
Habrla granizado, it tooidd have hailed.

it haib.

it did hail.

it hailed.

it has hailed.

it had hailed.

ittmUhaiL

U will hone hmled.

Present.

Paa.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

¥res€fHt.
Imperfect.
PreteriU.
PUiperfed.^

Que

Granice,
Granizase,
Haya granizado,
Hubiese granizado,

ihat it may haU.
that it might haU.
that it may have hailed,
that it might have hailed.

Conjugation of the impersonal verb ser menesteb^
tobe re^isite or necessary.

JNFINITIVE.

FretenL Ser nuHiester,
Gerwid. Siendo menester,
Firiioijik, Si4p menester,

INDICATIVE.

Present. £s menester,

Imperfect. Era menester,

PreU dif» Fue nieoestjBr,

FfOure. Ser4.or fiiere menester,

<o hemecessary.
being necessary.
been necei^sary.

it is necessary,
it toas necessary,
it Ufos necessary,
it wUi be necessary.

120 VERBS.

CONDITIONAL.

Seria or fuera menester, it would he Tiecessary.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

PresetiL Sea menester, it may he necessary.

Imperfect. Fuese menester, * it might he necessary.

Conjugation of the impersonal verb habbb.

INDICATIVE.

Present. Hay,* there is, there are.

Imperfect. Habia, there was^ there were.

Pret. def. Hubo, there was^ there trerc.

Future. Habri or hubiere, there shaU or wiU be.

CONDITIONAL.

Habria or hubiera, there should he.

SUBJUNCTIVE.

Present Haya, there may he.

Imperfect. Hubiese, there might be.

N. B. This impersonal is used thus, that it to say in the
third person singular, even with a substantive in the plural ;
as, hay un hombre, there is a man ; huho tnttg-eres, there were
women. The compound tenses are formed by adding the
participle habido, to the simple tenses. £x. Ua habido,
there has or there have been, &c. ^

XIST OF SOMB IMPBRflONAL TBBBS.

Infinitive. Sdpers. of the pres. of the ind.

Amanecer, to begin to he day- Amanece, it begins to be day-

ligUj light.

Anochecer, to begin to grow Anochece, it begins to grow

dark, dark.

Escarchar, to freeze, to gtaze, Escarcha, itfreezesy U ^azes,

speaking of dew or rain

that glazes what it falls

upon by freezing.

* Hay logeg the letter y when tbii word is placed at the end of a
phrase. Ex. For hay tin aHo, we say, »n aHo ha, tt is one year ago.

VKKBS* 121

GfaxkitaTy to haUy Qxwijas;a^yUhaili,

Helar, iofreeze^ Hiela, it freezes.

Llover, to; rain, Llueve^ itraitu.

Lloviznar, to drizxkj Llovizna, it drizzles.

Nevar^ to snoWy Nieva, it snows.
Belampaguear, to lighten^ Relampaguea^ it lightens.

Tronar, to thunder^ Truena, it thunders.

ObservaJtion. Amanecer and anochecer have sometimes
the three persons ; then they signify to arrive, to be, to find
oneself at the dawn of day or at the fall of night in such a
condition. Ex. Mi padre amaneciS en Paris : amanecid el
campo lleno de rodo : are as if I said, mi padre Ueg6 d
Paris cuando amanecid : el campo estaha Ueno de rodo cuan-
do amaneddy my father arrived at Paris when the day dawn*
ed : the fields were covered with dew at the dawn of day.
Mi amigo amanedd pobre, 6 yo anoched ricoy that is to
say, iftt amigo se haU6 pobre cuando amanedSy my friend
was poor when the sun rose, and I was rich when the sun set

lAst and conjugations of the irregular verbs, arranged
in alphabetical order.

IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS*

Nv B. lirt. The verbs marked thusf are little used.^

2d. The third conditional not differing at all in its ter-
minations from the imperfect of the subjunctive, we have
mought it useless to conjugate it in the conditioned, and we
have contented ourselves with giving it in the subjunctive.

3d. We place in the subjunctive mode the future con-
junctive simple for the sake of distinctness.

4tfa. There are some verbs which undergo slight altera*
tions, either in theu* radical iettters, or in their terminations ;
but they are not on that account irregular ; they only under-
go these changes to preserve in the other tenses the pronun-
ciation analagous to that which they have in the present of
the infinitive. Of this number are, Ist the verbs ending in
car, which change the c into gu when it must be followed
by aa e : as buecary to seek, busqu^y I sought ; busqucy bus--
queu, busqucy ^c, that I may seek, that thou mayst seek,
that he may seek, &c. 2d. Those ending in gar which tako
11

12t VXKBS.

an tf after the g before e, as Hegar^ to arrive ; Ueguiy I arriv-
ed : pagOTf to pay, JM^^, I paid. Sec, 3d. Several ending in
cer ai^ cir which change the c into 2 before o and o, as
trenoer, to conquer, venzo^ resarctr, to repair, resarzoy I re-
pair. 4th. For the same reason delinquiry to do wrone,
changes qu into c before a and o. Ex. DeUnco^ deUtuxiy ife-
lincamoi ; and ucoger^ to choose, changes the ^ into j be-
fore a and o. Ex. EBcqjoy e9cqfa, 5th. The verbs which
terminate in cer, as crccr, to befieve; feer, to read ; poseer^
to possess ; proveerj to provide, in those terminations which
contain an t, change it into y whenever it is to be joined
with another vowel, as crei^ crey6 ; ki^ ley iron ; poseiyposC'
yere ; proveiy proveyiremosy &c. 6th. We must make
the same change in the verbs ending in titr, when the u and
the I make a part of two different syUables. Thus, Auir, to
f!y, makes in the third person of the preterite definite, huy6;
arguir makes arguy6 ; coMtituir makes constituySy dsc

N. B. The ien$e$ wad persons which are imgular ar«
laid down in italicsy and only the first person of the tenses
which are regular or run on vmfdrndy irregular throughout
the tense, is expressed.

Inf. Free. Aborreder, to hale to abhor.

Gerund. Aborreciendo, ^ti^.

Participle. Aborrecido, hated. ^

Ind. Free. Ahorrezcoy ^borreces, aborrece, > I hatCyOr
aborrecemos, aborreceis,aborrec9n, ^ abhor.
Imperfect. Aborrecla,. &c. I did abhor.

Fret, def. Aborreci, &c. I hated.

Future, ' Aborrecere, &c. I ahaU or wiU hate.

Conditional, Aborreceria or aborreciera, &c. \l8hovJdoT

^ would hate.

Imperative. Ahortec^^aborezcay hate thouy

ahorrezcamosy aborreced, a&orrfzcan. &c.

C Que aborrezca^borezcae^aborrezca^ ihatlhate~

Suh.pres, < aborrezcamoSy aborrescaisy aborrezrl or may

C cany] hate.

Imperfect. Que aborreciese, Ssc. that I hated or might hate.
Future. Si aborreciere, &c. If I hate or shall hate.

vc&BS. 123

N. B. The urregularity of this verb, of all like it in kcek,
and of those ending in oceb and acer, consists in taking a
z before c in the first person singular of the present indicai-
tive^ in all those of the present sufojancttve, in the first of the
l^ral, and in the third of the singular and pbiral of the im-
perative. The verb hacer is the only exception to this
rule ; but it has other irregularitiesy sad is found conjugated
in its alphabetical order.

Abrir, to opeuy is irregular only in the participle abierto.

Infinitive. Absolver, to absolve.

Gerund. Al^solviendo^ absolving.
Participle. AbsueUoy abaolvea.

Ind.pre$. Abmelvoy absuehesy absuelve, "llabsolvCf or
absolvemosy absolvei^} absueweuy S do absolve.
Imperfedl. AbsolvSa, ^ 1 did absolve.

Pret.def. Abselv^, &c. I absolved.

Future. Absolvere^ &c. I shail or will absolve.

Condition* Absolveria or ^bsolviera, &c. I should or would

absolve.
Imperati^. Absuehe^ absuelvaj ") absolve tkouy

absolvamoSfabsolvedyOi&ftte^Dait; ^ &;c.
Sti^'. pres. (^ absueha/dmtehasy absuelva^ ^ that I ub*
absolvamos, absolvais, dbsuelvany > solve ormay

3 absolve.
Imperfect. Que absolviese, &c. that I absolved or might

ahsi^ve.
Future. Cuando absolviere^ &c. when I absolve or shall

absolve.

Abstraer, to abstract, to make an abstraction. See traer*
Acaecer, to happen^ (impersaaoL) See aborrecer.

Infinitive. Acertar^ to succeed, to hit the mark.
Gerund. Acertando, succeeding.
Participle. Acertado, succeeded.

Indic.pres. AciertOj adertas, atsierta, \ I succeed, or
Acertamos, acertaiS; aciertan, \ hit. the mark.
Imperfect Acertaba, &c. J did succeed.

Pret, def. Acerte, Sec. I succeeded.

Future. Acertare^ &c, J skaM or wiU succeed.

12^1

CmdU.

Imperative.

Sub.pre$.

Imperfect*

JFuture,

VBBBS.

Acertaria or acertara, &c« / ehould or would

succeeeL
succeed thou,

&c.
thai I succeed,
or may succeed,
thai I succeeded^ or might
succeed
Si acertare, &c. if I succeed^ or shaU succeeds

Acierta, aderte,
acerfemos, acertady acierteny
One acierte, aeiertesy acierte,
acertemos, acerteis, aderteuj
Que acertase^ &c.

I»f, pres.

Gerund.

Participk.

Acordar,

Acordando;

Acordado^

to agrecj to resolve.

agreeing.

agreed.

Indie.pres. Acuerdo, acuerdas, acuerdaj \i ogree^^ot
Acordamos, acordais, acuerdany \ do resolve.

Impeffect. Acordaba, &c. I did agree.

Pret. def. Acorde, &c. t agreed.

Future. Acordar^^ &c. i shaU or wiU agree.

Condit. Acordaria; acordara^ I should or woukl agree.

Imperat. Acuerda,acuerdey > agree thouy

acordemos; acordady octierifefi, C &c.

Sub. pres. Que acuerdcy acuerdes/icuerdey / thai I agree,
acordemos, acordeis, acuerden, ^ or may agrte^

Imperfect. Que acordase^c. that I agreed or might agree.

Future^ Cuaudo acordare, &c. when I agree, or shaU

agree

Acordarse, to remember. See acordar.

Acordar i, udo^ to make one remember. See acordar«

Acostarse, to go to bed. See acordar.

Acrecentar, to increase. See acertar.

Inf. pres. Adherir, to adhere.

Gerund. Adhiriendo, adhering.

Participle. Adherido. adhered.

Indie, pres. Adhiero, adhieresj adhiere, ') I adherCy or do
adherimos^adherls^acMtereff^ 3 adhere.

Imperfect. Adheria, Ssc I did adhere.

Pret. def. Adheri, adheriste, adhiriS, 7 I adher^

adherimosy adherlsteis, adhirieron, S ed.

Future. Adherure, Ssc. I shaU or will adhere^

vnMS. 125

Condiiion. Adheriria, or aA»rter«, Stc. I thoidd or

would adhere*
Imperative. Adkiere^ adJderay 1 adhere thou,

adhiramoafadberldyodhieramj \ &c.
Subf. pres. Que adhiera^adhierofj adhiera, "i that I adhere,
adhiramoey adhirais^ adhieran^ ^ ormaif adl^ere.
In^etfeci. Que adhirien^ &c that I adhered^ or might

adhere.
Future. Si adhiriere, Spc if I adhere j or ihaU adhere.

Adolecer, to fall or to be sick. See abinrrecer.
Adoraiecer, to luU asleep. Idem.
Advertir, to take heed. See adbertr.
tAgorar, to augury to coi^ecture. See acordar.
Agradecer^ to take a thing Mndfy, to acknowledge a benefit.
See aborrecer.

( Alentar, to encourage. See aoertar.

l Aleotarse, to take courage. Idem.
Almorzar^ to breakfast. See acordar.
Amanecer, (verb imp.) to begin to be dayUght. See aborrecer.
f Ameutar, to shoot an arrow. See acertar.
Amolar, to sharpen. See acordar.
tAmortecene, to faints to lose.courage. See aborrecer.

Infin.pres, Andar, to waUcj to go.

Oerund, AodandO| walking.

Participle, AndadO| woiked.

Indie, pres. Ando, &c. J taott, or do waik.

Imperf, Andsd)ay Sec I did walk.

Fret. def. Anduve^ anduvistCy anduvOy > I tuo/^-

osuhitfimoiyauduvisteisyttmAnfierosiy ^ ed.
Future. Andare, &c. I shdU or mB walk.

CondHion. Audarla or anduvieray Sec I should or would

walk.
Imperative, Anda^deyandemot, Sec walk thouy &c.

Sub. pres. Que ande, &c. that I walk or may walk.

Imperf. Que andumese^c that I walked or might walk.
Future, Cuando anduviere. Sec when J walk, or shall

walk,

Anocbecevy to b^giu to grew dark. See dborrecer.

126 VERBS.

Anteponer, to prefer. See poner.

Antever, to foresee. See ver.

Apacentar^ to lead sheep to grass. See acertar*

Aparecer, to appear. See aborrecer.

Apercibir^ to prepcarey to get ready. See pedir.

Apetecer, to wishy to long for. See abontlter.

Apostar^ to lay a wager. See acordar.

Aporcar, to cover with earth, (celery, 8fc.) See acordar.

Aportar, to make a harbor. Idem.

Aprobar* to approve. Idem.

tArbolecer, to become a tree. See aborrecer.

Arrendar, to let to a tenant ;^-4o tie (a horse) by the reins*

See acertar.
Arrepentirse, to repent. See adherir.
Asentar^ to sit down, to place, to resolve, to register. See

acertar.
Asentir, to consent. See adherir.
Aserrar, to saw. See acertar.
Asestar, to aim or point at. Idem.
\sir, to seize, to take root, (speaking of plants, orjigura^^

tively spetJdng of persons,) has no irres^tdarity &t m

the following tenses, which are very little used. Indicate

pres. Asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asis, asen, Imperdt. Ase,

asga, asgamos, asid, asgan. Su^. pres. Asga, asgas, as^

ga, asgamos, asgeus, asgan.
Asolar^ to puU down, to destroy. See acordar.
Asoldar, to furnish one with money. Idem.
Asonar^ to assemble by the sound of beUs, to tune. Idem.
Atender, to apply oneself ^ to consider ; to regard. See

entender.
t Atener, to keep pace with another — to keep one^s word.

See tener.
Atentar^ to attempt...Mfform an enterprise against the hsws

in a capital concern. See acertar.
f Aterecerse, to get benumbed, to sUfien with cold. See

aborrecer.
Aterrar, to throw down on the ground. See acertar.
Atestar, tofU up. Idem.
Atormecerse^ to get benumbed,^ See aborrecer.
Atraer, to attract, to draw over to oneself. See traer^
Atravesar, to pierce, or bore. See acertar.
•^Atronar, to thunder, (impersonal) See acordar^

VERBS. 1S7

' Avenir, to happen, to come unexpeeteXyy to reamdk a

difference. See venir.
' Avenirse, to agree, to be suitabk, agreeable.
\ Aventar, to fan, to winnow. See acertar.
» Aventarse^ to he frightened, (epeaking of a flock.') Ide»r
') Avergonzar, to make one ashamed. See acordar.
\ AvergoDzarse^ to be ashamed. Idem.

Inf. pres. Bendecir, to bless.
Gerund. Bendiciendo, blessing.
Participle. Bendito, blessed.

isdicpres. Bendigo, bendices, bendice, ben^ ^ I bkss, or
decimos, bendecis, bendicen. "l do bless.
Imperfect Bendecia, &c. I did bless.

Pret. def. Bendige. bendigiste, bendifo, bendi- S r 1.1 ^
gimosi bendigisteis, bendigeron,l^ ^^^^^'
Future. Bendecire, &c. I shall or wiU bless.

Condition. Bendeciria, or bendigera, ^c. 5 ^ ehotdd or

\ would bkss.
Imperative. Bendice, bendiga, '^ bless thou,

bendigamos, bendecid, bendigan, ^ ^c.
SW6. pres. Que bendiga, &c. that I bless or tnay bless.
Imperfect. Que bendigese, &c. that I blessed, or might bless.
Future. Si bendigere, &c. if J bless, or shall bless.

Inf. pres. Caber, to contain, to be contained.
Gerund. Cabiendo, being contained.
Participle. Cabido, been contained,
huL pres. Quepo, cabes, &c. J am contained.

Imperfect. Cabf a, &c. I was contained.

Pret. def. Cupe, cupiste, cupo, ^c. I was contained.

Future. Cmnri, &c. I shall or will be contained.

Conditional Cabria or cupiera, &c. / should or would be

contained.
Imperative. Cabe, quepa, ^&e ihou con^

auepamos, eabed, quepan, ^ tained, ^c.

Sub, pres. Que quepa, 8fc. that I be or may be contained.
Imperfect. Que cu^ese, ifc. that I was, or might be

contained^

I2i VSIBS.

Atfio^ Coando agwere, &c wAen i 6e, gr skaH he

contained.

Inf. frtM. Caer, tQ /off.

GerwML Cojfmuh, famng.

ParHc^. Caido, /oAn.

jBuLpref. Co^, caes^.^c. I fuB or do fall.

Imperfed. CaiEi,&c. J {Kd faB.

Prei.peif CafyCalste^cayOyGaimos^caisteiSycayeron, I/e//.
Fuiwre. Caer6y &c. I«Aa// or vnllfdlL

Condition. Caerf a or cayera^ J should or wouU foM.

ImperaHve. Cae^ co^a, }f^B tkouj

caigamo$y ewsdfCaiganf ^ &c.

Sub^pres. Que coi^a, &c. /^/ //o^ or mayfaU.

Imperfect. Que cayese, &c. <Aa/ I fett^ or might falL
Future. Si cayere^ &c. IflfaXL or ^udlfgM.

Galentar, to warmj to heat. See acertar.

Canecer, to grow gray haired. See aborrecer.

Carecer, to want^ to be in want. Idem.

Cegar, to hUnd^ to become blind. See acertar.

f Cenir, to girdle, to eurround See .... pedir.

< Cefiirse, to girdle oneself^ to Kmit oneself s to restrict

/ on&telf Idem.

Uerner, to sifty to pass flour through a sieve — to blossom^

(speaking of vines, of grain, Src.) See cntender.
Cerrar, to shut, to lock up. See acertar.
Cimentar^ to cement, to lay the foundation. Idem.

Inf pres. Cocer, to cook, to hake.

Gerund. Cociendo^ cooking.
Participle. , Cocido, eooked.

Ind^pres. Cuezo, cueces, Cuece, ^^^ l j lake or do bake

mosy coceisy cuecen^ S

hi^ferfeet. Coda, Ssc I did cook.

Fret, perf Cocl, <&c, / baked.

Future. Cocere, &c. I shall or will cook.

Conxion. Coceria or cociera, &€. I should or would bote^
Imperative. Cuece, cuezo, 5il-l- *i t

"^ conunoa, coced, cueTan, 5 ^^' '*^«^ *^-

jSubf.pres. Qne cueza, cuezas, cueza, co- V that, T bake, or
aamos, cozais^ cuezan, ( may bake.

VERBS. 129

Imperfeet. Que cociese, &c, that I baked or might bake.
Future. Cuando cociere, &c. when Ihake^ or ^aU hake.

N. B. This verb has the same irregularities as Abeoher ;
but we have conjugated it on account of the z which it takes
instead of the c l^fore a and o, and that we may refer to it
for the conjugation of similar verbs.

Colar, to strain^ toJlHer a liquor. See acordtur.
Colegir, to coUecty to concludey to deduce. See pedir.

N. B. It changes g into J before a and o.

Colgar, to hangy to euapend. See acordar.

fComedir, to reflect,; to think ^ to premeditate. Se^pedir.

Comedirse, to become |io/t<e ; to be ruled by reason. Idem.

Comenzar, to begin. See acertar.

Compadecerse, to have pity. See aborrecer.

Componer, to compose. See poner.

Comparecer, to appear. Idem.

Competir, to enter into or to be in competition. See pedir.

Complacer, to please one. See aborrecer.

Comprobar, to prove^ to confirm. See acordar.

Concebir, to conceive. See pedir.

Concertar, to concert. See acertar.

Concordary to adjust J to conciliate^ to be conformable^ Uke.

See acordar.
Condescender, to condescend. See entender^
Condoler^ to sympathize. See absolver.

Inf. pres. Conducir, to condutty to lead.

Gerund. Conduciendo, conducting.
Participle. Conducido, conducted^

hud. pres. Conduzcoj conduces, &c. I conduct.

Imperfect. Conducf a, &c. J did conduct.

Pret. def. CondugCy condugiste, condujo, condu- > I conduc-

gimosy condugisteisy condugerony ^ ted.
Future. Conducire, &c, I shaM or will conduct.

Condition. Conduchria or condugerOy &c. ^ I should or would

^ conduct.
Imperative* Conduce, cofM^uzca, \ conduct

conduxeamos^ conducid, conduxcany ^ thouy^c

iso

Imperfect. Que tandugesey &c.
Future, Si candugere, &c.

^ tftat I conduct J or
majf conduct.

I tAoi / conducted, or
mt^At conduct.

' If J conduct or sAaff
conduct.

Conferir, <o confer. See adherir.

Confesar, to confen ; to own. Bee acertar.

Conmover^ to excite, to dUturb. See entender.

Conocer, to know. See aborrecer.

Conseguir, to obtain. See pedir.

CoDflentir, to consent. See adherir.

CoQselar, to console. See acordar.

Consonar, to agree ; to be in tune. Idem.

Constrenir^ to constrain. See pedir.

Contar, to count. See acordar.

Contener, to contain. See tener.

Contender, to contest; to dispute. See entender.

Contradeck, to contradict. See diecir.— N. B. T%ey •

only in the second person singular of t&e imperative uH

is CoNTRADicEi ond not Contradi.
Contrahacer, to cottnterfeit. See hacer.
Contraer, to contract. See traer.
Coatraveoiry to act contrary. See veair*
Controvertir, to dispute on a doubtful subject. See adherir.
Convalecer, to be conoaleseent. &« aborrecer*
Convenir, to agree. See venir.
Convertir, to convert. See adherir.
Corregir, to correct. See pedir.
Costar, to cost. iSSee atordar.
Crecer, to ^ow. iSee aborrecer.

Cubrir, to cover,-
cobierte.

irregukir only in the participle past^

D.

Ji|f. pres. Dar,
Gerund. Dando,
Fartidple. Dado,

Ind. pres. Doy, das, &c.
Imperfect. Dg^ &c.

to give,
giving,
given.

I give.
I did give.

VBI8». 131

Frei. def, Diy dtsie^ H^, dmofy dUUit^ diertm. I gave.

Future. D8r6, &c. I BhaB or wiO give.

ConditiotL Daria or dtera^ 1 thould or woM give.

Imperative. Da, de, demos, dad, den, give thouj ifc*

StA. pres. Que de, &;c. that I give or may give.

Imperfect. Que dfie^e, &c. that I gave, or wight give*

Future. Cuando ^re, &c. when I give, or £aU give.

Decaer, to decay. See caer.
UecMxiBtjtoeutytotaketuoayapartqfawhoie* 6toacertar.

Inf. pres. Dedr, to teU^ to eay.

Gerund. Diciendo, eaying.

Fariidple. Dichoy said.

Ind.pre8. Digo, dicee dicey h sau or do saw.

decimos, decis, dtcen, 5 ^ ^^*

Imperfect. Decla, &c. I A'df fe//.

Frei. def. tHge, (Mgiste^ dijoy digimosy digfs- > j ^^.^

teisy dijerony 5

Future. Dirty dirdsy &c. I cftoS or wiU fvO.

Coiufiltofi. Dtrfa or digeroy &c. I should or wouM say.
hnperaUve. Di, digOy digamosy decid, digatiy tetl thmiy fe.
Sub. pres. Que digOy ^c. that I say or may say.

Iny^ect. Que digesCy ^c. that I toldy or might teH

Future. Si ^erSy \c. if I telly or shaU say.

Dedacir, to deduct. See conducir.

Defender, to defend. See entender.

Deferir, to defer y to delay. See adherir.

DegoUar, to decapitate. Seeacordar.

Demoler, to demoUsh. See absolver.

Demonstrar, to demonstrate. See acordar.

Den^ar, to deny ; to refuse. See acertar.

Denostar, to use any one iU byword or deed. Bee acordar.

Deponer, to deposSy to resign. ' See poner.

Derreogar, to break the ba^. See acertar.

Derretir, to melt. See pedir.

Desabastecer, (una plaza,) to strip a place of provisions.

See aborrecer.
Desacertar, to erry to mistake. See acertar.
Desacordar, to disagree, ^ See acordar.
Desadormecer, to awake. See aborrecer.
Desalentar, to discourage. See acertar.

.132 ^****'

n«.«nftrecen to digompeor. Sec abwrec^r.
^^' to lo:^r^ unbind, ftjacerur.
KSrolJ, rodiwwroee. Seeacordar.

fDesatravesar, to <C«eii<aiifffe. Mem. .

D^cer, toAe«y,toft»e««^.^«.«r**. See aborrecer.
SLcende;, to de«>«rf. &e entender.

KdMrrto <«*«*««' to^lackm. See acordar.
S^X to wrpoee in height, to be taller. Uem.
S^om^, ^g»>u>«npoUte, to take too much bbert„i

D^o^^, to disorder, todi»compoH. See poner.
S^Stir, to rejvse one's consent. See adhenr.
g^^SSr toJnfound to derange. See acertar.
nLconocer, to diwwn. See aborrecer.
dTc^S 'o affiict, to grieve. See acordar.

Sr S to t:::i-U Regular om, in the j^articiple

r>S^:^"^T:L He. See decir, e^evt^ for the jecoj^
^i^si^ular of the imperative which is desdwe and nc*

desdi. „ _

Desempedrar, to mtpave. See acertar.
Desencerrar, to set at liberty. Idem.
Desenarosar to diminish, lessen. &ee acordari
l^Zlder, toprHendig^once. See entender.
n«>«ontPrra.r. to unhury. See acertar.
l^^er'toawlken, to quicken. See aborrecer.
i^vo^v/tourucrap^todevelope. See absolver.
Dese^Jr^^^^ clear the table, to oblige, to hurt. See pedir.
Desfailecer, to faint away. See aborrecer.
Pesflaquecer, to weaken, to Ungutah. Idem.
Desflocar, to ravel, (cloth.) See acordar.
Desfogarse, to veni one's passion. Idem.
Desguarnecer, to tmfurnish. See aborrecer.
Desbacer, to vndo. See hacer.-

ttSBBS. 133

Deshelar, to thaw. See acertar.

Desherrar, to unfetter, to unshoe (a horse.) Idem.

Desleify to dilute^ to temper. See pedir.

Deslucir, to tarnish^ to destroy the butre. Gerund, Deslu-
ciendo. Part. Deslucido. Indicat. pres. Desluzeoy deslu*
cesy &c. Imperat. Desluce, desluzca, deskixcamos^ deslu-
cidy desluzcan, Subj.pres. deduzca^^c.

N. 6. All the other tenses are regular and are conjuga-
ted like mfrir.

Desmembrar^ to dismember. See acertar.

Desmentir, to contradict. See adherir.

Desobedecer^ to disobey. See aborrecer.

DesoUar, to skin. See acordar.

Desovar, to spavm {speaking of fishes.) Idem*

Despedir, to send away. See pedur.

Despedirse, to take leave of Idem.

Despedrar, to take away the stones. See acertar,

Despemar, to cut off the legs. Idem*

Despertar, to awake. Idem.

Desplacer, to displease. See aborrecer.

Desplegar, to display ; to unplait. See acertar.

Despoblar, to unpeople. See acordar.

Destenir, to discolour. See pedir.

Desterrar^ to exHe, to banish. See acertar.

Destorcer^ to untwist, to straighten. See cocer.

Destrocar, to exchange back again. See acordar.

Desvanecerse, to faint away. See aiborrecer.

Desvergonzarse^ to lose all shame ; tc want respect St^

acordar.
Detener, to stop. See tener.
tDetraer, to remove, to detract. See traer.
Devolver, to return ; to send back. See absolver.
Dezmar, to decimate or tithe. See acertar.
Diferir, to differ. See adherir.
Digerir, to digest. Idem.
Disolver, to dissolve. See absolver.
Pisponer, to dispose. See poner.
Distraer, to distract. See traer
Divertir, to divert. See adherir.

134 VERBS.

C Doler, to fed pain. See absolf er.

< Dolerse, to be sorry ; to repent ; — to feel for othei^* pain ;

(^ — to compassionate. See absolver.

Inf pres, Dormir, to sleep.

GertmtL « Durmiendo^ sleeping.
Participle. Dorroido, slepL

Ind. pres. Duermo^ duermes^ duertne^ 1 I sUep^ or do

dormimos, dormis, duermen. y sleep.

Imperfect Dorrola, Sfc. I did sleep.

Pret. def. Dormi, dormiste, durmiS^ ") j *^

dormimos, dormfsteis, durmieron. ^ ^^
Future. Dormir6, &c. I shall or wiU sleep.

Condition. Dormiria or durrnieraj&c Inhoiddor wndd sleep.
Imperative. Duerme^ duerma^ Xdeen thou. Sec

durmamoSf dormid, duerman, ^ ^^ ^^ ^ '
Sub. pres. Que duerma, duermaSy daermOj > ikaJt I deep or

durmamoSj durmais^ duermaUj ) may sleep.
Imperfect. Que durmiese^ &c. that I slept^ or might sleep.
Future. Caando durmiere^ &c. when I sleep or shall sUqk

>E.

Elegir, to choose^ to elect. See pedir. N. B. ^is verb
changes G into J before A and O to preserve the guttural
pronunciation of the infinitive.

Embravecerse, to become furious. See aborrecer.

Embrutecerse, to become brtUish. See aborrecer.

Empedrar, to pave. See acertar.

Empezar, to begin. Idem.

Einplumecer, to begin to have feathets. See aborrecer.

Eropobrecer, to grow poor. Idem.

Emporcar, to dirt. See acordar.

Encabellecer, to begin to have hair. See aborrecer.

Eocallecer, to form a caUus. Idem.

Eocalvecer, to become bald. Idem.

Eocanecer, to be greyhaired by old age. Idem.

Eocarecer, to raise the price, to exaggerate. Idem.

Eocender, to light afire. See aeeriar.

Enceasar, to perfume with incense. See acertar.

TKEBS«

135

Eocerrar, to shut in. Idem.

Eocomendar, to rtoommentL Idem.

Eocrudecerse, to become crueL See aborrecer.

£ocrae]ec«r, to v^ritate, to render crueL See aborrecer.

Encontcar, io,meet^ to find. See acordar.

Encordar, to put strings and cords (to an instrument.) Idem.

Eocubertar, to cover with a blankeL Seeacertar.

Endentecer, to irreed teeth. See aborrecer.

Eodureoer, to grow hard. Idem.

EnBaquecer, to grow lean. Idem.

Enfurecerse, to become furious. Idem.

Eograndeoer, to growy to enlarge. Idem.

Eogreirse, to adorn one^s self. See pedir.

Eogrosafy to grow big. See acordar.

EDloquecer, to becwne mad. See aborrecer.

Eolacir, to whiten^ to do over with pkuter. See deslucir.

Enmendar, to correct. See acertar.

Enmocecer, to grow young again. See aborrecer.

EaiDohecerse, to grow moukty. Idem.

Enmudecer, to grow dumbt to be silent. Idem.

Eaaegrecer, to. grow black, to blacken. Idem^

EoQobleeer, to ennoble. Idem.

'fEoaudecer, to set or to kntt, (speaking of grain, Sfc.) Idom.

Eararecer, to rarefy^ to become thin. Idem*

Eariquecer, to enrich. See aborrecer^

Earodar, to break upon the wheel. See acordar.

EoMngreotar, to make bloody. See acertar.

Eosoberbeoerse, to grow proud. jS^e aborrecer..

Eotaliecer, to shoot or bud. Idem.

Infpres. Enteoder, to understand.

Gerund. Entendiendo, understanding.

Participle. Entendidp, understood.

Ind* pres. Entiendo^ entiendes^ entiende^ ^ lunderstand, or
enteodemo9,enteDduisyen<iefiden,c do understand.
Imperfect, Entendia, &c. I did understand.

Pret. def. Extendi, Sec, I understood.

Future. Enteodere, Sfc. J shall or icUl understand.

Condition, Eoteaderia or enteadiese, Ssc. 5 / should or toould

/ understand.

i^

VE1UI3.

Imperative. Entiende^ entienda^ ^understand

entendamos, en tended, enliendaji^ I Uum^ Sfc.

Sub, pres. Que tniieTida^ entiendaSj erUienda^ C that I under^

entendamos, entendais, enliendanjK stand or may

^ understand.
Imperfect Que eotendiese, &c. ^ that I understood or

l might understand.
Future. Si eoteodiere, &c. 5 ^ ^ understand or

dudl understand.

£nternecef , to soften^ to touchy to movcy to pity. See aborreoer

Enterrar^ to bury. See acertar.

Entomecer or eniumecer, tosweU; tastupify, See aborreoej •

Entontecerse, to become dull, foolish, idem.

EntOFpecerse, to become heavy , lazy. Idem.

Entrelucir, to ^inimer. See deslucir.

Entreoir, to hear imperfectly. See oir.

Eotretener, to entertain. See tener.

Entristeoer, to rex, to make sad. See abonecer.

Eotullecer, to lose the use ofone^s Umbs, Idem.

Entumecerse, to swell ; to grow angry (^speaking of the sec)

Idem.
Envegecer, to grow old. Idem.
Enverdecer, to paint in green. Idem.
Envestir, to invest. See pedir.
Envolver, to torap up. See absoWer.
Equivaler, to be of equal value. See ?aler.

Tnf Pres.

Gerund,

Participle,

Erguir,
Irguiendoy

Erguido,

to erect, to rai^e,

erecting,

erected.

lad, pres.

Impeifect,
Pret. def.

Future,
Condition.

or do

erect,

1 did erect.

Yergo, yergues, yergue,

erguimos, ergui?, yerguen,

Erguia, Sue,

Ergul,. erguiste, irguio,

erguimos, erguisteis, irguierofii

Erguire, &c. I shall or will erect

Erguirla or irguiera^ &c. I shotdd or wo^ld erect

') I erectf

> I erected,

VE&BSr 137

\

tmperative. Yerg^e, yerga, 7^athm, *c.

trgamoSf erguid, ytrgan^ ^
Sub, prea. Que yerga, y^^g^* y^rga^ 7 thai I ereotf or may

irgamos, irgais, ytrgan^K erecU

Imperfect. Que irguipse, &c. dud l erected or miskt erect.
FfUure. . Cuaodo tr^iVe, &c, when 1 erect or JuiU erect.

Inf. pres. Errer, to err.

Ind.preB. Yerro, yerraSj yerra, ^ J «^ or do err.

erramoS) errais, yerren^ 5

Imperative. Yerra, yerre, 7 ^ -^

erreroos, errad, yerren^ y ' ^

Sub. pres. Que yerre^ yerres^ yerre^ ^ that I err or

erremosy ecreis, yerren^ 3 may err.

N. B. All the other teoses are regular.

*f EscaWntar, to warm. See acertan /

Escarmentar, to correct oneself. Idem.

Escarnecer, to mock one. See aborrecer.

f Eaclarecer, to dear up ; to light. Idem.

Ekcooer, to smart, to itch painfully. See cocer.

£&cribir, to write. (It has no irrtgularity but in the participle

past^ esciito.)
E^forzar, to animate, to encourage. See aeOrdar.
Establecer, to establish. See aborrecer.
ESstregat, to scour, rub. See acertar. .
Edtremecerse, to tremble, to be frightened. See aborrecer.
Estrenir, to tie, to bind, to press close, to squeeze. See pedir.
Espedir, to dispatch. Idem.
Esponer, to expose. See pooer.
Esiender, to spread. See en tender.
Estraer, to export, to extract. See traer.

F.

Fallecer, to die. iS^ee aborrecer.

Fa?orecer, fjo favour* Idem.

Feoecer, to finish^ to die, to setUe (an account.) Idem

138 VEBKS. ^ '

Fortalecer, to fortify. See aborrecer.
Forzar, to force. See acordar.
Fregar, to imuA, to dean, to furbish (jdaie,)
Freir, to fry. Part. Frito. The rest like pedir.

Q.

Gemir, to groan. See pedir.
Qobernar, to govern. See acertar.
Guaroecer, tofiimi$h. See aborrecer.

H.

Haber, (impersonoL) Indie, pres. Hay and Ha, there is,
there are. The rest like the auxiliary verb baber, wiih this,
differenee, that the former has only the third person singular
f See the impersonal verbs,)

N. B. Tbe adverb there is never expressed in this imper^
sonal verb io Spaoish.

Inf. pres. Hacer, to do, to make.

. Gerund. Haciendo, making.
Partudple, Hecho, done.

Ind. pres. Hago, haces, &c* I do or make.

Imperfect. Hacla, &c. I did do or make.

PreU dtf. Hice^ hicistey hizo^ \ I did o mad^

hicimos, hicisteis, hicietony s

Future. Hari, hards, hard, ^ /I sltaJU or vnli

harimosy hariis, harduy 5 ^ or make.

Condition. Hai^a or hiciera, &c. I should or would do.

Imperaiive. "'"^^ ^ Ida thou, *c.

kagawjosy baced, hagany 5 ^ ^

Sub. pres. Que hugay hagas, haga, 7 that I do or

hagambs, hagaisi^ hagany ^ may do.

Imperfect. Que hiciese^ that I made or might make.

Future. Si Atctere, &c. If I do or shaU do.

Heder, to stink. See entender.

Helar, to freeze (impersonal.) See acertar.

Hinder, to cleave, or split. See eateoder.

Herir, to woufid. See adherir.

Herrar, to shoe. or to bind about with iron work See acecUr.

VEBBd.

139

Herrir to boil See adherir.
Holgar, to repose^ to do nothing. See acordar.
Hollar, to trample under feet ^ to tread. Idem.
Humedecer, to nunsten. See aborrecer.

Impedir, to prevent. &e pedir.

Imponer, to impose. See poner.

Indisponer, to indispose, to ^csc^--^ render incapable^ ^c.

See poner.
Liducir, to induce^ ^«* conducir.
Inferir, to *»/^« See adherir.
Intorv^^nir, to intervene. See venir.
Introducir, to introduce. See conducir.
Invernar, to winter. See acertar.
Invertir, to transpose^ to overturn^ to subvert the order ^S[c.

See adherir.
Investir, to invest. See pedir.
logerir or engerir, to graft a tree. Part, ingerto or engerto.

See adherir.

Inf. pres.

Gerund.

Participle.

to go.
going,
gone.

Ind.pres0

Impeffect.

Pret. def.

Future.

Condition,

tmperatii

Suo.pres,

Impeffect.
Future.

VotfyVaSj vay vamoSf vais^ van, I go or do go.
Iba, 8fc. I did go.

Fuiy fuisteyfutjkimosyfuisteisyfueronj I went.
Ire, &c. I shall or will go.

Iria or fuera, &€. I should or would go.

ve.

Viy vaya,
vamos, id, vayan.
Que vaya, vayas, vaya,
vdyamos, vdyais, vayan,
Qaefuese, fueses, fuese,
fuisemos, fuiseis, fuesen.

go thou, Sfc.

that I go or

may go.

> that I went or

might go.

Cuando Juere, ^c. when Igo or shall go.

N. B. AU the compound tenses of this verb are corrugated
with the verb habbr and not ser. fFe translate then
I have or am gone, I had or was gone, &c. by he ido, habia
ido, and not oy Soy ido, era ido.

140* VBIBS.

J.

Inf.prei. Jtigar, ioflny^

hid.pre8. JuegOjjuega$Jueg4^ Ij pkuw.

- jugamos, jugais, jtt^an, S

I^'V^^^^. Juegajueguey I play thou, ^c.

N. B. All the other tenses are regular.

L.

Lucir, to thine. See deslucir.

LL.

Llover, to rain (impersonal.) Part. Llovido, rainedi Ste
absolver.

M.

tMagrecer, to grow lean.

Maldecir, to curse. See bendecifk

Manifestar^ to manifest. See acetnar.

M antener, to maintain See tener*

Medir, to measure. See pedir.

Mentar, to mentiony to name. See aoertar.*

Mentir, to lie. See adherir. \

Mereccr, to merit. See aborreeer.

Merendar, to eat acojUaiion between dinner and' supper. See

acertar.
Mohecerae, to make mouldy. See aborrecer.
Moler, to grind. Part, molido. See abSolvei-.
Morder, to bite. See absolver.
Morir, to die. Part. Muerto. See dormir.
Mostrar, to show. See acordar.
Mover, to move^ to touch, to eject. See absolver.
Nacer, to be bom. See aborrecen
Negar, to denyj to refuse. See acertar.
Negrecer, to blacken^ to become black. iSbe aborrecer,
Nevar, to ^qw^ (imp^rs.) See £^cert?ir.

VBRBSU 141

o.

Obedecer, te obey. See aborrecer.
Oscurecer, to obscure^ darken. Idem.
Obtener, to obtain. See tener.
Ofrecer; to offer. See aborrecer.

Inf.pres. Oir, to hear.

Gerund, Oyendo, hearing.

Participle. Oido, heard.

Ind. pres. Oigo, oyes, oy e, > j ^^^ ^^ ^ j^^^

Oimos, ois, oyen, 5

Imperfect. Oia, &c. / rfw^ *««r.

Pret.def. Oi, oiste, oyo, I I heard.

oimos, oisteis, oyeron^ ^

Future. Oire, &c. / shaU or wtC Aeor.

Condition. Oiria or <^era, &c. I should or would hear.
Imperative. Oye, Oiga, hear thou, ^e.

oigamoSf oid, oigan^ I

Sfi6. pre*. Que ofga, &c. «Aa* I hear or may Aeor.

Imperfect. Que oyese, &c. tAa< J heard or mt^A^ Acar.
Future. Si oyere,&c. t/ 1 Aear or shall hear.

Inf.pres. Oler, , to smeU ox scent.
Gerund. Oliendo, smelling.

Participle, Olido, smelt.

Ind.pre,. Hueh, h^k,,huek, I j ,^u or do «ndl.

olemos, oleis, huelen, 5
Imperative. HueU, hnela, I mell thouy S^.

olamos, oled, huelanj . S .

Stih. pres. Que huela^ huelas, huela, 1 that I smeU or

olainos, olais, huelan^ 5 ^^V smell*^

N. B. AU the other tenses are regular.

Oponer^ to oppose. See pouer.

P.

Pacer, tofeed^ to graze. See aborrecer.
Padecer, to suffer, to endure. Idem.
J Parecer, to appear. Idem.
I Parecerte; tq re^mkU. Idem.

142 VEMBn.

Inf, pres, Pedir, to tuhj to beg.

Gerund. Ftdiendo, askinff.

Participle. Pedido, asked.

hid.pres. Pido, pides pide j j j^ ^^

r- pedimos, pedis, /wdiwi, ^^^^^ «* »«/€««..

Imperfect. Pedia, &c. I did ask.

Pret. def. Pedi, pediste, pidio, 1 j r,

pedimos; pedisteis, pidieron, 3 ***

Future. Pedire, &c, / »Aa/? or wtZ? ask.

Condition. Pediria or pidieroy Sfc. I ihould or u>ould ask.
Imperative. Fide. pida. 1 1 ^v •

pidamos, pedid,^ufa«, ^""^ "^^ *"•

Sub. pres. Que /nc^, ^c. that I ask or faay ask.

Imperfect. Que ptcetese, &c. that I adced or m^Jk/ a^.
Future. Cuando pidiere, &e. when I nsk' or aSatt ask.

Pensar, to think. See acertar.
Perder, to lose. See enteDder.
Perecer, to periih. See afoorrecer.
Perniquebrar, to break the legs. See acertar/
Perseguir, to pcreecute^ to pursue. See pedir.
Pertenecer, to belong. See aborrecer.
Pervertir, to pervert. Set adherir.

Iff. pres. Placer, taphaset

Ind. pres. Me place, it pleases me.

Impmfeet. Plada, it did please.

Fret. def. Plugo, it pleased.

Sub. pres. Que plegUe^ that it may please.

Imperfect. Que pluguiese or pbtguiera^ that it might please.

Future. Si pluguiere, if it shall please.

N. B. Placer is only used in the above tenses and per-
sons. Flegue 4 Dios I May it please God ?

Plegar, to plait or fold. SeS acertan
Poblar, to people. iSSee acordaj%

vsfiss. 143

Inf. pres. Poder, io he ahie^ mn^ may.

Gerund. PtedHmdOj being Me.
Participk. Podido, been aJtie.

Ind.pres. Puedo^ pftedee^ puede^ ^ I am able or
podemps, podeis, jpueden, ^ I can.

Imperfect. Podia, &c. J was able or eouid.

Pretjdief. Pude^ pudiatey pudOf ^1 was able or

pudimosy pwJH^i^Sy pudieron, \ couid*

Future. Podri^ &c. I shau or udU be able.

Cfmdition^ Podria^ or pudier a, &C. lekouUtorufonddbeabk.

Imperative, (wanting.)

Sub. pres. Que puedoj puedasy pueda^ 5 ^^ ^ ^^^ ^^
podamos, i^ds^y puedan, f may be qbk.

Imperfect. Que pudiese^ &c. that I could or might be-able.

Future. <^viBSkdopwKerefSsc. when Icon or shaUbeabk-

Inf. pres. Podrir, to rat.

Gerund. Pudriendo^ rotting.

Participle. Podrido, rotten.

Ltd. pres. Pudro, pudres, pudre, ?t^^. _ ^ ^,
podrimos,podris,piid^cn, 5^ '^^^ ®^ ^"^^^

Imperfect. Podria, &c. 1 did rot.

Pret.def. Podri, podriste, pudrid^ ^ » ,

podrimos, podristeis, pudrieron^ 5 ^^ ^ '

Future. Podrire, &c. I shall or will rot.

Condition. PodririsLor^pudrierajSzc. I should or would rot.

Imperative. Pudre, pudrOy \ ot tha ^

pudrmnosy podrid, pudrauy \ ^ '♦xT^-

Sub. pres. Que pudra, Ssc. that I rot or may rot.

Imperfect. Que pudriese^ &c. that I rotted or might rot.

Future. Si pudrierey &c. if I rot or shall rot.

N. B. Most tenses and persons of the above verb can only
be used figuratively.

Inf. pres. Poner, to put y to place.

Gerund. Poniendo, putting.

Participle. PuestOy put or placed.

Ind.pres. PongOy pones^ &c. I put or. do put.

Imperfect. Ponia, fee. I didpuU.

144 VBBBS.

Future. Fondrty Sec . I shall or wiU put.

Condiiimi. Fondria^ or pusiera^ 8[c, IshouJdor would put.
Imperative. Fan, panga, ^ ^^

pongamog^ponedjpongan, 5
Sub. pres. Que pongOj Sue. that I put or may put.

Imperfect. Qae punesty&ic. that I put or might put.

Future. Cuando puHere^ &c. when I put or shallput.

Predecir, to predict. See decir.

Preferir, to prefer. See adherir.

Proponer, to propose. See poner.

Prescribir, toprescrihcy has no irregularity hut in the par'

ticiple pasty FKEScuno.
Presentir, to foresee j to have a forecast. See adherir.
Presuponer, to presuppose. See poner.
Prevalecer^ to prevail See aborrecer.
Prevenir, to anticipate, to prepare. See venir.
Prever, to foresee. See ver.
Producir, to produce. See conducir.
Proferir, to utter. See adherir.

Promover^ topromote, to elevate (to a dignity.) See absolver.
Proponer, to propose. See poner.
Proscribir, to banish, is irregular only in the participle

past, PROSCRITO.

Proseguir, to pursue, to continue. See pedir.

Probar, to prove; to experience ; to taste, to try. See

acordar.
Provenir, to proceed, to issue. See venir.
Proveer, to provide. See N. B. 5th. page 121.

Q*

Quebrar, to break, to dash in pieces; to fail, to be a hank-
rupt. See acertar.

Inf. pres. Querer, to mil, to wish, to love.
Gerund. Queriendo, willing,
Fftrticiple. Querido^ nulled.

Ind. pres Quiero, quieres, quiere, > J will or wish or
qoeremos, quereis, quieren^ ^ do love.

VXBBS. 145

Imperfect, Querla^ &c. / did wish.

Fret, def, Qmsej quisistej quUo^ ? IwiOed or wiehr

quieimosj quisUteUy quiaieronj ^ edj or loved.
Future, Qaerre, &c. I shaU or win wish.

Condition, Querria or qtiieiera^&c, I should or would wisk.
Imperative. Quiere, quiera, ? ^ ^ .

queramos, quered quieran, s

. pre«. Que quiera, quierasj quiera, / ^Ao^ 1 love or
queramos, querab quieran^ 5 ^''^^ ^^-

Imperfect. Que quisiese^ &c. f Aa/ J wished or m^A^ tMf A.
Fuitire. Si quisiere, &c. if J tmA or «AaJ7 tmA.

Rebolcar or revolcar to tumble, to welter. See acordar.

Recaer, to fall again. See caer.

Recocer, to bake again. See cocer.

Recomendar, to recommend. See acertar.

Reconocer, to acknowledge. See aborrecer.

Reconvalecer, to recover from an illness. Idem.

Recordar, to remember, to call to mind. See acordar.

Recordarse, to remember. Idem.

Recostarse, to lie or lean on one side. Idem.

Recrecer, to grow again. See aborrecer.

Reducir, to reduce. See conducir.

Referir, to refer. See adherir.

Reflorecer, to blossom again. See aborrecer.

Reforzar, to strengthen, to reinforce. See acordar.

Regar, to water. See acertar.

Regir, to govern. See pedir.

Regoldar^ to belch. See acordar*

Rehacer^ to do again. See hacer.

Inf. pres. Reir, to laugh.

Gerund. RiendOy laus[hing.

Farticiple. Reldo, laughed.

Ind.pres. Rio, ries, rie, ? r » . , ,

reiiios, reis, Wen, J^ ^^^ <>' ^ ^^*-

Imperfect. Reia,&c. I did laugh,
13

146 TSftBS.

FrH.dtf. Rei, reiste, nV^, ^

reunos, reifiteis, rtcroii, J «*«^#«».

Future. Reire, &c. J ^Actff or im// Zot^A.

ComUHon, Reiria or rieruy &c. J $houid or u^otf 2tf ilmi^A.

iS^tt^. |»re«. Que ria, &c. f Ao^ I may laugh.

Imperfect. Qire ricte, &c. thM I fmgid kmgk.

Future. Cuando rierey Sse^ w&en Ikmgk or ehaU laugh.

Relucir, to shine. See deslucir.

Remanecer, to appear ^ to come ineuddenlyy to remain. See

aborrecer.
Remendar, to mendy to patchy to botch. See acertar.
Remorder, to bite agawy to cause remorse. See absolver.
Remover, to removey to change place. Idem*
Renacer, to be bom agaiuy to revive. See aborrecer.
\ Rendir, to returny to subfeciy to enslave. See pedir.
I Rendirse, to surrender oneself. Idem.
Kenegar^ to denyy or disown. See acertar.
Renovar, to renew. See acordar.
Reiiir, to scold^ to quarrel See pedir.
Repetir, to repeat. Idem.
Reponer, to put again. See poner.
Reprobar, to reprove. See acordar.
Requebrar, to cajole or wheedle. See acertar.
Requerir, to require. See adherir.
Resentirse, to resenty to be sensible of. See adherir.
Rescontar, to balance one part of an account with another.

See acordar.
ResoUar, to breathe. Idem.
Resolver, to resolve. See absolver.
Resonar, to resound. See acordar.
Restablecer, to repairy or restore* See aborrecer.
Retemblar, to have continual tr&Mings. ^See acertar.
Retener, to detain. See tener.
Retentar, to be threatened with a relapscy (speaking of

sickness^ See acertar.
Retenir, to dye again. See pedir.
Retoitoer, to twist agaiuy to retorty (^n^irgument.) See

cocer.

VSRB8. 147

( Retraerse, to take refuge. See traer.

^ Retraer, to withdraWy to draw towarik one$i^. Idmn.
Retrotraer, to antedate^ to trace back a thing to a time fr^

vious to its existence. See traer.
Reventar, to burst. See a^ertar.
Rever, to see again. See ver*
Reverdecer, to grow green again. See aborrecer.
Reverter, to return^ to over^w* See ^ktender.
Revestir, to invest. See pedir.
Revolar, to fl^ again. i%e acordar.
Revolcarse, to wallow. Idem.
Revolver, to stir, to disturb^ to overtkroWy to turn over.

See absolver.
Rodar, to roU. See acordar.
Rogar, to pray. Idem.

S.

Inf.pres. Saber, to know things.

Gerund. Sabiendo, knowing.

Participle. Sabido, known,

Ltd. pres. Si^ sabes, &c. J know or do know.

Imperfect. Sabla^ &c. I did know.

Fret. def. SupCy supistCy supOy > I ibi«ir

supinutSy supisteisy supierony ^

Future. Sabriy &c. I shall or will know.

Condition. Sabria or supierOy Sec. I should or wouldknow.
Imperative. Sabe, sepOy > , ., ^

sepamosy sabed, sepan, C '^^^ ^'^' ^^'

Sub. pres. Que sepay &c. that I know or map know.

Imperfect. Que supiese, &c. that I knew or might know.
Future. Si supiere, &c. if I know or shaU know.

Saber bien, to relishy (speaking of meaty fruit ^^c.) See saber.

Inf. pres. Salir, to go out, to walk out.

Gerund. Saliendo, going out.

Participle. Salido, gone out.

Ind. pres. SalgOy sales, &c. I go or do go out.

Imperfect. Salia, &c. I did go out.

Fret, def Sail, &c, 1 went out.

148 VB&B0.

Fviwre. SaUriy See. I shad or wiUgo wi.

CondUion. 8(Udria or saherHy&c. I should or would go out.
Imperative. 8^, saiga, I go thou out, &c.

salgamosj salid, satgan, ^
Suh.pres, Que saiga, safgas, saXga, > that I go out or

saigamosy salgais, satgan, ^ may go out.

Imperfect. Que saliese, &c. that I went out or might go out.
Future. Guandosaliere^&c. when I go out or shall go out.

Segar, to reap, to mow. See acertar.
Seguir, to follow. See pedir.

N. B. This verb and its compounds lose the U before A
and O : we say cbnsequentfy sigo and siga and not siguo and
sigua.

Sembrar, to sow, to strew. See acertar.

Sentarse, to sit down. Idem.

Sentir, to feel; to perceive ; to judge ; to regret. iSSeeadherir.

Serrar, to saw. See acertar.

Servir, to serve. See pedir.

Sobreponer, to place above. See poner.

SohresalW, to surpass in height; in size; toexcel,Sfc. j8(eesalir.

Sobrevenir, to come in vnlookedfor. See venir.

Soldar^ to solder. See acordar.

Inf. pres. Soler, to be wont or accustomed to.
Gerund. Soliendo, being wont to.
Participle. Solido, accustomed to,
Indpres. Suelo, sueles, suele, > I am wont to.

solemos^ soleis, suelen, S
Imperative. Suelpsuela, ^ ^^ accustomed to.

solamos, soled , suelan, ^
Sub. pres. Que suela, suelas, suela, > that I be or may
solamos, solais, suelan, ^ be wont to.

N. B. This verb is seldom used except in the Ind. pres.
and Imperfect which is regular.

Soltar, to loosen^ to untie, to deliver. See acordar.
tSolver, to resolve, to decide. See absolver.

VEABfl. 149

C Sonar, to resautkd, to echoy to ring. See acordar.

l Sonarse, (las narices,) to blow <me^9 nose. Idem.

Sonar, to dream. Idem.

Sonreir, to smile. Seereir.

C Sosegar, to repose. See acertar*

< Sosegarse, to aUay ow^e passion^ to tranquHUze oneself.

( Idem.

Sostener, to support. See tener.

Soterrar, tointer^ to bury. Seeacertar^

Sustraer, to substract. See traer.

Suponer, to suppose. See poner.

T.

Temblar, to tremble. See aceitar.

Tender, to spread, to extend. See entender.

Tener, to have, to hold. {See the auxiliary verbs for the

eomjugaiion of this verb.)
Teiiir, to dye. See pedir.
TeniaLTy to tempt y to feel. Seeacertar.
Torcer, to twist. See cocer.
Tostar, to roast. See acordar.
Traducir, to translate. See conducir.

Inf. pres. Traer, to bring.

Uerund. Trayendo, bringing.

Participle. Traido, brought.

Ind. pres. Traigo, traes, &c. I bring or do bring.

Imperfect. Traia, &c. I did bring.

Pret.def Trage, tragiste,tr€^o, > j j .^

Tragtmosy tragtstetSy tragerouy ^ ^ ''"«'
Future. Traere, &c. I shaU at will bring.

Condition. TmeriayOr tragerOy^c. I should or would bring.
Imperative. Tne, traiga, ?j„-^,a«^^.

traigamosy traed, traxgan, >
Sub. pres. Que traigOy Sfc. that I bring or may bring.
Imperfect. Que tragesSySfc. that I brought or might bring.
Future. Si tragercy Sfc. if I bring or shaU bring.

N. B. Formerly traer had trugCy and trugese instead of
those laid down in pret. def. and imp. subj.

Transcender, to gOy to pass or ascend beyond, ^^eneneert.
13*

150

VERBS*

Trascender, to discover, to penetrate, to cumprehend, Idem^

Trascolar, to strain, to filter, to penetrate. 8ee acordar.

Trascordarse de, to forget. Idem.

Trasegar, to put topsy turvy, to turn up, 8fc, See acertar.

Trasoliar, to dream, to be out ofone^s mind. See acordar.

Trasponer, to transpose. See poner.

Trocar, to exchange. See acordar. N. B. This verb changes

c into qu before e.
Tronar, to thunder* See acordar.
Tropezar, to stumble, to make a false step. See acertar.

Ind. pres.
Imperfect.
Fret def
Future.

Condition.

Imperative.

Sub* pres.
Imperfect.
Future.

Inf. pres^ Valer,
Gerund. Vaiiendo,

Participle. Valido,

Valgo, Tntesy &c.
Valia, &c.
Valf, &c.
Valdri, &c.

Valdria or valiera^ &c.

Yale, valga,

to be worth,
being worth,
been worth.

lam worth.,

. I was worths

I was worth.

I shaU be worth.

^ I should or would

^ be worth.

i be thou worth, Sfc,

valgamos, y?\ed, valgan, ^
Que valga, Sfc. that I be or may be worth.
Que valiese, &c. that I was or might be worth.
Cuando vallere, when I be or shcdl be worth.

Inf. pres. Vemr, to come.

Gerund. Viniendo, coming.

Participle. Venido, come.

Ind.pres. Vengo, vienes, mem, l j ^^^ or do come.

Venimos, venis, vienen, ^

Venia, &c. J did come.

Vine, vinisie, vino, } j ^^^^^^

vinimos, vinisteis, vinieron, ^

Future. Vendri, &c. I shaU or will come.

_ ,. . ,r J / . . c ^ I should or would

Condition. Vendria, or vtntera, &c. < ^^^^^

Imperative. Ven,venga, ? come thou, ^-e.

vengamos, venid, vengan, S '

Sub. pres. Que venga, S^c. that I come or may come*

Imperfect.
Pret. def.

VERBS.

151

Imperfect, Que viniescy ^c. that I came or might come.
Future. Si vimere^ Sfc, if I come or shall come.

Yenirse, to come away. See venir.

Inf. pres. Ver, to see.

Gerund. Viendo, seeing.

Pcwticipk. Visto seen.

Ind. pres.

Imperfect.

Fret. def.

Future.

Condition.

Imperative.

Sub. pres.
Imperfect.
Future.

Veoy ves, &c.

Veiay &c.

Vi, &c.

Vere, &c.

Veria or viera, &c.

ve, veOf
veamosy ved, vean^
Que veOf veas^ &c.
Que viese^ &c.
Cuando viere, &c.

I see or do see.

I did see.

I saw.

I shall ot will see.

I should or would see.

> see thouy SfCm

that I see or may see.

that J saw or might see.

when I see or shall see.

N. B. In the above verb the v is the only radical letter.
See Temer second regular conjugation.

Verter, to pour, to shed. See entender.
5 Yestir, to dress, to clothe. See pedir.
( Yestirse, to dress oneself. Idem.
Volar, to fiy {with wings.) See acordar.
Volcar, to turn, to overthrow. Idem.
C Yolver, to come back, to return; to turn, to send back,
^ See absolves
^ Volverse, to become, to change oneself; to turn about.

AGREEMENT OF VERBS WITH THEIR SUBJECT.

We call that the subject of which we affirm some thing,
and that the attribute which is affirmed of it. When we say ;
elrey es benSfico, the king is beneficent ; the word rey is the
subject of which we affirm the quality oibentfico, which is
the attribute.

Rule LI. The subject b always either a noun or pronoun.
When it is a pronoun, it is almost always suppressed in Span-
bh, both when the phrase is affirmative and negative, as we
•lave already stated in the N. B. upon the person* and num-
bfirs of verbs, page 82. If I have to translate in Spanish the

152 VEIBS^

words t love, thou latest, ikey love, I suppress the pronouns,
and say, amo, amas, aman / the terininatioii of each of these
persoDs sufficiently indicates the pronoun that belongs to it,
and which is implied.

Exception. We often express the pronoun to give more
energy to the phrase. We roust also express k whenever its
suppression would leave an ambiguity in speech. £x. Yo
lo digo, ta lo has hecho, I say it, thou hast done it • . . Pedro
me quiere t yo le aborrezco, &c. Peter loves me, and [ hate
him, &c.

Rule LII. The subject, whether a noun or pronoun, is
commonly placed before the verb. Ex. Tu padre Uora y
til ries, thy father weepest and thou laughest.

1st Exception. In interrogative and imperative phrases,
the subject is always placed after the verb. Ex. ^ Que pre-
tendenpues los nuevos reformadores con su sonada igwd'
dad ? What then do the new reformers pretend with their
chimerical equality ? Hablen las nadones donde se vieroa
tales trcutomos ; hahle la misma Francta....Let the nations
where were seen such overtumings, let France herself speak.

ed Exception. The subject is also placed after the verb,
in the incidental phrase denoting that we quote the words of
some one. Ex. 8i tenets, decia Luis XI am hifo, si tenets
la desdicha de Uegar d ser rey, acordaos de que as deheis
todo entero d lafelicidad de vuestros conciudadanos ; if you
have, said Louis XI to his son, if you have the misfortune to
be a king, remember that you owe yourself entirely to the
happiness of your fellow-citizens.

3d Exception. This inversion is also made with great
advantage whenever it gives elegance, energy, sweetness or
harmony to speech. Ex. / Dickosos los padres que tienen
buenos hijosi Happy the fathers who have good children !
/ FeUz el reino donde viven los homhres en paz ! Happy the
kingdom where men live in peace ! These phrases are much
more energetic than if we said ; los padres que tienen buenos
hyos son dickosos ; el reino donde los hombres viven en paz
es feliz,

RuLS Lin. Every verb must be of the same number
and person as its subject. Ex. Yo no st lo que digo, lo que
hago, Sfc. I do not know what I say, what I do, &c. Tu
hermano no estudia ; tus hermanos no estudian; thy broth-
er does not study ; thy brothers do not study. In the first

VERBS. - 15S

example, »6, digo and luigo are in the singular number and
in the first person, because the pronoun yo expressed before
the first verby and understood before the others is in the sin-
gular and first person. In the second, estucUa is in the third
person of the singular, because its subject hermano b of that
person and number, &c.

Of the regimen of verbs.

The regimen of a verb is a word that immediately depends
•n it, and which restrains or determines its signification.

A verb may have for its regimen three kinds of words, an-
ether verb, a substantive or a pronoun.

Of the verb as a regimen.

A verb governs another in the infinitive either with or with-
out a preposition ; as, quiero estudiarj I wish to study ;
las lenguas deben aprenderse por principtos, languages must
be learned by principles ; vengo de comer ^ I come from din-
ner ; voy a paseary I am going to walk ; eatudia para intru-
tree, he studies to instruct himself, &c.

Rule LIV. In Spanish, the verb temer, to fear, when
we do not wish the thing expressed by the second verb ; the
verbs dudae, to doubt ; neoar, to deny, forming a negative
member of a phrase; and the verb impedir, to prevent; pro-
hibie, to forbid ; require the verb, which they govern, to be
in the subjunctive mood, with the conjunction que, Temo
que vengOy I fear he will come. No niegomte tenga razouy
I do not deny that he is right Impidid que^alieseny he pre-
vented their going out. -f

Rule LV. In Spanish a iferb governs another in the
infinitive by the aid of the follo4ring prepositions ; a, de^ con,
«i, hastttf poryparUf ejitre, trci, sobre, »m, to, of or from,
with, in or into, till or even, by, for, between, after, on or
upon, without. Ex. Iremos d pcuear despues de comer,
we shall go to walk after dinner; vengo de aimorzarj I come
from breakfast ; gasto ia mayor parte del tiempo enjugar y
divertirmcy I spend the greatest part of my time in playing
andjanusing myself.

It often happens that we elegantly use in Spanish the in-
fioitilb with the article e/, when governed by another verb«
£z« Me gu»ta el leer noveku^ I like to read novek.

154 VBBBS.

nrhe Spanish verb acabar, to finish, fottowed by the prepo-
sition dcy and governing the following verb in the infinitive,
means tiiat a thing has just been done or happened. Ex.
Ac€Ao de air buenat noUciagj I have just heard good news.
Pedro acabiiba de sedir^ Peter had just gone out.

Andar and tr, to go, govern the verb that follows them, in
the following phrases and others like them, in the gerund,
without a preposition. £x. Van or andan cantandopor la»
catteSf they go singing in the streets. Loirdn diciendo d todae,
they will go telling it to every one.

Of the fumn substantive as regimen of the verb.

Rule LVI. All active verbs govern in Spanish the noun
substantive, which is the immediate object of the action that
is expressed, in the accusative with the preposition a, if this
noun expresses a rational being or personified object ; and
without a preposition in all other cases. Ex. amor d Dtos,
to love God ; el rey quiere d su primer ministroy the king
loves his prime minister. Amar la virtud, to love virtue ;
aborrecer el victo, to hate vice.

There are some active verbs which govern two nouns at
the same time, but under difierent relations. Oue of these
nouns is the immediate object of the action exjK^ssed by the
verb, and the other is the end to which it tends. That which
is the end of it, is always governed by the preposition d. Ex.
Dar6 nn libro d Pedro^ I shall give a book to Peter. The
word libro is the object of the action expressed by the verb
dariy and Pedro is the end to which it tends.

Neuter verbs in general have no regimen, because their
signification does not extend beyond themselves ; as, nacer,
to be born ; viver, to live ; crecer^ to grow.

Reflective and reciprocal verbs govern the personal pro-
nouns which they have for their regimen in the accusative,
and these pronouns are placed before or after the verb, ac-
cording to the rules of objective pronouns. See pages 55 and
56. Ex. .^rrepen^tWe, to repent; ae arrepiente or arrepitH"
teee, he repents, &c.

Of objective pronounSf or those which are the regimen
of verbs.

As we already have given all the rules respecting pro-
nouns, we refer the reader to pages 55, 56.

VSRBS. 155

Observations up&n verbs.

1st. The adverbs but or oit/y, used with a verb are ren-
dered in Spanish by solo or soUutierUey or by no placed before
the verb and sino after the same verb. Ex. I have but one
thousand dollars, solo ttngo mil pesos or no tengo sino mil
pesos.

2d. The Spaniards in order to express the repetition of
an action, generally make use of the verb volver (which is
equivalent to the English word agoing always followed by
the preposition d^ which governs the following verb in the in-
finitive ; and volver is put in the tense and person in which
the English verb is, which expresses the repetition of the ac-
tion. Ex. I shall read again this book, volver t a leer este
libro.

3d. The pronoun t/, placed in Engli^ before the verb
to bey is often suppressed in Spanish, and sometimes it is
translated by the pronouns ily eUa, eUo,

It is often suppressed, 1st. in these modes of speaking ; it
is SHoughf it is Uttley it is too muchy it is dear ; is it enough ?
is it little ? ^c. es biutaniey es pocoy es demasiadoy es caro ;
es bastante ? es poco ? 8fc, 2d. In answers. Ex. Who has
said that ? it is you, is it Peter, it is he, &c Quien ha di^
cho eso f^^s WR., es Pedro, es ily Sfe, Or, by suppressing the
verb and the pronoun ity we may say : vm. Pedroy 61^ 8fc.
3d. When the verb to be is followed by a noun substantive
having after it the pronoun relative %oho or th^ ; and then
these fironouns are translated by il que, la quey los quey las
quey according to the gender and number of the noun to
which they refer. Ex. It was the Spaniards who conquered
Mexjco,/tferoit los Espanoles que conquistaron d Migico.

In the following phrase and others of the same nature, in
which the verb becomes the nominative of the verb to be, we
elegantly use the article el before the verb, and suppress the
pronoun it, Ex. It is not an easy thing to know men, no es
cosafddl el conocer d los hombres. He knows not the value
of science who despises it, is translated in Spanish thus, quien
desprecia las citncias no conoce su vedor.

In these modes of speaking : it is Iwhoy it is thou whoy it
is he ufhoy 8fc» have, hast, or has done it or said ity we sup-
press the pronoun ity and place the pronoun personal before
the verb, which is put in the same person as the pronoun that
precedes it, and who is Uanslated by the relative pronoun

156 VBlBS.

gtften. To toy, tit ertSj il esy quien h ha hecho, quisn to
ha dicho.

4th. To have likej to come very near^ are translated by
estar d pique dcj entar en punto de, estarpara, or foliar poco
para que. Ex. I had like to have been killed, estuve a
ffique, or d punto de matarme. Thy brother came very
near falling, jpoco faltS para que tu hermano cayese. I
came very near writing to thee this morning, estuve para
escribirte esta mafiana.

N. B. The ^« after /aftar governs the following verb
in the subjunctive, as may be seen in the above example.

Of the agreement of the participle past with the sub-
ject and with its regimen^

The participle past may be constructed with hdberj tener
or ser.

Rule LVII. — ^Whenever the participle past is constructed
with the verb habery it neither takes gender nor number.
Therefore we say ; eUos or eUats han cotnprado libros, they
have bought books. Los libros que hemos leidoy the
books we have read.

N. B. Haber de is in English to be obliged to ; Ex. He
de trabajory I must work ; and so on through all die tenses.

Rule LVIII. — When the participle past is constructed
with the verb tester, and is used only as auxiliarv, it takes
neither gender nor number. Ex Tengo habhado a su madrcy
I have spoken to his mother. Tengo escrito d mi hermanoy
I have written to my brother.

Rule. LIX. — If the verb tener ^ when it serves to construct
the participle past, is used as an attive verb, the participle
past agrees in gender and number with its direct regimen.
Ex. Tengo escrita una carta a mi hijoy I have written a let-
ter to my son. Lacasa que mi tio tiene comprada the house
that my uncle has bought

N. B. Tener qucy is in English to have to ; Ex. J have to
doy tengo que hacer ; and so on through all the tenses.

Rule LX, — When the participle past is constructed with
the verb ser or estar y it always takes die gender and number
of its subject Ex. Las riquezas son apetecidaSy riches are
sought after. J^os malos serdn castigadoSy the wicked shall
be punished. EUa estd sentadoy she is seated.

ADVfiEBS. 157

Rule LXI. — The neuter ^ reflective and reciprocal verbs
form their compound tenses with the auxiliary verb habery to
have ; and the participle past is always invariable when used
with said ^-auxiliary ; therefore we say, han salidoy they
are gone out ; nos hemos alabadoy we have praised ourselves ;
Pedro y Juan 8€ han amado aiempre, Peter and John have
always loved one another.

N,'B. Morir, to die, is conjugated in the compound ten-
ses, either with Ao&crr, preceded by two pronouns of the same
person, one the subject and the other the direct regimen, or
with estar or ser ; in the first case the participle is invariable ;
in the second, it takes the gender and number of the subjects
•£x. EUa 86 ha muertOy she has died. Ellos son^ or estdn
muerto8y they are dead ; mi madre es muertay or estdmueria,
or 9eka muertOy my mother is dead.

s , CHAPTER Vn.

OF ADVERBS.

The adverb is an indeclinable part of speech, which sei"
to modify the signification of another word, or express a cir-
cumstance of it

N. B. Simple adverbs are generally placed after the verbs,
and in compound tenses between the auxiliary and the parti-
ciple.

A^yerbs are simple or compound. They are simple,
when they are expressed in one single word, and compound,
when they are expressed in several. They are distinguished
as adverbs of place, timey order y quantity y comparisony man*
neTy doubty affirmaiiony and negation.

Adverbs of place serve to denote distances and the situa^^
lions of persons or things ; as aquiy or oca, here where I am ;
aUiiy there where you are ; alii or alldy there where he is,
where she is, where they are ; aculldy there, on the other
side, on the side opposite to where^ you are ; cercay near ;
lejosy far ; dondCy where, (without motion ;) adondcy where,
(with motion ;) dentrOy in, within ; fueruy out, without ;
arribay up, up stairs ; abajoy down, down stairs ; delantey
before; detrasy behind; encimOy over, above; debajo;
under, below.
14

158 ADVERBS.

Adverbs of time are those which express some relation to
time, as Aoy, to-day; ayer, yesterday; mafiana, to-morrow;
ahorOf now ; luegOy soon ; tarde^ late ; temprcmoj early ;
preitOf quick ; pronto, quickly ; siempre, always ; jamasj
or nuncaj never ; ya, already ; mientrasy in the mean time.

Adverbs of order express the manner in which things are
arranged, in regard to one another, as primeramentey firstly ;
anteSy before ; despueSy afterwards, &c.

Adverbs of quantity serve to denote the quantity of ob-
jects, or their value ; as, muchoy much ; pocOy little ; muy,
very ; harioy bastantCy enough, sufficiently ; tauy so-as ;
tan is used for tanto before a participle passive. Ex. Quien
es TAN amado como il? Who is as much beloved as he f
tantoy so much ; cuantOy how much.

Adverbs of comparison serve to compare objects together ;
as, ma«, more; menos,\ess; m^/or, better; peor, worse;
muyy very. N. B. This last adverb placed before a partici-
ple past stands for mucky very mucky in English. Ex. Estoy
MUY contentOyOT satisfeckoy I am muck or very muck pleased.
He was muck esteemed, era huy estimado.

Adverbs of manner express how and in what manner
things are done ; they comnsonly hold the place of a prepo-
sition and a noun ; as, prudentementey prudently ; elegafUe-
mentCy elegantly ; which are put for con prudencioy con cfc-
ganciOy with prudence, with elegance, &c. They are also
called adverbs of ^ua/t^y, because they are almost all formed
from adjectives, the property of which is to qualify ; the ad-
verbs formed from adjectives are terminated in mente which
is added to the feminine of those that terminate in o, and to
the masculine of those that have another termination, without
altering any thing in it ; as, constante, constant ; constante-
uten^e, constantly ; sutil, subtle ; sutiUmentey artfully ; ricoy
rich ; rica-menfey richly ; altOy high $ aUa-mentCy highly, &c.
There are others, which, not being derived from adjec^
tives, cannot follow this rule, such as, 6ie», well ; maly ill ;
asiy thus, &c.

There are in Spanish only two adverbs oi doubt y these are,
acaso and quizd, perhaps.

Adverbs of affirmation are ; «f , yes ; ciertamentCy ciertOy
certainly ; verdaderamenteytxuiy ; iiM/w6iVa6/ewien/c, undoubt-
edly, &c.

ADVERBS. 159

Adverbs of negation are ; no^ no, not ; nada, nothing, &€.,
and are always placed in Spanish before the verb, and in
compound tenses before the auxiliary.

Observations upon jamas, nunca, no, mas, menos and muy.

1st. Jamas is used in the same sense as nunca ; thus, we
say ; jamas le hablariy I never shall speak to him ; jamas vi
tal cosaj I never saw any thing like. ^ It is often joined to
nunca^ por siemprey or para siempre, to give more strength
and energy to the phrase ; as, nunca jamas h harty I never
shall do it ; por siempre or para siempre jamas me acordari
de ti, I shall ever remember thee. We see by these exam-
ples diat, when it is joined to nunca, it signifies never; and
that x)n the contrary, it has the signification of etemaUy^
when it is joined to por siempre, ov para siempre. Jamas is
EVER, in English, in, interrogations. Ex. Do you ever read ?
Ijee vm, jamas ?

2d. No does not always serve to deny ; this word serves
sometimes on the contrary to give more force to the affir-
mation and to make the opposition that exists between the
two objects compared more striking ; as, mejor es la virtud
que NO las riquezas, virtue is preferable to riches.

Remark. Two negative adverbs do not always destroy
each other in Spanish ; on the contrary, they often serve to
add to the strength of the negation. Consequently we say ;
NO he visto d nadie, I have seen nobody, no hai/ ninguno,
there is nobody ; and not, no lie visto alguno ; no hay algu^
no ; but care must be taken to observe that, in order to
make use in the same phrase of this double negation, no must
precede the verb, and the other negative must follow it, as in
the above examples. If any other negative than no precede
the verb, no is not expressed. We say, and very properly ;
JAMAS oi voz mas harmoniosa^ I never heard a more harmo-
nious voice ; nada quieroy I wish for nothing ; but we cannot
say, jamas no oi voz mas harmoniosa; no nada quiero. Fi-
n^y, it is necessary to suppress the negative no, and place the
negative adverb before the verb, or separate the two negatives
in such a manner that no should precede the verb, and the
other negative word should follow it ; as, jamas te hablariy
or NO tc hablari jamas, I never shall speak to thee ; nadie
te quierey or no te quiere nadie, nobody lovos thee ; the first

1 60 ADVERBS.

construction is the most elegant. Ninouno, no body, not any
body.

3d. When several adverbs terminating in meniey are
found in the same phrase, all of them except the last, lose
the termination mente. The object of this rule is to avoid
repetitions disagreeable to the ear. Instead therefore of say-
ing ; hablan sMamente y ehcuefUemente ; escribe cktrameniey
concisamente y legantementej we say ; hablan sabia y elocur
entemente ; escribe cJara^ concisaj y legantemente ; they
speak wisely and eloquently ; they write clearly^ concisely
and elegantly.

4th. MaSf more ; menoSy less ; are also used to qualify
substantives. Ex. El es mas hombrcy or, menos hombre que
su hermanoy he is more a man or less a man than his brcytfaer.

5th. Muy serves also to qualify substantives. Ex. Muy
andgo miOy very much my friend ; muy senor mioy dearest
sir ; muy cabaUerOy very much a gentleman.

CHAPTER Vm.

OF PREPOSITIONS.

Prepositions serve to express or denote the different rela-
tions which persons or things have with each other ; they
are fixed and invariable ; and have neither gender nor num-
ber. Alone, they make no sense ; and in order that they
may signify something, it is necessary that they be followed
by a regimen expressed or understood.

The prepositions most used in the Spanish language are the
following ; dy antCy cotiy contruy dcy desdCy ew, entrcy hdcia,
hastOy para, por, segun, sin, sobrey tras ; to or at, before,
with, against, of or from, since, in, between or among, towards,
till or until, for, by or for, according to, without, upon, behind
or after. They have in Spanish the same use as in English,
except the prepositions parOy pory sobre and traSy which
require some observations.

Observations upon para and per, /or, by.

The English preposition by presents no difficulty, it is al-
ways rendered in Spanish by por. Ex. The world has been
created by God ; el mundoju6 criado por Dios*

PREPOSITIONS. 161

But it is not the same with the English preposition for^ it
is sometimes rendered by the preposition para^ and some-
times by the preposition por; and we cannot use indifferently
one for the other. The Allowing rules will direct the learner
respecting the use to be made of the words para and porj ac-
cording to the different cases.

Rule LXII. — The preposition for is translated by j^ara
when it denotes, 1st. that an action is directed towards a
person or thing. Ex. This letter is for John, esta carta es
para Juan, 2d. Motion towards a place. Ex. I set out /or
Italy, salgo para Italia, 3d. A particular time, or fixed
term, to which an action is referred. Ex. We shall leave it
for to-morrow, lo dejartmos para manana. 4th. The relation
that a person or thing has with another. Ex. He has not
done it ill for a beginner ; para un principiante no lo ha
hecho mal,

N. B. 1st. When the preposition for serves to express r
the end that we propose, it may be translated, either by para
or por, we say ; I work to gain, trahajo por or para ^anar.
2d. To he about — is translated by estar para, and the fol-
lowing verb is put in the present of the infinitive. Ex. 1
am about setting out, estoy para partir. In respect to — in
comparison with — are translated by para con, — Ex. What is
the creature in comparison withy or in respect to his creator ?
Qiiien es la criatura para con su criador ? Among is ele-
gantly rendered in the following phrase, and others like it, by
para entre. Ex. Among friends compliments are always
useless, para entre amigos los cumplimientos son siempre eS'
cusados. Para is also used before some adverbs, for we say ;
para ahora lo quieroy I wish for it now ; para cuando venga^
when he shall come ; para dentro de un mes. within a
month ; para entonces lo verimos, we shall then see him.

Rule LXIIL — The preposition /or is translated by por
when it serves to express, 1st. the time that a thing has last-
ed or will last. Ex. I leave Madrid/or one month, salgo de
Madrid por un mes, 2d. When it is equivalent to in favor
of — Ex. I shall speak for thy brother, hahhri por tu her^
mono. 3d. When it signifies in the place of, as substitute
of — Ex. I attend /or my friend, asisto por mi amigo. 4th.
When it serves to express an exchange. I would give my
coat/br thine, daria mi vestido por el tuyo.
14*

162 FAfiPOSITlONS.

We also use tbe prepositioii por in the following modes of
speaking ; in the moming^ por la tnafiana ; in the afteniocMi,
por la tarde ; such a thing is not yet done^ tal cosa estdpor
hacer ; to go for, tV por; he goesyor wine^ va por vino ; to
pass for, estar tenido por ; — ^he passes /or a wicked man, ntd
tenido por malo.

Observations upon sobre and tras.

These prepositions sobre and tras are frequendj used be-
fore verbs, which they govern in the infinitive. Ex. Sobre
ser reo convictOy quiere que le premien^ he has been found
guilty, and yet he wishes to be rewarded. Tras ser cuipado,
es il que mas levanta el gritOj he is guilty and yet raises his
voice the lt>udest. Ir tras, to go after,

PreposiUms rvhichf in Spanish, govern the following
% noun in the genitive.

Before, antes ^Before the time, antes del tiempo.

After, despues ^After you, despties de vm.

Within, dentro Within two years, dentro de dos anosS

Except, fuera Except my father, faera de mi padre.

Besides, ademds Besides the money, ademds del dinero.

Near, cerea Near the door, cerca de la puerta.

Across, por el medio— —Across the fields, por el medio de

hs campos.
At, in the, en casa At my brother's, en casa de mi her'

mono ; at home, en mi casa ; in thy house, en tu casa ;

at our home, en nuestra casa.
Notwithstanding, in spite of, d pesar In spite of you,

dpesarde vm.
Opposite, frente dj en f rente de Opposite his house,

en f rente de su casa.
By the side of, al lado By the side of the king, al lado

del rey.
Behind, detras Behind the chest of drawers, detras del

armario.
Upon, encima— Upon the bed, encima de la coma.
Under, clebafo ^Under the bridge, debajo delpuente.

The following prepositions govern the dative.

As respects, en orden d ■ Ai respects what you say, en or-
den a to quevm, dice.

PKBP08ITI0NS.

16S

Adjoining, junio^^-^-^AAyming the garden^ junio idjatHm,
Concerning, toconfe— —— Ooncerning this aJEbky tociuUe 4
estapendencia.

Almost all the other prepositions goveril the noun in Span-
ish in the same case as in English.

In addition to the preceding directions for the use of
prepositions, we ought not to omit the following table taken
from the Grammar of the Spanish Academy, which teaches
at once how the prepositions govern and are governed. We
advise students to commit this table to memory.

TABLE.

A.

Abalaozane d los peligros
abaiidooarse d la suerte
abocarte con alguno
abocboraane de algo
9bogwrpor alguno
abordar (una nave) df con otra
aborrecible & Us gentes
aborrecido de todos
abrasarse en deseos
abrirse d, eon los arnigos
absteoerse de la fruta
abundar de, en riquezas
aburrido de las desgracias
abusar de la amistad
acabar de venir
acaecer d alguoo
acaecer en tal tiempo
acalorarse en, con la disputa
acceder d la opinion de otro
accessible d todos
acertar a, eon la casa
acogerse d sagrado
acomodarse a, eon otro dictikmea

aconipanarse eon otroi
aconsejarse con, de sabios
acontecer d los incautos^
acordarse de lo pesado
acordarse eon los contrariot
acostanibf,arse & trabajos
acre de genio
acreditarse de necio
•credttarse eon, para alguaa

ta rush on dangers
to abandon oneself to chance
to confer with any one
to be chagrined with any thing
to plead for any one
to bring one ship to another
hateful to the people
detested by all
to be inflamed with debifes
to open oneself to one*8 friends
to abstain from fruit
to abound with, or in riches
weary with one's ill fortune
to abuse friendship
to be just come

something to happen to any one
to happen at such a time
to grow warm in a dispute
to accede to another*s opinion
accessible to all
to find out the house
to have recourse to a church
to conform oneself to another opin-
ion
to keep company with others
to be advised by wise men
to happen to the unwary
to remember the past
to agree with opponents
to accustom oneself to works
austere in temper
to prove one's own folly
to get credit with one

164

PABP08IT10NS.

acrtedor d la confiansa worthy of confideace

acreedor de alg^uno any one's creditor

actaarte de, en lot negocios to acquaint oneself with business
acusar (jk alguno) de algun delito to accuse any one of any crime

acnsarse de las colpas to accuse oneself of faults

adelaatarse d otros to advance others

adberirse d otro dicttoen to adhere to another opinion

adolecer de alguna enfcrmedad to be ill of some disorder

aferrarse en, con su opinion
aferrarse (una nave) con otra
aficionarse d, de alguna cosa
afirmarse en lo dicho
ageno de Terdad
agradable al paladar
agradecido d los beneficios
agraviarse de alguno
agraviarse de la sentencia
agregarse d otros
agrio al gusto
agudo de ingenio
ahitarse de manjares
ahogarse en el mar
ahercajarse en las espaldas
ahorrar de razones
ahorrarse (no) con ninguno
airarse con alguno
ajustarse d la razon
ajnstarse con alguno
alabarse de valiente
alaifarse d la ciodad
alegrarse de al^o
alejarse do su tierra
alimentarse de, con yerbas
alimentarse de esperanzas
alindar con otra heredad
allanarse d lo justo
alto de cuerpo
amable & todos
amancebarse eon los libros
amante de alguno
amanarse & escribir
amoroso con los suyos

to be positive in one's own opinion

one ship to grapple another

to be fond of any thing

to affirm what has been said

foreign to truth

agreeable to the palate

grateful for benefits

to be affronted with any one

to appeal from the sentence

to unite oneself to others

sour to the taste

witty or sharp

to surfeit oneself with food

to be drowned in the sea

to get upon one's back

to spate words

not to spare any man

to be angry with any body

to be right inclined

to make it up with any one

to boast of bravery

to hasten to the city

to be rejoiced at any thing

to leave one's country

to subsist upon herbs

to feed oneself with hopes

to be contiguous to another's estate

to submit to what is just

tall in stature

amiable to all

to be fond of books

a lover of some one

to be clever in writing

kind with one's relations

ampararse de algo, de alguna cosa to take possession of anything

ancho de boca

andar con el tiempo

andar de capa

andar en pleitos

andar & gatas

andar por tierra

angosto de manga

anhelar &, por mayor fortuna

anticiparse d otro

wide mouthed

to accommodate oneself to time

to walk with a cloak oa

to be litigious

to go all fours

to be humbled to the ground

tight sleeved

to covet better fortune

to anticipate another

PBSrOSITIONS.

165

aovar en la ribera
aparar en la mano
aparecerse d alguoo

aparecerse en el camino

aparejarse para el trabajo
apai tane de la ocasion

apartarse d un lado
apasionarse a, tie, per algano
apearse de su opinion ^

apechugar eon alguna'coaa
apechugar por los peligros
^pedrear eon las palabras
apegarse & algunacosa
apelar de la seotencia
apelar d otro medio
apercibine de armas
apercibirse &, para la bataUa
apetecible al gusto
apetecido de, jmt todos
apiadarse de los pobres
aplicarse d los estadios
apoderarse de la hacienda
apostar d coiner
apresurarse d yenir
apresurarse por algiina cosa
apretar por la cintora
aprobarse en algana Ikcoltad
aprobado de cirujano
apropiado para el oicio
apropiarse d sf
apropincaarse d alguno
aproyechar en la virtad
aprovecharse de la ocasioa
apto para el enpleo
apnrado de medios
aqoietarse en la dispnla
arder en deseos
arderse en quimeras
aimarsc de paciencia
arrebozarse eon algo
arrecirse de frio
arreglarse d las leyes
arregostarse d alguna cpsa
arremeter d, eon, eontray el maro
arrepeotirse de las culpas
arrestarse d todo
arribar d tierra
arrimarse d la pared
arrincoDarfe en ca8%

to lay eggs od the sea-shore

to receive jnritb the hand

to present oneself suddenly before
any one

to present oneself suddenly on tbc
road

to prepare for work

to separate oneself from the occa-
sion

to retire on one side

to be enamoured with any one

to change one's opinion

to undertake anything with spirit

to braye dangers

to abuse any one with words

to adhere to auythiog-

to appeal from the sentence

to have recourse to another measure

to proTide oneself with armt

to get ready for battle

desirable to the palate

desired by all

to have compassion on the poor

to apply oneself to study

to take possession of the proper^

to lay a wager on a race

to make haste to come

to make haste for something

to take fast hold by the waist

to be approved in any fkcaltj

approved as a surgeon

adapted to the office

to appropriate to oneself

to approach any one

to improve in virtue

to seize the opportunity

fit for the employment

exhausted of means

to grow quiet in the dispute

to burn with desires

to be full of quarrels

to arm onself wiOi patience

to muffle oneself up in anything

to be benumbed with cold

to conform to the laws

to be inclined to anything

to assault the wall

to repent of sins, faults

to be enterprising in everything

to arrive at land

to lean against the Wall

to keep oneself immured

160

7RSP08ITI0Nfl.

arrojl^se (algo) d si mismo
arrojane d pelear
arroparse eon la capa
arrostrar d, eon los peligros
asarse de calor
ascender d otro empleo
asegurarse de sa contrario
aseotir d otro dict&men
asesorarse eon letrados
asistir d los enfermos
asistir en talcasa
asociarse d, eon otro
asomarse d, por la ventana
asparse d gritos
asparse por alguna cosa
^pero al gusto
iigpero en las palabras
aspirar d mayor fortuna
atarse d aoa sola cosa
atemorixarse de^por algo
atender d la converyacion
atenerse d lo seguro
atento eon sus majores
atestiguar eon otro
atinar d, con la casa
atollarse en los caminos
atraer d si

atreverse d cosas grandes
atreverse con todos
atribuir d otro

atribularse en, eon los trabajos
atropellarse en lasacciones
atufarsa en la cooTersacion
atufarsa por poco
aonarse eon otro
auseotarse de Madiid
avecindarse en algud pueblo
avenirse eon todos
aTcntajarse d otros
avergonsarse d pedir
avergonzarse de algo
fiveriguarse con alguno
aviarse de ropa
avocar (alguoa cosa) d si

Balancear d tal parte
balancear en laduda
balar por dioero
bambolear en la maroma
bafiarse en agua

to appropriate anything to oneself
to rush on to fight
to cover oneself with a cloak
. to face danger
to be scorched with heat
to ascend to another office
to shelter oneself from one's enemy
to assent to another's opinion
to seek council from learned men
to assist the sick
to attend such a house
to associate onself with another
to look out at the window
to be exhausted with roaring
to torment oneself for anything
rough to the taste
rude in conversation
to aspire to better fortune
to tie oneself to one thing alone
to be afraid of something
to attend to the conversation
to keep to the side of safety
respectful to one's superiors
to testify with another
to hit upon the house
to, stick fast in the road
to attract to oneself
to animate oneself to great things
to dare eyery body
to attribute co another
to be afflicted with labour, troubles
to overhasten actions
to take pet in conversation
to be affronted at a trifle
to unite oneself with another
to absent oneself from Madrid
to take up one's abode in any town
to agree with all

to gain the advantage over others
to be ashamed at asking
to be ashamed of anything
to agree with any one
to furnish oneself with clothes
a superior to call a cause from an
inferior court to his own.

B.

to hesitate on such a side
to fluctuate in doubt
to wish for money
to dance on the rope
to bathe oneself in water

PRE POSITIONS.

167

barar en tierra
barbear con la pared
bastardear de sa naturaleza
bastardear en bus acciones
batattar eon los enemigos
bajar d la cue?a
bajar de la torre
bajar de la autoridad
bajar hdeia el valle
bajo de cuerpo
benefico dfpara lasalud
bianco de cutis
blaodo de corteza
blasfemar de la yirtnd
blasooar de valiente
bordar (algo) de, con plata

bordar (algo) al tambor
bordar de pasados
bostezar de hambre
boto de punta
bojance en lafortuoa
bramar de cora^ e
brear d chasco
breg^r con alguoo
brindar con regales
brindar d la salad de al^no
baeoo dCf para comer
bafar d4 ira

boUir en, par todas partes
burlarse de algo

to run aground

to reach a wall with one's chin

to degenerate from his natore

to be degenerated in one's actions

to fight with the enemy

to go down to the cellar

to descend from the tower

to recede from authority

to descend towards the valley

low in stature

beneficial- to the health

of a white complexion

of a soft skin, bark

to blaspheme against virtue

to boast of brarery

to embroider any thing in or with

silver
to embroider on a tambour frame
to interweave
to gape through hunger
blunt at the point
to be fortunate
to roar with anger
to vex with tricks
to struggle with any one
to ofier presents
to toast to any one's health
good to eat
to swell with anger
to move in all parts
to make a jest of any thing

Caber de pies
caber en la mano

d, hdeia tal parte
caer de lo alto
caer en tierra, en cuenta, en

error, en tal tieropo, en lo que

se dice

caer por pascua
caer tobre los enemigos
calarse de agua
ealentarse d la lumbre
calificar de docto

callar (la verdad) d otro
callar de,por miedo
calumniar (a alguno) de injusto

to be able to stand on one's feet
to be able to be contained in the
hand.

to fall on such a side

to fall from on high

to fall opon the earth, to compre-
hend, to fall into a mistake, to
fall out at such a time, to under-
stand what is said

to fall at Easter

to fall upon the enemy

to wet oneself through with water

to warm oneself at the fire

to qualify any one as a learned
man

to conceal the truth from another

to be silent from fear

to calumniate any one as unjust

168

PItXFOBITIONS*

calnne d al^n« to lead another by the noM

cambior (algiinacoia)eofi,jMrotni to exchange one thing for another

to trarel to Seville

to travel on foot

to walk alonff the mountain

to fatigue oneself with the labour

to be tired of pretendin|f

to be tired on the road

capable of holding a hundred ar-

robas*
capable for the employment
to capitulate with the enemy
to reproach anyone as a bad judge
to insist upon one's opinion
casar (una persona 6 €OSa) Mfi otra to couple one person or thing with

another
catequiaar (& alguno) para alguna to persuade any one to any thing

eosa
causar (peijuicio) d alguno to cause prejudice to any one

cautivar (a alguno) con, por ben- to overcome any one with favours

eficios
cavar (la imaginacion) en alguno to think seriously on any one
cavar (con la imaginacion) en to think deeply en any thing
alguna cosa

to go lounging about

caminar dtpara SeviUa
caminar d pie
caminar por el monte
cansarse dc, can ri trabajo
cansarse de pretender
cansarse en el camino
capai de cien arrobas

capaa dt, para el empleo
capitular con el enemigo
capitular (k alguno) di mal jues
cargarse ac raaon

cazcalear de una parte & otra
ceder d otro, d la autoridad
ceder en beneficio de alguno
censurar (alguna cosa) die mala
cefiirse d lo posible
chancearse eon alguno
chapuzar (algo) en el agua
chico de cuerpo
chocar d alguno
chocar eon otre
circunscribirse d una cosa
clamar d Dies
clamar por dinero
clamorear por los mnertos
coartar (la facultad) d alguno
cobrar (dinero) de los deudores
colegir de^por los antecedentes
coligarse eon alguno
columpiarse en el aire
combatir con^ contra el enemigo
combiner (una cosa) eon otca
comedirse en las pidabras
eomenzar d decir
comerse de envidia
compatible con lajusticia
compensar (una cosa) con otra

to yield to another, to authority
to resign in another's favour
to blame anything as bad
to keep within bounds
to joke with apy one
to sink anything in the water
small in person
to provoke any one
to strike one against another
to confine oneself to one thing*
to pray God
to cry out for money
to ring a peal for the dead
to restrict any one
to recover money from debtors
to infer from the antecedents
to make an alliance with any one
to swing in the air
to fight against the enemy
to combine one thing with another
to be civil in words
to begin to say
to pine with envy
compatible with justice
to compensate one thing with an-
other

' Anrohatt four make a quintal.

PREPOSITIONS.

1G5

competir con alguno to rival any one

complacerse (£e, en al^na cosa to be pleased irith anything
componerse eon los deudores to compound with debtors
componerse de bueno y malo to be made of good and bad
comprar (alguno) cd,dtl vendedor to bay any thing from the seller
comprehensible a/ entendimieuto comprehensible to the understand-
ing
comprobar(algo) con instrumentos to prove anything with instruments
comprometerse eon alguno to render oneself answerable to any

one
comprometerse en jueces drbitros to compromise by arbitration
comunicar (Inz) a alguna parte to communicate light to any part
comiinicar (uno) con otro to commune one with another

concebir (alguna cosa) cnel aoimo to comprehend something
conceblr (una cosa) por buena to conceive anything as good
conceder (algo) d otro to yield anything to another

conceptuar (k alguno) de,pora9bio tu look upon any one as a wise man
concertar (una cosa) ron otra to concert with one another
Goncotdar (la copia) con el original to make the copy agree with the

original

Goncurrir d algun fin
concurrir d alguna parte
concurrir con otros
concur! ir (muchos) en un dicth-

men
condenar (4 uno) d galeras
condenar (& uno) en las costas
condescender d los ruegos
condf.sceoder eon la instancia
condolerse de lostrabajos
conducir (algo) d tal parte

to contribute to some end
to meet at some place
to concur with others
many to agree in one opinion

to condemn to the galleys
to condemn in the costs
to condescend to entreaties
to condescend to the instances
to be grieved with troubles
to conduct any thing to such a
place
conduc]r(unacosa)a/bieD de otro something to conduce to another's

good
confabularse eon los contrarios to converse with one's enemies
confederarse con alguno to ally oneself to any one

conferir (una cosa) con otra to compare one thing with another

conferir (nn negocio) eon, enire to confer on any business with

los amigos
confesar (el delito) a/ juez
confesarse d Dies
confesarse eon alguno
confesarse de sus culpas
confiar (una cosa) d una persona
confiar en,'de alguno
confinar (i alguno) d tal parte
confihar (Espafia) eon Prancia
confirmarse en su dict&men
conformarse pon el tieinpo
conforme d, eon su opini9B
confrontar can alguno

15

friends

to confess one's crime to the judge
to confess to Qod
to acknowledge to any one
to confess one's sins
to entrust anything to any one
to rely upon any one
to confine any one to such a place
Spain to lie adjacent to France .
to be confirmed in one's opinion
to conform to the times
conformable to his opinion
to confront with any one

166

PBKP08ITION8.

confVontar (ana com) eon otra
confundirse de lo que se it
confundirte en suit juicioA
congeniar eon alguno
coDgraciane eon otro

coBgratalarae con los soyos

congratularse de alguna cota
cong«curar (alg^o) de, por senalet
conmutar (algo) eon otra cosa
conmutar (mi voto) en otra cosa
consagrarse d Dios
consentir en algo
consolarse con sus parientes
coospirar d alguna cosa
couspirar contra alguno
coDspirar en un intento
constar (el todo) de partes
constat por escrito
consultar d algano para ua empleo

consultar eon letrados
consumado en una facultad
containinarse con los yiciosos
contaminarse de beregias

contemporizar eon alguno
contender con alguno
contender «o6re alguna cosa
coDtenerse en su obligacion
contestar d la pregunta
contract (algo) d un asunto
contrapesar (una cosa) con otra

contrapooer (una cosa) d otra
contrapuntarse eon alguno
contrapuntarse dt palabras
contravenir d la ley
(;ontribuir a tal cosa
contribuir con dinero
convalecer de la enfermedad
convencerse de la razon
convenir con otro
convenir en alguna cosa
conversar con alguno
cony^rsar en materias de estado
convertir (la hacienda) en dinero
convertirse d Dios
conTidar.(& alguno) d comer
convidar (^ c^lguno) con dinero
convidarse d los trabajos
couTocar <i junta

to confront one thing with another

to be confounded with what one sees

to be thrown into confusion

to be congenial to any one

to ingratiate oneself into another's

favour
to congratulate oneself with one*s

own friends
to rejoice in any thing
to conjecture anything by signs
to barter one thing for another
to exchange into another thing
to consecrate oneself to God
to agree to any thing
to be comforted with one*s friends
to aspire to any thing
to conspire against any one
to enter into a conspiracy
the whole to be compoaed of parts
to appear in writing
'to propose any one for an em-
ployment
to consult with learned men
to be consummate in a faculty
to penrert oneself with the yioious
to contaminate oneself with hcr>

esies
to temporize with any one
to contend with any one
to dispute upon any thin^
to hold to one's contract
to answer one's question
to apply something to a subject
to counterpoise one thing with

another
to put one thing against another
to compare oneself with any one
to scold at one another
to transgress against the law
to contribute to soch a. thing
to contribute money
to recover from illness
to be convinced by reason
to agree with another
to agree upon, any thing
to converse with any one
to converse on affairs of state
to convert goods into money
to be converted to God
(o invite any one to dine
%o offer money to anybody
to be ready to work
to convene a meeting

PEE POSITIONS.

ler

tooperar (con otro) d a]guna cosa
correrse ae vergiienza
eorresponder d los beoeficias
corresponderse con los amigos
contejar (la copia) eon el original

crecer en virtudes
crecido de cuerpo
creer en Dios
creerse de alguna cosa
cucharetear en todo
cuidar de algo, de algooo
culpar (4 uno) de omiso
cumplir eon algdao

cumplir eon su obligacion
cararse de alguna enfermedad
cnrarse en salud
cturtirse al aire
eartido del sol

to cooperate in any thing

to be ashamed

to be grateful

to correspond with friends

to compare the copy with the

original
to increase in yirtuet
tall in stature
to believe in Grod
to be convinced of anything
to intermeddle in every thing
to take care ofsomething of some one
to blame any one for ne|^ligf nee
to discharge one's obligation to

anybody
to perform one's duty
to be cured of any disorder
to take care of oneself
to tan by the air
tanned by the son

dar (algo) d alguno

dar (4 alguno) de palos

dar de bianco

dar en manias

dar par visto

darse d estudiar

darse el diaatre-

darse par vencido

deber (dinero) d alguno

decaer de su autoridad

decir (algo) d otro

decir (bien) con una cosa

decir (bien) de alguno

declararse d alguno

declararse par un partido

deelinar d, hdHa tai parte

declinar en bageza

dedicar (tiempo) al estudio >

dedicarse d la virtud

defeDder(4 uno) de sus contrarios

deferir (al parecer) de otro
defraudar (algo) de la autoridad

de otro
degeoerar de su nacimiento
dtlaniede alguno
delatarse a/ juez
deleitarse con la viata
deleitarse en oir
4eUberar tdbn tal cosa

to give something to anybody
to beat any one with a stick
to hit the mark
to be foolish
to suppose anything seen
to give oneself to study
to despair
to surrender

to be indebted to anybody
to fall from one's authority
to say anything to another
to agree one thing with another
to speak well of any one
to declare oneself to anybody
to declare oneself for such a party
to approach towards such a side
to degenerate

to employ one's time in study
to devote oneself to virtue
to defend any body from his ene-
mies
to adopt another's opinion
to usurp another's authority

to degenerate from one's ancestors
before anybody
to accuse oneself to a judge
to please oneself with seeing
to please oneself with hearing
to deliberate upon anything

168

rjlEPOSITlONS.

dentro de can

depender de alguiiA

deponer (A alguno) de sd empleo

depositar (algo) en alguna parte
derivar de otra autoridad
derreiiegar de alguna cosa
desabrirse con alguno
desabrocharse con alguoo

desagradecido d algun boneficio
desahogarse (con alguoo) de su

pena
degapropiarse de algo
desavenirse con alguno
desavenirse (unog) de otros
degayunarge de alguna noticia
degcabezarsp en, con alguna cosa
degcalabazarge en alguna coga

degcangar de la fatiga
degcantillar (algo) de alguna coga

degcargarse de alguna cosa
degcartarge de algun encargo
degcender d log valleg
degcender de buen linage
degcolgane de, por la muralla
degcollar tobre otrog
degcomponerge con alguno
degconfiar de alguno
degconocido d log beneficing
degcontar (algo) de alguna coga
degcubrirge con alguno
degcuidarge dcy en gu obligacion
degdecir de su car4cter
desdecir de lo dicho
clegdejiarge de alguna cosa
desembtirazarse de estorbog
desembarcar de la nave
desembarcar en el puerto
desenfrenarse en vicios
desertar de las banderas
desespcrar de la pretension
desfalcar falgo) de alguna coga
desgajarse de los monies
deshacerse d trabRJar
deshacerse de alguna cosa
deshacerse en llanto
desmentir d alguno
desmentir (una cosa) de otra
desnudarse de pasiones

within the houge
to depend upon an}^ body
to depoge any body from his em-
ployment
to depogit any thing in any place
to derive authority from another
to detegt any thing
to have a difference with any body
to divulge one'g own gecret to an*

other
ungrateful for any benefit
to communicate one'g trouble to

another
to alienate any thing
to digagree with any one
gome to disagree with others
to take notice of any thing
to labour hard in vain
to puzzle one'g witg to find out any

thing
to relieve onegelf from fatigue
to break off the corner of any

thing
to clear onegelf from any thing
to ezcuge onegelf from any charge
to degcend to the vallieg
to come of a good family
to creep down the wall
to gurpagg others
to digagree with any one
to mistrust any one
ungrateful for benefits
to discount one sum from another
to disclose oneself to any one
to neglect one's obligation
to deviate from one's character
to retract what one has said
to disdain any thing
to get rid of obstacles
to unship, unload
to land in the harbour
to abandon oneself to vices
to desert the standard
to despair of one's pretension
to take away from another thing
to fall from the mountains
to work with anxiety
to get rid of any thing
to burst into tears
to give any one the lie
one thing to contradict another
to conquer one's passions

»ftfeto«tflON8.

1&»

degpedirse de alguna coia
despeftarsc de un moote
despertar d alguoo
despertar del sueno'
despicarse de la ofensa
despoblarse de gente
desposarse con algano
desprenderse de algo '

despues de llegar, de alguno, de

al^na cosa
desquisciar (a alguno) de su poder
desqnitarse de la perdida
desterrar (& udo) de su patria
destrizarse d llorar
destrizarse de enfado
desTergoDzarse con alguoo
desviarse del camino
desvirirse por algo
deten^rse en dificuUades
determinarse d partir
detras de la iglesia
devolver (la causa) al jaez
dejar (una manda) d alguno
dejar de escribir
dejar (algo) en mano de otro

diferir (al?o) d, para otro tiempo
digoarse ae conceder algo
dimaoar (una cosa) de otra
discernir (una cosa) de otra
disgustarse de, eon algona cosa
disponer de los bienes
disponerse d camioar
disputar de, tobre alguna cosa
diseotir de otro dict4men
distar (un pueblo) de otro
distinguir (una cosa) de otra

distraerse de, en la conversacion
disuadir (& alguno) de algunacosa
dWidir (una cosa) de otra
dividir en partes
dividir enJtre niuchos
dmdir por mitad
dolcrse de los pecados
dotado de ciencia
dndar de alguna cosa
durar hoMia el inviemo
dorar DOT mucho tiempo
doro at corteza

15*

to take leaTe of anj thing

to fall headlong from a mountain

to awake any one

to awake from sleep

to be revenged of an affront

to become unpeopled

to marry any on«

to get rid of something

after arriving, after any one, after

any tning
to ueprive any one of his authority
to make up for one*s loss
to banish any one from his country
to consume oneself with weeping
to consume oneself with anger
to take liberties with any body
to lose one's way
to be anxious for something
to be stopped by difficulties
to take a resolution to set out
behind the church
to let the cause devolve to the judge
to bequeath to any one
to leave off writing
to deposit something in the hands

of another
to defer any thing to another time
to condescend to grant any thing
to emanate one thing from another
\o discern one thing from another
to be disgusted with any thing
to dispose of goods
CO prepare oneself to travel
to dispute on any thing
to dissent from another's opinion
to be distantjone town from another
to distinguish one thing from an-
other
to wander in conversation
to dissuade any one from any thing
to divide one thing from another
to divide in parts
to divide between several
to divide into halves
to repent of sins
endowed with learning
to doubt 4ny thing
to last till v^ inter
to last a \or\g time
of a rough skin, bark

170

PftKPOSlTlONS.

echar (algo) de, ffi, por tierra
echar (olor) de si
eirvarse d^ hasta el cielo
elevarse dt la tierra
embarcarse en nefrocios

to throw any thing on the earth
to exhale an odour
to be exalted to the gkiei
to be elevated from the earth
to be involved in business

embobarse con, dt, en alguna cosa to be stupefied with any thing
emboscarse en el roonte to lie in ambush on a hill

enibutir (alguna cosa) de algodon to inlay any things with cotton

cmbutir (una cosa) en otra
enroendarse con la correccion
enmendarse de, en al^una cosa
erapaparse en aj^ua
empnrejar con al^iino
empareutar eon alguno
empenarse en una cosa
em pf'jiarse por alg^uno
emplearse de al^una cosa
enagenarse de nig una cosa
enamorarse de alguno
euamoricarse de alguno
cncallar (la nave) en arena

to inlay one thing with another

to be amended by correction

to correct oneself in any thing

to be soaked with water

to put one on a level with any one

to be related to any one

to pledge oneself to do a thing

to take part for another

to employ oneself about a thing

to alienate any thing

to be enamoured with any one

to fall in love with any one

to run a ship on shore, or on the

sand
to direct one's course to any part

encaminarse d alguna parte

cncaramarse en, por^o&re la pared to climb up the wall
encararsR d, con alguno to face another

eucargarse de algon negocio to charge oneself with any business

cncasquf tarse (algo) en la cabeza to be obstinate in maintaining an

idea

encastillarse en alguna parte
encajarse en, por alguna parte
encenagarsc en vicios
encenderse en ira
encerrarse en su casa
encharcarse en agua
encomendarse d Dios
encnnarse con alguno
enferraar del pecho
enfrascarse en la dlsputa
engolfarse en cosas graves
engreirse eon la fortnna
enlazar (alguna cosa) con otrn

to fortify oneself in any place

to busy oneself in any thing

to be vicious

to kindle with anger

to shut oneself up in one's house

to drink too much water

to commend oneself to God

to be irritated against any one

to have a pain in the breast

to entangle oneself in a dispute

to be absorbed in important things

to become vain with fortune

to tie one thing close to another

enredarse (una cosa) con, en otra to interweave one thing with an-
other

ensayarse d, para alguna cosa
ensaynrse en alguna cosa
entender de alguna cosa
entender en sus negocios
enterarse de alguna cosa
enterarse en algun negocio

to try to do any thing
to become expert in any thing
to understand any thing
to understand one's business
to be well informed of any thing
to be well acquainted with any
business

rKE POSITIONS.

in

entrar en alguna parte
entregar (algo) d algnoo
entreineterse en co^as de otro
enviar (algo) d alguDo
eqtiivocarsc (una cotia) eon otra
equivocarge en algo
escaparse de la prision
escaparse por la yentana
escarraentar de^ eon alguna cosa
escarmentar en cabeza agena

esconderse en alguno parte

esconderse de alguno

escaso de roedios

escribir (cartas) d alguno

esculpir en bronce

esmerarse en alguna cosa

espantarse de algo

estampar en papel

estar d la 6rden de otro

ettar de viage

estar en alguna parte

estar en animo de

estar en lo que se hace

estar para salir

estar por alguno

estar (alguna cosa) por suceder

estrecbarse eon alguno

estrecbarse en los gastos

estrellarse eon alguno

to enter into any part
to deliver something to some one
to meddle with another's affairs
to send something to some one
to mistake one thing for another
to be mistaken in any thing
to escape from prison
to escape through the window
to take warning at any thing
to take warning at another's ex-
pense
to hide oneself in any place
to hide from any one
limited in means
to write letters to any one
to engrave on brass
to exert oneself in any thing
to be terrified at any thing
to print on paper
to be under another's direction
to be on a journey
to be in some place
to have a mind to
to know what is doing
to be ready to go out

to be in favour of any one
something to be near happening
to become intimate with any one
to restrain oneself in one's expenses
to fall out with any one
estrellarse en, contra alguna cosa to dash oneself against any thing
estribar en alguna cosa to be supported in any thing

esceder (una cosa) d otra one thing to excel another

es€eder(unacantidad)en mil reales a sum to exceed one thousand rials
e8ceptuar(ii algunoVfe alguna cosa to except any one from any thing
esclnir (a alguno) de alguna parte to exclude any one from any place

6 cosa or thing

escusarse eon alguno to apologize to any one

escusarse de hacer alguna cosa to excuse oneself from doing any

thing
exhortar (k alguno) d tal cosa to exhort any one to such a thing
eximir (4 alguno) de alguna cosa to exempt any one from any thing
exonerar (4 alguno) de su empleo to dismiss any one from his place
espeler (a alguno) de alguna parte to expel any one from any place
esoerto en las artes skilled in the arts

estraer (una cosa) de otra to extract one thing from another

estraviarse de la carrera to deviate from one's purpose

F.

facil de digerir
faltar d la palabra
faltar de alguna parte

easy to digest

to fail- in one's promise

to be missing

172 PMP08ITI0N8«

falto de juicio • wanting sense

fastidiane de manjares to be disgusted with Tictaals

fatigarM de^ fn, por alguna cosa to long for something

favorable <i, para alguno favourable to some one

favorecerse de alguno to avail oneself of any one

fiarse det en alguno to confide in anj one

fiar (algo) d alguno to trust anj thing to any one

fiel if eon sus amigos faithful to one's friends

fijar f algo) en la pared to fix any thing in the wall

flexible d la rason pliant to reason

fluctuar en, entre dudas to fluctuate in doubt

fortificarse en alguna parte to strengthen oneself in any place

franquearse d, eon alguno to open oneself to any one
frisar(una persona 6 cosa) con otra to be of the same genius with an-
other

fuera de casa ^ out of the house

fuerte de condicion of a high temper

fundarse en rason to be founded in reason

G.

girar (una letra) d cargo de otro to value upon another

girar de una parte k otra to reel from one side to another

girar por tal parte to reel on such a side

girar io6re una casa de comercio to draw upon a commercial house

gloriarse de alguna cosa to boast of any thing

gordo de talle fat or lusty

goaar de alguna cosa to relish any thing

graduar (una cosa) de, por buena to pronounce any thing as good

grangear (la voluntad) djde alguno to gain the afiections of any one

guardarse de alguno, <^e alguna to guard oneself from any one^from

cosa any thing

guarecerse de alguna persona 6 to take shelter from any person or

cosa thing

guarecerse en alguna parte to take shelter in any place

guarnecer (una cosa) con, de otra to garnish one thing with another
gniado de alguno guided by any one

guiarse por alguno to guide oneself by any one

guindarse por la pared to descend by the wall

gustar de alguna cosa to like any thing

H.

hdbil en papeles skilful in documents

h&bil para el empleo qualified for the employment

babilitar (d uno) en, para alguna to enable any body to do any thing

cosa

habitar eon alguno to dwell with any one

habitar en tal parte to dwell in such a place

habituarse d, en alguna cosa to accustom oneself to something

hablar con, por alguno to speak with, or for any one

hablar de, en, iobre alguna cosa to speak of any thing

hablar en griego to talk gibberish or Greek

hacer d todo to be ready at any thing

PKEPOSITXONS.

m

hacer de Taliente
hacer para si
hacer por alguno
hacerse con bueoos libros
hallar (alguna cosa) tn tal parte
hallarse d, en la £e8ta
hartarse de comida
hencbii (el caotaro) de agua

to pretend to courage

to provide for oneself

to do for any one

to furnish oneself with good book»

to find any thing in sach a place

to be present at the feast

to gorge oneself with food

to fill the pitcher with water

herir {& alguno) en la estiiuacion to hurt any one in his reputation

herido de la injuria
hermanar (una cosa^ con otra

hervir (un lugar) de, en gente
hincarse de rodillas
bocicar en alguna cosa
holgarse eon, de alguna cosa
huir de alguna per^rbna 6 cosa
bumanarse d alguna cosa
humanarse con los inferiores

wounded by injury

to make one thing agree with atti-

other
to be very populous
to kneel down

to stumble at any inconvenience
to rejoice at any thing
to fly from any person or thing
to familiarise oneself to any thing
to be condescending to inferiors

humillarse d alguna persona 6 cosa to humble oneself to any person or

thing

bandir (alguna cosa) en el agua to plunge any thing into the watec

huadirse en un pantauo to sink in a bog

I.

id6neo para alguna cosa

igual d, con otro

igual en foerzas

igualar (una cosa) d, con otra

imbuir (& alguno) de, en alguna

fit for anything
equal to another
equal in forces

to.make one thing equal with an-
other
to instruct any one in anything

impeler (ii alguno) d alguna cosa to compel any one to any thing
impelido de la necesidad impelled by necessity

impenetrable d los mas perspi- i|n penetrable to the most penetra-

caces

impenetrable en el secreto
impetrar (algo) de alguno
implicarse eon, en alguna cosa
ifloponer (pena) d alguna
tmponerse en alguna cosa
importar d alguno
importunado de, por otro
importunar (4 alguno) con pre-

teosiones

tinrg

impenetrable in secresy
to obtain anything of any one
to intermeddle in anything
to impose penalties on any one
to instruct oneself in anything
to be of importance to any one
importuned by another .
to importune any one with preten-

sions

impresionar (4 alguno) contra otro to impress any one against another

imprimir (alguna cosa) en el dnimo to imprint any thing on the mind

impropio de, en, para su edad unbecoming his age

impagnar (alguna cosa) d alguno to impugn any one in anything

impugoado de,por muchos impugned by many

rmpntar (la culpa) d otro to impute the fault to any *•

174

PREPOSITIONS.

isaccestible d log pretendientet
inapeable de so opinion
incangable en el trabajo
incapaa de remedio
iDcegante en sug tareag
incidir tn culpa

incitar (k alguDo) d gu defenga
incitar (d alguno) eoTiira ocro
inclinar {d alffuno) d la virtud
iDcluir en el unniero
incompatible eon el mando
incomprehengible d log bombreg
incongecuente en alcana coga
incongtante en go proccder
incorporar (una coga) d,een, en

otra
increible df para muchog
incumbir (una coga) d algono

incurrir en delitog
indecigo en regoWer
indipnarge eon, contra nlguno
indigponer (k uoo) eon otro
iodocir (a aiguoo) d pecar
ioductivo de error
indultar (4 alg^uoo) de la penA
infatigable en el trabajo
infecto de beregiag
inrerior d otro
inferior en alguna coga
inferir (una coga) de, por otra
inficionado de pegte
Infiel d gu amigo
inflexible d la raaon
infleiible en gu dicttfmen
influir en nlfuna coga
informar (d alguno) de, tobre al-

ffuna coga
infiindir ((inimo) d, en alguno
ingrato d log beneficiog
ingrato eon log amig^og
inha'bil para el enipleo
inbabilitar (<r alguno) /9ara alguoa

coga
Inhibir (al juez) de, en el conoci*

miento
ingengible d lag injoriag
ingeparable de la viriiid
ingertar (una coga) en otra
insinuar (una cosa) d alguno
tnginuane eon log poderosog

ioacceggible to pretenders

obgtinate in one'g opinion

unwearied witb work

irtemediable

indefatigable in one'g laboura

to fall again into a fault

to incite any one to one'g defence

to incite arny one against another

to incline any one to virtue

to include in the number

incompatible with the command

incomprehengible to men

to be incongequent

incongtant in one*g proceedingi

to incorporate one thing with an-
other

incredible to many

any thing to be incumbent on any
one

to incur crimet

undecided in regolving

to be angry with any one

to indigpoge one with another

to induce one to sin

leading to error

to pardon any one the punigbment

indefatigable in labour

infected with heregiet

inferior to another

inferior in anything

to infer one thing from another

infected with the plague

unfaithful to one'g friend

inflexible to reason

indexible in one*g opinion

to have an influence over anything

to inform any one of anything

to encourage any one

ungrateful for favourg

ungrateful to friendg

unfit for the employment

to digable any one for anything

to inhibit any judge from taking

further cognizance
insengibleto injurieg
inseparable from virtue
to ingraft one thing on another
to insinuate anything to any one
to insinuate oneself into the favour

of the great

PKEFOSITtONS.

175

iosipido al gusto
insistir en, sobre alguna coga
inspirar (algana cosa) d atguno
instruir (a alguno) dtf en, tobre al-
guna coga
ioterceder con alguno por otro

interceder j9or otio, con alguno

interesarse eon alguno, por otro

interesarse en alguna coga
internarge eon alguno
internarsc en alguna coga 6 lugar
interpolar (unas cogas^ con otrag
interponer (su autoridad). eon al-
guno
iotervenir en lag cogag
iotervenir por alguno
introducirse con log que mandan

introducirge en, por alguna parte

invadido de, por log contrariog

inremar en tal parte

invertir (el caudal) en otro uso

ingerir (un itrbol) en otro

ir de (Madrid) d, hdcia Cadiz

ir contra alguno

ir por el camino

irpor pan

ir tras alguno

ingipid to the taste

to ingist on anything

to inspire anything to another

to ingtruct any one in anything

to inlereede with any one for an*
other

to intercede for another with any
one

to interegt oneself with any one
for another

to interest onegelf in anything

to creep into another'g favourg

to look into anything

to mingle one thing with another

to iaterpoge one'g authority with
any one

to intervene in thingg

to intervene for any one

to introduce onegelf to the com-
manders

to intrude onegelf into any place

invaded by the enemies

to pagg the winter in guch a place

to invegt money into another uge

to ingraft one tree on another

to go from Madrid to Cadiz

to go againgt any body

to go in the way

to go for bread

to go after any one

jactarse de alguna cosa
jug^r d tal juego
jogar (unog) con otros
jugar (alguna coga^ eon otra.
juntar (una coga) a, con otra
jugtificarge de algun cargo
jnzgar de alguna coga

J.

to boagt of anything
to play at guch a game
to play one with another
to move one thing with another
to join one thing to another
to clear oneself from any charge
to judge of anything

L.

ladear (nna cosa) d tal parte
ladearge (alguno) d otro partido
lamentarge de la deggracia
lanzar (algo) dt contra alguno
largo de cuerpo
largo de manos
lagtimarse eon, en una pifdra
lagtimarse de ajguno

to turn anything on luch a side

to become a turncoat

to lament the misfortune

to throw something at any one

tall in stature

fruitful, liberal

to hurt oneself against a stone

to take pity on any one

176

PREPOSITIOI^.

leer (lot pensaoiientos) d algtmo
lejofl de la tierra
levantcr (las maoos) al cielo
levaotar (aJ^na cosa) del suelo

le^aDtar (alg^na cosa) en alto

libertar (a alguno) ile peligro

librar (& alguno) de riesgog

lidiar eon alguno

ligar (uoa cosa) eon otra

ligero de pies

liinitar (las facultades) d alguno

limitado-de talentos

Undar (una posesion) con otra

llevai (algo) d alguna parte
llevarse de algana pasion
lochar con alguno
ludir (una cosa) eon otra

to read the thoughts of any one

far from land

to raise the bands to heaven

to raise any thing up from the
ground

to raise any thing on high

to deliver any one from danger

to free any one from risk

to dispute with any one

to tie one thing with another

lightfooted

to limit any one*s powers

of slender talents

a possession to be adjoining to an-
other

to carry something to any place

to be carried away by some passioa

to wrestle with any one

to rob one thing against another

M.

malqoistarse con alguno
manar (a^ua) de una fuente
manco de una mano
mancomunarse con otros

snandar (alguna cosa) d alguno

roanifestar (alguna coka)4 aljcuno

manteuer (conversacion) d alguno

mantenerse de yerbas

mantenerse en paa

maquinar contra alguno

maquinar en, sobre alguna cosa
^ maravillarse de alguna cosa

mas de cien ducados

matarse d trabajar

matarse por copseguir al|;pi;ia cosa

matizar con, de colores

mediaqo^cfe cuerpo

mediar con, por alguno-
. mediar entre los contrarios

medirse eon sus fuerzas

medirse en las palabras

medrar en la hacienda

mejorar de empleo

mejorar(aidguno)en tercioy quinto

menor de edad
menos de cien ducados
merecer d, d'e^ eon- alguno
mesurarse en lasfaecion^s
4 meter (dioero) en el cofre

to make oneself hated by any one
water springing from a fountain
maimed of one hand
to unite oneself with others in the

execution of anything
to send anything to any one
to discover anything to any one
to maintain conversation with one
to live upon herbs
to live in peace
to plot against any one
to think hard about any thing
to wonder at any thing
more than a hundred ducats
to kill oneself wifn jabopr
to tire oneself to deafh,for any^ipg
to shade with coloufs
of a middling slatuce
to intercede for any oqe
to mediate between enemies
to act according to one*s abilities
to weigh one's words
to increase in riches
to better one*s employment
to meliorate any one's foirtune in a

third and fifth part * "'

under age

less than a thousand ducats
to merit from any one
to be cautious- in one's actions
to put Diooeir into the chest

^KETOSITfOKS.

177

(& alguno) en emp«iio to put one under the neceieity of

doiog a thing
meter (una cosa) entre otras ooeas to put one thing among others
meterae d gobemar
meterse d caballero

meterse con los qoe mandan
meterse en los peligros
mezclar (ana cosa) am otra
mezclarse en negocios
nirar (la ciodad) d orienle
mirar par algaoo
mirarse en atguna cosa
mcMlerarae en las ^lalabras
mofarse de alguno
iiiojar(algQna cosa) en agua
molerse d trabajar
moliHo de andar
molestar (a ano) con visttas
molesto d todos
montar d caba!lo
montar en mala
montar en c6lera
morar en poblado
morir de poca edad
mortr de enf ^rmedad
morirse de frio

morirse por lograr alguna cosa
motejar (d alguno) de ignorante
motivar (la proridencia) eon ra-

zones
moverse de una parte 4 otra
mochoB de los presentet

to assame- fEOvert> men t

to affect the character and dignity
of a knight, a gf ntlemau

to mix with the commanders

to expose oneself to dangers

to mtz one thing with another

to meddle in bosiness

the city to face the east

to look, for any one

to be carefnl in anything

to be moderate in words

to make game of any one

to wet with water

to fatigue oneself with working

fatiga«Hl with walking

to trouble any one with f isits

troublesome to all

to get on horseback

to mount a mule

to get into a passion

to dwell in a settled place

to die young

to die of a sickness

to be chilled with cold

to long for obtaining any end

to censure any one as ignorant

to persuade (a measure) by rea-
sons

to move from one side to another

many of those present

mudar (alguna cosa) d otra parte to remove any thing to another

place
mudar de intento to change one's intention

mudarse de casa to remove from a house

marmurar de algnoo to murmur against any one

N.

nacer eon fortuna

Dacer (alguna cosa) de alguna

part«
nacer en las malvas
D8M;er para trabajos
Dadar en el rio
Davegar d Indias
Degarse d la communicacion
aimio en su proceder
ainguno de los presentes
aivelarse d lo josto

16

to be born to a fortune

any thing to spring from any paA

to be born of low parents
to be born to labour
to swim in the river
to sail to the Indies
to deny oneself to company
over-nice in one's couduct
none of the present
to direct oneself by justice

178

FRSF08ITION8.

Dorobimr (i alguno) para el em-

pleo
Doter (4 al^no)i(eh*bl8dor
Dolilicar (alguna cosa) d alguno

to appoint any one to the cm-

ploymeot
to note anj one as a talker
to notify any thing to any one

o.

obligar (a algnno) d alguna cota
obstar (una cosa) d otra
obstinarse en alguna cosa
obtener (alruna gracia) de algnno
occuUar (aJguna cosa) d^ de al-
gnno
ocuparse en trabajar
ofenderse eoUf de algnna cosa
ofrec^r (alruna CMa) d alguno
ofrecerse a los peligros
oler (una cosa) d otra

olvidarse de lo pasado
opinar en, Jo6re alguna cosa
' oprimir (4 alguno) eon el poder
optar d los empleos
ordenarse de sacerdote
orillar d algnna parte

pactar (alguna cosa) eon otra
pagar am palabras
pagar en dinero
pagarse de buenas raxones
paladearse eon alguna cosa
paliar (alguna cosa) con otra
p4Jido de semblante
palmear d alguno
parar d la puerta
parar en casa
pararse d descansar .
pararse con alguno
pararse en alguna cosa
parco en la comida
parecer en alguna parte
parecerse d otro
participar (algo) d alguno
participar de alguna cosa
particularizarse con alguno
particolarizarse en alguna cosa
parti r d Italia
partir (algo) eon otro
partir en pedazos
partir entre amigos

to oblige any one to anything
one thing to hinder another
to be obstinate in anything
to obtain a favoui from any one
to conceal any thing from any one

to be occupied with work
to be offended at anything
to offer any thing to any one
to offer oneself to dangers
one thing to have a smell of an-
other
to forget the past
to hold an opinion on anything
to oppress another by power
to be a candidate
to be ordained as a priest
to draw to any side

P.

to make a bargain

to pay with words

to pay in cash

to be satisBed with good reasons

to please the palate with anything

to palliate one thing with another

pale-faced

to cheer any one with the bands

to stop at the door

to stay at home

to stop to rest oneself

to stop with any one

to stop at anything

sparing in eating

to appear anywhere

to resemble another

to participate anything to any ooe

to partake of any thing

to be singular with any one

to signalize oneself in any thing

to tet off to July

to share out any thing with another

to break into pieces

to share between friends

PREPOSITIONS.

179

partir j9or mitad
partir por entero
partirse de Espana
pasar d Madrid
pasar de Se villa
pasar tntre montes
pasar por el ramino
pasar por entre 4rboles
pasar por cobarde

to divide in halves

to divide by tens

to set off from Spain

to go to Madrid

to go beyond Seville

to pass between mountains

to past by the road

to pass between trees

to pass for a coward

pasarse(algunacosa)(leiamemoria to forget any thing

pasarse (la fruta) de madura
pasarse (alguno) de letras
pasearse eon otro
pasearse por el campo
pecar eonira la ley
pecar de ignorante
pecar en alguna cosa
pecar por demasia
pedir (alguna cosa) d algono
pedir eon jttsticia
pedir contra alguno
pedir de justicia
pedir en justicia
pedir por Dios
pedir i^or alguno
pegar (una cosa) d otra
pegar (una cosa) eon otra
pegar eonira, en la pared
pelarse j)or alguna cosa
peligrar en alguna cosa
pelotearse eon alguno
penar en la otra vida

fruit to begin to decay

to be very learned

to take a walk with another

to walk in the country

to transgress the law

to sin through ignorance

to be faulty in any thing

to sin through excess

to ask any thing of any one

to ask with justice .

to bring an action against any one

to claim in law

to sue by law

to beg for God

to ask for any one

to apply one thing to another

to join one thing with another

to fasten against the wall

to be anxious for any thing

to endanger in any thing

to 8cu£9e with any one

to be punished in the other life

penar por alguna persona 6 cosa to suffer for any person or thing

pender de alguna cota
penetrar hiuta las entraiias
penetrado de dolor
pensar en, jodre alguna cosa
perder (algo) de vista
perderse (alguno) de vista
perderse en el camino
perecer de hambre
perecerse de risa
perecerse por alguna cosa
peregrioar por el muudo
perfumar eon incienso
permanecer en alguna parte
permitir (alguna cosa) d alguno

to depend upon any thing

to penetrate to the entrails

penetrated with grief

to think upon anything

to lose sight of any thing

to excel in an eminent degree

to lose one's way

to perish with hunger

to die with laughing

to die for anything

to wander through the world

to perfume with incense

to remain in any place

to permit any thing to any one
permutar (una cosa) eon, por otra to exchange one thing for another
perseguido de enemigos pursued by enemies

perseverar en algun intento to persevere in any design

persuadir (alguna cosa) d alguno to persuade any one of anything
persuadirse d alguna cosa to be persuaded of aujrthing

180

nUEP08ITIONS>

pergaadirie de, jwr his raeones de

otro
pertenecer (una CMa) d alguno
pertrecbarte dt lo necesario
pesarle {h alf uno) de lo que ha

hecbo
petado en la coDTertacion
pescar eon red
piarpor alguna cosa
picar de, en todo
picarse de alguna cota
pintiparado d alg^no
plagarse de graoos
plantar (aalguDo) en alguna parte
piantarse en Cadiz
poblar de ^rbolet
poblar en buen parage
poblarse de gente
ponderar (una cosa) de grande
poner (& uno) d oficio
poaer (alguna cosa) en alguna

parte
poner (a alguno) por corregidor
ponerse d escribir
porfiar con alguno
portarse eon decencia
posar en alguna parte
pose! do de temor
postrado de la enfermedad
postrarse d los pies de alguno

postrarse en cama

postrarse en tierra

precedido de otro

preciarsp de valiente

precipitarse de,por alguna parte

preferido d otro

preferido de alguno

preguntar (alguna cosa) d alguno

prendarse de alguno

prender (las platttas) en la tierra

preocuparse de alguna cosa

prepararse d, para alguna cosa

preponderar (una cosa) d otra

prescindir de alguna cosa
piesentar(aigunacosa) (i alguno
presenter (a uno) para una pre-
bend a
preservar (4 alguno) de dafto
presidir d otros
presidir en un tribunal

to be persuaded by another's rea*

sons
any thing to belong to any one
to be furnished with necessaries
any one to repent of what he has

done
dull in conversation
to fish with a net
to long for anything
to excel in every thing
tu pique oneself upon anything:
like to any one exactly
to be plagued with pimples
to set any one in any place
to be settled in Cadiz
to fill with trees
to settle in a good situation
to be peopled

to exaggerate anything as great
to put any one in business
to put anything some where

to appoint any one corregidor

to set oneself to writing

to be positive v^ith any one

to conduct oneself firith decency

to lodge in any place

possessed by fear

prostrated by sickness

to prostrate oneself at another's

feet
to be confined to one's bed
to kneel down on the ground
preceded by another
to pique ones self upon courage
to be precipitated from any place
preferred to another
preferred by any one
to ask any one any thing
to be taken with any one
plants to take root in the earth
to be prepossessed with anything
to prepaie oneself for anything
to preponderate one thing over

another
to cut off from any thing
to present anything to any one
to present any one for a prebend

to preserve any one from injury
to preside over others
to preside in a tribunal

PBEPOSITIONS.

181

pretidido de otro
prestar (dinero) d alguno
prestar (U dteta) para la salad
prestar sobre prenda
presumir de docto
prevalecer (la yerdad) tobre la

mentira
preveair (alcana cosa) d alguno
prevenirse de \o necessario
prevenirse para un viuge
primero de, erUre todos
pringarse en alguoa cosa
privar (& alg^oo) de lo sujo

prirar am tdguno
probar dsaltar
probar de todo
proceder d la eleccioo
proceder eon, sin acuerdo

proceder contra alguno
proceder (una cosa) de otra
procesar (d uno) por delitos
procurar por algoao
proejar contra las olas
profesaren religion
prometer (alguna cosa) d alguno
promover (d algono) d algan cargo
propasarse d, en alguoa cosa
proponer (algaaa cosa) d alguno
proponer (k alguno) en primer

lugar
proporcionar (4 alguno) para al-
guna cosa
proporcionarse d las fuerzas

proporcionarse para alguna cosa
prolongar (el plazo) d ^guoo
prorumpir en 14grimas
proveer (la plaza) de riveres

proveer (el empleo) en alguno

proTenir de otra cosa
provocar d ira

provocar (& alguno,)eon malas pal-

abras
proximo d morir
pujar por alguoa cosa
purgarse de tospecha
16*

presided bj another

to lend money to any one

the diet to contribute to the health

to lend on security

to set op for a man of learning

truth to prevail over falsehood

to adWse another of any thing
to provide oneself with necessaries
to prepare oneself for a journey
first among all
to intermeddle in any thing
to deprive any one of what be-
longs to him
to be intimate with any one
to try to jump
to taste of every thing
to proceed to the election
to proceed with or without circum-
spection
to proceed against any one
one thing to proceed from another
to proceed against a man for crimes
to procure for any one
to row against the waves
to profess in religion
to promise any thing to any one
to promote any one to any office
to overshoot one*smark in anything
to propose any thing to any one
to propose any one in the first

place
to fit any one for any thing

to proportion oneself to one's
strength

to fit oneself for any thing

to prolong the credit to any one

to burst into tears

to furnish the fortress with provi*
visions

to provide any one with employ-
ment

to proceed from something else

to provoke to anger

to provoke any one by scurrilous

language
at the point of death
to strive for any thing
to clear oneself from suspicion

182

PREPOSITIONS.

Q.

to fit for the employment

to fit anytbiog to any oae

which of the two ?

to break any one's bones

to break any one's heart

to remain or reside in a place

to remain gtanding -

to tarry at home

to have to proceed farther

to be bail for any one

toberepnteda coward

anything falling to my share

to stop short in a ditconrse

to complain to any one

to complain of any one

to lay one's complaint before the

jwdge
to complain of one's neighbour
to inflame one with ioTective
to be offended with any word
to heat oneself for anything
beloved by one's friends
which of them ?
to take anything from any one

quitar (alguna. ooea) de .alguna to take anything from any plmoe
parte

quitarse de quimeras. to free oneself from whims

R.

caadrar con el eocargo

coadrar (alguna cosa) d alguno

cual de los dos ?

quebraotar (los buesot)d alguno

quebrar (el corazon) d alguno

quedar dt asiento

quedar de pies

quedar en casa

quedar (caraino) por andar

quedar por alguno

quedar por cobarde

quedar (una cosa) por mia

quedarse en el sermon

quejarse d alguno

quejarse de alguno

querelarse d, ante el juez

querellarse de su vecino
quenar eon malas rasones
quemarse de alguna palabra
quemarse por alguna cosa
qoerido de sus amigoa
quien de ellos ?
quitar (alguna cosa) d alguno

rabiar de hambre

rabiar por comer

radicarse en la virtud

raer de alguna cosa

rallar (las tripas) d cualquiera

rayar con la virtud

razonar eon alguno

rebalsarse (el agon) en alguna
parte

rebatir (una cantidad) de otra

rebajar (una cantidad) de otra

recaer en la enferroedad

recalcarse en lo dieho

recatarse de alguno

recavar (alguna cosa) de^ con al-
guno

recetar (medicinas) (i, para alguno

recetar contra alguno

recibir (alguna cosa) rfe alguno

recibtr d cuenta

recibir (k alguno) en

to be very hungry

to long to eat

to establish oneself in virtue -

to scrape from anything

to importune any one

to excel in virtue

to converge vrith any one

water to stagnate in any place

to deduct a sum

to abate one> sum from another

to relapse into sickness

to be firm in what has been said

to be cautious of any one -

to obtain anything from any one

to prescribe medicines for any one
to make a charge against any one
to receive any thing from any one
to receive on account
to receive any oue at home

PREPOSITIONS.

183

recibirse de abogado

recio de cuerpo

reclinarse en, sobre alguna cosa

4*ecluir (& algnoo) en alguna parte

recobrarse de la eofermedad

recogerse d casa

recomendar (alguna cosa) d alguno

recompensar (agravlos) eon bene-

ficios
reconcentrarse (el odio) en el co-

razon
reconciliar (a uno) con otro
reconvenir (a alguno) conf de,

iohre alguua cosa
recostarse en, tobre la silla
recudir (a alguoo) con el sueldo
redondearse de deudas
reducir (alguna cosa) d la mitad
redandar en beneficio
referirse d alguna cosa
refocilarse con alguna cosa
refugiarse df en sagrado
reglarse d lo justo
regodearse en, con alguna cosa
reirse d carcajadas
reirse de alguno

reniirarse en alguna cosa
reemplazar {k alguno) en su em-
pleo

rendirse d la razon

renegar de alguna cosa

repartir (alguna cosa) d, entre al-
guoos

representarse (alguna cosa) d la
iroaginacion

resbalarse de las manos

resentirse de alguna cosa

residir de asiento en alguna parte

residir en la corte

resol verse d alguna cosa

responder d la pregunta

restar (una cantidad) de otra

restituirse 4 su casa

resoltar (una casa) de otra

retirarse d la soledad

retirarse del mundo ^

retraerse d alguna parte

retraerse de alguna cosa

retroceder d, hdeia tal parte

reventar de risa

reyentar por hablar

reTMtirse de autoridad

revolcarse en los vicios

to be admitted as a counsellor

of a strong constitution ,

to lean upon any thing

to shut any one up in any place

to recover oneself fi'om sickness

to retire home

to recommend anything to any one

to recompense wrongs with benefits

to concentrate hatred in the heart

to reconcile one with another

to retort on any one with anything

to recline on a seat

to pay any one his wages

to pay off one's debts

to reduce anything to the half

to conduce to the benefit

to refer oneself to any thing

to be refreshed with any thing

to take refuge in some sacred place

to conform to what is right

to delight oneself in anything

to laugh heartily

to make a jest of any one

id examine oneself in any thing

to take the place of any one in his

employment
to yield to reason
to apostatize from anything .
to share any thing among several

to represent an> thing to one's

imagination
to slip away from the hands
to resent any thing
to be settled in any place
to reside at court
to resolve upon any thing
to answer the question
to remain one sum from another
to return to one's house
one thing to result from another
to retire into solitude
to retire from the world
to take refuge any where
to escape from anything
to recede towards such a place
to burst with laughter
to burst with a desire of speaking
to be invested with authority
to wallow in vice

184

PIUBP08ITI0NS.

reToWer eon/ra, kdda, 9obre el

tnemigo
robar (dioero) d alguno
rodar (el carro) por tierra
rodear (4 alguno) por todas partes
rodear (una plaza) eon^ murallat
rogar (alguoa cosa) d alguno
romper eon alguno
romper por alguna parte
rozarse (una cota) eon otra
rozarse en las palabras

to return to the enem/

to rob any one of money

to overset a cart

to encompass any one on all sidfs

to surround a place with walls

to beg any thing of any one

to break off with any one

to break in any place

to rub one thing with another

to stammer in one's speech

saber d vino

saber de trabajos

sacar (una cosa) d la plasa

sacar de alguna parte

sacar en limpto

sacri6car (alguna cosa) d Dios

sacrificarse por alguno

salir d alguna cosa

salir eon la pretension

salir con/ra alguno

salir de alguna parte

salir por fiador

to taste like wine •

to be acquainted with trouble

to take any thing to the market

to take any thing from any place

to clear up all doubts, to copy fair

to sacrifice any thing to God

to sacrifice oneself for any one

to co-operate in anything

to obtain one's aim

to go out against any one

to go out from any place

to appear as security

saltar (una cosa) d la inaginacicyi any thing to strike the imagination

saltar de el suelo

saltar de gozo

saltar en tierra

salvar (k alguno) del peligro

sanar de la enferroedad

satisfacer por las culpas

satisfacerse de \fi duda

to leap from the ground

to leap with joy

to leap on the ground, on shore

to save any one from danger

to recover from sickness

to atone for one's faults

to be satisfied for the doubt

8egregar(a alguno) de alguna parte to separate any one from any place

segregar (una cosa) de otra
seguirse (una cosa) de otra
semejar, 6 semejarse (una cosa)

d otra
sentarse en la mesa
sentarse d la silla
sentenciar (4 uno) d destierro
sentirse de algo
separar funa cosa) de otra
ser (una cosa) d (^usto de todos
ser (una cosa) cfe, pttra algunos
servir de majordomo
servir en palaclo
servirse de alguno
sincerarse de alguna cosa
sisar de la compra
sitlado de enemigos

to separate one thing from another
one thing to follow from another
to liken one thing to another, to

re semble
to sit down to table
to sit down in the chair
to condemn one to exile
to be sensible of anything
to separate one thing from another
any thing to be to ihe taste of all
any thing to be to or for some one
to serve ailn steward
to be a servant in a palace
to make use of any one
to clear one's self from something
to lessen the purchase
besieged by enemies

PROPOSITIONS. 185

sitiar por hambre to lay siege te any one by means

of hunger
sitaarse tn alguna parte to station oneself in any place

sobrellevar (los trabajos) ron pa- to undergo labours, troubles with

ciencia patience

sobrellevar (£ alguno) en sus tra- to assist any one in his labours or

bajos troubles

sobrepujar (a alguno) en aotoridad to exceed any one in authority
sobresalir'en galas to surpass in dress

sobresalir tntrt todos to excel among all

sobresaltarse de alguna cosa to be started at any thing

sojuzgado dt enemigos subdued by enemies

someterse d alguno to submit to any one

sonar (alguna cosa) d bueca any thing to sound hollovr

sonar (alguna cosa) ^(ictatal parte any thing to sound towards such

a side
sordo d las voces deaf to the cries

sordo dt un oido deaf with one ear

sorprender (a alguno) con alguna to surprise any oue with anything

cosa
sorprenderle en alguna cosa to surprise him in any thing

sorprendido dt la bulla surprised by the noise

sospechar (alguna cosa) dt alguao to suspect any one of anything
sospechoso d alguno suspected by any one

sobdividir en partes to subdivide into parts

subir d alguna parte to go up to any place

subir dt alguna parte to go up from any place

subir tobrt la mesa to get upon the table

subrogar (una cosa) en lugar de to substitute one thing instead of

otra another

sobsistir dtl auxilio ageno to subsist by others' aid

subsistir en el dict&men to be firm in an opinion

sustituir df pot alguno to substitute for any one

sustituir (un poder) en alguno to substitute a power to any one
sustraerse dt la obediencia to withdraw one's self from subor-

dination
suceder (4 alguno) en el empleo to succeed any one in an employ-
ment
sufrir (los trabajos) eon paciencia to suffer troubles with patience
sugerir (alguna cosa) d alguno to suggest any thing to any one
sugetarse d alguno 6 alguna cosa to subject oneself to any one, or

any thing
saniergir (alguna cosa) tn el agua to plimge any thing in the water
sumirse en idguna parte to sink in any place

sumiso d la voluntad submissive to the will

sopcditado dt los contrarios suppressed by the enemies

superior d sus enemigos superior to one's enemies

superior en luces of greater talents

suplicar de la sentencia to petition against the sentence

suplicar por alguno to entreat for any one

suplir por alguno to supply for any one

surgir (la nave) en el puerto to ride at anchor in the port

186

PaSPOSITIONS.

sartir de ▼! rerM
•uspenso de oiicio

suspirtr por el mando
siu tentarse eon yerbas
sustentarse de esperaniai

to supply with TictaaU
debarred the exercise of ooe^s em-
ployment
to aspire aAer command
to feed upon herbs
to sustain oneself with hapts

T.

Uchar (4 al^ao) dt ligero

temblar de f rio

temido de muchos

temeroso de la muerte

temible d lot contrarios

templarse en comer

tener (4 uno^ por otro

tenerse en pie

tenir dt asul

tirar d, hdeia tal parte

tirar por tal parte

tiritar de frio

titubear en alguna cosa

tocar (la herencia) d algnno

tocar en alg^una parte

tocado de enfermedad

tomar eon, en Us manos

tomar (una cosa) de tal modo

torcido de cueipo

tomar d alcana parte

tomar de alg^una parte

trabajar en alguna cosa

trabajar por alguna cosa

trabajar por otro

trabar de algono

trabar (una cosa) eon otra

trabar en alguna cosa

trabarse de palabras

trabucarse en las palabras

traer (alguna cosa) d alguna parte

traer (alguna com) </e algima parte

traficar en drogas

transferir (alguna cosa) d otro ti-

empo
transferirse d tal parte
transfigurarse en otra cosa

transformar (una cosa) en otra
transitar por alguna parte
transpirar por todas partes
transportar (alguna cosa) d algu-
na parte
transportar (alguna cosa) de alga-
9a parte

to accuse any one of levity

to tremble with cold

feared by many

fearful of death

dreadful to his enemies

to^ be temperate in eating

to take one for another

to keep oneself on foot

to dye in blue

to draw on such a side

to draw towards such a side

to shiver with cold

to waver in any thing

the inheritance to fall to any one

to touch one anywhere

touched with disease

to take with, or in the hands

to take anything in such a manner

deformed in body

to turn to such a side

to turn from such a side

to work in any thing

to contend for anything

to work for another

to seize any one

to join one thing with another

to fall on any thing

to quarrel with any one

to mistake one*s words

to draw anything to any place

to draw anything from any place

to deal in drugs

to transfer anything to another

timft
to transport oneself to such a place
to transform oneself into another

thing
to transform one thing into another
to pass by any place
to transpire on all sides
to transport anything to any place

to transport anything from any
place

PREPOSITIONS.

187

traspasar (alguna cosa) d sdguno to transfer something to another •
traspasado de dolor transfixed with grief

trasplantar (de una parte) <i otia to transplant from one place to

another

tratar eon alguno
tratar de alguna cosa
tratar en lanas
travesar eon alguno

trionfar de los enemigos
trocar (una cosa) par otra
tropezar en alguna cosa

ultimo de todos

vDcir (los buejres) al carro

iiniformar (una cosa) eon otra

iwir (una cosa) d, eon otra

unirse en comunidad

unirse entre si

uno de, tnire muchos

ifitil d la patria

util para tal cosa

utiiisarse tn^-eon alguna cosa

to treat with any one

to treat of anything

to deal in wool

to behaye improperly towards any

one
to triumph OTtr the enemy
to change one thing for another
to stumble on any thing

u.

the last of aU

to yoke oxen to the cart

to make one thing uniform with

another
to unite one thing with another
to unite in a community
to be united together
one among many
useful to the country
useful for such a thing
to make advantage of anything

▼acar al estudio to attend to study

Taciarse de alguna cosa to be emptied from anything

Taciarse por la boca to tell what ought to be kept secret

TatUar en la elecaion to hesitate in one's choice

Tacilaren/relaesperanzayeltemorto vacillate between hd{>eand fear
Tacio de entendimiento addle-headed

vagar/^or el mundo to wander through the world

Talerse de alguno, de alguna cosa to avail oneself of any one, or any

thing

valaar (una cosa) en tal precio
▼anagloriarse de alguna cosa

Tccino ai trono
Tecino de Antonio
Telar d los muertos
▼elar sobre alguna cosa
Tencerse d alguna cosa
Tencido de los contrarios
▼endorse d alguno
▼engarse de otro
▼enir d, de por algana parte
▼enir eon alguno
▼erse con alguno
▼erse ^altura

to value anything at such a price
to be puffed up with pride for any

thing
near the throne
near Anthony
to watch the dead
to watch over anything
to conquer oneself in anything
conquered by the enemy
to sell oneself to any one
to revenge oneself on another
to come to,from, or by any place
to come with another
to meet any one
to be in such a latitude, or high

station

188 CONJUNCTIONS.

Testir d U moda to dress in fashion

Testirse de pano to be dressed ia cloth

Ttgilar Jo6re sus snbditos to watch over onea sabjectB

riolentarte d, en alguoa cosa to be violent in anything

▼isiblp d, para todos visible to all

vivir d so gusto to live to one's taste

TJvir con alguno to live with any one

▼irir de limotna to live by alms

vtvir par milagro to live by a miracle

▼ivir sobrt la has de la tierra to live without care

volar al cielo • to fly to Heaven

volar por el aire to fly in the air

velver d, de, hdciaj por tal parte to return to, from, towards, by

such a place

volver por la verdad to defend the truth

▼otar en el pleito to vote in the trial

votar por alguno to vote for any one

z.

zabuUirse 6 sambulllrse en el agoa to plunge into the water
safRfse de alguna persbna 6 cosa to avoid any one or any thing
sambucarse en alguna parte to hide oneself in any place

zampusarse en agua to dive into water

zapatearse con alguno to malie a noise with any one

zosobrar en la tormenta to' be sinking in the storm

CHAPTER IX.

"^ OP CONJUNCTIONS.

Conjunctions serve to join phrases, or parts of phrases
together. They are indeclinable like the prepositions and
adverbs. They are distinguished into copulative j dii^itnctive^
restrictive^ adoersative^ conditionalj causitive and compare
ative.

The copulative conjunctions serve to bring together seve-
ral words or several menpibers of a phrase under the same
affirmation or negation.

Those denoting affirmation are,

1st. K, ^, and. Ex. El valor y el honor son las dog
principales dotes que caracterizan al hiroCy valour and hon-
our are the two principal qualities that characterise a hero.
El senor J5... es un kombre cruel i in^ustOj Mr. B. is a cni^
and unjust man.

2d. Tambien, also ; Ex. Ya que vm, lo quiere^ la quiera
tambieny since you wish it, I also wish it.

CONJUKdTlOl^S. 193

Sd. Que^tfaat; Ex. Yas6queim.t8 amigomioy I know
that you are my friend.

Rule LiXLV.-^jind is translated in Spanish by i, and
not by y, when the following word begins with an i or y ; as,
we ahaJl ^o oMt at Ave o'clock, and go to the play, saIdr6mo8
d las dnco, 6 irimos^ d la eomedia.

The conjunctions that denote a negation are ; m, nor ;
iampoco, neither. £x. Ni reivy ni Uorar puedo, I can neith-
er laugh, nor weep. Ya que no salesy tampoco yo sdldriy
since thon dost not go out, I shall not neither.

The disjunciim conjunctions denote an alternative, or
distinction ; as, <^, 6 ; Ex. Juan 6 FroncUcOy John or Fran-
cis ; entrar 6 saKvy to go in or out ; uno ii otroy one or the
other.

Rule LXV* — Or is translated in Spanish by ^, if the fol-
lowing word begins with an o. Ex; Siete it oc^o hombreSj
seven or eight men.

The restrictive conjunctions restrict, in any manner
whatever, an idea or a proposition ; as, stno, only, except.
Ex. No tengo nada que decirlcy sino que h quieroy T have
nothing to tell hiro, except that I wish it.

The adversative conjunctions connect two propositions,
denoting an opposition in the second as respects the first ; as,
masy peroy but ; no obstantCy nevertheless, yet, however ;
euandhy when ; aunquey bien qucy though. . Ex. QMisiera
saiiTy mas nopiuedoy I should wish to go out, but I cannot
Ei dinero haee d los hombres ricosy pero no dichosoSy money
makes men rich, but not happy. Habla la verdady no ob-
stante nadie le crecy he speaks the truth, yet nobody believes
him. Noharfa una injuslicia cuando le importara un tronoy
he would not commit an injustice, though it might be worth
to him a throne. No es imprudentey bien quCy or aunque
parezca serlOy he is not imprudent, though he appears to be so.

The conditional conjunctions connect two members of
speech by a supposition, or by denoting a condition ; as,
«t, if; comoy con tal quey provided. Ex. Si aspiras d ser
doctOy estudia con perseveranciay if thou desirest to be
learned, study with perseverance. Sabrds estafdbula d las
doce, como or con tal que la estudiesy thou wilt know this
fable at noon, provided thou study it.

The causative conjunctions serve to denote the cause of a
17

194 CONJUNCTIONS.

thing, or the reason for which it has been done, as porque,
because ; pues, pues que, since. Ex. Dehe el kombre evitar
la ociondad, porque es la madre de todos los viciosy man
must shun idleness, because it is the mother of all vices.
Leeri este libro, pues vm. me dice que es buenoy I shall read
this book, since you tell me that it is good.

The comparative conjunctions serve to denote a relation
or parity between two objects, or two propositions, such as,
coflto, as; an como, just as ; Ex. La helleza ea comolafiar
que se marchita el mismo dia que la vid nacer, beauty is as
the flower that withers the same day that saw it bloom.

OP THE CONJUNCTIONS THAT GOVERN THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

The conjunctions which govern in the subjunctive the verb
that follows them, are, para que, in order that ; afin de que^
to the end that ; a no aer que, a menos que, unless ; antes
que, before that ; caso que, en caso que, in case that ; auTique^
though ; at/It cuando, although ; bien que, though ; hasta
que, till, until ; dado que, grant, or suppose that ; con tal
que, como quiera que, provided that ; por mas que, however,
whatever ; siempre que, whenever ; Ex. Bien que, or
aunque la ambicion sea un vicio, es no obstante la &at6 de
murhisimas virtudes, though ambition be a vice, it is never-
theless the basis ofa great many viitues. For nuts sabios
que sean, no conocen la causa de este efecto, however en-
lightened they be, they do not know the cause of this effect*
El maestro se afana^para que or afin de que adeUinten sus
discipidos, the master exerts himself to the end that his schol-
ars may improve.

N. B. As we frequently make use of the second future and
of the second and third conditionals, see the rules 39, 40,
42, 43, 44, and Ab,page 7^ andfoUowing,

CHAPTER X.

OP INTEBJECTIOI^S.

Interjections serve to express an emotion, or an affection
of the mind, or to awake attention. y4h I ay! he / 0/ OUi !
ta chito / ea f sus ! taie I The aflections of the mind may
be of grief, sadness, contempt, indignation, joy, or astonish-
meijt ; to express them we may indifferently make use of the

INTERJECTIONS.

195

following interjections, ay ! ah ! ! for, if we say, — /ay,
que pena ! oh, what pain ! /aA, que desgracia ! oh, what
misfortune ! /o, desdichach de mi ! alas, unhappy me ! we
may also say, — ^ay que gozo / ha, what delight ! /ah, que
alegria / ha, what joy ! /OyfeHces de nosotros f ha, how
happy we are ! O cielo f oh heavens ! Ha f he ! Ola /
and to ! serve to awaken attention. He / is also used to
show that we have not understood what has been said. Ola
is sometimes an interjection of admuration, and to is hardly
ever used except to call a dog : it is an abbreviation of toma,
take. — Qhito^ bush, serves to impose silence. Ea, varnos,
and suSy come, come on, are used to animate and excite
courage. — Tate, guarda ! take care ! serves to prevent one's
doing or saying something. Vwa ! huzza ! Ola ! holla !
ho ho ! Otravez! encore ! vaya! come ! Quedo f softly !
Voto a ! zounds ! ttvme equi / here I am ! He aqui / here
isy here are !

Anseatic, Ansedtico.

NAMES OF COUNTRIES, ISLANDS, CAPES, AND SEAS.
NouBs. A4JectiTe8.

Africa, Africa. African, Africano,

Algiers, Argeh Algerine, ArgeUno.

America, America. American, Americano.

Anseatic {c\X\e^\Amedtica8^

(ciudcuks),
Antilles(The),.4ii<t7to« (Las).

Arabia, Arabia, Arabian, Arahe.

Andalusia, JindaJucia. Andalusian, Andahtz.

Asia, Asia. Asiatic, Asidtico.

Austria, Austria. Austrian, dustriaco.

Asturias, Asturias. Asturian, Asturiano.

The Azores, Las Azoras.
The Atlantic, El Atldntico.
The Baltic, El BdUico.

Barbary, Berberia (costa de). Berberisk, Berherisco^
Botany Bay, BaMa Botdnica.

Bavaria, Bamera. Bavarian, Bdvaro.

Biscay, Vizcaya. Biscayan, Vizcaino.

Bohemia, Bohemia. Bohemian, Bohemo.

Brazil, Brasil Brazilian, Brasihfio.

196

nOPBft NAMBS

Brittany, Breiafkt. Brhon, Breton.

Burgandy, Borgofia. Burgundian, Borgofke^

British Channel (The), Man^

cha (La).
Canary Islands, CtmarioM (Uku.)
Cape of GocnI Hope, Cabo de Buena Etperanza.
Cape Horn, CtUto de Homoe.

Catalonuy

Catalufia.

Catabnian,

CaUtkm.

China,

China. -

Chinese,

CMno.

Castae(OldandNew), Cae^ Castillian.

CaeteUano.

tilia (la 1

vte^a y nuevaj.

'

Cantabria,

Cdniabro.

Chili,

Chile.

Chilian,

CUkno.

Colombia,

Colombia.

ColombiaB,

Colembiano.

Corsica,

Corcega.

Corsican,

Coreo.

Dauphiny,

Deljimado.

Dauphin,

Delfino.

Denmark,

Dinamarca.

Dane,

Dinamarqaee.

Deuz-Ponts.

f Doe Fuentee.

Egypt,

Egipto.

Egyptian,

Egipcio.

Estremadura.

Eetrameno.

Europe,

Evropa.

European,

EuropSo.

England,

Inglaterra.

English,

Ingles.

Fernandez massaftiero, Femanadez mas dfuera.

Finland,

Finkmda.

Finlander,

Finlandee.

Finisterre (Cape), Finieiierra (Cabo.)

Flanders,

Fkmdes.

Flemish,

Flamenco.

France,

Francia.

French,

Frances.

Franche Comte, Franco Condado.

Georgia,

Jorgia.

Georgian,

Jorgiano.

Galicia,

Galicia.

Galician,

Gcdlego.

Germany,

German,

Aleman.

Granada.

Granadino.

Greenland,

Qroenland.

Greenlanderj

, GroenUmdes.

Greece,

Grecia.

Greek,

Griego.

Holland,

Holanda.

Hollander or

Dutch^ Holandes.

Hungary,

Hungria.

Hungarian,

Hdngaro.

Iceland,

Islanda.

Icelandic,

Islandes.

Ireland,

Irlanda.

Irish,

Irlandes.

Indies (East

and West), Indftos (Orientalee

y Oceidentales.)

Ionian (Islands^, ISnicas (Mas.)

Italy,

Italia.

Italian,

lUtliano.

Japan,

Japon,

Japanese,

Japones,

PAOPSB NAMES.

197

Lombard,
LevantiDe,

Leon,

Liombardy, Lombardia.

Levant, Levante.

Madeira, Madera.

Mauritius, Mauricio.

Malta, Malta.

JdediterraueaujMediterraneo

Mexico, Mtgico.

Morocco, Marruecos.

Murcia.

Navarre, Navarra.

Newfoundland, Tierra Nueva.

Normandy, Normandia.

Norway, Norvega. Norwegian,

Naples, Ndpoks. Neapolitan,

Netherlands, Poises ba^os. Dutch,

Pacific (Ocean,) Pacf/Sco (Oceano.)

Palatinate^ Falaiinado. Palatine,

Leones.

Lombardo.

Levaniino.

Maltese, Makes.

Mexican
Moorish,

Navarrese,

Persia,

Peru,

PiEardy,

Piedmont,

Poland,

Portugal^

Persia.

Peru.

Picardia.

Piamonie.

Polonia.

Portugal.

Persian,
Peruvian,

Piedmontese,

Pole,

Portuguese,

Megicano.
Moro.
Murciano.
Navarro.

Norvegiano.
NapoUtano.
Holandes.

PakUino.

Persa.

Peruano.

Piamontes.

Poiaco.

Portugues.

P^OTinces (linked,) Provincias (Unidas.)
Provinces (of River la Fl9$ey)Promncias(del rio de hPlata.)

Argentine, Argentino.
Prusia. Prussian, Prusiano.

Puerto Rico. Porto Rican, Puerto Riquefio.
Rodas. . Rhodian* Rodiano.

Raguses.

Prussia,
Porto Rico,
Rhodes,
Ragusa,
Red (Sea,)
Russia,

Rhodi^n,
Ragusian,
Rq^OfBermefo (mar.)
Rusia. • Russian,

Sl Vincent (Cape,) San Vicente (Cabo.)
St Domingo, Santo Domingo.

Sardinia,

Savoy,

Saxony,

Scotland,

Sicily,

Sweden,

17*

Cerdena.

Savoi^a.

Saxoma>

Escocia,

Sidlia.

Suecia.

Sardinian,

Savoyard,

Saxon,

Scotch,

Sicilian,

Swede,

Ruso,

Sardo.

Savoyardo.

Saxon.

Escoces.

Siciliano^^

Sueco^

198

PROPEE NAMES.

Switzerland;

Suiza. Swiss,

Smz9.

Sound (The,)

8unda (La.)

Spain,
Tartary,

Espana. Spanish,
Tartaria. Tartar,

EspanoL
Tdrtaro.

Table Bay,

Bahiade Tahla.

Turkey,

Turquia. Turk,

Turco.

United States.

, EstadosUnidos.

Valencia,

Valencian,

Valienciano,

Venezuela,

Venezuela. Venezuelian,

Venezolano.

Zealand,

Celanda. Zealander,

Celandes.

NAMES OF CITIES, MOUNTAINS AND RIYERSr

Aix-la-Chapelle, Aquisgrana. Coblentz,
Alicant, Alicante. Constantino-

Alps (The,) Mpes (Los.)
Antwerp, Amberes.
Antloch, Antioquia.

Andes (The,) Andes (Lob.)
Amazon(The,)^f7Mizofta«
(La».)

Vohlenza,
ConstaiUinopla,

Appenines

(The,)
Basle,
Bayonne,
Berne,
Bordeaux,
Bilboa,
Boulogne,
Breslaw,
Bruges,
Brussels,

pie,
Copenhagen, Copenhague.
Corunna, Coruna.

Chimborazo, Chimborazo.
Dover, Duvre.

Dresden, Dresde.

Apeninos (Lo9.)Dowas (The,) Dunas {Las^
Danube(The,) Danubioy (EL)

Basilia. Edinburgh,

Bayona. Florence,

Bema. Genoa,

Burdtos. Geneva,

Bilbao. Gibraltar
Bolona. (Straits^ of,)

Breslao.
Brujas.

Bruselas. Havana,

Buenos Ayres, Buenos Aires, Leipzig,

Cairo,* Cairo (El) Liege,

Calais, Coles. Leghorn,

CapeFrangoiSjGwartco (el.) Lille,
Cape Horn, Ca6oc2e Hom(M.London,

Cherbourg, Cherburgo. Lyons,

Cologne, CoUmia. Lisbon,

Edinbwrgo.

Florencia.

Ginova.

GinebrOy

Gibraltar (Es-
trecho de.)
Hague (The,) Haya (La.)
Hamburgh, Hamburgo.

Haboiia.

Lipna,

Lieja.

Lioma.

Ula.

Londres.
Leon {de Prancia.)

Lisboa^

Marseilles,
Mountain

(Brown)
MentZy
Meuse, .
Nile (The,)
New York,
New Orleans
Petersburgh

(St.)
Philadelphia,

PROPER NAMES.

MarseUa. Roncesvaux,
Sierra f More- Rome,

199

RancesvaUes.
Roma,

na.) \ Rhone (The,) Rhddano (EL)

Maguncia, Saragossa, Zaragoza.
Mosa, . Stockholm, Stocolmo.

Nth (El) SeviUe, SemUa.

Nueva York. St. Andero, Santander,
NuevaOrleang. Seine (The,) Sena (La.)
Petersburgo Scheld (The,) Escaldo (EL)
(San.) Trent, Trenia.

r— -, Filadeljia. Thames(The, ) Tamwa (^La.;

Pyrenees( The^Firinios (jLo».)Venice, Venecia.

Providence, Providencia. Vienna, Viena.

Prague, Praga. Warsaw, Varsoma.

CHRISTIAN NAMES, MOST USED*

Albert,

AJbeHo.

Dominico,

Domingo.

Alexander,

Alejandro.

Dorothy,

DoroUa.

Alexis,

Alexo.

Edward,

Eduardo.

Aiphonso,

Aiphonso.

Eugene,

Eugenio.

Ambrose,

Ambrosio.

Eusebius,

Eusebio.

Andrew,

Andres.

Eustach,

Eustaquio.

Ann,

Ana.

Faustus,

Fausto.

Antony,

Antonio.

Ferdinand,

Fernando.

Athanasius,

Atanasio.

Florent,

Florencio,

Augustin,

Agustin.

Firmm,

Augustus,

Augusto.

Francis,

Francisco.

Bartholomew

, Bartolomi.

Fulgence,

Ftdgencio.

Basil,

Gaetan,

Cayetano.

Benedict,

Benito.

George,

Jorge.

Bernard,

Bernardo.

Gregory,

Gregorio.

Blaise,

Bias.

Grace,

Gracia.

Boniface,

Bonifacio.

Henry,

Enrique.

Camillus,

Camilo.

Hilarius,

Hilario.

Candid,

Cdndido.

Hyacinthus,

Jacinto.

Casimir,

Casimiro.

Ignatius,

Ignado.

Catherine,

Catalina:

Innocentius,

Inocencio.

Charles,

Carlos.

Isidorus,

Isidoro.

Christopher,

Cristdnal.

James,

Jaimcy Diego,

Clement,

Clemente.

Santiago.

Dyonisius,

Dionisio.

Januarius,

Genaro,

£00

John,
Jane,
Jerome^
Joachim^
Joseph,
Josephine,
Just,

Lawrence,
.Lazarus,
Leander,
Leonard,
Luke,
Lewis,
Mark,
MarceDus,
Margaret,
Mary and Ma-
ria,
Matthew,
Michael,
Monique,
Narcissus,
Nicasius,
Patrick,
Paul,

PROPER NABOBS.

Juan.

Paulin,

Paulino.

Juana.

Philip,

^±

Ger6nimo.

Peter,

i^T'^'

Pius,

Pio.

Raymond,

Raimundo.

Joaefinm.

Remy,

Rendgio.

Jusio.

Rocfa,

Roque.

Lorenzo

Richard,

Bicardo.

Idzaro,

Rose,

Rosa.

Leandro.

Rupert,

RupertOy

Leonardo.

Robert,

Roberto.

Lucas.

Satumin,

Saturnine.

Lute.

Stephen,

Estiban.

Marcos.

Sixtus,

8esto.

Marcelo.

St. Telmo,

8anTdmo,

Margarita.

Thaddeus,

Tadto.

Maria.

Theodore,

Teodoro.

Theresa,

Teresa.

Matio.

Thomas,

Tomas.

Miguel

Victoria,

Victoria.

Mdnica,

Victorianus,

Victoriano.

Narciso.

Vincent,

Ficente.

Nicasio.

William,

GuiUenno,

Patrtcio.

Walter,

Gtudtero.

Pabb.

END OIW THE FIRST PART.

A

GRAMMAR

OF THB

SPANISH LANGUAGE,

PRACTICAL EXERCISES.

8%e iTCrst ^vt

Gootainin? a List of the AbbreviaUoos which are frequeiitly fonad in wiitiiig ;
A Treatise on Pronanciation and Alterations in Orthography, founded upon
the latest Rules established by the Academy of Madrid ; OomparatiTe Rales
of the Spanish and English Languages ; A general Scheme ot the Termina-
tions of Regular Verbs ; An alphabetical List of the Irregular Verbs, conju-
gated in thdr order ; A Table, illustrating the use of Prepositions in Spanish ;
Liste of the Names of difl*erent Countries, principal Oities and Christian
Ifames*

STIie <Sec0ntr IPart

9oDtaining a Collection of Exercises interlined ; a Vocabulary with Familiar
Phrases and Dialogues •, and a Treatise on Spanish Versification.

BY M. JOSSE.

Second American from the latest Paris Edition,

9BTISED, IMPROYBD, AND ADAPTSD TO THS SVGLISH LAVOUAO^,

BY F. SALES, ^

Iiutrueter o/FrttKh tmd SpcmUh at Hanard Univartihf, Cambridge.

SECOND PART.

BOSTON :
MUNKOE AND FRANCIS, 128 WASHINGTON-STREET,

CORNER OF WATER-StRSBT.

1825.

District ChrVa OJSce,

StfiTRlCT OS XASSACBUSlTf 3, TO WIT :

District

BE it remsmbered, that on the tweDfy-ieventh day of January, A. D.
in the fi>rty-nlntfa year of the Independence of the United States of America,
MUNHOE AND FRANOIS, of the said District, have deposited in this office the
title of a book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietirs, in the words following,
to vie :

** A GRAMMAR of the SPANISH LANGUAGE, with Practical EXERCISES.
The First Part containing a list of the Abbreviations which are frequently fonnd ia
writing ; A Treatise on pronunciation and alterations in Orthography founded upon
the latest rales established by the Academy of Madrid ', tlomparatlve rules of the

ent Countries, principal Cities, and Christian Names. The Second Part containing
a Collection or Exercises interlined ; A Vocabulary, with fiuniliar Phrases and Dia-
logues } and a Treatise on Spanish Versification. By M. JOSSE. Second Ameri-
can from the latest Paris edition. Revised, improved, and adapted to the English
Language, bv F. SALES, Instracter of French and Spanish at Harvard UuWersi^,
CambrUge."

In conformity to the act of the Congress of the United States, entitled, ** An
act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts and
boolu, to the authors and proprietors of such copies, during the times therein men-
tioned :" and also to an act, entitled, *< An act supplementary to an act, entitled
an act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts,
and books, to the auUnMrs and proprietors of such co^es during the times therein
mentioned ; and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving
and etdiiog, historical and other prints."

JOHN W. DAVIS, Ckrk of tlU Dittrkt of Mat

SPANISH EXERCISES,

ADAPTED

TO THE FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES ESTABLISHED BY
THE ACADEMY OF MADRID.

WITH

References to the Bulef which are to serve for their trhnslalion ;
notes explanatory of the idiomatic differences between the two
languages, and of all the important difficulties.

KXPLANATION oftkt SIGNS vdiieh are found in, the Spanish Exerei$et.

C Feminine,
n. Neoter.
p. Plural.
Irr. Irregular.

* Tbe star denotes that the word,
■nder which it is found, must not be

Spanish under them between paren-
theses.

Two or more Englisb words put
within a parenthesis, thus, ( ) are ex-
pressed t^ the Spanish placed under
tliem.
I The gender of nouns is not laid

Idown when tbe article definite Is no^
required ; but is, however, put down,
whenever there is an a4jective or a
pronoun agreeing with the noun, inde-
pendently of any article.
_

N. B. Raving made known, in aU the Exercises, the ndes to which they r»-
late, we advise the scholar never to translate before he has read over carefully
tbe rules and examples referred to. If he consults them with attention, we feel
confident that he will easily overcome any difficulties the translating may present.

EXERCISE I.

8u Rules L and IT. and the gender of nouns 9
p. 27, 28 of the Grammar.

The man, the woman, the child, the husband,

Aom6re, m. muger^f. mno, m, marido^m.

the wife and the maid. The book, the paper,

esposa y criadayf. lihro^m, papel^m.

the pen, the ink and the penknife. The table,

plumajf. tintajt cortaphtmas, m. mesayf.

the chair, the chamber, the door and the window,

silkif f. cuartOj m. puertQj f. ventanaif.

204 SPANISH EXERCISES.

The city, the house, ^ the palace and the shop*

ciudadyf, easa^U palacio,m. tienda^f.

The country, the husbandman and the shepherd.

campOf m. hbrador, m. y pastor ^ m.

The grass, the hay, the straw and the com.

hierba,f, keno,m. paja^f, trigo^.

The sheep, the fleece, the cow, the milk and the butter.

oveja^f. . tuson^m. vaca^L leche^f. manteca^f.

The heifer, the calf and the bull. The oak, the * elm,

becerra,{. temero,m, foro, m. eiictna,f. o&io,m.

the poplar and the willow. The chesnut, the apple and

diamo, m. sduccy m. castanoy m. manzanoy m.

the pear-trees. The chesnut, the apple and the pear.

peralf m. cctstanUf f. manzana^ f. pera, f.

The cock, the hen, and the chicken. The horse,

gaUojTd. g(dltna,f, poUo^m. cahaUo^m.

the mare and the jack. The loaf, the meat, the fish,

yegna^f. a«no, m. pan^m, camef.pescado^.

the wine, the cider and die beer. The chocolate,

viito,m. cidrOyf. cerveza^i, chocolate jm,

the tea and coffee. The sugar, the salt, and the pepper.

ttym, cafiym. aziicar ym, saLf. pimienta^f.

France I Germany, Russia, Navarre, Biscay and

Francioyf. Alemaniayi, Ru8ia,L Navarra,f. VizcayayL

Andalusia. The master, (l) the mistress, the soul,

AndalttciOyf, amo,m. ama,f. ahnOyf.

the bird, the wing, the Eagle and the water,

avcy f. aUty f. dffuiMj f. agtia^ f.

Africa, Asia, (see page 195.)

EXERCISE II.

See Bule IL page 27 ; RuUs IIL and IV. page 28 ;
the two JV. B. foUowingf and Rules V. and VL
page 29.

The kingdom of France, the king of England, the
retno,m. u .r<»y,m< InglaterrayJ^

1) The foliowiojr are nearly aH the nouns that take the article
Tor la». See Ist role.

c

el ft

t

^ if Pmtogai. The fnrdvinte of NavsTfe. Hk

m'ita,f«/idforte^4i/. ^ pnmncia^i. Ndvatm, ^c^
bay of Biicaj. I (lAiall go) to Italy. Thou (wflt conns) VS

Eng^d. He (will return) to Spain. I (sball send) to

Ei 9oherd , ¥o emktrB

Catalonia. I am in the garden. He (will be) at hotne. (1)
ik^aiuna. Yo eitoy tOifanlin^Bi. El esiard <^v t .,, ^ x^
We (sball be) at tiie cellar. ^^Mr. del C^xoipa^ Madam
Nosoiro^ estarimos bodega, ff^enor O^ S&Fiora

Soils and Miss Rosas. Tlie sen^ant of ttie Count de
Senorita eriado^m, '^U-^ Candtyin.

Koroiia, and the chanibeniiaid of the ibarchlotiess de
Norona ^ ^anutreroyf, marquesUff.

Montehermoso. Sir, the €ountess is in the garden. Miss

Frances Pedreras. The biihop of Saint Andero. Mr.
Francisco. isbi$po,m. .

Francis Peredo, secretary of the consulate of tiie city of
FranCMBCo %erret9ri^ : ^oiHiulada^ m.

Saint Andero. Mr. Velasco, knight of the royal Order of
■ . cabaOero teaf Srdtinyf.

C^Hos Third, member of the supreme (2) council of
Caritfa Tertem, miemhro tupremo cmu^o^m.

Castille and of the royal academy of history. The good,
CagtUta academia^f. htsMriajt/'. bueno^n,

the useful mid the agreeable. The sweet, the sour and

ittU^ik. agradabkjtL Sukiyn. agri&^n.

the bitter.

r- *— —
X EXERCISE m.

au Mule VIIL page 81, wnd the gender of nouns tm-
siiered in regard to their terminations.

The men, the women, the children, the husbands, the
wives and the servants. The books, the pens and the pen-

(1) Id tbif phrase and others similar, the word easa neTer takel
wm artiele, Coasequentlyy we sajr : estar en cata ; ir d cata } and not
e4ar en Im cam j irala eata,

(2) Adjectives geiieraU|r follow substaatives. See p. 38*

206 gPAlflSH BZBBCISB8.

kniTes. Thexhambers, tlie tables, the chairs, the doors and '
the windows. The towns, the houses, the palaces and the
shops. The fields, the husbandmen and the shepherds.
The sheep and the cows. The heifers, the calves and the
bulls.

The oaks, the elms, the poplars and the willows.
The chesnut trees, the apple trees and the pear trees.
The cocks, the hens and the chickens. The horses,
the mares and the asses. The roses and the gilliflowers.

rosa^ f. ^ aJelij m.
The maravedis, the sous and the louis. The kingdoms

maraoed{,m. 8Ufldo,m. /tciv, m.

of France and Spain, the provinces of Normandy and
Picardy.(l) Messrs. Peter and John Pineda. My ladies de

' Pedro Juan ^^ ^^<* -^

Isla. The voung ladies Mary and Frances de Villatorre.

Uv /-*, « r^^\ Maria
The sisters of the young ladies Floridablanca. The

hermanay f. ' •

brothers of the Count de Melendez Valdes. The poem
hermano,m, """

of the Araucana, by Alphonso de Ercilla. The climates.
Jilonso c/tiRa,m.

The dogmas of religion. The epigrams *of Messrs.

dogma fia. religionyi. ^ epigrama,
John de Iriarte and Jose^ Iglesias. Truth b

Jost verdadyf. e«^

a celestial* manna.' An action worthy of praise. The
un(2) celeste mandy m. aecionj f. digno aiahanxiu
ambition of men^ The observations. The humanity
amhicionyi, chservacionyf. humanidaidff.

and generosity of ^sensible souls'. The purity of the

generosidadyf. sensible alnuiyf. purezOyi.

heart Constancy in adversity. The amiability,

corazon,m. con8tanc%a,f, en adversidadyf. amabtUdadf.

the simplicity and the goodness of Mrs. Wilson.
simplicidady f. hondady f.

jj^'p^

(1) See page 195, Rnd following^.
<3)

IJinjo always drops the o, when it is followed by a raasciiliDe
substantive. Vna^ feminine of tmo never drops any letter. (See Rule
XXV, page 48.

/

SPANISH BXBBCISitS. 20?

EXERCISE IV.

Bet the formation of the feminine of nouns adjective,
their collocation, and their agreement with the sub-
stantrve, page 38 and 39.

The climate of Spain is (1) warm. The houses

c es caliente, *a^ casa^.i.

of Paris are high. The English women are handsome.

Faris 9fm aU(iA InglesuJ mugeVyf, hermosaU,

Emulation is a passion worthy of a noble soul. Virtue is
emulacion,f. pasiouyf. dignoL jeor^^noble almaf. virtudyf.
amiable. Idleness is despicable. Bread is dear. Man
amable. perezOyf. despreciabk. panyia. caro.
is mortal. Prudence is a precious virtue. Madam Vial is

mortal pmdenciayf. > ' precioso
a charming woman. Miss Peredo is sensible, charitable,

agradabk sensible caritativo

pretty and weU educated. Holland is a rich country«^^
Undo bien criado, HolandOyf. es -< -rico jpaf«,m.

The sister of the corregidor is happy and his brother is

• corregidor^, es feliz su

unhappy. The cousin of Peter is slothful, and the niece
infeUz. prima, f, haragan sobrinaf.

of Andrew is idle. My Lord (2) the prince of Peace is

Andrts holgazan.hy:' y prindpe^. Paz.f,

a Biscayan, and my lady the duchess of Almaviva is an
• ViscainOy ^ duquesOy f. •

Andalusian. The wife of Mr. Charles Ponteverde is an
AndaJuzA esposa^i. Don *

Aragonese. The servant of the Spanish consul is an
Aragones, criadayf, EspaHol consulyijii,

Eng^h woman. The father, the mother and the
Ingles padre^m. madre^f.

children are sick. The brother and sister are idle.
ntno, m. estdn ser

The ink, the pens and the paper are dear. The window
and the door are shut The house is high, large and well
cerrado. es aUoygrande bien

(1) See Rule XLIX pa^^e 95, when we ought to translate the Terb
io he bv geff and when by estar.

(2) Bee Rule V, page 29.

20$ ^rAMISB fucsibtts^*

adorned. The garden and the parterre of the duke de

adamatb. kuertOy m. jaxUni m.

Alcodia are well cultivated. The country (t) house of

9on I * . cukivado.
the Hettfaer of Miss Louisa Alameda, is pretty but small.
Luisa es UudoLfero fegueiUx,

EXERCISE V.

Su Bides IX. X and JCL p^e S6«

The English drink beer, good wine, excellent tea, and

heh^n cervezayWenovino^,exceiente %" ^

eat potatoes. I have (2) sugar, coffee, and cream.. Bread,

comenpakita. Yo tenge azdcar^ cafi^ naiOj " t*^*-*

meat and water are things necessary to man. We have

' C09m necesario ^^ iememot

pens, paper and inki Take bread and butter of Nicolas.

plumay papely tinta^ Toma manteca Ntcolot.

X will give' you' some cherries that I have bought.

dar6 te guinduy f. que he coa^ado^

Tomorrow I (shall make) visits : I (shall go) to see some

manafka hark risita ir6 a vera

friends. Mr. Augustin Vial has* lent' me 'some books.

euHigo^m. Don j4gu8tin ha prestado me Ubra^.

The father of Miss Puente has good friends and

*^ SenoHta amigOj m,

eiKcellent protectors. The iriend of Madam Torres
e9ce(finifi protector amigOy f.

gives wise and prudent advice to your sister. I have
da sabio prudente cont^o tu tengo

white stockings,, blue shoes, and a grey hat
bUmeo mediaft ofcul zapato,m. pardo ^ombreroy m.

()> Th« word c9U»fry it pai$, ftnd U rjMi4erc4 bj flwyaAa omiy
wh«Q we speak o/ the great extent of level, open country ; and when
it relates to troopg and armies ) in the other casew it is rendered bjr
eampo. We say tlien a country house, una eata de eampo. The
fields are rich, tanrieoa ht compos,

(2) The verb <o hav4 is rendered by tener whenever it denotes the
possession of an object, and by haber vchen it is an auxiliary, ge^
the noU9 to the conjugation of these two ver^ pages ^ and 8fi.

SPANISH BXERCISBS.

EXERCISE YL

See Ruks XU, XIU, XIV, XV, XVI and XVII,

pages 39, 40, U, 42.

The brother of Charles Martinez de Irujo, Secretary
<^ A,. . :,, r cUJ^mCwtIos SecretaHo

of the embassy to London has a pretty little country
o*s i embctjada,f, en ^.^.'i)cj tiene ^^'^^<- ^'«^ '« cL - 'o
bouse, and the son of his Excellency (1) my lord the
Marquis del Campo has a little parrot and a pretty little

papagayo, m.

cage. This young gentleman is weU educated. I have

jaula,f. * criado, tengo

some litde birds and a pretty litde squirrel. Mr. D. i$

an ugly little man and his wife is an ugly little woman.

8u eaposa
Peter is more wise and more prudent than John ; but less

Bohio prudente Juan

ingenious than he. Mr. de Casa Nueva is richer than his

hdhil 61 . ^

cousin, but his cousin is not so proud as (2) he. The

primo, m. orguUaso

city of LondoQ is more populous than that of Paris.

LondreB poblado la

The streets of London are wider than those, of Madrid.

eatte, f. ancho las

He is more lasy than his brother. I am more tranquil
perezoso Estoy tranquilo

here than in the garden. She is not so happy as her
aqui . *^

sister. Madam CostiUas is not so old as Madam Delpuente.

^■^(j viefo
What a lai^ woman ! what a large, ugly man f The
que

(1) Hit exeelleney my lord cannot be jhranslated literally in Spanish:
translate as if it was the tMst ezeeUent lord and say el eseelentisimo
tenor — and add Don when the christian name of the person is ez«
pressed.

(2) See in the graramat, after Rule XIV, page 40, the note relative
to the manner of traatlatinc m in the different degrees of comparison.

18»

210 SFANISIt BXBBClBlSS.

Spanbh soldier is not less brave than the Tu^k. Tlie
Biscayans and die Cat^nians are brave and (1) intrepid.
rizeainos Caiahm^ m. hUripido

You are as lively as he. He is as learned as his eldest^
2\i eres vivo H v. ... docto^^ ■■> - mayor

brother.*

EXERCISE Va

UpofK the preening Rules.

Mary is 10 an^ble as her sister. We are as poor as
^^ -' 8omo8 pcbre

they. They are as rich as thy fath^. I have as. many
Mis EUoa ma iengo

IKeods as thoiK £2) She has as many admirers as
f6* , BUa adoradoTjin,

formerly. Thy brol!her has as many books as L Thjir
ttfi^ft.

brother has more children than thou. We have more
pleasuMS than labour. They have more than ten
diversion tralbqfd tienen "^"^j ^^ A*«5

giuneas. (3) I have written more dian ten letters (to-day.)
guiniai he eserito ^' - fyurta. hoy

My brother is more than twenty years old* I am not

tener veinte aiio •

more Haaa twelve years okf. Thou hast less pride than

doee • orguBa

they. Thou art not sio(4)tal^as¥. Peter is not so old as
e^o0' abo '"' -t viejo '*

hiB &ieiic|. He does not eat less meat than bread. He

• come

drinks less water than wine. Red wine is less agreeable
hthe tinto , agradibJe

le the taste than white. This \Mb chamlier is prettier

gusto, m. bianco, m. Este cuarto

than mine. This small apple is better than the others.
mantuma, f. oiro.

.^,Sce Ra^ IXIV, page 1^.

(2) As many, before a siibstpuiUve U rendec«4 bf thfi «li»€.tit«
ttmie-a^os^as. See Rple XVIf^pag^e 42.
<3) See the N. B. of Rule XV, page 41.
(4) See the coUocatioB of the negation, page 159.

SPANISH BXKftCMBS. Sll

We have . not so much fruit in our garden this year ag

tenemo9 Ul^Cu. fruia,f/i^ ette ano

last year. Mr. B. has not so aiuch wit as the Countess de
ititima ingenioj m.

la Puebla. I have less money than the Marquis of D. ;

dinero fc v
iMit I Itave as much honour and not less rel^on than he.
honor ^xn. religion tL

The garden and parterre of the Marquis de Mondejar,
knight of the royal order of Charles Third, are larger
eaballero r^al Srden^t Tercero son

than ours, (l) The wine of Mr. V. is bad, but that of

nmeHro. mdlo il

Mrs. P. is worse. Peter studies as much as his brother,

estudia
and makes greater progress than he. Miss Sophia Mar-

hoM progresa 9<. e Sofia

tines talks much more than her sister Frances, but her

kMamucha ^ ^ ' fuc Frandtea

sister talks better than she.

EXERCISE Vin.

(^Hnuatt9nofthe degrees of Comparison. — Ree Rules
Xir, XV, XVI, XVII, XVIII and XIX, and the
J^.B. of Rule XVIH, pages 40, 41, 42, 43.

The- hay sleep more and do not work as^ much as the
/. \ 4uermen -^ y *' trabajan ;
diligent I translate better English into French than
diUgente^ traduzco^^ ">- ei V"

French into English. (2) The French dance better than
el * baikn

the Spaniards. The Biscayans, the Andalusians, and the

wAndahiz, m.
Catalonians are excellent soldiers» and pass for the best,
^ ■ soldado pasan por

(1) Seetb« N.B. of Rule Xl¥, p«m41.

^> !» th'M pbra«e the adj«€ti?es English and French nUhwagh they
are mad. as subMantivM, take tbe nuM«aUae article which agreea
witb the word fdiama which i« understood. (See the reviark feUow-
iiiff the declention 9S tkm mma mmttvp, page 84.)

212 SPANISH XXBRCUBSS.

the most courageous and the most faithful in the kingdom.

vaieroao leal de (1)

The Spanish mountaineers are very strong and ahnost all
numtafiesy m. Juerte ceai todo

very tall. Lille, capital of French Flanders, is a v^

aUo. Ula capital FlandeBj f.siag,

handsome city. The new house of the Spanish consul is

nuevo consul

very large and very weU ornamented. The youngest

adomado. menar

sbter of Mr. Henry Milboume is very pretty and veiy

Don Enrique

amiable. Jdm's cousin speaks very correcdy and writes

primo^. habla corredamente e»crti6e

very elegantly. Lying b tlie most abject of all vices.

elegantemente, Meniiraf. bajo otcto^m.

The marquis de la Roja is my best friend and your most

mi tntestro

cruel enemy. The Luxembourg was not the least pleas-
cruel enemigo, lAtxemburgo

ant of the walks in Paris. The wise man will' always act'

paaioym. * siempre ohrard

very prudently. My brother studies the history of Eog-

estudia hietortOy f.
land as often as he can. The dog is a very &ithful (2)

puede.
animal, and perhaps the most faithful of all animals.
animaly m. quizd

Your sister is very amiable, and a very good woman (S)
Vuestro

The servant of my (brother-in4aw) is very strong.
criadoy m. cunado

EXERCISE IX.

See Rules XX, XXL XXII, XXIII, XXIV, and the

preceding, pa^e 44.

The good employment of time is one of the things that
empleo, m. tiempo, m.

(1) In after the superlative is translated by de, del, tU la, &c.

(2) The superlative absolute of fiel is irrejnilar, it is AiiUdmo

(3) See the N. B. 2d. of Ruk XVUI, pagels. ' ^««»««-

arAKua sxcKcnssi 218

eaMrilwte Most (1> to the hupiness •of man. Tte

coniribuyen tUcha, f.

amateurs dsjr that Mr. de la Motte is one of tiioge who

afidonadojfD* aicen los que

have labcm^ed most lor the academy of Music, Francis

han trtthfado para academiayf. mimcayi.

it the most learned man in the city, and PhiUp the most

inetruido de
(9) ignorant man in the kingdom. Temperance renders

ignoranie de SobriedadyL kace

the most sunple food very agreeable. The most innocent
fimple (dimeniOym. agradable. tnoeente

pleastires are always the most pore and the ipost constant.
piacerym. son siempre puro * consiante.

The daughter of the Count de Colomera is the hand-

«omest woman in Macfaid. The most harhareui nations.

de Madrid. barbaro pueblo^.

The most just commandment. Charles is one of the most

jueto mandamenio^. Carlos es
Jearned men in Paris. He is my best friend. Socrates
was one of the most enlightened philosophers of his
era instruido Jil68ofo,m, su

century. Peter, Paul and Antony are three good children,
aiglo. Fablo Antonio.son trea muchacho,m.

but Antony is the best of all. Mr. B. is the most prudent
man that I have se^n. (3) The cousin of the Cardinal
\'4tvt visto Cardenai

de Lorensana is the most learned man that has appeared
dodo parecido

«t Rome. Miss.Villegaa is more amiable than I thought
en Roma. dehque creia

(4.) The flatterer is always more dangerous than he
C aduU{orym* , peligrtMO dehque

appears. Ingratitude will always be the vice the most
parece, Ingtotitudj f * sera

unworthy of a well-bred and sensible man. The Count
indigno nacido sensibk*

•••" I " • ' ' . « Ml. Ill

(1) See Rnle XXIIF, page 44.

(2) See Rule XXI, pag^ 44.

(3) See Rule XXU, page 44.

(4) See Rule XX. page 44.

214 " SPAHISH BXSBCinS.

de Fenun-Nnfiez is the man whom I esteem the most,

Nunez estimo *

and Mis. A. is the woman whom I respect the least.

rcspetOf
The richer a man is, the more he desires to be so. The

desea f terlo,
lazier he (shall he J the more ignorant will he be. The
perezoao 9erd ignoranie • terd.

shorter time is, the more precious it is. The more
breve precioso

scarce a thing is, the dearer it is. The more just and
raro justo

beneficent a prince b, the more faithful are the subjects ;
henifico • -. t7aa«tfo,m.

and the more faithful the subject is, the more constant

contiimie
and secure b the happiness of the kingdom.
seguTO 69 dicha, f.

EXERCISE X.

See the numeral adjectives^ and Rule XXF, as well as
the J\r.B. which relate to itf from page 48 to 50.

I have only one sister, four brothers, one uncle, five aunts
J^^(> tioym. tia

and eight nieces. France was, before the revolution
sobrina era, antes de revolucion^,

(that b), before the new division decreed by the
^^to es nuevo division f, decredato par

national assembly divided in regard to religion,
nacional asambUaf, divididoL en cuanlo religion, f.

into eighteen archbbhoprics, and subdivided into one hun-
*» arzobispado subdividido *

dred and twelve bishoprics. In regard to the civil
obispado civil

administration, it was divided into thirty-two governments
administracion^* era <. . - gobiemo

or provinces. In regard to justice it was divided into four
provtncia justicia^f.

SPANISH EXBKCISBS. 215

great councils and thirteen parliaments. (Tbere were) then

consejo parlamento habia entonceB

in France thirty-nine academies and literary societies ;

academia literario

fifteen in the north, eight in the middle, and sixteen in the

norte^ m. centroy m.

south. The academies of Paris, which were the principal

mediodia^m, principal

ones, were seven (in number,) (1) the French academy,

the academy of Inscriptions and Belles-Lettres, the academy

incripcion, f. letrat, f.

of Sciences, the academy of Painting and Sculpture, the
ciendoy f. pintura^ f. escuitura, f.

academy of Architecture, the academy of Surgery, and the

arquitecturay f. cirugia

academy of Writing, llie French revolution commenced in

escriiuruy f. principid

one thousand seven hundred and eighty-nine* The king-
dom of France was the most ancient of all the modem
era antiguo tnodemo

States. It commenced in the year four hundred and

utado, m. *

twenty, and* (there are reckoned in it) sixty-seven kings :
se cuentan en il rey^ m.

the first was Pharamond, and the ^ast Louis the iSftsteenth.
The large house next mine, is not new. Saint rgnatius,(2)
vecino mio ' Ignado,

founder of the Jesuits was a Spaniard.
fimdador Jesuita^. era *

EXERCISE XL

Continuation of the preceding rules and of the Al B,
which relate to them.

Louis the fourteenth was one of the greatest kings of.
^< iUi.. fui '

France, and merited the epithet of Great. Peter the
mereciS epitetOj m.

(1) Initead of exprestiiig m numbtr^ translate thit phrase as if it
wai seren only ; and saj, eron ntie.

(2) I capital is always written J in

31tS $fh»iMB UMBOISBS.

fint cur or cttperof of . jRussift^ was a matbematicjaii^

^ czar <•' mperador Ruma ♦ nuaemaHco,

a philowplwr, a gr^.gencfal, aa wcellente adrnwd, a
* msofo • • ., fltotiroiUc, ♦

prormmd polili<iiaii, an kktomn, pllo^ architect ;
tiwi^e politico^ • hUtoriador^ filoto^ arquitecto,
ia a word, he was a rar| geniiis, a wonderful gemas.
ai ana paiabra ingenio, m. porieniosQ

Ciovis first, fifth kklg of France^ aad the first christka
c^ ; cmtuxno

Hue, hegan to ««» towards the ead of the yaar «c«
principi6 6 reinar cerca del fn, ^t. -^«i ^n.
hundred and eighty one: he reigned thirty y«»s. Of
eJl the reigns of the kings of France, the longest ha^
reinado,m. i»ip X^-^-

1)0611 that of Louis fourteenth, the sixty filUi king: it

lasted seventy two years. Charles fifth was
wtwro ■* • * I .■ ■

contemporary of Francis first, king of France,and the pope
cnntemporaneo Francisco papa,m.

Sixtus fifth was tha< of die great Henry fourth. George
Srsto lo era *^ge

third, king of England,was crowned in* Westminster ahhey'
fu6 coronado abadia^t

the twei<y-second of September one thousand seven hun-
dred and sixty one. James second,,, banished to France,

' "^ Santiago > <*desterrado

died the sixth of August one thousand seven hundred and one.
murid Agosto *

I received on Monday last (1) a letter fi-oto my firiend Mr.

^f ♦ lunes tf cartajiJ^-^ i ' ^^- '

Abel ; it was delayed fifteen days, sfee the date of it (2) :

• oBtrasado de ved ^

Paris, twenty-second of June one thousand eight hundred and

ii ^ •• , • ■ *' Junto rrU.vM« f'- \y

three. What o^chtk is it ?(S) Sir, h is devefi, or three

Que ! ■ ,'■ ■ . ^^>^ '•'--«:

(1) The names of the ^eek Uke the article, then wt must say : el
Umt» AiHm», or patado,

(2) OfU must not be translated, or we lAust torn it by tie, which
corresponds to its in English.

(3) See the JV.B. 4th and 601 of Kile XXV . page 48.

SPANtSH KXERCI8KS. 217

quarters past eleven. (Give me) my watch^ it is twelve

cuarto ♦ Dame (1) '>^j'ii

o^clock and you said it was but (£) eleven. Where wast

iib decias EndondeestaboM.

thou at ten o'clock ? I was at home. (3) Well^ return

^ 0'i^<' L \;/'C'tu <':i f.'..^'A Bien vuelve

at one o'clock. Sir, it is one o'clock. I know it : go to

/^'' »»^»'t ^> ''<. uv.a Yo »l* ?o* i?l/e(4)

Mr. Arco's and (tell him) Uiat I expect him here at nine

dile /«»; espero^ h' (zqui d
o'clock in the morning, or at four o'clock in the afternoon.

de U mananQyLo de tarde.

He (will tell) thee no doubt whether he can come in the

dird* te* sin duda . si puede venir

morning or in the evening. (5) ', ' .

EXERCISE Xn.

On the pronouns personal and possessive, and on the
auxiliary verbs seb and bstar^ to be ; haber and

TEN EB, to have.

• " k .
See in the Grammar the declension of these pronouns,
page 51 and following, 57 and following ; the conjugation of
the auxiliary verbs, page S2 and following ; the obervations
on haber and tener at the beginning of their conjugation, and
Rule XLIX relative to the different uses which must be
mad^ of ser and estar^ to be ; page 95.

(1) Dome is the compoundl of the verb and pronoon : it is the same
with viie and dile. Custom has willed, that whenever the pronoun
governed by the verb, is put after it, it should be joined to the verb.
Instead then of writing, da m«, di le, we write dame, df/e, it happens
even very frequently that two pronouns are joined to the same verb
as in these phrases : send it to me, envitmelo ; I wish to tell it to
you, quUro decbitlo.

(2) Translate HuAitwatlna, as if it was, ^A ^ vm o/tdy, qae
einsn m2o.

(3) See Rule III, page 26.

14) To JUr. Arco*s, is, d la casa del StiUtr Areo, . ^

(§) Par la maiUMa op&r la tarde.
19

218 SPANISH BXBKCISES.

N. B. We place the objective pronouns after the exer-
cises on the three regular conjugations, persuaded that the
scholar will find less difficulty in them after having familiar-
ised himself with the auxiliaries and regular verbs.

In/initive.

To have a new coat. To be tall, short, fat, Jeaa.

vetiido^m. aUoj pequeno, gorda^fimco.

Having good friends, good patronage (l). Having bem out

t protecionyU f. .. udfjkera

of temper. To be sick or well (2). To have been

humor, ' - «''•*• X- . .^g>/;^

indisposed. To be occupied. To have genius. To be
indispuesto. ocupadoi " ingenio,

vnse, prudent^ anu^Ue. Having had patience. Having been

paciencia, >;<

Consul of the French republic.' To have been a Senator.

• Senador.
To be Corregidor of the City of Cadiz. To be in the

Cmregidor -^ c.^ c.

country. To have been all day at home,
coinpo, m. '' «^*. ..^

Indidetive present

I have a book of geography and one of mathematics (3).

g^ografia matemdticay siag.

I am very happy, and my brother is very unhappy. We

have excellent wine and they have no beer. You were

eerveza.
diligent last year and now you are lazy. They have a large

ahora
garden (4) and many flowers ; they are very weH cultivated.
jardirij m. , fiory f. cuUivado.

Thou haat more money than T, but j have more goods
dinero pero , mercaderia

than thou. Thou art more learned than thy brother, but thy
brother is less proud than thou.

(1) See Rule XI. page 36. , T) , *^:' /^.

(2) See Rule XLIX. page 96. ' "^ ^'.

(3) See Rule XXY: page 48,

(4) See Rnle XXV. part 3, p4^ 48.

SPANISH EXBBCISES. 219

EXERCISE Xra.

Imperfect.

I had and I have still the works of the hest Spanbh
. ^^.,fi ";■ : . toalavia obra, f. • >

authors. Thou hadst the grammar and ^dictionary of the
autOTy m. gramdtica^ f. diccionarioy m.

academy ; thou wast well pleased. We had abo the
academiayf, contento. r. tambien

(poetical works) of the Count de Noroiia and Mr. John Melen-

poesiOy f. Norona Don

dez Valdes, the two best modem ^:; Spanish' poets. *^

Preterite definite^

Thou wc^t very well satisfied with the poem of the Count

^« ^^uv satiafecho de poema^ m.

ie Norona on death, and with the odes of Anacreon by

sobre muerte,f. de oda, f. Anacreon por

Melendez Valdi§s : they are truly excellent^ poetry. We

• . verdadercunente
had fine weather yesterday. Thy cousin had a rich
^v:-^t w/ beUo ' " . oyer, primoym.r^

present. My brothers and sisters were charitable ; they

preMenteyTa.-^ /* caritativo ;

had compassion on the unfortunate. My mother (was in
compasion de tener

trouble) last week, she was very sad ; we pitied her.
peeadumbre tener Idstimade

Preterite indefinite,

I have had much^ vexation, and I have been very sick.
Thou hast had three masters^ (1) and thou hast been weH
instructed. They have had (a great deal of) money. They
instruido mucho dinero.

have been prodigal. My neighbour bajs been very sick.
prSdigo vecino

(1) MoMtetj used to signify a man who has people dependent
upon him, a landlord or master of a house or an estate, miist be
translated by amo or ducfio ', but when it expresses the idea of a
man who teaches tome art or science, th«D it is rendered by fnaefTro

220 SPANISH SXEBCISS8.

Preterite anterior.

When I had been fifteen days in the town of BUboiC

f*« <'. Bilbao,
When we had had our passport When the wine had been an

pasaporfej m.
hour in the bottle.^ (As soon as) you had been a month
boteHoym' Luigoque meSypa*

at Paris. (As soon as) he had had his money.
en Lmego que .. c

EXERCISE XIV.

Pluperfect

I had had a reward for diligence, and thy brother had
premio^. de diUgencia
had the first reward for memory. My master (1) had been

de memoria,
satisfied with me ; I had been diligent and attentive. Thy
Qotisfecho de ixtento.

brothers and thy sisters had been studiq^ts^ they had had

eeiudioio
priuses. We had been rash. Thou hadst had much bold-
elogio. temerario,

ness» They had been timid. We had had good motives.
timido. moiivo.

Future aJbsohUe.
Our cousins will have to-morrow pens and good paper,
they will be occupied. My sister and I will be diligent. We
shall have friends. The English will always be good

siempre
seamen. The French will perhaps never be as powerful as
marinero quizd jamas poderoso

they on the sea ; but they will^ always be^more' so' on land.
por ♦ mar ; mas lo por tierra.

Thou wilt be taller than thy friend Francis, but thy friend

aUo
will be more fleshy than thou.
gordo

(1) See the note in the preceding^ page.

0f ANISH EXEKasas. 221

Future anterior,

I shall have had my books. Thou wih have b^en happjF.

feiiz.
We shall have been more civil. The enemies will not

civil.
have been victorious ; they will not have had any success ;
victorioso ; mceso ^

they will have been conquered. General B. will have been

vencido.
victorious. You will have had generals/ commanders, in a
victorioso. comandante^

word, courageous and intrepid chiefs, and you vill have

intrtpido gefe^
been yourselves valorous and invincible.

invencihU.

EXERCISE XV.

See Ride XXXIX. and XL. p. 76. Future conjunc-
tive simple and future conjunctive compound.

Ifl have mone^, they (will rob me of it.) (1)' I am sure
I:, . ' ,. me lo rohardn , *-'■'-

that if I have patience, I shall have succesS. Thou wilt be

paciencia^ ■*/ .
rewarded if thou art attentive, ijfthe war t> long, many
recompensado guerra^f. largo,

towns will be destroyed. If the enemy has the imprudence
arruinado. imprudenciaJL.

to put his threats in execution, he will be vanquished, if
deponer amenaza egecucion, vencido,

you are all, in the moment of attack, faithful to your

moTnentOy m. ataqueyva. fiel
prmce, to your country, to the laws of honour. I (shall obtain)

patria tey^f- honor ^m. lograri

the pardon of my fault, (as soon as) my uncle shall have*

perdonyfCk. culpa j luegoque tio

solicited* it."
soHcitar lo.

■ ■ ' ■ ■ ■ 1 '

(1) la thii phrase and others similar, we put in the second Aiture,
mf the verb soTeraed by tiie ooDJuoetion.

19* m'

222 SPANISH XXERGISSS.

Firstf second, and third conditionals present. See
JRiUes XU. XLIL XLUI. XLIV. and XLV. pa-

ges 77 and 78.

I should have better patronage than thy friend. You

proteccion

would have more schdars if you were more learned.

discipulo instruido.

Their father would be happier if he was less avaricious.

avaro.
Man would be less unhappy if be was less ambitious. Thou

ambicioso.
wouldst not be sick if thou wast more prudent. Who

quien
would have believed that the war would have lasted ten

crddo durado

years ? It would be just that he should be severely

* justo severamenie

punished. Your children would not be so ignorant if they
castigado. ignorante

were more studious. Although we should have peace, I

estndioso. Aunque pazy

(should not jgo) to England. I should be better (1) (/* I

no iria
was in the country. They would be more active if they

activo
loere younger.
j6ven.

EXERCISE XVI.

On the first, second, and third conditionals present and
past. See BuUs XLI. XLIL XLIIL XLIV. and
XLV. pages 77 and 78.

The day would have been much finer, if the sun had not

soly m.
been so hot. The writings of Voltaire would have been
ardiente. ohra, f.

(1) To ht wtU or ill, is translated as if it was to be good or bait
titar bueno, utar maio ; and to bt better j estar mejor.

SPANISH EXERCISES. 223

generally admired if they had contained a wiser and
genercUmente admirado si contenido

more religious philoscmhy. If the works of Rousseau were

religioso fihaofiay f. ohra^ f.

more moral^ they would be less dangerous, and would not

A ' '^- peligrosOj

have done (so much) harm. If your husband twwr less

causado tanto mal,
violent and less jealous, you would be happier, if men
vioUnto celosoy

were not so unjust, the number of the unfortunate would not

injusto, n&mero
be so great. The effects of the revolution would not have

grande.
been so cruel, if the depravity of manners had not been

depravacionf. costumbrtsf.
so great in England, tf licentiousness had not been (so much)

licencia^ f. tan

countenanced, if irreligion had not been so general (1). If
favorecidOf irreUgion, f. general.

the Spanish language, if its beauties, its riches, were more

languoy f. bellezay rigueza^

known, the literature of this country would have more
conocidOf . literaturay f. pais, m. k ^ .

amateurs. If your brother was better informed than you
aficionado. fut

last year (2), it was your fault (3). The miser would

avaro^.
never be contented (f he had not in his coffers treasures to

cofre tesoro para
feed his insatiable cupidity.
aHmentar insaciable eodida.

(1) S€e Rule XLV. p. 78.

(2) See the N. B. Ist, following Rule LXV. page 79.

(3; It, cannot be tranglated in this phrase ; therefore say, era
culpa vuetlra.

224 SPANISH EXERCISES.

EXERCISE XVU.

Imperattve,(i)

Have, my friends (2), patience and perseverance. Let

paciencia perseveranda.

him have a good dictionary and a grammar better than yours.

dicdonariOf m. gramdtica^ f. • ^ « ^-f '*' '

Let them be less lazy. Let the virtuous man be rewarded^

virtuose recompensado

let the wicked man be punished. (3) Let us have prudenoe

castigado. prudencia

and wisdom. Let your brother be more discreet, and let

gabiduria, diacreto

them have more prudence. Have pity on the poor and

. Idgtima de pchre,m.pL
unfortunate. Be good, charitable and beneficent.
caritativo herUfico,

Sul^unctifse present.

That I may have riches.(4) That I may be generous. That
Que
I may not be ambitious. Although we may not be avaricious.

ambicioso. avnque
(In order that)' he may have servants^ and that he may tot

para que
be unhappy. In order that our enemies may not have
any partizans in this country, and that we may be victorious.

* partidario este
Although our troops may have excellent officers. In order

tropaSff. oficiaL

that we may all be friends of our king and of our country.

patria^f,

(1) See the note to the GonjugRtion of the aaxiliary verb habtr.
p. 82 of the grammar.

(2) See Rule XXXI, p. 60.

(3) In English, when the verb is in the third person of the impe>
ratiire, and has a noun for its nominative, this noun always precedes
it ; on the contrary in Spanish, it is alwajs placed afttr tb« verb ;
Ex. write ; sea el hombre virtyofo, 4t*

(4) See Conjunctionsy page 194.

SPANISH EXERCISES. 225

Be not so negligent. (1) Be not a slanderer. Have no

* maldiciente.
{Hride. Be not impious*
orguUo. impio.

ImperfecL
That I might have friends. Although the Count de Na-
ranja might not be prodigal. That their children might not

ser prddigo,
be libertine. Before your father and your uncle had a

cUsohfo antes que
garden. Before thou wast at Madrid. That the kingdom
of England might not be in danger. Before the traitors
estar peUgro. traidor^^

were arrested ; before they were in prison. (2)

cdrcely f.

EXERCISE XVin.

Preterite,

Although I Tuxoe had the pleasure of • . • Before your father

guBto^m.

has had news from your mother. Before he has been ill treated.

noticiOj maltratado.

I do not believe that the marchioness de Angosse has ever been

creo que
pretty, nor that her daughter has ever been ugly. Your sister

feo
is very gay, although she has been sick (so long.) Miss de

alegre ianto tiempo,

Costillas has been very amiable, before she hashaid (so many)

dntes que
admirers. The number of wise and virtuous men is very
adorador. n(imero,m. sabio virtuoso

small, although they have edways been esteemed.
reducidOf estimado.

Pluperfect,
If I had had good wine, I should not have been so sick.
Although the war had been very long, the peace lasted hut
antique largo paz,f, durS

(1) See Rule XLVI. p. 80.

(2) In prison must be translated as if it was in the prison.

226 SPAmSR BXERCI8E8.

one year. (1) Your children were not very good yesterday^

although they had been punbhed the day preceding. Yonr

castigar dia^,precedente.
nephew was very ignorant before he had been at the
MobrinOjTo, antes que en

university.
umverndadyf.

EXERCISE XIX.

ON THE REGULAR VERBS.

Indicative present, imperfect, preterite definitCf preter-
ite inai^nitet preterite anterior and pluperfect.

I speak to men of my country. Thou answerest thy father.
hitblar pai8,m. responderd

He (comes up) to (2) speak to his master, (3) We wiH

subir
speak of the revolution of Constantinople. We wiU answ^
ine Marquis de jas Rojas. You taU my son and my daugh^

Udmar
ter ; (4) but they refuse to come up. I fasted, last year,

rehusoT de ayunar

iBvery Friday. I drank nothing hut w9XeTj and thou fearedst
fodos los viemes. beber temer

that I should be sick. (5) He allowed his ^children g^mes

permitir a , j^cgo

of exercise and dexterity. The governor of the City of

egercido destreza. gobemador^m.

Cadiz supped yesterday with the Commissary of the Navy.(6)

cenar Comisarioym. *

We pretended that the Corregidor was sick ; but to-day I
pretender hoy

(1) Bvi, taken in th« sense of onlj/f b translated into Spaiush by
nlo or «otomen/e, or by no placed before the yerb and n'no placed
after this same Terb. See p. 165 of the grammar, what rdates to it.

(2) Set on the preporitiotu the rules which relate to por and para,
page IGO and following of the grammar.

(8) See exercise XIII, page 219, note 1 .
(4; See Rule LVI, page 164.

(5) See Rule LIV, page 153.

(6) The article the cannot be translated in this phrase : we say,
el comisario de marinoj de guerraf and not dc la marina, de la guerra.

SPANISH EXEKCISB8. 227

am sufe that he is well, (1) that he jadged yesterday a

seguro juzgar

criminal and sentenced him to be whipped* I bought
reo,m, condenar a azotar. comprar

yesterday two dozen of pears, and we have- eaten theip

docena pera^ comer

already. John, why hast thou breakfasted so latQ? Sir,

ya porque almorzar tarde?

(it was) eight o'clock when I took my cup of chocolate* (2)

eran tomar chocolate.

Thou frigbtenedst me when thoii knockedat at my door. (3)

espaniar cuando
My father was very well satisfied with me when he had

de
qK>ken to my masters, and he rewarded me. We had dined,

recompensar corner^

sung and danced when Miss Peredo arrived. We had
etmtar bailar Uegar,

promised to write to my aunt. Messrs. Isla and Valdes had
prometer de eseribir tia*

procured an excellent place for a son of Madam de L^ari^a.
procurar empleo Madama

EXERCISE XX.
Rule XXXIX. and XL. pg,gtl%..

Fubtre ahtohtt^ future anterior, fiUure conjwnciive simple^

and fiiture coT^nctwe cwnpound.

If the next winter, is as cold as the last, the popr will

k , '^ inmemoym, frio iUtimOy.

suffer very much. We will remedy the evil if it m possible.

pade^sK . remediar mal^xn. * posible,

Shalt thou not sell (4) thy wine this year ? He will shear

vender esquilar

(1) See exercise XV, page 222, note 1.

(2) Cup^ tpeakiog of chocolate ig translated by gffioarw and not by
taza,

(3) To knock at the door is translated by llamar d la puerta and
not by pegar d la puerta,

(4) In interrogative phrases, when the nominative of the verb is
one of the personal pronouns, the pronoun is suppressed in Spanish ;
and in conversation the isCenrogation is caused to be understood by
the inAexion of the voice.

228 8FAN18R EXKRCISBS.

bis riieep (in the) beginning of the sprii^. Thy father

ovefa^ph al principioy primavera,f,

has assured me that, t/thou (Mrt diligent and stttdieti mth
ase^urar ^'^' < estudiar cen

attention, thou shalt have the gold watch that he has prom-
aUneion, - ' wo rehj^m.

ked thee« The physician has advised me (not to) go out

niidicOym. aconaejar deno saUr

to-morrow, if the sun is as hot as it has been to-day. I shall
mnnana^ 9ol^. ardiente lo hoy

speak to your sister, when she shaU have received the vi^

* . I". ' • recibir vi^iiajL
and the good advice of her aunt We shall not omit, intlidb ^

consefoyXa. ("^ omtHr

critical circumstance, (anything) that prudence, duty and
eritico circuHsianciayf, nada deloque obligacion^

honour shaU prescribe (to us) for the safety of our countiy.
Aoiior,m. prescribir nos pcura seguridadyt
They will write (to me) all that shaU happen (to them}

escribir me todohque acontecer fes
while I shaU be absent. Thou wilt do, my child, all that
nUentras ausenie. hards

thy masters shaU command thee ; thou (wih be silent) when

^ ' mandar caUar

they shaHweak (1) and thou wilt answer when they shtii
Question thee. If thou breakfasteist to-morrow with the
mterrogar

Marqub de las Estrellas, thou wilt not forget,^ I hope, to

olmdoTy h esperar de
iqieak of my law-suit. Tell Mr. Joseph Mor de Fuentes

pieitOym. Di a Don
tfAen thou shalt meet him, that I wish to write to his son,

encof^ar desear^escribir ,

but I (don't know) where he lives.
ignorar donde vimr.

(1) See Rule XL. pasfe76.

EXERCISE XXI.

See Budts XLT, HJT, XLBI, XLIV and XLV, and

the JV. B. IsUand 2d. pages 77, 78, 79^ 80.

fVrs^, seqond and tMtd con^itionah prese^^ cmd pa^t.

If man ^Qccufied himself (l) alitde.more ^th .his own

Qcup^rse unpoco de propip

affairs, and meddled a little lass mttt those (cfothere), l^

ftegodo^. meterse (2) ageno (3)

would live happier. Jf fxien ("^ave tkemeelvea up) less to

mvtr 0fUregar9e

^faeir passions, if the^ would (suffer themsehes to be)

paxkmy d^arse

persuaded more by the counsels of reason ai^ of- viitije} if
persuadir mas cowejojux* rozim^t

they respected as they opght, >the sacsed xights of
refipectar como J» deber sagrfudo derecko^.

i>i innocence, in jk wordf^if they respected themselves, the

inocen^a/. en unapaiffbra r^espetarse dsi mismos
manners would not be so corrupted, the victims of crime
costumbre^. corromper , vict^ma^. crimen^,

would not be in so great a number, and the most ciktting
en * ndmero agudo

remorse t^ovlli not torment their souls. (4) The archbishop
of Toledo permitted yesterday the Countess de Almaviva

Toledo
and her cyidren4o take in ibis gdrden whatever tbey|>feas-*

hijo detomor
ed. (5) If I'wrqte the revolii^pn^pf Algiers, if I jpcun^ec? its

pintar
injustices, its cruelties and its horrors under the reign oi
infusiidaf crueldad horror en reit^dq

(1) JUle XLII, p. 77.

(2) ' To meddle mih istca^fUUiM as if H was to put^onKfi^i^h ^con-
sequently with thou must be rendered by en lot,

(jd) (Mhen is rendere«l in Spanish by ageno,'af*otyitt, whicb, as an
adjectiye, agrees with, tbe siibsUntiTe to whi^b ,it nlaitf. (€ke pro-
noons indefinite, p. 66. of the rrammar.)

(4) Role XUI. p. 77.

i9) Role JUcV. Pago 78^ to plMsej gmter.

230 SPANISH XXSRCISK8.

the cannibal Roland, I should uu colours as black

anirap6fago,m, Rolando twar(l) color negro

as was bis soul. I should esteem Mr. B. if he loved more

lo €stimar(2)

hb wife, if he treated her with more attention and kindness,
tratar la con atencion bondad

and if he loved himself (3) a little less. Who would ever

si amarse d si nnsmo Qtaeit

have imagined^ before having seen it, that Cesar would

pensar dntes de haherlo visto Cesar

have perished by the hand of Brutus. (4) It wotdd he

muerto de Bruto. *

good and useful (5) that all governments should protect

atil gobiemojm. proteger

the arts and sciences. If I was rich, if I wajs powerful,

arte, f. dencia, poderoso

I would fly to the assistance of aH those who implored my

volar socorroy m. los que implorar

assistance. (6) He promised to lend me all the books
asistencia. deprestarme (7)

that he should buy. K the French were brave before the

comprar, eran antes de

revolution (8) they are not less so now.

h

EXERCISE XXII.

^ee RuU XLVII. XLVUL page 81.

Imperaiive^ present^ impsffect^ preieriie and pluperfet^

of the subjunctive.
My friends, the enemy threaten you ; show who you
amenazar os; mostrar

(1) Utar takes the preposition de ; say then, de eoloret,

(2) See Rule LV[,pagc 164. ^ u -..

(3) In this same phrase himself being directly governed hj (be
active verb to hvef it roust be preceded by the preposition d, say
then se amara d si mismo. (See Rule LVI, page 154.)

(4) See Rule XLHI, page 78. . . ^ ,
(6) Rule XLV, page 78, and observe that placing good and use/ut

before the verb, the phrase is infinitely better in Spanish.

(6) See Rule XLIV, page 78.

(7) The verb to lend, being in the infinitive, the pronoun me must
be placed after prestar and be joined to it ; prestarme is then a com-
pound of the verb and the pronoun. (See Rule XXVI, page 65.)

(8) See the N. B. 1st of the Rule XLV, page 79.

SPANISH SXEKCISES. 231

are: (take up) arms, fly to meet him, attack him with

tomor arma, volar U atacar

courage, fight with intrepidity, and the victory is your«.(l)

valor J comhatir intrepidez, victoria^ f.

Let us prove to our neighbours, that, if they have valour, we

probar i;ectno,m.

have (at least) as much as they. Let them fear the

dlomenoa
patriotism of a nation ready to shed even the last
patriotismo^m, . nacionf, pronto derramar hasia
drop of its blood for its government and its liberty. God
gotaf, sangrepara gobiemo Kbertad, Dies

grant that the war may not last long. Speak more softly,
quiera durarmucho. hqfOy

Uiou hast already interrupted me twice. Let us promise to
ya interrumpir do8vece9^ prometerde

study, and let us study with more attention, and our master
estudiar maestro

will be pleased. Eat some cherries, they are very good.

contento, comer guindayf.

Open the door for my father, he has already knocked
Abrir puerta^ f. llamar

twice. I hope the physician wiU cure our poor patient. I

desear mldico^m. . curar enfermo^,

fear that my father and mother wiU noi pardon my sister the

^ perdonar

fault that she has committed. I hoped that yonwould have
culpa f. que cometer. esperar

permitted your son to come and dine with me. (2) They

de venir d comer
sang and danced, although I was speaking to you. He
cantor bailar aunque

would have been offended (3) if we had revealed his secret.
enfadarse

(1) See Rule XXXI, page 60.

(2) The verbs to eonuj to go, to rtturrif veDir, ir, yoWer, followed
bj another verb, require in Spanish to be foUowed by the preposition
df which is placed immediately before the verb which it poverns. See
for the manner of translating with me, mth thee, Vfith oneself, the
N. B. 2d, following the personal prbnouns, page 54 of the Grammar.

(3) The verb to be offended being reflective is conjugated in Span-
ish in the compound tenses with the verb haber and not ter, (See
Rule LXI. page 167.)

232 stfJMim tfJteUdlM^.

Let OS Mver speak iK of (my body.) Let to? al^vays- tttptstt
mai nadie siempre re^petar

the repufatidoof (every hody.) My son ceiftiiMiedtto study,
iodoSf coniintktr

ahiloagb he tof dtomissed his HMBter. 1 shaH sup wi^
dupedir eenar

aqppetite, idtfaoeghr I /btw^ dltted w^. He is alwtrftt t» geod

apetito de

fattmoury provided he tHnkt mid ediv welk

humor ^ eonialque heber comer kien,

OBSSftVATIONS.

In all the preee^BB? eatereises, we have ttiade it ear duty, in
order to render the lahottr easier to the scholar, to foUow dil
the rules in their order, to cile them eyen in lAnost all the
phrases and to ref(^ to them as oAen as possiMe, persuaded
that there emu he no better way of familiarising the scholar
with the principles of a language, than by obliging lum to
have recottrSe to litem^ to stiKly th«m and to reflect oa them
at the very moment he makes the apf^catrem of them.
Now that we have already been over ^ greatest part of
these rules, we think it will not be useless to exercise oneself
. anew on the same rales by the tranriatien of seme exercises
which will embrace them aU. We shall not cite diem, in
order to reader it necessary to eonsolt wi^ a more consider*
ate and deeper attention the grammar and notes of the pre-
ceding exctcises. We shall pass aHerwards te the other
rules.

EXERCISE XXni.

On the preceding Mules.

A state is not flourishing but by die purity of its laws,

estado^ no fiorecUnte tino purezaj[» ley,

the security of its commerce, the holiness of its religion^

t^mereioy santidady f

and the respect and love which the sovereign inspires in
reipetOy m. amor soberano^. inspirar d

bis subjects. The intimacy of two virtuous hearts is the

vasedlo, intimidetd, f. coraxon

gordian knot which nobo^ can untie. The unhappy
gordiano nudOym.qtie nadie mfetiz

SPANISH EXSECI8SS. 233

]9erson is not wholly (to be pitied,) if virtue remairu to

enteramente ae compadecersey quedar

him in his misfortune. Romances are a poison for the

infortunio. novela^ f. venenoyva.para

heart, they corrupt it (by degrees,) and finish by
corromper poco d poco acabar por

destroying eiitireiy all its sensibility. Maternal tenderness

destruir del todo sensibiUdadyf. nuUemcd

is a debt that aU mothers ought to pay to nature. Let

deuda^. madreyf. debet * pagar nattaraleza^.

us regulate our gifts by prudence, and our desires b^

reglar don^, conforme d
wisdom. Esteem is durable only when it is foup:^ed on
:8alnduria/. durable euando fa ^ndar aobre

virtue. A sensible heart receives soon or lat'^^ even in

9ensible recihir tarde 6 ten* ^rano aun

^Ihis world ils reward. To speak little, to r'^U^yye much, to
mundo^.rec(mpen8a. • jpoco, • \^ervar mucho, *

think maturely, and act prudentl" ^^ almost certain
petuar maduramentey obrar prudent Jj^g cast cierto
proofs of innocency of soul, rectitu^ ^ ^^ ^^.jj^l ^nd purity of
prueboyf^inoeenciayf. ^^^^^y^- ^^ct' ^.^s.ingenioym. purezaf.
manners. '

castumbres^ f.

^^"^^iIRGISE XXIV; ^ ? i

liM ji 1 u ^'^/ ^ preceding Rum.

M.de la Roche ^^^,^ .^.^ ^^^^ _^ ^

seguropa^eyf. H quedes<yJZae ^^^^^'^^

liberality. Enw i. ^P^esto ecmomiaf.

The ««1 « «. eiianation ofmSg!^ The'^n
2o» «»««««<«,f. divinidiaf, ■ '""''

234 SPANISH >XSRCIfiSS.

thought and the faculty of speakings says the Couiit de
peniomenio^, facuUcuiyf,

BuffoD) do not depend on the forra^ nor tite organisation of
dependerde formaJ[, organizacionjL

the body, they are gifts which the Creator has granted
cuerpo^, * doft^ni. conceder

Bokdy to man, and not to other animals. The clearest
iinic€Miente otro animal^. ciaro

pvoof of this truth, is that ahhoogh the ourang-oatang ha»
pruehoyt aunque orang^iango

the body, the lindbs, the senses, the brain and the tongue
miembroym. seniido^. knguaf.

entiiely sinilar to those of man, ner^rthelese he
enteramciUe temefamie lo8 sin tmhar^o

speaks not,, he thinks not. l^e em(»re of man over ani-

fUnsa imperio sabre

mals is a lawiul empire that no revolution (1) cao
kgUimo * queninguno pnede

. destroy ; it is the eni|)lre of miod over matter, and it is not
desitruir * cMpiriiuf, maieriaj[. •

only . a .mht ^en by . natofe, and a power
solamente ^ dereckoyn, dado por naturaU^yt poder^^

founded on its unalterable laws, but a gift of God, by
fundar inalterable ley^ sinotambien Diot^

which man can at every moment perceive the excellence of
elcufd puede coda' iristante reconocer escekncia^.
his being. ( There' ar'e) m9tny.Je\^ in Asia and in Africa.

9er Hay Judio^,

The catholic religion reigned alone befbre the Friench revo-

cai6iic0 ' domtnar solo dnies de

lution, in Italy, in Fi-arice, in Spain, J\n' several States of

« ' 'Italia, :\ • ' • • mucho etiado

Germany and in the greatest part of Poland. Fmnoe is the

' . - uf^dyor parte Potonia.

most ancient of the kingdoms of Europe. ,^^f^nnaay maa

■atUigno K ' ' tein&'fm, ' tjurooa,
formerly called Gerraania from ^he$e^i^iatonicjirQrds,#flr

and man^ which signify man of coQrage,.(t^ritk^ mi^»)
que Mis^ifitan'-i^ ^ ' v'alor^ ' gu^i^AOr<Q

"•IT"

, (1) S«e Rate ^JCVIII, page 66.

SPANISH BXEBiCISES. 23^

EXERCISE XXV.
On the preceding Rules.

Mr. Benedict Jerome Feijoo of the order of Saint Bea-
Don BewUio Gerdnimo ordenyxn. 8€at

edkt^ and member of the council of hb Majesty, was the
miembro^ consefoyUk. mageatady

first of aU the Spanish writers who dared (1) to attack

eMcritor. m. atreverse aiacar

openly the prejudices of nis nation. Mr. Thomas de

Mertamenie preocupadonf* Don Totnas

Iriarte is a Spanish poet justly celebrated; his translations.

of Virgil and Horace are excellent, and his literary fables
VirgiUo Horado Uterario fdhula

are productions of the most subtle genius and of the most
produecion sutil mgenio^.

delicate taste. The Spanish language is very rich ; it is

etquisito gu8to^> langua^f. *

much more noble, much mare majesdc and mtich more

mucho mqjestuoso

expresuve than the Italian language. The Don Quixote of

e9prent>o Itcdiano

mchael Cervantes is the best romance diat has ever been

Miguel noveloy f.

written. All those who have read the poem of the Araucana

escrito, ios que leido • poemayia.

by Ercilla, make a pompous panegyrick of this work,

par hacen pomposo ehgioyia. o6ra, f.

particularly of ikie speech of Cohcoh so much 'extolled

particularmente arengaf, celebrado

by Voltaire ; it (is found) in the second C»ito. The more
♦ hcdlarse' Canto^,

foreigners cultivate the Spanish language^ the more beautiful

e0trangero^.cultivar

they find it. Lope de Vega is a very great poet, and without

ein

doubt the best that Spun hag produced. Charles fourth,

duda producir, Carlos

(1) If ve translate to dare by atreverUf a reflectiye y^rb, we must
place the pf obouq before the verb aud 9ay : '« afrevj^ <i.

236 SPANISH EXKRCISfiS.

Catholic king of Spain, (was born) at Naples, the tveMh

CaidUco nacer en NdpoleSy

(1) of November of the year one thousand seven hundred

Noviembre ♦

and forty-eight, and began to reign the fourteenth of
♦ y principiar

December of the year one thousand seven hundred and
diciembre • *

eighty-eight; he was proclaimed king at Madrid the seven-

y proclamar en

teenth of February of the following year.
febrerQ siguiente

r

^ EXERCISE XXVI.

On the preceding Rules and on Rules XXXI. XXXII.
and XXXIIL page 60.

At what hour did' my mother dine' yesterday ? At one

comid
o'clock. At what hour did she (take a cdlation ?) (2) At

merendar .^

six o'clock and she supped at nine. When dost thou expect,

cenar . ^^ . -. :, ? • espera^^

my friend, to receive news from thy son? I desire very

• recibir noticia deeear

much to know how he does; he is a good child One of
mucho* saber como ^ estar^ t^ muckachojin. ^

my friends, who arrived (the day before yesterday) from

Uegfir ante ayer

Madrid, has assured, me that he was very well last week,

\ K asegwrar me que t :«. f- 'i «emaiia/.A'
Here are very handsome houses. Yes, my friend, they are
He aqui .. si r ^-j -^<''

truly very handsome : the first belongs to the Marquis de
ciertamente '^ Marques^m,

The twelfth may be translated by en doce or by tl dia doee.

We have said io the N. B. on the persons and numbers of the
verbs, that the nominatlye personal pronouns are almost always sup-
pressed in Spanish : this rule must be observed, whether the phrase
is interroj^ative or not. (See note, p. 82 of the grrammar.)

s

SRASIStt BXEHSISBS* 237

in >.• . ti u;,^ M,-
Ithiiirff thirnnmnTl inmfnn^ the thiiad a nj broliioi's^ and the
foialh the Count.de Isla's ; Uiis large garden m aiso his^ and

the other is mine. Let us (go inl») mine, we will gather

ettStForem coger

smne flowers. Who would have thought that the weaker
ai§wm fioTyt Q^iak i^^ creeruL titmpo

wouMhave been so fin| to-day ? If thy brother had more
p«ti«n£^^ he wsovld have nmre success in his uodfertalungs.

it %a^lL'xX(x. foriuna ^<- empresa.

If (any Qiie)> atka for me^ (take case) te answerthat i
K<.iA^ preguntarpor >^^ andado de / , • \
ant Hot at home* IT the Iidah - - insteadi of atteckine the

Irlandes-^ en lugar de atiiccmi
citf of IkibliB by d^>.had attadsed. it by night, Ireland
dt diOydi^kJ-ui^y^cUi^^C^p de noehe^ Irlanda.f,
would have run great perils ; for, it appears that ihe

eorrer pdigro;. pueA pare^
malcoBlents were well prondded with arm* and ammunition.
madtonimtOyin. h^ikprooeew de armat municion

I speak of the insurrection of the end of hify ef the year

ineunteeeionyt Jm^m^ JuMo
one tfaomnnd eight hundred and three.

;//•:

EXERCISE xxniB

On the prece d in g Rules.

Study, be diligenttand docile, and your masters will reward
w. -* d6cU

you ; but, if ^u are lazy, they will punish you. I do not
understand what'^'ilie/ cbimtiesg ha» said^ alihougb she has
camprender lo que dicho^ <v .«

repeated it thrice. We should have invited , thy friend to
repe^ir^ -n.^-' i^<u . ,.. couvidfir ^

dine with thee, if he had come(l) yesterday to the party. If

^,i u. i^.u^.i, venir^^i^ »^ iertuliaff.

you eonsokd the afflicted, if you assisted the unfortunate,
qfligida^UL socorrer.. pobreyuu

n) The verb to eomCf Ttnir being a neuter verb^ is sMt oonjugated
in Spanish in the compound tensc« with the anniUarT^ ser but with
haber. (Ske Role LXI, page 157.)

238 SFAinSH SXEftCISSS.

if you tAorei/ with them your superflaity, you would thus
rtparHr entre mperfiyOy nu axi

acquire treasures of benedictions. M. Luis de la Plata

tuoro betuUdon Don

pretends (to be) very poor, although he is the richest man in
8er pobre, de

the city* I shall dine (to-morrow) with my friend the count

manana
de Isla, (there will be) (a great many) people and after din-

hahrd mucha gente deapuade

ner we shall play cards and we shall dance all night ; we

jugardhanaipeg haUar noche,f.

shall sing also ; and I wish very much (1) that the Marquis

tambien deaear

de Mondejar and the duchess de Almodovar woadd sing the
duet of ZemireandAzor. Mr. Charles Tuerto bought a
difo^.
house last week, and he sold it at ten o'clock in the

semanaj[. vender la de

morning. Where didst thou dine yesterday ? At thy
mafiana^ f. Dtmde en casa de

brother's, and 1 shall dine to-morrow with the Duke de

dugueyUk,
Alcudia, at his country house. Hast thou breakfasted ? yes,
en almorazar si

my friend ; I breakfasted at eight o'clock, or half past
eight (2) 6

EXERCISE XXVIII.
On the preceding Rules.

The Swiss are very strong, very courageous and very
faithful men. A band of robbers attacked the Count de

tropay f. lodron aiacar

Fernan Nunez and the Marchioness de Ariza, and obKged

Nunez obligor

them to give all their money and their jewels. (3) I lost

ks a dar joya, perder

<1) Mueho is indeclinable when joined to a verb, and it declined
thus mueho^a-ot-^u when joined to a gubstantive.

(2) Say, at eigrht and a half struck, d la* oeho y media dadai,

(3) See Rule VII. page 30.

SPANISH EXIEGISES. 2^9

yesterdaymy little dog, hast thou found him? No: if [ had

haUar lo
found him, I should have sent him (to thee) immediately.
enmar lo te inmediatamente.
Hast thou seen the little country house that my mother has

visto
bought ? It is very pretty, we shall always have in the yard
comprar • patio^.

a large dog capable of terrifying the most daring robbers.

perro^. capaz de amedrenfar osado

A mother said one day to her children : practise virtue,

decid hijo practicar

detest vice, love study, be generous without prodigality,
aborrecer inn prodigaUdad

wise and religious without affectation, and you will be happy,

reUgioBO sin afectaciony
not only in this life, but also in the life (to come.) The

solamenteen mastambien futuro*

miser is a martyr of the devil or an anchorite who,
avaro mdrtir demonio^m, 6 anacoreta^m* que

by his abstinence and his continual inquietudes acquires
abstinencia continuo angiistiajL adquirir

rights to hell ; his heart is always divided between the
dsrecho infiemoyin. partir

desire of preserving and that of accumulating. He is
deseOy m. conservar 61 amonionar tener

hungry and eats not, he is thirsty and drinks not, he
hambre comer tener aed beber

(has need) of repose and takes none, he is never free (1)
neeesitar * descanso no lo tomar libre

from alarms. Before the revelation, the whole universe was

sohresalto, antes de revelacionyf. universoyin.

a temple of idols : each vice was a divinity.
temploy TQf idolo cadavido deidadyf.

(1) See the obier?ation8, p. 169 of the grammar.

240 VANIIE MXMmDmEB.

EXERCISE XXIX.

ON PRONOUNS.

See Bules XXVI. XXVJL XXFVS. XXIX. mmi

XXX. pages 55 and 56.

I wffl send thee to-morrow morning the books Jj>rom-
enniar mafUuui par la manana
ised thee ; if they please thee, I advise thee to buy them ;

gu9iar aconsgar de comprar

thou wilt find them at Messrs. Munroe & Francis's. Mr.
hallar en la libreria de Dan

Luis de Villa Real has assured us that Miss Sophia Hermo-

aaegurar Sofia

sa is at Cadiz : write to her, and invite her to come and

.escribir convidar devet^r .a

pass some time with us. I have received two .letters for
pasar cdguno recibir para

my brother. I will send (1) them to him at his countiy
house without opening them. I will write to Im layadf

■ahrir
to-morrow, and I will enclose the^e .two Jotters in Qpiie.

€Sta8

Lei U8 defend ourselves, (?) myfriendsy (3) let.li3 isi^

defender
ourselves .with courage against the onemy who .attacks i^s

con corage contra que acofneter

and pretends to cgnquer us ; let us repulse. Um wiii vigqiv,

pretender* veneer rechazar

and let us for/ce him to confess that pur -valqqr ^svQid oi^r

obligar (4) confeaar
attachment to our country, and to $he religion of oiir fa^^xs,
qficiony f.

(1) See Rule XXVII, p. 6ft.

(2) See Rule XXX. pAgeftft.

(3) In these apostrophes : my friend, myfiiendi, my fidker, my
mother t my brother, my titter, &c, — the possessiTe pronoun may be
suppressed, excepting when they are accompanied with a sentiment
of joy or sorrow : in these cases the pronoun is expressed with ad-
vantage, and is placed after the nouns ; and instead of the pronoon
mif we make use of mio without an article.

(4) See the N. B. 4th which precedes the list of the irrMnilar rwb§,
p. 121 of the Grammar.

SPANISH BXlERCISSS. 241

fender us iBViDciUe. Thy brothers are Tery imjnst and very
hace invencibk. may injuato

imgralefid. A thousand times I have succoured them m
tNgTota. ♦ vez socorrer

dieir OHsfertuiies, never has Madam \^1 assisted them^
infortumoj aaiHir

nevertheless, they love her^ they see her, and it appears that

no obstante vtniar *parecer

they detest «c.(l)
deteatar

EXERCISE XXX.

On the preceding Rules.

Somebody advised Philip, the father of Alexander,

Alguno Qconsejar dFdipe * •Alefandro

to banish from his douinioos a man who had spoken ill of

de echar estado que

him ; I shall (take good care not) to do it, answered he,

guardarse bien de hacer responder
he would go every where and epeak iU of me. When a

ir (par todas partes) d decir mat cuando

Boman general tripmphed, a herald said to him from
romano general^ triunfary herakb^. decir de

time to time, remember that thoa art mortal* Iiet us
cuando en euandoy acmtrdnHe mortal

always submit with resignation to the decrees of
siempre someterse resignacion deeretoy^m*

providence. Lend me ihy book, I will return it to thee
promdenciaj[. Prestar voker

to-morrow i do not refuse it to me. (2) No, I cannot refuse
manana rekusar jpuedo

it to thee. Lend thy fan to thy sister, and present it to

abanico presentar

her politely. Thou knowest Mrs. D.T.S.; the count and

cortismenie conocer
I mere speaking (3) of her ; and we said that she is well
dedr

(1) See the N. B. of Rale XXX. pag« 6^*

(2) See Rule XLVI. pa^e 80.

(3) See Rnle L. pi^e 9i.
21

242 SJPANISH BXIftCISBS.

informed, that she qpeaks several languages and that she k
inHruido, mueho

very amiable. AU those who know her say (the same)

Todos Job que otrotcaUo

of her. Where is Mr. de A. ? Do not speak to me of him,

Donde
I detest him. Here are pears and apples, eat some, they
detegtar He amd pera manzanay dlgtmo,

are excellent I shall buy some more toHnorrow and I will

comprar
send you 9ome>

EXERCISE XXXI.

Oil the preceding Rules.

If they carry thy brother's servant to prison, he will not

^t Uevar criadojin. cdrcelyf.

(come out) of it to-morrow. He is already there. I assure

ealdrd ya oBL asegurar

you that I shall not go to see him there. The viscount de

ir6 ver aUd. vizconde

Isla has bought a country house. I shall dine with him

comprar

to-morrow: he* will* speak* (tome)* of it* : it is new,

large, and well ornamented ; it is a palace. My~son learned

adomado * paktcio^. aprender

last year all the fables of La Fontaine, but he has already

ya
forgotten the greatest part of them. Twelve robbers were
olvidar mayor ladron

stopped last month in the wood of Y.... they were tried
arrestar bosquCy m. juzgar

(the day before yesterday) by the criminal tribunal, which
anUayer por criminal trihtmalym, que

condemned six of them to be hanged. (How many) children

ahorcar cuanto hijo

has your sister ? she has two, one son and one daughter.
Thy (pocket handkerchiefs) are very handsome, but I have

panueloy m. matt

some that are at least as handsome and as good.
que dlominos

SPANISH EXERCISES. 243

(Sball we go) to the garden to-day ? go there now if you

Irimos id ahora

wish; (as for me,) I shall not go; for, I come from it.
guerer yo * puts il

John, open my chest, thou wilt find in it ten louis, take
abrir armario^, hattar hiiSyXn, tomar

them, I give them to thee. (There were) yesterday fifty

€loy hahia

persons at the party at Madam ViaPs.

en en casa de V

EXERCISE XXXn.

On the pronouns demonstrative, relative, interrogative
and indefinitef and on the preceding RtUes,

Whose garden is this? (1) Whose houses are these?
Whose palace is this ? This garden is mine^2) these houses
are the prime minister^8y(3) and the palace is the king's.

primer ministro
Who is there, (4) Some one knocks at the door ; John,

Uamar d
open it. Give me this book and take that, I shall send to
abrir dar tomar enviar

them this cage and this bird. This man is (looking for) thee.

jaulCff. pc^aroyin. buscar

He who was speaking to thee is one of my best friends, and
she who is with him is the friend of thy sister. Has thy son
paid too dear for his hat ? Yes, he paid twenty five
pagar por sombreroym. si

pounds for it. The (young man) whose talents (5) we ad-

por jdven talentoSyin,

mire is hardly twenty five years old : he will be without

tener • sin

doubt one of the first painters in Europe. Of all vices, that
duda pintorym.de mto,m.

which degrades man most is intemperance. Who^ are'
degradar borrachera, f.

(1) See Rule XXXIV. page 63.

(2) See Rale XXX H. page 60.
?3) See Rule XXXIf. page 60.

(4) Then, is not translated in this phrase.

(5) See Rale XXXIV. page 63.

244 SrAMISH SUftCISBS.

yoa^ qieakiog' of?' of those of whrnn we were speakUig

two ouDUtes agOy of those two gentlemen whose credoiity

kuy cabaUero ereduUdadf.

you condemned (so much). — Yes, yes, I condemned th^

condenar tanto
credulity, and I shall endeavour to undeckve them on the

proeurar ^ de$enganar sohre
conduct of theur sons* — Well; open their eyes on the
conduetaf.

scandalous conduct of these poor (young people) who, if
eBcandahso jdven

their parents do not correct them, will run insensibly to

padres cMiigar eorrer

their ruin.
p6rdida.

EXERCISE XXXm.
On the Preceding KiUes.

Hast thou seen this parterre ? (Look at) "these ftowers :
visio jardinym. Mirar flor^f.

tlus and that are in my opinion, the two handsomest.

d parecer,

Here is a rose the colour (1) of which I admire. This is
He aqui color ^m.

not less handsome ; it is fresher than that the brilliancy

• fresco aquella hriUo^m.

of which you admire (so much.) If the Turkish fleet

Turcojlotaf.
attacks that of the English, it will find men to whose courage
atacar Ingles^ * haUar vcUor^.

and superiority, she may be obliged to yield. I advise thee,

* podrd obligor de ceder, aconsefar
my friend, to study grammar, the rules of which are so

de eatudiar gramdtica^. regla^f.
necessary. I shall speak to-morrow to those gentlemen, and
necesario.

shall tell them to present a petition to the prime minister
diri de preseniar sdpHca^ f.

(2) See Rttie XXXIV. page 63.

SPANISH BXBRCI8ES. 245

whose power equals almost that of the king. He who

poder^mAgudlar 61 aquel

was spe^ldng to me yesterday, when my father came into

entrar en
my room, is much more learned than thou thinkest. (1)

cuarioyin. instmido piensaa

What seekest thou ? Whom* are' these* ladies« looking*

buscar mirar

at?' What* are' thJy* talldng* about?* (Here are) two

que acerca de , Heaqui

pinks : which of the two (2) shall I give thee ? This pleases

*clavelym, dar gustar

me more than that. And what sayest thou of these tulips ?

dices tulipan^.

They are superb : I shall take some (of them.) Take, my

magnifico tamar alguno *

friend, as many as you wish (ofthemy) (3) I am very glad

quieras •
th(U they please thee. (4).
gustar

EXERCISE XXXTV.

On the preceding pronouns.

At whca hour shall we dine (5) ? At ' half * after' two.*

media y
Shall we play after dinner ? Yes. — At what game ?
jugardespuesde S( juego

At chess. Somebody asking one day a (witty man) if he

agldrez^m. preguntar ingenio

was a nobleman, the latter answered : Noah had three sons,
• nobk responder: No6

(1) See Rule XX. pa^e 44.

(2) See after the declension of the interrof^atiTe proQoun8,paj^e 64
of the grammar, the manner of translating uihich in Spanish.

(3) JSsmaingf as, instead of being translated by tanto-a-ot-as como is
rendered mucbbetterin this phrase and others similar by euanto-a-os-as.

(4) / am very glad that must be translated as if it was / rejoiee
very much that ... me alegro macho de que . . . and the following
yerbmustbe put in the ptesent of the subjunctive.

(6) See after pronoune interrogative (page 64 of the grammar) how
we must translate whatj &c.
21*

246 SFAHfflH BXBKCISBS.

I do not know from whieh I have descended. Kaowest

86 descender. Ckmocer

thoQ any of these gentlemen, any of diese ladies ? Have yoo

cahidleroy
any of these ^9x>rks ? Replace all diese portraits^ eaek in
obraf, volveadponer ' retratOjtik en

its place. rWe must) give to each one what belongs to him.

iugar. Esmenester fpquepertenecer

Alexander wished that the* beasts' even 'and the walls of tbe
Ahfandro quisa anitnalyjn. muraUa^f.

cities should testify eaeh in their way, their grief for the
dudadyi. d modo, par

death of Hephestton. Each conntiy has its customs.

Efestion, pais

(Let us put) every thing in its place. I doubt if any one
pongamot ditdar que a^guno

noB ever known men better than La &iiy^e. Has any one
conocer al^uien

ever spoken more ingenuously than La Fontaine? His house
(would suit) him better than any hody. Do not unto others,
conoendria d mtdqniera. Hagais d

what you would not that they should do (unto you.)

quereis hagan o9

(iSome people) do not open their mouths but at the expense
(dgtmo abrir la bocajSiBg.sinod * espentag

of others. He toko has no education resembles a body

education semejareed cuerpo/a.
without a soul,
sth * alma.

EXERCISE XXXV.
On tht precBding Huffs,

The people always suffer from tlie wars which prkices

puMoyxn. «ii/nr,sing. j^nc^^.

make against each other, lliey have kdled each

gehacenlosunos d hs otros. mataree

other* Many are deceived {i) in wishing to deceiiFe others.

enqueriemh^

(1) Instead of are dueived, say ; see themtelvet deceived^ se Ten
engaftados.

SPANISH EXBBCI8BS. 247

Whatever you write (l) avoid useless repetitions.
CuaJquiera cosa que evitar iniitil repeticion.

To whomeoever we speak, we ought to be polite. We ought

quienquiera deber * corUs,

never to speak ill of (any body) in their absence. In
* Ttadie autekcia. d

whatever he aitpfojfs himself (2) he always works with

tkt&carse trabqfar

taste. Those who do not occupy themselves in any thing
gusto. ocuparse nada de

good and useful, appear to me very despicable. Customs
{itUy parecer deepreciable.costuuAref*

are not the some in all countries. We ought not to associate
pai9y m. ^frecuentar

wi^ the impious, we ought even to avoid them as public
• ♦ evitar pnbHeo

pes&. (No one) knows if he is worthy of love or hatrod. (3)
peete/, nmdie saber digno amor odio,

/Vbfie of these ladies (will go) to die pky. The treaties

ird eomediajL

are null. The good man has* (no where)' a moretranqvdl
. nolo. (en wmgunaparte)

retreat, where he can be more at liberty Uian in his soul*
reHro^jknuk puede en

No reverse (ought to) distuit) true friendship. One is not

oantratitmpo aiterar wto

always master of his pasnons. (There are) defects that

duefko pasioH. Ha^ defecto

we conceal careiuliy. When we have ^ul die mislortune
ocuUar cuidadosamente. desdicha^L

to offend any body, we ought to labour to make him
deofenderd alguieUy trabqjar hacer

forget the displeasure that we have caused hun. What do
okndar disguBtOftn. isoMar ^

they a&y of the negotiadons ? They affirm that peace is made.
eedice negocieuienyi, eaegurar hecho.

(1) See the proDouns indefioite, p«(pes 64 and 65 of the grammar.

(2) See the N. B. 4th relative to Terbs ending in ear and gar,
wbi^ fprecedei tbe irregular verbs. Grammar paet • 121 aad 1&.

(8) See iUae XXXVIIl, page 66.

248 SPANISH KXBBGISES.

OBSERVA'PIONS.

The second person singular, as well as that of the plural,
being very little used in good society, and as they cannot be
made use of but in speaking to a friend or to a person over
whom we have authority (see the observation on the pronoun
of the second person, after its dedension, page 52,) it will
be proper to begin in the following exercise to substitute the
words vm, and vms. for the pronouns of the second persons,
which is not difficult.

When the pronoun you is addressed to one person only, it
is changed into tf our favour, vuestra mbrced, which is pro-
nounced usTED and is written vh., and when it is addressed
to more than one person, it is changed into your favoutis,
viTBSTRAs MERGxnss, which IS pronouucod ustedes, and
written vhs. In the first case the verb is put in the third
person singular, and in the second, in the third of the plural.

Vm. and vbis. are of both genders, that is to say, they are
used equally in speaking to men and women.

It is well to observe that the words vm. and vms, are not
repeated in Spanish as often as you in English : we do not
repeat them excepting when they are so distant that it would
be difficult to know them as nominatives to the veib. Ex.
You say that you know and that you love Miss Villigas, that
is, your favour says that he knows and loves Miss Villegas ;
VM. dice que conoce y ama a la JSenorita Villegas. And if
the prononn you is followed by this possessive pronoun your,
it must be rendered by the pronouns of the third person his
and their, su or sus. Ex. You have sold all your gold and
silver plate, that is, your favour has sold all his gold and sil-
ver plate ; vm. ha vendiao toda su vagiUa de oro y de plata*
Your when not preceded by you is changed into these words
of your favour, which are preceded by the substantive to
which your refers, and this substantive takes the masculine
. or feminine, singular or plural article, according to its gender
. and number. Ex. Your brother came to see me, su hsrmano
de vm. vino d verme, that is, the brother of your favour, ^c.
I have received your letters, he recibido la carta de vm.
that is, I have received the letter of yoiir favour or worship.

In addressing God and speaking to crowned heads, we
make use of the second person plural in Spanish. Ex. O

Dios, vos sois mi verdadero padre, Admitid, O Gran

Carlos, con henigno rostroj con oidos propicios, y como

SFijnSH BXB]&CI8£8« 24§

prenda de nuestro afectoj dc nueatra veneradon, haUad y
rendimiento d la Magestady este escritOy que con tcmta mayor
cowfianza dedicamos d vuestro non^e^ cuanto conocemo9
que nada os €» mas grato y decoroso, nada parece maa real
y mas digno deun Boibon que los pensamientos capaces de
fomentar y ennohlecer las artes y la sabiduria. — Academ-
ical discourse.

In the first part of the exercises we have enabled the
scholar to exercise himself on all the parts of speech, from
the article, to the auxiliary verbs and the three regular conju-
gations inclusively. We have introduced in it very few neu-
ter, rejSective and reciprocal verbs, because our intention has
always been to begin this second part with exercises on the
rules that belong to them. We have also avoided, as much
as pos»ble, introducing irregular verbs in the first part, in
order to ^ve the scholar time to study them. Their
great number is enough to frighten one at the first glance ;
but we are soon encouraged, if we reflect, 1st. that the four
hundred and eighty-three or eighty-four irregular verbs are
reduced, in a manner, to thuty-five,by which all the others are
conjugated: 2d. that they are almost all regular in their
irregularities. Indeed, if we examine one or two of these
verbs, we shall find that a little reflection renders the diflicul-
ty very trifling. Acordar^ to remind, to resolve, is irregular ;
the irregularity consists in changing the o into ue in the three
persons singular and the third plural of the three present
senses, that is, of the present of the indicative, of the present
of the imperative, and of the present of the subjunctive.
All the other persons and all the other tenses are regular*
The irregularity of the verb aborrecer to abhor, consists in
placing a z before the c whenever the latter is to be followed
by an o or an a.* the o and a are found only in the three
present tenses as above stated ; there is then no irregularity
but in these three tenses, and all the others are regular. Let
the scholar study these verbs attentively and judiciously, and
they will not present any serious difficulty. — In the following
exercises, we shall make known the irregular verbs by these
letters, irr, whenever tjiey are in a person subject to irregu-
larity, and they will be found in their places in the Alphabet-
ical List, beginning at page 122, which cannot be too often
consulted by students.

250 SPANISH KXEKCISE9.

EXERCISE XXXVI.

On the neuter^ rejlectivef reciprocal^ and impersonal
verbs^ See Rule LXL page 157.

I have walked all day. My brother and sister have
p€L8ear8e{l)
amused themselves very much in the garden of the English
divertirat
Consul. My uncle has assured me that you (were vexed)

enfadarse
yesterday with the prime minister. The Germans have

primer dleman, m.

defended themselves well against the English. The French
defentierse

had fought like desperadoes. Your mother will be

pelear como desesperado. haber

(gone out) when we arrive. The dancing^ master' of Mr.

9alir bails

Luis Angelo had arrived when we entered. I should
Luis llegar entrar.

have repented very much having spoken to Messrs.

arrepentirse de

de CallenuevsDif they had been pronounced guilty. Rejoice,

declarar culpable. alegrarsCy
my cliildren^ your father is much better, (i2) he is out of*

fuera
danger. My nephew does not cease to torment and afflict

sobrinOy dejar de atormentarse

himself. It rained, hailed, lightened and thundered

• Uover,granizar,r€lampaguear tronar

yesterday almost all day. (Thisre were) yesterday more than

casi dia,m,

sixty persons at the party at the Countess de Torillo's, and

en en casa de

to-morrow (there will be) at least two hundred at Madam
d h menos • Madama

Terranueva's.

(1) The pronoun se which is found joined to the verb hi the infioi-
tive, always denotes that it is reflective, or reciprocal.

(2) See the N. B. of Rule XLIX. pag^ 96.

SPANISH SXJSRCISES. 25l

EXERCISE XXXVII.

On the neuter, reflected, reciprocal^ impersonal and
irregtUar^ verbs.

Messrs. Cojo and Giboso disputed last Monday (1) for
disputarse •

about an hour. Your cousin told me yesterday that his
cercade primo decirjirr,

mother would not return from her country seat till
volver dnteade

next week, although she had already arrived. I abhor
prdximo aborrecer^.

and my sister abhors like me false phOosophy. I desire that

comoyo Jilo8ofia,f. desear

you would abhor it also. Can you, Sir, do me the

sub. pres. Poder^n. hacer

pleasure to lend me ten louis? I cannot : if I could I
favor yin. de prestar luis

would do it willingly. - - The servant of Mr. Canas

hacer ^.demuy buenagana,
has been judged and declared innocent. Wlmt do you

juzgar declarar

think of what I have told you ? At what hour do you
pensarjirr. decir, ur. A"

wish that your children should - - breakfast? I
^6rcr,irr. almorzar, irr. subj. pres.

breakfast at seven o'clock, and I wish that they should break-
fast, and that you should all* breakfast' at eight. Go, my

«V,irr.
children, go and study till breakfast is ready. I

d hastaque almuerzoym. esti pronto,

know that it will not be so before half an hour. (2) None
sa6er,irr. * estar lo *

can - recollect without horror the bloody* scenes'
poder^TV, cuiordarse sin horror de sangriento escena,L
which the revolqtion of Morocco produced in the years one

. produdr, irr. *

(1) The days of the week take the article, say therefore ; el lines
^ttmo, or piuado,

(2) Before is here translated by antes de....8ay, antes de media hora ;
an is suppressed.

252 fPANISH KZSBCISV8.

thoiuand five hundred and eighty-two and e^[fa^-tfaree.

•

I «ay and I repeat it every day that our posterity will
deciryin. repeiirjar. me/o,pl.m.

scarcely believe such atrocities. I bring you, gentlemen, a
apinaa creer airodiiad. traer^,

boojc that you will read with pleasure ; I desire that you

leer gusto ; desear

would bring me also, or that you would send me that

sub. pros, tambien, enmar tl

which you have promised me. I (go out) every day about
prometer salir^rr. hdcia

one o'clock: do me the favour to send it to me before that

Aocer^irr. de

hour.

EXERCISE XXXVm.

Con^nuation of the preceding Mules.

The truly' christian^ man* Ueeeee the hand of

verdaderamente crieiiano hendedrjar,

God, even when it chastens lum : let vm/oUow his example^

aun cuando * castigar seguir^.egemph^

and let us bkee, (in the midst) of our mislbrtuiies the God of

en medio infortunio

goodness who has given us bemg and who preserves it to as.

dor eerj ra. conservar

I fear this child will foB^ (1^ tell him to 9top. (2) Yonr

caer,iiT. decir^n deteneraejmr.
father wishes that you should conduety (1) your sister to

querery irr. comducir^n.

school by the same road that you conducted (1) her
escuela^ por nUsmo eandnoy m.
yesterday. I say and I repeat every day that nothing is (3)

repeHry inr. nada

so rare, as a true friend* in summer, almost aU Spaniards

vermiOy oast
sleep (after dinner ;) it is the heat which requires that

domtr jrr. d e spu e s de comer * exigir

(1) Put our in the subj. pres. and eondudr l«t in the same tease.]
(3) Translate tbe phrase as if it was, teUkmthtake tttp, prei. seb ,
(3) See Rule XXXVIU. pa^e 66.

SPANIS0 mxxBxasES. 253

they should do it. It lightens and tiunders often

hacer^r, * ironar^./reeuentemente

in Spain ; it rains there very rarely in the southern
* raravez mefiiodia^

provinces, and in the northern provinces the rain is ahnost
jprovincia/. norte^. Wimaf,

continual from the month of October till the end of April.
continuo deade mes^. octubre hasta fin^. tUnil,
Where are* you* going,' Margaret ? I (am going) into the
Adtmde »>, irr. Margarita? en

garden, I shall gather some flowers, and I shall go and carry
eager flor^f. d Uevar

them to the Countess de Dupuy ; I should desire you

deeear
would come with me, but I fear that your mother (1) does

oetitr, irr.
not wish you to (go out).«^I (am going) to ask her.—
que vm. saUry irr.pjsubj. prtguntdrseh.

Well, go and return quickly. My modier consents
Bien^ votver^TT. pronto. consentir^.

that (2) I should go with you, provided that (2) 1 bring her
en que can tat que traery'm.

some flowers, and that (2) we do not ^o out) before (2) I

saUr^. dntesque
know my lesson in geography.
saber yvnc. kcion de geografia.

EXERCISE XXXIX, .

See Rules LI. HI. LIU. and UV. pages 151, 152, 193.

I have just heard that the countess de Villegas has lost a
aeaho de oir
son, it is the queen's surgeon who has killed him. The Mar-

* rsina^t cirujanoyva. morir^rr.

chioness de Costillas b also dead, and she (is to be buried)

se ha de enterrar
—

(1) Your motiMTf is politely translated in Spanish, SHfenoraiiMKire :
ywr father, m seiiar padrtf «c.

(2) See ceojuact. gov. the snbj. p. 194.

22

254 SPANISH EXEKCISKS.

the day after to-morrow at her country seat. I am very poor

en casa de campo,
and thou art very rich, (l) I am not more indebted (2) to
Philip my father, said often Alexander, than to Aristotle,
Felipe decia jllefandro, Aristdteksj

my preceptor : if I owe my life to one, I owe virtue to the

preceptor : deher al

other. Do you helieve what (was told you) this monung ?

creer le decian

What? that Mr. Peredo is dead? I believe and I know*
muerio eaherjunr.

even' that he is very well. What is my son doing ? He is
adn hacer?

writing. (3) — Where is he ? He is in his room. — And this
eicribir, donde

morning what was he doing when you was with him ? He
was studying geography. I thought that he was drawing. —

geografiUfi, dthufar.

No, sir, but he will do it while you are breakfasting. I fear
mientra8 aimorzar* temer

that you deceive me. Let us go and write the letters of

eng'aflar, sub. pres. irjarcd escribir
which I spoke (to thee.) Sir, I htve written them. (4)

escribir
(There are) some men who repeat (5) everywhere all that
Xa6er,impers. repetir ^rr, (por todas partes) h que

they hear. We will go and dine, when you please, (6) Let

oir,irr. d guatar.

us go and walk first, we shall dine with more appetite. My

d antesy apetito.

son has just arrived fron^ the wharf, where he has been

acaba de Uegar muette^* donde

walking an hour and a half. Po pot forget, Francis, that I

* ohidar^ Frandsco^

have ordered thee to return to-monow* (7)
mandar devolver manana.

(1) See the exception to Rule XI. pag^e 152.

[2) Say : 1 do not owe more. . . . JVb debo nuu,
fS) See Rale L. page 96.

f4) See Rule LIX. page 156.

(5) Say ; que andan repitiendOf or que van repiHendo, for, who repeat.

(6) See Rule XL. page 76.

(7) See Rule LVIU. page 156.

SPANISH EXKRCISBS. 255

EXERCISE XL.

On the preceding Rules and on Rules LVU. LVIIL
LIX. LX. and LXL pages 156, 157.

I have all the works of Mr. Thomas de Iriarte^ I have
obroyf, Don Tomas
read them, and they please me very much. I Kke ahio

gustar Me gwtan

very much (1) the wfitiogs of^ Calderon and Lope de

ohra^ f.
Vega: Thought them fifteen days ago, and I paid very

comprar "^ ka^ pagar

dear for them. Spanish books were so scarce in Boston,

por
that the lovers of that language could hardly procure any.

(tficionadod poder encontrar

I should wish to read the poem of la Araucana by Alonzo
querer^rr. Alonso

de Ercilla; but I do not know if I shall (be able)

saber y irr. poder jar.

to find it in this city. I do not believe that you can find
* encontrar creer

it at the bookstores ; but one of my friends, who has in his
library ten or twelve thousand volumes of the best French,
biblioteca tomo

English, Spanish, German and Italian works, has often

o&ra,f.
spoken to me of this poem: I will ask (him for it,) telling

pedir se lo decir^rr.
him that you wish to read it ; and I am persuaded that, if

desear * estar persuadido

he has it, he will not refuse it to me. (How much) do you

rehusar cuanto

think I have paid for the two hundred bottles of Burgundy

pagar por hoteUa^.

wine that I have bought ? One hundred and twenty pounds

* libra

(1) The verb to like, gustar ; is used impersooally ; as, , U gusta
la mutiea Ualiana, he likes Italiao music. J^oi gtuta el Espafiol, we
like the Spanish.

256 SPANISH SXERCISKS.

Sterling ? They did not cost me but one hundred pounds^

etterknaf cottar

they are not dear. The wine bebg so old and so good, I

rancio
would willingly have paid a hundred and fifty pounds.

de buena gana
The letter which 1 have written to your mother to announce
carta, f. eserihir^rr. para anunciar

to her that Miss Sydney is dead^ will be delivered to-morrow

entregar
to Mr. Montague, who (is going) to see her at he? country

t>,irr. en

iiouse, and has offered to carry it to her.
qfrecer de Hevar

EXERCISE XLI.

On the MverbSf the PrqsositianSf and the preceding
Rides. See page 157 and the following observations
on adverbs.

N. B. In Spanish the adverbs are generally placed after
the verb, and in compound tenses after the participle, except
the negative and interrogative adverbs, which are placed
before the verbs, and before the auxiliaries in compound
tenses.

The arts and sciences have never been more cultviated

arte,(, ser cuUivar

than they are now : but never also have they been more

lo dkora :
encouraged than they are. (There is) no country where
proteger lo. hay

the laws are more just and wise, and where justice is
sean sea

administered with less partiality than in France. The vir-
administrar parcididad

tuous man is more estimable reduced even to the most

reducido aun
extreme misery than the man without honour and without
estremo misenaf. sin

religion, living in the greatest opulence. It is not riches
vivir nufyor opidencia^t * No son

SPANISH BXBllCISBS. 257

that command esteem, but honour and virtue. , Indigence

grangear e%timacionf, mas si indigenciaf.

was never and never can be criminal, hut by .being the

criminal, con ser

effect of crime. There is nothing so common as the name
efectOym. crimenyta. comun

of friend; nothing however so rare as true friendship*
sin embargo amisiad^ f.

(It is said) that the Hon. Mr. W. speaks learnedly, prudently

se dice doctamente,

and eloquently. (1) Professor H. writes and speaks correctly

elocuentemente.
and elegantly. Modesty, candour and vurtoe are, in a

eleguntemente, candor, m.

woman, preferable to beauty. (2) When we hear men say
mefor hermo8ura,L oir^rr. decir

to us every day : gentlemen, we are wholly yours ; we are

cada de vm,

entirely devoted to your service : let us believe that it is

creer *

almost always as if they said : we might (be useful) to you,

casi decir: poderjai* servir.

but (we will do nothing about it.)
no lo hartmos

EXERCISE XLH.

On tht Conjunctions and preceding Rules. See Rides
LXn.LXIU.LXIV and LXV. pages 161, 162, 193.

William second, king of England, was killed while

matar estando
bunting, with an arrow by Walter, his favourite, in the
en caza, de saetazo Gualtero^ vcdido de

year eleven hundred and one. The battle of Masura, in

mil dento batalla,f. Masura,

£g3rpt (was fought) in the year twelve hundred and fifty-
darse,irr. mildos cientos

(1) See page 160 of the grammar) 3d observ.

(2) Transiate this phrase as if it was : modeHy, 4^. arc bctttr in a
toinnan than beauty.

22*

258 {Spanish sxERCfsES.

Smnt Louisy king of France, after having fought with a

despues de pelear

heroic courage^ was made prisoner by the army of th«

Milor, m. haccTy irr. egircitOfjox,

Saracens commanded by Malec Sala. Having been
Saraceno mandar

ransomed, he resumed the conquest of the Holy^ Land ;'
rescaiary volverd ton^uista/. Santo lierra^f.
but the plague having introduced itself into his army, the

pe«fe, f. introducirse

greatest part of his troops perished with it, hnd he perished
mayor perrer de

(widi it) himself. Punishments^ (ought to) be for the

* ca8tigo,m. deber

wicked, the rewards for the good. I shall (be absent)
nudof m. recompenauy f. attsentarse

next week for some days, and on my return my son can

d vuelta podrd

departybr Madrid, or if he prefers it, delay his journey tiU
aalir preferir^in. dejar viage para

Spring. (1) (Every body) says that, for a (young man) of
la todoUfph decir jirr. jSvenyin.

fourteen, your nephew is prodigiously learned. Your father

afiosy aobrino instruido.

is on the point (2) of (setting out) for the capital : he

partir
intends to speak to the minister for your brother and to
tener dnimo de ministroy m.

endeavour to obtain a place /or him. Mr. D. speaks Latin,
prneurar * lograr empUo^m.
French, Spanish and En^ish. (3) Charles and Ignatius, his

Igaacioj
brothers, are also very leamed. Do you know where Mr.

tambien docto* sabeVfirr.

Francis Ordonez is now ? No, Sir ; I know that he is no
ahora

(1) See pag^es 160 and 161 of the giammar, the different modes of
translating /or.

' (2) See the N B. 2d of Rale LX4I. page 161.
(3) See Rtole LX1¥. pi^e 198.

SPANISH EXBRcises. 259

longer a canon of the Cathedral of Saint Andero ; and I

mcts *can6niffo catedral^f.

believe that he is archbishop or bishop. (1)

creer arzobispo obispo.

EXERCISE XLUI.

On the Conjund^onSf the IntefjecHons, and the pre--
ceding Rules.

I shall not (go out) to day urUees it ceases raining. ^^
salivy irr. • defar de Hover,

though beauty b much (sought for) in women, yet it is very

muy, deseado *

often - - dangerous and productive of very great
frtcueniemente peligroao productivo

evils. This war will be very long, unless the powers of the
0ia/.

north coalesce. The Spanish Academy has established /or
noriCyXn. ligarse. (2) establecer

pronunciation clear and precise rules, that there might
pronunciation^, claro preciso regluyf, ctfin que •
not remain the least doubt on so essential a point; Woe

quedar dudaf. Ay

to those who suffer themselves (to be dragged away) by the
de d^arse arrastrar de

torrent of passions ! Alas / I am ruined. (How unfortunate
iorrente^. pasisnf, estarperder. desdichado

I am !) courage f cotirage f after the combat, victory.
de mi / espiritu f combate^. victoria/.

Passing (last evening) in the street of Saint Charles, I heard
Pasar ayer noche calkyi. CarloSy otr,irr.

repeated on all sides these cries : Jire / Jire ! I hastened my
repetir por parte gritoyin, adelantar el

steps, and on entering the neighbouring street, I met a
4 pasOy alentraren vecino encontrar

poor woman who melted into tears and did not cease to
deshacerse enldgrimas de

repeat these words : My God, how unfortunate I am ! ^A /

VOZy f.

(1) See Rule LXV. page 193.

(2) See GrftiDffiar, pa§e 121, M. B. 4.

260 SPANISH BXBRCISKS.

ray child^ my poor child ! where art thou? the house of this
woman was then almost reduced to ashes^ and the child

entonces ccuti reducir ceniza,
whom she lamented had been a victim to the flames, it was
Uorar ^victimade Uama^L *tener

only three years old. (Poor little one f ) exclaimed I, what

♦ Pobrecito f esclamar

sorrow^ what a mbfortune for a mother ! I endeavoured to
dohry ♦ deadicha procurar ♦

console her, I gave her some money ; bat all was useless :
consolar dar^rr. dinero^,

she was inconsolable ; ah ! said she to me^ thanking me^

inconsolable ; decir dar gracias

(God grant) you may never experience a similar
I)io8 quiera gue etperimentar * semganit

misfortune.
deadicha.

EXERCISE XLIV.

On the preceding Rides.

Madam Luisa de Legarra arrived yesterday from M a-
drid; ai^ brought me letters from some of my friends. I

/raer,irr. alguno

shall go and walk, after dinner, and Mary will come with

ir a rentV^irr.

me. For whom is that ribbon ? for me or for thee? it is for

cinta^ f.
thee, I shall buy another for me, dost thou know Miss M.... ?

conocer
do I know her ! certainly : and I assure thee that I love her
8i ^ ciertamente: asegvrar quererjavm

and esteem her very much. And dost thou love me also ? (l)
Yes, I love thee (very much) and shall never forget thee.

fkuchisimo
What did the Marquis de Rojas want ? He asked me how

querer ? preguntar
you did, and then he (went away ) I received last week

estar, despues ir*c,irr. recihir

a letter from Mr. John Roca ; it ended thus : and do me the
Don *acabar hactrjktt.

(1) See the N.B. of Rule XXX. page 60.

SPANISH SXER018ES. 26l

favour to believe that I am forever (1) your sincere frieod,
favor^m,de creer

&c. You know him, (as. well as) his brother Augustus.
como tambien Augusto,

Well, tell me if yoa have ever known men more worthy of the
biefiy decir^irr. jamas

esteem and affection of those who associate with them. —
egtimaeum^L afecto^m. freasentar *

Never ; and I assure you that I love them both with all my
Nuttca; asegurar damboe

heart I say as much of them and I say it with pleasure.

otroiadio
The man who has passed his youth in amusing himself ^ (2)

pasar juventud
repents of it (sooner)* or* (later.)* My children spend
eUo temprano tarde, emplear

two or three hours every day in studying history. Playing

d jttgar

and walking, you will not inform yourself. A man of

ingtruirse
genius (ought to) cultivate his talents to (render himself)
ingenio Ssber talento^m,pata hacerse

useful to society. I like reading and study^ (3) I do not

80ciedadj[. megusta
like the company of Miss B., I fear she will come.

que veniryptes subj.

EXERCISE XLV.

On the preceding Rules.

My husband solicits the place of officer in the queen's
solicitar empleo^m. qficial
regiment ; but I fear that the king will refuse it to him. The
regimientOjm, rekusar, sub. pros.

Governor promised us yesterday to come to-day to the

prometer . de

party, but we fear that his occupations will prevent - - -
tertUUayf, ocupacion tmpe(&'r,imsub.pres.

(1) See thete words, pagfe 169 of the grammar.
- See Role LV. page 163.

See Rule LV. and the remark that follows it, page 168.

262 SPANISH KXBECISKS.

our having the pleasure to see hun. (Is there) say Tiews ?
quetengamos gu8to^,dever Hay noticia^f.

No, there is none. (1) (How many) persons are there below ?

abqjo ?
(How many) ladies and (how many) gentlemen ? There

ctibaiierof
are ten ladies and nineteen gentlemen; and there were
yesterday forty-two persons at the Marchioness de

eneasade
Torillo's ; the assembly was very brilliant. (It is) a great

briUante. es
misfortune for a man not^ to' have' friends. (2) Who
deadichoyf, el

has done that ? It iah (2) Who has written this letter ?

^cer,irr. carta f^

It is youy I believe. Read, my child, and read again (3)

creer. Leer^
the maxims of La Rochefoucault, they are fine and suitable

imximaf. hermoso propia

to give a very great knowledge of the human heart. I
d dar conocimiento^ m.

cannot (go out) to-day, I have too had a headache. (4)
poderyXTT. salir

Sir, your father (has but just) gone out (5) he will return
acabar de volver

in two hours. The archbishop of Toledo was like to
dentrode esfar para

die (6) (last evening) of an indigestion. (It is) only an hour
mortr d noche indigestion, t hay

since the Marchioness de Costillas told me of it. I have
que decir^ irr. ♦

written two lines to him to express to him (how much)
e«cn6tr,irr. renglon paraespresar

(1) See Rule XXXVIII. page 66.

(2) See page 166 of the grammar, 3d. observation, &c.
r3) See page 156 of the grammar, 2d. obsenration.

(4) To translate these words, we mast render them in this manner,
iht head pains me too much ; me duele demanado la eabesa. These
modes of speaking ; to h4we a pain in the eyes, in the teeth, ^. are
rendered in the same manner, as, me doUa un ojo^ un diente, ^i.

(6) To have or to be but just, is, acabar de, governing the next verb
in the present of the infinitive Ex^^cabo de talir, I have just gone out

(6) See page 156; 4th. observation.

SPANISH EXERCISES. 263

I am grieved by this accident. (1) I am very much grieved

me pesa •
(by it) myself; I shall go and see him after dinner. Do me

* d despues de. Hacer^rr.

then the favoar to tell him that this evening we will go,
pae8 favor,m»de nochcyf.

seven or eight friends (of us) and keep him company.
* d hacer

(1) Say : bow much grieves me this accident ; and so, in all the
tenses used as impersonal verbs ; as, le pesaba, he was iprieved ; not
pesard, we shall be grieved ; me ha petadoy I have been grieved ; not
gvtt6f we liked ; let ha guttado, they have liked ', ie heSbria guttadOy
tboa wouldst have liked, kc.

A VOCABULARY,

Containing such words as most frequently occur in
familiar conversation, and ought therefore to be
known iy stt^nts.

N. B. In nount of the tame gender and number as the praceding
one, the space of the article to be applied is left blank.

The parts of the i

human body.

La puntadela

tip of

— Las partes

del cuerpo

nariz,

the nose.

humano.

Las ventanas^
de la nariz, )

nostrils.

La cabezEi

head.

Los cafios de la nariz, gristle

coronilla, croum of the

of the nose.

head.

dientes,

teeth.

moYiffm^mouldofthe head.

colmiilos,

eye-teeth.

frente,

forehead.

Las muelas,

grinders.

Las sienes

temples.

El nervio

the optic

La oreja

ear.

optico,

nerve.

ternilla.

gristle.

labio,

Up.

ceja,

eye-brew.

paladar,

pakte.

cuenca del ojo, ^ comer of

La quijada,

jaw.

El lagrimaly

5 the eye.

cerviz, hinder part of.

bianco

white of

the neck.

del ojo,

the eye.

nuca, napt

; of the neck.

celebroy or cerebro, brain.

garganta,

throat.

cogote, back

• of the neck.

barriga,

belly.

hueco de

hollow of

raano,

hand.

la oreja,

the ear.

muiieca,

wrist.

timpano del

drum of

pahnade

pabnof

oido,

the ear.

la mano,

the hand.

Los piipados,

eye-lids.

barba,

chin.

Las pestanas,

eye-lashes.

Las barbas,

La nina del ojo,

eye-ball.

costillas,

ribs.

tela del ojo,/&fi of the eye.

ingles,

groin.

megilla,

cheek.

juntas de

Joints of

boca,

mouth.

los dedos.

fngers.*

encia,

gum.

Los dedos de los ]

>ies, toes.

leugua.

tongue.

El gaznate,

guM.

nariz,

nose.

seno,

bosom.

YOCABULAXY.

265

£J pecho,
estomago,
pelo,
velloy
cuelloy
brazo^

sobaco,

espinazo,

ombligo,

hre€f»t,

stomach,

hair,

down.

neck,

arm.

elbow.

arm^pii.

back4H)ne.

naveL

La yema del dedo, brawn of
thejinger.

una, naiL

rodilla, knee.

pierna, leg.

pantorrilla^ cojf of ^Ae leg.

espinilla, shin-bone.

plaata del pie^ sole of the
foot.

gsirganta del pie, inatep.

piel, skin.

£1 pulgar, thumb.

dedolndice, fore-Jinger.

dedo del corazon middle
finger.

dedo anular, fourth

finger.

dedo menique, > little
or auricular, 3 finger.

muslo, t&gh.

jarrete, Jma.

tovillo, ancle.

pie, foot.

talon, hed.

Las espaldas, back

Los hombros nhoulders.

lados, sides.

23

The interior parts of the hu-
man bodt/f.~^Fartes interi-
ores del cuerpo humano.

muscle.

£1 murecillo^
musculo, ^

nervio, nerve.

tendon, tendon^ sinew.

La grasa, or gordura, fat.

membrana, membrane.

vein.

artery.

gristle.

bone*

vena,
• arteria,

ternilla,
£1 hueso,

meoilo.
La medula,
£1 tuetano,

casco, la cs
Las espinillas.
La espaldilla,

> marrow.

lavera, skuU.

shinrbones*

shoulder'bone.

canilla del brazo, armrbone.
£1 hueso sacro, or rump

bone.

skeleton.

heart.

lungs.

liver,
spleen,
kidneys,
brains,
stomach.
La boca del estomago, pit of
the stomach.
Los lomos, loins.

Las tripas, guts.

Los intestinos, intestines.
La madre, la matriz, } >

Eiijtero, ^ «^^'

La rabadilla,
£1 esqueleto,

corazon,
Los bofes,

pulmones,

livianos,
£1 higado,

bazo,
Los rinones.

£1 estomago,

266

"VOCAMOLJkMti

^^1%

flema,
£1 quSLo,
Laledie,

Mood.

CflOKT.

chyle.

milk.

9pittk.

sentidoB..

La viflCa,

£1 ofdo,

gusto^
Itictoy

Ia nines, idiHihocd*

puericia, Ixkf^uikaess.

adolesceiMsia, adoiuunce*
juventady yipvth.

Tirilidad, mmiood.

qr'1 ^^'

QfMlitieR of the (od^m^a&

Lft.salud,
fuerza,
djBbilidad,
hermosq^,
italdad,

El garboy
brioy

ieaUh.

strength.

^fiokness.

beawtff.

vgJinem.

good presence.

sprightUness.

D^Bdeinthe

Ilefeetwdel

LafMdady
Laiarrugasy

•ecasy

luganas,
LaTemjga,
£1 kiMr,
LaflNibeenelojo^

Lay oQsqtrillas,
La catarata,
«eguedady or
>ceguera,
BMigmniy
£1 oiegOy

IBA tartamudoy
La490pcovay

#0010^

«BtrppeadOy
)|»lljdo, ~

ftffBlfttPfflfi

%iind.
fmt^ed*

eToefwdnkeMs i*

crippled'
lOme^ftke^knbe.
left-handed*
\nzcOy\AB^i -egtiiiiiing'
wmcsii Umte^efone hand.
Biudoy ^Mmb.

aordo.

lico talle, fine stature.

Vtrtues and vicesy good'ani
had qualities^ of^ metk* — >
Viituaes y vicios, buenas
7 malas calidades de los
hombres.

£1 recatadoy catflf oi4^od!e9^
diestro; dexterous.

docil, docile.

vooAjm*Aaa»i

3«r

£1 gdan, goUtatt.

aiiaple, harmless.

9gudo> sharp,

▼i¥o^ sjfriighify.

suxH, SHhtk.

cfapcarreroj buffoon,

nedo, foolish,

astuto, craft ff,

hcOf mad,

malicjoso, maUcious.

tejneroso, fearful,

esjpantadizo, eas^ U be
frigUm^ed.

valiente, brave,

tonto, stupid.

&nt4stico, fatUasiiccd,

embustero, dscsitfuL

gtoaero, clowmsh,

revoUoaOf msdinous.

. bien criado, welUmed,

cortes, comrteous,

•gcave, gruvs.

justo. Just,

Snsdente, discreet,
esvergonzado^ iag^udsni,

fogosoj Jisr^f,
impertinente, impertinent,

importunoy tfouUesome,

Hgero, light,

descuidado, careless,

tejnerarioy rash,

afable^ qffabh,

amigable, friendly,

bizarro, brave,

caritativa, charitable,

casto, chaste,

constaDte, comstant.

devotOy devout,

diligente, diligent,

fiel, faUJ^l.

seneroao, generous,

bumilde^ humbk.

£1 fiU0eFie«rdioa»^ mere^feX*.

paciente, pmtknt.

vdiigiese, reUgious,

ambicioso, atnlntious,

soberbio, proud.

ilipocrita, hypocrite,

eobard^^. coward,

bolgazan, idle,

aMTo^ hmigbtif,

chismoso, tale^arer,

adulador, jlatterer,

goloso^ ghaton^

desleal^ treaoherous,
desagradecido, ungrate^
fuL

iahDmanOy inhumane.

iBselditte, insakfst,

llijuriaso, lewd,

pocfiado, positive,

perefiMM% slothftd.

prodigo, pi^odigal.

vano.

vmn.

magenegOf gwen to
women,
alravido, bolA

colerico^ passionate.
rabiQSo^ imtrageous,

alegre^ merry,

uiaDOy arrogant,

iadeciso, irresolute,

celoso, jealous,

addUero, adulterer,

rufiaa, ruffian,

matador, murderer,

Italteador, higkufuyman.
jurador, swearer,

calumaiador, slanderer.
murfDuradoTy oensurer,
becbicero, "" sorcerer,

tKamposou cheat.

VOCABULART.

El inc6Sta<W0y
ladroQ;
iBtero,
mentiroso,
peijuro,
perfido,
profano,
rebelde,
sacrUegOy
traidor^
malvadoy

ineegtnaiu.

thief.

pickpocket.

Uar.

pcTjurer.

perfidious.

^profane.

rebeL

taenKgeous.

traitor.

perfidious.

Of eating and drinking. —
Del comer y beber.

La coiAida,

cena,

£1 almuerzoy

La merienda,

colacion,

£1 banquette, einltertinnmenlt.

guest.

feast.

hunger.

thirst.

drunkard.

hard

drinker.

7 goodap'

convidadoy

conyite,
La hambre,

sed,
£1 borracboy

buen bebedor.

buen apetito

Las buenas ganas, ^ petite.

£1 g^oton, glutton.

pan, bread.

pan bianco, white bread.

pan candial, the whitest

bread.

pan bazo, brown bread.

' mollete, hot loaf.

pan fresco, new bread.

pan de todo trigo, whtaten

bread.

pan decenteno, ryebread.

£1 pan de cebada, barley
bread.
pan de a ven^ oaten bread..
pandemijo, millet bread.
pan de maiz, indian com
bread.
pan de levadura, leavened
bread,
biscocho, biscuit.

La migaja de pan, crumb of
bread.
masa, dough.

torta, cake or loaf

rosea, bread made like
a roU.
£! bunuelo, fritter.

La empanada, tart orpye.
rcame, meat.

£1 cocido, boiled meat.

asado, roasted meat.

estofado, stewed meat.
La came frita, fried meat.
carbonada, broiled meat.
pepitoria, giblets,

£1 picadillo, hash.

La cecina, hung meat.

£1 pemil, eljamon, ham.
camero, mutton.

La vaca, beef.

El cordero, hmb.

La temera, vetd.

El puerco, pork.

cabrito, kid.

tocino, bacon.

La piema de camero, leg of
mutton.
El brazuclode shoulder of
carnero, mutton.

lomo, loin.

pecbo, breast.

Las manos de carnero, sJteep^s
trotters.

VOCABULAftT*

La lueda de tenier% ^fiHet

of veal.

asadura, ihepbtck.

salcbicha, Boutage.

£1 salchichon, big muMge.

La morciUa, blood pidding.

iongdmuage.

broth.

paitage,
any sort

puches, ^ 9f P<^P»

£1 pisto, jelly-broths.

La carne fiambre, cold meat.

leche, milk.

nata, cream.

£1 suero, tdhey.

LoL mantecay butter.

£1 queso, cheese.

queso fresco, nao cheese.

requeson, curds.

cuajo, s^mnef.

La cuajada, mi'Mr hardened

EI pastel,
caldo,
Lasopa,
£1 potage,
Las papas, ^

El buevo,
La yema de
buevo,.

with rennet,
the egg.
the yolk of
megg.

elara de buevo^ the white

of an egg.

£1 boevo blando, soft egg.

huevo duro, hard egg.

biMtvo fresco, new egg.

biieyo en ciscara, ^g in

the shed.

buevo cocido, boiled egg.

bu#vo asado, roasted egg.

buevo estrellado, fried

egg.

buevo buero, addle egg.

23*

£1 huevo empoUado, egg
with a chicken in it.
Lew huevos de pescado^ the
spawn of fish.
buevos megidos, yoUssof
eggssitwed with
wine and sugar.
buevos y tonrezaos, coU
lops and eggs.
buevos revueltos, butter-
ed eggs.
La tortilla de buevos, omelet.
Los buevos de yolkeofeggs
faltriquera, in zheUs of
sugar.
buevos bilados, sweet
eggs spun out.
£1 sazonamieoto, seasoning.
La salmuera, brine.

Las especias, ^ices.

La pimienta, pepper.

El gengibre, ginger.

Los clavillos, cloves.

La canela, cinnamon.

nuez moscada, . nutmeg.
flor de especla, mace.
moataza, mustard.

£1 agraz, verjuice.

vinagre, vinegar.

aceite, oil.

La sal, salt.

£1 azucar, sugar.

Los escabecbes, pickles.
dulces, sweetmeats.

almibares, conserves'.
almibar, sugar boiled.
confites, comfits.

Las coQservas, conserves.
mermelada, marmalade.

perada, pears preserved.

270

VOCABULABY.

Las alcorcillas, ? aniseed

pastillas, ) sugar.

La naraojada^ candied

oranges. '

El ttirroD, sweetmeat.

Los barquillos 6 las suplica-

ciones, su>eet wafers*

KmnueloSy puffis*

La bebida, drink.

£1 vino, wine.

vino puro, pure wine,

vino vuelto, pricked wine.

vino moscatel, muscateU

wine*

vino tinto, red wine.

vino bianco, white wine.

vino aloque, |)a2e wine.

vino clarete, claret wine.

vino dulce y «te7ee< an<i

picante, sharp wine.

vmo anejo,

o/(i wine.

vino ligero, %Af twne,

vinazo, strong wine.

malvasia, malmsey.

aguapie, mixture of must

and water.

La hez del vino, wine lees.

£1 aguardiente, brandy.

La cerveza, beer.

sidra, cider.

aloja, meae^, methegUn.
El chocolate, chocolate.

te, ^ea.

Lalimonada, lemonade.

misteia, aitt«e brandy.
El cafe, coffee.

Of Clothes. — De los vestidos.

El pano, cloth.

pano fino, Jine cloth.

El pano tundido, shorn eiofk^

^"Kata, \ -'«'•

raja, ra«A ehth.

£1 sayal, sackcloth.

La frisa, frieze.

estamena, serge.

estofa, siufl

£1 tafetan, 'a#el^^.

raso, raso liso, satin.

tercio pelo, velvet.

damasco, damask.

brocado, brocade.

gorgoran, grogram.

La gasa, gauze.

Las lanillas, drugget.

El cendal, , crape.

camelote, camhiet.
La tela de oro, cUnth of gold.

£1 tripe, shag.

algodon, cotton.

fustan, fustian^

La muselina, muslin.

El lino, flax.

lienzo, linen.

. cambray, cand^rick.

La holanda> hoUand.

£1 ruan, French linen.

cdnamo, hemp.

terliz, ticken.

calicut, calico.

fieltro, fek.

angeo, canvtiss.

La lona, sailcloth.

bayeta, baize.

lana, wool.

£1 estambre, worsted.

La seda, silk.

£1 bocaci, buckram.

Unajoya, a Jewel.

hebOla, a buckle.
Los alamares, loops on coats.

VOCABULARY.

271

afringe.

Un ojal, a button-hole »

L.a bordadura, embroidery,
Ud boton, a button.

Una franja, 1
Un flueque, 3
Laspuntas, > ^

Lios encages^ 3
Una cinta^ a ribbon,

Un liston, a broad ribbon.
pasamano^ gold or sil-
ver lace.
ribete, an edging.

• sombrero, a hat.

La copa del sombrero, the
crown of the hat.
ala 6 falda del sombrero,
the brim of the hat.
£1 torzal 6 la trenciUa, the
hat-hand.
£1 plumage, feathers.

Un bonete, a cap.

gorro de noche, a night-
cap.
Una gorra, an oldfashr

ioned cap.
caperuza, a sort of cap.
montera, a hunting cap.
camisa, a shirt.

almilla, chupa, a waist'
coat.
Los calzoncillos, drawers.
Un jubon, a doublet.

Una manga, a sleeve.

manga perdida, a hang-
ing sleeve.
Las faldillas de jubon, the
skirts of a waistcoat.
Los calzones, breeches.

Una balona, a band.

Un corbatin, a neckcloth.
cuello, a collar.

coleto, a buff coat.

Una agujeta,

faltriquera,
Un bolsillo,
Las medias,

ligas,
Los ^apatos,

escarpines.
Las chinelas,
Un borCegul,
Las botas,

polainas,

espuelas,
Los punos, '
Las vueltas, |
Los vueltos, ^
Un tahali,
Unos tiros,
Una espada,
daga,
capa,
casaca,
Un guante,

cenidor,
Una pelaca,
Un peluquin,

panuelo,

a point.

a pocket.

a purse.

stockings.

garters,

shoes.

socks.

slippers.

a buskin,.

boots.

spatterdashes.

spurs.

- cujffs or ruffles.

a shoulder-beU.
a waist-belt,
a sword,
a dagger,
a cloak,
a coat,
a gtove.
a girdle.
a round ung.
a bag wig.
a pocket hand-
kerchief
Una ropa, ^

Un ropon, > a gown.

Una bata, )

ropa de levantar, a

morning gown.

Un pellico, ') a shepherd^s

Una zamarra, ^ jerkin.

For women, — Para mugeres.

Un tocado,
Una cofia,

escofia,
Un manto.

a head dress,
a cap,

a v&J.

272

Una saya, 7
basquina, ^
Un guardapies,
Unas cDaguaSy
Un avantal, 7
devantal, ^
goarda sol,
qutta sol,
reloj,
Unas tablillasy
Un espejo, a
Una bugeta,
Un manguitOy
Una cotiUa,
camisa,

VOCABDI.ABT.

bata,
Un chapin,
Uqqs zarcillosy

ablackgoHfn
or petticoat.
") an upper
5 petUcoat.

on apron,

apaniioly

an umh-eUa,

a watch.

tahUs.

loolamg^lius.

a UUk box,

a muff,

stays,

a shift,

amanik.

a gaum.

a clog.

sarongs.

Unas peadientes.
La gargantilla,
Unas manillas,
Unos braceletesy
Unas sortijas, 7
Unos anilfosy \
Las pedrerias.

pendtmi^.
necklace*

braceleis.

rings.

precious
sionte,
afan^

Un abanico,

Las calcetaSy/Areodstocfeiffig^.

£1 peinador, combing cloth.

Lospanales,

Una faja,
Los jugoeteS)
Una coBa^

steading

clouts,

aroOer,

play-things,

a cradle.

ama de leche, a wet

Losdiges,

toys.

[The beastSj fowlSy Jishes^ fruits^ herbsy roots^ ^c, thai are
eatablcy will he found under their respective names* —
Los ammales, aves, peces, frutas, yerbas, ralces,&c. eomes-
tibles, se hallarin debajo de sus nombres respectiyos.]

Un corderico, a lambkin,

t)UITO, ^

borrieo, > an ass,

asno, J
Una burrayboiTxca, a sJ&e ass,
Un puercoy ?

marrano, 5

lechon,

javali,

Beasts.^B^tias,

Una bestia mansa.

a tame

beast.

a wild

beast.

El ganadoy

cattle.

ganado mayor,

large

cattle.

Un toro,

a bull.

terneroo beceiro, aealf.

Una ternera,

a heifer.

Un buey,

an ox.

carnero,

a sheep.

Una oveja,

a ewe.

Un cordero,

a lamb.

Una baca, 1

haquilla, ^
Un bdfalo,
Una yegua,

yegiiecilla, ayoungmare
Un caballo, ahorse

oamello, a camel

hog,

a wild boar,

a pony, a

coU,

a buffalo,

a mare.

TOCABULABT.

27S

Un gato, a cat.

garanon, a stallion.

cabailo castrado, a geld-
ing.
cabaUo entero, a stone-
horse.
cabaJlo corredor, a race'
horse.
cabailo de mano^ a led
horse.
cabailo de posta, a post
horse.
cabailo de alquiler^ a hack*
ney horse.
cabaUo rebelde, a restive
horse.
cabaUo desbocado, a hard*
mouthed horse.
cabaUo medroso, a start"
ing horse.
cabaUo tropezador, a stum-
hling horse.
cabaUo que sacude^ ajoU'
ing horse.
cabaUo asmdtico, a bra-
ken winded horse.
cabaUo indomito, a horse
that cannot be tamed.
cabaUo saltador, a leaping
horse.
cabailo bayo, a bay horse.
bayo castano, a chesnut
bay.
bayooscuro, abrownbay.
bayodorado, a bright bay.
picazo, a pyed horse.
nicio rodado^ a dapple

de color de ga- cream-

muza, colour.

alasan, a sorrel.

Un alazan tostado^ a dark
sorrel.
overo, a\white and red
spotted horse.
rubican, a grey horse.
Una cabra^ a she goat.

Un cabrito, a kid.

cabron, a he goat.

perro, a dog.

perro de caz% m hound.
perro de muestra, a set-
tif^ dog.
sabueso, a blood hound.
podenco, > a setting
perdiguero, ^ dog.

perro callado, a hound
thai does not open well.
perro bajo, a terrier.
galgo, a greyhound.

lebrely a sort o^ercedogs^
resembling greyhoundsy
common in Ireland.
perro ventor, a finder.
perro de agua, a water-
or lamediUo, dog.

mastin, a mastiff.

perro de a shepherd's
pastor, dog.

perro velador, a house dog.
perriUo de falda, a lap-
dog.
alano 6 dogo, a buUrdog.
barbudiUo, a spaniel.

perro raposero, or jateo,
small setting dog
for fox hunting.
gozque, ') little dog kepi
gosquejo, ^ in a house.
conejo, a rabbit.

Una hacanea, a pad.

Un muleto, a young mul^.

274

VOCABUftABV.

Ua nmlo, a h^rnnk .

Um aula, a ske^nuh.

Un poiro, u co2f.

poUiaOi ail au^s coU.

gamoy afaUoto deer,
caclKNpro de cierv<v <>

Las astaa de cler¥o, the horns

ef^deer.

£1 raslio 6 las pisadas de ci-

ervo, ^Ae IracA; e^* a 9kig,

Una comadreja, a weatseL

Un tejon, « ftodjg'er.

Una gamuza, a wild goat,

cabra monies^ aroebitck.

Ungate de algalia, a civtt<at.

Una dama, u doe.

ardiUa, a eqmrrel

Un elefante, on e&phoait.

Una fiuna6gardoDa,amiirft».

Un mono, a mstikey,

gkaie, €Im i^.

arminio 6 arminoy on er*

eraoy a Ae%€4p^.

Una liebre, a i&ore.

liebredlla, a fevered
Un liron, a iformotMe.

Una rata, a rat,

zorra 6 raf«MAy a^bo;.
Un raton, • mmue.

topoy II mo/!?.

Una bienn, a hyena.

Un leopardo^ a leopard,

leon, a Uon,

Una leona, « /loiieM.

Un lecmdllo, a KoM^ewhelp,

lobo, a too^

lobo cerval, a Ipnx.

•so. a 6ean

Un oaillo, a kor'^ m^

Una pantara, m fomther.

Un rinoceroiite^aHhiafloa^os.

tigre, a tiger,

javali^ pa«iCBi m wiU

montesy boar.

Las navajaso bM celniOasde

jBsnliy the tugks of a wild

imar,

£1 nasrajal de javalf , the soil

of a wibl bear.

La jabalina, a wild sow.

Creatures ^hai creep on the
earth, — ^Aaimales que se
amtstran.

VnaaespieDle, amrpeni.
seifiiente alada, a flying
SKTpent,

Un dragQik,

ispid,
Una Guiebra,
Ua cocodnllay

a dragon.
att«sp.
a snake,
neroeodile,
em alligator,
Una lai^arty% ^

Mdamanywsay >alizard,
Un lagartOy j.

Una^bora, a viper,

Uii nAmte^aOf ayowsg mper.

Amph^ous creaiuree,'^Aiur,
males aa#fi»io6.

Ub bivare or castxx, a beo'
ver or castor,
Una nutria, or ntttra^ an otter,
Un biq^opotamoy a rioer^
horse,
Una tortu^fa, a tortoise.

VMABVLABir.

«7*

Uogil4p«g9» alandierioue.

Uo9 «r8«a^ a wfider.

arafiuela, a litile.^ider.

Garooma, aweadworm.

om^y a oa^erfUhr,
Un arador, a toMft^orm.

•floari^ajo, a beetle.

caracol, a enaiL

Una hooniga, aft oii^, a |n»-

mire.

Uii grillo, a cricket,

xevoltoOy 4111 iiMei)^ ^Aal

Una liaodrey «m^

pulga, ajlea,

chinche, a bug.

langosta, uJocuaL

Una tahmtula, a ^oroiitefa.
potilia, Ufwth.

nwica, «Ji^

Unato^'J ^^'"^

Una abeja, a 6ee.

Uoawoscada, ^ ^S^'-^My-
Ua singaoo, - a cirone.
Una mosca de berro^ godfiy.

cigarra, a groMhopper.

.tibano, alMrnet.

hicema or luciernaga, a
firerfiy.

Uaa mariposa^ uimttntrfiy.

vaquilla de 4ko^ « My-

hird.

Un zaaoadoy a gnat.

eojamliiv, « mmbtin.

Birds. — Aves.

U4aa iguila.

aneagk.

Ua aguilucho,

a§%€0glet.

buitre,

« tnOiure.

esmerejon.

a merlin.

gavilan, ai

tparrow-hawk.

mochueloy

« kam-awl.

faalcan,

afaleon.

torzaelo,

a mide falcon.

girifalte.

^ger^faleon.

alootan.

M tanner.

saciey

Msa&re.

Ujwgarza^

a heron.

garrota,

o emoH neponm

Un milanoy

a kite.

ouervo, a $i«ow craven.

Uaa oarneja.

a rook.

oalandria,

a lark.

Un aguzanieve

, awqgiail.

canarioy

a canary-bird.

gHguero,

aUnnet.

Unjmirlo ^

Una merla, ]►

a blackhird.

mida, )

UnpiozoD,

aekafinch.

raisenor,

a nightingale.

verderoD^

agreen4nrd.

papagayo,
loro,

> a parrot.

Una cotorra,

3

urraca,
Un grajo,

a magpie,
a daw.

Unalechuxa,

an owl.

276

VOCABULABT.

Un muTciclago, «*«*•

Unmochuelo, W<w«.

Uoa comaya, antght-raven.
Ungrajo, a chough.

Unachotacabras/igoirf«McA«T.
Un4nade, aiwWdtfc^.

Una cerceta, « Jf«-

Un chorlito, a curheu.

caervo marino, a carmo-

pato,
ganso, y
4nsar, >
insaroy )
cernicalo,
Una fulga,
Un avion,
Una gabiota,
Un somorgujon,
Una chocba, >
gallinaciega, ^
Un tordoy

estornino,
Una eodomis>
Un capon,
gallo,
Una gallinai
Un polio,
Una polla,
Un pavo, 7
Una pava, y
Un francolin,
faisan,
zorzal,
hortolano,
gorrion,
Una perdiz,
Una paloma,
Un pichon,

rant,
a duck.

a goose.

a kestrih
a moor'hen.
a martin,
a gull.
aSver.
a wood-
cock,
a thrush,
a starUng.
a quail,
a capon,
a cock,
a hen.
a chicken,
a pullet.

a turkey.

agodufit.

a pheasant.

a thrush.

an ortolan.

a sparrow.

a partridge.

a dace.

a pigeon.

Un alcioo, a Mng^hier.

Una golondrina, a swallow.

Un avestruz, a»o«trtc^

Una ciguena, a stork.

Un cuclillo, a cuckoo.

cisne, * swan.

petirojo, a red-robin.

Una gruUa, « crane.

pczpita, a wagtail

Un abuiUo, a lapwing.
Una oropendola, a witwaU.

Un vencejo, a martlett.

abejaruco, a titnu)>use.

Una abutarda, a bustard.

Un tordo loco^ an owseL

pelicano, a pelican.

fenix, aphenix.

chirlo, a woodpecker.

pico verde, a green beak.

frailiUo, « plover.

reyezuelo, a wren.

mergo, apujpn.

palomino, ayoung pigeon.
Una tortola, a turtle dove*

Parts of a Btrrf.— Partes dc
una Ave.

El pico, the beak.

Una plama, a feather.

La plumaza, the down.

ala, «»«^-

Las penolas, 7 quiUs.

plumas, S , ^

El pie, the foot.

La cola, ^*« <«*'

El buche, Ike craw.
Lasgarras,7 claws^ or talr

unas, S ^'^'

La rabadiUa, the rump.

pechuga, the breast.

entxepechuga, the brawn.

VOCABULART.

277

Fi8he9.^

-Feces.

Un alburno^

a bleak.

s^balo,

a shad.

Una anchova.

an anchovy.

anguila.

an eel.

baUena,

a whale.

Un barbo,

a barbel.

mero,

a halibut.

luso,

a pike.

Una carpa,

a carp.

Un calamarejo,

a calamary.

talpaire^ a milier^s thumb.

caballo marino, a sear

horse.

congrio,

a conger.

delfin,

a dolphin.

dorado.

a gilt-iack.

£1 doradillo,

the gold-fish.

Un lenguado,

asole.

Una langosta,

a lobster.

Un esturion,

a sturgeon.

gobio,

^ gudgeon.

harenque.

a herring.

Una ostra, ?
Un ostion, \
Una lamprea.

an oyster.

a lamprey.

langostillay

aprawn.

Un lobo,

a bass.

Una sarda,

a mackarel

marsopa,

a porpoise.

Elabadejo,

poor jack.

La merluza,

fresh cod.

El bacaUao,

dried cod.

Una almeja.

a muscle.

ortiga pez.

a stinging

fish.

pcrca,

a perch.

Un pulpoy

a polypus.

Una raya,

a thomback.

liza.

a skate.

Una sardina,

a pilchard.

Un salmon.

salmon.

24

Una trucha, trout.

gibia, cuttlefish.

tenca, a tench.

Un atuD, a tunny fish.

Una tremielga, a cramp fish.

Un rodaballo, a turbot.

Parts of a fish. — Partes de
un pez.

El hocico, the snout.

Las agallas, the giUs.

alas, the fins.

escamas, the scales.

espinas, the bones.

La concha, the shell.

Los huevos de pez, the hard

row.

La leche, the soft row.

Trees. — A'rboles.
Un albaricoque, an apricot-
tree.
almendro, an almond»tree.
durazno, a nectarine-tree.
guindo, a cherry4ree.
■-. -i 1 cerezo, a heart cherry'
tree.
castafio, a chesnut-tree.
cidro, a citron-tree.

membrillero, a quince-
tree.
serval, a service-tree.
Una palma, a palm-tree.
higuera^ . a fig-tree.
Un azufeifo, ajujub-tree.
granado, apomegranate-
tree.
liroon, a lemon-tree.

moral, a mulberry-tree.
nispero, a medlar-tree.
avellano, a hazeUnut-tree.

t78

VOCABULARY.

Un nogal, a wainHi-4r€e.

Sno, I --«"-^--

acebuche^ a wild alive-'

tree.

oarftDJo, an €range4ree.

ciruelo, a plunhtree*

peral, a pear-tree,

manzano, an apple-4ree.
klamo negro, black pop-

tar-tree.
ilamo bianco, white pop-

Uw'tree.
cedro, a eedar'4ree.

sabuco, an tdder-tree,

vTsrl '"•-^^«-

£1 cornizo, the comiUree,
cipres, the cypress-tree,
6bano, the ebomy-iree.
arce, the mapk4ree.

La haya, the beech-tree.

£1 fresno, the ash4ree,

acebo, the holmrtree.

tejo, the yeuhtree,

laurel, the laurel4ree,
alcornoque, the corktree.
olmo, the elnhtree,

pino, thepineorjir^ree,

Un plintano, a plane4ree,
sauce, a wiUow4ree.

Una teja, a Unden-tree.

Shnd^. — Matas.

El agno casto, agnus castus.
aliso, the hte tree.

bdlsamo, the balsam,

boj, theboa>tree.

La madre selva, the honey-*
suckle.

La zammora, tke blacks
henry buek.

hiniesta, broom.

uva espina^ goomkttry^
bush.

adelfa, yedra, try.

£1 bnisco, butcher's broom.

La regaiiz, kquorice.

£i alhocigo, the pistachio^

tree,

romero, rosemary.

rosal, rose-4ree.

La sabina, euoin.

£1 tamariz, iamarishtree.
La alfaeffa, privet,

vina, vine,

lalmisca, wild vine.

Una parra, a wall vine,

£1 mirto, arrayan, myrtle.

Una parra de corinto, currant-

tree.

Fruits. — ^Fni^s.

Un albericoque, on e^prieoi.

Una almendra, an abnond.

Un madrono, a wild etraw-

berry.

darazno, a nectarine,

Una guinda, a cherry.

cereza, a heart-cherry,
castana, a chemui,

cidra, a citron.

Un membrillo, a quince.

Unaserba, service-apple.

Un ddtil, date,

^^ Wgo, a^.

Una breva, early fig.

azufaifa, ajyjvib,

granada, apomegraneae.

Un limon, a lemon,

Una mora, a muBerry.

niezpola, a medlar,

avellana. a hazel^mt.

VOCABULARY*

279

Uoa niiiez, a walnut,

aceitiina, an oHve,

naranja, an orange.

cir^ela, a plum.

ciruela pasa, a prune*

pera, a pear.

bei^amota, a bergamot.

manzana^ an apple.

camuesa, a pippin.

maDzana de San Juan^ St.

John^s apple.

Vn melon, a melon.

Una bellola^ on acorn.

algarroba, a carob.

alcaparra, a caper.

zarzamora, a blackberry .

Ud tamarindo, a tamarind.

piaoD^ a kernel ofpine^

trees.

Una uva, a grape.

c^cara de nuez, &c« a

shell of a nut, Sfc.

tela de granada, film of

a pomegranate.

Un pimpollo, a sucker^ or

sprout of a vine.

sarmiento^ a twig of a

vine.

La yema de viaa, the bud of

a vine.

Los zarcillos de la vid, the

tendrils of a vine.

Unpdmpanoy a vine branch.

renuevoy a young shoot

of a vine.

racimo de ovas, a bunch

of grapes.

Unapepitadelauva, agrape^

stone.

Podar, to prune a vine.

Cavar, to lay open the roots.

R odrigar, to prop a vine.

EJ rodrigoD^ . Iwe prop.

Terciar la vina, to dig a

third titne about a vine.

Rozar, to weed.

Una raiz, a root.

Las hebras de ralz^ the fibres

of a root.

arraigar, to take root.

£1 tronco, the trunk of a tree.

Unrenuevo, a sprig.

La corteza del drbol; the bark.

£1 zumoy the sap.

mohoy the moss.

ramoy the branch.

Una hoja, a leaf.

£1 hueso de fruta, the stone

of fruit.

Las mondaduras de fruta, tlie

parings of fruit.

El pezon, the stalk.

ingerir, to ingraft.

ingerir de canuto, totnoc-

ulaie.

Un ingertOy a graft.

La pepita, the seed of fruit.

Com and its parts. — Trigos
y sus partes.

El trigo, wheat.

£1 candial, the best wheat.

trigo rubion, red wheat.
La escandta, bearded wheat.
El herren, meslin.

La espelta, spelt.

£1 centeno, rye.

La cebada^ barley,

avena, oats.

£1 arroz, rice.

niijo^ millet.

maiz, Indian com.

Las legumbresy pulse.

Ub alveijon, a great vHch.
Lps garbanzos, Spamshptae,

290

VOCABULARY.

Las judias
Los guisantes,
Unanaba,

lentcja,
IJn altramuz,
Un frijol,
Las cicerchas,
La c^scara,
£1 hoUejo,

peas.

a horse bean.

a lentil

a lupine.

French bean.

wild tares.

the shell.

the hush

RootSyplantSf and herbs. —

Rakes, plantas, e yerbas.
KI agenjo, toormtvood.

apioy celery.

ajo, garlick.

eneldo, dill.

anfs, aniseed.

La alegria, sesame.

Los armuelles, orach or gold-
en fiowet^s.
Una flJcachofa, an artichoke.
Un espiirago, asparagus.
£1 abrotano; southernwood.

La acelga,
Un bledo,
La borraja,
Las zanahorias,
La voleza, >
El perifoljo, ^
Un hongo, ^
Una seta, \
chirivia,
chicoria, ^
endivia, >
escarola, }
col, berza,
Un repollo,

white beet,
a blite.
borage,
carrots.

chervil

a mushroom.

a parsnip.

succory^
endive.

a cabbage.

roundhead cab-

bage.

Una berza crespa, a savoy.
Un broton, a sprout.

Una coliflor, q cauliflower.
calabaza, a pumpkin.
Un pepinoy a cucumber.

Un culantro, coriander.

culantrillo, capiUaire.
peregll marino, samphire.
mBsXwenxiygarden cresses.
Una escalona, a scalUon.
espinaca, spinage.

Un hinojoy fennel,

hoblon, hops.

Una lechuga murciana 6 cer-
raja, a cabbage4ettuce.
lechuga crespa, a curled
lettuce.
Un nabo, a turnip.

nabal, a turnip JiehL

Una cebolla, an onion.

acetosa, } ,

acedera',5 '"^^

romaza, hng^ sorrel.
El peregil, parsley.

Un puerro, a leek.

Una verdolaga, purslain.
Unos ruiponceS| rampions.
Una roqueta, rocket.

ruda, rue.

salvia, sc^e.

criadilla de tierra, a
tntfie.
mejorana, sweet marjo-
ram.
Un agarico, agarick.

Una agriDionia, agrimony.
El SLcibsLrJuicefrom the aloes.
La angelica, angelica.

celidonia, celandine.

betonica, betony.

bistorta, snakewort.

manzanilla, camomile.
£1 culantrillo de pozo, maid-
en hair.
La centinodia, centinody.
verbasca, "l wolf blade, at
£1 gordolobo, ^ great lung
fcort.

VOCABULAfit.

281

La amiapola, P^PV*

El dictaniOy dittany ^

La coniza pulguera, fieabane.
£1 eleboro^ hsUebore.

tkrtago, spurge.

La genciana^ gentian.

£1 camedrio de agua, ^er-

mander.

La grama, ' dog's grass.

yerba puntera, house4eeh.
£1 beleao, hen bane.

marubio, horehound.

La matricaria, feoerfew.
Las malvas, mallows.

La corona de rey^ meUlot.
£1 torongil, balm.

mercurial, mercury.

Las milhojas, ^ ' ../. ..

Un ciento en rama, S "^

£1 corazoncillo, St. John's

worty or grass.

nardo, spikenard.

tabaco, tobacco.

oreganoy wild marjoram.
La higuera, Jig'tree.

• P'riftf^.^ peaUort,.
vidnola, S

cepa caballo, ^ ground

una de asno, ^ thistle.

dprmidera, P^PPV*

rosa montes, peony.

£1 plitano, . plantain.

polipodio, polypody.

agenuz, ; Ushopswort.

La neguilla^ ^ ^

yerba cidrera, briony^

£1 poleo, pennyroyal.

La sanguinaria, bloodwort.

sanicula, s(tnicle.

£1 satirion, ragwort.

La saxifraga, saxifrage.

Laescabiosa, scabwort.

escamonea, scamnumy.
cebolla albarrana, wild

sena,

senna,
groundsel,
valerian.

yerba cana,

Valeriana,

verbena, vervain.

£lllanten, grass plantain.

anco, 6 siete en rama, sept-
foil

acanto, ^

La blanca urcina, > bearsfoot.

yerba giganta, }
£1 aconito, wolfsbane.

Las ovas del mar, sea-weed.
La cola de caballo, horse-tail.

£1 amor del hortelano, ^ bur-
Los lampazos, ^ dock.

Las rabacas, water^parsley.
£1 tamarizsilvestre, tamarisk
shrub.

asarabdcara, asarabacca.

calaminto, cat-mint.

La cana, a reed.

donadilla, mule's fern.

£1 cafiamo,

lino,
La cicuta,
£1 comino,

hemp.

flax.
hemlock,
cummin.

La yerba de ciervo, hart's

fodder.

£J helecbo, fern.

La palomilla, fumitory.

Los amores secos, ^ clover

£1 trebol, ^ ^a««.

El yesgo, danewortj dwarf .

elder.

junco, rii«A.

24*

282

VOCABULARY.

La cerraja, 90w^ki»He.

mandJr&gora^ mandrake.

yerba mora^ nightshade.

correhuela, knoi-grast.

ortiga, nettle.

£1 rufbarbo, rhubarb.

La velesa, pepperwort, dit-

tander.

Elalazor, > .^jr^««

azafraii,^ ''''^'^'

La jabonera, soap-wort.

alfalfa, damely or cockle.
La albabaca^ sweet basil.

yerba buena, mint,

£1 serpol, wild thyme,

tomillo, thyme.

Flowers, — Flores.

El amaranto, vehet-flower.
La anemone* .anemone,

£1 Jacinto, hyacinth,

jazmin, jessamine.

La jonquilla, jonquil,

azucena, the lily,

maya, the daisy.

El narciso, daffodil,

clave], la clavellina, the
pink.

aleli, gilHflower.

La espadana, flag-flower.

campanula^ blue^^ottle,

vellorita, the cowslip,
£1 raniinculo, ranunculus.
La rosa, the rose.

cien hojas, the hundred
leaf rose,

taravilla, marigold.

El girasol, sunflower.

tulipan, the tulip.

La violeta, the violet.

Vn capullo^ a rose-bud.

Co£tmr«.— Ck^ores.

Adjectiret agree widi Snbstandves.

Morado, purple*

Un color de aurora, auroTOr-

COlOUTm

Blanco, white.

Color de ladrillo, briek-colour.
Azul, blue.

Azul celeste, Kg^ht blue.

Azul turqui, dark blue.

Columbino, dove colour.

Cetiro^ lemon colour.

Color gamuza, light yellow.
Color de cereza, jSlemot.
Color encendtdoy^omecofofir
Color de fuego, Jire colour.
Carmesf, crimson.

Pardo, ^''«y-

Ceniciento, ash colour.

Amarillo, yellow.

Encarnado, ^

Colorado, > red.

Rojo, )

Escarlata, Grana, scarlet.
Leonado, tawny.

Negro, black.'

Anaranjado, orange colour.
Aceitunado, olive colour.
Color de rosa, rose colour.
Bermej on , reddish.

Verde, green.

£1 matiz de colores, the shade
of colours.
Color de mar, sea green.

Parts of a kingdom. — ^Partes

de un reyno.
Una proviacia, a province.

ciudad, a city.

villa, a town.

aldea, a village.

Un lugar, a STioU place.

YOCABCLART^

283

PartM of a city. — Partes de

una ciudad.
Una casa^ a house.

tienda, . a shop,

iglesia, a church

capilia^ a chapeL

Un altar an cdtar,

palacio, apahice.

hospital, an hospital

La casa de la villa, or del a-
yuntamiento, the town house.
Un tribunal, a court of Justice
arsenal, an arsenal.

Una academia, an acadetny.
Un colegio, a college.

Una calle, a street.

Un callejon, an alley.

Una calleja, callejuela, a lane.
Un raercado^ a market.

Una camiceria, a slaughter-
house.
encrucijada, a cross way.
Jonja, bolsa, an exchange
c4rcel, a prison.

Los muros, las murallas, walls
puertas, gates.

fortificaciones, fortificar
tions.
Una plaza, a square.

plazuela, a little square.

Of the inhabitants of cities.

De los moradores de una

ciudad.

Un nino, a child.

muchacho, a boy.

Una much^cha, a girl.

Un mozo, oiocito, a youth.

hombre, a man.

Una muger, a woman.

Un viejo, an old man.

Una vieja, an old woman.
Un cojo, lame of one leg.

Un manco, hwte of one hand.
ci^go, blind.

sordo, deaf.

zurdo, left-handed.

magistrado, a magistrate.
noble, } ,,
hidalgo, \<*«oblenuin,

CBhallerOy knight y or gen-
tleman,
tendero. a shopkeeper.
mercader, a trader.

comerciante, > a mef-
negociante, ^ chant.
£1 poUacho,

vulgacho,
La plebe, )

canalla,
Un artesano,

mec^nico.

thepopulace.
the mob.

the rabble,
a tradesman,
a mec/ianic.
jornalero, ajourneyman.
labrador, a farmer.

Una labradora, a farmer's
wifey or daughter.
Un aldeano, a countryman.
Una d\AeBxaiyacountry woman
Un pfcaro, a rogue.

esclavo, a slave.

platero, a goldsmith.
librero, a bookseller.

impresor, a printer.

barbero, a barber.

mercader de seda, a mer-
cer.
mercader de lienzo, a lin-
en-draper.
mercader de paiio, a wool-
len draper.
sastre, a tailor.

Una costurera, a seamstress j
a maniua^maker.
Un sombrerero, a hatter.
calcetero, a hosier.

^apatero, a shoemaker.

284

VOGABULAB.T.

Un remendoD, a eoUer.

berreroy a blackgmith.

albeitar, afarrier.

cemjeroj a smiik,

Una lavaoderai akumdre»$.

^S:1 •"••*'^"

Un parteroy a man^midMnfe.

medicoy a jthyncian,

embu8terO| a cheat.

charlatan, a quack,

cinijanoy a surgeon.

3a€a muelasy a deniist.

siUerOy a saddler.

carpintero, a carpenter.

peon, a ,'abourer.

albafiil, a bricklayer.

pintor, a painter.

panadero, a baker.

caraicerO) a butcher.

frutero, a fruiterer.

Una verdulera^ an herb woman
Un pastelero, a pastry cook.

tabernero, a vintner.

cerveceroy a brewer.

mesoneroy an innkeeper.

relogpro^ a watchmaker.

pregonero, a crier.

joyero, a jeweller.

boticario^ an apothecary.

bubonero, a pedlar.

vidriero, a glazier.

carbonero, a collier.

jardinero, a gardener.

letrado, a lawyer.

procurador, a solicitor j

an attorney.

abogado, a counssUor at

law.

juez, a judge.

carcelero, a jailer.

ve^dugo, a hangman.
cereroy a wax-chandler.

Vd gaaapan, *)

esportiliero, > aporter.
mandadero, )
rene^don de vestidos, a
botcher.
latarabuelo, a grandfor
therms grandfather,
bisabuelo, great grand-
father,
a grandfather,
afather,

abnelo,
padre,
Una madrei
Un hijoy
Una bija,
Un nietOy

a mother,
a son.
a daughter,
a grandson.

bisnieto, a great grandson

bermanoy - a brother.

ctinadoy a brother in /aw.

padastro, a stepfather.
Una madrastra, a step mother.
Un suegro, afather in law.
Una nuera, a daughter in law
Un yemo, a son in law.

pruno bermano, a cousin-
german.

tio, an uncle.

sobrino, a nephew.

primo segundo, a second
cousin.

marido,
Una muger,
Un novio,
Una novia,

a husband.

a wife.

a bridegrooot.

a bride.

Un despoaado, one betrothed,

abijado, a godson.

padrino, a go^ather.

Una madrina, o goSnather.

Uncompadre, 1 afather and

Unacomadre, ^ mother inGod

Un companero, a partner.

camarada, a companion,

cofirade, a brother of the

same pious society.

VOCABULART*

285

XJn mellizoy a twin.

Una cofradla^ a guilds or «o-
ciety.
tertulia^ a society^ a club.
comunidad^ community,
Un huerfano^ an orphan.
solteroy a bachelor.

heredero, an heir.

ayo, a tutor.

curador^ a guardian.
Una viuda, a widow.

Un faermano de lecbe, a fos-
ter brother.
hi jo de lapiedra^esposito,
o echadizo, a foundling.
nino supuesto, a supposi'
titious child,
bastardo, a bastard.

liijo natural^ 6 de ganancia^
a natural son.
Una doncella,. a maiden.
muger casada, a mar-
ried woman.
panda, afytn^-tft woman
ama de leche^a wet nurse.
ama de Haves, a house^
keeper.
manceba, a concubine.

Of a house J and aU that be-

longs to it. — ^De una casa,

y todo lo perteneciftite &

ella.

Una casa, a house.

Un solar, aground of a

house.

cimiento, a foundation.

Una pared, a wall.

Un tabique, a light wall.

patio, a courty or yard.

La fachada, the front.

Un alto,andar/i story orjhor.

portal, a j^ch.

Una ventana, a window.
Un entresuelo, a lowfoor.
zaquizami, or cielo, a cit-
ing; also the place be-
tween the ceiling and
the roof of a house ; a
cockloft.
desvan, a garret.

arteson,ait arched ceiling.
Una boveda, a vault.

escalera, a stair case.
Un escalon, a step.

tejado, a roof.

Las tejas, tiles.

Los ladrillos bricks^

Las pizarras, slates.

La puerta, the door.

Un pasadizo, 6 passage.
corral, a court-yard.
trascorral, a back yard*
Una cdmara, a chamber.
Un aposento,")
Una pieza, i
Un cuarto, f
Una estancia, )

antic4mara, an aniichamr
ber.
trascuadra, a backroom:

a roomy
a chamber.

a hall

a gallery.

a closet.

a study.

a cupboard

sala,

Un corredor,

retrete,

estudio,

armario, \

Una alhacena, I

Un guarda ropa, a wardrobe.

Una alcova, an alcove.

Un balcon, mirador, a Wcony

Una azot^a, the fat roof of a

house, a terrace.

Un camaranchon, a cockloft.

Una torre, a tower.

bodega, un sotano, a eel-

lar.

286

VOCABUliAEX.

Una reposterla, a buthr^s
room.
despeosa^ a pantry.
cocina, a kitchen.

eaballeriza, a ttable.
perrei ia, a dog kennel.
Ud palomar, a dove^iouse.
gallinero, a ken roost.
jardin, a garden.

parque, a park,

La privada, necesaria; the
privy.
corooilla del edificio, the
top of the building.
£1 ripioy rubhiSi.

Una ripia, a shingle.

£1 ala de tejado, the eaves
of the roof.
La canal, the gutter.

£1 lunbral, the threshold.
Los bastidores de la puerta,
the frame of the door.
£1 postigo, the side door.
Los quicios 6 goznes, hinges.
Una cerradura, a lock.

Un candado, a padlock.

El pestillo, the bolt of a lock.
Un cerrojo, a bolt.

Una Have, a key.

ventanilla^ a little win-
dow.
aldaba, a latch.

La tranca de una puerta, the
bar of a door.
Las guardas de la Have, the
wards of a lock.
£1 canuto de una Have, the
pipe ofa^key.
La vidriera, the glass of a
unndow.
Las rejas de una ventana, the
bars of a toindow.

Una escalera de caraeol^ a
winding stair case,
Los rellanos, 6 las roesetas de
escalera, the landing-

places of stairs.
£1 descanso de una escaiera,
the resting place of statm.
Una grada,un escaloo, a step.
escalera secreta, back-
stairs.
viga, a beam.

Un vigon, a girder^ or

main beam.
Una tabla, a bocfrd.

Un crucero, a rafter.

ladrillo, a brick.

La parod maestra, the main

WMtt.

pared de en medio, the

party walL

Una pared de cal y canto, a

wall of lime and stone.

Un tabique, a partition walL

La cal, limey or plaster.

argamasa, mortar.

encostradura de una pared,

the plaster of a walL

£1 yeso, fine white lime.

jalbegue, white wash.

Una mesa, a table.

Un banco, a bench.

Una ailla, a chair.

silla de brazos, an arm

chair.

Untaburete, a chair without

hack or arms to it.

sitial, a stooL

banquillo, a bench,

Una caja, a box,

area, un arcon, a chest.

Un cajon, a case of drawers,

tirador, . a drawer^

▼^ABTTLAfcY.

287

Vn eseritanoy a eertOoire.

Una cama, a bed.

Un lechO) a c6uch,

Una aitnadtira or un made-

raje de cama^ a bed-stead.

£1 cielo de cama, the bed's

tester.

Las cottinasde caina, the bed-

eurUxifu.

tl roda pies, the fringe of

abed.

Uti tapete^ una afibmbra, a

carpet.

Las ftibanas, the sheets.

£1 cobertor, oounterptme.

Las idmehadas, piBows.

La tapiceria, tapestry.

Una pintura, a picture.

Vn espejo, a Jookinff-glass.

candelerb, a canSksftick.

Las despabiladeraS; snuffers.

Una arafia, a branch of^rys-

tad to holdmaHy candles.

La yesca, tinder.

Una paju^; a match.

Un pedernal, a flint.

esltitbon, the steel to strike

fire with.

a chamberpot.
a mattress.
a quilt or cov-
erlet,
a cot.

orinaly
colchon,
Una colcha,

Un catre,

Una cama de viento, afield

bed,

, La testera de cama, the bed's

head.

Las columnas de cama, the

bedposts.

Un jvergon, a straw-bed.

Una estera, a mat,

Un <!alentador de cama, a

warming-pan.

Una chimenea, a chimney.
Un respiradero, 6 canon de
chimenea, the flue of a
chimney.
Los morillos, the andirons.
El fuelle, the bellows^

Las tenazas, the tongs.

Unapala or un badil, a shovel.
Un guardaAiego, a fender.
biombo, a skreen.

urgador, atizador, apoker,
•Una olla, a porric^'pot.
cobertera, a pot-lid.
£1 asa, the ear teapot.

Un puchero, a pipkin.

cucharon, a ladle.

Una caldera, a kettk.

Un escalfador, ^ a chafing
braserillo, \ dish.

Las trebedes, a trevet.

Un hornillo, a cooking-stove.
homo, an oven.

Una sarten, a frying pan.
•Un cazo, a saucepan.

Una cazuela, a little pan.
espumadera, a skimmer.
Las parrillas, a gridiron.
Un coladero, a sieve.

rallo, a grater.

Una mechera, a larding pin,
Un asador, a spit,

Una aceitera, alcuza/ an oil^
pot,
vinagera, a cruet,

Un almirez,mortero, a mortar,
Una mano de mortero, apes-
tie.
redoma, a vial.

Un sumidero, a sink.

cintaro, a pitcher.

bacin, a close-stool pan.
Una albomia, a great earth-
en pan*

288

VOCABULART.

Unabcrrada,? a bucket or

Un cubo,
Una Cuba,
La legiBj colada,
Eljabon,
La levadttra,
Una rodilla, a coarse cioth.
Un estropaio, a dishclout
Lapaladelhorno^ thepeelof
the oven.

pail

a tub,

lye.

eoap.

leaven.

harina,
£1 salvado^
Una artesa,
Los manteies,
Una servilleta,

mealfflour.

bran.

a tray.

table clothe.

a napkin.

Un aguamanQy a water^ug,
Unaaknofia^ an earthen jug.
toailay a towel.

Los platos, the platee.

Un cuchHlo, a knife.

tenedor, afork.

saleroy a salt-cellar.

plato grande^ a dish.

Una escudilla, a porringer.

cuchara, a spoon.

Un tajador, a choppingbhck.

jarro, a mug.

Una taza, a cup.

salvilla, a salver.

Un fiasco,' a flask.

Una botella, a bottle.

Un vaso de vidrio, a tumbler,
Una fuente, un gran plato, a
basin.
Un monda dientes, > a tooth

escarba dientes, ^ pick.

mayordomo, a steward.

trinchante, a carver.

secretario, a secretary <,

camarero, a chamberlain.

dispensero, a purveyor.

capellan,. a chaplain.

Hmosnero, an almoner.

Unpage, apc^e.

lacayo, afootman.

cochero, a coachman.

mozo de caballos, a groom.

caballerizo, a gentleman
of the horse.

copero, a aqf^arer.

maestre sala, a sewer.

bodeguero,> ^^^

repostero, 5

halconero, afakoner.

cocinerO; a cock.

galopin, a scuUion,

portero, a porter.

El huesped, ? the host or

amo de casa, ^ landlord.

Of country affairs. — De las

cosas del campo. •
Una alqueria or quinta, a
country house or farmhouse.
Un quintero,
boyero, ?

vaquero, ^

porquero,

pastor,

zurron,

cayado,

a farmer.

a cow^eeper.

a ewinerhera.

a shepherd.

a scrip.

a shepherds

crook.

, a sling.

Una Honda,

Unhortelano,^ ^ gardener.
jardinero, ^ °
cavador, a digger.

vinadero, a vine dresser,
arado, a plough.

Unaazada,> a spade.

Un azadon, 5

labrador, a husbandman.

Una esteva, ? a plough

mancera, \ handle.

reja de arado, a plough

share.

El rastrillo, the harroio.

VOGABULABT.

'^289

Un sembrador, a eouier.

escardador, a toeeder,

Tozador, a tpeeding hook.

segador, a reaper,

XJtia guadana^ a sithe.

Untrilloy ajiaiL

Una borca, a fork,

Un bieldoy a winnowing fan,

pescador, ajishehnan,

Una red barredera,a drag-net

Una vara^ cana para pescar,

ajiiking rod,

Unsedalde caiia, ajuhing"

Une,

anzueloy afishrhook,

caeador, a htaUtman,

cebo, a bait,

L<a li|;a^ bird lime,

Una jaula, a cage,

Un cSbrero, ^ a day-ui-

jomalero, \ bourer.

asneroy a keeper of asaes,

paisanoy a couniryman,

campo, afield,

Una tienra entre dos sorcos,

a ridge,

Un surco, a furrow,

£1 trigo en yerba^ green com.

La tierra inculta, Imduniilled,

Un monte, > a maanty a

ti(na Montana, ^ nunmiain,

VnS^,l "/'**"'

cerroy a rising ground,

valle, a valley,

abismo, an abyss,

Una zanja, a dUch,

laguna, a lake,

Un pantano, a marsh,

Una llanura, a pi!am.

pefia^ roca^ * a rock.

Un peiiasco, a great rock,

25

Un despeiiadcro, a precipice,

Una seiva, a forest,

Un bosque, 4i fM>oJ.

Una esplanada, e^kmade,

mata, 4i bush,

xarza, aVam^/!?.

e^na, ^ a thorn,

Un pradoy * a meadow,

vergel, a flower garden^

Una huerta^ an orchard,

Un jardin, a garden,

Uua era en un jardin^ a bed

in a garden,

glorieta^ a bower,

abn4ciga> a ssedploi.

bobeda de parras^ a vine

arbour,

Un laberinto, alabyrinth,

Una grata, a grotto,

cascada^ a cascade,

fuente, a fountain.

Un chorro de agua, a water"

spout,

£1 pilon de una fuente, the

vase of a fountain,

Una encanada, ) an ague-

Un acueductO; ) dud.

La bortaiiza, aU sorts of

herbage.

Unaplanta, a plant.

El camino real, the highway,

Una senda, vereda, a path,

pisada, un rastro, a track,

cabalgadura^ a saddle

beast,

Un carromato^ a waggon,

carro, a cart,

Una rueds, a wheel,

£1 rayo de una rueda, the

spoke of a wheeL

Las Uantasy P the felloes of

cambas, 5 a wheeL

290

VOCABULABY.

£1 cubo de una roeda, the

nav^ of a wheel,

ege, the axie-tree.

Laesfaca, the pin of awheel.

£1 confesionarioy the confess
noniox.

Una calesa,

litera.
Las andas,
Un coche, ')
Una carroza, ^
Una cesta,

rastra, narria,

canasta,

espuerta,
Un chirriony

a chaise.

a litter.

the shafts.

a coach.

a basket.

a sledge.

a basket.

a dirt-basket.

a dung-^art.

Una banasta, a great hamper.

alforja, a wallet.

bolsa, a purse.

Un costal, saco, a sack.

Una maleta, a portmanteau.
Un talego, a bag.

Una valija, a cloak bag.

Un zurron, abudget or pouch.

Of the Churchy and things
belonging to it. — De la
Iglesia, y cosas pertene-
cientes 4 ella.

La nave.

£1 ciraborio, ')
La cupula, 5
£1 piniculo,

coro,
La capilia,
Un atril,
La sacristla^
£1 campanario,
Una campana,
£1 badajo, ')
La leogiieta, ^

pila,
£1 hisopo,

the aisle of the
church.

the dome.

the pinnacle.

the choir.

the chapel.

a desk*

the vestry.

the belfry.

a bell.

the clapper

of the bell.

the font.

the sprinkler.

Una tribuna,
£1 cimenterio,

an

osario,
Un altar,

frontal,

ornato,
£1 tabemiculo,

sagrarioy
Un palio,

a tribune or

gallery.

the church'

yard,

the chameL

an altar.

antipenditim.

an ornament.

> the taber-

3 node.

a canopy.

£1 mantel del altar, the aUar-
doth.
Un misal, a mass^Mok.

Una sotana, a cassock.

sobrepelliz, a surplice.
Un roquete, a short surplice.

bonete, a cap*

Una mitra, a mitre.

Un bdculo, a crosier.

patriarca, a patriarch.

arzobispo, ait archbishop.

obispo, a bishop.

obispado, a bishoprick.
Una diocesis,
Un coadjutor,

sufraganeo,

sacerdote,
£1 sacerdocib,
Un di^cono,

a diocese.

coadfutor.

suffragan.

a priest.

priesthood.

a deacon.

subdiicono, a subdeacon.
acolito, one that serves
the priest at the altar.

lector,
clerigo,
prelado, •
abad,

Una abadesa,
abadia,

Un canoniga,
dean,

a reader.

a clergyman.

a prelate.

an abbot.

an abbess.

an abbey.

a canon.

a dean.

VOCABULARY.

291

Vn prevoste, a provost.

arcedijano, an archdeacon.
chantre, a precentor.
maestro de coroy a maS'
ter of the choir.
cantor, a singer.

sacristan, a vestry keeper.
prebendado; a preben-
dary.
cura, a parson,

Una parroquia, a parish.
Un vicario, a vicar.

oficia], an official.

prom otor , a promoter.
Una encomienda, a thing
given in commendam,
£1 bautismo, baptigm.

La cpnfirmacion, confirma'
tion.
£1 matrimonio, matrimony.
Comulgar, to receive the
sacrament.
Los ordenes sacros^ holy or--
ders.
Una ceremonia, a ceremony.
La rubrica, the rubric.

£1 ritual, the ritual,

oficio divino, divine ser*
vice.
salterio^ the psalter.

Vn salmo^ a psabn.

La antlfona, antiphon.

Upalecion, - a lesson,

Un versete, a verse.

sermon, a sermon.

La meditacion, meditation.
oracion vocal, vocal

prayer.
oracion mental, mental
prayer.
predicar, to preach.

catequizar, to catechise.

ar,>
ar, S

to bury.

Enterrar,

Sepultar,

La escomuoion, excommuni-
cation,
suspension, suspension.

Un entredicho, an interdict.

La irregularidad ,2rr6^fi/ar}^y.

Descomulgar, to excommu'
nicate.

Una catedral, a cathedral
church.

La conventual, the church of
a convent.

Una parroquial, a parish
church.

El adviento, advent.

La cuaresma, lent.

Ijas temporas, ember-weeks,

Una vigilia, an eve.

Un ayunoy a fast.

Things relating to War. —
Cosas pertenecientes k la
guerra. •

La artillerla, artillery.

Una pieza de artillerla, } a can-
Un canon, J non.

£1 tren de artillerla, the train
of artillery.
La boca de canon, the mouth
of a cannon.
£1 fogon, the touch-hole.

La culata del canon^ the breech
of a gun.
curefia, > the carriage of
Elafuste, ^ a gun.

Cargar, to load.

Apunlar, to level.

Disparar, to fire.

Un tiro de canon, a cannon-
shot.

2n

VOGASULARY.

Desmontu- un canoo^ to (£••

mount a gun,

Endaw SD canoBy <o«ptX»

a gun.

Una calebrioay a euiverin.

Un falconete, afakonet.

Un pedrero, apaterero.

canon entero, a avAofe

coHiton.

OMdio canon^ Mf cannon.

petaidoy a petard.

Una bomba, 6 60016.

borabarda, a bomMcetch.

Un laortero, a mortW'piece.

Una granada, a grenade.

Un mosquetey o musket.

Una carabina, a corafo'ne.

escopeta, ajirelack.

pistola, a pt«to/.

bala, a buHet.

La polvora, powder.

Una mecha, a match.

Un pedernd, a flint.

Una flecha, an arrow.

Un dardo, ' a c/ar/.

Una javalina^ a hoar-gpear.

honda^ a sling.

Un arco, a how.

Una hacha d« armaa^ a 6aM/e«

a hebmei.

a lance.

alabarda, a halberd.

partesana, a partisan.

pica, a pike.

Un alfange, a scimetar.

Una esp^Ja^ a sword.

£1 puiio de la espada, the han'»

die of a sword.

porno de la— the pommel of.

La guarnicion de la-//i6 kilt of.

hoja, the bimde.

Un punal, a poniard.

Una bayoneta^ a bayonet.

Unyeknoy ')
Una celada, 3

daga, a <

Un nsorrion, a morriwu.

La viaem/he vizor of a helmet.
El gorjal, la gola, the gorget.
Un peto, a breaU-plate.

Una coraza^ a cuirass.

El espaldar, ^J^ bach-plate.
Un coselete, o corcier.

braaalete, armour for
the arms.
escaredon, amumrfrom
the waist to the thighs.
Unas hinojeras^ armour for
the knees.
Un bFoquel, a buckler.

escudo, a shield.

Una adarga, a target.

cota de malla, a coat of
mail.
Un general, a general.

teniente general, a lieu-
tenant general.
sargento mayor de bataUa,
a major general.
maestro de campo, > a coU
coronel, J one/,

sargento mayor, a major.
capitan, . a captain.

teniente, a lieutenant.
corneta, a comet.

alferez, an ensign.

sargento, a serjeant.

cabo de escuadra, a cor*
poral.
cuadrillero, a brigadier.
soldado, a soldier.

caudillo, a chief.

tambor, a drum.

pifano, oflfe.

Una troinpeta, a trumpet.
Un atabal, a kettle drum.

VOCABULARY.

2$3

Un sddado de i caballo, a
trooper,
soldado de dpie, 7 a foot
infante, ^ soldier,

granad^o, *a grenadier.
dragon, a dragoon,

piquero, apike^man,

mosquetero^a mnsqueteer,
fusilero, afusileer.

La infanteria, the infantry,
caballerla, the cavalry,
Un artillero, a gunner,

bombardero, a bombard-
ier,
. ingeniero, an engineer,
minero, a miner,

gastador, a pioneer,

Una centinela, a centineL
La vanguardia, the vanguard,
£1 cuerpo de batalla, the main
body of the army.
La retaguardia, the rear,
£1 caerpo de reserva, the
corps de reserve,
cuerpo de guardia, the
corps de guard,
ala, the wing of an army.
Un batallon, a battalion,
regimiento, a regiment,
Una compaiif a de caballos, a
troop of horse.
compania de infanteria,
a company of foot,
hilera, a rank.

fila, a fie.

Un escuadron, a squadron,
mochilero, a soldier^s boy.
bagage, a baggage,

vivandero, a sutler.

partido, a party.

Lo8 corredores^ the forlorn
hope.
25*

Los batidores,
Las murallas,
Los muros,
Una almena,
El parapeto,
Un Castillo,
fuerte,
Una fortaleza,

discoverers^

walls.

a battlement.

the parapet.

a castle.

a fort,

a fortress.

. fortificacion, afortifica'-

tion.

torre, a tower.

ciudadela, a citadel,

Un bastion, a bastion.

Una Cortina, a curtain,

media lana,aii halfmooti.

tronera, loop hole.

Un terraplen, a rampart.

caballero, a cavalier.

■ rebellin, a ravelin.

La contra escarpa, counter

scarp.

Una barrera, a barrier,

falsa braga, afausse

braye,

Un foso, a ditch.

repecho, a breast-work,

Una garita, a ceniry^ox,

casamata, casemate.

UncSdorJ ^"^^'■y-

La estrada cubierta, the co*
vert way^

Un ceston,
Una estaca,
Un redurto,
Una atalaya.

a gabion,
a paUsade,
a redoubt,
a place to dis-
caver, or the per-
son who discovers.
manta, a mantlet or cover
for men from the shot.
fagina, a fascine.

Kuna,

a mine.

294

VOCABULABT.

Una contra-mina^ a counter^
mine.

trinchera, ft trench.
El real, the emmp.

Las Titoallas, provisians,

municiones^ ammumtion.
Un bisono, a recruit.

pecorero,

a marauder.

Uoa contra nmrcfaa, a coim-

ter-march.

eftcaramuza, a skirmish.

bataHa, a battle.

Un skioy tf siege.

cuartei, quarter.

Una encamisada, a camUado.

salida,
Batir,
Una brecba,

escaladay
Un aaalto,
La Uamada,
capltolacioD,

a sally
to batter,
a breach.
an eeeedade.
an assault,
the chamade.
the cajntu"
lation.
guarnicion, the garrison.
Tocar la caja, to beat the
drum.
Levantar gente, toYaisemeh.
Pagar el sueldo, > to pay the
el pre, ^ eotdiers.

Batir la estrada, to scour the
country.
Levantar el sitio, to raise the
siege.
Marchar i banderas desple-
gadas, to march u^th fly-
ing colours.
Reforzar el egercito, to rein-
force the army.
Tocar i recoger, to sound a
retreat.
Entregar una plaza^ to sur-
rendJera place.

Commefciai termsr^-^Voceif

mercao tiles.
Un abarcador, a monopoHser.
nionopolista,afi engrosser .
Abonar, ' to credit,

£1 acarreo, porte, carriage.
acarreto (hUo,) pack"
thread.
aceptar una letra, to ao
cept ahitL
Una accion, a share^ stock.
La acciontle empujar, 6 tirar,
haUttge.
Un acreedor, rre&'tor; acree-
tlor hipotecario, mertga-
gee ; el que da la Inpoteca,
mortge^er ; acreedor im-
portune, a dun; valista,
6 acreedor por Taie^ ered-
itor for a note or bUL
La aduana, customrhause.
Un ajoste, . bargain ; tguste
de cnentas, a settlement,
k la buelta, carried over.
almacen^BforeAotMe^vore-
hoasCj magazine.
Una almofieday aole by auc'
' Hon.
Alquilar^ to hire.

Una ancla de la esperanEa^ a
sheet anchor.
A' quien su poder hubiere,
to his or their assigns.
Una arbitracion, sentencia de
Jueces irbitros, uu^rage.
Las arras, e la dote, earnest
money.
Un arrendador, a farmer that
hires^
£1 arrendaroiento, Inringy
farming.
Arrendar, to farm.

Un arribo, an arrival

VOCABULAKY.

295

Va asegurador, an insurer.
Asegurar, to insure,

Un asiento, an entry.

La averia, average.

averia y capa, primage
and hat money.
Uq balance, saldo, a balance.
banco, bank.

banquero, banker.

Barato, cheap.

Los bienes propios, real or
personal property.
bienes habidos y por ha*
ber^ goods kad and to be
had.
Un calabrote, a short cable.
csxMo^exchangej change.
NegDciar una letra de cam-
bio, to negociate a bill of
exchange.
Un capital, caudal, ttocA:, cap-
ital.
Cnrgar el temporal, toinr
crease a heavy storm.
Caro, dear.

Una carta, cuenta, a bill.
carta, letter ; el porte de
cartas, po«/£ig'e ; portador,
penny-postman ; paqaete
de cartas, packet of letters.
Cerrar una carta, to make up
a letter ; sellar una carta,
to seal a letter ; un sobre
escrito de carta, direction.
Una maleta para cartas, mail.
Un caudal, a stock.

caudal destinado, a fund.
La caja, cash ; un cajero,
cashier J cash-keeper ; dine-
. ro en r.aja, cash on hand,
£1 libro de caja, cashrbook.
Un certifieado, certificate.
Certificar, to certify.

Un cvent^cent; dos 6 tres,
&c. por ciento, two or three^
&c. per cent.
El cobrador, receiver; co-
brar, to receive ; cobrador
de sisa, exciseman ;-de de-
rechos de muelle, wharfin-
ger.
La comision, commission.
Un campanero, partner.
Una compaiiia, partnership,
compra, purchase ; un
comprador, buyer ypurehas-
er; comprador, 6 vende-
dor de acciones, stock*
jobber.
Un compromiso, compromise.
La comunicacion, intercourse.
£1 conocimiento, biU of hd^
ing.
La consignacion,coyin^nmp}i^.
£1 consumo, consumption.
Contado (dinero de contado)
ready money.
£1 contenido, contents.

Un contrabandista, smuggler.
contrabando, contraband,
Una cootrata de fletaraento, a
charter party of freight.
contribacion, an assess-
ment or tribute.
copia, a copy.

Un corredor, or corredor de
oreja, broker ;-de cambios^
exc hange4)roker.
£1 correo, the post office.
La correspondencia, corres*
pondence.
Un correspondiente, a corres-
pondent.
Corriente, current.

La Gostumbre, custom.

£1 credito, credit.

VOCABULARY.

La cuenta^ bill, account ; su-
mar una cuenta, to cast up
an account ; pedir cuenta,
to call to an account ; pa-
gar 4 cuenta, to pay a
part of an account.

Los danos, damages.

La data 6 fecha, date,

dar, 6 dejar k flete, to let

out a vessel on freight.

Debajo de, cubierta, under
deck.

£1 derechoy dutyy custom ;
derechos de entrada, duties
of importation ; dros. de
estraccion, of exportation;
dros. de muelle, wharfage;
cobrador de los dros. del
muelle, wfiarfinger.

Los derechos de embarque,
wharfage".

La descarga, unlading.

£1 descueDto, discount ; de-
volucion de dros. de entra-
da, drawback,

Uo desembolso, disbursement.

Desempaquetar, unstowing.

Despachar^ to sell, send,
dispatch ; despachar un
correo, to send an express ;
despachar mercaderlas, to
sell goods; despacho de
aduana, clearance j cocket ;
despacho, expedition.

De toido nos hacemos cargo,
we have taken due notice
ofaU.

La deuda, debt.

El deudor, debtor.

El diezmo, tenths tithe ; diez-
mero, tithe gatherer.

El dinero, money ; dinero con-

* tado 6 de coDtado, ready

money ; dinero cercenado^
6 cortado, clipped money /
dinero en caja, cash; dine-
ro prestado, money lent,
Un 4omiciliOy a domtdL

Una dote, dowry ^ a woman^B
portion^
Unas arras, a pledge.

Los dros. municipales, town's
fees.
Un duplicado, dupUi ate.

dueno, owner.

Unos efectos, effects.

Un envoltorio, 6 una faarpil-
lera, wrapper.

empeiio, pawn, pledge.
Encima de la barra^ over
the bar.
Un endosador, an endorser.
encargado de, agent for.
endoso, endorsement.
En testimonio de verdad, in
testimonium veritatis,
Laentrada, entry; dros.de en-
trada,ii«/^ of importcUion.
£1 equivalente, equivalent.
escasos de despacho^ hea-
vy articles.
Escribir, to write ; la escritu-
ra, hand-uniting, bond, en-
gagement; escritura de ar-
rendamiento, lease ; un es-
critorio, counting-house.
Estrenar, to hanseL

La exigencia, exigency.

estraccion, exportation.
Un estracto, extract, abridge-
ment.
cstractor, extractor.

La estorsion, extortion.

Un factor, factor.

Una factura, factoria, tnrotce,
factory.

VOCABULABT«

297

La hliBLf fauUj tfitmi^ error,
falta de pagamento^ non-
payment,
Un htdoj a haie,

fardo pequeno a truss,
Una feria^ a fair,

Un fiador, swrefpy bail.

fiador hipotecario, morf*
goger.
fiel medida 6 peso, stand"
ard measure^ or undght,
Unas fijaderas para papeles,
files for papers,
Fletar, to freight a skip,

£1 flete, freight,

fletador, freighter^

ibndo, 6 caudal, 6 accion.
funeky share or stock,
forcejo, struggle,

ganador, gainer.

La ganancia, goin,

£1 gaoapan, porter,

Los gastos, charges f expenses,
geoerosy goods.

Las guardas, custom^htmse of
fieers ; gnardas vijiadores^
tides^meuy tide-waiters,
Una gruesa 6 mucha mar, a
heavy sea,
Un guarda de navio, a tides-
man.
Una guia, a permit.

hacienda ruin, trash of

Hilo acarretOy packthread.

Una hipoteca, a mortgage.

junta de sanidad, hoard

of health.

El impofte ; importe liquido,

proceeds; neat proceeds.

Insolvente^ insolvencia, m-
soiventy insolvency.
£1 interes, interest.

introductor de generos,

importer of goods.
inventario, inventory,
juez, judge.

juezirbitro, refereeyun^
pirty arbitrator,
LoB juros, fceSy interest.
£1 hrcre, seating-wax.

Una lahcha, a lighter,

lanchada, embarque en
lancha, lighterage.

Una letra de cambio, a bill of
exchcmgCy a draft ; nego-
ciar una letra de cambio, to
negodats a bill of ex-
ehmge ; sacar, librar, 6
tirar ana letra, to draw a
bill; aceptar una letra, to
accept a bill; protestar una
letra, to protest a bill,
Un legajo de cartas, a bundle
of letters.
Un Ifbro de tienda, shop book;
borradorcillo, smaU note-
book for memorandums;
borrador, a day-booky dia-
rio 6 jornal, ajoumat ; li-
bro mayor, a fe^fevr ; libro
de caja, cashrbook ; copi-
ador, 6 libro de copias de
cartas, a letter-book ; libro
de mue9tras,a pattern card.
La licencia, UcensCy permit.
losa vidriada, Dutch ware.
roaleta para cartas, mail.
Un marchante, a customer.
marinero, seaman.

Las mercaderias, ^ goods^
mercancias, \ ware^.

298

VOCABULARt.

Un mercader por mayor, a

wholesale dealer.

iDonopolista, monopolist,

pueriOy a port or harbour,

Un inuc'lle, wharf ; derechos

de muelle, wharfage; su

cobrador, its wharfinger.

Vu negociante de generos es-

traogeros, importer of for-

eign goods.

Un negociante de acciones, a

stock-jobber.

Una oblea, a wafer,

obligacion, a bond.

obligaciones, contracts.

Un ofrecedor, bidder ; mayor

oferente^ higher bidder.

La orilla, the shore.

Pagar 4 cuenta, to pay on

account ; un pagamento,

payment; faUa de pago,

non-payment \ un pagare^

a promissory note.

Un paquete, parcel

paquete de cartas, apack-

et of letters.

Para las costas de, for the

cost of.

Pedu- -cuenta, to call to an

account.

Las perdidas, losses.

El peso bruto, gross weight,

peso limpio de rey, neat

weight.

poco mas 6 menos, there'

about.

Una petaca, bundle^ hamper^

roll.

pollza de seguros, policy

s of insurance.

poner las cosas en orden,

to set things in order.

El portt^dorj bearers porta-

dor de cartas, penny^post*
man ; porte de cartas,
postage.

Los portes, porterage*

Elprecio,prtce, rate; la su-
bida de precio, enhance^
menty rise of price.

El premio, premtum, interest.

Un prestamo, dinero prestado,
a loan^ money lent.

El primage, parte de fletes de
navio, primage.

Una promesa^ a promise.
protesta, a protest.

Protestar una letra, to protest
a bili or draft.

Protestar una, dos y ires y
las mas voces en derecho
necesarias, to protest in the
most effectual manner pos-
sible against.....

El provecho, profit.

La puntualidad, punciuaHty.

Un quebrado, a bankrupt.

Una quiebra, a bankruptcy.

Que se dir4, which wiU be
mentioned.

La quinquilleria, hardware.

Un quintal, a hundredweight.

Una quitanza, a release.

El recambio^ re-exchange.
recibo, receipt.

Regatear, to cheapen.

La remesa, the remittance.
renta, , income.

riqueza, wealth.

El riesgo, risk.

Romper sobre la costa, to
break on the shore.

La ropa, clothes.

itiin hacienda, trash of

goods.

VOCABULABY.

599

Sacar las mercaderf as, to tm-

StOtff,

Sano de quilla y costados,
tight, stanch, and strong.
El seguro, insurance*

Sellar una carta, to seal a
Utter,
Ser de cuenta, to be on (K'
count.
La sisa, excise.

Su cobrador, the exciseman
Un sobre escrito, a direction.
sobrestante de tierra, land-
overseer.
La sobreestada, demurrage.
subasta^almoneda, sale by
auction.
Sumar una cuenta, to cast up
an account.
La subida de precio, en-
hancement.
. suscripcion/ subscription.
£1 suscriptor, the subscriber.
Surgir, to ride at anchor.
Un talego de moneda, • mon"
. ey-hag.
La tara, the tare, tret.

tasacion, the set rate.
tasa, assize.

Un tendero, a shop-keeper.
libro de tienda, shop^ook.
Una tienda, a shop.

Un tenedor de libros, a book-
keeper.
La toneleria, cooperage,
Un tratante, a trader.

negociante, a merchant.
Tratar, to deal or trade.

Un trato, 6 negocio, business
j or trqffick.

Un tributo, tribute.

tnieque, exchange.

Trocar, to barter.

Un vendedor, seller.

La venta, sale.

Un valor, value, worth.

Los vigiadores de rentas,

inspectors, tides-men.

Una cumplida, las restantes

de ningun valor, one being

fulfilled, the others to stand

void.

Un uso, usance.

La usura, usury.

Un usurero, a usurer.

La gerga : especie de estera

para enfundar generos, a

mat.

Navigation. — Navegacion.
Un navlo, una nave, 6 nao,
a ship.
de linea, a ship of the line.
Un navio de guerra, a man
of war.
Un navio marcbante 6 una
fragata, a merchant ship.
Un navlo ligero, a light vessel.
Una galera, a galley.

galeaza, a galeasse.
Un galeon, a galleon.

Una galeota, .a galleot.

fragata de guerra, a frig-
ate.
Un saique, a saick.

Una carraca, o carrack.

Un fuste, afuste.

Una pinaza, a pinnace.

barca de pasage, a fer-
ry-boat.
goleta, a schooner.

canoa, a canoe.

piragua, a pirogue.

gondola, a light boat'
Un esquife, a skiff.

Una balandra, a sloop.

Un bergantin, a brig.

300

VOCABULARY.

Unalancha^un bote, a knmch.
barqueta, )

barquiUa, > a boat*

Un batel, )

bagel, barco, buque, vessel

Una balsa, a rqftj ajloai.

La capitaDa, the admiral skip.

almiranta, the vtce-admi-

raL

armada, the royal jleeU

flota, ihefieet of merchant

men,

Una escuadra, a squadron*

A^bordo, aboard.

La popa, the poopy stem.

proa, the prow or head.

Una tartana, a tartan.

Un brulote, afireship.

palacfae, a tender, a pe-

. tach.

Una faluca, falua, afetucca.

barca, a coasting ^h*

ing vessel.

La sentina, the toelL

£1 lastre, haUast.

m^til, drbol, the mast.

drbol mayor, the main^

mast.

La gabia, the round top.

El trinquete, the fore-mast.

La mesana, the mizen^miut.

La carllnga del 4rbol, the step

of the mast.

verga, entena, the yard.

£1 estribor, starboard.

babor, larboard.

Gobemar el navio, to steer.

£1 barlovento, windward.

sotavento, leeward.

Remolcar, to tow.

Escobar, convoyar,^o convoy.

Una vela, a saiL

vela mayor, ^Ae main-sait.

La vela de gabia, ^top^Mttl.
Eljuanete, the top-gaHani

La vela de mesana,. ike mizen-

saiL

vela de trinquete, the fore'

sail.

cevadera, the sprit sail

vela latjna, lateen or shouU

der of. muttom^^aiL

Un remo, an oar.

La palade remo, the blade i^

an oar.

Un pr4ctico, a pilot.

Las troneras, the port holes.

empavesadas, the net-

tings.

Un gaUardete, a pendant.

Una banderola, a banner.

bandera, the colours.

La brujuk, the compass.

punta de la proa, the siem.

puente, cubierta, the deck.

Las escotiUas, the hatches.

£1 timon, the helm.

La quiila, the keeL

Una anda, 4ncora,aii anchor.

amarra, mooring.

maroma, a rope.

Un cable, a eaUe.

La sonda, the sounding- lead.

Un piloto, a mate.

guardian, ahoatswain.

marinero, a sailor.

corsario, a privateer.

armador, a ship owner.

Una c4mara, a cabin.

Un camarote, a birth.

Unatormenta, a tempest.

borrasca, a stftmu

bonanza, fair weather.

calma, cahn.

YOCABULART.

sdi

El viento en popa, the vnnd

. fun astern.

viento largo, fair wind.

Coger el viento, to pfy to

ufindward.

Ir d la bolina, to tack upon a

wind.

Irse 4 fondo, i pique, to sink.

The year and its parts, 8fc.^^

£1 aiio y sus partes, &c.
Un ano,
Un mes.

Una semana,
Un dia,
Una noche,
La maiiana,
La tarde,
Una hora,
Un minuto,
Un momento,
La primavera,
El verano,
El otoiio,
El invierno,

a year.

a month.

a week.

a day.

a night.

the morning.

the evening.

an hour.

a minute.

a moment.

the spring.

the summer.

the autumn.

the winter.

La salida del sol, the sun-ris-
ing.
El ponene del sol, the sun-
setting.
La, aurora, the daum.

£1 mediodia, noon.

La media noche, midnight.
Un cuarto de hora, a quarter
of an hour.
Una media hora, halfanhour.
Tres cuartos de hora, three
quarters qf on hour.
Hoy, to-day.

Aver, yesterday.

El dia iintes de ayer, the day
before yesterday.
26

El dia despues

de maiiana,

the day after to-morrow.

The months, — ^Los meses, —

are mascuUne.

Enero,

January.

Febrero,

February.

Marzo,

March.

Abril,

April.

Mayo,

May.

Junio,

June.

Julio,

July.

Agosto,

August.

Setiembre,

September.

Octubre,

October.

Noviembre,

November.

Diciembre,

December.

The days of the week, — Los
dias de la semana, — are
masculine.

Lfines,

Monday,

Mdrtes,

Tuesday,

Miercoles,

Wednesday.

Jueves,

Thursday.

Viemes,

Friday.

Sibado,

Saturday.

Domingo,

Sunday.

I%c holidays of the year. —

Dias de fiesta del ano.
El primer dia del Ano, New
Yearns day.
El dia de ReyeSjTwelfth-day.
La Cuaresma, Lent.

Las Cuatro temperas, the Em-
ber-weeks.
El domingo de Ramos, Palm-
sunday.
Viemes Santo, GoodFri^
day

302

YOCABULAKT.

La paacua de resnmccioDy
Easter-^lf,
pascua del Espiritu Santo,

£] dia de Difuntos, AllSouh-

day.

dia de todos los Sajitos,

AU'8aint9^y[,

La pascua de navidad, CknH"

may.

vigilia, the Eve.

0^ind9^'^Yientos^--^are mat-

cuUne.
El norte, north wind,

sud 6 sur, 9<HUh wind.

east wind.

levante,
poniente, oeste,weet wind.
Rordeste, n^rtk-east wind.
noroeste, northrwest wind.
vendaval, south'^estwind.
sudeste, south-east wind.
sudoeste, southrwest wind-

Table of the current Money in %Bji.^Tabla de fasM^ne-
das de Espana.

La pieza mas pequeBa de moneda de Espana se llama M«ra-
vedi, del cual resulta la Tabla siguiente.

Copper, or Billion.— Coftre, ^ 42| cuartos 5 reales 6 pese- ,
6 veUon. ta columoaria.

2 maravedfies hacen on 85 cuartos 10 reales 6 me-

2 ochavos
2 cuartos

tin

ochayo.

un cuarto.

una mota, 6

dos cuartos.

Silver.— P/flrfa.

* 8| cuartos un real.

t lOJ diez cuartos y medio y
medio maravedi, octava
parte de iiti Peso duro.

I 17 cuartos 2 reales.

§ 2 1 i cuartos 24 reales.

\\ 84 cuartos 4 reales 6 una
peseta.

170 cuartos

dio duro.
20 reales 6 un
peso duro.

Gold— Oro.

20 reales
40 reales

80 reales
I6O reales

320 reales

esciidi]S» de oro.

dobI« escudilio

de oro.

doblon de oro.

media onzade

orojU 8 duros.

tina onza, 6 16

pesos duros.

* 6 Cents. f 6 Cents. X 10 Cents. § 12^ Cents. || 20 Cents,
or a Pistareea. IF 25 Cents.

FAMILIAR PBKA8KS.

303

Military words of Command. — Palabras militares de Man-
damiento.

Formense,
AtencioD,
Armas al hombro^

fail in,
attention*
shoulder
arms.
Flgen bayonetas, fx bayo-
nets.
Presenten las armas, present
arms.

Aparejen,

Presenten^

Fuego,

Ceben,

Carguen,

Saquen baqueta^

Ataqueii^

make ready,
present,
fire,
prime,
load,
drawromr
rods,
ram down cart-
ridge.

Cesefi el fuego, cease firing.
Marchen, march.

Alto, halt.

Linea 4 la izquierda, left intd
line.
Conversion 4 la derecha,

• right wheel.

Conversion k la izquierda,

left wheel.

Conversion atris k la derecha,

right backwards wheel.

Conversion atrds 4 la izquier-

da, left hackwiards wheel.

A la derecha frente, right

face.

A la izquierda frente, left

face.

FAMILIAR PHRASES.

Sentencias Cortas y FamiUares. — Short and Familiar
Phrases.

L Acerca de pedir aJgo.

Le suplico; le ruego, deme
vm. ; higame el favor de
danse

Triigame

Se lo agradezco

Le doy las gracia«

Vaya 4 buscarme tal- cosa "

Luego, en este instante

Querido Senor, h^game vm.
este gusto

CoDcedame, senora,este favor

Se lo suplico

Se lo pido encarecidamente

)rayy give
indness to

1. About asking any thing

I beseech you .;
me ; do me the
give me

Bring me

1 thank you for it

I give you thanks

Go and fetch me such a thing

Preientlyy this moment

Dear Sir^ do me this pleas-
ure

Dear Madamy grant me this
favour

I beseech you for it

I earnestly beg it of you

304

PilJflLIAE PHBA8BS.

IL Eipruiaites Hernas.

Mi vida

Mi querido, 6 mi querida

Mi alma

Mi duenoy

Mi queriditOy mi queridita

Mi corasoncito

Lumbre de mis ojos

Cielo mioy nina de mi alma

Hija de mi corazon

A'jigel mio
Estrella mia
Bien mio

IQ. Aeerca de agradecer y
cumpUmentary y mostrar
ami^ad.

Viva listed muchos anos

Le devuelvo las mas vivas

gradas
Gustoso lo hare
De todo mi corazon
De muy buena gana

Lo estimo

Soy de vm.

Soy 811 servidor

Su muy bumilde servidor

Vm. me favorece mucbo

Se toma vm. demasiado tra-
bajo

No hallo ninguno en servirle

Es vm. muy atento y muy
cortes

Que desea vm. ? que me man-
da vm. ?

Ordeoeme con toda libertad

Sin cumplimiento

II. Expressions of kindness^
MyA/e

My dear

My 9oul

My hvcy my lord or nuuier

My Hide darling

My Uitle heart

Dear sweet hearty Kghi of my

eyet
My mott helovedy my htan^

en J pupil of my soul
My dearest child^ child of my

heart
My angel
My star
My blessing

III. Of thanking and com-
plimenting, wd showing
iundness.

I thank youj may ^you five

many years
I return you the most heart--

felt thanks
I will do it cheerfully
With all my heart
Heartily y with a very good

will
I am obliged for it
I am yours
1 am your servant
Your very humble servant
You are very obligingy you

favour me much
You take too much trouble

I find none in serving you
You are very civil and kind

What do you wish ? what d^

you command me ?
Command me with full Kkertf
Without compHmeni

FAMILIAR PBRASES.

305

Sin ceremonia
Le amo de corazon
E' yo correspondo 4 vm. co-
mo debo
Haga cuenta sobre ml
Mdndeme vm.
Honreme con sus preceptos

Tiene vm. algo que man-

darme?
No tiene vm. sino hablar
Disponga de su servidor
Solo aguardo sus preceptos
Demasiado honor me hace
Degemonosde cumplimientos
Entre amigos honrados, se

escusan cumplimientos
Al Senor Don — ^le beso las

manos

Dele vm. muchas espresiones

mias
No faltare
Pongame vm. d los pies de la

Senora

Muchas memorias 4 la Se-.

norita
Pase vm. adelante, le voy i

seguir
Despues de vm., Caballero
Se bien lo que le debo
Vamos, Senor, pase vm.
Lo hare para obedecerle
Para solo agradarle
No soy amigo de tantas cere-

monias
No soy cumplimentero
£s lo mejor
Tiene vm. razon
26*

Without ceremony

I love you sincerely

And 1 return it as I ought

Rely or depend upon me

Command me

Honour me with your com-

mands
Have you any thing to com-

mandme ?
You have hut to speak
Dispose of your servant
I only wait your commands
You do me too much honour
Let us forbear compliments
Between honest friends^ com"

pliments are excused
Present or give my respects

to Mr. D — . or 1 kiss the

hands of Mr. D — .
Remember my love to Mm^ve
him many expressions of mine
I will not fail
Present my respects to my la^

dy, or put me at the feet of

Madam
Remember me to MisSy or
many remembrances to Miss
Go before^ I am going to fol-
low you
After youy Sir
I know well what I owe you
Comey Siry pass on
I will do it to obey you
Only to please you
lam not fond of so many

ceremonies
I am not ceremonious
It is the best
You are in the right

306

FAMILIAR PHRASES.

IV. Acerca deafirmar^ ne-
gar J comenHr^ Sfc.

£s verdad

£s esto verdad ?

Demasiado verdad

Para tratar verdad

En efectOy es asi

Quien loduda?

No hay duda

Creo que es asi

Creo que do

Digo que si

Digo que no

Apuesto que si

Ya que no

Por mi vida

A^ fe de caballero

A'' fe de hombre de bien

Por mi honor

Creame vm.

Se lo puedo decir

Se lo puedo afirmar

Apostara algo

Se burla vm. ?

flabla vm. de veras ?
Lo digo mujr de veras

Lo a<£v]D6 vm.

Lo acerto vtn<

Bien le creo

Se le puede creer

Eso no es imposible

Pues, en bora buena

Poco i poco

No es verdad

Aquello es fako

Nsbda de eso hay

£s incierto

Es mentira

Es una falsedad

Me burlaba, chanceaba

Lo decia de chanza

Sea eft bora bueoa

IV. Of affirming, denyin^^
consenting, &c.

It is true

Is this true ?

Too true

To tea the truth

ReaUy^ it is so

Who doubts it ?

There is no doubt

I believe it is so

I believe not

I say it is

I say it is not

I lay it is

I lay it is noi

Upon my life

As I am a gentleman

Asi am €M honest man

Upon my honour

Do believe me

I can tell it to you

I can affirm it to you

I could bet something

Do you jest ?

Do you speak in earnest f

I say it quite in earnest

You guessed at it

You hit it

I truly beUeve you

One may believe you

That is not impossible

WeU, let it be so

Softly^ fair and softly

It is not true

That is false .

There is no such thing

It is untrue

It is a lie

It is a falsehood

I did jest; I was joking

I said it in jest

Let it be sos veil andgood

FAMILIAR PHRASES.

307

No me opoDgo & ello
Estamos de acuerdo
Dtcho y hecho
No lo quiero

y • Aeerca de consultary 6
considerar.

Que se ha de hacer ?

Que haremos ?

Que me dice vmd. que haga ?

Que remedio bay para eso ?

Que partido hemes de tomar ?

Hagamos esto 6 eso

Hagamos una cosa

Mejor seri que yo..,.

Aguarde vm. un poco

No serla mejor, si ?•...

Degeme hacer

Si estuviera en su lugar

Es lo mismo

Viene i salir i lo mismo

I do not oppose it
We are agreed^ in accord
Said and done

I witl not have it, I do not
want it, 1 do not wish for it

V. Of consulting; or consid-
ering.

What is to be done?
WhatshaUwedo?
What do you tell me to do ?
What remedy is therefor that?
What course are we to take ?
Let us do this or that
Let us do one thing
It wiUbe better thai L^.
Wait a Utile

Would it not be better, iff.,^
Let me do

Were I in your place
It i9 the same

It comes to turn out to the
same

VI. Del comer y del bAer. VL Of eating and drinkiqg.

Tengo buen apetito

Tengo hambre

Me muero de hambre

Me parece que hatresdias

que nada he comido
Coma vm. algo
Que gusta vm. comer?
Comiera un poco de cualqui-
• era cosa

D6me vm. algo de comer
He comido bs^tante
Estoy satisfecho
Qniere vm. comer aun mas ?
No tengo mas apetito
Tengo sed
Me muero de sed
Tengo mucha sed
Pte^ TBd. de beber

J haioe a good appetite

I am hungry

lam starving

It seems to me that it is three

days 1 have eaten nothing
Eat something
What do you like to eat f
Icoutdeat a Utile of any-

thing
Give me something to eat
I hone eaten enough
I am satisfied
Witt you eat sHU more f
Ihaoe no more appetite
lam dry

lam dying with ikirtt
1 am very thirsty
Qive me to drink

308

PAJlILtAB FHRASKS.

Viva vm. machos anos

Gustoso beberia una copita

de vino
Beba vm. pues
He b<*bido bastante
No puedo beber mas
Mi sed est4 apagada

Vn. Del tV, venir, movene^

De donde viene vm.?

A'' donde va vm. ?

Vengo de — Voy 4^—

Suba, bage

Entre vm.^ saiga vm

Pase vm. adeiante

No se mueva, no se men6e

Estese ahl

Acerquese de ml

Retlrese vm.

V4yase

Vaya un poco atris

Venga vm. aci

Aguarde vrad un rato

Espereme, agu4rdeme

No vaya tan de prisa

Va vm. muy ^ prisa

Quitese de delante de ml

No me toque vm.

Dege eso

Porqae ?

Asi lo quiero

Estoy bien aqui

La puerta est^ celrrttda

Abora est^ abierta

A bra vm. la puerta

Abra vm. la veiftana.

Cierre la ventana

Venga vm. por aqtti

Vaya vmd por ^4

Pase vmd. por aqui

Pase por all4

I thank you^ may you Une

many years
I could drink with pleoiure a

glass of mne
Drink then
I have drank enough
I can drink no more
My thirst is allayed

VII. Of going, coming, stir-
ring, Sec,

Whence do you come f

Where do you go f.

I come from — lam going fo^

Come up J come doum

Come iuy go out

Come forward

Do not move^ do not sUr

Stay there

Come near tome

Retire f withdraw

Go uway^ begone

Go back a little

Come hither

Wait a little

Wait for me

Do not go eofasi

You go veryfaH

Getaway from btforeme

Do not touch me

Leave that

Why?

I wish it so

I am weU here

'Ihe door is shut

Now it is open

Open the door

Open the window

Shut the. window

Come this way

Go that way

Pass this way

Paes tktU^way

FAMILIAK PBEAS1E9.

309

Que busca vm. ?
Que perdio vm.?

vm. Del hablar, decir,
obroTy Sec.

Hable vm. alto
Habla vm. muy bajo
Con quien faabiavm.?
Me habla vm. ?
Dlgale algo
Habla vm. Espanol ?
Sabe vm. el castellano ?
Algo lo entiendo y hablo
Que dice vm. ?
Que ha dicho vm. ?
No digo Dada
No he dicho nada
Calle vm.
Cillome

Ella no quiere callar
No hace mas que hablar y
charlar

He oido decir, que

Me lo ban dicho

LfO dicen por ahi

Todos lo dicen

£1 Senor 4. me lo dijo

Madama no me lo ha dicho

Se lo dijo 4 vm. ?

Se lo dijo ella ?

Cnando lo oyo vm. decir ?

Hoy me lo^han dicho

Quien se lo dijo ?

No lo puedo creer

Que dice el ?

Que dice ella ?

Que le ha dicho ?

No me dijo nada

Nome ha dicho noticia alguna

£1 Senor B. me dijo nuevas

No se lo diga vm.

Se lo dir6

No se lo dir4

What do you look for?
What did you loBef

Vni. Of speakings sayings
acting, &c.

Speak hud

You speak very low

With whom do you speak ?

Do you speak to me f

Tell him something

Do you speak Spanish ?

Do you know the Castiliem ?

I understand and speak it a

What do you say f [little^

What have you said ?

I say nothing

I have said nothing

Hold your tongue, be silent

lam silent, 1 hold my tongue

She will not hold her tongue

She does nothing but prattle

and tattle
I have heard, thai — ;—
They have told me so
They say so abroad
Every one says so
Mr, A. told it me
The lady has not told it me
Did he trUittoyou?
Did she tell it you?
When did you hear it, say f
To-day, they have told it to me
Who told it to you f
I cannot believe it
What does he say?
What does she say f
What has he said to you?
He said nothing to me
He has not told me any newe
Mr, B» told me news
Do not tell it to them
I will tell it to him
I will not PeU it to her

SIO

9AMtLlkZ PHBA8K8*

No le diga vm. )>alabra
Se lo caUare
C^llelo vm. bien
Ha dicho vm. eso ?
No, no lo be dicho
No lo dijo vm. ?
No lo ban dicho?
Qae esti vm. hacieodo ?
Que ha hecho vm. ?
No hago nada
No he hecho nada
Acabo vm. ?

No acabo vm. ?

Que esti bacieiido el ?

Que bace ella ?

Que quiere vm. ? que manda

vm. ?
Que es lo que le ha^e falta ?
Que pide vm. ?
Re^[Kuidame
Porque no me responde vm.?

IX. Del oir^ eacuchar^ 4^c.

Oiga vm., Don N.

Oigo, senor

Me oye vm. ?

No le oigo

No le puedo oir

Hable mas alto

Oiga, venga ac4

Cigole

Escuchole

Estese quieto

No haga ruido

Que ruido es este ?

No nos podemos oir habkur

Que zambra arma vm. all4 f

Me quiebra la cabeto

Me aturde vm.

£s vm. muy molesto

Say not a word to him
I will keep it from him
Keep it well to yourself
Have you said that ?
No, I have not said it
Did you not say so f
Have they not said so 9
What are you doing f
What have you done f
I do nothing
I have done nothing
Have you done? dsdifoufm-

ish?
Have you not donef
What is he doing f
What does ^he do f
What do yon wish, what do

you command?
What is it that you wtaUf
What do you mk ?
Answer me
Why donUyou answerme ?

IX. Of hearing, listening, &c*

Hearken^ Mr. N.

I hear J Sir

Do you hear me ?

I do not hear you

I cannot hear you

Speak louder

Hark ye, come hither

I hear yoi/L

I listen to you

Be quiet^ be stiU

Do not make a noi$e

What noise is this?

We cannot hear one another

speak
What a thundering noi^e you

make there /
You break my head
You stun me
You are very troiAkeome

FAMILIAR PSRAUSS.

311

X. Dei€utender y compren-
der,

Le entiende vm. bien ?

Ha entendido vm. lo que ha

dicho ?
£ntiende vm. lo que dice ?

Me entiende vm.

Le entiendo bien

No le entiendo

Cntiende vm. el Espanol ?

No lo entiendo

Lio entiendo no poco

Lo entiende el Senor ?

No lo entiende

Me ha entendido vm. ?

No le he entendido

Ahora le entiendo

Cuando no hahla vm. tan de

prisa
El no pronuncia bien
Farece tartamudo
Ne se le entiende lo que dice

XI. Acerca de preguntar.

Como dice vm. ?

Que es esto ? que hay ?

Que ge dice ?

Que quiere decir eso ?

Que quieren ellos decir ?

De que sirve aquello ? k que

bueno ?
Que le parece ? qtie tal ?

A' que vicne aquello ?
Digame vm., se puede saber ?
Se le puede preguntar ?
Que me pregunta vm. ?
Como, Senor ?
Que se ha de hacer ?

X. Of unde^tanding and

comprehending.

Do you under^ictthd Mm weU ?
Have you understood what

he has said?
Do yon understand what he

says ?
Do you understand me ?
I understand you weli
I do not understand you
Do you understand Spamdi?
1 do not understand it
I understand it a Utile
Does the gentleman under-
stand it f
He does not understand it
Have you understood me?
1 have not understood you
Now I understand you
When you do not spemk so fast

He does not pronounce well
He seems a stammerer
One does not understand
what he says

XI. About asking a queation.

How do you say ?
Whafs this? what is there f
What do people say f
What means that?
What do they mean ?
What is the use of that?

wham that good /or f
What do you think of it ?

how do you Hke it ?
To what purpose is that ?
Tell me, may one know ?
May one ask you ?
What do you ask ofmef
How, Sir ?
What is to he done?

312

VAMILUE FHBA8V8.

Qnedesea vm.?
Que gusta vm. ?
Lo que quisiere
Suplicole me responda
Porque no me responde ?

XII. Actrca dt saber.

Sabe vm. eso?

No lo se

No se nada de ello

EUa bien lo sabia

Acaso no lo sabia 61 ?

Supuesto que lo supiese

No sabrd nada de ello

Que ! no ha sabido nada de

ello?
No supo jamas de esto
Antes de vm. lo sabia yo
£s asi 6 no ?
No que lo sepa yo

XIU. Del conocer^ olmdary
y acordaree.

Le conoce vm. ?
La conoce vm. ?
Les conoce vm. ?
Las conozco
No los conozco
Nos conocemos
No nos conocemos
No le conoce vm. d 61 ?
Creo que le he conocido
La he conocido
Nos hemos conocido
Le conozco de vista
La conozco de nombre
£11 me canocia muy bien
Me conoce vm. ?
He olvidado su nombre
Me ha olvidado vm. ?

Wkaidoyouwiakf
What do you choose ?
What you please
Pray, do answer me
Why donH you answer me f

XII. Of knowing or having
a knowledge of things.

Do you know thai f

I do not know it

I know nothing of it

She knew it well

Did he not perchance know

Suppose he knew it [it ?

He shall know nothing of it

What f has he known nothing
of it?

He never knew of this

1 knew it before you

Is it so or not?

Not that I know of

Xni. Of knowing or being
acquainted with persons,
forgetting and remember-
ing.

Do you know him f

Do you know her ?

Do you know them f

I know them

I do not know them

We are acquainted

We do not know one another

Do you not know him ?

1 believe I have known him

I have known her

We have known one another

I know him by sight

I know her by name

He knew me very well

Do yoa know me ?

I have forgotten your name

Have youforgotten me ?

PAM1LIA& PHRASES.

313

Le conoce 4 vm. ella ?
Le conoce 4 vm. el Sefior ?
Parece que no me conoce
Bien me conoce el Senor ?
Ya no me conoce
Me olvido del todo
Ya no me conoce ella
Tengo el honor de ser cono-

cido de el
^ acuerda vm. de esb ?
No se me acuerda, no me acu-

erdo de ello
Muy bien lo tengo presente
Higaselo acordar

XIV. De la edadydela vida^
de la muertej 8[c.

Que edad tiene vm. ?

Que edad tiene su hermano ?

Tengo veinte y cinco anos

Tiene veinte y dos anos

Tiene vm. mas anos que yo

Empieza 4 envejecer

Que edad tendi*^ vm. ?

Estoy buenoy que es 1q esen-
cial

£st4 vm. casado ?

Cuantas veces ha estado vm.
casado?

Cuantas mugeres ha tenido
vm.?

Tiene vm. aun padre y madre
vivos ?

Mi padre murio

Mi madre ha muerto

Dos anos ha que perdl k mi
padre

Mi madre se ha vueltoi casar

Cuantos hijos tiene vm.?

Cuatro tengo

Hijos 6 hijasy varones 6 hem-
bras?

27

DotaBhehnquoyouf

Does the gentleman know you?

It seems he does not know me

The gentleman knows me well

He knows me no more

He quite forgot me

She knows me no more

I have the honour to be known

to him
Do you remember that ?
Ida not remember it, I do

not recollect it
I do remember it very weU
Remind him of it.

XIV. Of age, life, death,
&c.

How old are you ?

How old is your brother f

I am five and twenty

He is twenty-two years old

You are older than I

He begins to grow old

How old may you be ?

I am well, that is the chief
thing

Are you married?

How many times have you
been married?

How many wives have you
had ?

Have you afaiKer and moth-
er still alive ?

My father is dead

My mother is dead

I lost my father two years
ago

My mother has married again

How many children have you?

I have four

Sons or daughters, mates or
females?

514

FAJflLIAK FHKASSS.

Tengo un hijo y tres hijas

Cuantof hermanos tiene vm.?
No tengo ninguno viro
Todos murieron
Todos bemos de morir
Cada bora ea un paso hicia
el tumulo

XV. jDe una aya y su Se-
fiorito.

Esti vm. aim en la cama ?

Dverme vm. ?

Despierte; quepesadaesvra.

Es vm. muy dormilona

No estd aun despierta ?

Lev&ntese ligero

Acaso es ya bora de levan-

tarse?
Sin dada lo es
Abora darin las nueve

Estk vm. levantada ?
Est4 su bermana levantada ?
Vamos, despacbe vm.
Porque no se da mas prisa ?

Cuidado

Se caer4 vm.

For poco se cae

Ac6rquese de la lumbre

Abriguese bibn

Se resfriari vm.

Ya estoy acatarrada

yistase luego

P6inese

Pongase las medias

C^lcese los zapatos

Tome esta camisa blaaca

Liyese las m^nos, la booa, y

la^ava
Limpiese los dientes
Sva peines estin sqcios

I have one 9on and three

daughters
How many brothers have yomf
I hiwe none Uving
They are aU dead
We must aU die
Every hour is a step towards

the grave

XV. Of a Governess and ber
young lady.

Are you in hedstiU?

Do you sleep?

Awake ; how heavy you tare

You are very sleepy

Are you not awake yet f

Rise quickly

Is it perchance already tiwte

to rise f
It is so undoubtedly
Nitte o^chck wiU presently

strike
Are you up?
. Ls your sister ap
Come^ make haste
Why do you not make more

haste?
Take care
You wiUfaU
You came nearfaMng
Come near thejire
Clothe yourseff' warm
You wiU catch cold
I have a cold already
Dress yourself direetly
Comb your hair
Put on your stockings
Put on your shoes
Take Ms dean ehstmiee
Wash your hands^your mouthy

yourfaee
Clean your teeth
Your combs are dirty

FAMILIAR PHBASES.

315

Acordoneme la cotilla

Ayudeme vm.

Pbrque no me asiste ?

Acabo vm. ya ?

Aun no

Que pesada es vm.

Diga sus oraciones

Hable alto

Cmpiece

Vamos adelante-

Acabe vmd.

Adonde est4 su libro de oirar

Clones ?
Traiga su Biblia
B^squela presto
Lea vm. un capitulo
Adonde acabo vm. ayer ?

Aqui me par6

JNo tiene vm. bien su libro

Lea poco & poco

Deletree esa voz

Vm. lee muy de prisa

No lee vm. bien

Lee muy despacio

No aprende vm. nada

No observa nada

No estudia vm.

No aprovecha nada

Es vm. muy perezosa

Que murmura vm. all4

y uelva 4 empezar

No sabe vm. su lecion

Esta es su lecion

Deme otra lecion

Porque me babla vm. Ingles.*

Hable vm siempre Espanol

Quiere vm. almorzar ?

Que gusta vm. para su almo-

erzo?
Comeri vm. pany manteca ? ^

Lace my stayu

Help me

Why donH you help me ?

Have you already done ?

Not yet

How tedious you are

Say your prayers

Speak hud

Begin

Let us go on

Make an end

Where is your prayer-book ?

Bring your Bible

Look for it quick

Read a chapter

Where did you ha»e offyes'

terday f
I stopt here
You do not hold your book

weU
Bjsad shufly
Spell that word
You read very fast
You do not read well
You read very slow
You learn nothing
You observe nothing
You do not study
You do not improve any
You are very idk
What do you mutter there ?
Begin again

You do not know your lesson
This is your lesson
Give me another lesson
Why do you speed: English

tome?
Speak always Spanish
WiU you breakfast ?
What win you have for your'

breakfast ?
WiUyoueatbreadandbutterf •

316

FjllflLIAR PHRASES.

Diga vm. lo que qniere mas
Acabe de almorzar
Ahnorso vm. ya?

Tome 8u labor
Muestreme su labor
Eso no esti bueno
Rehaga todo aquello
Tiene una aguja buena ?
Tiene vm. hilo ?
Dege su labor
Vajra i jugar un poco
Vuelva i trabajar cuando ha-

ya jugado
Yaya ^ pasearse en el jarditi
No se caliente
Vuelva presto
£s bora de comer
Si^ntese ^ la mesa
Vamos, tome vrad. una silla
Pongase la servilieta
Adonde estin su cuchillo^ su

tenedor y su cuchara ?
Rece antes de empezar
Coma vm sopa
Gusta vm. camero ?
Quiere gordo 6 magro ?
Le gusta la gordura ?
Le gusta d vm. saba ?
Dlgame su gusto
Coma, no come vm.
He aqui una ala de polio
Coma vm. pan con su carne
Ha bebido vm ?
Pida de beber
Es esta came sabrosa ?
Quiere vm. comer ma$ ?
Ha coraido vm. bastante ?
Le gusta el queso ?
De vm. las gracias
Vaya 4 bailar
Ha bailado vmd. ?
Egercitese bien

Say uikaf you like best

Finish your breakfast

Have you breakfasied al-
ready ?

Take your work

Show me your work

That is not right

Do all that over again

Have you a good needle?

Have you any thread ?

Leave your work

Go and play a little

Come again to work when
you have played

Go andwaik in the garden

Do not overheat yourself

Come again quickly

It is dinner-time

Sit down to the fable

Comey take a chair

Put on your naphn

Where are your knifej your
fork and your spoon?

Say grace before yon begin

Eat some soup

Will you have some mutton f

WiU you have fat or le(in ?

Do you like fat ?

Do you like sauce ?

Tell me your taste

Eat J you do not eat

Here is the wing of a chicken

Eat bread iciih,your meat

Have you drai^ ?

Ask for drink

Is this meat agreeable f

Will you tat more?

Have you eat enough f

Do you like cheese?

Give thanks

Go to dance

Have you danced?

Exercise yourself weU

VAIflLUB TUAkBti.

3ir

Vaya, dance vm. un minuete
No danza Tin. bien
Teogase derecha
LevaDte la cabeza
Haga la cortesla
IVf ireme vmd.
Que est4 vm* mirando ?
Se fue 8u maestro ?
Ha acabado vm. ya ?
Yaya a)iora 4 cantar
Lileve su libro consigo
Yuelva d trabajar cuando ha-

ya acabado
Ha cantado vm ?
Tieoe lecion nueva ?
Cante vm. una arieta
Cante vm. una cancion
Canta vm. bonltamente
Toque vm. el clave 6 piano

Ahora la guitarra

Su prima no vale nada

Estd su guitarra templada ?
Sabe vm. templarla ?
Aun esti destemplada
No tiene vm. bien su guitarra

Vajra vm. 4 aprender el Es*

panoi
Donde estd su gramitica ?
Busque su libro
Que lecion tiene vm ?
Que di4k)eo ha leido ?
Repita su lecion
No la sabe vm.
Nada ha aprendido
Lea delante de ml
No pronuncia vm. bien
Aprendio vm. so lecion de

memoria?
No tiene vmd. memoria
27*

Carney donee a mimuel

You do not dance weU

Stand upright

Hold up your head

Make a curtesy

Look at me

What are you looking at?

h your matter gone ?

Have you done aJready ?

Go now and sing

Carry your book with you

Come again to work when

you luive done
Have you sung?
Have you a new lesson ?
Sing an air
Sing a song
You sing prettily
Play on the harpsichord or

piano
Now the guitar
Your clumtrel is good for

nothing
Is your guitar in tunef
Do you know how to tune it?
It is still out of tune
You do not hold your guitar

wen
Go and learn Spanish

Where is your grammar ?

Look for your book

What lesson have you f

What dialogue have you read?

Repeat your lesson

You do not know it

You have learned notking

Read before me

You do notpromnmee wett

Have you kamt your kssam

by heart ?
Tou have no memory

318

FAUrLIAR PBRASSg.

No toma vm. tn^ajo

Que quiere para mereodar ?

^para cenar ?
Venga 4 ceoar
No 86 engoloaine en la fnita
£star4 vm. mala
La fruta no le sienta bien
£s tiempo de acostarse
DesniideBe luego
Rece
Lev^ntese manana tempiano

XVI. Del pasio.

Hace muy bello tiempo
Este dia daro y sereno convi-

da al pas^o
No parece nube dguna

VamoB i paaear

Vamos 4 tomar el aire

Quiere vm. dar una vuelta ?

Gusta vm. venir conmigo ?

Respondame, digame sS, 6 no

Vamos pues, me gusta

Le acompanare

Adonde iremos ?

Vamos al Parque

Vamos 4 Ids prados

Iremos en coche ?

Como le gustare

Vimonos 4 pie

Tiene vm. razon ?

Eso es saludable

Se gana apetito andando

A^nimo, vamos, andemos

For donde iremos ?

For donde quisiere

For aqui 6 por alii

Vamos por aqui*

A^ mano derecha, 41a derecha

A^ mano izquterda, 4 la izqui-
erda,

You take no pains

What will you have for lun^

cheoH f—fonr supper f
Come to supper
Do not eat too much fruit
You will be sick
Fruit does not suit you
It is time to go to bed
Undress yourself presently
Say your prayers
Rise early to-morrow,

XVL Of walking.

It is very fine weather

This clear and serene day in^

vites to walk
There does not appear any

cloud
Let us go and walk
' Let us go and take the air
Will you take a turn ?
Do you wish to come with me f
Answer me, tell me yes, or no
Let us go then, I wish it
I will accompany you
WJ^e shall we go?
Let us go to the Park
Let us go to the meadows
ShaU we go in a cooxh ?
As you please
Let us go on foot
You are in the right

That is healthy

Walking gets one an appetite

Cheer up, come, let us walk

Which way shall we go ?

Which way you please

This way or that

Let us go this way

On the right hatid, to the
right

On the lefthandf to the left

PAMltlAR PHRASE^!.

319

Quiere vm. ir por agua ?
Adonde est^ el barco ?
Adoade est^n los barqueros ?
Entre vm. en el barco
Solo atravesaremos el rio
£1 agua esti muy maosa y

apacible
£mpieza 4 rooverse
Adonde quiere vm. desem-

barcar^ abordar ?
£stamos cerca de la orilla
Para tu el barco
Pasemos la vista sobre estos

campos y prados
Que verdura tan hermosa
£stos prados estin esmalta-
dos coo variedad de flores
Que prospecto tan hermoso !
Este lugar es rouy ameno
Los ixboles echan flores
Los resales empiezan 4 echar

capuUos
Aun no estdn abiertas estas

rosas
Crece el trigo
Prometen mucho los panes

Las espigas son muy largas
Ya el trigo esti madtiro
Esta es una bella Uanura
Estas sombras son muy apar

cibles
Que todo tan hermoso
Me parece que estoy en un

paraiso terrenal
No oye vm. la dulce melodia

de las aves ?
CI canto suave del ruiseiior'

Aun no estamos en Mayo
Anda vm. demasiado presto
No le puedo segutr
No puedo if tan de prisa

JFiU you go hy water ?
Where is the boat?
Where are the boatmen f
Step into the boat
We tviUjust cross the river
The water is very smooth and

calm
It begins to move
Where will you kmd^ board ?

We are near the sitore

Stop the boat

Let us cast our sight upon

these fields and meadows
What a fine green
These meadows are enamelled

with a variety offiowers
What a beautiful prospect !
This place is very pleasant
The trees are bloomiog
The rose-bushes begin to budy

or throw out buds
These roses are not blown yet

The com grows

The cornfields are very prom-
ising

The ears are very long

The wheat is already ripe

This is a fine plain

These shades are very plecu-
ant

What a fine tout ensemble

Methinf^ I am in an earthly
paradise

Do you not hear the sweet
melody of birds?

The sweet warbling of the
nightingale ?

We are not yet in May

You walk too quick

I cannot follow you

I cannot go so fast

320

FAMli^IAB PARAiBS.

No me es posibk alcanzarle

Es vm. UD pobre canunante
Le suplico, ande un poco mas

despacio
Deacaoaemos un rato
No Tale la pena
£8t4 vm. cansado ?
Estoy molido
AcoatemoDos en la yerba
Me temo que est^ humeda
Como puede ser ? no ha llo*

vido
Basta la homedad de la noche

Ni aon quiero sentarme en el

suelo
Pasemoa pues 4 esa aelva

Entremoa en ese bosque
Que sitio tan gustoao !
Que idoneo para estudiar !
He aqui tres pas6o8
Que bien plantados est^n es-

tos drboles I
Se tnclinan unos h&cia otros
Estos drboles hacen bella

sombra
Que espesa estd esa arboleda!
Los rayos del sol no la pueden

penetrar
He aqui heronosos huertos
Hay mucha fruta
Veo man^anas, perasi avcUar

nas, guindas
Antes quisiera nueces 6 cas-

tanas
Estos albaricoques y p^rsigos

me hacen venir el agua &

la boca
Bien me comiera algunas de

estas ciruelas

It 19 noi poMnbUe far me to

keepupufitkyou
You are awrrywaJOcer
Pray J go a UUlt 9lower

Let U9 rett a UUh

liisnoi worth the wkik

Are you tired f

I am very much tired

Let US He down upon the gran

1 am afrmd it is damp

How can ttbef it hat not

rained
The dampnese of the nighi it

sujficient
Nor will 1 even eit tqHm the

ground
Let ut walk then iniothat

wood
Let U9 go into that grove
What a pleasant place !
How fit for study !
Here are three walks
How well these trees are

planted/
They bend towards each other
These trees make a fine shade

How thick that grove is f
The suU'^ams cannot pieree

through it
Here are fine orchards
There is a great deal of fruit
I hee apples f pears^ fiWertSy

cherries
I had rather have walnuts or

chesnuts *
These apricots and peaches

make my mouth water

I could really eat some of
these ptkme

B^AMILIAR PtfRASl&S.

821

Cuanta cuesta la libra de

guindas ?
Ocho cuartos
Compremos algunas
Me temo que nos mojenios
Reparo que el tiempo empie-

za 4 anublarse
Volv4monos
Empieza 4 ser tarde
Se pone el sol
No corra vm.
Agudrdeme un poco
Yamos, vamos, si estuviere

cansado, descansari cenan-

do
Y aua mejor en la cama

XVII. Del tiempo.

Que tiempo hace ?

Hace buen tiempo ?

Ilace mal tiempo ?

Hace calor ?

Hace frio ?

Luce el sol ?

Hace bello tiempo

Hace mal tiempo

£1 tiempo esti seco, hume-
do, lluvioso, tempestuoso,
ventoso

£s tiempo inconstante y vari-
able

Hace gran calor, mucbo frio

El tiempo esti claro y sereno

Luce el sol

Hace un tiempo oscuio

El cielo est4 cargado de nu-
bes

Las nubes son muy espesas

Llueve ?

No, creo que no

£mpieza k Hover

Aun no llueve

Presto Uoverd & cdntaros

What costs a pound of cher-
ries ?

Five cents

Let ns buy some

lam afraid we shall he loet

I observe the weather begins
to grow cloudy

Let us go back again

It begins to be late

The sun is setting

Do not run

Stay for me a little

ComCf come J if you be weary ,
you wiU rest yourself at
supper

And yet better in bed,

XVII. Of the weather.

How is the weather f
Is it fine weather f
Is it bad weather f
Is it hot?
Is it cold?
Does the sun shine ?
It is fine weather
It is bad weather
It is dry^ wety rainy ^ stormy ^
windy weather

It is unsettled and changeable

weather
It is very hot^ very cold
It is clear and serene weather
The sun shines
It is dark weather
It is cloudy, the sky is over-^

cast
The clouds are very thick
Does it rain ?
Nof I believe not .
It begins to rain
It does not rain yet
It will soon rain in torrents

322

FAMILIAR PHSA8B8*

Ya Uueve

Solcf es un aguacero

Pasar4 luego

Me temo que tendr^mos agua

No tema vm., no tenga miedo

£$ una nube que pasa

Todo el dia Uoveri

Mucbo lo dudo

Presto acabard de Hover

Pongimonos al abrigo

No hay nada que teiner
Solo es agua

Tiene vm. miedo del agua?
Solo temo echar k perder mi

vestido
Ya tenemos agua
No debemos salir cod este

tiempo
Graniza 6 apedr6a
Graniza muy recio
Ahora nieva
Que! nieva?

Mire vm. esos grandes copos
Hiela tambien
No, que deshiela
Creo que hiela muy fuerte
£s hielo muy duro
E! hielo se derrite
La nieve se hace agua
Cae aguanieve
Corre unsi borrasca grande
Atruena
Relampaguea
Solo alumbran los rel^mpa-

gos
Corre muchoviento
Hace mucho viento
£1 viento viene muy frio
Se mudo el viento
£1 viento cae
Paso la tormenta
£1 tiempo se aclara

It raim already

It t« hut a shower

It will he over presently

lam afraid we shaUhave raiu

Do not fear J he not afraid

It is a jlying cloud

It will rain all day

I question it much

It wiU soon cease to rain

Let us put ourselves under

shelter
There is nothing to fear
It is hut water
Are you afraid of water f
I fear only to spoil My

clothes
It rains already
We must not go out in such

weather
It hails

It hails very hard
Now it snows
What! does it snow?
hook at those great fiaJees
It freezes also
Noy it thaws

I think it freezes very hard
It is a hard frost
The ice is melting
The snow melts otway
There is a sleet falling
There is a great storm
It thunders
It lightens
The flashes of lightning alone

light
The wind blows hard
The wind blows high
The wind blows very cold
The wind is changed
The windfalls
The storm is over
The weather clears t^

FAMILIAR PHRASES.

923

£1 cielo empieza 4 aclararse
Se abre el tiempo^ empieza

i serenarse
Dividense las nubes ; desapa-

recen y desvanecense poco

4 poco
Ya vemos lucir el sol
Veo el arco.iris, el arco celeste
£s senal de buen tiempo
Hace una neblina muy espesa
No nos podemos Ver
He alii una niebia que se levanta
Pero el sol empieza 4 disiparla

The sky begins to clear up
The tDeather setHeSj it begins

to be fair again
The clouds divide^ or break
asunder i they disappear
by degrees ai^ vanish
We now see the sun shine
I see the rainbow
It is a sign of fair weather
There is a very thick mist
We cannot see one another
There is a fog rising
But the sun begins to dis-
perse it,

XVni. De la hora. XVIII. Of the time of day.

Que hora es ?
Vea vm. que hora es ?
Dlgame que hora es ?
No sabe vm. que hora es ?

£s temprano

No es tarde

Nos volvereraos 4 casa ?

Hay bastante tiempo

Solo es medio dia

Ea cerca de la una

Ahora dio la una

Es la una y cuarto

Es la una y media

£s la una y tres cuartos

Es cerca de las dos, 6 darin

las dos
No he oido el reloj
Han dado las seis
Son las siete al sol
Acaban de dar las siete
Las ocho ban dado
Cerca de las diez
Es cerca de las doce de la

noche, 6 media noche
Como lo sabe vm.?

What o^clockisit?
See what o^chck it is ?
Tell me what o^ clock it is ?
DonH you know what o^clock

it is f
It is early
It is not late
Shall we return home ?
There is time enough
It is but twelve o^clock^ (at

noon)
It is almost one
.It strttckonenow
It is a quarter past one
It is half an hour past one
It is three quarters past one
It is near twoj or it is upon

the stroke of two
I have not heard the clock
It has struck six
It is seven by the sun
It struck seven just now
It has struck eight
About ten o^clock
It is near twelve o^clock, or

midnight
How do you know it f

324

FAMILIAR PHRASK8.

Da el reloj

Lo oye vm. dar r

No creo que sea tan tarde

Mire su reloj

Adelanta mucho

Atrasa

No anda, esti parado

De le vm. cuerda

Vea vm. que hora es al reloj

de sol
Los cuadrantesno concuerdan
La mano est^ quebrada
Adonde esti su reloj de repe-

ticion ?
No la hallo, esti estraviado

XIX. De Uu estaciones del
afio.

Que estacion le gusta mas ?
La primavera es la mas agra-

dable de todas
Todd la naturalezase anima
El tiempo est4 muy templado

Ni hace demasiado calor, ni

demasiado frio
A'rden entonces todos los ani-

males en amor
No hay primavera este afio
Los tiempos estin revueltos
Es un inviemo moderado
Nada adelanta

La estacion est^ muy atrasada
Tenemos un estio muy calo-

roso
Ob, que calor !
Haceun calor escesivo
Que tiempo tan pesado !
No puedo con tanto calor
Estoy sudando, hecho agua

Me muero de calor
Jamas tuve tanto calor

The clock sirikeB

DoifOuhearitBtrike?

t do not think it is so late

Look at your watch

It goes too fast

It goes too slow

It does not gOj it is stopped

Wind it up

See what o^ clock it is by the
sun-dial

The sun-dials do not agree

The hand is broken

Where is your repeater ? or
repeating watch ?

1 do not find it, it is mislaid.

XIX. Of the seasons of the

year.
What season do you like best? '
Spring is tki most pleasant

of an . .- .
All nature w animated
The weather is very mildj

temperate
It is neither too hot^ nor too

cold
All creatures then make love^

or bum with love
There is no spring this year
The times are disordered
It is a moderate winter
Nothing comes forward
The season is very bachoard
We hate a very hot summer

How hot it is f

It is excessively hot

What heavy weather /

I cannot endure so much heat

I am perspiring f all over in a

perspiration
I am dying with heat
I never was so hot

FAMILIAE PHRASES.

325

£s muy bello tiempo para los

frutos de la tierra
Tendremos mucho heno

L.a cosecha ser^ muy abun-

dante
Hay abundancia de fruta
Todos los ^rboles ban produ-

cido mucbo
Nos hace falta un poco de

agua
La cosecha estd cerca
Empiezan d segar los trigos
Se ban segado los prados
Es menester recoger los panes
Estamos en la canlcula
Paso ya el verano
El otono, la calda de las bo-

jas, le ba sucedido
La vendunia se acerca
Hermosa yendimia tenemos
Vendimiaremos en tres 6

cuatro dias
Los vinos serdn buenos este

aiio
Las viiias ban dado bien
El vino ser4 barato
£s preciso recoger los frutos

atrasados
Las manzanas y peras de in-

vierno
Los dias se ban acortado mu-
cbo
Las mananas son frias
£1 inviemo viene acercandose

Muy presto es nocbe
Las tardes son largas
Empieza la lumbre d recrear

No me gusta el inviemo
Los dias son muy breves

It %8 very fine weather fw the
fruits of the earth

We shall have a great deal
of hay

The harvest mU he very plen-
tiful

There is abundance of fruit

AU the trees have produced
much

We want a little rain

Harvest time draws near
They begin to reap the wheat
The meadows have been mowed
We must get in the com
We are in dog-days
The summer is already gone
Autumn J thefaUoftheleaveSy

has taken its place
Vintage draws near
We have a very fine vintage
We shall gather grapes in

three or four days
Wines wiUbe good this year

The vines have borne well
Wine will be cheap
We must gather the late pro-
duce
Winter apples and pears

The days have grown very

short
The mornings are cold
Winter comes on drawing

near
It is very soon night
The evenings are long
Fire begins to be pleasant,

or agreeable
Winter does not please me
The days are very short

826

rAMlLIAK raftASSS.

Ya no et de dia 4 las cinco
No se ve 4 las dnco
Empieia 4 aoochecer 4 Ia9

cuatro
Amaneoe i las nete
No se sabe en que pasar el

lienpo
Este invierno ea muy frio^

muy 4spero
Se acuefda vm. del grande

invierno ?
Jamai vi invierno tan frio
Empieaan 4 eiecer los diaa
Loa dias aon un poco mas

largos
Casi no hemos tenido invi-
erno
(ja primavera ya viene 4 ro-

gocijar la naturaleaa

XX. Delaida dla eacueia.
De donde viene vm. ?
De mi casa* De casa
Adonde va vm. tan de prisa?
Voy 4 la escuela
Venga conmigo
Aguarde un poco
Vimonos, le suplico •
Porque juega vm. andando ?
No se entretenga
Ll^remos bastante presto
Que hora es ?
Cerca de las siete
Aun no ha dado el reloj
Despachemos
Quien viene ahf ?
Es uno de nuestros condisci-

pulos --

Ir^mos los tres juntos
y^monos 4 prisa

XXJ. Enla€9cueia.
Sientec&en su lugar
Cuelgue su sombrero

Iti$m Imager UglU at Jive

One does not see at five

It beigiuM to grow dark ai

four
Tke iMf kreake at seven
One knows not in what to

spend on^s ii$ne
TkM is a very coldj very

sharp winter
Do you remember the hard

winter f
I never saw so cold a winter
Tke days begin to lengthen
The days are a little longer

We almost have had no aroa-

ter
The spring eomes alreudjf to

revive or r^aiee nature

XX. Of going to school.
From where do you come f
From home. From my house
Where are you going so fast?
I am going to school
Come with me
Stay a Uttle
Let us gOy I pray you
Why do you play as you go T
Do not amuse yourself
We shall arrive soon enough
Whatohlockisitf
Almost seven

The clock has not struck yet
Let %is make haste
Who comes there ?
It is one of our schoolfellows

We will go dU three together
Let us go away fast

XXJ. In the acbool.
Sit down ts yaurplnce
Hang up your hat

FAMILIAR PSRASKS.

32r

Adonde est4 su libro ?

Liea su lecion

Estudie su lecion

Aprendasu lecion de memwia

Nada hace sino jugar

Le anotare

Se lo dire al maestro

Acabo vm. ?

Aun no he acabado

Que est4 escribiendo ?

Escribo mi egercicio

Todo lo he escrito

No me mueva

Haga me un poco de lugar

Ym. tiene bastante lugar

Vaya atras un poco

Ud poco mas arriba ^

Algo mas abajo

Sinrase de darma un liforo

Adonde empezamos ?

Hasta donde decimos ?

Hasta aqui

Cual es su tarea ?

De quien es este libro?

Sabe ym. su lecion de memo-

ria?
Aun no
Apunteme vm.
Ha de leerla tres veces
Quien lo ha dicho ?
£1 Senor A. lo mando
Tiene vm. pluma y tinta ?
Escriba vm. su egercicio
Lo escribto vm. mal
Lea vm. su lecion
Diga su lecion
Le azotardn
Merece vm. azotes
Porque llega vm. tan tarde ?
Tuve que hacer
Que negocio le detuvo ?
A' que bora se levanto ?
AMasocho

Where « four book ?

Read your le99on

Study your le»8on

Get your lesson by heart

You do nothing but piay

I unU set you up

I wiU tell it to the master

Have you done ?

I have not finished yet

What are you writing ?

I am uniting my exercise

I have written it aU

Do not jog me

Make a little room for me

You have room enough

Go a little farther

Ji Kttk higher

A Utile lower

Be phased to give me a book

Where do we begin ?

Brno far do we say ?

Thus far J so far

Which is your task?

Whose book is this ?

Do you know your lesson by

heart?
Not yet
Do prompt me

You must read it three time9^
Who has said so ?
Mr, A, ordered it
Have you pen and ink ?
Write your exercise
Ydn wrote it iU
Read your lesson
Say your lesson
You wiU be fogged
You deserve the whip
Why do you arrive solate?
I had to do

What business detained you ?
At what hour did you rise ?
At eight o^clock

328

FAMIJLIAA DULOOUES.

Porque se levanto tan tarde ?
Es vm. un flojon
Qu^dese en su sitio
Qultese de mi lugar
Porque me rempuja asi ?
Qiiien le toca ?
No 86 enoge vm.
Me quejare al maestro
Digaselo, si qoisiere
Poco me importa
Senor, no me quiere dejar

quieto
Me agarro el libro de las ma-

nos
Hace burla de mi
Me tiro de los cabellos
Me da patadas
Me empuja fuera de mi lugar
No hay ud
Que bulla esestaP
Tomen eate muchacho y den-

le una mano de azotes
Senor, perdoneme vm.
Suplicole, Seiior, perdoneme

esta sola vez
Portese pues mejor en ade-

lante

Why did you rise so kUe ?

You are a sluggard

Remain in your place

Get away from my place

Why do you push me so?

Who touches you ?

Do not he angry

I ufiU complain to the master

TeU it to him, if you wtU

1 care little

Sir J he wonH let me alone

He snatched the book from

my hands
He mocks me
He pulled me by the hair
He kicks me

He thrusts me out of my place
There is no suck tHkng
What noise ii this ?
Take this boy and give him «

good whipping
Sir J pardon me
Pray, Sir, forgive me this

once alone
Behave then better for the

future

Diilogos Familiares, Espanoles e Ingle
Familiar Dialogues, Spanish and English.

Diilogo I. Acerca de saludar
6 informarse de la salud
de aJguno.

Buenos dias, Senor
Yo se los deseo 4 vm.
Bnenas tardes, Caballero
Buenas noches, Senor
Servidor de usted
Como est4 vm. ?
Buenoy para servir 4 vm.

Diabgve L Of saluting and
inquiring after any one's
health.

Good morning, 8ir
I wish you the same
Good afternoon. Sir
Good night, Sir
Your servant
How do you do ?
Very well, at your service

FAMILIAA DIALOGUES.

S29

Como va ? como lo pasa ?
Siempre al servicio de vm.
Y ^ vm. Senor, como le va ?

Muy bieny gracias d Dios
ICstoy bueno para servir i vm.
Yamos pasando
l^e alegro mucho de verle
JAe alegro de verle con salud
Agradezcoselo infinito
Yiva vm. machos aiios
Como est4 el Seiior sa her-

mano?
Estaba bueno la iiltimavez

que le vi
Estd bueno, gracias & Dios
Creo que le va bien
Ayer noche estaba bueno
Me alegro de eso
Donde esti ?
En el campo
En la ciudad
En casa

Ha salido poco haca
Se alegrard de ver 4 vm.
Gelebrari mucho saber que

vm. goza de perfecta sahid
Vm. le favorece mucho
Tambien encontrari vm. con

el mas sincero reconociml-

ento
Soy su servidor
Como est4 la Senorita?
Esti buena

Creo que estd muy buena
No est4 muy buena
Estd algo inalita
Ayer manana estaba indispu-

csta
Hela aqui que viene
tehorittLf i los pies de tm.

28*

How are you f How goes iff
Always at your service
And yoUf 8ir^ how is it with

youf
Very wellf thank God
I am very weU at your service
Pretty well; so, so
I am very glad to see you
I rejoice to see you in health
1 thank you very much for it
I am ob&ged to you
How does your orother do ? .

He was weU the last time 1

saw Mm
He is weH, thank God
I believe he is well
He was well last night
I am very glad of it
Where is he?
In the country
In the city
At home

He is just gone out
He will be glad to see yam
He will be very happy to hear

you enjoy perfect health
You are very polite
You will also meet with a

most sincere return

I am his servant

How is the young lady f

Site is well

I believe she is very welt

She is not very well

She is a little unweB

She was indisposed yesterday
morning

Here she is coming

Miss J your most humble ser-
vant

330

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

Servidorade vm., Senor
Como ha estado vm., desde

que no la he visto ?
Siempre bien, gracias i Dios
Como sehaliavm?
Muy bien

Me da gusto de saberlo
De corazon lo agradezco
Pero como le va ahora ?
Asi^asi; pasando
No he pasado buena noche

Losieoto muchlsimo

Es un dolor

Yo la compadezco mucho

No puedo yo lisongearme

mucho de salud
Que ha tenido vm. ?

Mi estomago ha estado des-
compuesto

Parece que est^ vm. buena
ahora

Asi, asi, para servir i vm.

Como estin en casa ?

Estdn nuestros amigos de la
corte, del campo, de la vil-
la, buenos ?

Todos estin buenos, menos
mi madre

Que le duele ?

Que enfermedad tiene ?

Tiene calentura, dolor colico,

t08

Le duele la cabexa

Desde cuando ?

Desde media noche empezo

4 padecer
Deseo que se mejore pronto
Puedo yo servirla de algo ?
Puede mandarme con toda

satisfaccioft

Sir^ I am your servant
How have you beeuy nnee I

saw you last f
Always welly thank God
How do you find yourself f
Quite well

I €um pleased to know it
I thank you heartily
But how is it with you now f
Pretty well; so^so
I have not passed a good

uight
I am very sorry for it
I regret it very much
1 sympathise much with you
IcanHhoast much in point

of health
What has been the matter

with you ?
My stomach has been a Utile

out of order
It seems you are now well

Sof soy at your service
How do they do at home f
Our friends at courty in the

country y in towny are they

weU?
They are aU weUy except «Jf

mother
What ails her f
What is her complaint ?
She has a f every the choKcy a

cough
She has the head-ache
How long since?
Since midnight she began to

suffer
I wish her to improve speedily
Can I serve her in any thing
She may command me wiA

full confidence

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

SSI

JLa Senora nuDca ha dudado

del favor de vm.
Suplico 4 vm. que no me ol-

vide
£so queda de mi cuenta
Ha mucho tiempo que est4

mala?
No ha mucho
Deseo que se mejore^
La Seciora sabe muy bien el

favor de vm.
Se alegrar4 de ver 4 vmd.
Soy muy servidor suyo
Siento no tener tiempo de ver-

la hoy
Sientese vmd. un rato
De veras no puedo
£st4 vm. muy de prisa ?
Volvere manana
No puede vm. esperar on

poco .'*
Tengo negocios urgentes
Solo vengo para saber como

estaban vms.
Rinda vm. mis repctos d su

hermano
Encomiendeme d mi Senora

su madre
Sus ordenes serdn puntual-

mente obedecidas
Digale vm cuanto siento sa-
ber su indisposicion
Lo hare sin fsdta
Vaya vm. con Dios
Quede vm. con Dios
Estimo mucho esta visita
Buenas noches, Caballero
Senora, Felices noches

Diil. IL Acerca del hahlar Dialll
Espafloh

Aprende vm. el Espaiiol?
SSy Seiior, algun tiempo hace

Madam never has doubted

If our goodness
I beg you will not forget me

That lies to my account

Is it long since she has been

ill?
It is not long

I wish she may grow better
My lady is sensible of your-

kindness
She will be glad to see you
lam her most humble servant
I am sorry I have not time to

see her to-^y
Sit down a little
Indeed I cannot
Are you in great haste f
I will come again to-morrow
Cannot you stay a little ?

I have earnest business

I only come to know how you

were
Present my best regards to

your brother
Present my respects to my la"

dy your mother
Your orders shall be punctU"

ally obeyed
Tell her how sorry I am to

know her indisposition
I shall do it without fail
Farewell
Good bye

I thank you for this visit
Good night J Sir
Good night f Madam

Of speaking Span-
bh.

Do you learn Spanish?
YeSy Sir^ some time since

3S2

FAMILIAR 0IALOOI7ES.

Yo me empeno en aprendeiio

Vm* hace muy bien

Es una lengua muy 6til y
hermosa

£s tarobien muy graciota,
Uena de sal y espresion

Me han dicho tambien que es
mas varonil y copiosa que
la Fiancesa

No obstante^ la Fraucesa es
mas de moda

Si los Espaaoles hubieran cul-
tivado su lengua como los
Inglesesy en estos dos iilti-
mos siglosy sin duda que se-
ria mucho mas de moda

For la superioridad de su
diccion^ y la suavidad de
suestilo

Forque su prominciacion no
tiene mas de 27 sonidos

Forque cada letra se debe
pronunciar

Y siempre con el mismo so-
nido

Forque su pronunciacion se
puede esplicar suficiente-
mente en una p^na de
duodecimo

Tambien se puede adquirir
con facilidad en una bora

No hay estudiante que en la
primera lecion no la pueda
con facilidad aprender

Est^ en su poder, eon 8 le-
cionesy el leerla corriente-
mente, y con 20 entender
perfectamente cualquier li-
bro con la ayuda del dic-
cionario

No tiene declinacion sino pa-
ra los pronombres perso-
nates

I endeatow id learn U

You do very weU

It ia a very nufid and very
fine language

It is aho very wUty^futt of
humour and expretnon

I have been told it ie also
more manly and copious
than the French

IMunthstandingy the French
is more in fashion

Hadthe Spaniards euUivaied
their language as the Eng-
lish havCf in these two last
centuries^ no doubt it would
be much more in fashion

For its superiority of diction
and suamty ofstyie

Because itspr&nundaHam has
only twenty-seven sounds

Because every letter is to be
pronounced

And always with the same
sound

Because its pronunciation
may besuffidently explain-
ed in a duodecimo page

It may cdso be easily acquire
ed in an hour

There is no learner that in
the first lesson may not
easily ham it

It is in his power ^ with eight
lessons J to read it fiuently^
and with twenty to vnder^
stand perfectly any book
with the help of a diction-
ary *

It has no declension but for
the personal pronouns

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

333

No tiene mas de tres verbos

auxiliares
Casi coQstantemente guaida

la natural precedencia de

las palabras
La preposicion nunca se en-

cuentra sino delante de su

propio caso
Todas sus irregularidades se

pueden con facilidad cor-

regir
For esto la lengua Espanola

es la mas propia para
' aprenderse por arte

Y la mas proporcionada para
las Uoiversidades^ tratados
y comercio

Toda su brillantez se descu-
brio en el siglo 16*^ —

Y entonces se hablaba mas
comunmente que ninguna
otra lengua

Los autores Espaiioles de
aquel siglo hicieron enton-
ces y aun hacen ahora, asi
en verso como en prosa,
una muy brillante figura

Ahora tambien hay muchos
libros nuevos

Escritos en el reinado de
Carlos III.

Que yo no cito^ porque son
muchos

La primera lecion me mostro
lo muy facil que es esta
lengua

Por ml, yo gusto mucho de
ella

Porque facilita nuestros medi-
06 de fomentar el mas im-
portante comercio que po-
seemos

It has no more than three
auxiliary verbft

It preserves almost constant-
ly the natural precedence
of words

The preposition never is met
with but before its own case

M its irregularities may be
easily corrected

For this reason the Spanish

language is the most prcH

per to be learned by art
And the most proper for the

Universitiesy treaties^ and

commerce
All it^ brilliancy appeared in

the iQth century
And it was then more com*

monly spoken than any oth'

er language
The Spanish writers of that

century then made and yet

make^ both in verse and

prose f a very brilliant fg-

ure
There are also now many new

books
Written in the reign of

Charles III.
Which I do not quote, because

they are very numerous
The first lesson convinced me

of the great facility of

this language
For my party I Uke it very

much
Because it facilitates our

means of encouraging the

most important trade we

possess

SS4

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

Digo fi\ de EspaBa y las
Americas

Pero no empiece vm. sin un
buen maestro ^

Porque un mal h&bito no es
f4cil de dejar

Se dice^ que vm. habla muy
bien el Espanol

Entiendolo medianamente

Que libros lee vm. para apren-
derel Espanol?

La Gramitica de Josse, y
los Egercicios por el mis-
mo Autor

£s natural de Espana y hom-
bre muy docto

Leo tambien las Cartas M ar-
ruecas, Gil Bias de Santilla-
na, y la bistoria de la con-
qubta de Megico^ por Solis

Porque no lee vm. Don Qni-

jote?
Mi maestro me dijo que no

era libro para principiantes
Que razon tiene ?
Porque hay en el muchos mo-

dos de hablar anticuados
De que diccionario se surve

vm.
Delde Neuman en 2tomos

8vo., y de el de Gattel, en

2y 18mo.
Que aprende vm. de memo-

ria?
Aprendo algunas voces del

vocabulario
Dlgame vm., como se llama

aquello?
Creo que se llama — — .
Muy bien, y e«to ?
Peronoestudia vm. alguna co-

sa ademas del vocabulario ?

I mean tM with Spam md

North and South America
But do not begin without an

able master
Because an evil habit is not

easily removed
It is saidf that yom speak

very well the Spanish
I understand it pretty wett
What hooks do you read to

learn Spani«A?
The Grammar of Josse^

and the Exercises by the

same Author
He is a native of Spain and

a very learned man
I read also the Cartas Mar-

ruecasy Gil Bids ofSantil'

lana, and the history of the

conquest of Mexico^ by

SOLIS

Why do you not read Don
Quiocote ?

My master told me this was
not a book for beginners

What is the reason ?

Because it contains a great
many obsolete idioms

What dictionary do you make
use off

Of the dictionary of New-
man j2y. 8vo., and that of
Gattely 2y. ismo.

What do you get by heart ?

1 learn some words in the vo-
cabulary
Tell me J how is that called ?

I believe it is caUe d
Very welly and this f
But do you not study any
thing else besides words?

FAMIUAR DIALOGUES.

335

Sf, Senor, los egemplos de

las reglas de la gramdtica
£1 libro de egercicios^ frases

familiares, y algunos dii-

log08
Va vm. aprendiendo bien
Agradezco 4 vm. que me ali-

ente
Pronuncio bien ?
Bellamente, elegantemente
Solo le falta mas pr^ctica
Nada se adquiere sin trabajo

Por poco que se aplique vmd.^
sabr4 muy presto el Espa-
nol
' Estoy convencido de esto

Me ban dicho que vm. enten-
dia muy bien el Castellano.

Qoisiera que fuese verdad
Supongo que desea ym. saber

esta hermosa lengua
Lo ha de suponer asi, por-

que, en efecto, lo deseo
Bien, le voy i ensenar el

modo de hablar en poco el

Espanol
Se lo agradecere mucho
£1 metodo mas f4cil para

apiender una lengua, es

faablarla & menudo
p0ro para hablarla, es me-

nester saber algo de ella
Ya sabe vm. bastante
Solo se algunas palabras de

las mas necesarias, y algu-
nas sentencias breves
Esto basta para empezar 4

hablar
Si eso fuera asi, presto sa-

bria la lengua
No tenga vm. dodade ello

Fe«9 Sir, the examples of the

rules of the grammar
The book of exercises, fo"

miliar phrases, and some

dialogues
You are learning well
I thank you for encourag-
ing me
Do I pronounce weUf
Excellently, elegantly
You only want more practice
Nothing is acquired without

pains
However little you apply,

you wiU very soon Imow

Spanish
1 am convinced of it
I have been told you were

well versed in the Spanish

language
I should wish it were true
I suppose you have a mind

to know this fine language
You ought to euppose it so;

for, indeed, I wish it
Well, I am going to teach

you the way to speak Span-
ish in a short time
I shall be much obliged to you
The easiest way to learn a

language, is to speak it

frequently
But to speak it, one must

know something of it
You know enough already
I know but a few words most

necessary, and some short

phrases
This is enough to begin to

speak
If it were so, I should soon

know the language
Do not have any aoubt of it

336

FAMaiAR DIALOGUES.

Noentiende vmd. lo que le

digo?
Lo entiendo y comprendo moy

bien
Perotengo mucha dificuhad

en hablar
No tengo facilidad en bablar
Esto viene con el tiempo
Tengo cortedad de hablar,

por no esponerme 4 decir

disparates

No se enfade por esto

Poca paciencia tengo

Hace mucho tiempo que vm.

aprende ?
Dos meses ha que empece
£s muy corto tiempo
No le dice su maestro que de-

biera siempre hablar ?

Muy 4 menudo me lo dice
Porque pues, no quiere vm.

hablar ?
Con quien he de hablar ?
Con todos los que le hablen
Quisiera hablar, pero no me

atrevo
Creame vm., sea atrevido,

hable siempre, bien 6 maf
Sobre todo, no omita vm.

ocasion de hablar cuando

la encuentre
Hablando es, como aprende-

mos d hablar
Ha pensado vm. muy bien
Seguire pues su consejo
Hard vm. muy bien

Di41. III. Para hablar Ingles.

Sefior, es vm. Espanol ?
S|, Senor, para servirle

Do not you understand what

I say to you f
I understand and comprehend

it very well
But I find it very hard to

speak
I have no facility in speaking
nis comes in time
I am bashful to speak, for
fear of exposing myself to

utter nonsense, or impro'

prieties
Do not be discouraged for

that
I have little patience
Is it long since you have been

learning ?
It is two months since Ibegan
It is a very short time
Does not your master teU you

that you should always

speak?
He tells me so very ofien
Why will -you not speak
'then ?
With whom shall I speak f
With all those that speak to you
I should wish to speak, but I

dare not
Believe me, be confident,

speak always^ well or ill
Above all, omit no occasion

X speaking when you
d it
It is by speaking, that we

learn to speak
You have judged very right
I shall follow your advice then
You wiU do very welL

Dial 111. To speak English.
Sir, are you a Spaniard ?
Yes, Sir, at your service

FAMlLIiUl DIALOGUES.

337

De que parage de Espana es

vm. ?
Be Madrid, de Toledo, de

SeTilla^&c.
De que ciudad ?
De Cadiz
Cuanto tiempo haee que est4

vm. en Inglaterra ?
Hace mas de un ano
Habia vm. Ingles ?
Hablo lo un. poco
Pero mas'entiendo de lo que

hablo
La lengua Inglesa es muy

dificultosa para los fispa-

noles
La Espanola no es dificil pa-
ra los lugleses
Estoy persuadido de lo coo-

trario
Con dificultad lo creo
La esperiedcianoslo muestra

todoslos dtas
La pronunciacion- del Espa-

nol es mucho mas f4cil que

la del Ingles

EUos pronuncian^odas las le^
tras como las escriben

Conozco ^ varios Ingleses que
pronuncian muy bien el
Castellano

Apenas se podr4 halkf un
Espanol entre cien^que
pronuncie bien el Ingles

Los Ingleses se c(Hnen la mi-
tad de sus voces

Dan un solo sonido 4 tres 6
cuatro letras

Pero en Espanol cada letra

• tiene su sonido
29

What part of Spain are you

fr&m ?
From Madridj Toledo, Se-

viUe^ Sfc.
Of what city ?
Of Cadiz
How long have you been in

It 19 mortx than a year
Do you 4peak EngUsh ?
I speak it a litUe
But I understand it better

than 1 speak
The English Umgu^tge t« very
- ^^ficuUf&r ^(miards

The Spanish is not difficult

for Englishmen
1 am persuaded of the con-
trary
I hardly believe it
Experience^shows it to us ev*

ery day
The pronunciation of the

Spanish is a great deal
more easy than that of the

English
They pronounce aUthe Utters

as they write them
I know several Englishmen

who pronounce the Spanish

very well
One can hardly find one

Spaniardin a hundred who

pronounces English weH
The English dip orgeat up

half their words
They give a single tound to

three or four letters
But in Spanish each letter

hot its sound

338

FAMILIAA DIALOOUKS.

De suerte que la dificultad
no parece igual de ambos
lados

£1 Espanol tiene la ventaja

Y aan la difficultad as menos
para la gente moBa

Porque los jovenes sod como
cera blanda, en que so im-
prime ficilmente todo

Di&l. Vin. Del haeer una
vuiiapor la manana.

Quien esti ahl ?

Gente de paz, abra vmd. la

puerta
Adonde est4 tu amo ?
Esti en la cama
Duerme aun?
No, Senor^esti dispierto
Estilevantado?
Ann no ; quiere vm. entrar en

su cuarto ?
Aun en la cama ?
Me recogi i, noche tan tarde,

que no me hepolido levan-

tar mas temprano
Que hizo vm. despues de ce-

nar ?
Como paso vm. la noobe ?

Jugamos k los naipes
A' que juego ?
Jugamos i los cientos
£s un juego muy de moda
Luego nos fuimos al baile

Hasta que hora se estuvo

vmd. alii ?
Hasta media noche
A' que hora se acosto vmd. ?
A^ la una de la noche

So thai the d^fficuUy does not
appear equal on both tides

The Spanish has the oilvaii*

tage
And the difficulty is yet less

for young people
Because young people are

like soft waXj on which one

easily impresses any thing.

Dial. Vni. Of making a
morning vbit.

Who is there?
Afriendy open the door

Where is your master?

He is in bed

Does he sleep yet 9

No^ 8iry he is auake

Is he up?

Not yet ; wiU you step into

his chamber ?
StiUinbed?

I retired so late last nighty
that I could not get up
earlier
What did you do after sup-

per?
How did you spend the even-
ing?
We played at cards
At what game?
We played at piquet
It is a game much in fashion
AfterwfO'ds we went to the

baU
Till what 6^ clock ifiere you

there ?
Till midnight

What time did you go tobed?
At one in the morning

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

339

Ne estraiio que vm. selevante

tan tarde \
Que hora puede ser ?
Que horale parece quees ?

Han dado las diez
Levdntese vm. presto
Baremos una vuelta en el

parque luego que este vmd.

vestido

Di41. IX. Del almorzar,

Quiere vm. almorzar ?

£s tiempo de desayunarse ?

Que gustavm. para su almu-
erzo?

Pan y manteca ?

Molletes calientes ?

Leche? tostadas? chocolate ?

No ; todo eso es bueno para
nines

Triiganos otra cosa

Gustan vms. de jamon ?

Si, trdigalo, que cortar^mos
una tajada

Ponga una servilletaen la me-
sa, y denos platos, cuchiUos
y tenedqres

Lave los.vasos

De un asiento al Seiior

Tome vm^ una silla y si6ntese

Acerquese de la lumbre

Estare bien aqui, no tengo
frio

Gustan vms. de huevos fres-
cos?

Han de ser pasados por agua
6 fritos ?

Quite ese plato grande

Coma vm. salchicha

Probemos el vino

Destape esa botella

f^Q tengo tirabqzoii

I do not wonder you rise so

kUe
What o^clock may it he ?
What o^chck do you think

it is?
It has struck ten
Rise quickly
We mU take a turn in the

Park as soon as you are

dressed.

Dial, IX. Of breakfasting.

Will you breakfast ?
Is it breakfast time ?
What do you wish for your

breakfast f
Bread and butter f
Hot loates f

Milk? toasts? chocolate?
No; all that is ft for chiU

dren
Bring us something else
Do you wish for ham ?
Yesj bring it^ we will cut a

dice of ii
Lay a cloth upon the table,

and give us plates, knives

and forks '

Rinse the tumblers
Qive the gentleman a seat
Take a chair and sit down
Come near the fire
I shall be well here, I am not

cold
Will you have new laid

eggs ?
Must they be boiled or fried?

Take that dish away ?
Eat some sausage
Let us taste the wine
Uncork that bottle
I have no corkserem

340

FAMILIAB OIALOG0B8.

Deinedebeber*
Como lo halla vm. ?
Que le parece 4 tid. ?
Es bueno, no as mala
D6 de beber al Senor
Acabo de beber
No come Ym.

Tanto be comido, que no
teadre ganas 4 medio dia

Se burla vm. ? nada casi ba
comido

Giffe me to drink
How do you Uke it ?
What do yOH think of it ?
It is goodyit is not had
Give the gentleman drink
I have just drank
You donoieat
I have eatm so nmchj that I

shall have no appetke at

noon
Do you jest ? you have eaten

scarcely any thing.

Di&\ X. Antes de la comida. Dial. X. Before dinner.

£5 ya tiempo de comer ?

Son cerca de las tres

Es bora de comer

Se atraso hoy la comida basta

las cuatro
Quiere vm. bacer hoy peni-

tencia con nosotros ?
Si vm. quiere cenar bien,

venga 4 comer 4 mi casa
Ponga la mesa, el mantel s.
Traiga la comida
Ponga los saleros y los platos

en la mesa
Lave, limpie los vasos
PoDgalos sobre el aparador
Corte UDOs pcdacitos de pan
Ponga las sillas al rededor de

lamesaconsusahnohadillas *
Quien asbte 4 la mesa ?
Han venido todos los convi-

dados 6 huespedes ?
Ann no, algunos faltan
Donde est4ri los cuchiUos^

tenedores y cucharas ?
Est^n sobre el aparador
Solo le he convidado para go-

zar de su compania
Har4 vm. penitencia
Mande servir ta comida

Is it already dinner time f
It is near three o^dock
It is time to dine
Dinner was put of to^y

tillfour
Will you make penance with

us to^ay f
If you wish to sup heartily J

come and dine at my bouse
Lay the table, the cloth
Bring the dinner
Put t he salt-aellars and plates-

upon the table
Rinse or cleanse the tumblers
Set them upon the side^hoard
Cut a few slices of bread
Set the chairs round the ta-
ble with their cushions
Whowaits at the tabkf
Are all the invited persons

or the guests come f
Not yet, some are wanting
Where are the knives^ forks^

and spoons ?
I hey are upon the sidr-homui
I have invited yon 4inly taen^

joy your company
You will make penance
Qallfor the dinner

ifAMlUAR DIALOGUES.

S41

Aan no est4 pronta

Ya estik la comida en la mesa

Solo aguardan d vm., Senor
Tocaron la campana
Sientese vm. k la mesa
Tome el primer asiento
No permitir6 que este sentado

alii
Aqui se sentari vm.
£n verdad qne no lo har6
Vamos, degemonos de cmn-

plimientos
Para que tanta ceremonia ?
Mas llaneza se ha de usar

entre los amigos
Vaya un poco mas atris^ que

tengamos lugar
Bien cabemos todos
£s menster que quepamos
Tenemos mas huespedes de

lo que pens&bamos
Faltan aqui dos cubiertos
Muchacho, ve 4 buscar dos

servilletas

Di4L XL Camendo.

Le gusta & vm. la sqm i la

Francesa?
SI, como el caldo esle bien

hecho
A mi, deme vm. de nuestra

buena oUa
Venga un poco de pan casero
Tome vm. pan bianco
Mas quiero este
Este pan esta raofaoso
Pero este es muy sabroso
Muchacho, danos pan tiemo
Raspa este pan
Quiere vm. la corteza die en-

cima 6 la debajo }
29»

It is not yet ready

The dinner U already an the

table
Sir^ they only wait for you
They rung the bell
Sit down to the table
Take thefiret place
I will not suffer you to sit

there
You will eit here
Indeed I ahaO not do it
Coitkef let U8 forbear comgU-

mente
Why 80 much ceremony f
More freedom ehoutd be used

among friends
Go a little farther backy thai

we may have room
There is room for all
We must aU find place
We have more company than

we thought
Two covers are wanted here
BoVf go and fetch two nap*

kins.

Dial. XI. At Dinner*
Do you UkeFrench soup f

YeSj provided the broth is

weumade
As for me, give me some of

our good oUa
Bring a little household bread
Take white bread
IHkethis better
This bread is mouldy
But this is very sweet
Boy, give us new bread
Rasp this bread
Do you wish the upper er

under crusts

342

FAMlLIAft DtALOOUCS.

Gusta ym. de este cocido ?

Si vm. gusta

Me servire 4 mi misBio

Danos el plate grande

Esta carne es may vustanciosa

Sij lo creo

No come vm., SencMr

Perdoneme vm., que como

tanto como dos
Que boeiios priacipkw 1
Por mi, yo idabo este coavite

comiendo bien
Pero aun bo ha bebido vm.
Mucbacho, da de beber ai

Seiior
Echa de beber
Llena la copa
Senora,bnDdo por la satud

de vm.
Buen provecho hs^ 4 vmd.
Senor, 4 la salud de sas ami-

gos
.A^ todos SU8 gustoa
A^ sus inclinaciones
Mucho favor me hace vm.
Comoiialla vm. esth cerireza ?
£s bastante bilena
Quiero probarla
La hallo muy amarga-
Me quejare al cervecero
Quite todo esto del medio
Sirvan los segundos principios
£s vm. buen bebedor y nfyl

corned or
No ve vm. que como y bebo

bien
Yamos^ Senor, coma vm. de

lo que gustare mas
No lengo apetito
Que le parece de esta lengua
de buey, del picadillo, del
guisado }

WiUyouhme mHite of iM$

boiied meat ?
If yau phase
I wili help mytelf
Give us the dish
Ttis meat is eery jmey
YeSf I think so
Sir^ you do not eat
Excuse me J I eat as much as

two
What afinefni coune I
For my.part^ I commend this

entertainment byeatinffweU
But you hoot net drank -yet
■Boy,give the gentkmtm some

drink
Pour some diink
Fill the glass
Madam f X drink your heaUh

I thank you

Siry to the heaUh of your

friends
2b aU your phasvres
To your inclination^
You are very kind
H(nd do you tike tkitr beer ?
ft is pretty good
I wish to taste it
Ifinditvery bitter
I wiU complain to the brewer
Take away aU these thu^s
Serve up the second course
' You are a great drinker and

a small eater
Do you not see I eat and

drink wbU
CowCf Sir^ eat of whst you

like most
I have no appetite
What do you say to this

neat^s tongue^ to the «ui»-

ced meat, to thefricaesee?

FAMILIAR DtALOOUES.

34S

Quiere vm. que le sirva de
estas perdices, de ese ca-
pon, de los polios, 6 galli-
netas?

Lo que d vm. le gustare

Que quiere vmd. mas^un cdon
6 una pierna ?

Para ml es todo uno

Coma vm. algunos r4banos
para aguzar el apetito

La hambre es la mejof salsa

Ya he comido demasiado

Denos mostaza

A^ donde esti el mostacerd ?

Ta ve vm. que mesa tenemos

NogBstanK» delicadeza
,£8to no se llama comer
Tengo mucha sed
Deme una copa de vino
Yamos, Senor, por la salad

del Presidente
Yivan el Cg^rcito y la AJr-

mada
Yiva el Gobernddor
Le correspondere coa mucho

gusto
Bebamos todos
£1 vino es muy esquisito
Que le parece esta empanada

de picbones?
£st4 muy buena y muy bien

sazoaada
Sabe vm. trinchar ?
Trincho medianamente
Le servire 4 vm.
Conozco lo que le gusta
Acertare coo so gusto
A todos sirve vm. y se olvida

de si mismo
. Quite ese plato, veaga el

otro

ShaM I hdp you to a piece of

these partridgesj of that

capon^ of the chickens or
woodcocks?
What you please
Which do you Uke best^ a

wing or a leg?
It is ail one to me
Eat some radishes to sharpen

your appetite
Hanger is the best sauce
IhQve eaten too much already
Give its some mustard
Where isthemustardpoi?
You see now what tabic we

keep
We use no dairies
This is n&t called eating
I am very thirsty
Give me a glass of wine
ComCi ^2>9 to the heakh cf

the President
Huzza for the Army and

Navy
Hux&afor the Govemour
1 will pledge you with a great

dad of pleasure
Let us all drink
"the wine is very exquisite
How do you like this pigeon

pie?
It is very good and very weU

seasoned
Can you earve ?
1 carve pretty weU .
I will kelp you
1 know what you like
1 shall hit your taste
You help every body and for"

get yourself
Take away thai dishy bring

the other

944

FAJflLlAft DlALOO(7SS4

No8 da vin. una comida de
Rey, en lugar de un convite
de amigo

Pniebe de estos alcauciles

Dame ese cuchillo

£sta carne esti fria

Recali6ntala en el brasero

H4game el favor de on pcco

de morciUa
Esta carne est^ cruda
Corteme vmd. un poco de

vaca
Quiere vm. carnero, vaca 6

temera ?
Lo que gustare, Senor
Asado o cocido ?
Coma vm. sanahorias, nabos,

chirivias y berza 6 col
Tome vm. mostaza
Le dare brazuelo 6 piema de

camera ?
Mas quiero un poco de lomo

de ternera
Vaya este plato al rededor de

la mesa
Ya ve Ym.f Senor, como nos

tratamos
Este es el mejor plato de la

mesa
Aun no se le ha llegado
Voy d probar de el
Buen provecho haga k vmd.
Le gusta d vmd. la leche co-

cida ?
Gusto mucho de cuajada, na-

tilla y queso fresco
Coma vm. de este manjar

4)lanco
Vaya un poco del estofado
Las empanadas de carne nu-

tren mas que las de man-

zanas .

You give t» a ldng*9 feMj

intiead of a friendly eii-

iertainmeKt
Try thue artichokes
Give me that knife
Tkiemeatie told
Warm it again on ike ekor

fing dieh
Favour me urith a piece of

pudding
Tkie meat is raw
Cut me a smaU piece of beef

WiUycu Kane mutton^ beef

or veal f
What you pleaee. Sir
Roasted or boiled meat f
Eat some carrots^ tumtps,

parsnips andcakiage
Take some mustard
Shali I help you to some

shotdder or leg of mutton f
I prefer a piece of the loin

of veal
Let this dish go round the

table
Sir J you now see how we fare

This is the best dish ai table

It has not yet been touched
I am going to taste it
Much good may it do you
Do you Uke boiled msUef

1 am very fond of curdsy

cream and new cheese
Eat of this bUmc^manger

Take some of the stewed meat
Meat pies flourish more thaat
apple-pies

FAMIIilAR DlALOOU£S.

345

Que bellos postres !

La fruta correspoade 4 todo

lo demas
Ha recogido vm. las frutaa

mas esquisitas de la es-

tacion
£sta pasta 6 masa es muy li-

gera y biea hecha
La torta es muy buena
Dame cerveza fuerte
Da un plato limpio al Seiior

Sieoto no tengamos algo me-

He comido muy bien
Creo que todos ban acabado
Degemos la mesa
Quita la mesa
Demo» graeias i Dios^
Vamos 4 dar un pitseo en ^el

jardin
Vamos en hora buena
Tengo'mucho saeno
Soy * muy amigo* de bacer la

siesta

DiiL XD. Para comjprar
libros.

Tiene vm. algunlibro nuevo ?

Si, Senor; que especie de li-
bros quiere vm. ?

Le gustan 4 vm. libros de
hutoria, de matem4ticasy
de filosof ia, de teologia,'
de medicina, dederecho?

No; Senor, busco libros de
poesla

Le puedo proteer de eUo» en
todas lenguas

Pues tengo todos los poetas
Griegos, Latinos, Espa-
noles, ItaUaii08| Franceses,
€ Ingleses

WhatafhedesMertf

The fruit corrt9pond» with

all the rest
Youha»e coUected the most

exquisite fruits of the sea-
son
This pastry is very Ught and

well made
The tart is very good
Give me some strong beer
Give' a ehan plate to the ,

gentleman
lam sorry we have nothing

better
I have dined very well
I think every body has done
Let us leave the table
Remove the table
Let us say grace
Let us go and take a turn in

th^ garden
Let us go toithaU my heart
1 am very sleepy
Imrveryf&nd of taking c^

nap c^er dinner.

Dial Xn. To buy books.

Have you any new book?
YeSf Sir; what sort of books

do you wish ?
Will you have books of A^«-

toryj mathematieSj philos^

ophy^ divimtyy physic^ or

law?
No^ Sir, lam looking for po^

etical works
L cdn furnish you with them

in all languages
For I have M the Greeks

Latin^ Spanish, Italian^

French, and English poets

346

FAMILIAft DIALOGUES.

Muchos tengo yo de estos

Que poetas necesita vm. pues
comprar?

Yirgilio eo Latin^las comedi-
88 de Calderon, y el Teatro
de Feijoo en Espanol

Tiene vmd. el Paraiso Per-
dido de Milton, 6 las obras
dramaticas de Shakspeare,
en Ingles ?

Tengo menester de la Gra-
ni4tica Italiana de Venero-
nl, de ]o8 Egercicios de
Bottarelliy y de las Come-
dias de Goldoni

Tiene vmd. la Gramdtica Es-

{^afiola del Senor Josse, y
a de la Academia ?
Ti^'ne vmd, la Historia de

Inglaterra, de Franciai de

Espafiayde Italia.?
Todos esos libros tengo
De que tamno son ?
Los tengo en Folio, Cuarto,

Octavo y Duodecimo
Hdgame vm. el favor de en-

senirmelos
Los quiere vm. encuaderna-

dos en badana, becerro, 6

cordoban ?
Los quiere vm. dorados e in-

titulados ?
No hay necesidad de eso
No los compro para adomp,

sino para leerlos
Esta em uadernadura no es

buena
No est4 bien cosido este libro
A hi tiene vm. otro en su lugar
Cuanto pide vm. por este li-
bro?
Le costard d vm. dos pesos
Ss^o es demasiado

I have many of them

Whai poets do you want then

to purchase?
Virgil in Latiny the plays of

Calderonf and the Theatre

ofFeifdo in Spanish
Have you MiUon^s Paradise

Lost, or the plays of Shak"

speare in English f

I have need of Veneroni's
Italian Grammar^ Botta^
relWs Exercises, and Golr
doni^s Comedies

Have you the Spanish Gram-
mar of Mir, fosse f and that

of the Academy?
Have you the History of

Englandy France, Spain

and Italy ?
I have all those books
Of what size are they f
I have them in Folio, Qumrto,

Octavo and Duodecimo
Do me the favour to sham

them to me
Win you have them bound in

sheep, calf, or morocco

leather?
Will you have them gilt on

the back and lettered?
There is no occasion for that
1 do not buy th^m for onto-

tnent, but to read them
This binding is not good

This book is not weH sewed
There is another in its stead
How much do you ask for

this book?
It will cost you two doUar^
This is too much

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

347

fiselprecio ultimo
Ledare ^vm.veintereales
Me sale i mas de lo que vmd.

me ofrece por el
Es muy caro
Le aseguro i vm. que me

cuesta peso y medio sin la

encuademadura
No querr^ vm. que pierda en

mb libros
Muy al contrario, quiero que

gane algo
£8 preciso pues que me de

veinte y cuatro reales
Ahl los tiene vm., no reparo

en una cortedad
No necesita vm. otros libros?
Por aho'ra no

Pero he menester de papel
s, tinta, lacre, y o-

JVo vendo nada de eso

Pero lo hallard vm. todo en

la tienda proxima que es

de un papelero
A' Dies, Senor
Muy serviddir de vm., cabal-

lero
Hdgame vm. el favor de acor-

darse de ml paraotra vez
Siempre esperimentari muy

buen trato
Lo espero

Di41 Xin. Del alquilar un
alqfamiento,

Seiior, quiere vm. hacerme
un favor ?

De muy buena gana, que me
manda vm. ?

«iue venga vmd. conmigo, pa-
ra alquilar un alojamiento

It is the lowest price

I will give you twenty rials

It turns out to me more

than you offer me for it
It is very dear
I assure you it costs me one

dollar and a half without
• the binding
You will not wish me to lose

by my books
Quite to the contrary ^ I wish

you to gain something
You must then give mefour-

and-twenty rials
Tliere you have them, I do

not mind a trifle
Do you not want other books?
Not at present
But I have occasion for pa--

per, pens, ink, sealing-wax,

and wafers
I sell nothing of that
But you wiUJindit aU at the

next shop which is a Sta-

tioner^s
Farewell, Sir

Sir, your most humble ser-
vant
Do me the favour to remem-
ber me again .
You will always experience

good treatment
I hope so.

Dial. XIII. Of hiring a
lodging.

Sir, win you do me a favour ?

Very willingly, what do you

command me ?
That you would go with me

to hire a lodging *

S4S

runuut DiALOOOxs.

Le acomptfw6 adonde qui-

siere ^

Vamosi la caUedc Santiago

Le voy^iguiando
Aqui hay una c^dula 4 esta
pacrta que dice cuartoade

aiqailar
Llame vm. ^lapoerta

Quien es ?

Gentedcpaz K«KUr?

Con quien quieie vm. hablar t

Con el amo 6 amade casa

Aqui erti mi Senora
Senora,tienevni. coartos de

alquilar?
Si, Senor, qiuere vm. verlos f

Vine con esa intencion
Cuantos aposentos necesita

vm.? , .

Quiero uu comedor o saia,
una alcoba,un gabinete pa-
ra mi, y un desvan para mi
criado ,

Han de ser sua cuarfeoa alhajap

dos 6 no ?
Handeseralhajados
Higame el favor de esperar
un rato en esta sala baja,
mientras voy por las llaves
Muy bien, Senora, aguardo
Quiere vm. tomarse el traba-^

jo de subir ?
Seguiremos & vm , Senora
Esta es la vivienda del primer

alto
Ahi tiene vm. una cama muy

buena y limpia
Bien ve vm. que hay todo lo
preciso en un cuarto alha-
jado

Ishaa waU on yw wherever

pou please
Letusgo intaSt.Jameti' eireet
1 follow you
Here is a hiU at thtedaor

which says rooms to Ut

Knock cA the door

Who is there?

A friend, peacedbhpe<^

Whom do you wish to ^feak

with?
With the master er mistrm

ofthehouse
Here tsmy lady
Madam^ have you any room

to let ?
Yes J Siry do you wish to see

them?
Icameomtrnpose
How many apartmeints do

you want ?
Iwantadirnng'TOom, abed-
chamhery a closet for my-
self y and a garret for «y
man-servant
Must your rooms be fwrmsh-

edornot?
They must be furnished
Be so kind as to wait a mo-
ment in this iower paiioury
while I go for the keys
Very welly MadamyVUwaU
WiUyou take the trouble to

go up?
We wHlfoThw youy Madam
This is the apartment on the

first fioor
There you have a very good

and clean bed
You see that there is every
thing necessary in a fur-
nis^droom

VAMILlAl DIALOOUKS.

349

Como mesa, cspejo, sillas, al»

fombras, alacenas^ escapa-

rate8,&c.
Pero adoode estd el gabinete ?
A.qui esti, y es bastante capaz
Me cuadra muy bien este alo-

jamiento
Mealegro mucho
Cuanto pide vm. por semana ?
Nunca alquilo mis cuartCMi

sino por mes 6 por ano
Bien^ los tomare por mes;

cuanto es el precio de

alios ?
Jamas tuve menos de diez

ffuineas al mes por estos

dos cuartos
Son demasiado caros
Ha de considerar vm. que

este es e! mas bermoso bar-
rio de la ciudad

Y que est4 vm. 4 uii peso de
la corte

Para que vea vm. que no soy
amigo de regatear, le dare
ocho guineas porellos

Es demasiado poco, no sabe
vm. la renta que pago por
esta casa

Nada me importa saberlo

Pero en una palabra, partire-

mos la diferencia
Yo le aseguro que pierdo
Pero siento que vm. se vaya

Y por el desvan de ml criado,
cuanto he de pagar por
mes ?

Me dar& vm. dos guineas
No dar6 mas de guinea y
media
30

earpetSy doseta^presseay^c.

But where u the closet ?
Here it ta, (md is large enough
These apartmeats suH me very

wdl
I €tm nerp glad qfit
How much eh you ask a week f
I never let my apartments &]tf

by the month or year
WeBy I shaU take them by
the mosaM; what is the
price af them?
1 never had less than ten
guineas a month for these
two rooms
They are too dear
You ought to consider that
this is the finest ward of
the city
And thai you are within a

step of the court
That you may see that I do
not like haggling^ I wiB
give you eighi guineas for
them
It is too Uttlcy you do not
know the rent I pay for
this house
It is no concern of mine to

know it
But in a wordy we wiU dhids

the difference
I assure you thai I lose
But I am sorry to have you

go away
And for my man^s garret,
how much must I pay a
month ?
You will give me two guineas
I shall give^only. one guinea
. andahalf

850

FAMIUAK DIALOODSS.

No es bastaote, pero lo hare

por Tin.} sea asi
No vale la pena de parane

eo semejante cortedad
Perodfgame vyn*, no puedo

yo comer aqui con vm.? .
Si^ Seaor, bien puede vm.
Cuanto toma por semaoa de

cada buesped ?
A' razon de ochov guineas al

mes
Y cuanto toma vm. por cuar-

to y comida juntos ?
Cinco libras por semana
Pues^ empesare manana
Cuando gustare
Buenas noches^ Senora
Buenas se las de Dios, Seiior

Diil XIV. Delinformarse
de dlguno.

Quien es ese caballero ?
£s un Ingles
Le tuve por un Frances
Se ha enganado vm. pues
Sabe vm. donde vive ?
Vive en el barrio de la corte

Tiene casa ?

No, Senor, vive en cuartos

alhajados
£n casade quien aloja?
Vive en casa de fulano, en la

calle de

Que edad tiene ?

Creo que tiene veinte y cinco

anos
No me parece tan viejo

No puede ser mas mozo
£s casado ?
No, Senor, es soltero
£stdn sus padres vivos ?

It is natenoughj hnU I wiUdo

it for youj let it be 90
It U not worth while to dweU

on 96 mnaU a matter
But tell me, may I not board

here with you ?
Fe«, Sir^ you may
How much do you take from

each boarder orweek f
At the rate qfeightguineaea

month
And how much do you take far

boardandhdging together}
Five pounds anweek
Well J I shall begin Uhmarrow
When youplease
Good nighty Madam
Good nighty Sir.

Dial. XIV. Of inquiring
after one.

Who is that gentleman f
He is an Englishman
I took him for a Frenchman
Then you have mistaken
Do you know where he does f
He lives in the ward of the

court
Does he keep house ?
No, Sir, he Uves in lodgings

At whose house does he lodge f
HelodgesatMr.stich a one,

in the street of

Howoldishe?

I believe he is five and twenty

years of age
He does not appear to me

so old
He cannot be younger
Is he married f
NOf Sir, h^is a bachelor
Are his parents Uving ?

FAMILlAft DIALOGUES.

351

Su madre aun vive, pero su

padre murio dos anos ha

Tiene hermanos y hermanas ?

Dos hermanos y una hermana

tiene
Esti su hermana casada ?
Si, Senor
Con quien ?
Con el Conde de ^—
Era pues partido rico
Tuvo sesenta mil pesos de

dote
Es hermosa?
No es fea
Es bastante bonita
£8t4 algo picada de viruelas

Pero tiene mucho entendimi-

ento
Es muy ingeniosa
Habla este caballero la lengua

Espanola ?
Aunqae es Ingles, habla tan

bien Espaiiol, que los £s-

panoles le creen Gspanol

Habk Italiano como los Ita-

lianos mismos
Entre los Alemanes pasa por

Aleman
Como puede saber tantas len-

guas diferentes ?
Goza de una raemoria feliz y

ha viajado mucho

Ha estado dos anos en Paris,
seis meses en Madrid, afio
y medio en Italia, y un
ano en Alemania

Ha visto todas las cortes de
la Europa

His mother is still alive, but
his father died two years ago

Has he any brothers and siS'
ters ?

He has two brothers and a
sister

Is his sister married?

Yes, Sir

To whom f

To the Earl of

She was then a rich match

She had sixty thousand dol-
lars for her portion

Is she handsome ?

She is not ugly

She is pretty enough

She is a little pitted with the
smallpox

But she has a great deal of
understanding

She is very ablcy very witty

Does this gentleman speak
the Spanish language ?

Although he is an English-
man, he speaks Spanish so
weU, thai the Spaniards
think him a Spaniard

He speaike Italian Uke the
Italians themselves

He passes for a German
among the Germans

How can he know so many
differetU languages ?

He enjoys a happy memory
and has traveUed a great
deal

He has been two years at
Paris, six months at Mad-
rid, a year and a half in
Italy, and a year in Ger-
many

He has seen all the courts of
Europe

392

FAinUAE IMALOGI7E&

Cotnto tienipo ha que

Al radedor do tres alios ha
que teogo el honor de
coDocerle

Donde hizo vm. conocimieiito
COD ^1 ?

En Roma le conocf

£b de beUa estatnia

Ni demariadD alto, ni demasi-

ado chico
Se poede decir que es honbre

garboso
Siempreanda may aseado y

bien coropoesto
Se viste may bien
£s bien parecido^ tiene bnen

aire
Tiene bella presencia, y el

aspecto noble
Nada disgusta en sns modes

Es Cortes, afable, urbane con

cualqutera
Tiene mucho entendimlento,

y esmuy festivo en conver-

sacion
Danza bellamente, esgrime y

monta muy bien
Toca la flauta, el clave, la

guitarra^ el piano y otros

muchos instrumentos

En una palabra, es on cabal-
lero cumplido y perfecto

For el retrafo que vm. hace
de ^1, me da gana de cono-
cerle

Le procurare su conocimi-
anto

Amr kmg it it nnee you
know him f

Iti9abmtttkreefear9 Moue I
have the honour of being
acquainted with Aim

Where did you make oe-
qvaimtamce with kim?

I got acquainted with kim at
Rome

He is of a fine stature

He is neither too tuiiy nor too
short

One may say he is an elegant
man

He is aheays very neat and^
very fine

He dresses very weff

He is very genteel^ ke has a
good air

He has a fine presence, and a
noble look

Nothing is disagreeable in
his manners

He is dvily courteous, com-
plaisant to every body

He is very sensible, and is
very sprightly in conver-
sation

He dances beautifiiUy^ fences
and rides very weU

He plays upon the fiute^ the
harpsichordy the grsitarj
the piano and several other
i$istruments

In a word, he is an accom-
plished and perfect gentle-
man

By the picture you make of
him, you give me a desire
to know him

I win procure you his ac-
quaintance .

FAMILU& DIALOGUES.

353

Se lo agradecere 4 vm. mvh

cho
Cuando quiere vm. que vi-

yamos 4 visitarle juntos?
Cuando d vm. le gustare
A"" que hora se puede verle

en su casa ?
A" cualquiera hora puedo

verle, pues es muy amigo

mio
. Vamos pues & verle manana

por la manana
Sea en hora buena
De todo mi corazon
Cuando le conviniere
A^ Dios, Caballero
Servidor de vm.
Soy muy suyo
Tenga vm. buenas noches
Muy buenas se las d6 Dies

Di4l. XV. Delpartir.

Senor, vengo & despedirme

de vm.
Porque quiere vm. irse ?
Se acerca la hora de comer
No puede vm. comer con

nosotros ?
Se lo estimo mucho, no me es

posible hoy
Porque ? que negocios tiene

vm. ?
No tengo mucho que hacer,

pero he de ir & comer d casa
Ha convidado vm. 4 alguno i

comer i su casa ?
No, pero he prometido i un

caballero Ingles, que no

sabe el Espanol, de ir con

^1 4 comprar algunas me-

Dudencias
A" que hora le espera vm. ?
30*

I akaU he much obliged to you

for it
When wiUffouhttveusgo and

wait upon him together ?
When you please
At what o'clock may one see

him at home ?
I can see him at any timcyfor

he ie my intimate friend

Let U8 go then and see him

to-morrow morning
I will; well and good
With aU my heart
When it suits you
Farewell^ Sir
Your servant
I am truly yours
I wish you a good night
I wish you the same.

Dial. XV. Of departing.

Siry I come to take leave of

you
Whyw

hy win you go away f
Dinner time Sraws near
Can't you dine with us f

I thank you for ity it is not

in my power to^y
Why f what business havt^

you?
I have not much to doy but I

must go and dine at home
Have you invited any body

to &ne at your house ?
Noy but I have promised an

English gentlemauy who
' does not know Spanishy to

go with him to buy some

trifles
j4t what hour do -you expest

himf

354

fAMitiAt mkhooiSKi^

Le agaardo 4 las dos

£8t4 vm. seguro de que venga?

No lo se de cierto ; pero ha*
biendoselo prometido, es
precise que est6 en casa

Tiene vm. noon

Ne le quiero pues detener

Yaya vni. coo Dios, seividor

suvo
Quede vm. cod Dios
Muchacho^ abre la pueita

al Sefior
Muy bien la abrir6 yo
Pero no tieae vm. la Have
Que I echa vm. la Have 4 la

puerta?
Asi lo acostumbramos
Suplicole me penga 4 los
pies de mi Senora su her-
mana
No faltare 4 ello, Senor
Cuando nos volveremos 4

ver?
Manana, si Dios 4}aiere
Veodr6 4 visitarle
H4game es&e favor

Di4!.XVI. DeftoHcicu.

Que se dice do bueno P
Que noticias teoemoB ?
No se ninguna
Que se dice de noevo ?
Sabe vm. alguna novedad ?
Que noticias corren ?
No hay ninguna
No he sabido nada de nuevo
Ha leido vmd. los pepeies ?
He visto los Timesj iaCro-
. nica, el Mormng Post

Que se dice en la dudad ?
No se habla de nada

I expect him at two c^ clock
Are you sure he will come f
I do not know it for certain;
but having promised it to
himj it is necessary 1 sh&nid
be at home
You are in the right
I win not detain you then
Fareweli^ your servant

Good bye

Boy, open the door for the

gentleman
1 will open it myself
But you have not the key
How / do yon lodt your

door f
So is our custom
I beg you would present my

respects io your sisier

Siry 1 will not fail to do it
When shall we see one another

again f
To-morrow J if it phase God
I wiU come to visit you
Do me this favour*

DiaLXVL Of news.

What is said good ?

What news have we f

I know none

What do pewpk say new ?

Jhi you htotv any news?

What news are spread f

There is none

1 ha^e hemd fmthing new

Have youreadiht papers f

I have seen the Times ^ the

ChronielBy the Morning

Post
What do they say in €he^tyy
They talk of nothing

l^AMILtAE DIALOO0C8.

355

He oldo decir, he safoido que

£sta es buena noticia

No ha oldo vm. hablar de la

guerra?
No se oice nada de ella
Se habla de ud sitio
Se dice que '■ est4 sitiada
Se ha lovantado el sitio
Pero han vuelto 4 ponerle
Ha habido algun combate

naval ?
Se decia, pero salio false

Al contrariby hablan de una

bataUa
Esta novedad requiere confir-

macion
Quien se la comunico ?
De buena parte me viene

£1 Senor N . . . . me la dijo
Cree vm. que tengamos pa-
ces ?
Hay mucha apariencia
Para conmigo, creo que no
En que se funda vm. ?
£n que veo que los inimos
de entrambas partes estdn
muy poco indmados & la
paz
^n embargo todos necesitan

de la paz
Sobre todo los comerciantes

y mercaderes
La eoerra hace mucho dano

i comercio
Sin duda, la paz es mes ven-
tajosa al comertio

Que se dice en la corte ?
Se babla de armar unaflota de

veinte navf os de guerra
Hablan de una espedkioB

I keardy I have known that
This is a good piece of news
Have you not heard speak of

the war f
Nothing is said of it
They talk of a siege

They say that is besieged

They have raised the siege
But they have laid it again
Has there been any sea*

They said so, but it proved
false

On the contrary y they talk
of a battle

This news requires confirmck'
tion

Wlio communicated it to you?

It comes to me from good au-
thority

Mr, 2V . . . . told it me

Do you think we shall havs a
peace?

There is a great probability

For my party I believe not

What grounds have you ?

Because I see the minds of
both parties are very little
inclined to peace

Every body wants peaccy

however
Especially merchants and

traders
War does a great detriment

to trade
Without guestiony peace is

more advantageous to eonh

merce
What do they say at court f
They talk of fitting out a

fleet of twenty men of war
They talk of an expedition

356

FAMILIAR DIALOOUB8.

Cuando se cree que la escila-

drasaldri?
No se dice, no se sabe
Adonde ir4 la Princesa ?
Unos dicen 4 Windsor, otros

4 Kew
Que dice la Gaceta?
Nolaheleido
Habl4ndole sinceramente, los

deugnios de la corte son

tan secretos que nadie

iraede saberlos
Poco se me da de los nego-

cios de estado
fiTo me meto jamas en arre-

glar el estado
Hablemos de noticias parti-

culares
Como est4 el Senor D . . • . ?
Cuando le ba visto vm. ?
Ayer le vi

£s verdad lo que dicen de el ?
Que se dice de 61 ?
Dicen que rino al juego

Con quien ?

Con UD caballero Frances

Han peleado ?

Sly Senor, pelearon

£st4 herido?

Dicen que salio herido mor-

talmente
Lo siento, es hombre de bien

Sobre que rineron ?

Lo ignoro enteramente

Se dice que le desmintio

No lo puedo creer

Ni yo tampoco

Sea lo que fuere, presto se sa-

br4
En su casa lo preguntare

fThen do they tkUUe tkejieet

wiUsml?
It u not 9aidf it i$ not knomm
Where will the Frince^e go f
Some eay to Windsor j Men

to Kew
What says the Qazeiie f
1 have not read it
To speak freely , the designs

of the court are so secret^

that nobody can know them

I care little about state qf-

fairs
I never meddle with settling

the nation
Let us talk of private news

How is Mr. D.. ..f

When have you seen him ?

I saw him yesterday

Is what is said of him true?

What do they say of him ?

They say that he quarrelled
at the game

With whom?

With a French gentleman

Have they fought ?

YeSy Sir^ they fought

Is he wounded?

They say he came out mortal-
ly wounded

I am sorry for ity he is an
honest man

About what did they quarrel ?

lam quite ignorant of it

They say he gave him the He

I cannot believe it

Nor I neither

Be what it may^ it will soon
be known

I win inquire about it at his
house

FAHILLUt DZilLOOtXKS.

357

Diil. XVIL EiUre dos amu-
gos.

Que ! es vm. ?

De donde viene, que no me

mira vnid. ?
Cierto que no reparaba en

vm.
No le veia
Pasa vm. cerca de mi, me

toca con el codo^ y no me

ve?
Iba cavilando en algo

Pensaba vm. quisis en su

querida
Otros negocios tengo en mi

cabeza
Que n^ocios ?
Hallindome escaso de dine-

ro, voj 4 ver 4 un sugeto

que me debe
£^ iba pensando, sobre si le

mandarf a arrestar en caso

de no pagarme

Vive lejos de aqai ?
A'' cuatro pasos de aqui
£st4 vm. cierto de hallarle

en casa ?
Creo que le hallar^ & estas

horas
Se estard vm. mucho tiempo ?
No un cuarto de bora
I>e8pache vm. pues, que le

voy i esperar en este cafe

£8tare con vm. luego
Ya de vuelta ?
Como love vm.
Le hallo vm. ?
Siy Seiior
Lepago ivm.?

Dial. XVII. Between two
friends.

What! isityim?

How comes it^ that you do

not look at me?
Indeed I did not take notice

of you
I did not see you
You pass close by mcy touch

vie with your elbow, and do

not see me f
I was cogitating about some-
thing
Perhaps you were thinking

of your love
I have other business in my

head
What business ?
Being in want of money y I

am going to see a person

who owes me
And I was thinking whether

1 should cause him to be

arrested in case he does not

pay me
Does he live far from here 9
Four steps from here
Are you sure to find him at

I believe I shall find him at
this time

Shall you stay hng ? i

Not a quarter of an hour

Make haste then^ 1 go and
wait for you in this coffee-
house

J shall be with you presently

Are you returned already ?

As you see

Did you find him f

Yesy Sir

Did he pay you f

358

FAMIJUlAft DtALOOmCff.

Gracias & Dios

Lo celebro mucho

Peru 81 no le bubiera pagado,

yo le babiera prestado di-

nero
No le liubiera faltado dinero

Mi bolsa estaba & sa servicio

Se lo estJino macbo

No8 quedamos aqui ?

No, Tamos i beber una bo-

teUa, para pasur media bora

juntos
En bora buena, pero quiero

pagarla yo
Cuando se haya bebido ha-

blaremos de eso
Vimonos
Le voy siguiendo

Di41. XVin. Del eBcrihir
una carta.

No es hoy dia de correo ?

Porque?

Porque be de escribir una

carta
A' quien escribe vm. ?
A' mi hermano
No est4 en la ciudad ?
No, Senor, esti en el campo
£n que campo ?
£n las aguas de Tunbridge
Cunnto tiempo bace ?
Quince dias
D6me vmd. una hoja de papel

dorado, ^na pluma y tinta
Entre vm. en mi gabinete, y

ballard sobre la mesa reca-

do de escribir
No hay plumas
Ahi estin en el tintero

Nada valen

Thank God

I am very glad of it

But if he had not paid you,

I would have lent you

money
You shotild not . haive wanted

money
My purse was at your mrvice
I am much obliged to ^otN
Shall we stay here ?
No, let us go and drink a

bottle J to pass half an hour

together
With all my heart, hut I wiU

treat you
We will talk of it when we

have drank it
Let us go away
I am following you.

Dial. XVm. Of writing a
letter.

Is not this a post-day ?

Why?

Because I have a letter to
write

Whom do you write to ?

To my brother

Is he not in town f

No, Sir, he is in the country

In what part of the country f

He is at Tunbridge-wells

How long since ?

j4 fortnight

Give me a sheet of giU pa-
per, a pen and ink

Step in my closet, and you
will find upon the table
what is necessary to write

There are no pens

There they are in the ink-
stand

They aregoodfor nothing

FAMILIAR DIALOGUE^.

359

Alli hay otras

No estin cortadas estas plu-

mas
Adonde esti su corta plumas ?
Sabe vm. cortar plumas ?
Las corto i mi modo
£stano es mala
£s bastantemente buena
Mientras acabo esta carta, h^

game vmd. el favor de ha-

cer un pliego de estos pa-

peles
Que sello quiere^vm. que le

ponga ?
§Uela

Sellela vm. con mis armas 6

con mi cifra
Que lacre le he de poner ?
Ponga vm. rojo 6 negro, no

importa
No bastardn obleas?
£s lo mismo
Ha puesto vm. la fecha ?
Creo que si, pero no he fir-

mado
Que dia del mes tenemos ?
£1 diez, el veinte, &c.
Pliegue vm. esta carta
Pongale el sobrescrito
Cierrela vm. y sellela
Adonde est4 la arenilla ?
En la salvadera
0eseque su escritura con

teleta
Como en via vm. sus cartas ?
Las remito por el harriero, 6

por el correo
Mi criado las llevard al cor-
reo, si vm. gustare confi-

irselas
Lleva las cartas del senor al

correo, y no te se olvide el

franquearlas
No tengo dinero

There are tome others
These pens are not made

Where is your pen^knife f

Can you make pens ?

I make them after my fashion

This is not had ^

Jt is good enough

While T^nish this letter , he
so kind as to make a pack-
et of these papers

What seal wiU you have me

put to it ?
Seal it with my coat of arms

or with my cypher
What wax shall I put to it f
Put either red or blacky no

matter
Will not wafers suffice ?
It is aU one

Have you put the date ?
I believe I have, but I have

not signed it
What day of the month is this ?
The tenthy the twentieth^ ^c.
Fold np this letter
Put the superscription to it
Close it and seal it
Where is the sand?
In the sand-box
Dry your writing with blot-
ting-paper
How do you send your letters ?
I send them by the carrier ^

or by the post
My man shall carry them to

the post, if you will trust

them to him
Carry the gentleman^ s letters

to the post-office, and do

not forget to free them
I have no money

&60

VAIOUAB DIALOOUKft.

Ahf le tknei, ve presto y

^niolve luego
Eftare de Yudta en menos de

nedio coarto de bora
Ha Uegado el correo ?
Ahora acaba de Uegar
Hay cartas para mi?
Creo que si

Porque no las has traido?
Aun no se entregabao

DiilXIX. Del trocar.
Quiere vm. trocar su reloj ?

Con que?

Con mi espada 6 espadin
£nhora buena, pero cuanto
medar& vm. de vuelta ?

Cuanto me pide vm. ?
Me dar& rm. doce pesos

En cuanto aprecia vm. su

reloj ?
En treiota y seis pesos
No vale tanto
£s viejo

Lo confieso, pero anda bien
No le vcilvere yo nada
Mi espada vale tanto como sn

reloj
Ciertamente se burla vm.
Noy Senor
Que espada es esta ?
Acabo de comprarla en la

espaderfa
Es la guarnicion de cobre

dorado ?
Bella pregunta ! no ve vm. que

es de plata sobredorada ?
£s el puno de piata ?
Sin duda que lo es

I%ere is 9omey go jmci and
come back imme&atefy

I will he hack in les8 tkai
half a quarter of gm kov

Hob the mail come f

It is just arrived

Are there letters for me T

I believe so

Why did you not bring them f

They were not delivered yet,

DiaL XIX. Of excbaoging.

Will you exchange your

waichf
For what?
For my sword
With aU my heart, bui htm

much will you give me in

return f
How much do you osL me?
You will give me twelve dot"

lews
What do you value yomr

watch at f
At thirty^six doUars
It is not worth so tnuch
It is old

I own it, but it goes weU
I will return you nothing
My sword is worth as wmek

as t^ur watch
You joke surely
No, Sir

What sword it this?
I have just bought it at the

sword cutler^s
Is the hilt of gilt copper ?

A fine question I do not you

see it is silver gilt?
le the hilt of silver ?
Without doubt it is so

FAMII.IAR DIALOOUIS.

S61

Cuanto le costo 4 vm. este

espadin ?
A^ como le sale ?
Me cuesta treinta pesos
Ale ha de dar vm. pues seis

pesos de vuelta
No lo hare por cierto
Blen, degese de ello
Vea vm. si quiere trocar

igualpor igual?
Buenaest^estal
No es tan ficil enganarme

como le parece
Pues, vayasinnada de vuelta
Hecho, en hora buena

DiiL XX. De hsjuegas en
general; y primero de 61
de los dados.

Juega vm. algunas veces?
Si^ Senor^ pero jamas ju^o
sino para divertirme

JMas, me parece, que el juego
es una divernon muy . pell-
grosa

Si, cuando se juega mucho
dinero

Fero siempre juego poco di-
nero

Con que la perdida 6 ganan-
cia es una cortedad

Juega vm. & los juegosde
suerte, 6 de babilidad ?

Que entiende vm. por Juegos
de suerte ?

Juegos de naipes, dados, &c.

Y por los de habilidad ?

El agedrez, las damas, los
boTos, el truco, &c*

Juega vm. mucho 4 los da-
dos ?

Muy rara vez ^

Porque?
31

How much did tkiB 9ward eo^

y<mf
What does it come ta you at?
It costs me thirty dollars
You must give me six dollars

to boot then
I will nqt do it certainly
Wellf leave it
See whether you wilt change

even?
J^is is a good one !
It is not so easy to take me

in as you think
Wellf exchange even
Doncy with aM my heart*

Dial. XX. Of gaming, ia
general ; and first of that
of dice.

Do you play sometimes ?
Yes, 8ir, but I never play

only to divert myself
But J methinks, gaming is a

very dangerous diversion

YeSf when one plays deep,
high, or for much money

But I always play for a smaH
matter or little money

And so the loss or gain is in-
considerable

Do you play at games of
chance, or of skill ?

What do you mean by games
of chance?

Games at cards, dice, ^c.

And by those ofskiU?

CJtess, draughts, bowls, bU-
hards, ^c.

Do you phy a great deal at
£ce?

Very seldom

Why?

962

rAUUAAM, DtALOOVfiS.

Potque hay amchos trampo-

80S muy astutos
Se ooire mocho riesgo con

esos rateros, puea parecen

hombres de forma
Tienen dados faUos
Vaya^ 4-que juegojugar^mos?

A' el que rm, quiiiere
Jugaremos & losnaipes?
Como le gustare
Jaguemos al hombre^ 4 los

cientos
Vayan los cientos
Es un juego muy de moda
Denos dos barajas y unos

tantos
Que jugar^mos 4 cada juego ?

Jij^emos un peso para pasar

el tiempo
Jugamos partida doble ?
Como quisiere
Cuantos taotos me da vm. ?
Me pide vm. tantos y juega

tambien como yo
£sl4 cab^d esta baraja ?
^Of le falta un naipe
Quite vrad. los naipes Imjos
Veamos qiuen da
Soy mano
Vm. da el naipe
Barage vm. las cartas
Todas las figuras est4n juntas

De vm. los naipes

A^ mi me falta una carta

Vuelva vm. .4 dar

Levante vm.

Tiene vra^ sua cartas ?

Creo que est4n cabales

Ha descartado vm. ?

Cuantas toma vm, ?

Secaun there, are numy de:i^

teroM sharpers
One runs a great danger wUk

those cheats J hectntse the^f

appear like gemtlemen
They have loaded dice
WeUj what game . shaU we

play at ?
Which you please
ShaU we play at sards f
As you please
Let us piay at . ombre^ at

piquet
Let us play ai piquet
It is a game much infasMon
Give us twopafks and some

counters
What shall we play each

game?
Let us play a doBar to . pass

away time
Do weplaylup^iies ?
^As you phase
Whflt,oddtrdoyou give me ?
You ask me odds and you

play asweUas t
Is this pack whole ?
-Noy ae^udis ^fttnting to it
Throw out the low cards
Let us see who deals
I hone the hand
You deal the- cards
Shafflethe cards
^l^tie Qourt-cettdS'*are to-
gether
Jj^eal-aisdy
I want a -card
Dealagain
Cutj rise

Have you ymm^oardsf
I believe they are exact
Have you discarded ?
How many do you tiAe.in f

FAMILIAR OlALOaUES-

363

Tomolas todas

No, dejo una

Tengo mal juego

Ha detener vm- bello juego,

pues yo Dada tengo >
Mi juego m^ apura
Diga vm. su juego
Cuanto de punto ?
Cincuenta, fesenta, &c«
Bueno, buen punto
No sirven

He descartado la partida
Sesta mayor, quinta al Rey, 6

cuartade caballo, tercera

& la sota 6 de dies
Otro tanto tengo, igual
Tres ases, tres reyes, &c. son

buenosj^
No, tengo un catorce
Tengo catorce de caballos
Yaya jugando
Juego copa, espada, oro,

basto
£1 as, el rey, el caballo, la

sota, el diez, el nueve, el

ocho, el siete
Hago un piqUe, repique, ca-
pote
Gano los naipes
Teogo siete bazas
He perdido
Ha ganado.vm.
Me debe vm. un peso
Me lo debia vm,
Estaraos pues en paz
Vfiya otra partida
En bora buena, con mucho

gusto

Di&L XXI. Del jugar al
agidrez.

En que emplearemos la tar-
de?

I take them all

No J I leave one

liwne had cards^ a had game

You muet have good eardsy

since I have nothing
My eards put&de me
Call your; game
How much is yonr point f-
Fifty y sixty J 9fc.
Goody it is a good point '
They Are not good
I have laid out the game-
Asixiememqjory a quint to the

king, or quart to the queen^

a tierce to the knave or ten
Ihavejustasmuchy it is equal
Are tiree acesy three kings j

^c. good?
Noy 1 have fourteen
lam fourteen hy queens
Flay on
I play a hearty spade ydia*

mondy chb
The accy the kingy the quemy

the knavey the teny the ninCy

the eighty the seVen
I make a piquey repiqucy-a

capot
I win the cards
I have seven tricks
I have lost
You have won
You owe me a dollar
You owed it to me
We are then even, quits
Let us play another game
With all my hearty with great

pleasure

Dial XXI. Of playing at
chess.

How shaUwe spend the after*
noon?

354

rAMUlAB DIALOOUBS.

Joguemosa] agMres

JuguemoSy en bora boena

Pero juega vm. mejor que y6

£f TiD. mas fuerte que yo

Nolo crea vm.

Me ba gaoado vm. siempre

No jugar6 mas con vm.^ si no
me diere alguna ventaja

Cs preciso que me de un alfil
y iamauo

£n verdad que no puedo, ju-
ega vm. tan bie n como yo

Yea vm. si quiere jugar k la
par

Muy bieU) lo bar6 una vez

Cuanto jugaremos ?

Siempre juego poco dinero

Vaya medio peso cada juego

. Juego primero
Tomo este peon
Me alegro, pues voy & tomar
este alfil y darle jaque

Roqae me llamo

Nada gana vm. en eso, pues

4 su roque 6 torre me llevo

con mi caballo
Pero como resguardard vm.

& su reina ?
Dandole jaque y mate con mi

alfil y mi roque
He perdido el juego, ya no

puedo mover el rey
Me debe vm. pues medio peso
Asi es

Pero vm. me lo debia antes
Bien, estamos en paz
D6nos vm. un tablero
Juegue vm. primero
Soplo este peon
Haga dama este peon

Lei vspiay at eAess
Let us piay^ I am vnlHnff
But you play better than T
You are an over^maichfor me
Do not think it
You aboaye have beat me
I wiU play no more with you,
unlets you give me some odds
You must give me a bishop

and the move
Indeed I catinoty you play as

well as I do
See if you have a mind to

play even
WeU, I will do it for once
What shall we play for f
I always play for a smaU

matter
Let us play far haitfa doUar

a game
I have the move
I take this pawn
I am glad of it, for I am go-
ing to take this bishop and
• cheek you
I castle
You get nothing by thai ; for

I take your rook or castle

with my knight
But how will you save your

queen ?
By checkmating you with my

bishop and rook
I have lost the game, I can

no longer move the king
You owe me half a dollar then
It is so

But you owed it me before
Then, we are quits or even
Give us a draughts-board
I give you the move, playfrst
I huff this man
King that man

FAMtLlAB DlALOai)B8«

365

Cuantas damas tiene vm. ?
Tengo dot

Coma vm. este^ que luego co-
mere tres
Pierdo el juego

Di^lXXII. Deljugardla
pelota.

Yea vm. que bello dia hace
AprovechemoDos de este dia
tan hermoso

Que haremos hoy ?

£1 buen tiempo nos convida
djugar 6 4 pasear

£n que juego hemes de en-
tretenernos ?

£1 de pelota es el mejor pa-
ra el egercicio

Pero es juego mas de invier-
no que de verano

Sndarlmos menos, si jugamos'
con raquetas

Vamos al juego de pelota

Jugaremos con palas

Hagamos la partida

£st4vm. commigo

No importa como estamos

£ste estd con nosotros^

£s vm. mejor jugador que yo

£st4se cada uno en su lugar

Mantengase detras de ml, y

coja la pelota
Paso por encima de mi
La cogi en el aire
Rechace la pelota
£8 vm* mal companero
No ha ganado vm. aun
Aun puede vm. perder
Tenemos la superioridad
Perdio vm., ganamos
Cuanto jugamos ?
SI*

How many kings have you f

I have two

Take thisy then I ihaU take

three
I hse the game.

Dial XXn. Of playing at
tennis.

See what a fine day it is
Let us improve this so fair a

day
What Shan we do to^ay f
The fine weather invites us to

play or to walk
What play shaU we amfiie

ourselves at?
Thai of tennis is the^be^for

exercise
But it is a play fitter for

winter than summer
We shall perspire hssy if we

play with raekefts
Let us go to the tennis^ourt
WewiUplay with baltledoors
Let us make the match
You are with me
It is no matter who and who
He is on our side
You are a better player than 1
Let every one st€md at his

place
Stand behind me, and catch

the ban
It flew over me
I caught it in the air
Strike the ball back
You are a had second
You have not beat yet
You may lose yet
We have the best of it
You have losty we have won
What didwe play for ?

306

FAMlLIAft DIALOOU«8«

DotpeMM

Ha puesto vm. eD el juego ?
N09 pero ahi esti mi dinero
£s lo mismo

Manaoa jugaremos otra vez '
Coando vmd. quiaiere

Dial. XXIII. De las diver-
tiones del campoy particur
larmenie de ia caza y de
la pesca.

Senor, me alegro de ver 4

vm. ; adonde ha estado tan

laigo tiempo ?
Adoi^e ae mete vm.?
Dos meses ha que estamos

en una case de campo
Havenido vm. & la ciudad

para quedarse ?
No, Seiiory vuelvo manana

por la manana
Como pasa vm. su tiempo en

el campo ?
Parte de el empleoenestudiar
Pero cuales son sua diver-

sionesy despues de mis ne-

gocios series ?
Voy tal vez 4 cazar
A^ que caza ?
A^ voces 4 la caza del venado,

4 voces de la liebre
Tiene vm. buenos perros ?
Tenemos muchos perros de

muestra
Dosgalgos, dosgalgas, cua-

tro jateos, y tres perdi-

gueros

No caza vm. aves ?

Caza vm. i voces con la es-

copeta ?
Siy JSenor, muy 4 menudo
Sobre que tira vm. ?

IhoodoBare

Have you staked f

Noy but there is my money

JtisaU one

To-morrow we wiOplay again

When you pleaee.

Dial. XXin. Of country
sports^ especially of hunt-
ing and fishing.

Siry lam overjoyed io see

you ; where have you been

so long a while?

Where do you keep yourself f

We have been these two

numths at a comOry-houee

Are you come to ttnon to

Hay?
No J Siry I go back to-morrow

morning
How do, you pass your time

in the country?
I bestow apart of it on books
But which are your diver*
sionSf after your serious
bueiness ?
I go sometimes a hunting
What do you hunt?
We sometimes huni a stagy

sometimes a hare
Have you good dogs?
We have a large pack of

houtids
Two grey-hound dogs, two
grey-hound bitches, four
terrierSy and three setting*
dogs
Do you not go a fowling ?
Do you go a shooting some^

times ?
YeSySiry very often
What do you shoot at ?

FAMILIAR DlALOOnE8«

367

Sabre todo genero de caza,
como perdices, faisanes,
gallinetas, conejos, &c.
Tira vm. al vuelo la pieza 6

corriendo?
I>e ambas maneras
Como <^oge vm. los conejos ?
Af veces con redes, y 4 veces

4 escopetazos
Y las codomices ?
Solemos tomarlas con una
red y un perro perdiguero
£s vm. amigo de pescar ?
Muchisimo

Pesca vm. 4 menudocon red ?
Muy raras veces
Mas quiero pescar con la

caiia y anzuelo
La pesca y la caza son diver-

siones muy nobles

£1 Rey mas rico y mas pobre

de Europa no se divierte

en otra cosa

Un dia qtiizi pensarin sus

ministros que sus vasallos

est4n anualmente dando 4

sus vecinos millones por

pescado salado y hediondo

Tienen no obstante muy bu-

enos peces en sus costas
Pero no toman el trabajo de

curarlos
I^ sttcede por falta de ani-

mar la pesca
Y de otros muchos motivos
Coge vm. muchos peces en

su estanque ?
Que bace vm. cuando no caza

opesca?
Ju^amos 4 la bola, al truco,

o 4 los boloB
Segun esto, ao puede vm. es-
tar caosado del campo?

dU manner of game^ aspart'
ridgesj pheasants, sand-
piperSy rabbits, Sfc,
Do you shoot fiying or run-
ning ?
Both ways

How do you catch rabbits ?
Sometimes with nets, and

sometimes with a gun
Jnd the quails?
Wecatchthemmost commonly
with a net and a setting-dog
Do you likeJisMngf
Extremely

Do you fish often with a net ?
Very seldom
I prefer fishing with a line

and hook
Fishing and hunting are

tery noble diversions
The richest and poorest king
of Europe has no other
. diversion

One day perhaps their minis'
ters will think of their sub'
jects giving away yearly to
their neighbours millions
for stinking saUfish
They have notwithstanding
very good fish on their coast
But they do not take the trou-

ble to cure it <

This arises from not giving

encouragement to fisheries

And from many other causes

Do you catch much fish in

your pond?
What ao you do when you

neither hunt nor fish f
We play at bowls, at biU

liarels, or nine-pins
According to this, you cannot
be tired with the country f

368

FAMILIAB DIAliOODXS.

Ami le parece & vm. y es lo

contrario
Ya empiezo 4 desear la ciu-

dad, y espero presto pa-

sarme 4 olla

Dj41. XXIV. Del ir d la
comedia,

Se dice que hoy r^resentan

una pieza nueva
£a comedia, tragedia, opera,

6 entremes?
£s una tragedia
Como la ILunaD ?

La

QuieD es su autor ?

£iSenor

£s esta la primera represen-

tacion?
No, Senor^yaselia represen-

tado tres veces
Este es el dia del autor
Como se recibio en las pri-

meras representaciones
Con universal aplauso
£1 autor era ya celebre

Y esta (iltima tragedia faa au-

mentado mucho 'su fama
Ir^os 4 verla ?
De muy buena gana
Voy 4 mandar al cochero

que apnante el eocbe
Ir^tnos 4 un aposento?
£n hora buena, pero mas

quisiera ir al patio
Porque?
Porque podemos ver y oir

mejor all4 que en los

palcos
Que tal le parece la sinfonia?
Muy buena me parece
Los corredorese8t4n ya llenos

So it seemB to you, amlit is

otkermse
I already begin to kmg for

the city J and I hope ^ort"

ly to proceed to it.

Dial XXIV.
the

going . to

Of

play.

They say there m a new play

acted to day
h it a eomedyj a tragedy y an

operay or a farce ?
It is a tragedy
How do they name it

The

Who is its author?

Mr.

Is this the first repreeenia-

tionf
No J 8iry it has been already

acted three Hmes
This is the author's nigj^
How was it receive on the

first representations ?
With ttntverml appUmee
The author was already fa-

mous
And this hut tragedy has

muck increased his fame
8haU we go and see it f
WithaUmyheart
lam going to bid the coach-

man to getthe coaeh ready
Shall we go to a boxf
As you please^ but I had

rather go to the pit
Whyf ^

BecasMewe can see and hear

better there than in the

boxes
How do you like the overture ?
I think it is very fine
The gaUeries are full alrtady

FAMILIAL DIALOOUJB8.

369

Y como vffl. lo ve, estamos
muy apretados en el patio

No caben las damas ea los

aposentos
Nunca vl la casa tan Ikna
£stas Senoras est^n muy

bien vestidas
Ve vm. aquella senora en el

aposento del Rey
Jamas he visto rostro tan her-

moso en mi vida
Quien es?
La Duquesa de ——

Y quien es la Senora joven
que esl&con ella?

Su hermana, la Senora de

Pero ya se levanta la cortina,

escuchemps
Tendremos antes el Prologo

1^1 segundo acto esti acabado
Las escenas estdn muy bellas

Don es muy buen actor

£ste es el ultimo acto
Acabqse la pieza — como le

gusta k vmd. ?
Muchisimo, me pareceesce-

lente tragedia y muy bien

representada
Tuvo grande aplauso
Abora tendremos el EpOpgo
Quien lo dice ?
La Senora — —
Lo dice con mucho dnimo
Quiere vmd. quedar para ver

la Pantomima ?
No, ya la he visto, y como es

tarde, haremos mejor de

imos
De todo mi corazon
Iremoi & la CXpera manana

And as you Btty tte are very

much crowded in the pit
The ladies cannot be contain^

ed in the booses
I never saw the^ house sofuU
These ladies art very weU

dressed
Do you observe that lady in

the King^s box
1 never hmte in my life seen

so beautiful a face
Who is she?

The Duchess of

And who is that young lady

who is with her f
Her sister J Lady —
But the curtain rises already ^

let us attend
We shaU first have the Pro-
logue
The second act is over
The scenes are very fine

Mr. IS a very good actor

This is the last act

The piece is over — how do

you like it ?
Very much ; I think it an

excellent tragedy and very

well performed
It recieved great applause
Now for the Epilogue
Who speaks it?

Mrs.

She speaks it with great spirit
WiU you stay to see the Pan"

tomime ?
Noy I have seen it already,

and as it is late, we had

better gQ away
With an my heart
We will go to the opera to

morrow.

370

PAMUiIAA DULOOUfifti

Dial. XXV. Del vettirBe. Dial

XXV. Of

oneself.

dressing

Seiior Maestro^ trae Yin. mi

Testidoentero?
Si, Senor, aqui 6St4
Le estaba aguardando ; pnie-

bemelo
Quiere vm. probar la casaca ?
Veamos si esti bien hecfaa
Creo que le gustari 4 vm.
Me parece muy larga
Ya no se Uevan tan cortas

como antes
Se usan largas ahora
Abotoneme vm.
Me ajusta demasiado
£s preciso que ajuste bien
Este vestido le coge muy bien-

el talle
No son las mangaa demasiado

largas y anchas ?
No, Senor, van muy bien
Se llevan ahora muy largas y

anchas
Los pantalones son demasia-
do cortos
Los calsones son muy estre-

chos
Eslamoda
Deme la chupa
Le va muy bien este vestido

Pero las medias no vienen
con este pane

Que le parece de mi sombrero?

Esun castor hermoso

Que galcm le pondr& vm. ?

Un galon de oro con una he-
billa de diamantes

Me compro vm. las ligas co-
mo le dige ?

Si^ Senor, ahi est^n

Maafery do you bring myfidl

suit of clothes?
Yes, Sir y here it is
Itpos waiting for you; try

it on me
WiU you try the eoai ?
Let us see tf it is weU made
I beKeve it wili please you
It seems to me very long
They dt> not wear IAm iion?

so short as formerly
They wear them long now
Button me
It is too close
It ought to be very close
This suit Jits your shape very

Are not the tdeeves too long

and too widef
Noy Siry they Jit very wed
They wear them now very

longand wide
The pantaloons are too short

The breeches are very strait

It is the fashion
Give me the waistcoat
This suit becomes you very

weU
But the stochings do not

match this cloth
What do you say to my hatf
It is a beautiful beaver
What laee will you put to it f
A gold lace with a diamond

buckle
Did you buy me the garters

as I told you ?
Yesy Sir, there they are

PAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

371

Son estas medias de seda de

Paris 6 de Londres ?
Son de Francia
Cuanto las venden ?

Tres pesos el par

£s bastante barato, siendo

tan finas.
Muchacho, ha venido el za-

patero ?
No, Senor, no ha venido
Corre pues 4 su casa^ y dile

que me traiga mis zapatos
Senor, aqui est4, le encontre

en el camino
Son estos mis zapatos ?
Si, Seiior
PojDgamelos vm.
Est^n muy ajustados
Me aprietan un poco
Pongalos en la horma para

ensancharlos
Bastantemente se ensancha-

rdfco llev&ndolos
Esta piel da de si como un

guante
Siento muy bien que me las-

timardn
Mis caUos lo padecer^n
Me duelen mucho los pies
El e^ipeine de «ste zapato no

vale nada
El talon e» demasiado bajo
Las suelasno son bastante fu-

ertes.nigrue8as /

Hdgame vm. otro par
Es vm., Seiior, muy dif icil de

contentar
Quiere vm. probarotro par

que trage por acaso ?
En bora buena
Creo qiie le irin bien
Mi pie est4 mas descansado

Are these Hlk 'etoekmge from

Paris or London f
They are from France
How much do they aeU them

for?
Three dollars a pair
It is cheap enough^ being so

fine
Boy, is the shoemaker come ?

No, Sir, he is not come
Run then to his house, and

bid him bring me my shoes
Sir, here he is, I met him on

the way
Are these my shoes ?
Yes, 8ir
Put them on me
They are too tight
They pinch me a little
Put them on the last to widen

them
They wiU widen enovgh by

wearing tl^em
This lectther stretches like a

glove
If eel very sure that they wHl

hurt me
My corns will suffer for it
My feet ache much
The upper4eather of this shoe

is good for nothing
The heel is too low
The soles are neither strong

nor thick enough
Make me another pair
You are. Sir, very hard to

please
Will you try another pair

which I brought by chance?
lam willing

I believe they will fit you
My foot is more at ease

SW

FAMlUAft »lAL0OUBab

Cttanto valenestos sapatos?

A' camo los vende vm. ?

Dos pesos y medio

£s demasiado caro

Es precio hecho

Es un zapato bien hecho y

bien coaido
il&gaiiie otro par como este

Tome mi medida
Ahl tiene su dinero
Viva vm. muchos anos^ ca-
ballero

Diii. XXVI. Del hahlar d
un mozo de cabaUoa,

Almohaza mi caballo
Estriega y limpiale bien con

un manojo de paja
Mi caballo est4 sin herra-

duras
Le faltan dos herradurras
Llevale k casa del herrador
Mindalo herrar
Llevalo despues al no

Le has dado de beber ?

Sf, Seiior

Dale su pienso de cebada

Paseale esta tarde
Dale tambien salvado
Ha comido su cebada ?
E^chale paja abora
Ensilla mi caballo y trdemelo

Tomale por el freno
No le hagas correr
No le recalientes
£st4 cansado ?
Qultale el freno
Ponle en la caballeriza

What are tkeie •hoes worth f

How much do you tell thorn atf

Two doilarsanda half

It u too dear

It it a fixed price

It is a shoe w^ made and

well stitched
Make me another pair Uke

this
Take my measure
There is your money
May you Uve many years^ Sir
1 thank youj Sir,

Dial. XXVI. Of speaking
to a groom,

Curry my horse

Rub and clean him weU with

a wisp of straw
My horse is unshod; is withr

out shoes
He wants two shoes
Take him to the farrier
Get him shod
Lead him afterwards to the

river.
Have you watered him f
Yes, Sir
Give him his allowance of

barley
Walk him this afternoon
Give him also some bran
Has he eaten his barley f
Give him now some straw
Saddle my horse and bring

him to me
Take him by the bridle
Do not make him run
Do not overheat him
Is he tired f
Unbridle him
Put him in the Hable.

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

sra

Didl. XXVII. Deirdun Dial. XXVll. Of going on
viage. a journey.

Vengo 4 despedirme de vm.

y 4 recibir sus ordenes
Adonde va vm., Senor ?
Voy 4 Madrid
Cuando parte vm.?
£n este instante
Va vm. 4 caballo 6 en coche ?

A^ caballo

Alachacho, trieme mi caballo

A qui esti,, Sehor

Esti bien almohazado ?

IVInybien, Senor

Cuantas leguas hay de aqui &

M— ^ ?

Diez leguas

Son leguas largas ?

No, Senor, son las mas cortas

de Cspana
Le parece & vm. que poda-

mos caminar tanto hoy ?
Sin duda, no es tan tarde
Dar^n presto las doce
Tlene vm. bastante tiempo

para llegar antes de po-

nerse el sol
Hay buen camino ?
Muy hermoso

Ningun pantano se encuentra
Pero tiene vm. bosques que

atravesar y rios que pasar
Hay peligro en el camino

real?
No se habla de que baya la-
drones en los bosques ?

No se dice nada de esto
No hay que temer nada ni de
dia ni de noche
32

J come to hid you farewell

and take your commands
Where are you going y Sir ?
I am going to Madrid
When do you set put ?
Presently ; this miwUe
Do you go on horseback or

in a coach ?
On horseback
Boy^ bring me my horse
Here he m, Sir
Is he well curried f
Very weUy Sir
How many leagues is it from

here to M— r ?

Ten leagues

Are they long leagues ?

No, iStV, they are the shortest

in Spain
Do you think we can travel

so far today?
Without doubt f it is not so late
Twehe o^clockwill soon strike
You have time enough to ar^

rive before the sun sets

Is there a good road ?

Veryfine

You meet with no quagmire

But you have woods to go

through and rivers to cross
Is there any danger upon the

highway f
Do you hear whether there

are any highwaymen in the

woods?
There is no talk of it
There is nothing to fear either

by day or night

374

PAirniAB DIAL06UK8.

£s UD camino en que anda

gente aiempre
QiM camino he de tomar ?
Cuando este tri. cerca de la

primera aldea, tomari 4

mano derecha
He de subir el monte ?
No, Senor, degelo vm. & la

izquierda
Es el camino dificultoso en

Ids bosques ?
NoySenor; vaya vm. sieropre

derecho, no se puede estra-

viar
Adonde encontrar^mos el

no ?
A' la salida del bosque
Se puede vadear, es vade-

able?
NoySenor^se pasa en un barco
Yamos, caballeros, montemos
Al Dios, Seiiores
Dios les de buen viage
Les doy muchas gracias
No quiere vm. echar un

trago ?
Como vmd. gustare
Vaya, 4 su buen viage

Di41. XXVm. Envnapa^
$ada.

Donde estd la mejor posada

de la ciqdad ?
Al signo del Caballo Blanco

En que parage de la villa

est4 ?
Cerca de la iglesia mayor
Podremos alojarnos aqui ?
Si, Sefior, tenemos bellos cu-

artos y buen as camas
Apeemonosy Seiiores

It M aroad where youaiways

meet witk people
Which way muat I take f
When you we near tkejirwi

milage^ you will icdse to the

right
Mutt I go up the hm?
Noy Siry leave it to the left

Is the way difficult thro/ugh

the teoodsf
Noy Sir ; go straight along y

you cannot lose yowr way

Where shall we come to the

river f
As you come out of the wood
Can one ford it, is iS fordo-

hlef
Noy Siry people ferry it over
Comcy gentlemen^ let us mount
FareweUy gentlemen
I wish you a good journey
I give you many thanks
Will you not take the parting

glass f
As you please
Comey to your good journey.

Dial XXVIII. In an Inn.

Where is the best inn in the
city *

At the sign of the White
Horse

In what part of the toum
is it ?

Near the principal church

Can we lodge here ?

Yesy Sir, we have fine cham-
bers and good beds

Let us alighty gentlemen

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

375^

Donde esti el mozo de cabal-

los?
Aqui estoy, Sefior
Toiua nuestros caballos
Llevalos i la caballeriza
Cuidalos bien
Veamos, ahora^ que nos dard.

vm. de cenar ?
Yean vms., Senores^ lo que

mas gustaren

Denos media docena de pi-
chooes, dos perdices, seis
codoruices, un buen capon
y una ensalada

Tendre cuidado de todo ; no
se inquieten vms.

No quieren vms. otra cosa ?

No, basta con esto ; pero de-
nos buen vino y fnita

Lies aseguro que les dare
gusto

Quieren vms. ir i ver sus
aposentos ?

SI, Uame 4 su camarero

Alumbra i estos Senores que
suban

H^ganos cenar cuanto antes

Antes que se hayan quitado
las botas, estari la cena
pronta

Adonde estin nuestros laca-
yos ?

Ahi suben con sus balijas

Han traldo nuestras pistolas ?

Si, Sefior, aqui estdn

Quita mis botines y ve des-

pues 4 cuidar de nuestros .

caballos
Llama para cenar

Where is the hostler, or

groom ?
Here 1 am. Sir
Take our horses
Lead them to the stable
Take good care of them
Now, let us see, what will you

give us for supper?
See yourselves, gentlemen,

what you have moat a

mind to
Give us half a dozen pigeons,

a brace of partridges, six

quails, a good capon and

a sallad
I will take care of all; do

not trouble yourselves
Will you have nothing else ?
No, that is enough ; but give

us good wine and fruit
1 shall please you, I warrant

you
Will you go and see your

chambers ?
Yes, call your chamberlain
Light the gentlemen that they

may go up stairs
Give us our supper as soon

as possible
Before your boots are pulled

off, supper will be got

ready
Where are our servants f

There they are going up with
your portmanteaux

Have they Itrought our pis-
tola?

Yes, Sir, here they are

Pull off my boots and 4hen
go and take care of our
horses

Call for supper

#r6

FAMILIAft DIALOOUSS.

Senoresy la cena est^ pronta^

est^ eo la mesa
VamoBy Seiioresy 4 cenar,

|Mra poder acoatarnoa tem-

prano
SentemoDoa 4 la mesa
Vm. no oome nada; que
tiene?

No tengo ganas, estoy cansado
Estoy molido
Estare mejor eo la cama que

en la mesa
Tome vmd. 4nimo
Si se siente male v4yase 4

acostar
Mande calentar su cama
Que no les impida de cenar,

voy 4 descansar

Ha menester vm. algo ?
Nada quiero sino descansar
Tengan vms. buenas noches
Trae los postres^ y di 4 la

patrona que venga 4 ha-

blarnos
Aqui viene
Senores, les gusta 4 vms. la

cena ?
Si, Senora, pero abora es

menester satisfacer 4 vm.
Cuanto hemes gastado ?
Que hemes de pagar ?
£1 escote no sube mucho
Yea vm. cuanto le debemos

pornosotrosy nuestros cria-

dosy caballos
For la cena; la cama y el al*

muerzo
Todo importa diez pesos
Mo palace que es demasiado
Al^pontrario, es muy barato

Genikmen, supper is • ready ,

it is on the tabic
Let us go to supper, ge^Me-

men, that we may go to

bed early
Let us sit down at table
You eat notkmg ; what aih

you?
I have no appetite, I am tired
I am bruised all ooer
I shall be better in bed than

at table
Take courage
If you find yourself iU go to

bed
Get your bed warmed
That I may not hinder you

from supping, I am going

to rest
Do you want any thing f
I want nothing hut rest
I wish you a good night
Bring the Assert, and bid

the landlady come and

speak with us
Here she is coming
Gentlemen, are you pleased

with your supper ?
Yes, mistress, but now we must

satisfy you
How much have we spent ?
What have we to pay ?
Tf*e reckoning is not high
See hmo much we owe you for

ourselves, our men and our

horses
For the supper, bed and

breakfast
All amounts to ten dollars
I ihink it is too much
On the contrary, it it very

cheap

FAMILIAB DIALOOtrSS.

377v

Haga vm. mismo la cuenta,

y hallard que no les pido

demasiado %

Pagaremosle manana por la

mafiana despues del almu-

erzo
Como vms. quisieren
Denos sibanas limpias
Las sibanas que les envio son

muy buenas
Bueuas noches, Seiiora
Buenas noches les de Dios 4

vms., caballeros ^ servidora

de vms.
Necesitan vms. de algo ?
Nada nos hace falta
Solo que se haga buen fuego
Las noches son muy frias
£s menester cuidarse en

viage

DiiL XXIX. Para hablar
con lo8 empkadoB en las
aduanas,

Traen vms. algo contra las
ordenes de su magestad,
del soberano, 6 de la re-
publica f

No, yo no tengo contrabando
alguno

Tengo solamente algunos
efectos que pagan impues^
tos, y voy i declarirselos

Cuanto debo pagar por esto ?

£s menester darme sus llaves
Helas aqui. Hagame vmd.
la gracia de despacharme
luego, porque tengo mucha
prisa
Se lo estimare mucho .
' 32*

Reckon yourself ^ and you will
Jind that I do not ask you

too much
We will pay you to-morrow

morning after breakfast

As you please

Let us have clean sheets

The sheets I send you are

very good
Good night, landlady
Goodnight, gentlemen; lam

your servant .

Do you want any thing f
We are in want of nothing
Only that a good fire be made
The nights are very cold
One must take care ofone^S'
self on a journey.

Dial. XXIX. Tospealfwith
the officers in the custom-
houses.

Do you bring any thing con-
trary to the decrees of his
majesty, of the sovereign,
or republic ?

No, I have no contraband
goods at all

I have only some goods that
pay duty, and T am going
to manifest them to you

How much have I to pay for
this?

You must give me your keys

Here they are. Be so kind
as to expedite me directly,
for I am in great haste

I shaU be much obliged to you
for it

ws

FAMILfAR DIALOGUES.

Ahi tiene vmd. la llave del
candado; he aqai la llave
de la cerradura

Higame vind. la gracta de
buscar con precancioD,
porque hay muchas coses
que pueden quebrarse

Haacabado vmd.?

No emplomari vmd. ahora el
baul y los cofres, para que
no me los registren otra
vez?

No podria vbl, en lugar de
registrarme aqui en esta

rrta, venir Sl hacwlo en
fonda, 6 en la casa
adonde voy ^ posar ?
Gracias, p^Mefto vmd. bien.
Dios guarde 4 vrnd.^ S^.

There i$ the key to the pad-
lock ; here %8 the key to
the Jock

Do me the favour to eeetreh
with earey for there it wmck
brittle ware therein

Have you done?

Will you not put a teadeteump
now upon the tnmk and
chegtB, that they may not
be searched again ?

Could not yoUf inatead of
eearching me here at iMe
gaiCy come and do it at the
inn, or house where I am
going to lod^ef

I thank you, fareweU. Yaar
aervixnty Sir,

Di&l. XXX. Pcwaunaper' DiaLXXX. For a person
eona eatraviada en una who has lost his way in
dudad. a city.

No me harf a vmd. el favor de
decirme^ si estoy lejos dd
barrio de Sau Francisco, 6
de la calle de San Pablo ?

Hay may lejos de aqui 4 -^- ?

Busco la posada del Seiior

— — 6 de la Senora —

Por que lado debo ir ?
Despuesy dare vuelta 4 la de-

recha 6 4 la izquierda ?

£s aqui que vive el Senor ?

Qttisiera vm. darme su direc-

cion?
Podria vmd. senalarme el

camino que debo tomar,

para ir 4 casa del Se^

nor ?

Would you not oblige me ao
far as to tell me, whether

lama great way from the

Ward of 8l. Prmncia, or

Street of St. Paul f
la it far from here to — — »
/ am looking for the reai-

denee of Mr, ^, or

Madam ■■ ■
Which way muai I go f
Shalllturny afterwardty to

the right or left «
Doea Mr* *— — live heref
Would you favour me uM

hia addreaaf
Could you point -out to me the

way I must take, in order

to go to the htnm ef

Mr. ?

FAMILIAR DIALOGUES.

S79

Quiere vmd. conducirme al-

14, le pagare bien ; le

dare

Pase vm. adelante^ yo le se-

guir§
No vava tan ^ prisa
Cooduzcaine vm. par ei ca-

mino mas corto
Esta balle esti embarazada,

tomemos otro cdmino
Llame vm. un coche de al-

quiler
Cochero, quereis llevarme ?
Moro en la calle de —

Dikh XXXI. Un miliiar
vencedor estableciindose
en una casa de los vend"
dosy y hablando d los ^e-
fioe de la casa.

No tengais miedo, somos In-
gleses, AlemaneS; Rusos,
Franceses, &c. Nuestro
car4cter nacional puede
aseguraros de nuestra gen-
erosidad, y la obediencia
que debemos ^ nuestro so-
berano es un segundo fia-
dor. Los vencidos que se
someten no son para noso-
trossino amigos desdicha-
dos

Entregdos con seguridad i
vuestras ocupaciones or-
dinarias ; os prometemos
seguridad, atenciones, so-
si^o, proteccion y ayuda,
si necesitareis de ella

Si mi gente os diere algun
motive de que) a, recorred
i ml con confianza, yo no

Will you had me there ^ IwiU
pay you handsomely ; I
tnU give you

Go before, I will follow you

Do not walk so fast
Lead me the shortest way

This street is obstructed, let

us take another way
Call for a hackney*coach

Coachman, will you drive me 9
I live in the street of — •

Dial. XXXI. A military
man victorious, quartering
in a house of the conquer-
ed, and speaking to the
masters of the house.

DonH fear, we are English-
men, Germans, Russians,
Frenchmen, ^c. Our no*
Honal character may aS'
sure you of our generosity,
and the obedience we owe
to our sovereign is a dow-
ble pledge. A subdued
enemy is considered by us
only as an unfortunate
friend

Give yourselves up with seeu-
rity to your customary
business, we promise you
safety, mildness, tranquil"
Uty, protection and assist'
anccyif you should want any

If my people should give you
any cause of complaint,
eomeopenly tome,Iwittnot

380

rAMILlAft DIALOGUES.

aufrire que se pase algo
que pueda daros disgusto

No tengais miedo, ud aoldado
valeroso no es teaiible sino
en el campo de batalla

Camaradas, comportemonos
como hombres de valor ;
respetemos la desdicha y
no ocasioneroos aqui ni al-
boroto ni desorden

suffer any thing to happen
that may be disagreeabie
to you

Be not afraidy a brave gol'
dier is dreadful only on
the field of haUk

Comrades^ kt us behave our-
selves as brave men ; let us
respect the ' unhappy and
cause here neither trouble
nor disorder.

FA'BULAS.

N. B. In lofoking for words in the Dictionary, the student
should bear in mind the observations made in pages 17, 18,
19 and 20, in regard to pronunciation and orthography.

Remember that the Spanish Academy considers ch^ II and n
as distinct characters from c, I and it, and in its Dictionary
you must loolt through all the words beginning with these
simple characters, before you find those commencing with the
aforesaid compound.

F4bula Primera,
Lob AnimaUa en consejo juntos para elegir un Rey,

Habiendo muerto el leon, todas las aves y bestias se con-
^egaron 4 su cueva para condolerse con la reina viuda, que
hacia resonar sus lamentos y gritos en los montes y bosques.

Despues de los acostumbrados cumplimientos, procedieron
todos 4 la eleccion de un rey, la corona del difunto monarca
fue colocada en medio de la asamblea.

Su aparente heredero eia demasiado joven y endeble para
obtener la dignidad real, 4 la que tantos animales mas fuertes
que el pusieron su demanda.

Degenme crecer uh poco, dijo su alteza, y entonces esperi-
mentareis que puedo Uenar el trono, y con el tiempo, hacer
felices 4 mis subditos. Entretanto estudiare las acciones
heroicas de mi padre, con la esperanza de que algun dia, po-
dre serle igual en gloria.

For mi parte, dijo el leopardo, insisto en mi derecho d la
corona, por la mayor semejanza que tengo al ultimo rey
entre todos los candidates.

Yo, por otro lado, grito el oso,'sostendre que se me hizo
injusticia, cuando su magestad anterior se me prefirio : soy
tan fuerte, intrepido, y sangriento, como era ; y ademis, soy
maestro de un arte que el jamas pudo adquirir, cual es, el
trepar por los drboles.

To apelo, dijo el elefante, al juicio de esta augusta asam-
blea^ 81 alguno de los presentes puede coii atgun colorido jac-

382 VABLE8.

tane de ser tan alto, de tan noble presencia, tan robnsto, '6
tan circunspecto comoyo.

Yo soy la mas noble^ y la mas heniiosa criatara entre todas
vosotros, dijo el caballo.

£' yo soy la mas polUica, dijo la zorra.

E^ yo soy el mas veloz eu correr, dijo el corzo.

En donde encontrareis, dijo el mico, un rey mas agradable,
mas ingenioso, y mas divertido que yo ? Yo diveitiria con-
tiouamente ^ mis vasallos, y soy>adem4s el mas semejante al
bombre, que es el Senor del Universo.

£1 papagayo Interrumpiendole, hizo su arenga : supuesto
que vm. se alaba de su semejanza al hombre, me parece que
puedo yo alabarme con mucha mas justicia. Toda la seme-
janza de vm consiste en su hocico feo y algunos gestos ridl-
culos ; peroyo puedo hablar como un hombre, e imitar su len-
guage, serial indicativa de su razon, y su mayor adorno.

Guardad vuestra maldita garuUa, replico la mona : faablais,
es ciertOy pero no como hombre ; repetfs siempre una misooa
cosa sin entender una sola palabra de lo que decfs.

^ Toda la asamblea se rio de estos dos rivales imitadores del
genero humano, y confirieron la corona al elefante, porque
era fuerte y sabio ; y no solo era exento del b^rbaro natural
de las bcstias de rapina, sino tambien de la vanidad y amor
propio de que muchos est4n tocados, siempre paredendoles
6 fingiendo ser lo que, en la realidad, no son.

F&bula Segunda.
EI Dragon y las Dos Zorras.

Un dragon guardaba con ansia un tesoro inmenso en una
cueva profunda ; nunca doimia de dia ni de noche, para
asegurarlo.

Dos zorras aduladoras, artificiosas, y picdras de profesion,
se iotrodugeron en su gracia con sus lisonjas fastidiosas.
Ambas era a sus Intimas aroigas.

Los que son mas corteses y oficiosos no son siempre los
mas sinceros. Le rindieron sus obsequios con la mayor su-
mision ; admiraron sus fantasias ociosas ; convinieron con el
en sus ideas, y se burlaron de su credula tonteria.

Finalmente, quedose un dia dormido entre sus confidentes:
le ahogarou; y tomaron poseslon de su tesoro.

rABLES. 383

Era preciso repartir el pillage ; un puoto muy delicado, y
no era ficil de ajustarse, porque dos villanos no convienen
sino en la egecucion de sus delitos.

Una de ellas einpezo 4 exhortar en estos terminos : de que
nos servird todo este dinero ? Un gazapo nos seria un botin,
6 presa mas agradable : no podemos hacer una comida de
estos doblones, son muy indigestos. Los hombres son muy
locos, en dejarse arrebatar de riquezas tan imaginarias. No
seamos nosotras criaturas tan insensatas, como ellos lo son.

La otra pretendio que estas reflexiones la habian hecho
una impresion fuerte^ y la aseguro que en lo venidero estaria
contenta de continuar una vida filosofica^ y como Bias Uevar
su tesoro todo consigo.

Al parecer, ambas estaban dispuestas d abandonar su tesoro
mal adquirido : pero ambas se quedaron 4 la mira, hasta que
se despedazaron.

Al espirar la una dijo d la otra, que estabatan mortalmente
herida como ella: que querlas hacer con todo aquel oro ?
Lo mismo que tu te proponias hacer con el, replico la otra.

Siendo informado un viajador de su pendencia, las dijo,
que eran tontas. Asi lo es el mayor niimero del genero nu-
mano, replico una de las zorras. Tampoco §, vosotros puede
servir de comida, y con todo, os asesinais unos i otros por el
dinero.

Nosotras, las zorras, hemos sido bastante sabias, d lo menos
basta aqui, para mirar al dinero como una cosa inutil Lo
que habeis introducido entre vosotros como una conveniencia,
es vuestra desgracia. Dejais un bien sustancial, solamente
por seguir un bien fant4stico.

F4bula Tercera.
Las Dob Zorras.

Una noche entraron dos zorras furtivamente en un galli-
Bero : mataron el gallo, las gallinas, y los polios: despues de
esta matanza, empezaron i devorar su presa.

Una que era joven y sin reflexion, propuso comerlos todos
de una vez ; la otra vieja y codiciosa queria ahorrar para
otro dia.

Hija, dijo la vieja, la esperiencia me hizo sabia ; en mi
tiempo he visto muchu mundo. No consumamos 4 la vez

384 FABLVB.

prodigamente lodo nuestro caudal : tovimos biien saceso, j
debemos cuidar de no mal gastarlo.

Replico la joven, estoy reaiielta 4 reoearme mientras Jo
tengo por delante, y saciar mi «q[)etito por toda una aeoiana ;
por lo que toca 4 venir aqui raanaua, es cuento : eso es eqpo-
nernoa : manana vendri aqui el amo, y por vengar la mu^te
de SU8 polios, no6 dori con una tranca en la cal^xa.

Despuesde esta replica, cada unade ellas obra como le
parece maaproiMo.

La joven come basta que revienta, sin poder apenas anas-
trano 4 su cueva antes de moiir. La vieja que le parecao
mucbo mas prudente gobernar su apetito, y ser fjngjdXy fue el
dia siguiente al gallinero, y la mato el labrador.

Asi cada edad tiene su vicio favorite : los jovenes son fb-
gosos 6 insaciables en sus placeres ; y los viejos incorr^[i'
bles en su avaricia.

F4bula Cuarta.
El Loho y el Cordero,

Habia un rebano de ovejas^ que paclan s^tas de todo
mal en un cercado ; todos los perros dormlan, y sus amos
tocaban la gaita rural con sus companeros bajo de un 41amo
frondoso.

Un lobo bambriento vino al redil 4 registrarlos por las
rendijas.

Un cordero inesperto, y que nunca habla estado fuera,
entro en conversacion con el.

Y le dijo, que es lo que tu quieres aqui, lobo ?

Un poco de esta yerba fresca, le respondio el lobo. Bien
sabes que no bay cosa mas agradable, que matar la hambre en
un prado verde esmaltado con flores, y apagar la sed en una
fuente transparente. Aqui encuentro copia de uno y otro,
que puede uno desear mas ? por mi parte, yo amo la filosof Sa
que nos ensena 4 contentarnos con poco.

£s verdad pues, replico el cordero, que tu te abstienes de
la carne de las bestias, y que un poco de yerba te sadsface ?
Si es asi, vivamos como hermanos y pastemos juntos.

£1 cordero, luego, salto del redil al prado en donde el
grave filosofo le despedazo, y de una vez le devoro.

Desconflate siempre de las lenguas lisongeras de los que
se jactan de su propia virtud. Forma tu juicio segun sus
acciones; y no segun sus palabras.

EPFTOME DE LA HISTORIA DE ESPANA.

fSaeado de ku CarUu Maamuctu de Don Joss' Caoalso, Carta TIL)

^ La peoiosula, Uamada Espana, solo est4 contigua al con-
tinente de Europa por el lado de Francia de la que la separan
los montes Pirin^os. Es abundante en oro, plata, azogue,
bierro, piedras, dguas minerales, ganados de escelentes cali-
dades, y pesois tan abundantes como deliciosas. Esta feliK
situacionla hizo objeto de la codicia de los fenicios y otros
pueblos. Los cartagineses, parte por dolo, y parte por fuer-
2sa, se estableci^ron en ella ; y los romanos quisieron com-
pletar su poder y gloria con la conqubta de Espana; pero
encontr^ron una resistencia, que parecio tan estrana como
terrible 4 los soberbios dueiios de lo restante del mundo.
Numancia, una sola ciudad, les costo catorce anos de sitio, la
perdida de tres ejercitos, y el desdoro de los mas famosos
Generates, hasta que reducidos los nuraantinps i, la precision
^e capitular 6 morir, por la total ruina de la patria, corto nii-
mero de vivos, y abundancia de cad^veres en las calles (sin
contar los que hablan servido de pasto 4 sus conciudadanos
despues de conduidos todos sus viveres) incendiiron sus ca-
sas, arroj^ron sus mugeres, nines y ancianos en las llamas, y
salieron 4 morir en el campo raso con las annas en la mano.
£1 grande Escipion fue testigo de la ruina de Numancia, pues
ao puede llamarse propiamente conquistador de laciudad:
liendo de notar que Luculo, encargado de levantar un ej^r-
cito para aquella espedicion, no baBo en la juventud romana
reclutas que llevar, basta que el mismo Escipion se alisto para
animarla. Si los romanos conocieron el valor de los egpanoles
como enemigos, tambien esperiment^ron su virtud como
aliados. Sagunto sufrio por ellos un sitio igual al de Numan-
cia contra Iqs cartagineses ; y desde entonces formiron los
romanos de los espanoles el alto concepto que se ve en sus
aut<iresy oradores, historiadores, y poetas. Pero la fortuna
de Roma, superior al valor humane, la hizo seiiora de Es-
pana, como de lo restante del mundo, raenos algunos mon-
ies de Caatabria, cuya total conquista no consta de la bis-
93

386 epItomk.

toria, de modo que no pueda dudarse. Largas revoluciones
io<JtlIf>s de coDtarse en este parage trajeron del norte enjam-
bres de naciones feroces, codiciosas y guerreras, que se es-
tablecieron en Cspana : pero con las delicias de este clima
tan diferente del que habian dejado, cayeron en tal grado de
afeminacion y flojedad^ que 4 su tiempo fueron esdavos de
otros conquistadores venidos del medio dia. Huyeron los
godos espanoles hasta los montes de una provincia, hoy Ua-
mada Atturias : y apenas tuvieron tiempo de desechar el sus-
tOy Uorar la perdida de sus casas y ruina de su reino, cuaitdo
salieron mandados por Pelayo, uno de los mayores hombres
que la naturaleza ha producido.

Desde aqui se abre un teatro de guerras que duriron cerca
de ocho siglos. Varios reinos se levanUiron sobre la ruina
de la Monarquia Goda Espanola, destruyendo el que querian
edificar los moros en el mismo terreno, regado con mas san-
gre espanola, romana, cartaginesa, goda y mora de cuanto se
puede ponderer con horror de la pluma que lo escrihaf y de
los ojos que lo vean escrito. Pero la poblacion de esta pe-
ninsula ere tal, que despues de tan largas guerras y tan sangri-
entas, aun se contaban veinte millones de habitantes en ella«
Incorpordronse tantas provincias, y tan diferentes, en dbs
coronas, la de Castilla y la de Aragon ; y arobas en el ma-
trimonio de Don Fernando y Dona Isabel, Principes que serin
inmortales entre cuantos sepan lo que es gobiemo. La re-
forma de abusos, aumento de ciencias, humillacion de los
soberbios, amparo de la agriculture y otras opereciones seme-
jantes formiron esta Monarquia : ayudoles la naturaleza con
un nCmero increible de vasallos insignes en letras y armas ; y
se pudieron haber lisongeado de dejar 4 sus sucesores un
imperio mayor y mas duradero, que 61 de Roma antigua
(contando las Americas nuevamentedescubiertas,) si hubieren
logrado dejar su corona 4 un heredero varon. Negoles el
delo este gozo 4 trueque de tantos como les habla concedido ;
y su cetro paso 4 la casa de Austria, la qual gasto los tesoros,
talentos y sangre de los Espanoles en cosas agenas de Espaiia
por las continuas guerras, que asi en Alemania, como en
Italia tuvo que sostener C4rlos I. de Espana ; hasta que
cansado de sus mismas prosperidades 6 tal vez conociendo con
prudencia las vicisitudf*8 de las cosas humanas, no quiso espo-
nerse 4 sus reveses, y dejo el trono 4 su hijo Don Felipe II.

Este Principe, acusado por la emulacioo, por ambicioso y
politico como su padre, pero menos afortunado, siguiehdo los

CHISTKS. 387

proyectos de Carlos, no pudo hallar los mismos sucesos aun
^ co3ta de ejercitos, de armadas y de caudales. Murio de-
jando ^ su pueblo estenuado con las guerras, afeminado con
el oro y plata de America, disminuido con la poblacion de an
mundo nuevo, disgustado con tantas desgracias, y deseoso de
descanso. Paso el cetro por las manos de tres Prlncipes
menos actives para manejar tan grande M onarquia, y en la
muerte de Cirlos 11. no era Espana sino el esqueleto de
un gigante/'

CHISTES.

Un hombre discrete preguntando d su hijo de donde venia,
pues era tan tarde, le respondio : Padre, yo vengo de ver
4 uno de mis amigos. De tus amigos, le respondio el padre
sorprehendido. Tii tienes pues tantos amigos ! Oh I como
has hecho siendo tan joven para alcanzar muchos ; pues que
yo en mas de sesenta anos no he podido encontrar uno.

£1 Caballero Tomas More, famoso Canceller de Ingla-
terra, puesto enprision por Enrique octavo, dejo crecer sus
cabellos y barba, y viniendo un barbero para cortarlos y afei-
tarlo ; amigo, le dijo : el Key e yo pleiteamos sobre mi
cabeza ; 6 yo no quiero hacer el menor gasto en este pleito,
sin saber intes quien de los dos ha de disponer de ella.

Luis doce, Rey de Francia, cuando era sino Duque de Or-
leans, habla padecido muchos pesares de dos personas que
habfan side favorites en el reinado precedente. Uno de sus
allegados procuraba inspirarle que les mostrase resentimiento.
No, respondio su Magestad, que indigno es dun Rey de Fran-
cia tomar parte en la venganza del Duque de Orleans.

Conrado tercero,Emperador, despues de haber tornado Mu-
nick, determine pasar los hombres 4 filode la espada, permiti-
endo solo d las mugeres salir de alH, pudiendo Uevar sobre el-
las sus muebles mas preciosos. Estas mugeres aprovechando
la ocasion tomiron sobre sus hombros 4 sus maridos, asegu-
rando eran sus mas preciosos muebles. Esto agrado tanto al
Emperador, que no solo perdono d los habitantes, sino tam-
bien d su Principe que habia destinado 4 la muerte.

388 CHISTBS.

La Reina Isabela obtervando la bdla gracia de on noUe
Espaiiol en un torneo, le pregunto uo dia que le digese ab-
soratameDte el nombre de su Dama. £1 Cspanol lo resistio
algun tiempo. En fin cediendo 4 sa cariosidad, promedo 4
su Magestad cnviarle su retrato. El dia siguiente bizo pre-
sentar 4 su Magestad un paquedllo, donde la Reina no ba^
Uando sino un espejito^ quedo sonrojada al punto.

Los cortesanos del Rey FQipo le aconsejaban que se ven-
gase de un hombre que habfa nablado mal de el. Abates es
menester saber^ si yo no le he dado razon^ dijo Filipo: y
babiendose averiguado que el tal hombre jamas habia recibido
coaa alguna, le envio ricos presentes. Supo el Rey poco
despues que el mismo lo llenaba de alabanzas. Mirad pues,
dijo 4 los cortesanos, que yo se mejor que vosotros apaci-
guar una lengua mala.

Continuando las disputas entre Francbco primero, Rey de
Francia, y Enrique octavo, Rey de Inglaterra; resolvio
este de enviar al primero un Embajador pprtador de pala-
bras fieras y amenazas, para lo cual mzo elecion del Obispo
Bonner en que tenia gran eonfianza. Este Obispo le dijo
que ponia su vida en gran peligro, si daba talos recados 4 un
Rey tan altivo como j^rancisco primero. No temas, le dijo
el Rey, que si el Rey de Francia hiciese tal, yo harla caer
mucbas cabezas de Franceses que est4n aqui. Pase por eilo,
senor ; pero cual de esas cabezas me vendrla tan bien sobre
los hombros como esta, poniendo el dedo 4 su sien.

Cuando el Mariscal de la Ferte hizo su entrada en Metz,
los judlos que alii eran tolerados se presentaron al cumplimi-
ento con todo habitante ; y anuuciandolos en la antic4mara ;
no quiero verlos, dijo : porque ellos hicieron niorir 4 nuestro
Senor. Que no entren de ningun modo. Dijeronles pues
que no podian ver 4 su Escelencia. A que replicaron sent!-
dos, pues tralan un presente de cuatro mil doblones. Lo que
dicho inmediatamente 4 su Rscelencia; oh bien! diles que
entren ; que estos pobres diablos seguramente no lo conocian
Guando lo crucific4ron.

COHftESPONDENCIA MERCANTIL.
COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE.

Cartas de Comercio, y Mode-
los de una Faeturay un Co^
noeimietitOy una Cuenta^
Letras de Cambioy Carta
FromUotia y Carta de
Cridito.

Propuesta para una CorreS'
pondencia.

Mijicoj 1 de Enero de 1825.

Muy Senor mioy como esta
es la primera vez que teogo el
faoQor de dirijinDe 4 vm., es-
pero que me perdonard la li-
bertad que me he tomado.

£1 ventajoao car^cter que
mi buen amigo el Senor Don
N. me ha dado de su persona
y casa de vm., me anima 4
pensar en una corresponden-
cia mercantil que pueda ser
ventajosa 4 vm. como 4 mi.

Pero ante todas cosas, ne-
cesito me franquee vm. el fa-
vor de darme una relacion de
los pesos y medidas que co-
munmente se usan en Ingla-
terra^porquecreoque se mfe-
rencian mucho de los de este
pals.

Yo estimare esta relacion
como un favor particular, y
vm. puede confiar en mi sin-
ceridad y prontitud que le
servire en cuanto dependa de
mis facultades.
33*

Commercial Letters, and
Models of an Invoice,
Bill of Lading, an Ac-
count, Bills of Exchange,
Promissory Note and Let-
ter of Credit.

A Proposal for a Corres-
pondence.

Mexico^ January, 1, 1825.
Sir^

As this is the first time
I have the honour of ad-
dressing youj you willy I
hope, excuse the liberty I
have now taken.

2%e honourable character
my worthy friend Mr, N. has
given me of your person and
house J encourages me to think
of a commercial correspon-
dence which may be to our
mutual advantage.

But before thisy I must beg
the favour to give me an ac-
count of the weights and
measures which are com^
monly used in England^ as I
believe they differ materia
ally from those in this coun-
try.

I shall esteem this as a par-
ticular obligation, and you
^"Miy rely upon my sincerity
and readiness to serve you
in whatever lies in my power.

390

COMMfi&ClAli CORRESFONDZNCf*

Esperando que vm. me faon-

re con su favorable respuesia,

quedo rogando 4 Dios me

guarde su vida muchos aKos.

B. L. M. de vm.

In the expectation of^ur
honouring me with afavom^
abk anstoer^ I remain^

Your obedient and
humble servant.

S»'. Don .

Boston, Febreroy 1825.

Muy Senor mio; me es
muy apreciable el favor que
he recibido de vm. en la del
1^ del ult^, en la que me
manifiesta los de86o8 que tiene
de entablar conmigo una cor-
respondencia mercantile yo
me tendre por dichoso si pue-
do corresponder & las es^-
ranzas de vm., y & la id^a li-
songera que se ha servido
tomar de mi casa y familia.
Vm. no ignora, que noso*
tros los comerciantes debemos
vivir de nuestra profesion, y
promover nuestros intereses
en cuanto sea compatible con
el honor y la equidad.

Yo admito la proposicion
de vm., y en prueba de mi
reconoctmiento, reraitire 4
vm., por el primer buque que
saiga de este puerto para ese,
varias partidas fabricadas en
este pals, y al precio mas bajo
que se pueden dar ; la nomi-
na de ellas, juntamente con
los precios, ir4n insertas en
las facturas.

Espero serdn del gusto de
vm.,y que servirdnde motivo
para nuestro mayor conoci-
miento y trato ; y este vm.

Mr. .

Boston, February, 1825.

iSfiV,
I am most agreeably fa-
voured by yours ofthe^rst
uU**, wherein you show a de^
sire to commence a commer-
cial correspondence with me;
I shall think myself happy
if I can answer your expec-
tations, and the jUttiertng
idea you hattebeen pleased to
form of my house (mdfamify.

You weU know, that we
merchants must Uve by our
profession, and promote our
interest as far as is coiuta-
tent with Jumour and equity.

I accept your proposal, and
as a proof of my ociaov^
edgment, I wiU s&itd you, by
the first vessel that sails from
this port to your place, sun'
dry parcels manufactured
here, and at the hwesi prise
that can be afforded; the
particulars thereof , together
with the prices, will be insert-
ed in the invoices.

I hope tltey will prove to
. your satisfactifm, and be the
foundation of our farther
acguaintance and dealing ;

CORBESPONDENCIA MBKCANTIL.

£91

seguro de que cualquiera cosa
que confie i mi cuidado, ser4
ejecutada y manejada con el
mayor candor y fidelidad: y
si estas raercaderias como las
qiiepuede vm. necesHar en
adelante^ al tiempo de enfar-
delarlas 6 de cuaiquier otro
modoy siifriesen alguna ave-
rla,sehari la correspondiente
rebaja, dindome vm. e! aviso.
Incluyo 4 vm. muestras de
otras producciones que pue-
den tener despacho en ese
laereado : y en este caso^ po-
dre proveerle de todo cuanto
jfiecesite.

Si vm. puede hacerme re-
tomos cemodos con sus vinos
esquisitos, aguardiente, y fru-
to» ; €OBM> tambien dos zur-
rones de cochinilla, y 20
quintales debarrilla, se le dari
i vm. su comision ; el corre-
taje, almacenasgo y todos los
demas gastos de puerto se'
pagardn 4 parte.

En consecuencia de las 6r-
denes de vm., le envlo un es-
tado de las pesas y medidas
de Inglaterra ; y ademis la
diferencia de las monedas de
Espaiia y las nuestras. To-
cante 4 la subida, y baja de
los cambtos y fondos, se infor-
mar4 vm. por nuestros papeles
pyblicos.

Quedo rogando 4 Dios
me guarde su vida mu-
chosanos. B.L.M.de
vm. Su atento amigo.

and assure yourself that what-
ever you trust to my charge j
shall be performed and manr
aged with the greatest can-
dour and fidelity imaginor
hie ; and if these goc^ or
those you may want hereaf-
ter, should suffer any aver-
age in the packing or other*
wise, proper allowance wiU
he made, upon notice.

I herewith send you a sam-
ple of other staple cotnmodi'
ties which may answer your
market; in that case, you
may be furnished with every
article you want.

If you can conveniently
make returns in some of your
exquisite winesy brandy, and
fruits; as also two zeroons
of cochineal, and of kelp*
20 quintals, you smU have
your commission ; broker^
age, storage and aU oth-
er pori-charges will be paid
apart.

Pursuant to your orders, I
send you a statement of the
weights and measures used
in England; as also the dif
fermce of the value of coins
between Spain and ours. Of
the rise and faU of exchange
and stocks, you may be in-
formed by our public pa-
pers.

I remain your obedient
humble servant, and
respectful friend.

* Kelp le Uama tamMen bariUaw Io|^lci.

392

COaUIBftClAt. ftOGUllBMT^

FACTURA.

Factum de las Mercaderfas embarcadas por el S*''. Don
Agustin S. para los Senores CriHSval B. I k^o8 de Cadiz, 4
b«rdo del Navio nombrado el Cimej su Cafutan Martin D^
destinado para dicbo Cadiz, por orden y cuenta de los
dicbos Senores, siendo numersuias y marcadas como ague,

j4 saber :
No. 1 4 2. p 2 Zurrones de Cochinilla ...
1 4 75. > 75 Quintales de Azafran - - -
C. B.E. }dl5Cajasde Aziicar ....

Suma, $
Derecbos y Gastos - . -
Comision 4 5 por ciento -

Suma total, $

Boston y Abril 9, de 1825.

Salvo Yerro y Omision.

R.D.T.

Un Conocimiento.

LondreSf FebrerOy 1825.

Yo vecino de

Maestro que soy del buen
Navio (que Dies salve) nom-
brado N. N., que al presente
cst4 surto y anclado en el rio
T4mesi8, puerto de Londres,
para con la buena ventura
seguir este presente viage al

Suerto de Cadiz ; conozco
aber recibido, y tengo car-
gado dentro del dicho mi Na-
vio debajo de cubierta, de vos
N. N., seis fardos de baqueta
de M oscovia, siete dicbos de
pano Ingles, echo de estofas^

A Bill of Lading.

London, February, 1825.
Shipped bv the Grace of
God in gooH order and todl
conditioned^ by Mr, (or Mes"
srs) N. N. in and upon the
good ship coiled N. 2V., where-
of is master under God, for
this present voyage, -^—
now riding at anchor in the
river Thames at London, and
by GocPs aid bound for Co-
diz: to wit} six bales of
Russia leather, seven ditto of
English sloths, eight ditto of
stujfs, nine ditto of bays, ten
ditto of says and serges, five

OOCUMENTOS MEKCANTILfiS.

INVOICE.

393

Invoice of Merchandixe shipped by Mr. Auoustin S. for
Messrs. Cheistopber B. & Sons of Cadizj on board the
Ship named Swan, her Master Martin D., bound to said
Cadiz f per order and account of the said Gentkmeny being
numbered and marked as follows j

TO WIT :

2 Zeroons of Cochineal - . -
75 Quintals of Saffron - - -
315 Boxes of Sugar - - - -

Jmounif $
Duties and Charges - -
Commission at 5 per Cent.

No- 1 a 2.

la 75.

C. B. E.

Totals $

Errors and Omissions excepted.
Boston^ 9th April^ 1825. R. D. T.

nueve de bayetas, diez de
anascotes y sargas, quinientas
piezas de lienzo superfino de
la fibrica de Irlanda, setenta
dichasde batistas, cincuenta
tablas de manteles adamasca-
dos y cincuenta docenas de
servilletas, un cajon de hoja
de lata, dos de laton 6 azofar,
tres de acero, cuatroquintales
de cobre, seis cajas de relojes
de &ltFiquera y dijes, seis
cajones de quinquilleria 6 bu-
honerla, nete dehenrainieDtas
de corte, todo enjuto y bien
acondicionadO| numerados y
marcados con la marca al
m^rgen. Cod lo cual prome-

hundred pieces of superfine
Irish Hneny seventy ditto of
cambric^ fifty diaper table
clothsy and fifty dozen of
napkins^ one chest of tin^ tu>o
ditto of latten or brass, three
ditto Of steel, four quintals of
copper, six boxes of watches
and trinkets, six chests of
hardware, seven ditto of edge
tools, all in good order and
condition, marked and num-
bered as in the margin ; and
are to be delivered in the Hke
good order and condition (the
dangers of the seas only ex-
cepted) in the aforesaid port
unto Mr. N. N. or Messrs.

394

COMMXRCIAL DOCUMENTS.

to, y me obligo, Ilevindome
Dies en bueo sidvamento con
el dicbo mi Navio al espresa-
do pueito, de acudir y entre-
gar, por vos y en vuestro
nombreydiclioa g6nercw igual-
mente enjutos, y bien acon-
dicionados (salvo los peligros
del mar) & Don N. N. 6 4 los

Seaoreft 6 i quien alii

por el fuere parte : pag4n-
dome de flete 4 razon de
cuarenta sbelines esterlines
porcada tondada, con diez
por ciento de capa y averf a.
Y en fe de que asi me oblige
4 cumplir, os doy tres conoci-
roientos de un tenor, firmados
de mi nombre, por ml 6 mi
escribano; el uno cumplido,
los otros no valgan. Fecha
en Londres 4 primero de
Febrero de 1825.

y or his or (their) atr

signs; he or (they) paying
freight at the rate of forty
shillings per ton^ with the usu-
al primage and average. In
mtness whereof y the said
Commander or his clerk has
signed three bills of lading,
all of this tenor and date ;
one of which being fulfilled,
the other two to stand void*
Dated in London, the 1st day
of February, 1S25.

Cadiz, Marzo, 1825.
Muy Senor mio. He reci-
bido la estimada de vm. del
primero de Febrero con el
conocimiento de diversas mer-
caderias embarcadas abordo
del Navio llamado el ,

lodo lo cual ha sido debida^
mente recibido en buena or-
den y condicion : los g^neros
son todos de mi satis&ccion,
y espero que tendr4n pronto
despacho. Inclusa va una
letra de cambio contra los
Seiiores , de esa ciu*

dad, que monta — ^ 4 uso*

y medio, que vm. se servir4

', ae esa ciu* , of yi

4 uso* amount of •

n. se servir4 and a half m

Cadis, Marcby 1825.

Sir,

The favour of yours of the

1st February came safe to

hand with the biU of lading

of sundries shipped on board

the ship caUed the ?-,

aU of which are duly re-*
deved in good order and
condition: Ihavefotmd the
goods to my mind, and I
hope will suit our market.
You will receive herewith a
Bill of Exchange on Messrs.
of your city, to the

amount of , at one

and a half usance, which be

The uto is two months in Sp«ln.

DOCUMENTOS MEKCANTILBS. 395

cargar 4 mi cuenta ; el saldo pleased to place to my cred-

que aun resta se remitir^ sin it ; the balance which rc-

dilacion ^ su ttempo. mairts due shall he punctually

Quedo rogando 4 Dios remitted in its time.

guarde 4 vm. muchos anos. / have the honour to be

B. L. M. de vm. Respectfully,

Su mayor servidor. Your humble servant.

A' D . To Mr.

Del Comercio de Londres. Merchant in London.

Cadiz, dlosS^.N. F.

Paris d24de Marzo de 1825.

Muy S^. mio8 : confirmo 4 vms. mi ult^ de 8 del pas^<>. ;
despues recibo las muy favorecidas de vms. 29 del mbmo 2
y 4 del cor^. en que me incluyen una letra de • . . . francos
4 cargo del S"". N. del la q«. les he dado credito. Tengo
aun en mi po^er la letra de cambio del S^'. B. de q*. procu-
rare el page. No habiendole hallado en su casa, le he
hecho avisar p^. q*. me haga el pago de ella i su termino.
Por lo q«. mira 4 la otra remesa de vms. contra los S^^". A y
comp., no la ban aceptado aun, suplic^ndome que aguarde
hasta el Idnes que es el dia de correo de Espana : asi lo he
hecho ; veremos el resultado, y en caso q^. no la paguen, se
la devolvere 4 vms. con la protesta al correo prox*.

Las cambiales 4 largos dias pierden aqui un 5. p. 100 al
anoy y aun medio p. 100 al mes ; y asi lo ha entendido el S^^
A. en la negociacion de la letra que vms. ban librado con-
tra el ; si estuviera en mi mano, podria obtener un lucre de
ella en el pag^. de enero con medio p. 100 de beneficio, de-
ducido la rebaja. Doy 4 vms. gracias por la orden que se ban
«ervido dar 4 su casa de Paris, p^. q*. pague por mi ... 4 los
S^^. P., les he abonado de conformidad en su cuenta. Remito
4 vms. aqui adjuntas 3 letras de cambio 4 60 dias de vista.
Una 4 cargo del S'^r. Don £. por, fr. 3,000
Otras dos sobre los S***. H. y comp.

de 1000 cada una, 2,000

Perdida 4 1 p. 100,

Slrvanse vms. hacerlas aceptar y abonarme de 4,950 por
su importe, deducida la perdida. Interin quedo rogando 4
Pios guarde 4 vuestras Mercedes muchos anos como desea,

Su mayor servidor. X.

0$

1^-

I

00

■s

Oi

I

§

O

DOCUMENTeS^ MERCANTILSS.

397

Letra de Cambio.
La Primera.

Londresy 1825.

For ^400 esterlinas.

A^ dos usos (6 a uso y ma-

dto, 6 d ocho dias vista) se

servir4 vm. mandar pagar por

esta mi primera de cambio * 4

Don , 6 4 su orden, cua-

tro cientas libras esterlinas,
valor recibido de D. N. N.,
que sentar^ vm. como por
aviso. M. N.

A' Don. .

Coiperciante en Cadiz.

Primera.

Aviso de una Letra de Cam-
bio.

Londres 1 de Enero de 1825.

May Senor mio. Hoy mis-
mo he librado contra vm. una
letra de cambio, i uso y medio,

4 favor de Don , 6 4 su

orden, por la cantidad de cua-
trocientas libras esterlinas,
que me hari vm. la fineza de
honrar, y cargar k mi cuenta.

Quedo rogando k Dios me
guarde su vida mnchos anos.
B. L. M . de vm.

s. s. s.

A' Don ,

Del comercio de Cadiz.

La Segunda.

Londres. 1825.
Por ^400 esterlinas.
A^ dos usos se servird vm.
pagar por esta mi segunda
34

A Bill of Exchange.
The First.

London, 1825.

For c£400 sterling.

At double usance (or at

usance and a half, or at eight

days sight) pay this my first

bill of exchange to Mr, ^

or order y the sum offourhun"
dred pounds sterling, value
received of Mr, N. N. and
place it to account as per
advice. M. N.

To Mr. .

Merchant in Cadiz.

Prima.

Advice of a Bill of Ex-
change.

London January 1, 1825.

I have this day drawn on
you a bill of exchange, at
one and a half usance, in

favour of Mr. , or

his order, for four hundrecf
pounds sterling, which I beg
you to honour, and place
to my account.

I have the honour to be,
Sir, respectfully,
your obedient servant.

To Mr. ,

Merchant in Cadiz,

The Second.

Londpn, 1825.
For ^400 sterling.
At double usance pay this
my second bill of Exchange

398

GOMMBSCIAL DOCUICSNTS.

de cambio (no habiendolo
hecho por la priinera) & Don
N. N. o ^ 8u orden cuatro ci-
entas llbras esterlinas. Sue
£1 CndoBo.
P^ese 4 DoD N. N. 6
K su ordeiiy valor en
cuenta con^ (6 valor
recibidode) dicbo.

Carta Prxnmwria.

lAmdreSy 1 de Eneroj 1 825.

A^ uso y medio contado
desde la presente dati^ pro-

meto pagar 4 Don , 6 4

su orden, la cantidad de
— — , por valqr recibido
en dinero contado, 6 en g6-
neros 4 mi satisfaccion.

A.B.
£

(first not paid) to Mr,
IV. N, or order y the sum cf
four hundred pounds ster-
Ung, ^c.

The Endorsement.
Patf to Mr. N.N.orhis
orckr, value in ac-
count withy (or value
receivedjromj the said.

Prommissory Note.

London, January 1, 1825.

j4t one and a half usance
after datSj I promise to pay

to Mr. , or his orderj

the sum of , for val-

ue received in ready money f
or in goods to my saiisf ac-
tion.

A.B.

£

Carta de Cridito.

LondreSy 1 de Enero de 1825.
\ Muy Senor mio. Vmd.
recibir4 esta de la mano del

Senor Don , (que pasa 4

viajar por diversas partes de
£uropa) y me nar4 la fineza
de proveerle de cartas de re-
comendacion para las princi-
pales ciudades de Gspana ; su
objeto es salir de aqui inmedi-
atamente para esa. Creo
que tendr4 vmd. mucho gusto
en tratarle por ser un caba-
llero igualmente distinguido
pof su merito personal y por
au nacimiento ; por lo que, es-
pero que vm. le franquee la

Letter of Credit.

London, January 1, 1825.
Siry

You wiU receive this by the

hands of Mr. ^ (who is

upon his travels into divers
parts of Europe) and I beg
you will provide him with
recommendatory letters to the
principal cities in Spmn : his
design is to set out from
hence for your city immedi'
ately. I think you mil be
pleased with his acquaint-
anccy (MS he is a gentleman
equally distinguished for his
personal merit and birth; be
so kind, thereforcy to give

DOCEMENTOS MBRCA)YTILE8.

399

mas generosa recepcion^ y du-
rante su estada en esa ciudad
le sirva con todo el acatami-
ento que este en su poder.
Al mismo tiempo me har4
vm. el favor de franque-
arle sobre doble recibo el
dinero que necesite hasta

la suma de que podr4

vm- reembolsar cargandolo 4
mi cuenta, enviindome uno
de sus recibos. Espero
que VM. me desempenarl
como amigo en este asunto ;
y mientras,

Quedo rogando 4 Diosme
guarde su vida muchos anos.
B. L. M. de vm.

s. s. s.

Af Don ,

Banquero de Cadiz.

him the heH reception, and
nerve him as effectually as in
your power during his abode
in your city. You will also
do me the favour to supply
him on his double receipt with
what money he may have OC"
casionfor, to the amount of

, for which you may

reimburse yourself by charge
ing it to my account, and
transmitting one of his re-
^^ifpis to me, I hope you will
attend to this my request as a
friend^ and in the mean time,
I have the honour to be.

Respectfully,
Your obedient servant.

To Mr. ,

Banker in Cadiz,

Confirmacion de la anterior
enviada por el Correo.

Londresy 1 de Enero, 1825.

Muy Senor mio. Con esta
data he escrito 4 vm. otra
que le entregar4 el Senor
— — , caballero Ingles, con
cuya casa tengo la mayor in-
timidad ; y deseando servirle
por su cuenta be tornado con
gusto esta ocasion que se me
ofrece: Por tanto con el ma-
yor empeno suplico 4 vmd. le
procure todas las diversiones
e informes, de forma que se
balle gustoso en esa ciudad.
Tambien se servir4 vm. de
franquearle todo el dinero que
pidere, basta la ^antidad de

Confirtnation of tbo preced-
ing sent by the Post.

London, January 1, 1825.

Sir,

I wrote to you this day a

letter which will be delivered

to you by Mr, , an En-

glish gentleman, with w1u)se

family I am very intimate:
and desirous of serving him
on his own account I have
embraced with pleasure this
opportunity which offers, I
therefore most earnestly re-
quest of you to procure him

. such diversions and informor
tion as may render his stay
in your city agreeable, Yoa
will also phase to supply him
with all the money he may

400

CHOICE LBTTEBS.

— tomiodole recibo doble
por lo que le entregue ; uno
de lo8 cuales me enviar4, y lo
cargar4 4 mi cuenta. laclu-
sa va 8u firma para que vm.
la i^oooKca, y la honre como
coresponde. Yo me Hsod j6o
de que vm. tendr4 mucho
gusto en lograr el coiiocimi-
ento de un bello joven cabal-
lero, que ha recibido la mejor
educacion.

Qncdo regando 4 Dios roe

guarde sii vida muchos anos.

B. L. M. de vm.

s. s. s.

So'.Don . Cadiz.

ask to the amount of ,

taking of him a double re-
ceipt for the same, one of
which you will send, to me,
and you will charge it to my
account. 1 hare enclosed herC"
in his signaturej that you
may know ity and conduct
yourself accordingly, I jUU-
ter myself you wiU be much
pleased in enjoying the ac-
quaintance of a sensible
young gentleman, who has
had an excellent education,
I have the honour to be.
Most respectfully y
Your obedient servant,
Mr. . Cadiz.

Cartas criticas de tm Moro vinjante en Espana.
For Don Jose' Cadalso.

CARTA 1.

De Gazel a Ben-Beley.

ACN DO me hallo capaz de obedecer 4 las nuevas iustan-
cias que me haces sobre que te remita las observaciones que
voy haciendo en la capital de esta vasta monarqufa. Sabes
tu cuantas cosas se necesitan para formar una verdadera idea
del pais en que se viaja ? Bien es verdad, que habiendo
hecho varios viages por Curopa, me hallo mas capaz, 6 por
mejor dectr, con menos obst^culos que otros Africanos ;
pero aun asi he hallado tanta diferencia entre los Europeos,
que no basta el conocimiento de uno de los palses de esta
parte del mundo, para juzgar de otros estados de la misraa.
Los Europeos no parecen vecinos, aunque la esterioridad
los haya uniformado en mesas, teatros, paseos, ejercito, y
lujo : no obstante las leyes, vicios, virtudes, y gobierno son
sumamente diversos, y por consiguiente las costumbres pro-
pias de cada nacion.

CA&TAS fiseooIDAS. 401

Aun dentro de la £spanola hay variedad increible en el
car^cter de sus provincias. Un Andaluz en nada se parece
^ un Vizcaino ; un Catalan es totalmente distinto de un
Gallego ; y lo mismo sucede entte un Valenciano y un Mon-
tanes. Esta peninsula, dividida tantos siglos en diferentes
reinos, ha tenido siempre variedad de trages, leyes, idiomas,
y monedas.

Acabo de leer la Historia de Espana, y me parece que de
la relacion se puede inferir,lo primero ; que esta peninsula no
ha gozado una paz que pueda Uamarse tal en cerca de dos
mil anoSj y que por consiguiente es maravilla, que aun ten-
gan yerbas los campos^ y aguas las fuentes. Lo segundo ;
qne habiendo sido la religion motive de tantas guerras cob-
tra los descendientes de Tariff no es mucho que sea objeto
de todas sus acciones. Lo tercero ; que la continuacion de
estar con las armas en la mano, les haya hecho mirar con
desprecio el comercio e industria raecinica. Lo cuarto ; que
de esto mismo nazca lo mucho que cada noble en Enpana se
eDvanece de su nobleza. Lo quinto ; que los muchos cau-
dales adquiridos rdpidamente en Indias, distraen 4 muchos
de cultivar las artes mec^nicas en la peninsula y de aumen-
tar su poblacion.

Las demas consecuencias morales de estos eventos politi-
cos las iris notando en las cartas que te escribire sobre estos
asuntos.

CARTA IL
Del mismo ai mismo*

£1 atraso de las ciencias en Es]>ana en este siglo quiea
puede dudar que procede de la falta de proteccion que ha-
llao sus profesores ? Hay cocheros en Madrid, que ganan
trescientos pesos duros ; pero no hay quien no sepa que se
ha de morir de hambre,^ como se entregue 4 las ciencias, e»*
ceptuadas las de pane hicrando^ que son las finicas que dan
de comer.

Los pocos que cultivan las otras, son como los aventare-
ros Viiluntarios de los ej^rcitos que no llevan paga y se ea-
ponen mas. Es un gusto oirlos hablar de matemiticas, fisica
modema, historia natural, derecho de gentes, antigiiedades,
y letras humanas, 4 veces con mas recato que si hicieran
34«

402 CHOICE LETT£ILS«

moneda falsa. Yiven eu la obscuridad y mueren como viv
vieron^ tenidos por sabius superficlales en el concepto de I09
que sabeo poner soteuta y siete silogismos seguidos sobre, si
los ctelos son fliiidos 6 solidos.

Hablando pocos dias ha con un sabio escolastico de los
mas condecorados en sa carrera, le oi esta cspresion con
motivo de haberse nonibrado d un sugeto escelente en mate-
miticasy «i en su pais »e apUcan mucho d esaa cosillasy C4tmo
matemdiicoMf lengnas orierUtdegf fisica^ derecho de genfes, y
oirat »emefante». Pero yo te aseguro^ Ben-Beley, que si
sefialasen premios para los profesores, premios de honor 6
de interesy 6 de ambos, que progresos no harian ! Si hubiese
siquiera quien los protegiese^ se esmerarian sin mas estlmulo
positivo ; pero no hay protectores.

Tan persuadido est4 mi amigo Nuno, de esta verdad^ que
hablando de esto, me dijo : en otros tiempos. alii cuando me
imaginaba, que era util y glorioso dejar faraa en el mundo^
tral^je una obra sobre varias partes de la literatura que ha-
bla cuUivado, aunque eon mas amor que buen suceso. Quise
que saliese bajo la sombra de algun poderoso, como es natu*
ral i todo autor principiante. Oi 4 un magnate decir^ que
tod OS los autores eran locos : 4 otro, que las dedicatorias
eran estafas : i otro, que renegaba de el que invento et papel ;
otro se burlaba de los hombres que se unaginaban saber at-
go : otro me insinuo, que la obra que le seria mas acepta^
serf a la Ictra de una tonadilla : otro me dijo, que me viera
con un criado suyo, para tratar de esta materia ; otro ni me
quiso hablar : otro ui me quiso responder ; otro ni me quiso
escuchar : y de resultas de todo esto tome la determinacion
de dedicar el fruto de mis desvelos al mozo que trafa el agua
4 casa.

CARTA III.

Del mismo al mismo,

' Cuando hice el primer viage por Europa, te di noticia de
un pals que llaman Francia, y est4 mas alii de los montes
Pirineos. Desde luglaterra me fue muy facil y corto el
trinsito. Registre sus provincias septentrtonales ; llegue 4
su capital, pero no pude examinarla a mi gusto, por ser cor-
to el tiempo que podia gastar entonces en elJo, y ser mucho
el que so necesita para ejecutarlo con provecho.

CARTAS ESCOGIDAS. 405

\

Ahora he visto la parte meridional de ella^ saliendo de
Espaaa por Cataluiia, y entrando por Guipuzcoa, internin-
dome hasta Leon por un lado, y Burdeos por otro.

Los Franceses estin tan roal queridos en este siglo, como
los Cspanoles lo eran en el anterior ; sin duda, porquo uno y
otrQ siglo han sido precedidos de las eras gloriosas respecti-
vas de cada nacion, que fue la de Cirlos V para Espaiia, y
la de Luis XIV para Francia. Este iiltimo es mas recienle;
con que tambien es mas fuerte su efecto ; pero bien examina-
da la causa, creo hallar mucha preocupacion de parte de to-
das los Europeos contra las Frauceses. Conozco, que el
desenfreno de su juventud ; la mala conducta de algunos que
viajan fuera de su pais, profesaodo un sumo desprecio de to-
do lo que no es Francia ; el lujo que ha corrompido la Euro-
pa ; y otros motives semej antes repugnan 4 todos sus veci-
nos mas sobrios ; 4 saber, al Espanol religioso, al Italiano
politico, al Ingles sober bio, al Holandes avaro, y al Aleman
ispero ; pero la nacion entera no debe padecer la nota por
culpa de algunos individuos. En ambas vueltas, que he da-
do por Francia, he hallado en sus provincias (que siempre
mantienen las costumbres mas puras que la capital) un trato
hum^no, cortes y afable para los estrangeros, no producido
de la vantdad de que se les visite y admire, (como puede
9uceder en Paris), sino dimanado verdaderamente de un cora-
zon franco y sencillo, que halla gusto en procurdrselo al des-
conocido. Ni aun dentro de su capital, que algunos pintan
como el centro d^ todo desorden, confusion y lujo, faltan
hombres verdaderamente respetables. Todos l6s que Ilegan
d cierta edad, son sin duda los mas sociables del tFniverso ;
porque desvanecidas las tempestades de su juventud, les
queda el fondo de una Indole sincera, prolija educacion (que
en este pais es comun) y esterior agradable, sin la astucia del
Italiano, la soberbia del Ingles, la aspereza del Aleman, la
Bvaricia del Holandes,. y el despego del Espanol.

En llegando d lbs cuarenta anos, se transforma el Frances
en otro hombre distinto de lo que era d los veinte. El mili-
tar concurre al trato civil con suma urbanidad ; el magistra-
do con sencillez, y el particular con sosiego ; todos con ade-
manes de agasajar al estrangero que se halla medianamente
introducido por su Embajadof , calidad, talento u otro motivo.
Se ent ende todo esto entre la gente de forma ; que con la
inediana y coman el mismo becho de ser estrangero, es una

404 CHOICE LBTTSHS.

recomendacion superior 4 cuantas puede llevar el que
viaia.

La nusma desenvoltura de los jovenes, insufnble 4 quieo
no loi coDoce, tiene un do se que, que los hacc ainables.
Por eJla se descubre todo el faombre interior, incapaz de rem*
cores, astucias bajas, ni iuteDcion danada. Come procuro
indagar precbamente el car4cter de las cosas verdadero, j
DO graduarlas por las apariencias, casi siempre enganosas, no
me parece tan odioso aquel bullicto y descomfiostura, por lo
que Uevo dicho. Del mismo dict^men es mi amigo Nuno,
no obstante lo quejoso que estd de que los Franceses no sean
igualmente imparciales, cuando hablan de los Espanoles.

CARTA IV.

De BenrBeley d Gazel

Acabo de leer el Ultimo libro de los que me has enviado
en los varies viages que has becho por Europa ; con el cual
Uegan d algunos centenares las obras Europeas de dtstintas
naciooes y tiempos que he leido. Gazel ! Gazel ! sin^duda
tendras por grande lo que voy 4 decirte ; y si publicas este
mi dict4men, no habr4 Europeo que no me llame b4rbaro
Africano ; pero la amistad que te profeso, es muy grande,
para dejar de corresponder con mis observaciones 4 las tuyas;
mi sinceridad es tanta, que en nada puede mi lengua hacer
traicion 4 mi pecho. En este supuesto digo, que de los li-
bros que he referido, he hecho la siguiente separacion. He
escogido cuatro de matem4ticas, en los que admiro la esten-
sion y acierto que tiene el entendimiento humanp cuando va
bien dirigido : otros tantos de filosofia escol46tica, en que me
asombra la variedad de ocurrencias estraordinarias que tiene
el hombre, cuando no precede sobre principios ciertos y evi-
dentes : uno de medicina, al que falta un tratado complete de
los simples, cuyo conocimiento es diez mil veces mayor en
A^frica : otro de anatomla, cuya lectura fue sin duda la que
dio motivo al cuento del loco, que se iiguraba tan quebradizo
eomo el vidrio : dos de los que rcforman las costumbres, en
las que advierto lo mucho que aun tienen que reformar;
cuatro del conocimiento de la naturaleza, ciencia que Uaman
filosofia ; en los que noto lo mucho que ignoraron nuestrot
abuelos, y lo mucho mas que tendr4n que aprender nuestrot

CARTAS S8C06IDAS. 405

nietos. Algunos de poesia, delicioso delirio del alma^ que
prueba la ferocidad en el hombre si la aborrece ; puerilidad^
si la profesa toda la vida ; y suavidad^ si la cultiva algun
tiempo.

Todas las demas obras de las ciencias humanas las he arro-
jado 6 distribuido, por parecerme inutiles estractos^ compen-
dios defectuosos, y copias imperfectas de lo ya dicho, y rq-
petido una y mil veces.

CARTAS FAMILIARES.
Del Padre Jose'' Francisco de Isl a^ escritas d varios sugetos.

CARTA I.

El Padre de hla d su hermana.

La Coruna 24 de Setiembre de 1755.
Mi amada Maria Francisca : discuiro que tus oraciones y
las de tu penitenciario me consiguieron un tiempo tan feliz
hasta una legua intes de llegar d la Coruna, en que me llovio
un poco, sin duda para que conociese lo mucho que debia i
las devotas almas que me encomendaban i Dios ; y acaso
ser^ efecto de lo mismo la descomposicion de vientre que
me dura tres dias ha ; pues como no prosiga adelante, ser&
mas beneficio que indisposicion, aunque sirva de molestia
mientras persevere. Tu salud me tiene con mas cuidado de
el que manifiesto, siendo razon que yo oculte mi dolor i, quien
por no aumentdrmele me dissimula lo que padece, porque
asi lo pide la buena correspondencia. Nunca he pretendido
saber mas de lo que me quisieren decir, ni que me quieran
mas de lo que me quisieren quer(*r ; con que siendo en este
punto sumamente ficil la conformidad, solo aspirare d mani-
festar en todas ocasiones que ninguno te ama ni puede
amarte mas que

Tu amante hermano y padrino^

Jose' FRANCISCO.

^06 CHOICE LSTTEAsi

CARTA n.

Delmismo d tu tufiado.

Villagareia 2 de Enero de 1756.

Amado hermano y amigo : no es de estranar que en cor^
rho de pascuas (1) y en la misma vlspera de ellas hubiesen
tvdado tanto en dar cartas. Si el mundo amaneciera on
ano con juicio, en ningun tiempo se debiera tardar menos ;
pero dejemorie cocrer su tren, pues no se puede remediar.
No obstante yo he coiisegmdo este ano no haber recibido
hasta abora mas que tres cartas de pascuas, y esas de gente
novieia en mi correspandencia, 4 escepcion del Senor Tat
ranco, 4 quien^ por mas que be becbo, no he podido espeler
del cuerpo este espfritu maligno, siendo las puscuas mas se-
guras en su carta que en el ctdendario.

Diviertete en leer esa necia satisfaccion que me da N . . .
4 la pieza que me jugo^ suponiendo que yo habia de ir 4 Vil-
lar de Frades 4 esperar el coche para dar las ordenes 4 ios
cocberos. A114 tiene una respuesta, cual la merece su bobe-
ria, con el nuevo c^ode que su hijo pasase 4 vista de Vi-
llagareia sin entrar en ella ; y suponiendo que el por si no
era capaz de faacerla, si no medi4ran las instrucciones de su
padre, le pregunto que motivo le be dado para que le instru-
yesetan mal; el me ba dado malos rates, pero no Ios llevar4
buenos con mis cartas, y estoy esperando las de padre e bijo
para ver por doude parten. Este ultimo es natural que
trueque el viage de Portugal por el de Paris, adonde dicen
que ir4 el Conde de Aranda por embajador ordinario des-
pues de haber evacuado ya su embajada estraordinaria, que
parece se redujo precisamente 4 condolencia por la destruc-
cion de Lisboa, y a socorrer 4 aqueUos Principes con cau-
dales y con generos.

Recibi una carta atrasadisima de D. Miguel de Medina,
en que me resume lo que le escribe Mascarefias, desde el cam*
po delante de la quefnt Ldsboa^ d Ios diez y ocho dias de su
total destruccion. Dice que se salvo con toda su familia en-
tre una espesa lluvia de piedras y de cascajo por especial
proteccion de la santisima virgen, habiendo visto primero
desplomarse toda su casa, y despues arder con todos Ios

(1) Pd9eua en Esparkol f igrnifica todas las graades fiestas, cspe*
cialmente las d« ^avidad.

CARTAS BSCO6I0A8. 407

muebles, alhajas y papeles. Estos filtimos y los libros son
los que mas le duelen, no habi^ndose eximido mas que unos
pocos que tenia eli una quinta, y un cajon de ellos
que le llego de Madrid, el dia despues de la fatali-
dad. Solo pide d Medina mas y mas libros, especial-
mente de arquitectura, porque el rey de Portugal trata de
edificar una nueva corte de planta en parage distinto de la
antigua, aunque este todavia no se ha determinado. A ml aun
no me ha escrito, no obstante tener tres 6 cuatro cartas mias,
pero ni lo estrano, ni me quejo.

Lleg4ron los diez y ocho barriles de escabeches y de dulce,
fouenos todos, k escepcion de uno de sardinas, quedeblade es*
tar mal calafeteado, y se abrio en el camino. Repito gracias,
y renuevo todo lo que te suplique eh la posta pasada.

Dime, si has rectbido ese cajoncillo de cigarros de la Ha-
-bana, porque cada dia me confirmo mas en la sospecha de
alguna maniobra del mesonero de ViUar de Frades, en cuyo
poder los puso el P. Manuel de Barachaguren, administrador
de esta iglesia ; y el plcaro del mesonero no hay forma de
decir como se Uamaba el maragato 4 quien dice se los en-
trego, y que se obligo 4 Uevarlos. A^ntes de ayer vino de
all4 Pinilla, que esti encargado de esta averiguaciouj y solo
me trajo razon de que el maragato habla vuelto k pasar i
Madrid, y que k su regreso a Santiago le harla cargo el me-
sonero de dicho cajoncillo. fo hubiera ya ido en persona k
Yillar de Frades k liquidar este embuste y k escarmentar al
mesonero, si el tiempo lo hubiera permitido ; pero k reserva
de dos dias que por fuerza eran ocupados en la iglesia, todos
los demas han sido intratables.

Hubo carta de Roma de 17 de noviembre ; pero nada
dice de congregacion ni del P. Idiaquez. Tampoco me
ocurre mas anadiri sino rogar k Dios te me guarde como ha
menester,

Tu amante hermano y amigo.

JOSE'.

CARTA m.

Del mismo al mismo.

Bijrgos 21 de Enero de 1757.
Amado herteano y amigo : sail de Villagarcla el dia 15 :
en el se estanco dos veces la calesa sobre el hielo, y la segun-

408 «HOICE UETTSES.

pa vei ettUTO encioia de el desde las cuatro de la tarde hasta
las ODce del dia siguiente, y nosotros dentro de ella por espa-
cio de tres horas. SocoirieroDnos caritativamente de un lo-
gar veciooy envi^ndonos caballerias para que subiesemos a
ei,y Uegamos como puedes considerar. Alii tomamos otras
dos mulas para que ayudasea 4 romper el hielo y Dieve hasta
Palencia : pero auQ asi do quise eolrar en la <^esa, y fui 4
caballo hasta la misma ciudad. En ella me detuve dia y me-
dio : tome otra calesa, meioro el tiempo, y voy caminando,
gracias a Dios, con felicidad, despues de haber padecido
muchas tentaciones de volverme k mi colegio*

No ten^o tiempo de escribir a Maria Francisca^ ni 4 las
deraas personas que me hacen merced, y sinra esta para to-
das. Hoy llegue 4 Burgos entre mil trabaiosy peligros.
Manana parto tomando de aqui otras dos mulas para pasar
]os montes de Oca, que son lo mas peligroso del camino. La.
salud bnena, 4 escepcion del pecho, que se me cerro el dia
que estuve sobre el hielo. A' Dios.

Tu hermano JOSE\

CARTA IV.
Delmismoal mismo.

Zaragoza 18 de Marzo de 1756.
Amado hermano y amigo ; segun lo que me dices en la
tuya de dos del corriente, contemplo ya 4 madre en la otra
vida, y 4 padre muy cerca de ella : cumplase en todo la vo-
luntad del Senor. Yo voy continuando con felicidad mi car-
rera, teniendo ya andado mas de la mitad de ella. Me haa
pedido varies sermones para imprimirlos, pero no lo cons^
guir4n. La salud se ha resentido un poco, porque no soy de
alabastre ; pero no me ha estorbado, gracias 4 Dios, cumplir
con mi ministerio.

Un abrazo 4 Maria Francisca, y vive como necesita
Tu amante hermano y amigo^

JOSE' FRANCISCO.

0AltTA6 Sse^GIDAS. 40$

CARTA V.
Del mismo al mUmo.

Zarago^a 22 de Marzo de 1757.
Amado hermano y amigo : cuando esperaba la noticia de
la muerte de nuestros dos enfermos, me hallo gustosamente
sorpi^ndido con la que me das de su fecobro en la tuya de 9
del corriente. Bendito sea Dios pof este tiuevo beneficio.
Solo si me da cuidado la salad de Maria Francisca, cuyos
escesos de amor son incorregibles. Yo estoy roolido y me->
dio reventado despues de veinte y ocho sermones^ fahkn*
dome todavia diez y seis. £1 fruto es grande, y este es mi
^tnico consuelo. A' Dios, que te guarde como ha menester^

Tu amante hermano y amigOj

JOSE' FRANCISCO.

CARTA VI.
Del ^ismo a 9u hermana.

Yittagarcia 17 de Janitf de 1757*
Hija mia : tns cartas de primero y ocbo del corriente que
Heg&ron juntas, porqne asi lo quieren los se&ores estafeteros,
ine dejan con la misma ahematrm de afectcMS que Ifi esperi-
■lentas en ta salud. De bueiia gana parthia coiitigo mi n>-
bustes, porque aunque ilo me sobra mncha, m6nds nie basta-
Ha para mis tareas ordinarias y estraordinarlas. Los banos
casi fneron las primeras me^einas que se conocieron
en el mundo, y por machos sig^os las iinicas ; por eso tengo
nucha fe con ellos. La dificcltad esta en atinar que especie
de banos son los que se oponen a lal especie de enfermedades,
y cuales achaques son los que no pueden resistir k tales ba-
nos. £n todo caminan k tientas los medicos ; mas por le
mismo puede ser que acierten, porque tal vez bare la casuali-
dad lo que no puede hacer la eleccion y el discemitniento.
Ya estamoB en el mejor tiempo de tomaflos, que es el mes de
junio y cercanias de S. Juan, especialraente si por Mk comi-
eDzan k esplicarse los calores, que por aca todavia est&n muy
remisos. Mi parecer es que no pierdas dia, pues si surtiesen
bu«D eiedOy tenddis lugar para recobrar las fuerzas que son
3S

410 CHOICE L8TTEBS.

menester para repetirlos por aetiembre. Yo no abandonarla
el uso de loe polvos de Aix, habiendolos esperimentado tan
propicios, sin estranar que hasta ahoia no hubiesen desarrai-
gado la causa, porque cuando las ralces son profundas, es
menester no dejar el azadon de la mano hasta arrancarlas, y
eso no se hace en un dia.

No puedo negar que cuanto mas largas son tus cartas, mas
me gustan ; pero tampoco me puede gustar fineza tuya que
sea en detrimento de tu salud ; y asi mientras Dios no te la
mejore, me contentare con una fe de vida^para lo cual basta
tu firma, y me dar4s que senUr siempre que tuvieres que pade-
cer por consolanne. Las memorias acostumln^das ; y A^
Dios hija. Tu amanie hermanoj

JOSE' FRANCISCO.

CABTA VIL
Dd mi$mo d la misma.

Leon 4 de Mayo de 1759.
Hija mia : hoy hace ocho dias que llegue k esta ciudad,
habiendo gastado cuatro en el camino, porque me detuve dos
en el monasterio de Vega con mi prima. La mitad del viage
fue con gran calor, y la otra mitad con escesivo frio, el que
ha continuado desde que llegue acompaiiado de agua, de vi-
entos fuel tes, y tambien de algo de nieve. Pague la patente
en la primera noche con un fuerte dolor colico que me obligo
4 guardar cama todo el dia siguiente ; pero como rompio por
ambas vias, qued6 presto desahogado. Lo mismo suc^o
al General de S. Benito, que se halla en esta ciudad ; solo
que k este le acometip k la despedida, y & mi a la entra-
da ; por cuya razon y por el mal tiempo suspendio el viage,
que ya tenia echado k Espinareda. Visitome al dia siguiente
de mi arribo : comi con su Reverendisima otro dia. Me
ha visitado toda la ciudad, y como con el Intendente los dias
que me dejan libres otros convites. He celebrado mucbo
ver la fubrica de tolas, aunque temo que se atrase por la de-
sunion de los que principalmente la manejan. Luego que el
tiempo lo permita, me restituire k mi celdita, cuya quietud so
me hace mas apetecible, siempre que carezco de ella.

JTive tanio como tu amantty
JOSE'.

CARTAS ESC06IDAS. 411

CARTA Vllf.

Del misfno al Sr. D. (5. R.

Pontevedra 25 de Mayo de 1764.

Muy Seiior mio y mi dueiio : tengo la fortuna de que
V. S. me conozca muchos afios ha. Si no se le ha borrado
de la memoria mi car4cter, tendr^ muy presente mi realidad
y mi entereza. La carne y sangre no me hacen fuerza, ni
las pasiones humanas me han cegado nunca la razon. Con-
cederesela a mi mayor enemigo, siempre que la tenga ; ne-
garesela, y se la negu6 alguna vez a mi mismo padre, cuan-
do concebi que no la tenia.

Hermano mio es Don Jose Joaquin de Isla y Losada. Si
en el injusto, voluntario y empenado pleito criminal que le
suscitkron sus contrarios, no hubiera sido testigo ocular de su
inocencia, e yo hubiese de sentenciarle, el primer voto que
tendria contra sf seria el mio, y no serfa el mas benigno.
Sobradas esperiencias tiene el mismo de esta mi entereza en
los varies sucesos de su vida. En los mas me tuvo contra si,
pero en el presente no puedo desampararle, ni es razon que
niegue 4 un hermano mio lo que en iguales circunstancias
concederia k quien hubiese quitado violentamente la vidd k
mi padre y a mi madre.

Pasaron k mi vista todos los lances, porque me hallaba en
Santiago en aquel turbado dia. No halle que condenar en
este mozo, y lo que mas es, ni tampoco lo hall4ron sus misnios
contrarios. Ellos form4ron los primeros autos, y por estos
mismos autos le absolvieron los Senores jueces del recto
tribunal de que V. S. es digno mierabro. Me aseguran que
la segunda probanza nada anade k la primera, sine confirmar
mas y mas el empeno de acabar de arruinar k ese mozo, para
cubrir una inconsideracion con la perdida de un inocente.

Alegan los contrarios su honor y ^1 de una comunidad ver-
daderamente muy respetable. Esta le tendri siempre muy
resguardado, y nunca podra depender de la precipitacion de
algunos particulares menos detenidos. Pero supongamos que
dependa : y no se interesark tambien el honor del tribunal de
y. S. en que sin nuevos, grandes y evidentes docuraentos no
reforme lo que pronuncio con tanto examen y con tanta ma-
durez ? Mas nada de esto es del case. £1 dict^men de que
conviene que perezca un inocente, para que no perezcan
muchos culpados, ya sabemos todos la baja cuna que tuvo.

412 CSOICI 1.BTTJBAS.

NuDca k adopt&ron por suyo los tribunules cristianos. En
ellot reioa y reioar^ la m&xiroa contraria : menos malo es
absolver k muchos culpados, que condenar k un inocente.

Estilo sin duda mi hermano en el feo delito que le impo-
tan. Todos los eafuerzos de stts contrarios, siendo taotos,
tan poderoMi y tan empeHados, no padieron conseguir que
dejaae de conocerio y de definirio asi el rectlsimo tribuoal.
Grande es la fuerza de la inocencia, cuando no bastan k
oprimiria las mitquinas del poder. Mejor dire : siempre es
nmy debil el poder con los tribanales donde preside la jii»-
ticia. Eflfte es hojr todo mi consuelo y toda mi esperanza.

Nada mas tengo que esponer k V. S. Pedirle que haga gra-
cia a mi hermano, seria suponerle reo, puesen pleitos crimi-
nales no cabe otra que moderar el rigor de las leyes. Supli-
carle otra cosa, seria agraviar su integridad, que tengo ipuy
conocida. Con que en suma esta carta solo se reduce k dar
testimonio 6» que mi profundo silencio no ba dependido de
que tenga por culpado a Jose Joaquin, como aiguno ha queri-
do sonar ; sino precisamente de haber descan8<ido y decausar
en la justicia de la causa, y en la equidad de los jueces.
Tampoco he querido malograr esta oportuna y casi necesaria
ocasion de renovar k V. S. todo mi antiguo respeto. Nues-
tro SeFior goarde k V. S. muchos anos como puede y le
suplico. B. L. M. de V. S.

Su mas atento servidor y capeUan^

Josb'' Fbancjsco de ISLA.

CARTA IX.

Del mismo d su hermana.

Bolonia 8 de Juaio de 17B0.
Amada hua^ hermana y Seaora mia : recibo tu estimadlsi-
ma carta de 2 del pasado, acompanada con la gaceta de
Madrid ; su fecba 23 del mismo, con que me rogala siempre
Duestro amantlsimo sobrino. Segun estas dos fecbas tu carta
se detuvo veinte v ua dias en Madrid 6 en Parma, porque si
hubieran caminado juntas la gaceta y ella, no pudiera la una
ganar k la otra las enormes ventajas que la gano en el camino.
£1 que las recibe en' Parma, no es capaz de detenerias ni un
solo memento, porque deseoslsimo de serviite k ti, y de corn-
placerme k mi% ^ iiiformado ta;nblen de que ni k tl ni & ni

CARTAS ESCOOflDAS. 413

tios ha qoedado otro consuelo igual 4 el de nuestra inocente
cooveisacion, tampoco el tiene otro mayor que el de cooperar
«t que lo logremos con toda la posible puntualidad y prudente
frecuencia. Resta pues, que dicha carta se hubiese quedado
traspapelada en tu escritorio 6 en el buro de el que nos hace
el singular favor de dirigirlas. Pareciome que debla adver-
tirte esto para tu gobierno.

He celebrado mucho que hayas abandonado la casa hu-
meda, fria y sin ventilacion que habitabas^ atribuyendo 4 ella
con sobrada razon, k lo menos gran parte de lo' que has pa-
decido en el pasado invierno. Alegrareme Infinito de que te
trate mejor, como lo espero^ la calle de Atocha, junto 4 Lore-
to, donde te has pasado. Si no tengo trastornada la memo-
ria, (como lo temo) pareceme que la calle de Atocha hace
parte del cuartel del oriente de Madrid, reputado por el mas
sano ; lo que si fuere asi, no contribuiri poco 4 tu recobro.
,No me dices el numero de la casa, ni el cuarto que en ella ha-
bitas, lo que dicen es necesario para guia de los soblrescritos.

Al Senor Conde de Aranda solamente le escribi desde
Calvi sobre los manuscritos qne me habian embargado en
Espana, suplicindole que si despues de examinados no se
hallase en ellos cosa que ofendiese k la religion ni al estado,
se sirviese su Escelencia disponer que aquellos inocentes
hijos viniesen k hacer companla k su pobre y desterrado
padre. Respondiome aquel Senor que eso ya no estaba en
su mano ; pero que estuviese sin cuidado, porque aquellos
hijos estaban k cargo de quien haria que fuesen tratados como
los trataria su mismo padre, sin permitir que ningimo se me-
tiese con ellos. Esto fue en suma la respuesta.

Correspondo cordialisimamente a la memoria que hacen
de mi los amigos Ramirez y Casaus. Deseo con las mayores
ansias que el primero triunfe cuanto intes, y no ceso de rogar
a Dios por el recobro del segundo.

Dias ha que estii concluida la version de Gil Bias; pero
ni mi cabeza ni mi pulso me han permitido emprender todavla
el prologo y dedicatoria. Los calores son escesivos, y con
ellos se hace mayor cada dia mi dejamiento y mi suma
debilidad.

A^ Dios, hija mia : k Dios, y manda k este tu amante
hermano,

Padrino y servidor^

JOSE' FRANCISCO.
85»

414 CHOICE I.GTTERS»

CARTA X.

Dd miimo a tin andgo auyo.

Quieo siendo poco mas rico que el Padre de Isla^ pero habi*
endo oido que este estaba may necesitado, le escribio, ofre^
ci^ndole partir con el lo poco que le quedaba.

Qoerido amigo : que sobrehuraana fuerza es esta ! que
alma ha jamas sido capaz de tan heroicas acciones ! Temes,
te persuades que estoy necesitado, y quieres paitur conmigo lo
poco que te queda ! Mereces que te erijan est^tuas : y si fuera
este el tiempo de la gentilidad, te adorarian como k Dios de
la anustad. Yo no puedo esplicarte mi reconocimiento k la
piedad que usas conmigo. £s cosa deplorable el verse en
estado de necesitarla ; pero cuan dulce y oonsolante es en-
contrar almas tan tiemas y tan grandes como la tuya, que Jo
compadezcan ! Todos mis infortunios, todos mis males son
nada en comparacion de la satbfaccion que me causa tu hu-
manidad y afecto. Y quieres condenar mi gratitud al silen-
cio ! ya se, amigo, si, ya se que tu corazon ejercita su bene-
ficencia, no para recibir el lisongero tributo del reconocimi-
ento, sino para satifacer su noble inclinacion. Pero, como
quieres que deje de ser reconocido k tan singulares beneficios,
como he recibido de tu generosa amistad ? £so no puede ser,
amigo : con que, permitirds que, obedeciendo a la voz imperi-
osa de mi corazon, te diga que mi gratitud serk indeleble, y
que mi afecto para ti tendr4 un siempre por t6rmino de su
duracion,

Enviame solo la mitad de lo que roe of^es, y sobrari para
haeer de muy pobre nniy rico k

Tufino amigo, JOSE'.

REFLEXIONES MORALES.
MORAL REFLECTIONS.

I Oh hombre, seas el que fueres noble 6 artesano ; rico 6
pobre ; docto 6 ignorante ; eclesi4stico 6 secular ; religioso
6 militar ; soberano 6 subdito ; desciende dentro de tf mis-
mo, y eo un silencio profuudo, y no interrumpido, reflexiona
sobre los horrores de la nada, que precedieron k tu concep-
cion ! I Como de la nada has pasado k ser ? corao en un
instante has Uegado k ser espiritu y cuerpo, esto es ; con-
junto de dos sustancias, cuya union parece incompatible, y
cuya accion es us prodigio continuado ?

Ni tu padre, ni tu madre tuyi6ron conocimiento ni poder
para coordinar tus miisculos, para diluir ni liquidar tu sangre,
ni para endurecer tus huesos. Una inteiigencia suprema,
superior k todas las potencias de la tierra, y superior k todas
tus id6as, quiso, y comenzo tu existencia ; quiso, y creciste al
estado en que te hallas. j Ay de mi ! ^ Y quien es esta\ in-
teiigencia ? ; Ay f Quien puede ser, sino el motor universal^
el principio de todo lo que vegeta y respira, y el infinito ser,
al que Uamamos Dioa? Su mano omnipotente te bosquejaba,
cuando tu no podias conocerle, y te conserva y mantiene en
«n siglo en el que se hace vanidad de ultrajarle. Pero si no
eras ayer, y puede ser dejes de ser hoy ; ,; possible es que se
te pase el dia, que tan rapidamente se huye, sin pensar en
este criador y conservador, sin darle gracias, y sin adorarle ?

KL MARQUES CARACCIOLO.

La verdad es la que rige los Cielos, alumbra la tierra, sus-
tentala justicia, gobierna las Repfiblicas, con6rma lo que es
claro, y aclara lo que es dudoso ; con ella todas las virtudes
tienen su perfeccion. Ella es un homenage que nunca cae,
un escudo que no se pasa, un tiempo que no se turba, una
flota que no perece, una flor que no se marchita, una mar
que no se altera, y un puerto en donde nadie peligra. La
Verdad tiene en si tan gran fuerza, que sin ella la fortaleza es
flaca, la prudencia es malicia, la temperancia es miseria, la
■ justicia es saoguiiidenta, la humildad es traidora, la pacien-

4l6 JfOBAL RBFLVCTlONg.

cia fingida, la castidad vana, la riqueza perdida, y la pkdad^
superflua. La verdad es un centro adonde todas las cosas
reposan, el norte por donde el mundo se rige, el aotidoto con
que todos se curan : es la sombra adonde todos descansan, el
terrero adonde todos* tiran^ pero el bianco adonde pocos
aciertan. don pedro de medina.

£1 temor de la justicia divina es el principio que hizo na-
cer en la imaginacion de varios libertinos las horribles ideas
filosoficas, ya de negar k Dios la existencia, ya de despojar
de su inmortalidad al alma. Toda la desdicha de estos mi-
serables viene de que, lejos de contemplar al Omnipotente
Gomo i un padre carinoso, solo se figuran en el un juez severo ;
y para sacudir de si el temor, que esta calidad les inspira,
forcejan k persuadirse, 6 con la priroera de estas dos quime-
ras, que no hay Dios que los castigue ; 6 con la segunda,
que solo pueden temer de el un castigo leve, y de corta dura-
tion , como lo es cualquiera pena temporal. ^ Pero que lo'
gran con esto ? Puntualmente lo que el reo, que huyendo de
la justicia, se arroja por un despenadcro, y por evitar un su-
plicio contingente, abraza una muerte indubitable. Por el
precipice mayor de todos, que es el de la impiedad, procu-
ran huir de la justicia divina. Y aun los que ni^an k Dios
la existencia, no tanto aspiran k huir de la justicia divina,
como que la justicia divina huya de ellos, pretendiendo que
el soberano juez se desaparezca de aquel augusto trono, en
que los ha de sentenciar. feijoo.

£1 avaro ya se sabe que es un m&rtir del demonic, 6 un
anacoreta, que con su abstinencia y su retire hace roeritos
para ir al infiemo. £1 corazon, partido entre los dos deseos
de conservar y adquirir, padece una continua fiebre, mezcla-
da con un mortal frio^ pues, se abrasa cdn la ansia de conse-
guir lo ageno, y tiembla con el susto de perder lo propio.
Tiene hambre, y no come ; tiene sed, y no bebe : tiene necesi-
dad, y no reposa : jamas se ve libre de sobresaltos. Ningun
raton se mueve en el silencio de la noche, que con el rufdo
no le de especie de ser un ladron que le escala. Ningun
viento sopla que en su imaginacion no amenace naufragio al
navio que tiene puesto en comercio : Ninguna guerra se sus-
cita, que no considere ya k los enemigos talando sus tierras <*

ftBFi.BXlONSS MORALSS. 41f

cualquier rencilk de partkulares, deotro de so idea viene k
parar en popular tumulto, que lleva k saco el caudal. No
bay oubecilla que do imagine tempestuosa para sua vinas y
mieses : no hay in(einperie, que no amague corrupcion k \o
que tiene recogido en las trojes. fjeijoo.

£1 Ambicioso es un esclavo de todo el mundo : del prlnc^
pe, porque conceda el empleo : del valido, porque interceda :
de los demas, porque no estorben. Tiene el alma y el
cuerpo en continuo movirniento, porque es menester no per-
der instante. A todos teme, porque nioguno bay que con
una acusacion no pueda desvanecer toda su solicitud. ; O
cuanto forceja con su semblante porque muestre agrado k los
mismos k quienes profesa mortal odio ! ; Cuanto trabajo le
cuesta reprimir todas aquellas incbnaciones viciosas que pue-
Aen dificultar sus medras ! De la pasion dominante son victi-
mas todas las demas pasiones ; y el vicio de la ambicion, co-
mo tirano dueno, sobre atormentarle por si mismo, le prohibe
todos aqoellos gustos k que le lleva el deseo. Ve al que va k
la comedia, al que logra el pas6o honesto, al que asiste a)
banquete, al que goza el sar&o, todo' lo ve^ y lo envidia ; pero
los apetitos est&n en 61, annque furiosos^ aprisionados como
los vientos en la carcel de £olo, feuoOi

Cuanto mas abulta el cuerpo de un hombre, tanto mas tiene
donde le hiera el enemigb : y cuanto mas es la amplitud de
la fortona, tanto mas hay donde hiera la adversidad. Son
las ricas torres elevadas, y las pobres chozas humildes ; y el
rayo mas veces descarga en la torre su fnria, que en la cho-
za. Uno de los mayores males que hay en lo temporal, sino
el mayor de todos, es la salud quebrada ; como el mayor
bien la salud robusta. Y no tiene duda que, en igualdad de
temperamento, mucho mas sano es el pobre que el rico ; por-«
que este con los escesos se estraga la salud, y aquel se la con-
serva con su sobriedad.

Que bella digresion hace Lucano en el libro quinto de la
guerra civil, sobre la felicidad del pobre Barquero Amintas,
cuando pinta a. C6sar en el silencio de la noche pulsando la
puerta de su cbosa, ps^ra que 1« copdiisca prontamente a b^

418 MOKAL BBFLBCTIONS.

Calabria. Todo el mundo esta conmovido y temblaodo con
lo8 movimientos de la guerra civil ; y deatro de la misnia
Grecia, que es el teatro de la guerra^ Tecino k los mismos
ejercito8| duerme, sin temor alguno, un pobre barquero sobre
enjutas ovas. Despiertanle los golpes que da k su puerta el
generoso Caudillo, sin introducir en su pecho el menor susto :
pues, aunque no ignora que esti toda la campana cubierta de
tropas, sabe tambien que no bay en su choza cosa que pueda
brindar los militares insultos, ; O vida del pobre, esclama el
poeta, que tienes la felicidad de estar exenta de las violeii-
cias ! I O pobreza, beneficio grande de los Dloses, aunque
no recouocida de los homhres ! Que muros 6 que templos
gozar4n el privilegio que tienen Amintas y su choza de no
temblar k los golpes de la (obusta mano de Cesar !

FEUOO.

La modestia es la prenda mas amable de una doncella,
aun en cotejo de la hermosura. Csta, no. hay duda, halaga y
solicita mucho mas la pasion del hombre, pero aquella se
grangea su mayor estimacion y aprecio, La pasion nace de
los atractivos que la hacen amar aquello que la provoca : mas
el aprecio y estimacion que infunde el decoro de la modestia,
proceden del respeto que adora en la esterior compostura de
un rostro la belleza interior del alma, k quien aquella retrata.
Aquella misma es tambien seguro indicio de la dulzura de
genio, y de la suavidad del caracter, k quien sirve de ahna,
de la cual espera su mayor satisfaccion y dicha en el casa-
miento el hombre que pretende poseerla. La hermosura es
don accidental de la naturaleza, que entre pocos la reparte ;
pero la hermosura interior del dma la d& la virtud sola, k
cualquiera que desea conseguirla.

PEDaO DE MONTENOON,

En todas aquellas cosas, que esencialmente componen la
felicidad temporal, conviene k saber ; Vida, Salud, Honra y
Hacienda, es muy mejorado el virtuoso, respecto de el que
no lo es. La Honra nadie ignora que es parto legltimo de la
Virtud. Por eso los Romanos edificaron unidos los templos
de estas dos dichas, que veneraban como deidades, de modo
que solo por el templo de la Virtud se podia entrar al templo

EBFLEXIONES MORALES. 419

i)el Honor. Los mismcs que huyen de la pr&ctica de la Vii^
tud, la miran con estimacion y reverencia. La Salud y larga
vida es mas natural y posible en el hombre virtuoso, pur la
templanza con que vive, al paso que el vicioso con sus esce-
sos se estraga la salud, y se acorta la vida. La Hacienda tiene
una gran maestra de economia en la Virtud, siendo cier^o que
se coBserva evitando toda superfluidad.

La suavidad y dulzura que al alma ocasiona la buena con-
ciencia, coloca en muy eminente grado la fortuna de los jus-
tos sobre la de los pecadores. £s esta una felicidad de poco
bnlto, pero de mucha monta ; una piedra preciosa, que en
breves dimensiones encierra grandes quilates. £s la concien-
cia espejo del alma, y sucede al justo y al pecador, cuando
se miran en este espejo, lo que a la bermosa y ^ la fea al
verse en el cristal : aquella se complace, porque ve perfec-
ciones ; esta se entristece, porque no regtstra sino lunares.

FEIJOO.

; O MUERTE, cuan amarga es tu memoria ! Cuan presta tu
veuida ! Cuan secretos tus caminos ! Cuan cludosa tu bora !
Cuan universal tu seiiorio ! Los poderosos no te pueden huir ;
los sabios no te saben evitar ; los fuertes contigo pierden las
fuerzas ; para contigo ninguno hay rico ; pues, ninguno
puede comprar la vida, ni aun por tesoros. Todo lo andas,
todo lo cercas, y en todo lugar te hallas. T6 paces las yer-
bas ; bebes los vientos ; corrompes los aires ; mudas los si-
glos ; truecas el mundo, y no dejas de sorber la mar. Todas
las cosas tienen sus crecientes y menguantes ; mas tia, siempre
permaneces en un mismo ser. Eres un martillo que siempre
hiere ; espada que nunca se embota ; lazo en que todos
caen ; circel en que todos entran ; mar donde todos peli-
gran 5 pena que todos padecen ; y tributo que todos pagan.—
I O muerte cruel ! ^ Como no tienes listima de venir al me-
jor tiempo e impedir los negocios encaminados k bien ? Ro-
bas en una hora, en un minuto, lo pue se gano en muchos
afios ; cortas la sucesion de los linages ; dejas los Reinos
sin herederos ; binches el mundo de orfandades ; cortas el
hilo de los estudios ; haces malogrados los buenos ingenios ;
juntas el fin con el principio, sin dar lugar k los niedios.—
i O muerte, muerte ! O implacable enemiga del g6nero hu-
mano ! i Porque tuviste entrada en el mundo ?. . .

LUIS DK ORACIAN..

REFRANES DE LA LENGUA ESPA^ROLA CON
SUS ESPLICACIONES.

Qnten nmcko abarea poeo aprieia. Que esplica, que
^aien emprende o toma 4 su cargo muchas cosas 4 un tiempo,
ordiBariameDte no comple cod ninguna.

Ab^fomse Im eiiadoBy y dhanu ha estaihe* Que advierte
la poca constaocia de la fortuoa.

Qtften mal amhy mai acaba. Que se dice de 61 que ni tieoe
^rdea di cuidado en sua negocios^ que ordinaiiamente se le
sigue de^racia.

Si el caraxon fuera de acero^ no le veneiera el dinero.
Que da 4 entender la dificultad que hay en resisdr las tenta-
ciones de la codicia.

Qtitefi el aceite meiuray las mano8 se unto* Que da i en-
tender que los que manejan dependencias 6 interesesagenos,
suelen aprovecharse de ellos mas de lo justo.

Qnten no adobOf 6 quita gateroy tiene que hacer casa
4Bniera,

La muger del ciegOy para quien se afeita ! Que vitupera
el demasiado adorno de las mugeres, con el fin de agradar 4
otros que 4 sus maridos.

£/ huen pagadoVf anto es de lo ageno. Que denota que el
que paga bien y exactamente lo que debe, tiene mucho
credito.

Agua ftt enfermaj ni emheodoj ni adeuda. Que recomien-
da los buenos efectos del agua, por contraposicion 4 los del
vino.

Quien en un mes quiere ser ricoy aJ medio le ahorcan. Que
amonesta 4 los que por medios ilicitos quieren hacecse ricos
en poco tiempo.

Por el alabado deji al conocidoy y vime arrtpentido.

Dime con quien andaSy y te dirt quien eres. Que advierte
lo mucho que influyen 4 Ia9 costumbres las bueaas 6 naJas
companias.

TREATISE ON SPANISH VERSIFICATION.

Spanish versification is the sirt of making Spanish Verses
accordii^ to certain rules.

These rules regard, 1st. the structure of the verses ; 2d.
the mixture of the verses with one another.

ARTICLE I.

Cfthe structure of vetHM.

SECTION I.

€f the different kinds of verses.

The Spanish verses are measured by the number of sylla-
bles. Variety in the number of syllables produces different
kinds of verses.*

Ist. The verses of eUven syllables or emdecQgilahoj hen-
decasyllabe.

Saiga mi trabajada vok y rompa
£1 son confuse y misero lamento
Con eficacia y fuerza, que interrompa
El celeste y terrestre movimiento :
La fama con sonora y clara trompa,
Dando mas furia 4 mi cansado aliento,
Derrame en todo el orbe de la tierra
Las armas, el furor y nueva guerra.

Alonso de Ercilla.

2d. The verse oiten syllables !or dfca«{/a6o, decasyllable.

Los que andais empoUando obras de otros
Sacad, pues, k volar vuestra cria.
Ya diri cada autor : esta es mia ;
Y veremos que os queda k vosotros.

T, DE Yriabte.
3d. The verse of nine syllables.

Si querer eptender de todo
Es ridlcula presuncion,
Servir solo para una cosa

Suele ser folta no menor. T. de Yriarte.

36

422 STAinSB VKKSIFICATION.

4th. The verae oi eight syllables or de redandiUa mayor
(large romidelay.)

Al infierao el Tracio Orfeo
Su muger bajo 4 buscar,
Que no pudo 4 poor lugar
Llevarle tan msil deseo.

Canto, y al mayor tormento
Puso suspension y espanto,
Mas que lo dulce del canto.
La novedad del intento*

£1 Dios adusto ofendido,
Con un estrano riffor,
La pena que hallo mayor
Fa6 yolverle & ser marido.

Y aunque su muger le dio
Por penade su pecado ;
Por premio de lo cantado, *

Perderla facilito. F. de Qubvsdq.

5th. The verse of teven syllables*

I Quien es aquel que baja
Por aquella colina,
La botella enlamano,
En el rostro la risa ;
De p4mpanos e yedra
La cabeza cenida ;
Cercado de zagales,
Rodeado de ninfas ;
Que al son de los panderos
Dan voces de alegria,
Celebran sus hazanas,
Aplauden su yenida ?
Sin duda ser4 Baco,
£1 padre de las viaas ;
Pues no, que es el poeta,
Autor de esta letrilla, J. Cadalso.

6th. The verse of six syllables or de redondiUa menor
(small roundelay.)

De amores me muero,
Mi madre acudid,

VERSIFICACION SSPAnOLA. " 4^^

Si DO Uegais pronto
Ver^isme morir.
Catorce anos tengo^
Ayer los cuinpli,
Que fue el primer dia
Del florido abril ;

Y chicos y chicas
Me suelen decir :

I Por que no te casan,

Mariquilla? di.

De amores me muero, etc. ^ J* Cadalso.

7th. The verse of/?»c syllables.

Poderoso caballero

Es don DinerOy

Nunca vi almas ingratas

A su gusto y aficion^

Que 4 las caras de un doblon^

Hacen sus caras baratas ;

Y pues las hace bravatas
Desde una bolsa de cuero,
Poderoso caballero

EsdonDinero, F. db Quevedo.

8th. The verse of four syllables.

^ Quien los jueces con pasion,
Sin ser ungiiento, hace humanos,
Pues untindoles las manos
Les ablanda el corazon ;
Quien gasta su opilacion
Con oro y no con acero ?
El dinero,

Quien procura que se aleje
Del suelo la gloria vana ;
Quien siendo toda cristiana
Tiene la cara de herege ;
Quien hace que al hombre aqueje
£1 desprecio y la tristeza?
Lapohreza, F. de Quevedo.

424 SPANISH VKRSIFICATION.

9th. The verse of three syllables.

Dioeros sod calidad,

Verdad:

Mas ama^ quien mas suspira^

Mentira L. db Gokgo&a.

10th. The veree of two syllables.

Ingrata, hermosa Antaodra,

En cuyas centellas

Bellas,

£1 alma es salamandra,

Que respira encendida)

Dulce ardof; blando incendio, ardiente vida.

1 1th. The verse of fourteen syllables, which is nothing
more than the union of two verses of seven syllables.

Yo lei, no se donde, que en la lengua herbolaria,
Saludando k un tomillo la yerba parietaria,
Con socarroneria le dijo de esta suerte :
Dios te guarde, Tomillo : l^stima me da verte ;
Que aunque mas oloroso que todas estas plantas,
Apenas medio palmo del suelo te levantas.

T. DE Yriabte.

12th. The verse of thirteen and twelve syllables, a la
francesa (after the French fashion.)

En cierta catedral aoa- eampana babia
Que solo se tocaba algon 'Solemne dia.
Con el mas recio son, coa pausado compas
Cuatro golpes 6 tres soli a dot no mas.
Por esto, y ser mayor de la ordinaria marca,
Celebrada fue siempre en toda la comarca.

T. DB Yriarte.

13th. The verse of /u»/tfe s^lables or dt arte mayor (ol'
gr«?at art,) which is only the uoioo of two verses of six syl-
lables.

I No hemes de reirnos siempre que chochea
Con ancianas frases un novel autor ?
Lo que es afectado juzga que es primor ;

VKRSIFICACION BSPAnOLA. 425

Habla puro a costa de la claiidad,

Y no halla voz baja para nuestra edad.

Si fue noble en tiempo del Cid campeador.

T. DE Ybiarte.

The verses of fourteeny ten and nine syllables, are not fre-
quently used. Those d la francraa and de arte mayor y
which were often used in the early times of Spanish poetry,
are but seldom used at present.

The verses of eif^htj eiXyfiveyfouTj three and tioo syllables
are known under the general denomination of versos de re-
dondilla (roundelay verses,) and the verses of eleven a.nd seven
syllables under that of versos italianos (Italian verses.)

The Spaniards call versoe enteros (entire versesj the verses
of eleven f eight and six syllables, and versos de pie quebrado
fverses of broken measure) or simply versos quebrados
(broken verses) the verses of seven^fivey four ^ three and two
syllables.

SECTION II.

Of the Accent.

In every Spanish word there is a long syllable, that is, upon
which more stress is laid than upon the others. This sylla-
ble is said to bear the accent, and though this accent is not
always marked, it is, however, not the less sensible for it.
The word cuxewt is then synonymous with long.

We call aguda (acute^ the syllable that bears the accent.

All the syllables which precede or follow the long syllable
are brief.

The monosyllables are naturally long, but they are brief
when they are placed next to another word, or when they
precede a word with which they have an immediate relation.

The accent generally falls upon the antepenultima, penul-
tima or last syllable of words, but most commonly upon thd
penultima.

The words which have the accent upon the antepeuultima
syllable are called esdrdjulos (gliding) and those which have
it upon the last syllable agudos (acute.)

The Spaniards call versos llanos (plain verses) the verses
terminated with a word which has the accent upon the pe-
nultima syllable; versos esdrdjuhs (glidbg verses) the vers^
36*

42() SPANISH V£RSiriCAT10N.

termioated with a word ۤdritJiiloy and versos offudoa (acute
verses) the verses terminaled with a word agudo*

In the verses UamM the number of syllables is equal to that
determined by the kind to which they belong ; thus a verse
Vano of eleven syllables has eleven syllables^ a verse Uano of
eight syllables has eight syllables, &c. &c.

128 4557 89 10 11

Sal|ga|mi|tra|ba|ja|da|voz|y|r6m|{>a...

12346578
La|no}ve|dad|del|in|ten|to...

12 8 4 6 5 7
£l|pa|dre|de|las|vl|nas...

The verses tsdrdjulos have one syllable more tfcan the
kind to which they belong indicates ; thus a verse esdrdjulo
of eleven syllables has twelve, a verse esdrdjolo of eight
syllables has nine, &c. &c.

1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 9 10 11 12

Un{ga|to|pe|dan|ti|si|ioo|re|t6|ri{co...
123 466789
A|to|dos|los|a|ca | de|nii|cos...

The verses agndos hav« a syllable less than the kind to
which they belong indicates ; thus a verse agudo of eleven
syllables has only ten, and a Verse t^udo of eight syllables
has only seven, &c. &c.

1 2 3 4 6 6 7

Con|un|es|tra|no|ri|g6r..

12 3 4 6
Ve|reis|me|n)o|rir..«

The verses which are formed of the union of two smaller
verses may have more or less syllables, according as these
verses are either llanos or agndos ; thus a verse of arte ma-
yovy which is formed of the union of two verses of six sylla-
bles, will have twelve syllables if these two verses are Uanos ;
it will have only eleven if one is agudo and the other UanOy
and it will have only ten if both are agudos,

12 3 4 6^ 7 8 9 10 11 12
Di|cho|sos|vos|6|tros — ^|quien|lo&|cui|di|dos

1 2 346 6 789 10 11 12
Del|mun|do|no|t(ir|ban— el|dul|ce|re|p6|so...

YEASIFICACI6N ESPAnOJLA. 42?

1234 5 6* 7 89 10 11

El|ros|tro|cu|bier|to — con|trislte|pe|sar

123456 7 89 10 11
De|no|ta|la|pe|na— del|gra|ve|do|l6r...

123456789 10
No|quie|to|vilYir — vi|da|con|do|16r...

The verses llanos are those of general use in Spanish po-
etry. The veises agudoH are only used mixed with the
verses Uanoa and solely in light poetry, for they are avoided
ID elevated poetry. The verses tsdrujulos are seldom used
alone, they are most often mingled with verses Ucmos, and
this mixture is not common.

The Spanish verses, of whatsoever kind they may be, be-
ing most always llanos^ it may be said that they require an
accent upon the penultimate syllable.

Independently of this final accent, the hendecasyllable
verses, or of eleven syllables, require also an accent upon
theii fourth or sixth syllable.

As to the number of accents which may also enter into the
hendecasyllable verses, and the place which they should oc-
cupy, it is impossible to determine it by fixed rules, nothing
but the harmony of the verse can serve as a guide. Be it su&
ficientto observe lst.that, the more accents are introduced
in a verse, the more its harmony is slow and sustained ; 2d.
that there may be introduced in a hendecasyllable verse, be-
sides the final accent and that of the 4th. or 5th. syllable
which are indispensable, one, two and even three accents ;
3rd. that they are placed nearly at an equal distance from
each other and not unfrequently upon the syllables which are
paired.

Dilch6|so|quienen|ver|so|ge|ne|r6|80
C€]le|braJlas|haz4|naslin|mor|t^|les,
Y el|vi|gor|y el es|fuer|zo|va|le|r6|so.

In the verses which are not hendecasyllable, the final ac-
cent is the only one indispensable ; one or many other ac-
cents may be in truth introduced in them, as the measure
permits or harmony requires, but the place which they should
occupy is not fixed, and the ear alone should be consulted.

The verses of arte fimyor require, besides the final accent,
an aceent iipoa the second and upon the eighth syllable.

42l SPANISH VKB8IFICAT10N.

SECTION III.

Of the eUsion.

When a word ends in a verse with a vowel and the follow-
ing word begins with a vowel or an hy there b an elisloa of
the final vowel, that is, it b not counted as any thing.

0|bel|la fn|gr&|ta <f|qttien|el|il|Qia a|d6|ra!

If there should be a monosyllable consisting of a single
vowel between two words, one of which ends and the other
begins with a vowel, the three syllables shall be blended so as
to make only one syllable.

£nlvi|dia d otque|t1osJprB|dos|la Aer|mo|su|ra...
Fal|tan|(^o d f!)s|pa|na|su|ma|yor|te|so|ro...

The initial y being a consonant cannot occasion an eliaon,
it is not so with the final y and the conjunction p.

I>i|cholso|yo|que|vi|oea|tan|buen|puer|to...

De|laD|te|df- es|ta|pe|na|tos|ca|//|du|ra...

The elision may be omitted, 1st. when the first word con-
sists of a single vowel or is terminated with an accented vow-
el, 2d. when the second word begins with an A, 3d. when
there is a natural pause or the conjunction y stands between the
two words.

Di|cho|so|%om|bre|que|vi|ves...

0|al|ma|deslven|tu|ra|da !...

Un|per|r% vn|bor|ri|tolca|mi|na|ban,
Sir|vien|do d «n|mis|mo|due|rio.

SECTION IV.

Of the vaweh which form or do not form diphthongs.

When several vowels are in succession in the same word,
sometimes they form a single syllable and at others two.

The vowels A A, AE, AI, when the accent bears upon the
I, and AO, form two syllables ; Al when the accent does not
bear upon the I, A U and AY form but one. Ex. Soruvadra^
a-ereo, distra-ido, estaiSf hay^ aurora.

VEASIIPICACION ESPAiiOLA. 429

The vowels EA, ££, and EO form two syllables^ but when
£A and EO are final and the accent bears upon the prece^
ding syllable, they form but one; £1, £U and EY form but
one syllable. Ex. Oce-anOf post'^r, Irofe-o^ lineOy etirea^
momentdneOy deidad, deuda^ rey.

The vowels lA, IE, lO, lU form but one syllable, but
when the accent bears upon the I, they form two. Ex. Glo-
rioj siempre^ contrarioy triunfoy alegri^a^ temi-a.

The vowels OA,0£,OI,when the accent bears upon the I,
and GO, form two syllables ; OI when the accent does not
bear upon the I, OU and OY form but one. Ex. Bo-atOy
pth^iOy o4doy ho-oteij estoy. In hh-oe OE forms but one
syllable.

The voweb UA, U£, UI, UO, UY, UIE, UEY, form but
one syllable.; but when the accent bears upon the U^'they
form two. Ex. Iguedy fitcgo^ guimcdda^ momtruoy mutfy
quietly quietudy huey^ ganzii'a*

The preceding ruLos are general, and liable to few excep-
tions ; nevertheless the poets do not always strictly confine
themselves to them, and sometimes unite vowels to form but
one syllable which ought to^ form two, while at others they
separate vowels in order to form two syllables which ought
not to form but one. In this manner we find poeta forming
two syllables instead of three, real formmg one syllable in^
stead of two, didlogo forming four syllables instead of three,
triunfo formmg three syllabi^ instead of two, &c. &c»

Of Rhyme.

The Spaniards have two kinds of rhymes, the ihyme cotisfh
nant and the rhyme aesonant.

The rhyme consonant (consonancia) is the perfect agree-
ment of two sounds which terminate two verses.

The rhyme consonant always begins at the vowel upon
which the accent bears ; thus in the verses esdrdjulos it will
begin at the vowel of the antepenultima, in the verses llanos
at the vowel of the penultima and in the verses agudos at the
vowel of the last syllable.

The rhyme consonant being only made for the ear, regard
should be had to the pronunciation rather than the orthography
of the final syllables ; thus hijo will rhyme well with ^xoj
(now Jijoy) iniquo with chicoy &c.

430 fPAHIM VSB8IPICAT10M.

The rhyme a$$onani (asonancia) consists in the resem-
blance of the vowek found in the final syllables of two words
the consonants of which are different.

The rhyme a&Monant always begins in the same manner as
the rhyme conBonoHi at the vowel upon which the accent
bears ; thus ligtra^ cuhiirta^ mha^ oMtmintOy pSna, Uira,
irSguOj which have the accent upon the penultimate syllable,
may rhyme by aaMonanUf and the same will happen wilh
caracSiy dolStj corazSn, di6x, rdzyomd^ naci6y which have the
accent upon the last syllable, which shows 1 st, that no regard
is had for the rhyme assonant but to the resemblance of the
vowels, and that in diphthongs, nothing is regarded but the
last vowel ; 2d. that the ' consonants must be different, and
that when there are two consonants in succesion, it is suffi-
cient that one of the two should not be found in the other word.

In the words esdrdjulosy one may be content for the rhyme
assonant with the resemblance of the vowels of the antepe-
Dultima and of the last syllable of the two words, thus, ord'
€ulo and tdrtago will form a good rhyme axsonantj though
the vowel of the penultima of the one be not similar to that
of the penultima of the other.

The use of the rhyme consonant is much more common
than that of the rhyme assonant^ therefore whenever in
speaking of rhyme the kind shall not be designated, the rhyme
consonant will be the one meant

Rhyme is not indispensable in the Spanish verses as it b in
the French, and the Spaniards have verses not rhymed or
blank verses which are called versos sueltos (free verses) in
which it is necessary carefully to avoid the least final con-
sonance.

SECTION VI.

(>f the BNJAMBBMRNT, OT running of one verse into another
to complete the sense.

In Spanish the enjambement of verses is permitted even in
elevated poetry, that is, that the sense may remain in sus-
pense at the end of a verse, and end only at the beginning of
the following verse ; which happens principally whenever
the beginning of a verse is the regimen or necessary depeiii>
dance of what is found at the end of the preceding verse.

VERSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 431

Volved las armas y inimo furioso

A los pechos de aquellos que os ban piiesto

£o dura sujecioo, con afrentoso

Paitido i todo el mundo manifiesto.

Alonso de Ercilla.
Even sometimes the Spanish poets transport the syllable
mente of an adverb to the following verse, or make an elision
of the final vowel of the word that terminates the verse with
the vowel of the word which begins the other verse, but these
enfambemensj which can only take place between an entire
verse and a broken one, are so uncommon^ that they should
be considered as poetical licenses.

Y mientras miserable —

Mente se estin los otros abrasando

Con sed insaciable

Del peligroso mando,

Tendido yo ^ la sombra este cantando.

Fray Luis de Leon.

SECTION VII.

Of poetical licerues^ and what 9hould he avoided in vereet.

Though the language of Spanish poetry be not different
from that of prose, and the same expressions be commonly
used in it, nevertheless it is permitted to make in the construo-
tioD of the phrase certain transpositions which prose would
not admit of, and which contribute in a high degree to the
barmony and nobleness of verses. It is always necessary to
make these transpositions with intelligence and taste, so as
they may not occasion any harshness or obscurity.

Harmony also requires us generally to avoid in all kinds of
verses, words too long and of a difficult pronunciation, or
which may have too great a conformity of sound with words
alreadv used ; those having the guttural letters should be em-
ployed sparingly ; the too frequent meeting of voweb, and
that of rough or hissing consonants, such as the « or r, &c.
should not often recur.

In short, no use should be made in poetry, particularly in
high poetry, of low and prosaic words ; but taste and discern-
ment, supported by deliberate reading, will teach, better than
all the rules that can be given, the choice of words that should
be made ; for, often, an able poet uses happily a word which
flamed proscribed from poetry.

432 SFANUH TSRSIVICATIOK.

ARTICLE II.

Of the mixture of verges with one another.

The mixture of verses, either as to measure or rhyme,
being generally arbitrary in Spanish poetry, it evidently must
be extremely various ; we shall therefore limit ourselves to
make known the combinations used by the best poets, and
give examples of diose which particularly deserve to be known.

SBGTION I.

Cf successive rhymes,

Parefas or pareados are called the verses of which the
rhymes are successive, that is, the 1st of which rhymes with
the 2dj the Sd with the 4th, and so on, taking care to vary the
rhyme every two verses.

The successive rh3rmes are used in the verses imitated from
the French, which are called for this reason versos a lafraU"
eesa ; and in order to supply the want of masculine and fem-
inine rhymes, the verses llanos are caused alternately to be
followed by two verses agudosj as may be seen in the exam-
ple which we have before cited when speaking of this kind
of verse, which is now seldom used.

Entire pieces of verses de redondiUa, and even of Italian
verses may be composed in successive rhyme, by intermixing
arbitrarily with hendecasyllables small verses of seven sylla^
bles which rhyme with the following hendecasyllaUe ; but
these compositions are rare, unless it be to set them to music,
and the successive rhvmes are but seldom used except for
proverbs, distichs and epitaphs.

SBCTIOIf II.

Of rhymes crossed and intermixed.

The Spaniards give the generick name of copias to all
kinds of assemblages or combinations of verses, but this de-
nomination is particularly appropriate to what we culX stanzas.

The Spanish stanzas are not strictly bound to any pause,
and may run into one another; however, when they
consist of more than four verses, one or more pauses are
introduced, according as harmony requires it ; and generally
the enjambemeni or running of one stanza into another b
carefully avoided.

VBKSinCACIOiM EnJMfLA. 433

OfstanxoB of three wrm» or IVreete.

The tercets are stanzas commonly composed of three
verses either hendecasyllables or of xedondiUa mayor, the
arrangement of which may take place in several manners.

1st. The first verse may be free, sueUoy and the 2d.
riiyme with the Sd. 2d. The first verse may rhyme with
the 3d. and the 2d. be free. These two kinds of mixtures
are used in the mllaneieoe. 9d. Sometimes the 1st verse
rhymes with the 2d. and the 3d. is free. 4th. Finally in the
pieces of verses composed of tercetos^ the 1st. and 3d. verses
rhyme together, the 1st. verse of the second terceto rhymes
with the 2d. vense of the preceding tercet, and so on to
the last terceto which consists of four verses lo complete the
rhyme.

Should there be but one or two successive tercetoa of Ital*
ian verses, there m^ht be admitted among the h^ndecasyllar
bles a small verse, verso quehrado - oi "sev^ii s^labies, whidi
would be the lst.^r 2d.

The Satyres, epistles and elegies are eoniposed in hendec-
asyllable tercetos ; they are also siMBetimes used in descr^
tive poems, eclogues and idyls.

HendecasyUabk Tercetos.

En aquel pradjo alM nos redinamos,
Y del Cefiro fresco rec<^;iefido
El agradable espirtu (1) respiramos.

Las flores i loa ejos ofreciieBde
Diversidad estrana de pintura,
Diversamente asi estaban oliendo;

Y en medio aquesta fuente clara y pura,
Que como de cristal reqriatidecfa
Mostrando abiertamente sv hondnra,

£1 arena que de oro pareda
De bUncas pedrezuelas variada,
P«ir do manaba el agua se bulHa.

■ ■ •- ■ ,

(1) E^^u^w espfyitUf (poet, lie)
37

434 8FANISH VBRSIFICATION.

En derrededor ni sola una pisada
De 6enLf 6 de pastor, 6 de ganado
A^ la sason estaba seiialada.

Despues que con el agua resfriado
Hubimos el calor y juntameDte
La s^ de todo punto mitigado:

Ella, que con cuidado diligente
A^ conocer mi mal tenia el intento,

Y k escudrinar el 4nimo doliente ;

Con nuevo ruego y firme juramento
Me conjuro, y rogo que le contase
La causa de mi grave pensamiento....

Gabcilaso de la Vjbga, Rgloga, 2»

2. Of stanzas of four verses^ or quatrains.

The quatrains are stanzas of four verses, the 1st of which
rhymes with the .4th. and the 2d. with the 3d., or the 1st of
which rhymes with the Sd. and the 2d with the 4th.

The verses that enter in the composition of quatrains are
commonly verses of redondiUa may or ^ verses of redondiOa
menor or hendecasyUables.

The quatrains in verses of redondiUa are called cuartiUas
or cuartetas and those in hendecasyllable verses cuartetes.

In the quatrains in verses oi redondiUa menor j the 1st and
3d. verses may be free (sueltos*) ^

Though all kinds of stanzas may be composed in verses of
redondiUa menor j pevertheless they are seldom used except
in the quatrainSj and it is for this reason that sometimes the
name of redondiUa menor is given to the quatrains composed
with this kind of verse.

CuartiUas de redondiUa mayor.

Deseais, senor Sarmiento,
Saber en estos mis afios
Sujetos i tantos danos,
Como me porto y sustento. '

Yo OS lo dire en brevedad,
Porque la historia es bien breve,

Y el daros gjisto se os debe
Con toda puntualidad.

VBR8IF1GAC10N BSPAnOLA'. ^^^

Salido el sol por oriente
De rayos acompanado, /
Me dan un huevo pasado
Por agua, blando y caHente,

Con dos tragos del (1) que suelo
Llamar yo nectar divino,

Y i quien otros Uaman vino,
Porque nos vino del cielo.

Cuando el luminoso vaso
Toca en la meridional,
Distando por un igual
Del oriente y del ocaso ;

Me dan asada y cocida
De una gruesa y gentil ave, ^

Con tres veces del suave ^ ^^'""'^

Licor que alegra la vida.

Despues que cayendo viene
A^ dar en el mar Hesperio,
Desamparando el imperio
Que en este h orizonte tiene ;

Me suelen dar 4 comer
Tostadas en vino mulso,
Que el enflaquecido pulso
Restituyen 4 su ser.

Luego me cierran la puerta,
Yo me entrego al dulce sueno :
Dormido soy de otro dueno,
No se de mi nueva cierta.

Hasta que habiendo sol nuevo,
Me cuentan como he dormido,

Y asi de nuevo les pido,
Que me den nectar y huevo.

Ser vieja la casa es esto,
Veo que se va cayendo,
Voyle puntales poniendo,
Porque no caiga tan presto.

(1) DSl for de H, (poet, lie.)

436 BMNIW VEMinCATiOlf.

Mas todo es tuio artificiOy
Presto me dicen mis lales.
Que ban de faltar loa puntaks,
Y allanarse el edlficio.

Baltasar de Alcazab.

3. Cftke titmxat offivt venet.

The stanzas of five vorses, called coiilaa redandiUas or
quiniiUas, are commonly composed in verses of redondiHa
mayoTy they also might however be composed in hendeca-
syllable verses. In these stanzas, the verses are intermixed
in all manners, provided they should all be upon two rhymes,
and that there may never be more than two successively
upon the same rhyme.

4. Of stanzas of six verses^ or sixains.

The stanzas of six verses, called rrdondiUas de seis versos
are commonly composed in verses ofredonditta mayor; they
might also be composed in hendecasyllable verses. In these
stanzas, the verses are intermixed in all manners^ provided
they should all be upon two rhymes, and that there may
never be more than two successively upon the same rhyme.

5. Of the stanzas of seven verses.

The stanzas of seven verses, redondillas de siete versos j are
little used ; they are composed of verses of redonditta mayor,
the Ist. of which rhymes with the 4th. and the 5th.; the 2d.
with the m.j and the 6tb. with the 7th. Stanzas of seven
hendecasyllable verses might also be composed.

6. Of the stanzas of eight verses, or octaves.

The stanzas of eight verses are commonly composed in
hendecasyllable verses, or in verses ofredondUla mayor, the
]|;hymes of which are intermixed in diflerent manners.

1st. The 1st. verse may rhyme with the 4th. 5th. and 8th.;
the 2d with the 3d., and the 6th. with the 7th.

2d. The first verse may rhyme with the 3d., the 2d. with
the 4th. 6th. and 8th., the 5th. with the 7th.

3d. The rhymes may be crossed.

4th. Finally the rhymes of the ax first verses may be
crossed, and the two last rhyme together, which GommcHdy
happens in the stanzas of eight headecasyUable verses.

▼BBSIPICACION ESFAnOLA. 437

We call octavos the stanzas of eight hendecasyllahle verses,
and redondillas de ocho versos the stanzas of eight verses of
redondiUa.

The octaves serve principally in epic and didactic poems,
they are also used in descriptive poems, eclogues and idyls.,

Octavos,

I Porque con tanta sana procuramos
Ir nuestra sangre y fuerzas apocando,

Y envueltos en civiles armas damos
Fuerza y derecho al enemigo bando ?
iPorque con tal furor despedazamos
Esta union invencible, condenando
Nuestra causa aprobada y armas justas
Justificando en todo las injustas?

J Que rabia 6 que furor desatinado
Ilabeib contra vosotros concebido,
Que asi quereis que el Araucano estado
Venga i ser por sus manos destruido,

Y en su virtud y fuerzas ahogado
Quede con nombre infame sometido
A las estranas leyes y gobiemo

Y en dura servidumbre e yugo etemo ?

Volved sobre vosotros, que sin tiento
Correis i toda prisa i despeiiaros,
Refrenad esa furia y movimiento
Que es la que puede en esto mas danaros :
^ Sufris al enemigo en vuestro asiento
Que quiere como i brutos conquistaros,

Y no podeis sufrir aqui impacientes
Los consejos y avisos convenientes ?•..

Alonso db Ercilla.

The copla de arte mayor j thus called because it was com-
posed in verses of twelve syllables or of arte may or ^ was a
stanza of eight verses, the 1st. of which commonly rhymed
with the 4th. 5th. and 8th., the 2d. with the 3d., and the 6tfai^
with the 7th. This stanza is no more used at present.
ParefaSf tercetos^ cuartetesy &c. might be made in verses of
arte mayor as also in hendecasyllahle.
37*

438 SFANIIH VIBSinCATIOK.

7. Of»tama9 tfmnt verges.

The stanzas of nine verses bear the name in SpanUi of
rtdondiUM misiaa^ because tbej are composed of tbe reuDion
of a ttania ^f four verses and of a staoaa of five veises of
rtdondiUa mayor. Stanzas of nine verses might also be
composed of a stanza of four verses and of a stanza of five
hendecasyllable verses.

8. Of the stanzas of ten verseSf or dizains.

The dicimas are stanzas of ten verses, ccHnmonly of
redondiUa mayor j the 1st. of which rhymes widi the 4th. and
5th.; the 2d. with the Sd., the 6th. with the 7th. and lOth^
and the 8th. with the 9th.

The didma may dso be composed of the union of two
fltansas of five verses quintillas, m each of which the mixture
of tfie rhymes may be uniform, but it is better that it should
be different This kind of dtcima is called eopla real

Copla reoL

Aqui la envidia y menUra
Me tuvi^ron encerrado.
jDichoso el humilde estado
Del sabio que se retira
De aqueste mundo malvado^

Y con pobre mesa y casa •
En el campo deleitoso

Con solo Dios se compasa,

Y 4 solas su vida pasa,
Ni enviado, ni envidioso !

FftAT Luis bs Lkon.

Remark. The stanzas of more than ten verses are not
composed of entire verses only, but of entire verses, oersos
enteroSy mixed with broken verses, versos quebrados.

SECTION HI.

Of the mixture of entire with broken verses*

Commonly the hendecasyllable verses are mixed with the
verses of seven syllables, those of eight syllables with those of
four, and those of sijrsyllables with those of three. Some-

VERSIFICAClON KS^AtlOLA. 439

times also entire verses of different measure are mixed with
broken yerses of different measure.

There is nothing determined however in such cases, as to
the number of verses of each kind that may be mixed togeth-
er. The verses thus mixed sometimes form stanzas, and at
others do not form any. When they form stanzas of less
than ten verses, the mixture of rhymes b the same as in
the stanzas composed only of entire verses. But when they
form stanzas of more than ten verses, and when they are not
disposed in stanzas, the mixture of rhymes is absolutely arbi-
trary ; even unrhymed verses may be admitted among the
verses rhymed. It is however proper to remark, 1st that in
mixed verses, whether they form stanzas or not, the corres-
ponding rhymes must never be too distant from one another ;
2d. that in the stanzas in mixed verses as in the stanzas in en-
tire verses, the mixture adopted for the rhymes in the 1st.
stanza must generally be foHowed in all the other stanzas of
the same piece, and that it is the same with the mixture of the
verses of different measure ; 3d. that the stanzas in mixed
verses do not contain commonly more than twenty verses.

The following examples will give an idea of the great va-
riety of the mixture of the entire and kroken verses, which is
commonly used in odes, light poetry and pieces destined to be
set to music.

Iba cogiendo flores

Y guaniando en la falda

Mi ninfo para hacer una gmmalda ;

Mas primero las toca

A los rosados labios de su boca,

Y les da de su aliento los olores.

Y estaba (por su bien) entre noa rosa
Una abeja escondida,

Su dulce humor hurtando ;

Y como en la hermosa

Flor de los labios se hallo, atrevida

La pico, saco miel, fuese volando. L. Martin.

Profecia del Tajo.

Folgaba (1) el rey Rodrigo

Con la hermosa Caba en la ribera

(1) Folgaba for Holsaba, (obsolete.)

440 9PAJI1SH VB&SinCATlO^'

DeTajo sintestigo;

El pecbo saco fuera

£1 rio, y le hablo de esta maneia :

En mal punto te goces
Injusto forzador, que ya el sonido
Oyo (1) ya, y las voces,
Las annas y el bramido
De Marte, de furor y ardor cenido.

j Ay ! esa tu alegria
j Que llantos acarrea ! y esa hermosa
Que vio el sol el mal dia
A^ Espana ! Ay ! cuan llorosa,
Y al cetro de los Godos cuan costosa !

Llamas, dolores, guerras,
Muertes, asolamientos, fieros males
Entre tus brazos cierraif,
Trabajos inmortales
A^ ti y 4 tus vasallos naturales,

A^ los que en Constantina
; Rompen el fertil suelo, 4 los que baiia

^ El Ebro, i la vecina

Sansuena, k Lusitaiia,

A' toda la^espaciosa y triste Espana.

Ya dende (2) Cddiz llama
£1 injuriado conde k la venganza
Atento y no i la fama
La b^rbara pujanza
En quien para tu daiio hay tardanza.

Oye, que al cielo toca
Con temeroso son la trompa fiera,
Que en A'frica convoca
£1 Moro i la bandera,
Que al aire desplegada va ligera.

La ianza ya blandea
El A'rabe cruel, 6 hiere el viento
Llamando 4 la pel6a,
Inumerable cuento
De escuadras juntas veo en un memento;

(1) Oyo for Oigo, (obsolete.)
<2) Dende for Sctde, (idem.)

VBBSIFICACION SSPAnOLA. ^1

Cubre la gente el suelo^
Debajo de las velas desparece (I)
La mar, la voz al cielo

Coofusa y varia crece, * ,

£1 polvo roba el dia^ y J« oscurece.

j Ay ! que ya presurosas
Siiben las largas naves, \ Ay ! que tiendeu
Los brazos vigorosos
A^ los remos, y encienden
Las mares espumosas por do hienden.

.£1 Eolo derecho
Hinche la vela en popa, y larga entrada
Por el Herculeo estrecho
Con la punta acerada
£1 gran padre Neptuno da 4 la armada.

j Ay triste ! i Y aun te tiene
£1 mal dulcc regazo j* <i Ni Uamado
Al mal que sobreviene
No acorres ? i ocupado
No V€s ya el puerto 4 Hercules sagrado ?

Acude, corre, vuela
Traspasa el aha sierra, ocupa el llano,
No perdones la espuela,
No des paz 4 la mano^
Men6a fulminando el hierro insano.

j Ay cuanto de fatiga.
Ay cuanto de dolor esti presente
A^ el que viste loriga,
Al infante valiente,
A' hombres y caballos juntamente !

Tt(i, Bitisdivino,
De sangre agena y tuya amancillado,
Dar4s d mar vecino,
] Cuanto yelmo quebrado !
I Cuanto cuerpo de nobles destrozado !

■ " ' ■ ' ' ■ I ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■■

(1) Dupareee for ittapartUy (poet, lie.)

442 SPANISH VfeUmCATION.

Elfuribondo Marte
Cinco laces las haces desordena
Igual 4 cada parte ;
La sesu j Ay ! te condena,
O cara patria, i bdrbara cadena.

Fray Luis dk Leon, Oda.

Fonseca, ya las boras
Del invierno aterido,
Auoque tarde, se fueron

Y su vez agradable permitieron
Al Ceiiro florido.

Ya el verano

Nos desGubre su frente,

De rosas y de purpura cenido :

Remite el aire el desabrido ce8o,

Y el sol libra sus rayos
De las nubes oscuras ;

Y con laces mas vivas y mas paras,
Regalando las nieves,

Al blando pie de los parados fios
Las prisiones de yelo alegre quita,

Y su aotigao correr les solicita..* F. de Rioja*

I Cuan presto se va el placer,

Como despues de acordado,

Da dolor ;

Como i nuestro parecer

Cualquiera tiempo pasado,

Fue mejor ! Jokge MANRiaus.

SECTION IV.

Of blank verseB.

We have just seen that blank verses, sueUoSy that is, which
are not subject to rhyme, are mixed with the44iymed verses;
they are likewise mixed, with the assonant verses, as will be
seen hereafter ; but they may also be used alone without
mixture of any other kind of verse.

Concision in thought, force of expression, and above all
elegance and hu'monyin versification resulting from the sym-
metrical disposition of long and brief syllables ; this is, what
constitutes die beauty of blank verses and gives them a great

VBRSIFICACION BSPAnOLA. 443

analogy with the Greek and Latin verses : thus the Spaniards
without rigorously observing, however, the rhythm of the an-
cients, have imitated it in blank verses wiUi considerable
success.

The hendecasyllable is the verse most used in works in
blank verse ; it is called heroic^ not because it is used in
preference in the heroic poem and other works of a serious
kind ; for, these are composed commonly in octaves or /er-
cetos of rhymed verses, but becaifse it imitates best the har-
mony of the gieat Greek and Latin verses^ and seems there-
fore more proper to be used in the translations of the master
works of antiquity.

In mixing hendecasyllables with broken verses of different
measures, almost all the lyrick combinations of the ancients
may be imitated. In the following ode, the cuarteios of which
are composed of three hendecasyllable verses and a broken
verse of five syllables, the harmony of the sapphick strophe
may be easily discovered, which is one of the most beautiful
of these combinations.

Al Cifiro.

Dulce vecino de la verde selva,
Huesped etemo del abril florido.
Vital aliento de la madre Venus,

C6firo blando, «

Si de mis 4nsias el amor supiste.
Til, que las quejas de mi voz Uevaste,
Oye, no temas, y 4 mi ninfa dile,
Dlle que muero.

Fflis un tiempo mi dolor sabla.
Fills un tiempo mi dolor lloraba,
Qulsome un tiempo ; mas ahora temo,
Temo sus iras.

A si lor Dioses con amor patemo,
Asi los cielos con amor benigno
Nieguen al tiempo que feliz volares,
Nieve i la tierra.

Jamas el peso de la nube parda,
Cuando amanece en la elevada cumbre,
Toque tus hombros, ni su mal granizo

Hiera tus alas. Estbban de Villeoas.

444 SFAMIiH VBKUFIOATJON.

SECTION V.

Of uforki in verse.

The principal works in verse are ; epic poems, didactic
and descriptive ; theatrical pieces, odes, epistles, elegies, ec-
logues, idyls aod fables. As these different kinds of works
are common to the Spanish literature and that of other na-
tions, we shall not consider them. It is true that the Span-
iards deviating sometimes in their composition, and particu-
larly in that of theatrical pieces, from the precepts dictated
by good taste, would seem to require some details ; but these
detaib are foreign to a treatise on versification and would
exceed its limits. It will be sufficient to remark that the
Spanish theatrical pieces are sometimes in prose, and at others
in rhymed or unrhymed veises, and that all kinds of stanzas,
sonnets, romances, &c. are introduced in the plays ; in shorL
that all the other works in verse are generally composed of
stanzas. As to the kind of stanzas which is proper ror every
class of works, we have indicated it as far as possible when
speaking of the different kinds of stanzas ; the choice of
them however beiiig often left to the fancy of the poets, it is
the works of those who have excelled in each class that
ought to be taken as models. We shall only treat here of
the small works in verse which are in some manner peculiar
to the Spanish language, or which at least are subject in that
language to some particular rules, and we skaA pass over
those, such as the sonnets in echos, foiadesy labyrinths, cubic
poems, &c. the whole merit of which consisted in a ridiculous
difficulty, and which good taste has proscribed long ago.

1. Soneioe,

The sonnet, mmeio^ occupies yet in Spanish poetry the
rank which it formerly occupied in French poetry.

The Spaniards have several kinds of sonnets which are ;
the simple sonnet, the double sonnet, the crossed sonnet, the
sonnet with a tail, and the continued sonnet.

The simple sonnet, eoneio simphy is composed of fourteen
hendecasyllable verses, the first eight of which named pie^
are divided in two qmartnnBy and the last six form two ter^
cets which are called tmeUas. Tlie two quatrains are made
upon the same rhymes, and in each of them the ftr^ verse
rhymes with the fourth, and the two intermediary one's

VBRSIFICACION ESPAnOLA. 445

together. The verses of the two tercets rhyme together upon
two or three rhymes^ which must not resemUe those used in
the two quatrains.

The double sonnet, soneto dobladoy is subject to the same
rules as the simple sonnet ; the only difference there is between
the two consists in this, thai, in the double sonnet, broken
verses of seven syllables are interposed among hendecasyllar
bles, namely ; one or several in each quatrain and one alone
in each tercet. Every one of these broken verses having
the same rhyme as the entire verse which precedes it, this
rhyme is double, and is the reason why this sonnet is
named a double sonnet.

The crossed sonnet, «o»e/o terciado, is thus called, because
the rhymes of the two quatrains are crossed ; in other re-
spects it is like the simple sonnet.

The sonnet with a tail, soneto con cola, diifers from the
simple sonnet because there is interposed after the second and
fourth verses of each quatrain, and after each tercet, a broken
verse called cola. The broken verses thus interposed are of
four or five syllables ; those of the quatrains rhyme with each
other, and their rhyme must be different from the rhymes of
\ke quatrains ; those of the tercets rhyme abo with each oth-
er and their rhymes must be different from the rhymes of the
quatrains and tercets.

The continued sonnet, soneto continuoy is similar as to the
quatrains to the simple sonnet or to the crossed sonnet^ but
the rhymes of the tercets are crossed and the same as those
of the quatrains.

The simple sonnet is more used than the others, we shall
give two of them, the French imitations of which are well
known.

Un soneto me manda hacer Violante,

Que en mi vida me he visto en tal aprieto,

Catorce versos dicen que es soneto,

Burla burlando van los tres delante.
Yo pense que no hallara consonante,

Y estoy k la mitad de otro cuarteto,
Mas si me veo en el primer terceto

No hay cosa ^n los cuartetos que me espante.
Por el primer terceto voy entrando,

Y aun parece que entre con pie derecho,
Pues fin con este verso le voy dando.

38

446 SFANISR VER81FICATI0N.r

Ya estoy en el segufido, y aon sospecho
Que estoy los trece versos acabando :
Contad si son catorce, y est^ hecho.

Lope de Vboa.

Soberbias torres, altos edificios,
Que ya cubristes (1) siete escebos montes^

Y ahora en descubiertos borizontes
Ap^nas de haber sido dais indicios :

Griegos liceos, celebres hospicios
De Plutarcos, Hatones, Xenofontes,
Teatro que lidio Rinocerontes,
Olimpias, lustres, banos^ sacrificios ;

I Que fuerzas deshlcieron peregrinas
La mayor pompa de la gloria humana^
Imperios, triunfos, armas y doctrinas ?

j O gran consuelo & mi esperanza vana,

Sue el tiempo que os volvio breves niinas,
o es mucho que acabase mi sotana !

Lope db Veoa.

2. Silvas,

The Spaniards give the name of siha to a piece of hende-
casyllable verses mixed at pleasure with broken verses of se-
ven syllables, in which no order is observed for the distribu-
tion of the rhymes, and in which some blank verses may
even be introduced. There are also silvas'm verses of seven
syllables. The silva is a composition after the manner of
the ode, which b proper for all sorts of subjects.

A la Riqdeza,

jO mal seguro bien ! { O cuidadosa
Hiqueza, y como i sombra de alegrla,

Y de sosiego enganas I

£1 que vela en tu alcance, y se desvia

Del pobre estado, y la quietud dichosa,

Ocio y seguridad pretende en vano.

Pues tras el luengo (2) errar de agua y montanas,

Cuando el metal precioso coja k mano,

No ha de ver sin cuidado abrir el dia.

(1) Cubristes for cubHsteis (poet, lie.)

(2) Lnen^o for largo, (poet, lie.)

VERSIFICACION ESFAflOLA. 447

No Sin causa los dioses te escondieroB
En las entranas de la tierra dura :

LMas que hallo dificil y encubierto
a sedienta codicia ?
Turbo la paz segura,
Con que en la antigua selva flor^cieron
£1 abeto y el pino,

Y trdjolos al puerto

Y por campos de mar les dio camino.
Abriose el mar, y abriose
Altamente la tierra,

Y salistes del centro al aire claro,
Hija de la avaricia,

A' hacer d los hombres cruda guerra.

Saliste tu, y perdiose

La piedad que no habita en pecho avaro.

j A cudntos armo el ore de crueza I

j Y d cudntos ha dejado

£n el ultimo trance ! j o dura suerte !

Pierde su flor la virginal pureza

Por ti y v6se manchado

Con adulterio el lecho no esperado.

Al menos animoso

Para que te posea,

Das ri^ueza, ardimiento licencioso,

Ninguno hay que se vea

Por tl tan abastado y poderoso,

Que carezca de miedo.

^ Que cosa habri de males tan cercada,

rues ora pretendida, ora alcanzada,

Y aun estando en deseos,

Pena ocultan tus ciegos devaneos ?

Pero cdnsome en vano, decir puedo,

Que si sombras de bien en tl se vieran^

Los inmortales Dioses te tuvieran. F. de Rioja^.

3. Romances.

They call romance a piece of verse destined to be set to
music, composed of a series of quatrains, the 1st. and 3d.
verses of which are blank, whilst the 2d. and 4th. rhyme by
assonance. Assonance is the greatest difficulty of romances.

448 SPANISH VERSIFICATION.

because it must be the same in all the quatruns. Romances
are commoDly in versea of redonditla mayor or menor, and
sometimes in bendecasyllable verses^ for which reason they
are then caOed romances herdicos, I'hey are also in verses
of seven syllables, and one of the verses of each quatrain
may be bendecasyllable, this is commonly the fourth ; one or
two broken verses of any kind, particularly of five or four
syllables may likewise be mixed with the verses of redondiUa ;
in short, romances may be composed in quatrains of verses
€9driijulo% and even of arte mayor j pure or mixed ; in a
word, nothing is more varied than the versification of roman-
ces, but it is necessary that the mixture adopted in the first
quatrain be followed in all the others. The romances com-
monly have no burden^ there are however some romances in
which the last or the two last verses of the first quatrain are
repeated after the second, and so oo after each quatrain,
or every other quatrain. The burden sometimes begins only
in the middle of the romance and does not always continue
till the end, neither is it necessary that it should be composed
of the last or of the two last verses ol the 1st. quatrain, it may
be formed of one or two verses which are added.

The romance is the favourite kind of poetry of the Span-
iards, it is really their national lyrick poetry, it equally ac-
commodates itself to the accents of joy and to those of sorrow.
They sing in them alternately the exploits of warriors, love^
adventures, &c. They call ^dcara a romance sang upon a
popular air bearing that name.

De las Africanas playas
Alejado de sus huertas,
Mira el forzado hortelano
De Cspana las altas tierras.
Mira las golosas cabras
£n las peladas laderas,
Que apenas se determina
Si son cabras 6 son penas :
Tiende la envidiosa vista
For las abundosas vegas
Y comarcanas cabanas,
Que casi 4 la par humean.
Miraba por Gibraltar
Las heladas rocas yertaa
Atotadas de las ondas,

tERSIFICACION SSPaKoLA. 449

Y arrancadas de la arena.
M ira el estrecfao cubiertO|

Y las hervieDtes arenas,
Que le pareoe que braman,

Y por mil partes resuenan.
O sagrado mar, le dice,
Haz con mis suspiros treguas ;
f erdoaa si ellos 6 el viento
Son causa de tu tormenta.
P4same en esotra playa ;
Que si en ella me presentas^
Te ofiecere un bianco toro
£1 mejor de mis dehesas.

No quiero que mis deseos

Yayan a tierras agenas ;

Da Tida 4 un nuevo Leandro, /

Que en tus manos se encomienda.

£sto diciendo el forzado,

En las blandas ondas se echa

Con los brazos 4 remar,

Hiende, rompe,rasga y huella. .

Mas all^ 4 la media noche,

Cuando los miembros le aquejan,

Temeroso de su dano

Hablo asi 4 las ondas :

Queridas y amadas ondas ;

Pues determinais que muera^

Dejadme salir amigas^

Que yo os pagare esta deuda. "

Fuele el viento favorable,

Oyo fortuna sus quejas,

Y al nacer el rubio sol,
Hizo pie sobre la arena.
Dio gracias al mar piadoso,
Al viento, norte y estrellas,

Y con ceremonia humilde
Beso y adoro la tierra.

The verses of seven syllables disposed in cuartetoa of
blank and assonant verses as in the romanceM^ and which for
diis reason are often called versos de romance are those gen-
erally usedjn anacreontic odes.

"38*

450 SPANISH VERSirtCATtO?!.

No con mi blanda lire

Serin en ayes tristes

Uoradas las fortunas

De reyes infelices ;

Ni el grito del soldadp

Feroz en crudas lides,

O el trueno con que arroja

La bala el bronce horrible.

Yo tiemblo, y me estremesco:

Que el niimen no permite

A el ri) labio temeroso

Canciones tan sublimes.

Muchacho*soy, y quiero

Decir mas apacibles

Querellas^y gozarme

Con dan^as y convites.

£n ellos cordnado

De rosas y alelles ;

Entre risas y versos

Menudeo los brindis.

£n coros hs mutbachas

Se juntan pof oirme,

Y d punto mis cantata

Con nuevo ardoi* repiten ;

Pues Baco y el de V^nus

Me dieron^ que felice

Celebre en dulcet hinilifys

Sus glorias y ftsdnes. J. M«Ll:»n>Bz Valdes.

Quiero cantiif de Cadittd,
Quiero cantar de Atridas,
! Mas ay ! que de amor solo
Solo canta mi lira.
Renuevo el instrumento^
Las cuerdas mudo 4 prisa^
^ero si yo de Alcides,
Ella de amor suspira.
Pues. heroes valientes,
Quedios desde este dia ;
Porque ya de amor solo,
Solo canta mi lira.

E. DE ViLLE GA^, tmitaci&n dt Anatreonie.

il) A el for ai, (poet, lie.)

VEBSIFKJACION B8PA&0LA. 451

Vuelve, mi dulce lira, n

Vuelve u tu estilo humjllde

Y deja a los Homeros,
Cantar 4 los Aqiitles.
Canta tu la cabafia
Con toDos pastoriles,

Y los epicos metros

A Yirgttio no envidies.
No esperefi en la corte
Gozar dias felices,

Y vdelvete i, la aldea,
Que tu presencia pide.
Ya te aguardan zagales
Que con flores se visten

Y adoraan sus cabezas

Y cuellos juveniles.
Ya te esperan pastores
Que deseosos viven

De escuchar tus canciones
Que con gusto repiten.

Y para que sus voces
A los ecos admiren,

Y repitan tus versos
Los melodiosos cisnes ;
Vuelve ; mi dulce lira,
Vuelve, k tu tono humilde ;

Y deja k los Homeros

Cantar i, los Aquiles. J. Cadalso.

4. Endeehas.

The endeehas are elegies or funeral songs in praise of the
dead, they are a kind of romance commonly in verses of sev-
en syllables. The endeehaSj in which the last verse of each
9«a/ratfi is a hendecasyllable, are called endeehas reaka;
there are also rhymed endeehas.

5. SeguidiUas,

The segmdiUa is composed ti a series of quatrains in
crossed verses of seven and five syllables. The seguidilla
has a great resemblance with the romanee; the only differ-
ence existing, is that the couplets of the seguidiUa being com^
monly detached, the assonance may change at every couplet.

452 SPANISH VSBSIFICATION.

There is a kind of aeguidilla called chamberga^ frqpi the
name of the air upon which it is sung, each quatrain of
which is followed by six verses alternately of three and seven
syllables^ rhyming by assonance two by two, that is, every
verse of three syllables rhymes with the verse of seven
which immediately follows it.

6. Letrittaa.

The letriUa is a kind of lyric poetry of a simple and
graceful style. It is commonly composed of a series of
quatrains in verses of six or eight syllables. The letriUa
has a great resemblance with the romance ; but it is shorter.
The 1st and the 3d. verse of each quaJtrain are blank
or rhymed, the 2d. and the 4th are assonants; all
the verses may nevertheless be also rhymed. It is requisite,
as in romances^ that the assonance be the same in all the
quatrains. There are some letrillas which have a burden^
others have none, sometimes the burden forms a part of the
quatrain, sometimes it is added.

No alma primavera
Bella y apacible
O el dulce Favonio
Que 4mbares respire ;
No rosada Aurora
Tras la noche triste,
Ni el pincel que en florear
Bello se matlce ;
No nube que Febo
Su pabellon pinte,
O &lamo que abrace
, Dos emulas vides ;
No fuente que perlas
A cien caiios fie,
Ni lirio entre rosas,
Clavel en jazmines ;
Al romper el dia
Son tan apacibles
. Como el pastorcillo
Que en mi pecho vive. Yolesias?

VERSIFICACION BSPAHOLA. 45^

De este modo ponderaba
Un inocente pastor
A la ninfa a quien amaba
La eficacia de su amor.

^Ves cuantas tlores al prado
La primayera presto?
Pues mira, dueno adorado,
Mag veces te quiero yo.

I Yes cuanta arena dorada
Tajo en sus aguas llevo ?
Pues mira^ Fills amada,
Mas veces te quiero yo.

^ Yes al salir de la aurora
Cu&nta avecilla canto ?
Pues niira, hermosa pastora,
Mas reces te quiero yo.

I Yes ia nieve derretida
Cuanto arroyuelo formo ?
Pues mira^ bien de mi vida^
Mas veces te quiero yo.

I Yes cu^Dta abeja industriosa
De esa colmena salio ?
Pues mira^ ingrata y hermosa^
Mas veces te quiero yo.

I Yes cuantas gracias la mano
De las deidades te dio I
Pues mira^ dueno tirano^
Mas veces te quiero yo. J. Cadalso.

7. Liras,

The lira is a small piece of hendecasyllable verses mixed
with broken verses, composed to be sung with the accompa-
niment of a guitar or lyre. The liras are composed of five
or six verses. In the liras of five verses, the four first are
broken verses of seven syllables and the fifth is a hendeca-
syllable; the 1st. verse rhymes with the 3d., the 2d. 4th.
and 5th. rhyme together. In the liras of six verses, the odd
verses are broken verses of seven syllables and the others
are hendecasyllables ; the rhymes of the four first verses are
crossed, aQd the two last verses rhyme together. There are

4M SPAKMtt VEE8IFICATI0N.

abo Ura» of six verses the 1st 2d. 4tfa. aod 5tb. of which are
broken verses of seven syllables, the 3d. a broken verse of
two syllables and the Gth. a hendecasyUable, then the 1st.
verse rhymes with the 4th.y the :zd, with the 3d. and the
Mh. with the 6th.

8. Condones,

The cancion is a kind of lyric poetry, which is composed
of several ettanzas or esianciaSj in hendecasyliable verses
mixed with broken verses of seven syllables. The cancion
has not commonly more than from ten to twelve stanzas, and
is often terminate by a shorter stanza called remote or
represa. The mixture of rhymes as well as that of entire
and broken verses is arbitrary, it varies even sometimes from
one stanza to the other, but in general ^e mixture adopted
in the 1st stanza is followed in all the others. The mixture
of the verses and rhymes is not the same in the remote as in
the other stanzas, it is likewise arbitrary.

O libertad preciosa,
No comparada al oro,
Ni al bien mayor de la espaciosa tierra,
Mas rica y mas gozosa
Que el precioso tesoro
Que el mar del Sur entre su nicar ciern^
Con armas, sangre y guerra,
Con las vidas y famas,
Conquistado en el mundo,
Paz dulce, amor profundo,
Que el mal apartas y 4 tu bien nos llamas,
En ti solo se anida
Oro, tesoro, paz, bien, gloria y vida.

Cuando de las humanas
Tinieblas vi del cielo
La luz, principio de mis dulces dias,
Aquellas tres hermanas,
Que nuestro humano velo
Tejiendo He van por inciertas v?as,
Las duras penas mias
Troc^ron en la gloria,
Que en libertad poseo
Con siempre igual deseo ;
Donde ver4 por mi dichosa his^oria^

VERSIFICACtON ESPAHOLA. 455

Quien mas leyere en ella,

Que es dulce libertad 1(^ menos della.(l)

Yo pues, senor, exento
De esta montana y prado,
Gozo la gloria y libertad que tengo ;
Soberbio pensamiento
Jamas ha derribado

La vida faumildey pobre que entretengo ;
Cuando 4 las manos vengo
Con el muchacho ciego,
Haciendo rostro embisto,
Venzo, triuDfo y resisto
La flecha, el arco, la ponzona, el fuego,

Y con libre aldedrlo

Lloro el ageno mal, y espanto el mio«

Cuando la aurora bana
Con helado rocio,

De aljofar celestial el monte y prado^
Salgo de mi cabana
Riberas deste (2) rio
A dar el nuevo pasto k mi ganado :

Y cuando el sol dorado
Muestra sus fuerzas graves,
Al sueno el pecho inclino
Debajo un sauce 6 pino,
Oyendo el son de las parleras aves,
O ya gozando el aura,

Donde el perdido aliento se restaura*

Cuando la noche oscura
Con su estrellado manto
£i claro dia en su tiniebla encierra,

Y suena en la espesura
£1 tenebroso canto

De los nocturnes hijos de la tierra,
Ai pie de aquesta sierra
Con riisticas palabras
Mi ganadillo cuento,

Y el corazon contento

Del gobierno de ovejas y de cabras,

La temerosa cuenta

Del cuidadoso rey me representa.

(1) Delia for de ella, (poet, lie.)

(2) DeHe for de ttle, (poet. He.)

456 SrAKISH VBRIIFICATION.

Acpii la verde pera
Con la mansana hermoea
De goalda y roja sangre matizada,

Y de color de cera.
La cermefia oloroga

Tengo, y la endrina de color morada :
Aqui de la enramada
Parra que el olmo enlasa
Melosas ubas cojo,

Y en cantidad recojo,

Al tiempo que las ramas desenlaza

El caluroso estio,

Membrillos que coronan este no.

No me da descontento
£1 hibito costoso

Que de lascivo el pecho noble in&ma :
£s mi dulce sustento
Del campo generoso
Estas silvestres frutas que derrama :
Mi regalada cama
De blandas pieles y hojas,
Que algun rey la envidiira,

Y de ti, fuente clara,

Que buUendo el arena y agua arrc^as,

Estos cristales puros^

Sustentos pobres, pero bien seguros.

Estese el cortesano
Procurando k su gusto
La blanda cama y el mejor sustento,
Bese la ingrata mano
Del poderoso injusto,
Formando torres de esperanza al viento ;
Viva y muera sediento
Per el honroso oficio,

Y goce yo del suelo

Al aire, al sol, al hielo

Ocupado en mi rustico ejercicio,

Que mas vale pobreza

En paz, que en sierra mlsera riqueza.

Ni temo al poderoso,
Ni al rico lisongeo,
Ni soy camal«on del que gobiema :
Ni me tiene envidioso

VERSIFICACION ESFAUOLA. 457

La ambicion y deseo

De agena gloria^ ui de fama eterna :

Carne sabrosa y tierna.

Vino aromatjzado,

Pan bianco de aquel dia^

En prado^ en fuente fria,

ilalla un pastor con hambre fatigado.

Que el grande y el pequeno

Somos iguales lo que dura el sueno. Lope de Vega.

9. Balata.

The ballad, balata^ is a small piece of verse which is now
but little in use, its name comes from this, that it was origin-
ally sung while dancing. The ballad is composed in pure
hendecasyllable verses, or mixed with broken verses of seven
syllables, and it is divided in four parts, the 1st of which is
called represa (repetition,) because it is wholly or partly re-
peated at the end of the ballad ; the 2d. primera mudanza
(1st. change,) the 3d. segunda mudanza (2d. change) be-
cause the tone of the represa is changed in it, and the 4th.
vueUa (return,) because they return to the 1st. tone. The
represa and vuelta are commonly composed of three or four
verses, and each mudanza almost always has one verse less.

C Tras su manada Elisio lamentando
Represa, < Mil voces este verso repetia

Q ; Ay ! quien se viera cual se vio algun dia !

l,a Mu' 5 Vlme yo tan senor de mi fortuna,
danza. ( Tan libre de dolor, tan prosperado,

2.a Mu' ^ Que no teml jamas mudanza alguna
danza, ^ De aquel primero y venturoso estado :

C Ya toda mi ventura se ha trocado ;
Vuelta, < No soy ni ya sere quien ser solia :

^ j Ay ! quien s6 viera cual se vio algun dia !

10. ViUancicos.

The vilUmcico (country lay) has a great relation to the
ballad, and is likewise made for singing. It begins with a
cabezoy which is repeated as the burden of the ballad. The
cabezGy is a kind of introduction containing a sentence of two,
three or four verses. It is followed by a stajiza of six verses
39

458 SPANISH VEmSiriCATlOX.

caOedf^i^) which is its comment. The two first pi69 form
the Ist wtfdSoriizo, the two following the 2d. mudanzaj and the
two last the vueUaf after which the last or the two last of the
cabeza are repeated. The villancieos are composed in ver-
ses of pore redondiUa mayor or menor^ or mixed with broken
yftnoB, The two following viHanoicot will senre as exam-
ples for the mixture ci the verses and rhymes*

C En k) prospero y adverso
Cabeza, < Lo qoe solo satisface,

(^ £s pensar que Dies lo hace.

- ifci-fc^Mi 5 Q"® "*® ^^^^ ^ ^*j® *^ mundo,
iM mwmmza. ^ q ^^^ ^^ p^^^^ fortuna

%a Mudmnza. \ f^'^t^T t ^f ^^
( O me bunda hasta el profuado :

Vtt^ ^ ^ raaon en que me Ainde

^ Pj^j^ qjj^ ^^^ j^ abrace,

Jtepeltcton. £s saber que Dies lo hace.

/Cuando el corazon se ahrasa,
>j^^ \ Echaluego

^^ 'S Por las ventanas de casa

^ Vivo fuego.

LaMudanza, ^^'^y^t.!^'^
^ Jill amor

^ Mjr J ^ Aunque mas quiera encubrir
2m Mudanxa. J "^^ ^^^^^

VneUa. | <^« ^^ 't.^ " ' "'^'

B,..^ . .„ S Pot ks Tentanas de casa
Bepeltcitm. ^ Vivo fuego.

l.aM«da««,.^Su,pb«^yW««ran..

rr is^ S Qi>e el alma hecha una brasa

^'^'^ \ EnTia teego

Ti^^s,:^ 5 P*' J"* ventanas de easa

A

TABLE OF CONTENTS-

Common Spanish Ahbreviaiiona - - 9

Introduction - - - - - 13

CHAPTER I.
OF PRONUNCIATION AND ORTH06]iAPBT«

Of words considered ns Sounds - - 14

w the prowunciaiion of VoweU - - 15

Of Dipththongs - - - - 16

Of Triphthongs - ... . ib.

Of the pronunciation of Consonants ^ - 17

Observations upon Orthographjf - - 19

SjUabical Table .... 20

Of the Accent . - ... 21

OfftmetuaUon .... 24

CHiUPTER II.

OF WORDS.

Of words considered as signs of our thotights - 24

CHAPTER III.
OF THE ARTICLS.

Of the Article - - - - 25

Declension of the Articles - - - 26

Of the use rf the Articles ... 27

CHAPTER IV,

OF NOUNS.

Of Nouns ----- 29

Of the Substantive .... ij,.

Of Genders ----- 30

Of Numbers ----- ib.

Of the formation of the plural of Nouns - 31

Declension of Nouns - - . - ib*

Declension (f a neuter Noun - - - 3S

Of proper Nouns - - - - 34

4ft) CONTENTS.

Declension of the Jirtick un, una^ a or an - 35
General observations upon the genders - ^ 36
Of the gender of Nouns considered in their terminations 37
Substantives of both genders - - - ib.
Of Nouns Adjective . - - - 38
Formation of the feminine of Nouns Adjective - ib.
Colhcaiion and agreement of the Adjective with the Sub-
stantive ..... ib.
Of Nouns diminutive and augmentative - - 39
Degrees of comparison in Adjectives . . 40
Of comparatives in relation to Adjectives - ib.
Comparative of superiority - - - 41
Of comparatives in relcUion to Substantives, Verbs and

Adverbs - . - . - ib.

Comparative of inferiority - - - ib.

Comparative of equality ... 42

Of Superlatives .... 43
Observations upon the Comparatives and Superlatives 44

Of numereU A^ectives and Substantives of number 45
Adjectives whichj joined to a Substantive, lose one or

more letters - . - - - 48

CHAPTER V.

09 PRONOUNS.

Declension of personal Pronouns - - 51

Pronoun rejiective - - - - 54

Table of Pronouns as regimen or objective - 54

Construction of Pronouns as regimen or objective 55

Of Pronouns possessive ... 56

Declension of Pronouns possessive - - 57

Declension of Pronouns possessive relative - 59

Of Pronouns demonstrative - - - 61

Of Pronouns relative .... 62

Of Pronouns interrogative - - - 64

Of Pronouns indefnite - - - ib.

Observations upon the indefinite Pronouns - 65

CHAPTER VI.

OP VERBS.

Of Conjugations - - - - 68

Of Modes - - . • . ib.

Of Tenses ,, - . . - 69

CONTENTS. 461

W the Tenses of the Infinitive - - - 70

verbs tohich have two Purticipks pctst - - TI

<y the Tenses of the Indicative - - 7%

Of the Future Tenses ... - 75

Ruksfor using the Future Conjunctive - 76

Of the Conditional ... - 77

Rules for using the Conditional Tenses - - ib.

Use of the Imperative - - - - 80

Use of the Subjunctive - - - - ib.

Ruksfor using the Tenses of the Sul^unctive mode ib.

Of the Persons and Numbers of Verbs - - Bl

Conjugations - - - - - 82

Conjugation of the AuociHary Verb Haber - ib.

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Tener - 86

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs Ser and Estar 91

Rules for using Ser and Estar - - - 95
«i9 general Scheme of the termination of Regular Verbs 96

Paradigms of the three Conjugations 97

First Conjugation in Ar - - - ib.

Second Conjugation in Er - - - 101

Third Corrugation in Ir - - - 105

Paradigm of Passive Verbs - - - 110

Paradigm of Neuter Verbs - - - 114

Paradigm of Reflective and Reciprocal Verbs - 117

Paradigm of Impersonal Verbs - - - 119
Last and Cotyugation of the Irregular Verbs arranged

in alphabetical order - - - 121
Important observations '- - - - ib.
Agreement of verbs with their Sul^ect - - 151
<>l^ the Regimen of Verbs - - - 153
Of the Verb as a Regimen - - - ib.
Of the Noun Substantive as Regimen of the Verb 154
Of Pronouns as Regimen of Verbs • - ib.
Observations upon Verbs ... 155
Of the agreement of the Participle past teith the Sub-
ject and with its Regimen - - ' 156

CHAPTER VII.

. OF ADVERBS.

Of Adverbs - - - - - 157
Observations upon jamas, Qunca, no, mas, m6no3, muy 159
59*

462 CONTENTS.

CHAPTER VIU.
OF PBEPOSITIONS.

Of Prepagitions -* - - - i60

ObiervaiioHs upon paraoni^por - - ib.

FrepoBiiunu which govern the Genitive - j62

PrepositioM which govern the Dative - - ib.

Table of Prepontione published by the Royal Academy 163

CHAPTER IX.

OP CONJUNCTIONS.

Of Conjunctions - - - - 188

Of the Conjunctions that govern the Subjunctive 194

CHAPTER X.
OF INTERJECTIONS.

Of Interjections ... - 194

Names of Countries^ Islands j Capes and Seas - 195

Names of CitieSy Mountains and Rivers - 198

Christian Namesmost used in Spain - - 199

SPANISH EXERCISES.

Upon the rules of the Grammar and their application,
with retnarks and observations.

Exercise I. Upon the Articles - - 203

„ II. Upon the Articles - - 204

,, III. Vpon the gender and number of Nouns 20b
jy IV. Upon the coUocation of Adjectives and
their agreement with the Substantives - 207

Exercise V. Upon the partitive Article - 208

„ VI. Upon Diminutive and Augmentative
Nouns and Degrees of Comparison - - 209

Exercise VII. Upon the preceding Rules - 210

„ VIII. Continuation of the degrees of Com-
parison - - - - - 211
Exercise IX. Upon observations on the Compara-
tives and Superlatives - - - 212
tlxEacisE X. Upon the Numeral Adjectives - 214

CONTENTS. 463

Exercise XI. Continuation of the same subject 215

„ Xn. Upon the Pronouns personal and pos-
sessive^ and on the Auxiliary Verbs ser and estar, to
. be; hahex andXeneTytohave; Infinitive and Indicor

tive present - - - - - 217

Exercise XTII. Upon the Imperfect and Preterites 219
„ XIV. Upon the Pluperfect and Futures of
the Indicative ... - 220

Exercise XV. Upon the Futures Conjunctive and

Conditionals simple - - - - 221

Exercise XVI. Upon the Conditionals past - 222

„ XVII. Upon the Imperative; Subjunctive

Present and Imperfect - - - 224

Exercise XVm. Upon the Preterite and Pluperfect 225

„ XIX. Upon the Regular Verbs - 226

„ XX. Upon the same subject - 227

„ XXI. Upon the same subject - 229

yj XXII. Upon the same subject - 230

„ XXIII. Upon the preceding Rules - 232

„ XXIV. Upon the preceding Rules - 233

„ XXV. Upon the preceding Rules - 235

„ XXVI. Upon the preceding Rules - 236

„ XXV II. Upon the preceding Rules - 237

„ XXVIII. Upon the preceding Rules 238

^ XXIX. Upon Pronouns - - 240

„ XXX. Upon the preceding Rules - 241

„ XXXI. Upon the preceding Rules - 242

„ XXXII. Upon the Pronouns Demonstrative ^

Relaiivey Interrogative and Indefinite - 243

Exercise XXXIII. Upon the preceding Rules 244

„ XXXIV. Upon the preceding Pronouns 245

„ XXXV. Upon the preceding Rules 246

Observations upon the use ofxm.j \ms,, usted, ustedes,

yo«, ^c. - - - - - 248

Exercise XXXVI. Upon the Neuter, Reflective, Re-
ciprocal and Impersonal Verbs - - 250
Exercise XXXVII. Upon the preceding, and the Ir-

regular Verbs - - - - 251

Exercise XXXVIII. Upon the preceding Rules 25'

„ XXXIX. Upon the agreement of Verbs
with their subject, See. - - - 2

Exercise XL. Upon the agreement of the Participle
past unth the subject, 8fc. -

464

coimiiTs.

ExBSCifl XLI. Qmii the Adoerk9 ami PrepotUiomt 256
^ XLIL Upon the Omjuneiunu - 257

^ XLUL Upon thtt preceding and hUerfectiom 359
„ XLIV. Upon the preceding Ridee - 260

„ XLV. l^<Ae|irececiui^Atife« - 26l

VOCABULARY.

The parte of the kiman

body
The interior parte of the

kmnanhody
The five eeneee
Agee

Qualitiee of the body
Defects in the kuman hodjf

Virtves and mceSj good
and bad quaUtiee of men

Of eating and drinking

Ofchthee

Of idem for women

Beaets

Creatures that creep on the

earth
Amphibious creatures
Insects
Birds

Farts of a bird
Fishes

Parts of a fish
Trees
Shrubs
Fruits

Com and its parts
Roots, plants and herbs
Flowers
Colours

Parts of a kingdom
Parts of a city

VOCABULARIO.

Las partes del cuerpo hii-

mano 264
Partes iaterioresdel cuerpo

humaDo 265

Los ciaco sentidos 266

Edddes ib.

Calidades del cuerpo ib.
Defectos del cuerpo hu-

mauo ib.
Virtudes y vicios, buenas y
males calidades de los

hombres ib.

Del comer y beber 268

De los vestidos 270

De idem para mugeres 271

Bestias 272

Animales que se arrastran 274

Animales anf ibios ib.

Sabandijas 275

Aves ib.

Partes de una Ave 276

Peces 277

Partes de un pes ib*

A^rboles ib.

Matas 278

Frutas ib.

Trigos y sus partes 279

Ralcesy plantas e yerbas 280

Flores 282

Colores ib.

Partes de un reino ib.

Partes de una ciudad 283

CONTENTS.

465

Of the inhabitants of

cities
Of a house and all things

belonging to it
Of country affairs
Of the church and things

belonging to it
Things relating to war

Commercial terms and

phrases
Vessels and navigation

The year anditsparts, ^c.
The months
The days of the week
The holidays of the year
Winds

Table of the current money
in Spain

De los moradores de una

ciudad 283

De una casa y todo lo per-

teneciente k ella 285

De las cosas del campo 28S
De la Iglesia y cosas per-

tenecientes k ella 290

Cosas pertenecientes k la

guerra 291

Voces mercantiles y frases 294

Embarcaciones y navega-

cion 299

El aiio y sus partes, ^c. " 301
Los meses ib.

Los dias de la semana ib.

Dias de fiesta del ano ib,

Vientos 302

Tabla de las monedas de
Espana ib«

FAMILIAR PHRASES. FRASES, FAMILIARES.

I. Acerca de pedir algo
IL Espresio7ies tiemas
III. Acerca de agradecer^

cumplimentar y mostrar

amistad
rV, Acerca de afirmarj ne-

gar^ consentirj Sfc,

V. Acerca de consultar 6
considerar

VI. Del comer y del beber

VII. Del irj vetiir, mo-
versey Sfc,

VIII. Del hablary decir^
obrarj Sfc.

IX. Deloir^ escucharySfc.

X. Del entender y com--
prender

XI. Acerca de preguntar

About asking any thing 303

Expressions of kindness 304

Of thanking, compliment-
ing and showing kind-
ness ib.

Of affirming, denying, con-
senting, &c. 306

Of consulting or consid-
ering 307

Of eating and drinking ib.

Of going, coming, mov-
ing, &c. 308

Of speaking, saying, act-
ing, &c. 309

Of hearing, listening, &c. 310

Of understanding and com-
prehending 311

About asking a question ib.

466

eONTBNTS.

Xn. Acerea de $aber

XIII. Deleonocerjobndar
ff acardarte

XIV. De fo edad, de hi
vidoj de la nmerte, ^e,

XV. De tina ay a y 9u Se-
Horita

XVI. Delpasio
XVn. Deltiempo
XVm. Deiahora

XIX. De loi eeiadanee
del alio

XX. Delmidadlaeecuela
XXL En la eecuOa

Of knowing or faaTing a
knowledge of things 312

Of knowing or being ac-
quainted with persons,
forgetting and remem-
bering ib.

Of age, life, death, &c. 313

Of a governess and her

yonng lady 314

Of walking - 318

Of the weather 321

Of the time of day 323

Of the seasons of the year 324

Of going to school 326

In the school ib.

FJUmiSR DIALOGUES,

Didiego

I. Acerea de eab§dar i tn-

format9e de la sakui de

aiguno
n. Aeerea del hablar Es-

pafkoi

III. Para hablar Ingles

IV. Delhacer una visita
por la manana

V. Del almorzar

VI. A'ntes de la comida

VII. Comiendo

VIII. Para comprar librae

IX. Del aquilar un aiqja'
miento

X. Del informarse de ai-
guno

XI. Delpartir

XII. De noticias

XIII. Enire dos amigos

XIV. Del escribir una
carta

DIAa:.0G09 FAMILIAR£S.

Of saluting and inquiring
after any one's health 328

Of speaking Spanish 331

To speak English SSS

Of making a morning visit 338

Of breakfasting 339

Before dinner 340

At dinner 341

To buy books 345

Of hiring a lodging 347

Of inquiring after one 350

Of departing 353

Of news 354

Between two friends 357

Of writing a letter 35$

CONTENTS.

467

Didiogo

XV. Del trocar

XVI. De loejuegosengC'
nercU;y primero de il de
los dados

XVII. Deljugar of agi-
drez

XVin. Deljugttr dhtpe-

lota
XIX.* De las diversiones

del eampOy particular'

mente de la eaza y de

la pesca *

XX. Del ir d la comedia

XXI. Delvestirse
XXU. Del hablar d un

mozo de caballos

XX I I I. De ir d un viage

XXIV. Eft una posada

XXV. Para hablar con los
empkados en unaAduana

XXVI. Pctra una persona
estraviada en una ciudad

XXVII. Un militar veneer
dor J Sfc.

Of exchanging 360

Of gaming in general ; and
&st of that of dice 36l

Of playing at chess 363

Of playing at tennis 365

Of country sports, especial-
ly of hunting ai^d fishing 366

Of going to the play 668

Of dressing oneself 370^

Of speaking to a groom or

hostler 372

Of going a journey 373

In an inn 37^

To speak with the officers

in a Custom-house 377

For a person who has lost

his way in a city 378

A victorious military man,

&c. 379

Fdbulas 381

Epitome de la Mstoria de Espana - - 385

Chistes 387

Correspondencia Mercantil . - - 389

Documentos Mercantiles . - - 392

Cor^iu cri/tco^y por Cadalso - - - 400

Cartas FamiKares^ por Isla - - - 405

Rejlexiones Morales, por Feijoo, Montengon, &c« 415

Refranes Espanoles - - - - 420

Versifieac^'on Espanola . . - 421

46$

E&RATA.

ERRATA.

Fi»t.

Lbu.

Errwn.

C«rreettMu.

M

13

adplicacum.

apUcacion.

•7

6

amaddod.

amado.

»7

6

irOM,

irias.

185

90

anduviere, irr.

136

27

pret. def. irgui6,

* tr^t^, irr.

137
160

9

8,»

yefT«»,
ItganiemerUe,

ycrrao.
clcgantemente

163
204

37
note

r*""-

207

8

pasioB, digoo.

214

21

dearedatOf

decretado.

216

Bote2.

J,

r.

217

9

t€*

te<

264

note 1.

Xf.

LI.

338

24

polido.

podido.

841

laitUne

ia delMijo,

la de debajo.

846

23

UuniiOf

tamano.

384

7

dwrdf

dRTk.

400

13

q^tdo,

Quedo.

416

9

Utj

un.

419

83

put,

que.

441

17

dvdcc,

dulce.

FINIS.

This book should be returned to
the laibrary on or before the last date
stamped below.

A fine of five cents a day is incurred
by retaining it beyond the specified
time.

Please return promptly.